Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout98-50 THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON BY-LAW NUMBER 98- 50 Being a By-law to authorize a contract between the Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington and Gerr Construction Limited, Bowmanville, Ontario, for the construction of the Older Adults Centre. THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON HEREBY ENACTS AS FOLLOWS: 1. THAT the Mayor and Clerk are hereby authorized to execute, on behalf of the Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington, and seal with the Corporation Seal, a Contract between Gerr Construction Limited and said Corporation; and 2. THAT this agreement attached hereto as Schedule "A" form part of this By-law. By-law read a first and second time this 9 day of March, 1998. By-law read a third time and finally passed this 9 day of March, 1998. A; Mayor r Clt' �77 BARRY • BRYAN ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED ARCHITECT • ENGINEER • PROJECT MANAGERS 11 Stanley Court, Whitby, Ontario UN 8P9 Tel: (905) 666-5252 • Tor: (905) 427-4495 • Fax: (905) 666-5256 E-mail: bba @idirect.com OLDER ADULT COMMUNITY CENTRE ' MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON 26 BEECH AVENUE, BOWMANVILLE TENDER NO. CL 98-1 ' ARCHITECT AND STRUCTURAL ENGINEER BARRY-BRYAN ASSOCIATES(1991)LIMITED 11 Stanley Court, Unit 1 ' Whitby, Ontario L1 N 8P9 Tel: (905)666-5252 Tor: (905)427-4495 Fax: (905)666-5256 E-mail: bba@idirect.com MECHANICAL ENGINEER OTONABEE TECHNICAL SERVICES LTD. 1 294 Rink Street, P.O. Box 1941 Peterborough, Ontario K9J 7X7 Tel: (705)745-2831 Fax: (705)741-1526 ' E-mail: otseng @cycor.ca ELECTRICAL ENGINEER KIRKLAND ENGINEERING 294 Rink Street, P.O. Box 1941 Peterborough, Ontario K9J 7X7 ' Tel: (705)745-2831 Fax: (705)741-1526 E-mail: kirkland @peterboro.net ' Project No. 97175 January 1998 7175-TPCS.wpd Standard construction document CCDC Stipulated price Project: Older Adult Community Centre Municipality of Clarington Canadian construction documents committee Standard Construction Document-CCDC 2- 1994 , TABLE OF CONTENTS AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR PART 4 ALLOWANCES ' A-1 The Work GC 4.1 Cash Allowances A-2 Agreements and Amendments GC 4.2 Contingency Allowance A-3 Contract Documents ' A-4 Contract Price PART 5 PAYMENT A-5 Payment GC 5.1 Financing Information Required of the Owner A-6 Receipt of and Addresses for Notices GC 5.2 Applications for Progress Payment A-7 Language of the Contract GC 5.3 Progress Payment , A-8 Succession GC 5.4 Substantial Performance of the Work GC 5.5 Payment of Holdback upon Substantial Performance of the Work DEFINITIONS GC 5.6 Progressive Release of Holdback , 1. Contract GC 5.7 Final Payment 2. Contract Documents GC 5.8 Withholding of Payment 3. Owner GC 5.9 Non-conforming Work 4. Contractor ' 5. Subcontractor PART 6 CHANGES IN THE WORK 6. Supplier GC 6.1 Changes 7. Consultant GC 6.2 Change Order 8. Project GC 6.3 Change Directive ' 9. Work GC 6.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions 10. Place of the Work GC 6.5 Delays 11. Product 12. Provide PART 7 DEFAULT NOTICE 13. Contract Price GC 7.1 Owner's Right to Perform the Work,Stop the Work,or ' 14. Contract Time Terminate the Contract 15. Working Day GC 7.2 Contractor's Right to Stop the Work or Terminate the 16. Supplemental Instruction Contract 17. Change Order ' 18. Change Directive PART 8 DISPUTE RESOLUTION 19. Substantial Performance of the Work GC 8.1 Authority of the Consultant 20. Value Added Taxes GC 8.2 Negotiation,Mediation,and Arbitration ' GC 8.3 Retention of Rights GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE STIPULATED PART 9 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY PRICE CONTRACT GC 9.1 Protection of Work and Property ' GC 9.2 Damages and Mutual Responsibility PART 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS GC 9.3 Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Materials GC 1.1 Contract Documents GC 1.2 Law of the Contract PART 10 GOVERNING REGULATIONS ' GC 1.3 Rights and Remedies GC 10.1 Taxes and Duties GC 1.4 Assignment GC 10.2 Laws,Notices,Permits,and Fees GC 10.3 Patent Fees PART 2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT GC 10.4 Workers' Compensation GC 2.1 Authority of the Consultant ' GC 2.2 Role of the Consultant PART 11 INSURANCE-BONDS GC 2.3 Review and Inspection of the Work GC 11.1 Insurance GC 2.4 Defective Work GC 11.2 Bonds PART 3 EXECUTION OF THE WORK PART 12 INDEMNIFICATION-WAIVER-WARRANTY ' GC 3.1 Control of the Work GC 12.1 Indemnification GC 3.2 Construction by Owner or Other Contractors GC 12.2 Waiver of Claims GC 3.3 Temporary Supports,Structures,and Facilities GC 12.3 Warranty ' GC 3.4 Document Review GC 3.5 Construction Schedule GC 3.6 Construction Safety GC 3.7 Supervisor ' GC 3.8 Subcontractors and Suppliers GC 3.9 Labour and Products GC 3.10 Documents at the Site GC 3.11 Shop Drawings ' GC 3.12 Use of the Work CCDC Copyright 1994 GC 3.13 Cutting and Remedial Work Must not be copied in whole or in part without the written permission GC 3.14 Cleanup of the CCDC. Standard Construction Document-CCDC 2- 1994 AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR ' For use when a stipulated price is the basis of payment. This Agreement made on the 16 day of March ' in the year______nineteen ninety eight _by and between ' Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington ' hereinafter called the "Owner" and ' Gerr Construction Limited ---------------- — -------- — ------------------- hereinafter called the "Contractor" ' The Owner and the Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE A-1 THE WORK ' The Contractor shall: 1.1 perform the Work required by the Contract Documents for Older Adult Community Centre, ' Municipality of Clarington _ insert above the title of the Work ' located at 26 Beech Avenue, Bowmanville insert above the Place of the Work ' which have been signed by the parties, and for which Barry o Bryan Associates (1991) Limited ' insert above the name of the Consultant is acting as and is hereinafter called the "Consultant"and 1.2 do and fulfill everything indicated by this Agreement, and ' 1.3 commence the Work by the 16 day of March in the year 1998 ' and, subject to adjustment in Contract Time as provided for in the Contract Documents, attain Substantial Performance of the Work, by the 7th day of September in the year 19 9 8 t ' CCDC 2- 1994 File 00502 1 1 ARTICLE A-2 AGREEMENTS AND AMENDMENTS 2.1 The Contract supersedes all prior negotiations,representations,or agreements,either written or oral,relating in any manner to the Work,including the bidding documents that are not expressly listed in Article A-3 of the Agreement- CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. ' 2.2 The Contract may be amended only as provided in the Contract Documents. ARTICLE A-3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ' 3.1 The following are the Contract Documents referred to in Article A-1 of the Agreement- THE WORK: ' • Agreement Between Owner and Contractor • Definitions • The General Conditions of the Stipulated Price Contract ' 3.2 Tender Form submitted by Gerr Construction Limited dated February 4, 1998. 21 pages ' 3.3 Post Tender Addendum No. 1 submitted by Gerr Construction Limited dated February 12, 1998. 9 pages 3.4 Post Tender Addendum No. 2 submitted by Gerr Construction Limited ' dated February 19, 1998. 2 pages 3.5 Post Tender Addendum No. 3 submitted by Gerr Construction Limited ' dated March 4, 1998. 5 pages 3.6 Appendix 'A' - Tender Summary Breakdown of Contract Price dated March 5, 1998. 2 pages ' 3.7 Certificate of Insurance from H.G. Roughley Limited dated March 16, 1998. 2 pages 3.8 Labour and Material Payment Bond from Zurich Insurance Company of ' Canada, dated March 16, 1998. 3 pages 3.9 Performance Bond from Zurich Insurance Company of Canada, dated ' March 16, 1998. 2 pages 3.10 Workplace Safety & Insurance Bond Clearance Certificate dated March 9, 1998. 1 page ' 3.11 Addendum No. 1, dated January 15, 1998. 1 page 3.12 Addendum No. 2, dated January 26, 1998. 54 pages 3.13 Addendum No. 3, dated January 28, 1998. 13 pages ' 3.14 Contract Specifications issued January 14, 1998. * (Insert here, attaching additional pages if required, a list identifying all other Contract Documents e.g. ' Supplementary Conditions;Specifications, giving a list of contents with section numbers and titles, number of pages, and date; Drawings, giving drawing number, title, date, revision date or mark,Addenda, giving title, number, date) CCDC 2- 1994 File 00502 2 ' ARTICLE A-2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS (Cont'd) 3.15 Contract Drawings comprising those listed below: ' Architectural Drawing No. Title Rev. No. Issued A1.1 Site Plan and Details 0 January 12, 1998 ' A2.1 Demolition Plans 0 January 12, 1998 A2.2 Ground Floor Plan 0 January 12, 1998 ' A2.3 Basement and Second Floor Plans 0 January 12, 1998 A2.4 Stair Section, Details and Enlarged 0 January 12, 1998 ' Plans A2.5 Roof Plan and Details 0 January 12, 1998 ' A2.6 Plan Details 0 January 12, 1998 A3.1 Elevations and Details 0 January 12, 1998 ' A4.1 Building Sections 0 January 12, 1998 A5.1 Section Details 0 January 12, 1998 ' A5.2 Section Details 0 January 12, 1998 A6.1 Reflected Ceiling Plan and Details 0 January 12, 1998 ' A7.1 Floor Tile Layout 0 January 12, 1998 A8.1 Schedules 0 January 12, 1998 ' A9.1 Interior Elevations and Details 0 January 12, 1998 ' A9.2 Details 0 Janua 12. 1998 Structural ' Drawing No. Title Rev. No. Issued ' S1.1 Foundation Plan Details and Notes 0 January 12, 1998 S2.1 Foundation Details 0 January 12, 1998 ' S2.2 Foundation Details 0 January 12, 1998 S2.3 Roof Framing Plan 0 January 12, 1998 ' S2.4 T—Framing0 January 12, 1998 Page 2A ' ARTICLE A-2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS (Cont'd) Mechanical Drawing No. Title Rev. No. Issued ' M1 Demolition Layout 0 January 12, 1998 M2 HVAC Layout 0 January 12, 1998 ' M3 Sanitary Layout 0 January 12, 1998 M4 Partial Plans, Plumbing & Details 0 January 12, 1998 ' M5 HVAC & Piping Details 0 January 12, 1998 M6 Schedules & Piping Details 0 January 12, 1998 Electrical ' Drawing No. Title Rev. No. Issued E1 Electrical Site Plan and Roof 0 January 12, 1998 ' Equipment E2 Fire Alarm System 0 January 12, 1998 ' E3 Basement and Second Floor 0 January 12, 1998 Electrical Layout E4 Ground Floor Electrical Layout 0 January 12, 1998 ' E5 Ground Floor Lighting Layout 0 January 12, 1998 ' E6 Electrical Services Single Line 0 January 12, 1998 Diagram E7 Demolition Instructions Ground Floor 0 January 12, 1998 ' E8 Demolition Instructions Basement& 0 January 12, 1998 Second Floor ' E9 Demolition of Existing Electrical 0 January 12, 1998 Services Page 213 ' ARTICLE A-4 CONTRACT PRICE 4.1 The Contract Price, which excludes Value Added Taxes, is: ' One million, fourty—four thousand, seven hundred & ' twenty—five. . dollars and zero cents. $ 1_,0 , . -44- - ------725---------00---------- 4.2 Value Added Taxes (of 7 %) payable by the Owner to the Contractor are: Seventy—three thousand, one hundred & thirty. . . . . . . . . . . dollars ' and_ seventy—five cents. $ 73,130.75 ' 4.3 Total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for the construction of the Work is: ' One million, one hundred & seventeen thousand, eight ' hundred & fifty—five. . dollars ' and seventy—five cents. $ _1,117,855.75 ' 4.4 All amounts are in Canadian funds. 4.5 These amounts shall be subject to adjustments as provided in the Contract Documents. ' CCDC 2- 1994 File 00502 3 ARTICLE A-5 PAYMENT t 5.1 Subject to the provisions of the Contract Documents, and in accordance with legislation and statutory regulations respecting holdback percentages and, where such legislation or regulations do not exist or apply, subject to a holdback of t percent ( 0_1 % ,A(dol6!vhitl ih/all/iAl(l"d"/fdd&I for ' construction lien fiold6ac , an a further one t)1%) for the contract completion security account, the Owner shal� in Canad'an finds• .1 make progress payments to a contractor on account o the Contract 'rice wen due in the amount certified by the Consultant together with such Value Added Taxes as may be applicable to such , payment, and .2 upon Substantial Performance of the Work,pay to the Contractor the unpaid balance of the holdback amount when due together with such Value Added Taxes as may be applicable to such payment, and , .3 upon the issuance of the final certificate for payment,pay to the Contractor the unpaid balance of the Contract Price when due together with such Value Added Taxes as may be applicable to such payment. ' 5.2 In the event of loss or damage occurring where payment becomes due under the property and boiler insurance policies, payments shall be made to the Contractor in accordance with the provisions of GC 11.1 INSURANCE. 5.3 Interest .1 Should either party fail to make payments as they become due under the terms of the Contract or in , an award by arbitration or court, interest at prime rate percent ( ---- %) per annum above the bank rate on such unpaid amounts shall also become due and payable until payment. Such ' interest shall be compounded on a monthly basis. The bank rate shall be the rate established by the Bank of Canada as the minimum rate at which the Bank of Canada makes short term advances to the chartered banks. ' .2 Interest shall apply at the rate and in the manner prescribed by paragraph 5.3.1 of this Article on the amount of any claim settled pursuant to Part 8 of the General Conditions - DISPUTE RESOLUTION from the date the amount would have been due and payable under the Contract, had it not been in ' dispute, until the date it is paid. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00502 4 ' ARTICLE A-6 RECEIPT OF AND ADDRESSES FOR NOTICES 6.1 Notices in writing between the parties or between them and the Consultant shall be considered to have been received by the addressee on the date of delivery if delivered to the individual, or to a member of the firm, ' or to an officer of the corporation for whom they are intended by hand or by registered post; or if sent by regular post, to have been delivered within 5 Working Days of the date of mailing when addressed as follows: The Owner at 40 Temperance Street street and number and postal box number if applicable ' Bowmanville, Ontario post office or district,province,postal code L1C 3A6 The Contractor at R.R. #3 street and number and postal box number if applicable ' Bowmanville, Ontario post office or district,province,postal code ' L1C 3K4 The Consultant at 11 Stanley Court, Unit 1 ' street and number and postal box number if applicable Whitby, Ontario post office or district,province,postal code L1N 8P9 ' ARTICLE A-7 LANGUAGE OF THE CONTRACT 7.1 When the Contract Documents are prepared in both the English and French languages, it is agreed that in the event of any apparent discrepancy between the English and French versions, the English/iddchi language shall prevail. ' * Complete this statement by striking out inapplicable term. 7.2 This Agreement is drawn in English at the request of the parties hereto. La prdsente convention est rddigde ' en anglais A la demande des parties. ' ARTICLE A-8 SUCCESSION 8.1 The Contract Documents are to be read into and form part of this Agreement and the whole shall constitute ' the Contract between the parties, and subject to the law and the provisions of the Contract Documents shall enure to the benefit of and be binding upon the parties hereto, their respective heirs, legal representatives, successors, and assigns. ' CCDC 2- 1994 File 00502 5 In witness whereof the parties hereto have executed this Agreement and by the hands of their duly authorized representatives. , SIGNED AND DELIVERED in the presence of: ' OWNER Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington name of owner t signature WITNESS The May6r name tit o n A in i ftsig ure signature Clerk , name and title of person signing name and title of person signing CONTRACTOR Derr Construction Limited name of contracto si natu WITNESS 4. name and title of person signing signature signature 1 name and title of person signing name and title of person signing N.B. Where legal jurisdiction, local practice, or Owner or Contractor requirement calls for. ' (a) proof of authority to execute this document, attach such proof of authority in the form of a certified copy of a resolution naming the representative(s)authorized to sign the Agreement for and on behalf ' of the corporation or partnership; or (b) the affixing of a corporate seal, this Agreement should be properly sealed. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00502 6 ' r rStandard Construction Document-CCDC 2- 1994 DEFINITIONS rThe following Definitions shall apply to all Contract Documents. 1. Contract ' The Contract is the undertaking by the parties to perform their respective duties, responsibilities, and obligations as prescribed in the Contract Documents and represents the entire agreement between the parties. r 2. Contract Documents The Contract Documents consist of those documents listed in Article A-3 of the Agreement - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS and amendments agreed upon between the parties. r 3. Owner The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement. The term Owner means the Owner or the Owner's authorized agent or representative as designated to the Contractor in writing, but does not rinclude the Consultant. 4. Contractor r The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement. The term Contractor means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative as designated to the Owner in writing. 5. Subcontractor ' A Subcontractor is a person or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a part or parts of the Work, or to supply Products worked to a special design for the Work. r 6. Supplier A Supplier is a person or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor to supply Products not worked to a special design for the Work. r 7. Consultant The Consultant is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement. The Consultant is the Architect, the Engineer, or entity licensed to practice in the province or territory of the Place of the Work. The term rConsultant means the Consultant or the Consultant's authorized representative. 8. Project rThe Project means the total construction contemplated of which the Work may be the whole or a part. 9. Work r The Work means the total construction and related services required by the Contract Documents, 10. Place of the Work The Place of the Work is the designated site or location of the Work identified in Article A-1 of the Agreement r - THE WORK. 11. Product Product or Products means material, machinery, equipment, and fixtures forming the Work, but does not r include machinery and equipment used to prepare,fabricate,convey, or erect the Work, which are referred to as construction machinery and equipment. 12. Provide Provide means to supply and install. r CCDC 2- 1994 File 00602 7 r r 13. Contract Price r The Contract Price is the amount stipulated in Article A-4 of the Agreement - CONTRACT PRICE. 14. Contract Time The Contract Time is the time stipulated in paragraph 1.3 of Article A-1 of the Agreement-THE WORK from commencement of the Work to Substantial Performance of the Work. 15. Working Day ' Working Day means a day other than a Saturday,Sunday, or a holiday which is observed by the construction industry in the area of the Place of the Work. 16. Supplemental Instruction ' A Supplemental Instruction is an instruction,not involving adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Time, in the form of specifications,drawings,schedules,samples,models or written instructions,consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. It is to be issued by the Consultant to supplement the Contract Documents ' as required for the performance of the Work. 17. Change Order ' A Change Order is a written amendment to the Contract prepared by the Consultant and signed by the Owner and the Contractor stating their agreement upon: - a change in the Work; r - the method of adjustment or the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Price, if any; and - the extent of the adjustment in the Contract Time, if any. 18. Change Directive r A Change Directive is a written instruction prepared by the Consultant and signed by the Owner directing a change in the Work within the general scope of the Contract Documents. 19. Substantial Performance of the Work ' Substantial Performance of the Work is as defined in the lien legislation applicable to the Place of the Work. If such legislation is not in force or does not contain such definition, Substantial Performance of the Work r shall have been reached when the Work is ready for use or is being used for the purpose intended and is so certified by the Consultant. 20. Value Added Taxes r Value Added Taxes means such sum as shall be levied upon the Contract Price by the Federal or any Provincial Government and is computed as a percentage of the Contract Price and includes the Goods and Services Tax, the Quebec Sales Tax and any similar tax, the payment or collection of which is by the legislation imposing such tax an obligation of the Contractor. 1 r r r 1 CCDC 2- 1994 File 00602 g 1 ' Standard Construction Document-CCDC 2- 1994 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE STIPULATED PRICE CONTRACT PART 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS GC 1.1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.1.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include the labour, Products, and services necessary for the ' performance of the Work by the Contractor in accordance with these documents. It is not intended, however,that the Contractor shall supply products or perform work not consistent with, not covered by,or not properly inferable from the Contract Documents. 1.1.2 Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship between: ' .1 the Owner and a Subcontractor, a Supplier, or their agent, employee, or other person performing any of the Work. .2 the Consultant and the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Supplier, or their agent, employee, or other person performing any of the Work. 1.1.3 The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by any one shall be as binding as if ' required by all. 1.1.4 Words and abbreviations which have well known technical or trade meanings are used in the Contract ' Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. 1.1.5 References in the Contract Documents to the singular shall be considered to include the plural as the context requires. 1.1.6 The specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents, wherever located and whenever issued, consisting of the written requirements and standards for Products, systems, workmanship, and the services ' necessary for the performance of the Work. 1.1.7 The drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents, wherever located and ' whenever issued, showing the design, location, and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules, and diagrams. 1.1.8 Neither the organization of the specifications into divisions, sections, and parts nor the arrangement of drawings shall control the Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors and Suppliers or in establishing the extent of the work to be performed by a trade. ' 1.1.9 If there is a conflict within Contract Documents: .1 the order of priority of documents, from highest to lowest, shall be • the Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor, • the Definitions, • Supplementary Conditions, • the General Conditions, ' • Division 1 of the specifications, • Divisions 2 through 16 of the specifications, • material and finishing schedules, ' • drawings. ' CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 9 .2 drawings of larger scale shall govern over those of smaller scale of the same date. .3 dimensions shown on drawings shall govern over dimensions scaled from drawings. .4 later dated documents shall govern over earlier documents of the same type. 1.1.10 The Owner shall provide the Contractor, without charge, sufficient copies of the Contract Documents to perform the Work. 1.1.11 Specifications, drawings, models, and copies thereof furnished by the Consultant are and shall remain the Consultant's property, with the exception of the signed Contract sets, which shall belong to each party to ' the Contract. All specifications,drawings,and models furnished by the Consultant are to be used only with respect to the Work and are not to be used on other work. These specifications,drawings, and models are not to be copied or altered in any manner without the written authorization of the Consultant. 1.1.12 Models furnished by the Contractor at the Owner's expense are the property of the Owner. GC 1.2 LAW OF THE CONTRACT 1 1.2.1 The law of the Place of the Work shall govern the interpretation of the Contract. GC 1.3 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES 1.3.1 Except as expressly provided in the Contract Documents,the duties and obligations imposed by the Contract t Documents and the rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of any duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. 1.3.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Consultant, or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of any right or duty afforded any of them under the Contract, nor shall any such action or failure to act constitute an ' approval of or acquiescence in any breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. GC 1.4 ASSIGNMENT ' 1.4.1 Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract or a portion thereof without the written consent of the other, which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. ' PART 2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT GC 2.1 AUTHORITY OF THE CONSULTANT 2.1.1 The Consultant will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract ' Documents, unless otherwise modified by written agreement as provided in paragraph 2.1.2. 2.1.2 The duties, responsibilities, and limitations of authority of the Consultant as set forth in the Contract Documents shall be modified or extended only with the written consent of the Owner,the Contractor, and the Consultant. 2.1.3 If the Consultant's employment is terminated, the Owner shall immediately appoint or reappoint a ' Consultant against whom the Contractor makes no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Consultant. ' CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 10 ' GC 2.2 ROLE OF THE CONSULTANT 2.2.1 The Consultant will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents during construction until issuance of the final certificate for payment, and subject to GC 2.1 - AUTHORITY OF THE CONSULTANT and with the Owner's concurrence, from time to time until the completion of any correction of defects as provided in paragraph 12.3.3 of GC 12.3 - WARRANTY. ' 2.2.2 The Consultant will visit the Place of the Work at intervals appropriate to the progress of construction to become familiar with the progress and quality of the work and to determine if the Work is proceeding in general conformity with the Contract Documents. 2.2.3 If the Owner and the Consultant agree, the Consultant will provide at the Place of the Work, one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Consultant's responsibilities. The duties,responsibilities, and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth in writing to the Contractor. 2.2.4 Based on the Consultant's observations and evaluation of the Contractor's applications for payment, the Consultant will determine the amounts owing to the Contractor under the Contract and will issue certificates ' for payment as provided in Article A-5 of the Agreement-PAYMENT,GC 5.3 -PROGRESS PAYMENT, and GC 5.7 - FINAL PAYMENT. 2.2.5 The Consultant will not be responsible for and will not have control,charge,or supervision of construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs required in connection with the Work in accordance with the applicable construction safety legislation,other regulations, ' or general construction practice. The Consultant will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Consultant will not have control over, charge of,or be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers,or their agents, employees, or any other persons performing portions of the Work. 2.2.6 The Consultant will be, in the first instance, the interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and shall make findings as to the performance thereunder by both parties to the Contract, except with ' respect to GC 5.1 - FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE OWNER. Interpretations and findings of the Consultant shall be consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. When making such interpretations and findings the Consultant will not show partiality to either the Owner or the ' Contractor. 2.2.7 Claims,disputes,and other matters in question relating to the performance of the Work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents, except for GC 5.1 - FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE ' OWNER, shall be referred initially to the Consultant by notice in writing given to the Consultant and to the other party for the Consultant's interpretation and finding which will be given by notice in writing to the parties within a reasonable time. ' 2.2.8 The Consultant will have authority to reject work which in the Consultant's opinion does not conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Whenever the Consultant considers it necessary or advisable, the Consultant will have authority to require inspection or testing of work, whether or not such work is fabricated,installed,or completed. However,neither the authority of the Consultant to act nor any decision either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to any duty or responsibility of the Consultant to the Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers., or their agents, employees, or other persons performing any of the Work. 2.2.9 During the progress of the Work the Consultant will furnish Supplemental Instructions to the Contractor with reasonable promptness or in accordance with a schedule for such instructions agreed to by the Consultant and the Contractor. 2.2.10 The Consultant will review and take appropriate action upon such Contractor's submittals as shop drawings, Product data, and samples, as provided in the Contract Documents. ' CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 11 2.2.11 The Consultant will prepare Change Orders and Change Directives as provided in GC 6.2 - CHANGE ORDER and GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE. 2.2.12 The Consultant will conduct reviews of the Work to determine the date of Substantial Performance of the Work as provided in GC 5.4 - SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK. 2.2.13 All certificates issued by the Consultant shall be to the best of the Consultant's knowledge,information,and belief. By issuing any certificate, the Consultant does not guarantee the Work is correct or complete. ' 2.2.14 The Consultant will receive and review written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and provided by the Contractor and will forward such warranties and documents to the Owner for the Owner's acceptance. GC 2.3 REVIEW AND INSPECTION OF THE WORK 2.3.1 The Owner and the Consultant shall have access to the Work at all times. The Contractor shall provide sufficient, safe, and proper facilities at all times for the review of the Work by the Consultant and the , inspection of the Work by authorized agencies. If parts of the Work are in preparation at locations other than the Place of the Work, the Owner and the Consultant shall be given access to such work whenever it is in progress. 2.3.2 If work is designated for tests, inspections,or approvals in the Contract Documents,or by the Consultant's instructions, or the laws or ordinances of the Place of the Work, the Contractor shall give the Consultant reasonable notice of when the work will be ready for review and inspection. The Contractor shall arrange ' for and shall give the Consultant reasonable notice of the date and time of inspections by other authorities. 2.3.3 The Contractor shall furnish promptly to the Consultant two copies of certificates and inspection reports ' relating to the Work. 2.3.4 If the Contractor covers, or permits to be covered, work that has been designated for special tests, ' inspections,or approvals before such special tests,inspections,or approvals are made,given or completed, the Contractor shall,if so directed,uncover such work,have the inspections or tests satisfactorily completed, and make good covering work at the Contractor's expense. 2.3.5 The Consultant may order any portion or portions of the Work to be examined to confirm that such work , is in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. If the work is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct the work and pay the cost of ' examination and correction. If the work is in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay the cost of examination and restoration. GC 2.4 DEFECTIVE WORK 2.4.1 The Contractor shall promptly remove from the Place of the Work and replace or re-execute defective work ' that has been rejected by the Consultant as failing to conform to the Contract Documents whether or not the defective work has been incorporated in the Work and whether or not the defect is the result of poor workmanship, use of defective products, or damage through carelessness or other act or omission of the Contractor. 2.4.2 The Contractor shall make good promptly other contractors' work destroyed or damaged by such removals or replacements at the Contractor's expense. 2.4.3 If in the opinion of the Consultant it is not expedient to correct defective work or work not performed as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may deduct from the amount otherwise due to the , Contractor the difference in value between the work as performed and that called for by the Contract CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 12 , Documents. If the Owner and the Contractor do not agree on the difference in value, they shall refer the matter to the Consultant for a determination. PART 3 EXECUTION OF THE WORK ' GC 3.1 CONTROL OF THE WORK 3.1.1 The Contractor shall have total control of the Work and shall effectively direct and supervise the Work so ' as to ensure conformity with the Contract Documents. 3.1.2 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures and for co-ordinating the various parts of the Work under the Contract. GC 3.2 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR OTHER CONTRACTORS ' 3.2.1 The Owner reserves the right to award separate contracts in connection with other parts of the Project to other contractors and to perform work with own forces. 3.2.2 When separate contracts are awarded for other parts of the Project, or when work is performed by the Owner's own forces, the Owner shall: .1 provide for the co-ordination of the activities and work of other contractors and Owner's own forces with the Work of the Contract; ' .2 assume overall responsibility for compliance with the applicable health and construction safety legislation at the Place of the Work; 1 .3 enter into separate contracts with other contractors under conditions of contract which are compatible with the conditions of the Contract, .4 ensure that insurance coverage is provided to the same requirements as are called for in GC 11.1 - ' INSURANCE and co-ordinate such insurance with the insurance coverage of the Contractor as it affects the Work; and .5 take all reasonable precautions to avoid labour disputes or other disputes on the Project arising from the work of other contractors or the Owner's own forces. ' 3.2.3 When separate contracts are awarded for other parts of the Project, or when work is performed by the Owner's own forces, the Contractor shall: .1 afford the Owner and other contractors reasonable opportunity to introduce and store their products and use their construction machinery and equipment to execute their work; .2 co-ordinate and schedule the Work with the work of other contractors and Owner's own forces and ' connect as specified or shown in the Contract Documents; .3 participate with other contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules when directed to do so; and .4 where part of the Work is affected by or depends upon for its proper execution the work of other contractors or Owner's own forces,promptly report to the Consultant in writing and prior to proceeding with that part of the Work, any apparent deficiencies in such work. Failure by the Contractor to so ' CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 13 report shall invalidate any claims against the Owner by reason of the deficiencies in the work of other contractors or Owner's own forces except those deficiencies not then reasonably discoverable. 3.2.4 Where a change in the Work is required as a result of the co-ordination and connection of the work of other contractors or Owner's own forces with the Work, the changes shall be authorized and valued as provided in GC 6.1 - CHANGES, GC 6.2 CHANGE ORDER, and GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE. 3.2.5 Claims,disputes, and other matters in question between the Contractor and other contractors shall be dealt , with as provided in Part 8 of the General Conditions - DISPUTE RESOLUTION provided the other contractors have reciprocal obligations. The Contractor shall be deemed to have consented to arbitration of any dispute with any other contractor whose contract with the Owner contains a similar agreement to arbitrate. GC 3.3 TEMPORARY SUPPORTS, STRUCTURES, AND FACILITIES ' 3.3.1 The Contractor shall have the sole responsibility for the design, erection, operation, maintenance, and removal of temporary supports, structures, and facilities and the design and execution of construction , methods required in their use. 3.3.2 The Contractor shall engage and pay for registered professional engineering personnel skilled in the appropriate disciplines to perform those functions referred to in paragraph 3.3.1 where required by law or by the Contract Documents and in all cases where such temporary supports,structures, and facilities and their method of construction are of such a nature that professional engineering skill is required to produce safe and satisfactory results. , 3.3.3 Notwithstanding the provisions of GC 3.1 - CONTROL OF THE WORK, paragraph 3.3.1, and paragraph 3.3.2 or provisions to the contrary elsewhere in the Contract Documents where such Contract Documents ' include designs for temporary supports, structures, and facilities or specify a method of construction in whole or in part, such facilities and methods shall be considered to be part of the design of the Work and the Contractor shall not be held responsible for that part of the design or the specified method of , construction. The Contractor shall, however, be responsible for the execution of such design or specified method of construction in the same manner as for the execution of the Work. GC 3.4 DOCUMENT REVIEW ' 3.4.1 The Contractor shall review the Contract Documents and shall report promptly to the Consultant any error, ' inconsistency,or omission the Contractor may discover. Such review by the Contractor shall be to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information,and belief and in making such review the Contractor does not assume any responsibility to the Owner or the Consultant for the accuracy of the review. The Contractor , shall not be liable for damage or costs resulting from such errors, inconsistencies, or omissions in the Contract Documents, which the Contractor did not discover. If the Contractor does discover any error, inconsistency, or omission in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall not proceed with the work affected until the Contractor has received corrected or missing information from the Consultant. GC 3.5 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 3.5.1 The Contractor shall: 1 prepare and submit to the Owner and the Consultant prior to the first application for payment, a construction schedule that indicates the timing of the major activities of the Work and provides sufficient detail of the critical events and their inter-relationship to demonstrate the Work will be performed in conformity with the Contract Time; CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 14 , .2 monitor the progress of the Work relative to the construction schedule and update the schedule on a monthly basis or as stipulated by the Contract Documents; and .3 advise the Consultant of any revisions required to the schedule as the result of extensions of the Contract Time as provided in Part 6 of the General Conditions - CHANGES IN THE WORK. ' GC 3.6 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY 3.6.1 Subject to paragraph 3.2.2.2 of GC 3.2 - CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR OTHER CONTRACTORS, ' the Contractor shall be solely responsible for construction safety at the Place of the Work and for compliance with the rules, regulations, and practices required by the applicable construction health and safety legislation and shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Work. GC 3.7 SUPERVISOR 3.7.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent supervisor and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Place of the Work while work is being performed. The supervisor shall not be changed except for 1 valid reason. 3.7.2 The supervisor shall represent the Contractor at the Place of the Work and notices and instructions given to the supervisor by the Consultant shall be held to have been received by the Contractor. GC 3.8 SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS 3.8.1 The Contractor shall preserve and protect the rights of the parties under the Contract with respect to work to be performed under subcontract, and shall: .1 enter into contracts or written agreements with Subcontractors and Suppliers to require them to perform their work as provided in the Contract Documents; .2 incorporate the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents into all contracts or written agreements with Subcontractors and Suppliers; and .3 be as fully responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of Subcontractors,Suppliers,and of persons directly or indirectly employed by them as for acts and omissions of persons directly employed by the Contractor. ' 3.8.2 The Contractor shall indicate in writing, at the request of the Owner, those Subcontractors or Suppliers whose bids have been received by the Contractor which the Contractor would be prepared to accept for the performance of a portion of the Work. Should the Owner not object before signing the Contract, the ' Contractor shall employ those Subcontractors or Suppliers so identified by the Contractor in writing for the performance of that portion of the Work to which their bid applies. 3.8.3 The Owner may,for reasonable cause, at any time before the Owner has signed the Contract,object to the use of a proposed Subcontractor or Supplier and require the Contractor to employ one of the other subcontract bidders. 3.8.4 If the Owner requires the Contractor to change a proposed Subcontractor or Supplier, the Contract Price and Contract Time shall be adjusted by the differences occasioned by such required change. 3.8.5 The Contractor shall not be required to employ as a Subcontractor or Supplier, a person or firm to whom the Contractor may reasonably object. ' CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 15 3.8.6 The Owner, through the Consultant, may provide to a Subcontractor or Supplier information as to the percentage of the Subcontractor's or Supplier's work which has been certified for payment. GC 3.9 LABOUR AND PRODUCTS 3.9.1 The Contractor shall provide and pay for labour, Products, tools, construction machinery and equipment, water,heat, light, power, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract. 3.9.2 Products provided shall be new. Products which are not specified shall be of a quality consistent with those specified and their use acceptable to the Consultant. 3.9.3 The Contractor shall maintain good order and discipline among the Contractor's employees engaged on the ' Work and shall not employ on the Work anyone not skilled in the tasks assigned. GC 3.10 DOCUMENTS AT THE SITE ' 3.10.1 The Contractor shall keep one copy of current Contract Documents, submittals, reports, and records of meetings at the Place of the Work, in good order and available to the Owner and the Consultant. GC 3.11 SHOP DRAWINGS 3.11.1 Shop drawings are drawings,diagrams,illustrations,schedules,performance charts,brochures,Product,and ' other data which the Contractor provides to illustrate details of a portion of the Work. 3.11.2 The Contractor shall provide shop drawings as described in the Contract Documents or as the Consultant may reasonably request. 3.11.3 The Contractor shall review all shop drawings prior to submission to the Consultant. The Contractor ' represents by this review that: the Contractor has determined and verified all field measurements and field construction conditions, or will do so; Product requirements; catalogue numbers; and similar data and that ' the Contractor has checked and co-ordinated each shop drawing with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall confirm this review of each shop drawing by stamp, date, and signature of the person responsible. At the time of submission the Contractor shall notify the Consultant in writing of any deviations in the shop drawings from the requirements of the Contract Documents. 3.11.4 The Contractor shall submit shop drawings to the Consultant to review in orderly sequence and sufficiently ' in advance so as to cause no delay in the Work or in the work of other contractors. Upon request of the Contractor or the Consultant, they jointly shall prepare a schedule of the dates for submission and return of shop drawings. Shop drawings which require approval of any legally constituted authority having jurisdiction shall be submitted to such authority by the Contractor for approval. ' 3.11.5 The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in the form specified or as the Consultant may direct. The Consultant will review and return shop drawings in accordance with the schedule agreed upon,or otherwise , with reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay. The Consultant's review is for conformity to the design concept and for general arrangement only. The Consultant's review shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings or for meeting all requirements of the Contract ' Documents unless the Consultant expressly notes the acceptance of a deviation on the shop drawings. 3.11.6 Upon the Consultant's request,the Contractor shall revise and resubmit shop drawings which the Consultant rejects as inconsistent with the Contract Documents unless otherwise directed by the Consultant. The ' CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 16 ' Contractor shall notify the Consultant in writing of any revisions to the resubmission other than those requested by the Consultant. GC 3.12 USE OF THE WORK 3.12.1 The Contractor shall confine construction machinery and equipment, storage of Products, and operations of employees to limits indicated by laws, ordinances, permits, or the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the Work with Products. ' 3.12.2 The Contractor shall not load or permit to be loaded any part of the Work with a weight or force that will endanger the safety of the Work. ' GC 3.13 CUTTING AND REMEDIAL WORK 3.13.1 The Contractor shall do the cutting and remedial work required to make the several parts of the Work come together properly. 3.13.2 The Contractor shall co-ordinate the Work to ensure that this requirement is kept to a minimum. 3.13.3 Should the Owner, the Consultant, other contractors or anyone employed by them be responsible for ill- timed work necessitating cutting or remedial work to be performed, the cost of such cutting or remedial ' work shall be valued as provided in GC 6.1 - CHANGES, GC 6.2 - CHANGE ORDER, and GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE. 3.13.4 Cutting and remedial work shall be performed by specialists familiar with the Products affected and shall ' be performed in a manner to neither damage nor endanger the Work. ' GC 3.14 CLEANUP 3.14.1 The Contractor shall maintain the Work in a tidy condition and free from the accumulation of waste ' products and debris, other than that caused by the Owner, other contractors or their employees. 3.14.2 The Contractor shall remove waste products and debris, other than that resulting from the work of the Owner,other contractors or their employees, and shall leave the Work clean and suitable for occupancy by the Owner before attainment of Substantial Performance of the Work. The Contractor shall remove products, tools, construction machinery, and equipment not required for the performance of the remaining work. 3.14.3 Prior to application for the final certificate for payment, the Contractor, shall remove products, tools, construction machinery and equipment, and waste products and debris, other than that resulting from the work of the Owner, other contractors or their employees. PART 4 ALLOWANCES GC 4.1 CASH ALLOWANCES ' 4.1.1 The Contract Price includes cash allowances stated in the Contract Documents, which allowances shall be expended as the Owner directs through the Consultant. 4.1.2 Cash allowances cover the net cost to the Contractor of services, Products, construction machinery and equipment, freight, unloading, handling, storage, installation, and other authorized expenses incurred in CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 17 r performing the work stipulated under the cash allowances but do not include any Value Added Taxes payable by the Owner to the Contractor. 4.1.3 The Contract Price, and not the cash allowances, includes the Contractor's overhead and profit in connection with such cash allowances. 4.1.4 Where costs under a cash allowance exceed the amount of the allowance, the Contractor shall be compensated for any excess incurred and substantiated plus an amount for overhead and profit as set out , in the Contract Documents. 4.1.5 The Contract Price shall be adjusted by Change Order to provide for any difference between the actual cost , and each cash allowance. 4.1.6 The value of the work performed under a cash allowance is eligible to be included in progress payments. ' 4.1.7 The Contractor and the Consultant shall jointly prepare a schedule that shows when the Consultant and Owner must authorize ordering of items called for under cash allowances to avoid delaying the progress of the Work. ' GC 4.2 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE r 4.2.1 The Contract Price includes the contingency allowance, if any, stated in the Contract Documents. 4.2.2 Expenditures under the contingency allowance shall be authorized and valued as provided in GC 6.1 - r CHANGES, GC 6.2 - CHANGE ORDER, and GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE. 4.2.3 The Contract Price shall be adjusted by Change Order to provide for any difference between the ' expenditures authorized under paragraph 4.2.2 and the contingency allowance. PART 5 PAYMENT GC 5.1 FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 5.1.1 The Owner shall, at the request of the Contractor, prior to execution of the Agreement, and/or promptly from time to time thereafter,furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have ' been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract. 5.1.2 The Owner shall notify the Contractor in writing of any material change in the Owner's financial arrangements during the performance of the Contract. GC 5.2 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT ' 5.2.1 Applications for payment on account as provided in Article A-5 of the Agreement - PAYMENT may be made monthly as the Work progresses. 5.2.2 Applications for payment shall be dated the last day of the agreed monthly payment period and the amount claimed shall be for the value,proportionate to the amount of the Contract,of work performed and Products r delivered to the Place of the Work at that date. 5.2.3 The Contractor shall submit to the Consultant, at least 14 days before the first application for payment, a schedule of values for the parts of the Work, aggregating the total amount of the Contract Price, so as to facilitate evaluation of applications for payment. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 18 ' 5.2.4 The schedule of values shall be made out in such form and supported by such evidence as the Consultant may reasonably direct and when accepted by the Consultant, shall be used as the basis for applications for payment, unless it is found to be in error. ' 5.2.5 The Contractor shall include a statement based on the schedule of values with each application for payment. 5.2.6 Claims for Products delivered to the Place of the Work but not yet incorporated into the Work shall be supported by such evidence as the Consultant may reasonably require to establish the value and delivery of the Products. GC 5.3 PROGRESS PAYMENT 5.3.1 The Consultant will issue to the Owner,no later than 10 days after the receipt of an application for payment from the Contractor submitted in accordance with GC 5.2 - APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT, a certificate for payment in the amount applied for or in such other amount as the Consultant determines to be properly due. If the Consultant amends the application,the Consultant will promptly notify ' the Contractor in writing giving reasons for the amendment. 5.3.2 The Owner shall make payment to the Contractor on account as provided in Article A-5 of the Agreement- ' PAYMENT no later than 5 days after the date of a certificate for payment issued by the Consultant. GC 5.4 SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK ' 5.4.1 When the Contractor considers that the Work is substantially performed, or if permitted by the lien legislation applicable to the Place of the Work a designated portion thereof which the Owner agrees to ' accept separately is substantially performed, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Consultant a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected and apply for a review by the Consultant to establish Substantial Performance of the Work or substantial performance of the designated portion of the Work. Failure to include an item on the list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete the Contract. 5.4.2 No later than 10 days after the receipt of the Contractor's list and application, the Consultant will review the Work to verify the validity of the application,and no later than 7 days after completing the review, will notify the Contractor whether the Work or the designated portion of the Work is substantially performed. 5.4.3 The Consultant shall state the date of Substantial Performance of the Work or designated portion of the Work in a certificate. ' 5.4.4 Immediately following the issuance of the certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work, the Contractor, in consultation with the Consultant, will establish a reasonable date for finishing the Work. ' GC 5.5 PAYMENT OF HOLDBACK UPON SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK 5.5.1 After the issuance of the certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work, the Contractor shall: .1 submit an application for payment of the holdback amount, ' .2 submit a sworn statement that all accounts for labour, subcontracts, Products, construction machinery and equipment, and other indebtedness which may have been incurred by the Contractor in the Substantial Performance of the Work and for which the Owner might in any way be held responsible have been paid in full, except for amounts properly retained as a holdback or as an identified amount 1 in dispute. ' CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 19 5.5.2 After the receipt of an application for payment from the Contractor and the sworn statement as provided , in paragraph 5.5.1, the Consultant will issue a certificate for payment of the holdback amount. 5.5.3 Where the holdback amount has not been placed in a separate holdback account,the Owner shall, 10 days ' prior to the expiry of the holdback period stipulated in the lien legislation applicable to the Place of the Work, place the holdback amount in a bank account in the joint names of the Owner and the Contractor. 5.5.4 The holdback amount authorized by the certificate for payment of the holdback amount is due and payable on the day following the expiration of the holdback period stipulated in the lien legislation applicable to the Place of the Work. Where lien legislation does not exist or apply, the holdback amount shall be due and payable in accordance with other legislation, industry practice, or provisions which may be agreed to between the parties. The Owner may retain out of the holdback amount any sums required by law to satisfy any liens against the Work or,if permitted by the lien legislation applicable to the Place of the Work,other third party monetary claims against the Contractor which are enforceable against the Owner. GC 5.6 PROGRESSIVE RELEASE OF HOLDBACK 5.6.1 Where legislation permits and where,upon application by the Contractor,the Consultant has certified that , the work of a Subcontractor or Supplier has been performed prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, the Owner shall pay the Contractor the holdback amount retained for such subcontract work,or the Products , supplied by such Supplier, on the day following the expiration of the holdback period for such work stipulated in the lien legislation applicable to the Place of the Work. 5.6.2 Notwithstanding the provisions of the preceding paragraph, and notwithstanding the wording of such ' certificates, the Contractor shall ensure that such subcontract work or Products is protected pending the issuance of a final certificate for payment and be responsible for the correction of defects or work not performed regardless of whether or not such was apparent when such certificates were issued. ' GC 5.7 FINAL PAYMENT 5.7.1 When the Contractor considers that the Work is completed,the Contractor shall submit an application for final payment. 5.7.2 The Consultant will, no later than 10 days after the receipt of an application from the Contractor for final payment,review the Work to verify the validity of the application. The Consultant will,no later than 7 days after reviewing the Work, notify the Contractor that the application is valid or give reasons why it is not valid. 5.7.3 When the Consultant finds the Contractor's application for final payment valid, the Consultant will issue a final certificate for payment. 5.7.4 Subject to the provision of paragraph 10.4.1 of GC 10.4 - WORKERS' COMPENSATION, and any lien legislation applicable to the Place of the Work, the Owner shall, no later than 5 days after the issuance of ' a final certificate for payment, pay the Contractor as provided in Article A-5 of the Agreement - PAYMENT. GC 5.8 WITHHOLDING OF PAYMENT ' 5.8.1 If because of climatic or other conditions reasonably beyond the control of the Contractor,there are items , of work that cannot be performed,payment in full for that portion of the Work which has been performed as certified by the Consultant shall not be withheld or delayed by the Owner on account thereof, but the Owner may withhold, until the remaining portion of the Work is finished, only such an amount that the Consultant determines is sufficient and reasonable to cover the cost of performing such remaining work. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 20 GC 5.9 NON-CONFORMING WORK 5.9.1 No payment by the Owner under the Contract nor partial or entire use or occupancy of the Work by the ' Owner shall constitute an acceptance of any portion of the Work or Products which are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 6 CHANGES IN THE WORK ' GC 6.1 CHANGES 6.1.1 The Owner, through the Consultant, without invalidating the Contract, may make changes in the Work 1 consisting of additions, deletions, or other revisions to the Work by Change Order or Change Directive. 6.1.2 The Contractor shall not perform a change in the Work without a Change Order or a Change Directive. GC 6.2 CHANGE ORDER 6.2.1 When a change in the Work is proposed or required, the Consultant shall provide a notice describing the proposed change in the Work to the Contractor. The Contractor shall present, in a form acceptable to the Consultant, a method of adjustment or an amount of adjustment for the Contract Price, if any, and the ' adjustment in the Contract Time, if any, for the proposed change in the Work. 6.2.2 When the Owner and the Contractor agree to the adjustments in the Contract Price and Contract Time or to the method to be used to determine the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and ' shall be recorded in a Change Order, signed by Owner and Contractor. The value of the work performed as the result of a Change Order shall be included in applications for progress payment. ' GC 6.3 CHANGE DIRECTIVE 63.1 If the Owner requires the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work prior to the Owner and the Contractor agreeing upon the adjustment in Contract Price and Contract Time, the Owner, through the Consultant, shall issue a Change Directive. ' 6.3.2 Upon receipt of a Change Directive, the Contractor shall proceed promptly with the change in the Work. The adjustment in the Contract Price for a change carried out by way of a Change Directive shall be determined on the basis of the cost of expenditures and savings to perform the work attributable to the ' change. If a change.in the Work results in a net increase in the Contract Price, an allowance for overhead and profit shall be included. 633 If a change in the Work results in a net decrease in the Contract Price,the amount of the credit shall be the ' net cost,without deduction for overhead or profit. When both additions and deletions covering related work or substitutions are involved in a change in the Work, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be calculated on the basis of the net increase, if any, with respect to that change in the Work. 6.3.4 The Contractor shall keep and present,in such form as the Consultant may require,an itemized accounting of the cost of expenditures and savings referred to in paragraph 6.3.2 together with supporting data. The cost of performing the work attributable to the Change Directive shall be limited to the actual cost of all of the following: 1 wages and benefits paid for labour in the direct employ of the Contractor under applicable collective ' bargaining agreements,or under a salary or wage schedule agreed upon by the Owner and Contractor, CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 21 .2 salaries, wages, and benefits of the Contractor's office personnel engaged in a technical capacity and , other personnel at shops or on the road, engaged in expediting the production or transportation of materials or equipment; .3 contributions, assessments, or taxes incurred for such items as unemployment insurance, provincial ' health insurance, workers' compensation, and Canada or Quebec Pension Plan, insofar as such cost is based on wages, salaries, or other remuneration paid to employees of the Contractor and included in the cost of the work as provided in paragraphs 6.3.4.1 and 6.3.4.2; .4 travel and subsistence expenses of the Contractor's personnel described in paragraphs 6.3.4.1 and 6.3.4.2; ' .5 the cost of all Products including cost of transportation thereof; .6 the cost of materials, supplies,equipment,temporary services and facilities,and hand tools not owned by the workers, including transportation and maintenance thereof, which are consumed; and cost less salvage value on such items used but not consumed, which remain the property of the Contractor; .7 rental cost of all tools, machinery, and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from or , provided by the Contractor or others, including installation, minor repairs and replacements, dismantling, removal, transportation and delivery cost thereof, ' .8 deposits lost; .9 the amounts of all subcontracts; ' .10 the cost of quality assurance such as independent inspection and testing services; .11 charges levied by authorities having jurisdiction at the Place of the Work; ' .12 royalties, patent license fees, and damages for infringement of patents and cost of defending suits ' therefor subject always to the Contractor's obligations to indemnify the Owner as provided in paragraph 10.3.1 of GC 10.3 - PATENT FEES; .13 any adjustment in premiums for all bonds and insurance which the Contractor is required, by the Contract Documents, to purchase and maintain; .14 any adjustment in taxes and duties for which the Contractor is liable; .15 charges for long distance telephone and facsimile communications, courier services, expressage, and petty cash items incurred; .16 the cost of removal and disposal of waste products and debris; .17 cost incurred due to emergencies affecting the safety of persons or property; ' 6.3.5 Pending determination of the final amount of a Change Directive, the undisputed value of the work performed as the result of a Change Directive is eligible to be included in progress payments. 6.3.6 If the Owner and Contractor do not agree on the proposed adjustment in the Contract Time or the method of determining it, the adjustment shall be referred to the Consultant for determination. ' 6.3.7 If at any time after the start of the work directed by a Change Directive, the Owner and the Contractor reach agreement on the adjustment to the Contract Price and to the Contract Time,this agreement shall be recorded in a Change Order signed by Owner and Contractor. , CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 22 ' GC 6.4 CONCEALED OR UNKNOWN CONDITIONS 6.4.1 If the Owner or the Contractor discover conditions at the Place of the Work which are: ' .1 subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which existed before the commencement of the Work which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents; or .2 physical conditions of a nature which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents; then the observing party shall notify the other party in writing before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 5 Working Days after first observance of the conditions. 6.4.2 The Consultant will promptly investigate such conditions and make a finding. If the finding is that the conditions differ materially and this would cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost or time to perform the Work, the Consultant, with the Owner's approval, shall issue appropriate instructions for a change in the Work as provided in GC 6.2 - CHANGE ORDER or GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE. 6.4.3 If the Consultant finds that the conditions at the Place of the Work are not materially different or that no ' change in the Contract Price or the Contract Time is justified, the Consultant shall report the reasons for this finding to the Owner and the Contractor in writing. ' GC 6.5 DELAYS 6.5.1 If the Contractor is delayed in the performance of the Work by an action or omission of the Owner, Consultant,or anyone employed or engaged by them directly or indirectly,contrary to the provisions of the Contract Documents, then the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Consultant may recommend in consultation with the Contractor. The Contractor shall be reimbursed by the Owner for reasonable costs incurred by the Contractor as the result of such delay. 6.5.2 If the Contractor is delayed in the performance of the Work by a stop work order issued by a court or other public authority and providing that such order was not issued as the result of an act or fault of the Contractor or any person employed or engaged by the Contractor directly or indirectly, then the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Consultant may recommend in consultation with the Contractor. The Contractor shall be reimbursed by the Owner for reasonable costs incurred by the Contractor as the result of such delay. 6.5.3 If the Contractor is delayed in the performance of the Work by labour disputes,strikes,lock-outs(including lock-outs decreed or recommended for its members by a recognized contractors' association, of which the Contractor is a member or to which the Contractor is otherwise bound), fire, unusual delay by common carriers or unavoidable casualties, or without limit to any of the foregoing, by a cause beyond the Contractor's control, then the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Consultant ' may recommend in consultation with the Contractor. The extension of time shall not be less than the time lost as the result of the event causing the delay, unless the Contractor agrees to a shorter extension. The Contractor shall not be entitled to payment for costs incurred by such delays unless such delays result from actions by the Owner. 6.5.4 No extension shall be made for delay unless notice in writing of claim is given to the Consultant not later than 10 Working Days after the commencement of delay,providing however,that in the case of a continuing cause of delay only one notice of claim shall be necessary. 6.5.5 If no schedule is made under paragraph 2.2.9 of GC 2.2 - ROLE OF THE CONSULTANT, no claim for delay shall be allowed because of failure of the Consultant to furnish instructions until 10 Working Days after demand for such instructions has been made and not then, unless the claim is reasonable. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 23 PART 7 DEFAULT NOTICE GC 7.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM THE WORK, STOP THE WORK, OR TERMINATE THE ' CONTRACT 7.1.1 If the Contractor should be adjudged bankrupt, or makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors because of the Contractor's insolvency,or if a receiver is appointed because of the Contractor's insolvency, the Owner may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Owner may have, by giving the Contractor or receiver or trustee in bankruptcy notice in writing, terminate the Contract. 7.1.2 If the Contractor should neglect to prosecute the Work properly or otherwise fails to comply with the , requirements of the Contract to a substantial degree and if the Consultant has given a written statement to the Owner and Contractor that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, the Owner may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Owner may have, notify the Contractor in writing that the Contractor is in default of the Contractor's contractual obligations and instruct the Contractor to correct the default in the 5 Working Days immediately following the receipt of such notice. 7.1.3 If the default cannot be corrected in the 5 Working Days specified, the Contractor shall be in compliance with the Owner's instructions if the Contractor: .1 commences the correction of the default within the specified time, and , .2 provides the Owner with an acceptable schedule for such correction, and .3 corrects the default in accordance with such schedule. 7.1.4 If the Contractor fails to correct the default in the time specified or subsequently agreed upon, without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Owner may have, the Owner may: .1 correct such default and deduct the cost thereof from any payment then or thereafter due the Contractor provided the Consultant has certified such cost to the Owner and the Contractor, or .2 terminate the Contractor's right to continue with the Work in whole or in part or terminate the Contract. , 7.1.5 If the Owner terminates the Contractor's right to continue with the Work as provided in paragraphs 7.1.1 and 7.1.4, the Owner shall be entitled to: .1 take possession of the Work and Products; utilize the construction machinery and equipment; subject to the rights of third parties,finish the Work by whatever method the Owner may consider expedient, but without undue delay or expense; and .2 withhold further payment to the Contractor until a final certificate for payment is issued; and .3 charge the Contractor the amount by which the full cost of finishing the Work as certified by the ' Consultant, including compensation to the Consultant for the Consultant's additional services and a reasonable allowance as determined' by the Consultant to cover the cost of corrections to work performed by the Contractor that may be required under GC 12.3 -WARRANTY,exceeds the unpaid balance of the Contract Price; however, if such cost of finishing the Work is less than the unpaid balance of the Contract Price, the Owner shall pay the Contractor the difference; and ' .4 on expiry of the warranty period, charge the Contractor the amount by which the cost of corrections to the Contractor's work under GC 12.3 - WARRANTY exceeds the allowance provided for such corrections, or if the cost of such corrections is less than the allowance, pay the Contractor the difference. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 24 ' 7.1.6 The Contractor's obligation under the Contract as to quality, correction, and warranty of the work performed by the Contractor up to the time of termination shall continue in force r fter such termination. GC 7.2 CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT 7.2.1 If the Owner should be adjudged bankrupt, or makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors because of the Owner's insolvency, or if a receiver is appointed because of the Owner's insolvency, the Contractor may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Contractor may have, by giving the Owner or receiver or trustee in bankruptcy notice in writing, terminate the Contract. ' 7.2.2 If the Work should be stopped or otherwise delayed for a period of 30 days or more under an order of a court or other public authority and providing that such order was not issued as the result of an act or fault ' of the Contractor or of anyone directly or indirectly employed or engaged by the Contractor,the Contractor may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Contractor may have,by giving the Owner notice in writing, terminate the Contract. 7.2.3 The Contractor may notify the Owner in writing,with a copy to the Consultant,that the Owner is in default of the Owner's contractual obligations if: ' l the Owner fails to furnish, when so requested by the Contractor, reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract, or ' .2 the Consultant fails to issue a certificate as provided in GC 5.3 PROGRESS PAYMENT, or .3 the Owner fails to pay the Contractor when due the amounts certified by the Consultant or awarded by arbitration or court, or .4 the Owner violates the requirements of the Contract to a substantial degree and the Consultant,except for GC 5.1 - FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE OWNER, confirms by written statement to the Contractor that sufficient cause exists. 7.2.4 The Contractor's notice in writing to the Owner provided under paragraph 7.2.3 shall advise that if the default is not corrected within 5 Working Days following the receipt of the notice in writing,the Contractor may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Contractor may have, stop the Work or terminate the Contract. 7.2.5 If the Contractor terminates the Contract under the conditions set out above,the Contractor shall be entitled to be paid for all work performed including reasonable profit, for loss sustained upon Products and construction machinery and equipment, and such other damages as the Contractor may have sustained as ' a result of the termination of the Contract. PART 8 DISPUTE RESOLUTION GC 8.1 AUTHORITY OF THE CONSULTANT ' 8.1.1 Differences between the parties to the Contract as to the interpretation,application or administration of the Contract or any failure to agree where agreement between the parties is called for,herein collectively called disputes,which are not resolved in the first instance by findings of the Consultant as provided in GC 2.2 - ROLE OF THE CONSULTANT, shall be settled in accordance with the requirements of Part 8 of the General Conditions - DISPUTE RESOLUTION. 8.1.2 If a dispute arises under the Contract in respect of a matter in which the Consultant has no authority under the Contract to make a finding, the procedures set out in paragraph 8.1.3 and paragraphs 8.2.3 to 8.2.8 of CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 25 GC 8.2 - NEGOTIATION, MEDIATION, AND ARBITRATION, and in GC 8.3 - RETENTION OF ' RIGHTS apply to that dispute with the necessary changes to detail as may be required. 8.1.3 If a dispute is not resolved promptly, the Consultant shall give such instructions as in the Consultant's , opinion are necessary for the proper performance of the Work and to prevent delays pending settlement of the dispute. The parties shall act immediately according to such instructions, it being understood that by so doing neither party will jeopardize any claim the party may have. If it is subsequently determined that such instructions were in error or at variance with the Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay the , Contractor costs incurred by the Contractor in carrying out such instructions which the Contractor was required to do beyond what the Contract Documents correctly understood and interpreted would have required, including costs resulting from interruption of the Work. , GC 8.2 NEGOTIATION, MEDIATION, AND ARBITRATION 8.2.1 In accordance with the latest edition of the Rules for Mediation of CCDC 2 Construction Disputes, the , parties shall appoint a Project Mediator .1 within 30 days after the Contract was awarded, or , .2 if the parties neglected to make an appointment within the 30 day period, within 15 days after either , party by notice in writing requests that the Project Mediator be appointed. 8.2.2 A party shall be conclusively deemed to have accepted a finding of the Consultant under GC 2.2 - ROLE OF THE CONSULTANT and to have expressly waived and released the other party from any claims in ' respect of the particular matter dealt with in that finding unless, within 15 Working Days after receipt of that finding, the party sends a notice in writing of dispute to the other party and to the Consultant, which contains the particulars of the matter in dispute and the relevant provisions of the Contract Documents. The ' responding party shall send a notice in writing of reply to the dispute within 10 Working Days after receipt of the notice of dispute setting out particulars of this response and any relevant provisions of the Contract Documents. ' 8.2.3 The parties shall make all reasonable efforts to resolve their dispute by amicable negotiations and agree to provide,without prejudice,frank,candid and timely disclosure of relevant facts,information,and documents to facilitate these negotiations. 8.2.4 After a period of 10 Working Days following receipt of a responding party's notice in writing of reply under paragraph 8.2.2,the parties shall request the Project Mediator to assist the parties to reach agreement on any unresolved dispute. The mediated negotiations shall be conducted in accordance with the latest edition of the Rules for Mediation of CCDC 2 Construction Disputes. 8.2.5 If the dispute has not been resolved within 10 Working Days after the Project Mediator was requested under ' paragraph 8.2.4 or within such further period agreed by the parties,the Project Mediator shall terminate the mediated negotiations by giving notice in writing to both parties. 8.2.6 By giving a notice in writing to the other party,not later than 10 Working Days after the date of termination of the mediated negotiations under paragraph 8.2.5,either party may refer the dispute to be finally resolved by arbitration under the latest edition of the Rules for Arbitration of CCDC 2 Construction Disputes. The ' arbitration shall be conducted in the jurisdiction of the Place of the Work. 8.2.7 On expiration of the 10 Working Days, the arbitration agreement under paragraph 8.2.6 is not binding on ' the parties and,if a notice is not given under paragraph 8.2.6 within the required time,the parties may refer the unresolved dispute to the courts or to any other form of dispute resolution, including arbitration, which they have agreed to use. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 26 ' 8.2.8 If neither party requires by notice in writing given within 10 Working Days of the date of notice requesting arbitration in paragraph 8.2.6 that a dispute be arbitrated immediately, all disputes referred to arbitration as provided in paragraph 8.2.6 shall be .1 held in abeyance until (1) Substantial Performance of the Work, (2) the Contract has been terminated, or (3) the Contractor has abandoned the Work, whichever is earlier, and ' .2 consolidated into a single arbitration under the rules governing the arbitration under paragraph 8.2.6. GC 8.3 RETENTION OF RIGHTS 8.3.1 It is agreed that no act by either party shall be construed as a renunciation or waiver of any rights or recourses, provided the party has given the notices required under Part 8 of the General Conditions - DISPUTE RESOLUTION and has carried out the instructions as provided in paragraph 8.1.3. 8.3.2 Nothing in Part 8 of the General Conditions - DISPUTE RESOLUTION shall be construed in any way to ' limit a party from asserting any statutory right to a lien under applicable lien legislation of the jurisdiction of the Place of the Work and the assertion of such right by initiating judicial proceedings is not to be construed as a waiver of any right that party may have under paragraph 8.2.6 to proceed by way of arbitration to adjudicate the merits of the claim upon which such a lien is based. PART 9 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY GC 9.1 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY ' 9.1.1 The Contractor shall protect the Work and the Owner's property and property adjacent to the Place of the Work from damage which may arise as the result of the Contractor's operations under the Contract, and shall be responsible for such damage, except damage which occurs as the result of: .1 errors in the Contract Documents; .2 acts or omissions by the Owner, the Consultant, other contractors, their agents and employees. 9.1.2 Should the Contractor in the performance of the Contract damage the Work, the Owner's property, or property adjacent to the Place of the Work, the Contractor shall be responsible for the making good such ' damage at the Contractor's expense. 9.1.3 Should damage occur to the Work or Owner's property for which the Contractor is not responsible, as ' provided in paragraph 9.1.1, the Contractor shall make good such damage to the Work and, if the Owner so directs, to the Owner's property. The Contract Price and Contract Time shall be adjusted as provided in GC 6.1 - CHANGES, GC 6.2 - CHANGE ORDER, and GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE. ' GC 9.2 DAMAGES AND MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY 9.2.1 If either party to the Contract should suffer damage in any manner because of any wrongful act or neglect of the other party or of anyone for whom the other party is responsible in law, then that party shall be reimbursed by the other party for such damage. The reimbursing party shall be subrogated to the rights of 1 the other party in respect of such wrongful act or neglect if it be that of a third party. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 27 9.2.2 Claims for damage under paragraph 9.2.1 shall be made in writing to the party liable within reasonable time ' after the first observance of such damage and if undisputed shall be confirmed by Change Order. Disputed claims shall be resolved as set out in Part 8 of the General Conditions - DISPUTE RESOLUTION. 9.2.3 If the Contractor has caused damage to the work of another contractor on the Project,the Contractor agrees ' upon due notice to settle with the other contractor by negotiation or arbitration. If the other contractor makes a claim against the Owner on account of damage alleged to have been so sustained,the Owner shall notify the Contractor and may require the Contractor to defend the action at the Contractor's expense. The ' Contractor shall satisfy a final order or judgment against the Owner and pay the costs incurred by the Owner arising from such action. 9.2.4 If the Contractor becomes liable to pay or satisfy a final order,judgment,or award against the Owner,then , the Contractor,upon undertaking to indemnify the Owner against any and all liability for costs,shall have the right to appeal in the name of the Owner such final order or judgment to any and all courts of competent jurisdiction. GC 9.3 TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND MATERIALS 9.3.1 For the purposes of applicable environmental legislation, the Owner shall be deemed to have control and management of the Place of the Work with respect to existing conditions. ' 9.3.2 Prior to the Contractor commencing the Work, the Owner shall I take all reasonable steps to determine whether any toxic or hazardous substances or materials are ' present at the Place of the Work, and .2 provide the Consultant and the Contractor with a written list of any such substances and materials. ' 9.3.3 The Owner shall take all reasonable steps to ensure that no person suffers injury,sickness,or death and that no property is injured or destroyed as a result of exposure to, or the presence of, toxic or hazardous substances or materials which were at the Place of the Work prior to the Contractor commencing the Work. , 9.3.4 Unless the Contract expressly provides otherwise, the Owner shall be responsible for taking all necessary steps, in accordance with legal requirements, to dispose of, store or otherwise render harmless toxic or ' hazardous substances or materials which were present at the Place of the Work prior to the Contractor commencing the Work. 9.3.5 If the Contractor .1 encounters toxic or hazardous substances or materials at the Place of the Work, or ' .2 has reasonable grounds to believe that toxic or hazardous substances or materials are present at the Place of the Work, which were not disclosed by the Owner, as required under paragraph 9.3.2, or which were disclosed but have not been dealt with as required under paragraph 9.3.4, the Contractor shall .3 take all reasonable steps,including stopping the Work,to ensure that no person suffers injury,sickness, ' or death and that no property is injured or destroyed as a result of exposure to or the presence of the substances or materials, and .4 immediately report the circumstances to the Consultant and the Owner in writing. , CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 28 ' 9.3.6 If the Contractor is delayed in performing the Work or incurs additional costs as a result of taking steps required under paragraph 9.3.5.3, the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Consultant may recommend in consultation with the Contractor and the Contractor shall be reimbursed for ' reasonable costs incurred as a result of the delay and as a result of taking those steps. 9.3.7 Notwithstanding paragraphs 2.2.6 and 2.2.7 of GC 2.2-ROLE OF THE CONSULTANT,or paragraph 8.1.1 of GC 8.1 - AUTHORITY OF THE CONSULTANT, the Consultant may select and rely upon the advice ' of an independent expert in a dispute under paragraph 9.3.6 and, in that case, the expert shall be deemed to have been jointly retained by the Owner and the Contractor and shall be jointly paid by them. ' 9.3.8 The Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor,the Consultant,their agents and employees, from and against claims, demands, losses, costs, damages, actions, suits, or proceedings arising out of or resulting from exposure to,or the presence of,toxic or hazardous substances or materials which were at the Place of the Work prior to the Contractor commencing the Work. This obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity set out in GC 12.1 - INDEMNIFICATION or which otherwise exist respecting a person or party described in this paragraph. 9.3.9 GC 9.3-TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND MATERIALS shall govern over the provisions of paragraph 1.3.1 of GC 1.3 - RIGHTS AND REMEDIES or GC 9.2 - DAMAGES AND MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY. PART 10 GOVERNING REGULATIONS GC 10.1 TAXES AND DUTIES 10.1.1 The Contract Price shall include all taxes and customs duties in effect at the time of the bid closing except for Value Added Taxes payable by the Owner to the Contractor as stipulated in Article A-4 of the Agreement - CONTRACT PRICE. 10.1.2 Any increase or decrease in costs to the Contractor due to changes in such included taxes and duties after the time of the bid closing shall increase or decrease the Contract Price accordingly. GC 10.2 LAWS, NOTICES, PERMITS, AND FEES 10.2.1 The laws of the Place of the Work shall govern the Work. ' 10.2.2 The Owner shall obtain and pay for the building permit,permanent easements,and rights of servitude. The Contractor shall be responsible for permits, licenses, or certificates necessary for the performance of the Work which were in force at the date of bid closing. ' 10.2.3 The Contractor shall give the required notices and comply with the laws, ordinances, rules,regulations,or codes which are or become in force during the performance of the Work and which relate to the Work,to the preservation of the public health, and to construction safety. 10.2.4 The Contractor shall not be responsible for verifying that the Contract Documents are in compliance with the applicable laws,ordinances,rules,regulations,or codes relating to the Work. If the Contract Documents ' are at variance therewith, or if, subsequent to the date of bid closing, changes are made to the applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or codes which require modification to the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall notify the Consultant in writing requesting direction immediately upon such variance or change becoming known. The Consultant will make the changes required to the Contract Documents as ' provided in GC 6.1 - CHANGES, GC 6.2 - CHANGE ORDER, and GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 29 10.2.5 If the Contractor fails to notify the Consultant in writing; and fails to obtain direction as required in ' paragraph 10.2.4; and performs work knowing it to be contrary to any laws,ordinances,rules,regulations, or codes; the Contractor shall be responsible for and shall correct the violations thereof; and shall bear the costs, expenses, and damages attributable to the failure to comply with the provisions of such laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or codes. GC 10.3 PATENT FEES ' 10.3.1 The Contractor shall pay the royalties and patent licence fees required for the performance of the Contract. The Contractor shall hold the Owner harmless from and against claims, demands, losses, costs, damages, , actions, suits, or proceedings arising out of the Contractor's performance of the Contract which are attributable to an infringement or an alleged infringement of a patent of invention by the Contractor or anyone for whose acts the Contractor may be liable. 10.3.2 The Owner shall hold the Contractor harmless against claims, demands, losses, costs, damages, actions, suits, or proceedings arising out of the Contractor's performance of the Contract which are attributable to an infringement or an alleged infringement of a patent of invention in executing anything for the purpose of the Contract,the model,plan,or design of which was supplied to the Contractor as part of the Contract Documents. GC 10.4 WORKERS' COMPENSATION ' 10.4.1 Prior to commencing the Work,Substantial Performance of the Work,and the issuance of the final certificate , for payment, the Contractor shall provide evidence of compliance with workers' compensation legislation at the Place of the Work, including payments due thereunder. 10.4.2 At any time during the term of the Contract, when requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall provide ' such evidence of compliance by the Contractor and Subcontractors. PART 11 INSURANCE—BONDS , GC 11.1 INSURANCE ' 11.1.1 Without restricting the generality of GC 12.1 - INDEMNIFICATION, the Contractor shall provide, maintain, and pay for the insurance coverages specified in GC 11.1 - INSURANCE. Unless otherwise stipulated,the duration of each insurance policy shall be from the date of commencement of the Work until the date of the final certificate for payment. Prior to commencement of the Work and upon the placement, renewal,amendment,or extension of all or any part of the insurance,the Contractor shall promptly provide the Owner with confirmation of coverage and, if required, a certified true copy of the policies certified by an authorized representative of the insurer together with copies of any amending endorsements. .1 General Liability Insurance: General liability insurance shall be in the joint names of the Contractor,the Owner, and the Consultant, , with limits of not less than $2,000,000 per occurrence and with a property damage deductible not exceeding $2,500. The insurance coverage shall not be less than the insurance required by IBC Form 2100, or its equivalent replacement, provided that IBC Form 2100 shall contain the latest edition of the relevant CCDC endorsement form. To achieve the desired limit, umbrella, or excess liability insurance may be used. All liability coverage shall be maintained for completed operations hazards from the date of Substantial Performance of the Work, as set out in the certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work,on an ongoing basis for a period of 6 years following Substantial Performance of the Work. Where , the Contractor maintains a single,blanket policy,the addition of the Owner and the Consultant is limited CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 30 ' to liability arising out of the Project and all operations necessary or incidental thereto. The policy shall be endorsed to provide the Owner with not less than 30 days notice in writing in advance of any cancellation, and of change or amendment restricting coverage. ' .2 Automobile Liability Insurance: Automobile liability insurance in respect of licensed vehicles shall have limits of not less than$2,000,000 ' inclusive per occurrence for bodily injury, death, and damage to property, covering all licensed vehicles owned or leased by the Contractor, and endorsed to provide the Owner with not less than 15 days notice in writing in advance of any cancellation, change or amendment restricting coverage. Where the policy ' has been issued pursuant to a government-operated automobile insurance system, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with confirmation of automobile insurance coverage for all automobiles registered in the name of the Contractor. ' .3 Aircraft and Watercraft Liability Insurance: Aircraft and watercraft liability insurance with respect to owned or non-owned aircraft and watercraft if ' used directly or indirectly in the performance of the Work, including use of additional premises, shall be subject to limits of not less than$2,000,000 inclusive per occurrence for bodily injury,death,and damage to property including loss of use thereof and limits of not less than $2,000,000 for aircraft passenger ' hazard. Such insurance shall be in a form acceptable to the Owner. The policies shall be endorsed to provide the Owner with not less than 15 days notice in writing in advance of cancellation, change, or amendment restricting coverage. ' .4 Property and Boiler and Machinery Insurance: (1) "All risks" property insurance shall be in the joint names of the Contractor, the Owner, and ' the Consultant,insuring not less than the sum of the amount of the Contract Price and the full value,as stated in the Supplementary Conditions,of Products that are specified to be provided by the Owner for incorporation into the Work, with a deductible not exceeding $2,500. The ' insurance coverage shall not be less than the insurance required by IBC Form 4042 or its equivalent replacement, provided that IBC Form 4042 shall contain the latest edition of the relevant CCDC endorsement form. The coverage shall be maintained continuously until 10 days after the date of the final certificate for payment. (2) Boiler and machinery insurance shall be in the joint names of the Contractor,the Owner, and the Consultant for not less than the replacement value of the boilers, pressure vessels, and i other insurable objects forming part of the Work. The insurance provided shall not be less than the insurance provided by the"Comprehensive Boiler and Machinery Form"and shall be maintained continuously from commencement of use or operation of the property insured and until 10 days after the date of the final certificate for payment. (3) The policies shall allow for partial or total use or occupancy of the Work. If because of such use or occupancy the Contractor is unable to provide coverage,the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing. Prior to such use or occupancy the Owner shall provide,maintain,and pay for property and boiler insurance insuring the full value of the Work,as in sub-paragraphs(1) and (2), including coverage for such use or occupancy and shall provide the Contractor with proof of such insurance. The Contractor shall refund to the Owner the unearned premiums applicable to the Contractor's policies upon termination of coverage. (4) The policies shall provide that, in the case of a loss or damage,payment shall be made to the Owner and the Contractor as their respective interests may appear. The Contractor shall act on behalf of the Owner for the purpose of adjusting the amount of such loss or damage payment with the insurers. When the extent of the loss or damage is determined, the ' Contractor shall proceed to restore the Work. Loss or damage shall not affect the rights and obligations of either party under the Contract except that the Contractor shall be entitled to ' CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 31 such reasonable extension of Contract Time relative to the extent of the loss or damage as the ' Consultant may recommend in consultation with the Contractor. (5) The Contractor shall be entitled to receive from the Owner, in addition to the amount due ' under the Contract, the amount at which the Owner's interest in restoration of the Work has been appraised, such amount to be paid as the restoration of the Work proceeds and as provided in GC 5.2 - APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT and GC 5.3 - PROGRESS PAYMENT. In addition the Contractor shall be entitled to receive from the , payments made by the insurer the amount of the Contractor's interest in the restoration of the Work. (6) In the case of loss or damage to the Work arising from the work of another contractor, or ' Owner's own forces,the Owner,in accordance with the Owner's obligations under paragraph 3.2.2.4 of GC 3.2-CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR OTHER CONTRACTORS,shall pay , the Contractor the cost of restoring the Work as the restoration of the Work proceeds and as provided in GC 5.2 - APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT and GC 5.3 - PROGRESS PAYMENT. .5 Contractors' Equipment Insurance: ' "All risks"contractors' equipment insurance covering construction machinery and equipment used by the ' Contractor for the performance of the Work,including boiler insurance on temporary boilers and pressure vessels, shall be in a form acceptable to the Owner and shall not allow subrogation claims by the insurer against the Owner. The policies shall be endorsed to provide the Owner with not less than 15 days notice in writing in advance of cancellation,change,or amendment restricting coverage. Subject to satisfactory ' proof of financial capability by the Contractor for self-insurance, the Owner agrees to waive the equipment insurance requirement. 11.1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for deductible amounts under the policies except where such amounts ' may be excluded from the Contractor's responsibility by the terms of GC 9.1 -PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY and GC 9.2 - DAMAGES AND MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY. ' 11.1.3 Where the full insurable value of the Work is substantially less than the Contract Price, the Owner may reduce the amount of insurance required or waive the course of construction insurance requirement. 11.1.4 If the Contractor fails to provide or maintain insurance as required by the Contract Documents, then the Owner shall have the right to provide and maintain such insurance and give evidence to the Contractor and the Consultant. The Contractor shall pay the cost thereof to the Owner on demand or the Owner may deduct the amount which is due or may become due to the Contractor. 11.1.5 All required insurance policies shall be with insurers licensed to underwrite insurance in the jurisdiction of the Place of the Work. ' GC 11.2 BONDS ' 11.2.1 The Contractor shall, prior to commencement of the Work or within the specified time, provide to the Owner any surety bonds required by the Contract. ' 11.2.2 Such bonds shall be issued by a duly licensed surety company authorized to transact a business of suretyship in the province or territory of the Place of the Work and shall be maintained in good standing until the ' fulfilment of the Contract. The form of such bonds shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the CCDC approved bond forms. CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 32 , PART 12 INDEMNIFICATION — WAIVER — WARRANTY GC 12.1 INDEMNIFICATION ' 12.1.1 The Contractor shall`indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Consultant, their agents and employees from and against claims, demands, losses, costs, damages, actions, suits, or proceedings (hereinafter called "claims"), by third parties that arise out of, or are attributable to, the Contractor's performance of the Contract provided such claims are: .1 attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property, and .2 caused by negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor or anyone for whose acts the Contractor may be liable, and .3 made in writing within a period of 6 years from the date of Substantial Performance of the Work as set out in the certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work, or within such shorter period as may be prescribed by any limitation statute of the province or territory of the Place of the Work. The Owner expressly waives the right to indemnity for claims other than those stated above. ' 12.1.2 The obligation of the Contractor to indemnify hereunder shall be limited to$2,000,000 per occurrence from the commencement of the Work until Substantial Per of the Work and thereafter to an aggregate ' limit of$2,000,000. 12.1.3 The Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, the Contractor's agents and employees from and against claims, demands, losses, costs, damages, actions, suits, or proceedings arising out of the ' Contractor's performance of the Contract which are attributable to a lack of or defect in title or an alleged lack of or defect in title to the Place of the Work. 12.1.4 GC 12.1 - INDEMNIFICATION shall govern over the provisions of paragraph 1.3.1 of GC 1.3 - RIGHTS AND REMEDIES or GC 9.2 - DAMAGES AND MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY. GC 12.2 WAIVER OF CLAIMS ' 12.2.1 Waiver of Claims by Owner As of the date of the final certificate for payment, the Owner expressly waives and releases the Contractor from all claims against the Contractor including without limitation those that might arise from the ' negligence or breach of contract by the Contractor except one or more of the following: .1 those made in writing prior to the date of the final certificate for payment and still unsettled; ' .2 those arising from the provisions of GC 12.1 - INDEMNIFICATION or GC 12.3 - WARRANTY; ' .3 those arising from the provisions of paragraph 9.3.5 of GC 9.3 - TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND MATERIALS and those arising from the Contractor bringing or introducing any toxic or hazardous substances and materials to the Place of the Work after the Contractor commences the Work. In the Common Law provinces GC 12.2.1.4 shall read as follows: ' .4 those made in writing within a period of 6 years from the date of Substantial Performance of the Work, as set out in the certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work, or within such shorter period as CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 33 may be prescribed by any limitation statute of the province or territory of the Place of the Work and ' those arising from any liability of the Contractor for damages resulting from the Contractor's performance of the Contract with respect to substantial defects or deficiencies in the Work for which the Contractor is proven responsible. ' As used herein substantial defects or deficiencies"means those defects or deficiencies in the Work which affect the Work to such an extent or in such a manner that a significant part or the whole of the Work is unfit for the purpose intended by the Contract Documents. In the Province of Quebec GC 12.2.1.4 shall read as follows: ' .4 those arising under the provisions of Article 2118 of the Civil Code of Quebec. 12.2.2 Waiver of Claims by Contractor t As of the date of the final certificate for payment,the Contractor expressly waives and releases the Owner from all claims against the Owner including without limitation those that might arise from the negligence or breach of contract by the Owner except: A those made in writing prior to the Contractor's application for final payment and still unsettled; and .2 those arising from the provisions of GC 9.3 - TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND , MATERIALS or GC 10.3 - PATENT FEES. 12.2.3 GC 12.2-WAIVER OF CLAIMS shall govern over the provisions of paragraph 1.3.1 of GC 1.3-RIGHTS ' AND REMEDIES or GC 9.2 - DAMAGES AND MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY. GC 12.3 WARRANTY , 12.3.1 The warranty period with regard to the Contract is one year from the date of Substantial Performance of ' the Work or those periods specified in the Contract Documents for certain portions of the Work or Products. 12.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper performance of the Work to the extent that the design and Contract Documents permit such performance. 12.3.3 Except for the provisions of paragraph 12.3.6,and subject to paragraph 12.3.2, the Contractor shall correct promptly,at the Contractor's expense,defects or deficiencies in the Work which appear prior to and during the warranty periods specified in the Contract Documents. 12.3.4 The Owner,through the Consultant,shall promptly give the Contractor notice in writing of observed defects and deficiencies that occur during the warranty period. t 12.3.5 The Contractor shall correct or pay for damage resulting from corrections made under the requirements of paragraph 12.3.3. 12.3.6 The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining Product warranties in excess of one year on behalf of the , Owner from the manufacturer. These Product warranties shall be issued by the manufacturer to the benefit of the Owner. ' CCDC 2- 1994 File 00712 34 , i I t Canadian construction documents committee The Canadian Construction Documents Committee is a joint committee composed of representatives appointed by: The Association of Consulting Engineers of Canada The Canadian Construction Association The Canadian Council of Professional Engineers ' The Committee of Canadian Architectural Councils Construction Specifications Canada Committee policy and procedures are directed and approved by the constituent organizations. ' This document has been endorsed by each of the above organizations. Enquiries should be directed to: ' The Secretary, Canadian Construction Documents Committee, , 85 Albert Street Ottawa, Ontario, Canada KIP 6A4 !i J i { I t 1 THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON OLDER ADULT COMMUNITY CENTRE 26 BEECH AVENUE BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO ' TENDER NO. CL 98-1 Gerr Construction Limited NAME OF FIRM R.R. #3 , Bowmanville, Ontario ADDRESS L1C 3R4 436-2018 436-5198 POSTAL CODE TELEPHONE NUMBER FAX NUMBER Joseph Gerrits NAME OF PERSON SIGNING FOR FIRM President POSITION OF PERSON SIGNING FOR FIRM ' TENDERS RECEIVED BY: The Office of the Clerk ' The Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington 40 Temperance Street Bowmanville, Ontario L1 C 3E6 7175-TFTP.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 ' TENDER FORM Page 1(R) The Office of the Clerk ' The Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington 40 Temperance Street Bowmanville, Ontario L1C 3E6 Re: OLDER ADULT COMMUNITY CENTRE THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON 26 BEECH AVENUE BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO TENDER NO. CL 98-1 ' Sir: 1.0 We Gerr Construction Limited agree for the ' (Company Name) Stipulated Price stated below to supply all necessary labour, materials, plant, equipment, services and overtime work as may be required for the execution and completion of all ' work in connection with the above referenced project for the Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington, in accordance with Instructions to Bidders, The Municipaiity of Clarington's Standard Terms and Conditions, the General Conditions, Supplementary General ' Conditions, Specifications and Drawings, prepared for that purpose by Barry • Bryan Associates (1991) Limited, Whitby, Ontario and to the entire satisfaction of the Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington: STIPULATED PRICE (exclusive of GST) M1 1-1,i• { f/ r,; �, �� Dollars (s il, 2 3 C C'c,c " ' 2.0 Further, to assist you with the necessary information for tax purposes, etc., the stipulated price includes the following: ' Provincial Sales Tax $ 11 6 3.0 Goods and Services Tax (GST) at 7% to be added to the Stipulated Price ' 4.0 The Stipulated Price includes CASH ALLOWANCES in the amount of $50,000 (Fifty Thousand Dollars) as listed in the Instructions to Bidders. ' 5.0 We agree the Owner reserves the right to accept or reject prices bid for the work or for any portion of the work. ' 6.0 We agree that the Owner reserves the right to take any financial benefit, from alternates submitted, into consideration in the evaluation of all tenders and the subsequent award of the Contract. 6.1 We propose to complete the work in 25 weeks following award of Tender. ' 7175A21W 1.03.vi x1 1 DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Page 2-R 7.0 We agree to complete all work including necessary overtime work pursuant to this Contract in the period required to meet the scheduled completion dates as specified. 8.0 We have received and included for Addenda No. to in the Stipulated Price. 9.0 We submit the following separate prices which are included in the Stipulated Price: (Separate prices shall exclude G.S.T.) l A. Modifications to existing basement stair (Stair 134) as detailed. $ 1500.00 -' B. Supply and installation of Folding Partition#1 between Dining and Activity Rooms including support all su g framin and track. $ 15000.0o C. Cost to construct new elevator shaft, as detailed, including foundations, underpinning and sump pit, complete. $ 20000.00 ' (not including Mechanical & Electrical) D. Supply and installation of electrically operated entrances, complete. $ 18000.00 E. Supply and install new hollow metal door #60 and screen #SC-7 $ 4500.00 10.0 We submit the following alternate prices which are not included in the Stipulated Price: (Alternate prices shall exclude G.S.T.) A. Supply and installation of all wall mounted vinyl handrails shown on the drawings and specified in Section 10950, $ 1500.00 ' including all solid wood backing and hardware. extra/credit B. Supply and installation of one hydraulic elevator, Dover ' Model Fleetwood 21H with front and rear opening as specified in Section 14241 two stops only with capability of $ being extended to the third floor extra slit Alternate elevator by h;:,_ C. Supply and install two windows Type 'E' in south wall of extra Activity Room 130 as shown including all cutting, patching, $ 000.on latches and trim. _ extra D. Supply, install and finish new strip maple hardwood flooring ' in Dining Room 118, and Activity Room 119, complete with recessed concrete slab, 6 mil polyethylene separation sheet $ x.00 and wood unde;dayment. extract E. Alternate price to supply and install vinyl clad wood windows as manufactured by Dashwood , in lieu of ' aluminum clad wood windows specified. (Marvin) $ 10000.00 Cl-' tXWcredit RLGG v�✓LL j- Y S� �l�i: :�'GL, — 7175A2001 JI.wpd ' LL it i t iz SC,t✓�[�" C'c �-'wt-c i��.,:� G DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Page 3 11.0 In the event that work extra to that included in the Contract is required, and is authorized in writing by the Owner, the Contractor will add the following percentages to the cost of the work. Overhead Profit tGeneral Contractor's Work 10 10 Subcontractor's Work 10 5 ' 12.0 We submit the names of subcontractors upon whose tender the stipulated price was based: TRADE FIRM ADDRESS Demolition Own Forces Excavation and Backfill Own Forces Asphalt Paving f _// ,r i ' Damp Proofing Own Forces Reinforcing Steel Concrete Finishing Own Forces Masonry T&J ' Miscellaneous Metals Structural Steel Steel Roof Deck j rct s Rough Carpentry Own Forces Finish Carpentry Own Forces Cabinet Work trcrt�',`� , Metal Roofing and Cladding E.P.D.M. Sheet Roofing Metal Flashing and Trim i Hollow Metal Doors&Frames C : L-1 14 L ' Wood Doors ^ - T- 1' v - Electrically Operated Entrances ' �✓^%� �'. Rolling Shutters Finish Hardware I .- Aluminum Windows and Screens '{ ✓A, rN• 1 7175-00200.w,d ' DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Page 4 TRADE FIRM ADDRESS Glass and Glazing Resilient Flooring Ceramic Tile ' Exterior Metal Stud Wall Systems (' ' Drywall and Acoustics r L Metal Toilet Partitions Painting Operable Walls Hydraulic Elevator(Alternate Price)LL Plumbing Amount Included in Tender Price s. 2S7c HVAC Amount Included in Tender Price Electrical ' Amount Included in Tender Price $ 13.0 We agree that when requested b the Consultant additional work will be erformed at 9 4 Y P following unit prices exclusive of Overhead and Profit which shall cover all charges for labour and materials, supervision, plant and tools. Deletions will be deducted from additions before these unit prices are applied. Credits will be deducted from extras before charges for overhead and profit are added. All work will be performed in accordance with 1 the Contract Documents. Provincial Sales Tax is included in these unit prices. Goods and Services Tax is not included in these unit prices. Breakdown of all taxes will be submitted later. ' Unit Prices for Additions and Deletions ' Nature of Wo Additions Deletions 1. Earth Excavation by machine, calculated in its natural bed, including disposal off the site per cubic metre. $15 . 00 $10. 00 1 7175-00200.Y4pa 1 DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Page 5 Nature of Work Additions Deletions 2 Earth excavation by hand calculated in its natural bed, including disposal off the ' site per cubic metre. 150. 00 100 . 00 3. Trenching up to 600 mm deep per cubic 12.0 0 8 . 0 0 metre. 1 4. Trenching up to 1200 mm deep per cubic metre. 12.00 8 . 00 5. Trenching ver 1200 mm deep per cubic 9 PP metre. 15.00 10 . 00 6. OPSS Granular 'A' backfill (supply, place, and compact) per cubic metre. 40. 00 2 5 .0 0 L7. OPSS Granular 'B' backfill (supply, place, and compact) per cubic metre. 35. 00 2 0 . 0 0 1 8. Type 'C' Sand Fill, (supply, place, and compact) per cubic metre. 34.00 19 . 0 0 9. Reinforcing Steel, supply and place, per 2500.00 1500 . 00 metric tonne. ' 10. 25 MPa concrete-in-place to walls, footings or piers per cubic metre. 200.00 13 0 . 0 0 11. 35 MPa concrete-in-place to floors per 150.00 100 .00 cubic metre. 12. Vertical formwork in place including all accessories and stripping per square metre of face area. 100 .00 50 . 00 13. Concrete curbs as detailed per lineal 39 .00 30 . 00 metre. 1 14. Concrete sidewalks, 100 mm thick including sub-grade, compaction and all o ' accessories as specified per cubic 3.5 0 2. 5 0 metre. 7175-00200.wpd 1 DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Page 6 Nature of Work Additions Nletions i15. HL8 Asphalt paving, supply, place and compact per cubic metre. 120.00 80 . 00 16. HL3 Asphalt paving, supply, place and compact per cubic metre. 130.00 90 .00 ' 17. Duplex general purpose 15A, 120V receptacle on local circuit within 20 metres, each. 14.0 We have carefully examined all the Tender Documents, have visited the Site, and have a clear and comprehensive knowledge of the Work required under this Contract and of all the working conditions and schedule requirements. 15.0 We the undersigned agree that this Tender is valid and irrevocable and subject to 1 acceptance by the Owner without notice to us for a period of Sixty (60) days from date of receipt of Tender, and that if notified of award of Contract, we will within ten (10) days of receipt of notification of Acceptance of Tender: ja) Furnish to the Owner, in care of the Consultant, copies of insurance policies as required by the Conditions of the Contract. b) Furnish to the Owner a breakdown of the Stipulated Price in such form and detail as required by the Owner for progress payments, taxation and internal accounting ' purposes. c) Furnish to the Owner, a Performance Bond and a Labour and Material Payment Bond, issued by a Surety acceptable to the Owner, each for an amount equalling 100% of the Tender Price to ensure the full and proper completion of the Contract. d) Commence the work forthwith after the receipt of a letter of intent, contract or tPurchase Order or when notified to do so by the Consultant and/or Owner and to execute the work continuously to completion. Time shall be the essence of the Contract and the work shall be completed in accordance with the schedule outlined ' in the Instructions to Bidders. e) Furnish to the Owner a Clearance Certificate of the Workers' Compensation Board. f) Submit within three(3)days of award of the contract a detailed construction schedule to the Owlier for approval. g) Furnish to the Owner a copy of our Corporate Safety Policy. 7175-00200.wpa 1 ' DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Page 7 16.0 Wherever the plural is used herein, the same shall be read and construed as if the singular had been used where the facts and context so requires and as if all necessary grammatical changes had been made. 17.0 Bid Security: Attached to this tender form is a bid deposit in the amount of $50,000.00. I/We the P $ undersigned agree that if I/We withdraw this tender or default in executing a contract or providing the required Performance Security in accordance with the terms of the bid documents, the Owner shall have sustained liquidated damages in the amount equal to the difference between the amount of this bid and the amount for which the Owner legally contracts with another party to perform the work, if the latter amount exceeds the former up to a maximum of$50,000.00 and such amount shall become the property of the Owner. 18.0 Bonds: Attached to this Tender Form is an agreement to bond in the amount of 100% for Performance, and 100% for Materials and Labour Payment. 19.0 Safety Form: Attached to this Tender is a completed copy of the Municipality of Clarington Health and Safety Practice Form. 71 7s-oosoo.wpa DIVISION 0 ' SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Page 8 20.0 Signature and Seal of Bidder: R.R. #3 Gerr Construction Limited Street Address Name of Company Bowmanville City or Town Sign to of Company Offitial L1C 3K4 I SeDh J rri fis . President Postal Code Name and Title 905-436-2018 Telephone No. Signature of Company Official February 4 , 1998 Date Name and Title SEAL ' 905-436-5198 Facsimile No. 1020 07838RT ' Tenderer's G.S.T. Registration No. If the biddin g firm is a limited company, the company seal must appear on this Bid Form :vith the signature(s) of the proper signing official(s). 7175-00200.wpd 1 THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON CONTRACT CL 98-1 OLDER ADULT COMMUNITY CENTRE 26 BEECH AVENUE, BOWMANVILLE APPENDIX'A' - BIDDERS EXPERIENCE FORM Bidders shall complete this form and attach to the Tender Form. Include experience on projects similar in size and scope to this project. ' YEAR 1997 DESCRIPTION OF CONTRACT Interior Alterations NAME OF ORGANIZATION Mackies Moving Systems 72-81603 CONTACT PERSON &TELEPHONE NO. P. Crozier ' ARCHITECT&TELEPHONE NO. R.L. Brooks & Assoc. 571-2090 VALUE OF CONTRACT 305, 000. 00 YEAR 1997 DESCRIPTION OF CONTRACT 3rd Floor Addition & Renovations NAME OF ORGANIZATION Bowmanville Professional Bldg. Ltd. ' CONTACT PERSON &TELEPHONE NO. 623-3834 ARCHITECT&TELEPHONE NUMBER J.R. Freethy Architect 623-7476 ' VALUE OF CONTRACT 1 tYEAR 1997 DESCRIPTION OF CONTRACT Durham Regional Council Chambers Renovation NAME OF ORGANIZATION Regional Municipality of Durham CONTACT PERSON &TELEPHONE NO. H. Ramml e r 668-7721 ARCHITECT&TELEPHONE NO. Architect _ ' VALUE OF CONTRACT $374 ,000.00 r Company Name Gerr Construction Limited ' APPENDIX 'B' CONTRACTOR SAFETY 1.1 POLICY AND PROCEDURE POLICY: Contractors and Sub-contractors are responsible to ensure that their personnel are updated on all safety concerns of the workplace and are aware of the safety requirements as required by the Contractor under the Occupational Health and Safety Act. Safety ' performance will be a consideration in the awarding of contract. Under the Occupational Health and Safety Act (Section 23 (1), (2)), it is the constructor's responsibility to ensure that: ' the measures and procedures prescribed by the Occupational Health and Safety Act and the Regulations are carried out on the rp oiect; ' every employer and every worker performing work on the rp oject complies with the Occupational Health and Safety Act and the Regulations (under the Act); and - the health and safety of workers on the rp oject is protected. • Where so prescribed, a constructor shall, before commencing any work on a project, give to a Director notice in writing of the project containing such information as may be prescribed. ' DEFINITIONS: Contractor-any individual or firm engaged by the Municipality to do work on behalf of the ' Municipality. ' Project- means a construction project, whether public or private, including: • the construction of a building, bridge, structure, industrial establishment, mining plant, shaft tunnel, caisson, trench, excavation, highway, railway, street, runway, ' parking lot, cofferdam, conduit, sewer, watermain, service connection, telegraph, telephone or electrical cable, pipe line, duct or well, or any combination thereof, • the moving of a building or structure, and • any work or undertaking, or lands or appurtenances used in connection with construction. Contractor Safety.wpd 1 APPENDIX `B' CONTRACTOR SAFETY POLICY AND PROCEDURE Continued... Construction - includes erection, alteration, repair, dismantling, demolition, structural maintenance, painting, land clearing, earth moving, grading, excavating, trenching, digging, boring, drilling, blasting, or concreting, the installation of any machinery or plant, and any work or undertaking in connection with a project. Constructor- means a person who undertakes a project for an owner and includes an owner who undertakes all or part of a project by himself or by more than one employer. ' Project Manager-means the municipal management representative who has responsibility for a contract. PROCEDURE: The following items are required before any Contractors are hired by the Municipality: a) Before beginning a project, the project manager or delegate must determine whether any designated substances/hazardous materials are (or will be) present at the site and prepare a list of all these substances. b) The project manager or delegate must include, as part of the request for tender/quotations, a copy of the above mentioned list. The list of designated substances/hazardous materials must be provided to all prospective constructors and/or contractors. C) The request for tender/quotations will require prospective contractors to include a list of the designated substances/hazardous materials that will be brought onto the ' work site and material safety data sheets. d) Before awarding a contract, contractor(s) will be required to complete and sign the ' Health and Safety Practice Form (Schedule "A"). The Purchasing Office will maintain all contractors safety performance records. ' e) As part of the tender/quotation conditions, before award of a contract, the contractor will be required to provide proof that all workers involved with the project have the proper WHMIS training, as required by the Occupational Health and Safety Act. 0 CoMractor Safetympd 2 ' APPENDIX `B' CONTRACTOR SAFETY POLICY AND PROCEDURE Continued... As f) A part of the tender/quotation conditions, before award of a contract, the ' contractor must provide details of their Health and Safety program. g) The project manager or delegate must provide the successful contractor with a workplace orientation which will include, but not limited to identifying known potential hazards, hazardous material inventory and material safety data sheets for the sites. A workplace orientation/Job Safety Instruction Checklist to be completed. ' h) Before the start of the assignment, the following documentation will be provided to the successful contractor, by the project manager or delegate: i) Copies of the Municipal Corporate Health and Safety Program ii) Departmental health and safety policies iii) Workplace procedures regarding health and safety practices. The contractor has the responsibility to provide any and all prescribed personal protective equipment for their own workers, to include as a minimum but not limited ' to hard hats and safety boots. If a worker(s) fails to comply with any program, policy, rule or request regarding health and safety, that person(s) is not allowed on the site until the person(s) complies. j) The Municipality will retain the right to document contractors for all health and safety warnings and/or to stop any contractors' work if any of the previously mentioned items are not in compliance. Similarly, the Municipality will have the ' right to issue warnings and/or to stop work if there are any violations by the contractor of the Occupational Health and Safety Act, Municipal Health and Safety programs, policies, rules, and/or warnings and/or stop work orders can be given to contractors using Contractor Health and Safety Warnings/Stop Work Order Form (Schedule "B"). k) Where applicable, the Municipality will retain the right to allow municipal employees to refuse to work in accordance with the established policy and the Occupational Health and Safety Act, in any unsafe conditions. 1) The Purchasing Department will maintain current certificates of clearance until all monies owing have been paid to the contractor. m) Responsibility for ensuring contractor compliance to this policy falls upon the s project manager or designate. This will include identification, evaluation and ' control practices and procedures for hazards and follow-up and issuing of Contractor Health and Safety Waming/Stop Work Orders. Contractor Saretympd 3 APPENDIX `B' CONTRACTOR SAFETY POLICY AND PROCEDURE Continued... HEALTH AND A S FETY PRACTICE FORM To Contractor(s): The Municipality of Clarington is committed to a healthy and safe working environment for all workers. To ensure the Municipal workplace is a healthy and safe working environment, contractors, constructors, and subcontractors must have knowledge of and operate in compliance with the Occupational Health and Safety Act and any other legislation ' pertaining to employee health and safety. In order to evaluate your company's health and safety experience, please provide the ' accidentrincident and/or Workers' Compensation (WCB) information noted below, where applicable. • The New Experimental Experience Rating (NEER) - The WCB experience rating system for non-construction rate groups not applicable ------------------------------------------------------------- • The Council Amended Draft#7 (CAD-7) Rating -The WCB experience rating system for construction rate groups ' -0 .388 ------------------------------------------------------------- ' Injury frequency performance for the last two years - This may be available from the contractor's trade association not available • Has the contractor receive any Ministry of Labour warnings or orders in the last two ' years? (If the answer is yes, please include the infraction). Nn • Confirmation of Independent Operator Status ' - The WCB independent operator number assigned: not applicable (Bidders to include the letter confirming this status and number from WCB with i their bid submission) Contractor Safety.wpd 4 r ' APPENDIX `B' CONTRACTOR SAFETY POLICY AND PROCEDURE Continued... CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY As a contractor working for the Municipality of Clarington, I/we will comply with all procedures and requirements of the Occupational Health and Safety Act, Municipal safety policies, department and site specific ,policies and procedures and other applicable legislation or regulations. I/we will work safely with skill and care so as to prevent an accidental injury to ourselves, fellow employees and members of the public. The contractor/successful tenderer certifies that it its employees, its subcontractors and their employees, a) are aware of their respective duties and obligations under the Occupational Health and Safety Act, as amended form time to time, and all Regulations thereunder(the "Act'); and b) have sufficient knowledge and training to perform all matters required pursuant to this contract/tender safely and in compliance with the Act. ' 2. In the performance of all matters required pursuant to this contract/tender, the contractor/successful tenderer shall, ' a) act safely and comply in all respects to the Act, and b) ensure that its employees, its subcontractors and their employees act ' safely an complying all respects with the Act. 3. The contractor/successful tenderer shall rectify any unsafe act or practice and any non-compliance with the Act at its expense immediately upon being notified by any person of the existence of such act, practice or non-compliance. 4. The contractor/successful tenderer shall permit representatives of the Municipality and the Health and Safety Committee on site at any time or times for the purpose of inspection to determine compliance with this contactor/tender. ' 5. No act or omission by any representative of the Municipality shall be deemed to be an assumption of any of the duties or obligations of the contractor/successful tenderer or any of its subcontractors under the Act. ' contractor safety.wpd 5 � 1 APPENDIX 'B' 1 CONTRACTOR SAFETY POLICY AND PROCEDURE Continued... 6. The contractor/successful tenderer shall indemnify and save harmless the Municipality, . 1 a) from any loss , inconvenience, damage or cost to the Municipality which may result from the contractor/successful tenderer or any of its employees, its subcontractors or their employees failing to act safely or to.comply in all respects with the Act in the performance of any matters required pursuant to this contract/tender; b) against any action or claim, and costs related thereto, brought against the Municipality by any person arising out of any unsafe act or practice or any non-compliance with the Act by the contractor/successful tenderer or any of its employees, its subcontractors or their employees in the performance of any matter required pursuant to this contract/tender, and 1 c) from any and all charges, fines, penalties, and costs that may be incurred or paid by the Municipality (or any of its council members or employees) shall be made a party to any charge under the Act in relation to any violation of the Act arising out of this contract/tender. ' __ Gerr_ Construction Limited Jose ------------------------h Gerrits ------------------ Contractor Name of Person Signing for Contractor ' ---------------------------------- February_ 4 , 199 8Signat r df Contractor Date 1 1 1 Contractor SafetymMd 6 1 r APPENDIX 'B' CONTRACTOR SAFETY POLICY AND PROCEDURE Continued... Schedule B CONTRACTOR HEALTH AND SAFETY WARNING/STOP WORK ORDER The purpose of this form is to: (Issuer to check one of the following) Provide warning to the contractor to immediately discontinue the unsafe work ❑ practice described below. Direct the contractor to immediate) cease all work being performed under this (� Y 9 P contract due to the unsafe work practice described below. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THIS WARNINGISTOP WORK ORDER SHALL CONSTITUTE A BREACH OF CONTRACT PART"A'-DETAILS OF CONTRACT CONTRACT/P.O. # DESCRIPTION: NAME OF FIRM: 1 Contractor Safety.wpd 7 APPENDIX 'B' CONTRACTOR SAFETY POLICY AND PROCEDURE Continued... PART'B"-DETAILS OF INFRACTION TO BE COMPLETED BY ISSUER DATE&TIME OF INFRACTION: ' DESCRIPTION OF INFRACTION INCLUDING LOCATION: ORDER GIVEN BY MUNICIPALITY: DID THE CONTRACTOR COMPLY WITH THIS ORDER? i DATE &TIME OF COMPLIANCE: ISSUED TO: CONTRACTOR'S EMPLOYEE TITLE ISSUED BY: MUNICIPAL EMPLOYEE DEPARTMENT TITLE PART'C"-ADDITIONAL COMMENTS THIS SECTION IS TO BE USED INTERNALLY TO RECORD ADDITIONAL COMMENTS SUBSEQUENT TO ISSUING THE WARNING/STOP WORK ORDER,I.E.DATE AND TIME WORK RESUMED,FURTHER ACTION TAKEN,ETC. Contractor Safety.wpd 8 ' ZURICH INSURANCE COMPANY OF CANADA HEAD OFFICE FOR CANADA 200 UNIVERSITY AVENUE TORONTO, ONTARIO M5G 1S7 BID BOND No. YY1943046-003 $1,000,000.00 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS THAT GERR CONSTRUCTION LIMITED as Principal hereinafter called the Principal, and ZURICH INSURANCE COMPANY OF CANADA, a corporation created and existing under the laws of Switzerland, and duly authorized to transact the business of Suretyship in CANADA as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto The Regional Municipality of Clarington as Obligee hereinafter called the Obligee, in the amount of Fifty Thousand Dollars ($50,000.00) lawful money of Canada, for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, the Principal and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a written tender to the Obligee, dated the 4th day of February,1998 for Older Adult Community Centre, Bowmanville, Ontario. - NOW, THEREFOR, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that if the aforesaid Principal shall have the tender accepted within sixty (60) days from the closing date of tender and the said Principal will, within the time required, enter into a formal contract and give the specified security to secure the performance of the terms and conditions of the Contract, then his obligation shall be null and void otherwise the Principal and - the Surety will pay unto the Obligee the difference in money between the amount of the bid of the said Principal and the amount for which the Obligee legally contracts with another party to perform the work if the latter amount be in excess of the former. The Principal and the Surety shall not be liable for a greater sum than the specified penalty of this Bond. Anv suit under this Bond must be _instituted before the expiration of six months from the date of ,this Bond. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have Signed and Sealed this Bond this 2nd day of February, 1998 . SIGNED and SEALED GERR C NST CTION LIMITED In the presence of ztz (Seal) r � � Principal ZURICH IN COMPANY OF CANADA SIIF--TY BY (Seal) Caroline MacColl-Vysma, Attorney-in-fact ICCDC 220-1982 Endorsed by: ACEC CCA CCPE CSC RAIC Approved by: INSURANCE BUREAU OF CANADA ZURICH INSURANCE COMPANY OF CANADA HEAD OFFICE FOR CANADA ' 200 UNIVERSITY AVENUE TORONTO, ONTARIO M5G 1S7 Bid Date: February 4, 1998 Bond No. : YY1943046-003 AGREEMENT TO BOND ' Gerr Construction Limited (CONTRACTOR) has submitted a written tender to The Regional Municipality of Clarington (OBLIGEE) 1 in consideration of the Obligee accepting the tender and executing an agreement with the Contractor for Older Adult Community Centre, Bowmanville, Ontario. We, Zurich Insurance Company of Canada Suret y, agree to is=u e for the Contractor the following bond(s) : (a) Performance Bond of (( %) of the contract price . (b) Labour and Material Payment Bond 'of ;100 °s) of the contract price. jProvided, however, that application for said bond(s) must be made to the Surety. within (60) days from closing of Tender, otherwise this agreement shall be null and void. Dated this 2nd day of February, 1998 . ZURICH INSURANCE ANY OF A t Caroline MacColl-Vysma , Attorney-in-fact ' OLDER ADULT COMMUNITY CENTRE PAGE PTA-1 MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON February 9, 1998 TENDER CL98-1 POST TENDER ADDENDUM NO. I i ADDITIONAL PRICES Add cost to complete additional Second Floor renovations as shown on Drawing SKA10, SKA13, and SKA14, including additional mechanical and electrical work shown; and including all $ 15 ,000-.00 ` twork described on page PTA-4 and PTA-8 (Appendix`A'). 2. Waterproof elevator pit for extent shown on drawing SKS7 and. SKS8, including water stops. Refer to description of work on page $_ 1,000.00 PTA-4. Revise door No 25 as shown on drawing SKA11. Door to be $ 75 .00 double swing with frame to suit. Modify hardware as necessary. CLARIFICATION. The following items may or may not affect the Tender price. Clearly indicate for each item as applicable, "Ertra", "Credit", or "NIC 1. Revise second floor hollow metal screen SC7 as shown on $ CR 150 .00 drawing SKA10. I 2. Spray applied polyurethane insulation(Section 07218)is to be provided over concrete block inner wythe at all masonry cavity $ N/C walls as detailed on the drawings. 3. Demolition Drawings: All flooring to be removed and identified by note#12 on the Demolition Plans will be removed by the $ N/C Contractor. 4. Provide 1/4" plywood underlay over all existing hardwood floors $ N/C scheduled to receive resilient or sheet flooring. Name of Tenderer Gerr Construction i ted - 1 ' POST TENDER ADDENDUM NO. 1 (cont'd) Page PTA-2 1 DELETIONS/REDUCTIONS 1. Delete resilient sheet flooring in Activity Room #127, Activity Room#130, Storage Room#128 and Storage Room#131. Sand and refinish existing hardwood flooring with three coats of $ CR 5 ,500-00 urethane. 2. Reduce allowance for carpet type 1 from $25.00/sq. yd to $20.00/sq. yd. $ CR 1,500-00 1 3. Reduce allowance for carpet type 2 from $34.00/sq. yd to $26.00/sq. yd. $ CR 1,200.00 4. Delete emoval of existing ass screen and door at existing main g gl entrance Vestibule. Refer to drawing SKAl2. wood doors $ CR 200. 00 1 n and disposal of Office structure above grade at 5. Delete demolition p '�' north side of building including mechanical and electrical services. Demolition by owner. Refer to drawing SKAl2. $ CR 3 ,000 -.00 6. Delete entirely, Garbage Room#1 17, (refer to separate items for sprinklers, HVAC and electrical). Roof to remain to form canopy for Stair exit. Refer.to-drawing SKA15. $ CR 7 ,500 .00 7. Delete track, hanger steel and bulkhead for f=uture operable partition 92 in Activity Room A 119. S CR 5 ,000 - 00 8. Delete two (2)new windows type `E' on south wall of Activity Room#127. Delete cutting, patching lintels and trim. $ C R 2 ,000.00 9. Delete three(3) new windows type 'A' on north wall of Dining Room#118. Delete lintels and add wall construction as detailed. $ CR 3 ,000 -00 1 10. Change.two (2)Bow windows type `B' to casement type, similar in appearance to type `A'. Width to be 8'-7", 4 panel, with outer I two panels operable. $ CR 1,000 -00 Name of Tenderer Gerr Construction Limited POST TENDER ADDENDUM NO. 1 cont'd Page PTA-3 Note: the following items no. 12, 13, 14 and 15 refer to all windows originally specified, including those noted above. 11. Section 08610: Supply and install aluminum clad redwood frame windows as manufactured by REPLA in lieu of specified products. $ N/C 12. Change finish for aluminum clad windows from"custom" colour to manufacturers standard white or sandalwood. $ CR 1,000 -00 13. Change all windows where applicable to nearest manufacturers standard size units, not custom sizes as specified and detailed. $ -CR 2,000 .00 ' 14. Delete brickmould on all windows. $ Cr 500.00 15. Section 08210: Change all interior wood doors,from stain grade red oak veneer,to paint grade birch. Paint all doors in lieu of stain. $ CR 500.00 16. Reuse existing excavated material for backfill below landscaped ' $ CR 1 .0 0 0 . 0 0 areas. 17. ' Mo&fiy cabinetwork as follows: Refer to drawing A9.1 17.1 Delete all references to 3/4" plywood. Use 3/4" particle board per AVIVIAC standards. Finish all cabinet interiors with melamine. Delete metal pilasters and use line holes with metal clip shelf supports, Use 125° hinges on doors. $ CR 9 ,000 -00 17.2 ELEV 3/A2.2: Delete entirely, all cabinets. $ CR 5 , 500 - 00 1.7.3 ELEV 3/A2.2: Delete upper cabinets only. $ CR 1,700-00 1 17.4 ELEV 7/A2.2, 8/A2.2 Change height of splash backs at washroom ' vanities to 4". (Include cost for additional ceramic wall tile). $ CR 200 .00 17.5 ELEV 10/A2.2: Delete entirely, shelving unit at Receiving 9116_ $ CR 3 ,600 -00 Refer to drawing A9.2 17.6 ELEV 5/A2.2: Delete display case. $ CR 3 ,700-00 . r Name of Tenderer Gerr Construction Limited ' POST TENDER ADDENDUM NOA (cont'd) Page PTA-4 Door#58 18. Delete entirely Elevator machine room including donor,walls and all finishes. Leave Basement activity rooms as is. Delete elevator shaft and pit including all underpinning. Delete duct shaft to roof. Delete elevator structure above roof of existing building including all cutting and patching, masonry, metal cladding and-roofing. Delete sump pit and cover. Delete sump pump, oil interceptor and all piping, backflow preventer, controls and wiring. Delete power supply to elevator. Delete new electrical services in basement activity rooms except emergency/exit lighting and fire alarm ' devices. SCR 35 ,000.00 STRUCTURAL WORK ti nal items on e 1 Include pricing in addr o pace i page S.l To be read in conjunction with drawing SKS7& SKSB Existing footings to be underpinned in first pour and the 8" second pour as part of 4 sided pit pour. Install waterproofing membrane between two pours and on earth side of south and east walls. Waterproofing to be: W.R Meadows or Monsey-Bakor reinforced 40 mil membrane with primers and adhesives as required. Add 6"x 6"stone filled trenches placed below pit floor and footings to drain to perimeter the and sump. pricing Add PVC water stops. pricing included on pge 1 r . S.2 To be read in conjunction with drawings SKS9, SKS 1 O; SKS I l & SKS 12 Shore, cut off and reinforce existing O.W.S.J.'s. Removal of 9'-2" of existing roof deck. Extend masonry wall to r new upper roof level. Increase thickened slab footing size and width to support upper wall (extend new footing size to support future corridor to south r side of elevator shaft). Add bond beam and shelf angle at existing roof level to support upper wall brick veneer. Similar to detail 7/S2.4. I Add C6 floor and roof framing. Pocket into existing walls. Add W8x24 beam at roof level, Grid line 7a, to replace load bearing masonry wall. ' Extend column 7a/G To support W8 beam at roof level. Pricing included°" e t 1 Name of Tenderer Gerr Construction Limited r - r ' POST TENDER ADDENDUM NO. 1 (cont'd) Page PTA-5 ' MECHANICAL (additions and deletions) M1. Adjust tender allowance price carried for Durham Region connections for Sanitary, water and sprinkler service connections to reflect a total allowance of$20,000.00. S Add 15,000.00 ' M2. Revise layout of buried services(shown on Architectural drawings) to new layout as detailed on sketch AM-1 attached. S N/C (excludes Items M6 & M8) M3. Delete supply and installation of four(4) humidifiers including all drain piping and controls. S CR 15 ,000.00 ! M4. Delete supply and installation of kitchen exhaust hood, fire suppression system, ductwork, insulation, exhaust fan, make-up air ' unit and controls. Include deletion of framing steel, roof curb and flashings. S CR 27 ,000 .00 M5. Delete supply and installation of all sprinkler work shown. S CR 1,500 .00 M6. Add the supply and installation of a new 2" type K sprinkler water supply from the property line to the basement mechanical room. S - Add 1,500.00 M7. Delete the supply and installation of the 6" PVC sanitary main from the property line to-the basement. (assume that S CR 600..0 0 new water service is still required) . M8. Add the supply and installation of a new 1200 mm diameter precast concrete manhole inside the property line(approximately 7 feet deep) complete with ladder and cast iron cover. _ S Add 1,500.00 M9. Delete the supply and installation of CO2 controls on HVAC-1 and HVAC-2. S CR 11,500.00 M 10. Add 1-1/2" check valve, shut off valve and balancing valve to the 1-1/2" sump pump discharge pipe from the oil interceptor. S N/A MI 1. Delete the supply and installation of the refrigerated water cooler including drain connection and water supply line. S CR 1,500.00 ' Name of Tenderer Gerr Construction Limited ' POST TENDER ADDENDUM NO. 1 (cont'd) Page PTA-6 ' M 12 Delete relocation of one existing radiator on north wall of Corridor $ CR 200.00 135. M13_ Delete exhaust fan EF-6, louvre and damper L UD 1 at Garbage Room 117. $ CR 2,000.00 ELECTRICAL(additions and deletions) El. Delete all new electrical service to tennis courts. $ CR 6,000.00 1 E2. Add one(1)1 exit light at Corridor 112, east of door#25. $ CR 325.00 ' E3. Delete all electrical work associated with Kitchen exhaust and make up air systems. $ CR 285.00 E4. Delete lighting, force flow heater and exhaust fan controls at -Garbage Room 117. $ CR 375 .00 1 E5. Delete power supply to Drinking fountain. $ CR 100 -00 E6. Delete fusible disconnects and feeders for four(4) Humidifiers (HU-1, H`J-3, HU-? and HU-5) $ CR 975.00 ' Name of Tenderer Gerr Construction Limited POST TENDER ADDENDUM NO. 1 (cont'd) Page PTA-7 The undersigned agrees that the Municipality of Clarington may accept or reject any of the offered Post Tender Addendum pricing items, including any items suggested by the undersigned. We agree that the Municipality of Clarington may award the Tender for the Clarington Older Adult Centre, Tender CL98-1 based on any ' combination of Tender prices, Alternate Prices, Separate Prices and Post Tender Addendum Prices as they may choose. We agree that the Municipality of Clarington may take Bidders References into consideration in the award of the Tender: ' We agree that the Municipality of Clarington may reject any or all Tenders. iSIGNATURE AND SEAL OF BIDDER: Company name: Gerr Construction Limited Address: 3386 Solina Rd. N. , Bowmanville, Ontario. Postal Code: L1C 3K4 ' Signature: 41A, Name and title: �. /Qerrits P Eng. President Date: r ebruary 12 , 1998 Company seal ' Attach to this Post Tender Addendum, any additional suggested cost sm�ing items for the Owner's consideration. . 1 POST TENDER ADDENDUM NO.1 Appendix `A" Page PTA-8 1 Appendix to drawing Include the following work in Additional price item no.xon page PTA-] SKA l0 ' Second floor renovations to be included: 1. Remove existing doors, walls and finishes shown on SKA13 ' 2. ' Remove part exist roof and make structural modifications shown. 3. Construct new partitions. 4. Add new doors 66,67 and 68 as follows: ' All doors: 210x70 SCW Type `M'x5 3/4" PS FR, paint. 1 '/z pr butts BB 1279x4.5x4x619 Door 66: 20 minute ULC labeled. ' 1 Lockset D70PDxRHOxASAx626 Door 67: 1 Passage set D10SxRHOxASAx626 1 Closer 4040Cush x 689 ' Door 68: 1 Privacy set D40SxRHOxASAx626 5. Cut opening in building wall. Install new lintel. Make good floor assembly to match existing. 6. Construct corridor addition. Wall and roof construction to match adjacent stairwell. Floor and roof to be 1 hour fire rated with 2 layers 5/8" type x gypsum board at underside of floor and roof structure, c/w bulkheads. Membrane roof as specified Kith scupper drain to lower roof below. 7. Finishes to match adjacent stairwell, and as noted on drawings. 8. Emergency and exit lights. Two duplex receptacles. 9. Provide 4 recessed flourescent fixtures to match stainvell c/w ' switch and all wiring. 10. Two (2) 750 kW force flow electric heaters in corridor. 11. Remove existing washroom door and window_ Fill wall with construction to match existing. 1 i Paint all walls. Make good existing finishes. 13. Make good existing lower roof. Provide all flashings. pricing included on page 1 l . w GERR. CONSTRUCTION LIMITED 3386 SOLINA ROAD NORTH ' R.R.3, BOWMANVILLE,ONTARIO L1 C 3K4 PHONE: ( )436-2018 FAX:( )436-5198 February 13 , 1998 ' Additional Cost Saving Proposals 1. Section 67530- ' a) delete tapered insulation CR $2,000.00 b) delete 5 yr. warranty, add 2 yr. ' watertight warranty by roofer. . CR $ 500.00 c) change 2 layers of 1h" insulation to 1 layer of 2Y" CR $ 800.00 2 Section 07411, 07610 - ' a) Change to .019mm aluminum soffit CR $ 1,000.00 b) Delete prefab metal upstand curb, substitute with wood framing CR $ 1,500.00 c) Change to 26 guage ribbed metal roofing (exposed fastening) CR $ 4,000.00 3. Change cavity wall insulation to 2" Ca.vitymate instead of sprayed polyurethane CR $ 600.00 ' 4,. Delete ceramic tile work CR $ 6,500.00 5. - Change acoustic ceiling tile to _standard I6; 5500- fissured tile CR $ 6. Section 08720 - ' a) Change to pairs of swing type doors (1&2) with 1 automatic operator each pair CR $ ��� 00a . � 5foLACAVL'V( Co/Op r b) Change to standard aluminum anodize ' finish (per o�;Ji'n.: l ten.le� �:a�e J CR $ oZ ,000. 1T2� 7. Change brick to Max size CR $ 4�/t)00. MEMBER ' ar., dca > d �RHAM 4''r, OLDER ADULT COWAUNTrY CENTRE PAGE PTA2-1 oft MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON February 17, 1998 TENDER CL98-1 POST TENDER ADDENDUM NO. 2 DELFT Iqs. The following items are to be priced exactly as described and based on the original Tender. !'rices are not to take into account any previous deletions(PTA-1)and are to be read independent of any other ' clarification or deletion. 19. Delete entire building addition north of grid line 7 including Lobby, Lounge, Reception, Stairwell, Garbage Room and ' Receiving Room.Provide double exit door at north end of Corridor 110 on Line 7. Delete second floor addition. (Price does not include additional second floor Corridor described in Post ' tender Addendum No.l.) Delete all electrical and mechanical services including lighting, sprinklers, hvac system(including HVAC-5). ' Delete demolition and removal of foundations below grade for existing north office annex. $-6s. 0 20. Delete entire building addition between grids A-C, 1-3 including structure, finishes, lighting, ductwork,grilles and diffuscrs(cap ' ductwork at line 3 for future), Delete Storage Rooms 120 and $ '77. © o-v 121. Move south wall from line 1 to line 3. ' 21. Delete all interior finishing for Community Care Area(Rooms 136-147 inclusive)including partitions, flooring, ceilings, doors, frames, screens, hardware, and cabinetwork. Leave area clear for $ construction by tenant. (Price does not include mechanical and electrical work) Name of Tenderer Gerr Construction Limited 90/bold 691VEZ9906 'ON XdJ N010NINblO d0 NAW Wd S9,b0 GM 96-81-8E _POST TENDER ADDENDUM NO.2(contd.) PAGE PTA2-2 oft The undersigned,agrees that the Municipality of Clarington may accept or reject any of the offered Post Tender Addendum pricing items,including any items suggested by the undersigned. We agree that the Municipality of Clarington may award the Tender for the Clarington Older Adult Centre,Tender CL98-1 to the best Qualified Tenderer based on any combination of Tender prices,Alternate Prices, Separate Prices and Post Tender Addendum Prices as they may choose. We agree that the Municipality of Clarington may take Bidders References into consideration in the award of the Tender. We agree that the Municipality of Clarington may reject any or all Tenders. ' SIGNATURE AND SEAL OF BIDDER ' Company name; Gerr Construction Limited Address: R.R. #3, Bowmanville, Ontario Postal Code: L1C 3K4 Signature: ' Name and title' J. Gerrits President Date: February 19, 199.8. _. Company seal: i ' Name of Tenderer Gerr Construction Limited t 90/90 'd 691VEZ9906 ON XVA NOIDNINVIO .i0 HAW Wd 89:60 48M 86-81-83A Gerr construction Limited ' OLDER ADULT COMMUNITY CENTRE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON TENDER CL98-1 ' POST TENDER ADDENDUM NO. 3 March 2, 1998 DR2(R) Revise Credit offered by PTA #1 item DR2 to reflect ' value of carpet remaining after deletion of Community Care Area. (Note Credit for Community Care DR.21 �� �DO includes carpet grade specified.) $ ' DR.22 Change all acoustic panel type 1 to 2' x 4' x 5/8" commercial grade with flame spread rating of 25 or ' less and NRC range of 0.65 to 0.75. Panel type 2 to remain as specified in Lobby and Reception areas. (Note: Credit for Community Care DR.21 includes �� deletion of specified file in that area). $ DR23 Change all pre-fabricated metal curbs at roof level to ' insulated wood curbs constructed of 1/2" pressure treated plywood both sides of 2"x 4" top and bottom plate, filled with fibreglass insulation. $ CR 1350.00 DR24 Delete all ceramic wail tile. Finish washrooms with paint on gypsum board (provide gypsum board ' laminated to concrete block on east wall of Men's Washroom where necessary). $ CR 6500.00 DR25 Delete all sodding. Rough grade site only to required grades. Owner to do sodding. $ CR 900.00 DR26 Delete all cabinetwork specified in Section 06410 including cabinets and cupboards, vanities, display case, pass through, reception counter, but not including cabinet work in Community Care area ' (Reception 136) and not including Finish Carpentry items specified in Section 06200. $ C-//e. O?�O • O� ' DR27 Change sheet vinyl flooring in Room 101 and 102 to Armstrong Classic Corlon in 3 colours (pattern as shown on the drawings). $ e i� 0 ? - OD Name of Tenderer Gerr Construction Limited T POST TENDER ADDENDUM NO. 3 (CorWd) PTA3- Page 2 of 2 ' DR28 Delete roof top HVAC unit#1 and substitute with a 25 ton HVAC unit complete with power ventilator, CO2 monitoring devices, Honeywell T7300 thermostat and sensors and spring isolation curb (all as originally specified). (Note: Contractor will be required to submit a detailed description of this unit with his submission of PTA#3.) $� �� ' DR29 Change roof membrane Warrantee specified in Section 07530 from 5 years to 2 years. $ CR 500.00 The undersigned agrees that the Municipality of Clarington may accept or any of the offered � y Post Tender Addendum pricing items, including any items suggested by the undersigned. We agree that the Municipality of Clarington may award the Tender for the Clarington Older Adult Centre, Tender CL98-1 to the best Qualified Tenderer based on any combination of Tender prices, ' Alternate Prices, Separate Prices and Post Tender Addendum Prices as they may choose. We agree that the Municipality of Clarington may take Bidders References including information ' from CCA #11 document and bidders financial status into consideration in the award of the Tender. ' We agree that the Municipality of Clarington may reject any or all Tenders. SIGNATURE AND SEAL OF BIDDER: Company name: Gerr Construction Limited 1 Address: 3386 Solina Rd. N. , Bowmanville, Ont. Postal Code: L1C 3X4 ' Signature: Name and title: J Gerrits P. Eng. President Date: March V, 1998 Company seal: Name of Tenderer Gerr Construction Limited ' Gerr Construction Limited DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Pa e 4 1 TRADE FIRM ADDR,CSS ' Glass and Glazing Kawartha Peterborough Resilient Flooring Parkwood _ Oshawa Ceramic Tile Parkwood Exterior Metal Stud Wall Systems .Own Forces Jyma Bolton Drywall and Acoustics ' Metal Toilet Partitions Wood Painting World Bowmanville Operable Walls Corflex Hydraulic Elevator(Alternate Price) Schindler Pickering Plumbing original Amount Included ingender Price $ 257,800.00 Boulder Port Hope HVAC roina7 Amount Included in7ender Price Boulder Port Hope I $ incl. above Electrical Amount Included in-1 ender Price TriRoc Toronto $ 105,000.00 13.0 We agree that, when requested by the Consultant, additional work will be following unit prices exclusive of Overhead and Profit which shall cover all charges dfor labour and materials, supervision, plant and tools. Deletions will be deducted from additions before these unit prices are applied. Credits will be deducted from extras before charges for overhead and profit are added. All work will be performed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Provincial Sales Tax is included in these unit prices. Goods and Services Tax is not included in these unit prices. Breakdown of all taxes will be submitted later. Vnit Prices for Additions and Deletions Nature of Work Additions Qeletions 1. Earth Excavation by machine, calculated in its natural bed, including disposal off the site per cubic metre. _ $15 . 00 $10 . 00 7175-00200.wpd e G ' GERR CONSTRUCTION LIMITED 3386 SOLINA ROAD NORTH R.R.3, BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO L1 C 3K4 PHONE: (905) 436-2018 FAX: 005)436-5198 1 Post Tender Addenda #3 - Clarington Older Adult Community Centre ' Item DR 28 - Proposed HVAC Unit #1 - � �GA3 60S 5H E _ '- 1 _ G4K43 ono/gr.exh,20813,2STon _ LAISO 9801240 MAX Isolation Curb_ _ 1 81G59 THERMOS TAT T7300- 7 DAY PROG. q78 _ __i UBBASE 092 :SENSOR-ROOM—== AS ALTERNATE TO 9 7_5 QUOTED BY VERN� ^ _jWEN iff$11,750.00 �` r . ----- �_ LOW --- ' -- - HEAT UNiT --- 1__ Opt. F1Fr, Power Ex au~ - — -- h s—Fan L180 L210 L240 1_ 93J69 UT-0O2 SENSR NO-LED - --- ' -' ' 1 -GGP91 N 7047G1000 SENSR} -- — "-_ 1 12-83 _ PANEL-STATUS — __? 7C85 . _ ;LB-487260~F TR KT '- ' 1 14-92 LB-49423AA K!T-RELAY r 1 MEMgJ.ER wo ' CLARINGTON OLDER ADULT COMMUNITY CENTRE APPENDIX 'A' Page 1 of 2 26 BEECH AVENUE, BOWMANVILLE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON TENDER CL98-1 ITEM GERR COMMENTS 1 CONSTRUCTION LTD. TENDER PRICE $ 1,236,000.00 POST TENDER ADDENDUM #1 A.1 Add 2nd FI renovations Add 15,000.00 Building Department Requirement ' A.2 Waterproof pit Add$1,000.00 Elevator ' A.3 Door#25 Add$75.00 Building Department Requirement C.1 Screen SC7 $ 150.00 Building Department Requirement ' CA Underlay $ 0.00 DRA Sheet Floor $ 5,500.00 DR.2(r) Carpet 1 $ 500.00 Adjusted per PTA 3 DR.3 Carpet 2 $ 1,200.00 ' DR.9 Delete Windows $ 3,000.00 *Not good value DR.10 Bow windows $ 1,000.00 *Not good value DR.12 Frame colour $ 1,000.00 1 DR.13 Std. Windows $ 2,000.00 DR.14 Brickmould $ 500.00 DR.15 Pt Gr. Doors $ 500.00 DR.16 . Backfill $ 1,000.00 DR 17.5 Shelving (116) $ 3,600.00 1 MECHANICAL M1 Region fees Add$15,000.00 Elevator ' M2 Buried services $ 0.00 Elevator M3 Humidifiers $ 15,000.00 M7 Sanitary Main $ 600.00 Elevator M8 Manhole Add$1,500.00 Elevator ' M10 1'h" Check Valve N/A Elevator IM11 Water Cooler $ 1,500.00 BARRY• BRYAN ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED, WHITBY ONTARIO March 5, 1998 7175SUM1103.wpd CLARINGTON OLDER ADULT COMMUNITY CENTRE APPENDIX 'A' Page 2 of 2 26 BEECH AVENUE, BOWMANVILLE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON TENDER CL98-1 ITEM GERR COMMENTS ' CONSTRUCTION LTD. ELECTRICAL ' E1 Tennis Ct service $ 6,000.00 E2 Add Exit Light Add$325.00 E5 Water Cooler. $ 100.00 E6 Humidifiers $ 975.00 ' POST TENDER ADDENDUM #2 DR.21 Comm. Care $ 31,300.00 Interior improvements by tenant ' POST TENDER ADDENDUM#3 Items Recommended by Council DR.22 Acoustic tile $ 12,000.00 ( DR.23 Del metal curb $ 1,350.00 DR.24 Del. Ceramics $ 6,500.00 DR.25 Del. Sodding $ 900.00 Sodding by owner rough grade only DR.26 Del. Cabinetwork $ 60,000.00 Not incl Comm. Care DR.27 Sheet flooring $ 500.00 DR.28 Del. HRV(HVAC1) $ 62,000.00 DR.29 Roof warranty $ 500.00 ' Delete sign allowance $ 5,000.00 TOTAL $ 1,044,725.00 BARRY• BRYAN ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED, WHITBY ONTARIO March 5, 1998 7175SUM1103.wpd ' H.G. ROUGHLEY LIMITED BOX 767, 1000 SIMCOE ST. , NORTH OSHAWA, ONTARIO. L1H 7M9 ' TEL. (905) 576-7770 FAX (905) 576-2924 1 MEMORANDUM OF INSURANCE AND/OR INSURANCE BINDER BINDER NUMBER: 7326 NAME AND ADDRESS OF INSURED Gerr Construction Limited R. R. 3 Bowmanville, Ontario. L1C 3K4 2 . TERM OF COVER 3 . DATE OF ISSUE Mar. 16/98 - Sept . 16/98 Mar. 16/98 I4 . INSURERS) The Canadian Surety Company - ' 5 . COVERAGES CCDC 101 Liability ' Endorsements : Additional Insureds (refer to addendum) 2 year Completed Operations Excluding Sub-contractors Health Hazard exclusion 6 . AMOUNTS OF INSURANCE 7 . DEDUCTIBLES $5, 000, 000 . 00 $500 P.D. 8 . LOCATION OF RISK 26 Beech Avenue, Bowmanville, Ontario. 9 . PREMIUM $2 , 592 . 00 TOTAL ($2 , 400 . 00 + $192 . 00 <8% tax>) ' 10 . LOSS, IF ANY, PAYABLE TO: Insured 11 . ORIGIN OF AUTHORITY FOR BINDER -Insured: J. Gerrits ' -Insurer: C. Hutton 12 . IS AN ADDENDUM ATTACHED TO AND FORMING PART OF THIS BINDER? No ' NOTE-All coverage references subject to terms, conditions, exclusions and limitations of the policy(ies) in current and standard use by the above listed insurer (s) . Acceptance and receipt of this binder is deemed to be understanding of terms and condtions herein by both insured(s) and insurer (s) unless written notice to the contrary is received immediately. ' H. GAOUGHLEY LIMITED, per: Aao M/ AHa ' Autho zed Rep esent tive 980316 610 ' Insured: ___Gerr-Construction-Limited ' SCHEDULE_OF ADDITIONAL_INSUREDS (Owner) The Corporation of The Municipality of Clarington 40 Temperance Street ' Bowmanville, Ontario. L1C 3A6 (Architect and Structrual Engineer) Barry Bryan Associates (1991) Limited 11 Stanley Court, Unit 1 ' Whitby, Ontario. L1N 8P9 ' (Mechanical Engineer) Otonabee Technical Services Ltd. 294 Rink Street, P. 0. Box 1941 ' Peterborough, Ontario. K9J 7X7 ' (Electrical Engineer) Kirkland Engineering 294 Rink Street, P. 0. Box 1941 ' Peterborough, Ontario. K9J 7X7 980316 610 ZURICH INSURANCE COMPANY OF CANADA HEAD OFFICE FOR CANADA 200 UNIVERSITY AVENUE TORONTO, ONTARIO M50 1S7 ' PAYMENT BOND (TRUSTEE FORM) LABOUR AND MATERIAL No. 6307809 $1,044,725.00 Note: This Bond is issued simultaneously with another Bond in favour of the Obligee conditioned for the full and faithful performance of the Contract. KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS THAT Gerr Construction Limited as Principal hereinafter called the Principal, and ZURICH INSURANCE COMPANY OF CANADA, a corporation created and existing under the laws of Switzerland, and duly authorized to transact the business of Suretyship in Canada as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety are, subject to the conditions hereinafter contained, held and firmly bound unto The Municipality of Clarington as Trustee hereinafter called the Obligee, for the use and benefit of the Claimants, their and each of their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, in the amount of One Million, Forty-Four Thousand, Seven and Twenty-Five Dollars ($1,044,725.00 ) of lawful money of Canada for the payment of Hundred which sum well and truly to be made the Principal and the Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a written contract with the Obligee dated the 16th day of March, 1998, for Older Adult Community Centre, Bowmanville, Ontario, which Contract Documents are by reference made a part hereof, and are hereinafter referred to as the Contract. ' NOW, THEREFOR, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that, if the Principal shall make payment to all Claimants for all labour and material used or reasonably required for use in the performance of the Contract, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect, subject, however, to the following conditions: 1. A Claimant for the purpose of this Bond is defined as one having a direct contract with the Principal for labour, material, or both, used or reasonably required for use in the ' performance of the Contract, labour and material being constructed to include that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service or rental equipment directly applicable to the Contract provided that a person, firm or corporation who rents equipment to the Principal to be used in the performance of the Contract under a Contract which provides that all or any part of the rent is to be applied towards the purchase price thereof, shall only be a Claimant to the extent of the prevailing industrial rental value of such equipment for the period during which ' the equipment was used in the performance of the Contract. The prevailing industrial rental value of equipment shall be determined, insofar as it is practical to do so, in accordance with and in the manner provided for in the latest revised edition of the ' publication of the Canadian Construction Association titled "Rental Rates on Contractors Equipment" published prior to the period during which the equipment was used in the performance of the Contract. ' 2. The Principal and the Surety, hereby jointly and severally agree with the Obligee, as Trustee, that every Claimant who has not been paid as provided for under the terms of his contract with the Principal, before the expiration of a period of ninety (90) days ' after the date on which the last of such Claimant's work or labour was done or performed or materials were furnished by such Claimant, may as a beneficiary of the trust herein provided for, sue on this Bond, prosecute the suit to final judgment for such sum or sums as may be justly due to such Claimant under the terms of his contract ' with the Principal and have execution thereon. Provided that the Obligee is not obliged to do or take any act, action or proceeding against the Surety on behalf of the Claimants, or any of them, to enforce the provisions of this Bond. If any act, action or proceeding is taken either in the name of the Obligee or by joining the Obligee as a party to such proceeding, then such act, action or proceeding, shall be taken on the understanding and basis that the Claimants, or any of them, who take such act, action or proceeding shall indemnify and save harmless the Obligee against all costs, charges, and any loss or damage resulting to the and expenses or liabilities incurred thereon Obligee by reason thereof. Provided still further that, subject f ttheOforegoing sue s ' and conditions, the Claimants, or any of them, may use the name on and enforce the provisions of this Bond. 3. No suit or action shall be commenced hereunder by any Claimant: (a) unless such Claimant shall have given written notice within the time limits hereinafter set forth to each of the Principal, the Surety and the Obligee, stating with substantial accur amount mailclaimed. the Principalt1thesSuretyeand served by mailing the same by registered the Obligee, at any place where an office is regularly maintained for the transaction of business by such persons or served in any manner in which legal process may be served in the Province or other part of Canada in which the subject matter of the Contract is located. Such notice shall be given (1) in respect of any claim for the amount or any portion thereof, required to be held back from the Claimant by the Principal, under either the terms of the Claimant's contract with the Principal, or under the Mechanics' Liens ' Legislation applicable to the Claimant's contract with the Principal, whichever is the greater, within one hundred and twenty (120) days after such Claimant should have been paid in full under the Claimant's contract with the Principal; (2) in respect of any claim other than for the holdback, or portion thereof, referred to above, within one hundred and wentyl(120) days after orthe date upon which such Claimant did, or performed, or furnished the last of the materials for which such claim is made under the Claimant's contract with the Principal; ' (b) after the expiration of one (1) year following the date on which the Principal ceased work on the Contract, including work performed under the guarantees ' provided in the Contract; (c) other than in a Court of competent jurisdiction in the Province theDl eoftis of Canada in which the subject matter of the Contract, or any p ' parties hereto agree to submit to the situated and not elsewhere, and the jurisdiction of such Court. 4. The Surety agrees not to take advantage of Article 1959 oft the Civil C Code of the an the ' Province of Quebec in the e evegt that,, by g othecs and privileges of Said Surety can no longer be subro ated in the rights, hyp Claimant. in the contract between the Principal and the Obligee shall not 5. Any material change prejudice the rights or interest of any Claimant under this Bond, who is not instrumental in bringing about or has not caused such change. The amount of this Bond shall be reduced by, and to the extent of any payment or 6. payments made in good faith, and in accordance with the provisions hereof, inclusive may be filed of record against of the payment by the Surety of Mechanics' Lien which the subject matter of the Contract, whether or not claim for the amount of such lien be presented under and against this Bond. 7. The Surety shall not be liable for a greater sum than the specified penalty of this Bond. ' ZURICH INSURANCE COMPANY OF CANADA HEAD OFFICE FOR CANADA 200 UNIVERSITY AVENUE TORONTO, ONTARIO M5G 1S7 PERFORMANCE BOND No. 6307809 $1, 044, 725. 00 KNOW ALL MEN THESE PRESENTS THAT Gerr Construction Limited as Principal hereinafter called the Principal, and ZURICH INSURANCE COMPANY OF CANADA, a corporation created and existing under the laws of Switzerland, and duly authorized to transact the business of Suretyship in Canada as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto The Municipality of Clarington as Obligee hereinafter called the Obligee, in the amount of One Million, Forty-Four Thousand, Seven Hundred and Twenty-Five Dollars ($1,044,725.00 ) lawful money of Canada, for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, the Principal and the Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and ' severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a written contract with the Obligee, dated the 16th day of March, 1998 , for Older Adult Community Centre, Bowmanville, Ontario, in accordance with the ' Contract Documents submitted therefor which are by reference made part hereof and are hereinafter referred to as the Contract. NOW, THEREFOR, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that if the Principal shall promptly and faithfully perform the Contract then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. Whenever the Principal shall be, and declared by the Obligee to be, in default under the Contract, the Obligee having performed the Obligee's obligations thereunder, the Surety may promptly remedy the default, or shall promptly (1) complete the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions or (2) obtain a bid or bids for submission to the Obligee and the Surety of the lowest responsible bidder, arrange for a contract between such bidder and the Obligee and make available as work progresses (even though there should be a default, or a succession of defaults, under contract or contracts of completion, arranged under this paragraph) sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion less the balance of the Contract price; but not exceeding, including other costs and damages for which the Surety may be liable hereunder, the amount set forth in the first paragraph hereof. The term "balance of the Contract price", as used in this paragraph, shall mean the total amount payable by the Obligee to the Principal under the Contract, less the amount properly paid by the Obligee to the Principal. Any suit under this Bond must be instituted before the expiration of two (2) years from the date on which final payment under the Contract falls due. The Surety shall not be liable for a greater sum than the specified penalty of this Bond. ' No right of action shall accrue on this Bond, to or for the use of, any person or corporation other than the Obligee named herein, or the heirs, executors, administrators or successors of the Obligee. tIN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have Signed and Sealed this Bond this 16th day of March, 1998 . SIGNED AND SEALED Gerr Constru -ton Limited In the presence (Seal) Principal ZURICH INS CE COMPANY OF CANADA i i (Seal) ' Caroline MacColl-vysma, Attorney-in-fact. CODS 221-1982 Endorsed by: ACEC CCA CCPE CSC RAIC Approved by: INSURANCE BUREAU OF CANADA 1 i i i 1 1 i 1 i 1 1 WIBInsurance Workplace Safety& 200 FRONT STREET WEST Board TORONTO, ONTARIO Clearance Certificate ATConnnission de la sdcurm professionnelle et do['assurance M5 3 J1 (41 6) 344 -1012 Certifica t de dechar e contre les accidents du travail 9 ' f ; The Workplace Safety and Insurance Board (WSIB) ( } _ hereby waives its rights under Section 141 of the i Workplace Safety and Insurance Act to hold the ( i Principal, that is in a contractual agreement with the ' Contractor named, liable for any Section 141 liability CONTRACTOR of the Contractor for prerniurns and levies of the L'ENTREPRENEUR WSIB owing now or within 60 days from the date of this Certificate. GERR CONSTRUCTION LIMITED R R 3 STN MAIN Par la presente, la Cornrnission de la securite BOWMANVST N prof essionnelle et ['assurance contre les accidents ON du travail (CSPAAT) renonce aux droits qui lui sont L1C 3K4 confertss en vertu de I'article 141 de la Loi sur la securit6 prof essionnelle et ['assurance contre les accidents du travail et qui I'autorisent A tenir ' 1'entrepreneur principal, qui a une entente contractuelle avec ['entrepreneur dont le nom figure sur le present certificat, responsable du paiernent de toute prime ou de toute somme que 1'entrepreneur est tenu de verser A la CSPAAT imm6diatement ou dans les 60 jours suivant la date indiquee sur ce certificat. ' THIS CERTIFICATE IS VALID FOR ALL CONTRACTS OF THE NAMED CONTRACTOR DURING THE EFFECTIVE PERIOD ' LE PRESENT CERTIFICAT EST VALIDE POUR TOUS LES CONTRATS PASSES PAR LEDIT ENTREPRENEUR PENDANT LA PERIODE D'APPLICATION DU CERTIFICAT Valid only when signed by an authorized Officer of the WSIB. Non valide sans la signature d un agent autorise de la CSPAAT. 9- �vM'Pbz','i.k `�lawn ll n.,t. ip SAT Account Nod NO de compte Firm No./ NO d'entreprise Effeettve Date) Date d'entrese en vipueur 3746860 240541 EX OJMAR1998 .•. ' Rate/Taux Description Rate/Taux Description 021099 INDUSTRIAL CONSTRU Contract Description/ Description du contrat Certificate No./ NO de certifirat i200834558 ' Contact the WSIB if you question the validity of this document. Veuillez Comnuiniyuer avec la CSPAAT si vous doutez de la validity du present document. ' 0190C (01/98) MUNICIPALITY OF �arington ONTARIO ' January 15, 1998 1 Dear Sir: RE: ADDENDUM #1 CL98-1 OLDER ADULT COMMUNITY CENTRE 1 Please be advised the tender closing date for the above noted tender has been extended as ' follows: Closing Time & Date: 2:00 p.m. (local time) Wednesday, February 4, 1998 Due to the extension of the closing date, please note the Mandatory Pre-bid meeting and ' site tour for the General Contractors only will be held at 2:00 p.m., Monday, January 26, 1998. The meeting will be held at 26 Beech Avenue, Bowmanville. ' All tender submissions must be in accordance with this addendum. Yours truly, ' Lou Ann Birkett, C.P.P., A.M.C.T. Purchasing Manager ' LAB*ld CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON ' 40 TEMPERANCE STREET• BOWMANVILLE -ONTARIO• LIC 3A6• (905) 623.3379• FAX 623.4169 RECYCLED PAPEA * MUNICIPALITY OF _ Sarin ton ONTARIO ' January 26, 1998 Dear Sir: RE: ADDENDUM #2 CL98-1 OLDER ADULT COMMUNITY CENTRE Please find attached Addendum #2 for the above noted tender. ' All tender submissions must be in accordance with this addendum. Yours truly, i ' Lou Ann Birkett, C.P.P., A.M.C.T. Purchasing Manager ' LAB*ld CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON 40 TEMPERANCE STREET•9 OWMAN VILLE-ON TAR IO•L I C 3A6•(905)623-337.9•FAX 623-4169 WCTCIEO PAPER BARRY• BRYAN • ARCHITECT 11 Stanley Court ' • ENGINEER Whftby,Ontario LIN 8P9 ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED • PRWECT MANAGERS T01000���5 ' ADDENDUM NO. 2 , PROJECT: Older Adult Community Centre PROJECT NO.: 97175 Municipality Of Clarington , 26 Beech Avenue, Bowmanville DATE: January 20, 1998 Tender No. CL 98-1 Municipality of Clarington ' The following shall constitute Addendum No. 2 Bidders shall include all revisions/clarifications in their Total Stipulated Price. , 1. SPECIFICATIONS A. SECTION 00100- INSTRU TIONS TO BIDS RS ' Section 2-Tender Submission: ' .1 Revise Tender Closing Date to Wednesday, February 4, 1998 at 2:00 pm. B. SECTION 00200-TENDER FORM t .1 Delete page 2 of the Tender Form and insert page 2-R attached to this addendum. ' .2 Bidders are encouraged to submit additional alternate prices for the owner's consideration. C. SECTION 00400-SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Article 19- GC11.1 Insurance: Add the following: ' .2 Refer to paragraph 1.1.1.4(1): Change the second sentence to read"The insurance coverage shall , not be less than the insurance required by IBC Form 4042 or its equivalent replacement.' D. SECTION 01005-GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 1.35 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH & SAFETY ACT 1991 - DESIGNATED ' SUBSTANCES f Change paragraph 'B'to read: ' »,,rsazoo�s,.wpa 1 rPage 2 B. The Owner will make separate arrangements for the removal of ' selected asbestos materials which will affect the work of this contract. Other identified or suspected asbestos bearing materials which have been identified are listed below. These items are to ' remain in place and will be removed as part of future phases of the overall building project n is possible that asbestos may be present elsewhere in the building and the contractor is advised to r immediately notify the Consultant whenever asbestos is'found or suspected. Identified or suspected asbestos materials scheduled to remain rinclude the following: 1. Stucco wall finishes in the main entrance lobby. 2. Stucco ceilings in the second floor stairwell and boardroom. 3. Asbestos jacketing at the existing boiler. 4. Pipe insulation in inaccessible crawl spaces. rE. SECTION 04200- MASONRY 2.01 MATERIALS E. Masonry reinforcement: add the following: 6. Brick veneer anchors for masonry cavity wall construction shall be FERRO Slotted Block Tie (Type 1), hot dip zinc galvanized with slotted block plate to suit wall thickness and r 'V'tie. Install anchors at 800 x 600 mm spacing. F. SECTION 05120- STRUCTURAL STEEL ' 1.02 WORK INCLUDED ' add the following: G. Fabricate decorative structural columns as detailed on the rArchitectural drawings. G. SECTION 05310-STEEL ROOF DECK .1 This section shall provide steel roof deck for sloped metal roof assemblies as detailed on drawings included with this addendum. H. SECTION 07411 - PREFORMED METAL SIDING 2.01 MATERIALS ' change paragraph 'B'to read: 1 � 0°"''"� BARRY- BRYAN rASSOCIATES 119911 LIMMO Page 3 B. Siding: Board and batten style for vertical application, smooth finish, with preformed male and female lip joints, pre-punched , nailing strip. Colour to be selected by the Architect from manufacturers full range of standard colours. add the following: , G. Building Paper. #15 felt paper, asphalt impregnated, to CAN2- ' 51.32. I. SECTION 07425- LIGHTWEIGHT STEEL FRAMING ' 1.06 SUBMITTALS change paragraph 'B'to read: 1 B. Lightweight steel wall and roof framing systems shall be designated by, and all shop drawings shall bear the stamp of, a registered ' Professional Engineer licensed to practice in the Province of Ontario. 2.04 ACCESSORIES ' A. Brick ties: approved alternate: FERRO Side Mounting Rap Tie. , add the following: B. Sill plate gaskets: 1/2" thick compressible cellular foam, non- , organic, width to match stud width. C. Deflection tracks and slide clips: manufacturers standard ' telescoping or slotted tracks to suit design and load conditions. J. SECTION 07610-SHEET METAL ROOFING ' 2.01 MATERIALS B.& E. Equivalent products including Canadian Metal Rolling Mills Batten , Clad system are acceptable subject to the approval of the Architect. F. Acceptable alternative: Sealtight Air Shield self adhering membrane and primer by W.R. Meadows. H. Delete this item and substitute the following: ' H. Sub-roofing system: 12"thick exterior grade gypsum board to CSA A82.7-M, screw fastened to metal roof deck as specified in Section ' 05310. -M"`''""P`' BARRY- BRYAN ` 3�' ASSOCIATES (1991) UNIfTED , ' Page 4 add the following: M. Compressible tape seals: 2" wide continuous roll, compressible double sided, non-organic tape. ' 3.03 APPLICATION ' Delete paragraphs A and B and substitute the following: A. Install gypsum board substrate over metal deck, mechanically ' fastened with screw plate fasteners to FM-190 uplift requirements. B. Install air barrier membrane over surface of entire roof in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. ' K. SECTION 07620- METAL FLASHING AND TRIM ' 1.02 WORK INCLUDED add the following: D. Scuppers at new and existing roofs. ' 2.01 MATERIALS B.&C. Equal products as manufactured by Marvin Windows are acceptable. L. SECTION 10652-OPERABLE PARTITIONS ' 2.01 MATERIALS S. Add HUFCOR as an approved manufacturer. 1 E. Panel finish to be Textile Wallcovering TEK-WALL 1000 by Modemfold or approved equivalent. ' M. SECTION 08610-WOOD WINDOWS ' 1.02 WORK INCLUDED add item: F. Condensation gutters at clerestory windows Type C. "' BARRY- BRYAN ASSOCIATES (1991) IJMTED Page 5 , N. SECTION 14241 - HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS Bidders shall note that the Alternate Price requested for is a Hydraulic passenger ' elevator as specified, installed complete,with stops at the basement and.ground floor levels, with capability to be extended to the third floor in the future. , 2. DRAWINGS A. DRAWING A1.1 - SITE PLAN AND DETAILS ' .1 Add site services(mechanical and electrical)including connections at street services, as shown on Drawing SKA1 attached. (All mechanical and ' electrical services including excavation, backfill, cutting and patching and connections to existing services are by the contractor). B. DRAWING A2.1 - DEMOLITION PLANS ' .1 Ground Floor Demolition ' (1) Demolition Note #25 adjacent to existing steel fire escape stair refers to 2 existing window wells on the west wall of the building. ' (2) Change Note #8 at the Storage Room, west of the basement access stair to Note#6. ' (3) The Owner is undertaking to complete selective demolition in preparation for the contract work to begin. Bidders shall review the ' current conditions at the site to ascertain the required scope of demolition work required. All existing flooring in areas scheduled to be demolished by the Owner, will be removed by the Contractor (Note#12). ' C. DRAWING A2.2- GROUND FLOOR PLAN .1 Add recessed wall heater behind door in Stairwell 109. Refer to electrical , drawing for size and location. D. DRAWING A2.3 - BASEMENT&2ND FLOOR PLAN .1 Second Floor Plan , (1) Modify duct and elevator shaft enclosure as detailed on Drawing A2.4 (reference to detail SKA5 attached). , E. DRAWING A2.4-STAIR SECTION. DETAILS& ENLARGED PLANS f .1 11A2.4 Exterior Stair Details (1) Change guardrail posts to 1-112"diameter. ""'" BARRY- BRYAN ASSOCIATES(1991) LIMITED ' Page 6 (2) Guardrail shall be 1-1/2"diameter steel pipe. (3) Add one additional post with concrete foundation to support top of stair stringer. (4) Revise note re: steel post and concrete foundation to match ' structural drawings. .2 8/A2.2-Second Floor Elevator Plan ' (1) Refer to revised detail attached to this addendum (SKA5). .3 13/A2.2 Existing Stair Section ' (1) Refer to revised section attached to this addendum (SKA2). ' F. DRAWING A2.5- ROOF PLAN & DETAILS .1 Roof Plan (1) Add all mechanical equipment including HVAC units, exhaust fans and vent stacks as shown on the mechanical drawings, complete with metal curbs as detailed. (2) Delete continuous ridge vent on sloped roof, line Fx, 10-12. .2 Add HVAC Unit #5 at existing roof (above kitchen) where shown on Drawing M2. Cut and patch existing roof and install new curb as per typical detail. ' .3 New scupper drains at south side of existing roof are to be provided by Section 07620, complete with downspouts. ' .4 Provide precast concrete splashpads at base of all new downspouts. G. DRAWING A5.1 -SECTION DETAILS .1 Add detail 12/A4.1 at maintenance door to Lobby. Detail SKA6 attached. ' .2 Detail 7/A4.2 replace with new detail (SKA7). .3 Add detail 8/A4.1 at roof wall junction, Line 7a, Detail SKA8 attached. .4 Detail 9/A4.1 ' (1) Delete roof insulation at soffit- (2) Provide steel stud back-up to wall system. (3) Install ice and water shield membrane at all sloped roofs, extend 36" ' beyond face of wall below. .5 Replace detail 4 with new detail SKA9 and change all sloped roof details ' to incorporate revised sloped roof assembly. 0011'" BARRY- BRYAN ' ASSOCIATES (19911 UMITED • Page 7 H. DRAWING A5.2- SECTION DETAILS , .1 Provide sub-drainage system around all new foundations as shown on structural detail SKS1. ' I. DRAWING S1.1 - FOUNDATION PLAN. DETAILS AND NOTE .1 Bidders shall note that the west addition building foundations have been ' pretendered, and are not in this contract. The pretendered work includes all work required to complete the foundation construction on Grid Lines 1, B, 7 and also includes all backfill for the new west addition floor slab up to ' and including Granular A fill. This contract (CL 98-1) will include final compaction of fill,vapour retarder below slab, and 2" sand fill, along with all necessary topsoil and finish grading around the perimeter. ' The northerly building addition foundation are part of this contract(CL 98- .2 Provide 4" diameter subdrainage system as specified in Section 02200 at the perimeter of new building foundation. Refer to detail SK-S1 attached. ' Repair, extend and modify existing building subdrains where disturbed by the work of this contract ' .3 Provide one new sump pit in the existing basement as shown on Drawing A2.3 (Basement Plan). Sump pit to be 18" diameter, 30" deep. ' J. DRAWING S2.3- ROOF FRAMING PLAN .1 Add C6 x 82 framing under HVAC unit and exhaust fans on existing roof 6- , 7, D. .2 Frame all duct openings through existing and new roofs with 3 x 3 x 3/8 angels. Opening sizes to be coordinated with mechanical contractor. Refer to mechanical drawings for locations. .3 Provide openings in existing wooden roof at 4-K for ducts. Add wooden ' headers as required. K. DETAIL 5/S2.4 (SKS6) ' .1 Add continuous 4 x 4 x 318"angle to support existing cut back roof. Refer ' to detail drawing SKS2 attached. °0 1 J"""� BARRY- BRYAN ASSOCIATES n991i LIMIT® ' Page 8 L. DETAIL 7/S2.4 (SKS2) ' .1 Modify detail to agree with second floor framing plan S2.4 by changing C6 to W8 x 20 and adding W8 x 20 parallel to OWSJ. This W8 x 20 supports ' upper block wall. M. DETAIL 4/S2.4 ' .1 Correct misprint"C6 x 20"to "W6 x 20". ' N. DRAWING S2.4 .1 Add 4 x 4 x 3/8" angle along Grid Line 7 to support existing deck where existing supporting wall is removed. 3. Refer to Mechanical Addendum No 2 attached (24 pages). ' 4. Refer to Electrical Addendum No. E1 dated January 21, 1998 attached (7 pages). E ADDENDUM NO. 2 ' C.M. Earle, M.A.A.T.O. CME/cb ' Attachments: 1 r 170011'"' BARRY- BRYAN ' 706 ASSOCIATES (1991) UNITED DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Page 2-R 7.0 We agree to complete all work including necessary overtime work pursuant to this ' Contract in the period required to meet the scheduled completion dates as specified. 8.0 We have received and included for Addenda No. to in the Stipulated Price. ' 9.0 We submit the following separate prices which are included in the Stipulated Price: (Separate prices shall exclude G.S.T.) ' A. Modifications to existing basement stair (Stair 134) as detailed. $ ' B. Supply and installation of Folding Partition#1 between Dining and Activity Rooms including all support framing and track. $ ' C. Cost to construct new elevator shaft, as detailed, including foundations, underpinning and sump pit, complete. $ ' D. Supply and installation of electrically operated entrances, complete. $ , E. Supply and install new hollow metal door#60 and screen #SC-7 $ , 10.0 We submit the following alternate prices which are not included in the Stipulated Price: (Alternate prices-shall exclude G.S.T.) ' A. Supply and installation of all wall mounted vinyl handrails shown on the drawings and specified in Section 10950, $ ' including all solid wood backing and hardware. extra/credit B. Supply and installation of one hydraulic elevator, Dover ' Model Fleetwood 21H with front and rear opening as specified in Section 14241 two stops only with capability of $ being extended to the third floor extra/credit C. Supply and install two windows Type 'E' in south wall of ' Activity Room 130 as shown including all cutting, patching, $ latches and trim. extra/credit ' D. Supply, install and finish new strip maple hardwood flooring in Dining Room 118, and Activity Room 119, complete with ' recessed concrete slab, 6 mil polyethylene separation sheet $ and wood undedayment. ext Wcredit E. Alternate price to supply and install vinyl dad wood windows as manufactured by_ , in lieu of aluminum clad wood windows specified. $ , extra/credit 717sns 1 J1.vvpd , ' IZ ' 12 I ENNOW ,mm, 1,,m �,-, 1� =4 — SIMON NNIEN NMI I ' I { SAAWT EXISTING ASPHALT C,ONG, PAVING AND REMOVE. ' • I ^!r` ^ti�MEDIUM DUTYEC WIASPHALT PAVING • I I AS SPIFIED ' 366 EXIST TREE I I Z TO BE REMED OV ' I I I 1 AL EXISTING ' GONSTRUGTION ARE9r t 'I LIMITS 365 00 AND RELOCATE a EXI T. P G. GONG. CVR95 I I , ( GOr,. WALK I I I e DRpPPEV��JURB �I I 6PHALT I a I PAVANS ' Ex t i b'-O' RAD HP I I Alk 429P= ====F===m NEA HYDRO SERVICE I i 6 36 .00] I I ' I I WINDOW VeLL — —— — ft- EXIST EXAST. SODDED &RAVE AREA TO b p�A I I MATCH EXISTINS I I CONTOURS REMOVE EXIST. EXIST. CANOPY I I P.C. GONG. I I ' EXIST. GONG. i I ' STEPS I I i I I I { uli • _ 3 I I ' m IolI • • � z I I - EXIST. I I TITLE: PARTIAL SITE PLAN BARRY • BRYMI DATE: DRWG NO: ASSOCIATES (1991) t1MM JAN 1998 PROJECT: OLDER ADULTS PROJECT NO: SCALE: CHECKED BY: SKA1 ; ' COMMUNITY CENTRE 97175 1=20 D.L.B. (ADDENDUM2 Eq tI-MAII Al M oo NOTE= REMOVE EXIST WALL GA BETWEEN STAIR AND BOILER 5�;rnni ROOM. REBUILD NEW FIRE RATED X PARTITION AS SHOWN ON c x FLOOR PLAN z o it Z N n MIN. HEADROOM 0 o z REMOVE EXIST. WALL, ��'� FLOOR REMOVE EXIST. GONG. LOOR m A � DING ,' TOPPING t BASE. IN5T NEW PROVIDE NEW PLYWOOD UNDERLA T cfl ;D SUPPORT 5TRUCTURE 14 g 12 i i (T1 � H 1 e le ig • ' I o o REMOVE EXISTING � i a_aaa EXIST. MAIN FLOOR HANDRAIL AND EXIST. OL + INSTALL NEW PLASTER CONTINUOUS CEILING " WALL MTV. HANDRAIL in II SEE OET. I -O" 10 4 NEW WOOD STAIR TO MATCH EXISTING PROVIDE RUBBER STAIR TREADS p m > y I ON ALL STEPS R Z EXIST. BASEMENT FLOOR — '� (NEW + EXISTING) v o ao EXIST. 2 LAYERS 5/8" TYPE "X" 6.8. AT U/S OF STAIRS AND 00 STAIR 3 LANDING LANDINGS o TO REMAIN g :—EXTEND EXISTING, LANDING m PROVIDE FIRE LABELED AS NECESSARY TO MAINTAIN A c 4 ACCESS PANEL INTO WALL MINIMUM HEADROOM D BEHIND (24" X 24") n N 1 +' 1 V xll tint, t/1it!! t.ti� J GONG. BLOCK BACKUP, BUILDING PAPER, 5 5/8" METAL STUDS ' 24" O.G., RI2 FIBROUS IN5UL., 1/2" GYPSUM 5HEATHING, 1 1/2' INSUL. SHEATHING, METAL GLARING. I 17ETA i L KA i/2"=1'-0" ELEVATOR SHAFT TOP OF ' STEEL. AT ROOF 18'-6" I ; I FIN15HW GROUND FLOOR III I FU's ELEVATOR SHAFT ' Iii I EXTENSION BY OTHERS. PROVIDE TEMPORARY ROOF Iii I AS DETAILED. ' Iii I TEMlIPORARY INSULATED I I i I MET. GLADDIN& AT FUTURNG UCTH I ; I FUTURE DOOR OPENING TEMPORARY MET. I +I I GLAD INFIL L { i DUCT ' m SHAFT 1=t EV ARM 2o-1 ' 7 1/2" '7 1/2" I FACEBRI GK s SECOND FLOOR ELEVATOR PLAN TITLE: BARRY • BRYAN GATE: DRWG NO: ' ELEVATOR PLAN AMATES (1991) WO JAN. 20, 199 PROJECT. PROJECT NO: SCALE: CHECKED BY: K A 5 ' OLDER ADULTS COMMUNITY CENTRE 97175 BOWMANVLLE, ONTARIO I 4".1'-0" D.L.B. (ADDENDUM 2. �0717�e7d AAo SLOPED ROOF C.MTRUGTION TYP. FIBROUS ML AT ON FF COW 6 MIL VAPOUR SAM lEft \,--2 LAYERS'TYPE W PREFIN METAL SOFFIT �� 6YP"BOARD ON METAL. FURRJN6 FACI$RICK FIN CEILING TYP EXTERIOR THRU WALL FLASHIN6 KALL- ASSEMBLY WEEP HOLES AT 52" C/C LINTEL (SEE STRICT) SEALANT AND BACKUP RETURN GYP BD ALUM FILLER TO MATCM TO DOOR FRAME E3Y DOOR SUPPLIER SEAL AIR/VAP ELECT. OPERATED BARRIERS AT FRAME ALUM ENTRANCE 12 PETAL , A4.1 I•=I-O• Tom' BARRY • BRXAN :Boom= DATE. DRWG NO: SECTION DETAIL ASSOCIATES (1991) ULt1W •.m,•»oxm JAN 1998 PROJECT: PROJECT NO: SCALE: CHECKED B1F SKA6 OLDER ADULT COMMUNITY CENTRE 97175 °=1'—O" C.M.E. MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON ADDENDUM 2� E97175A51 A24 nX ' FACE OF STUD PREFIN MTL TRIM ' PREFIN METAL FASCIA INSULATION BAFFLE f CONT VENTED MTL SOFFIT PREFIN METAL SIDING MTL DRIP CONDENSATION GUTTER \ SERL AIR BARRIER FFMFIN ALUM CLAD WOOD ' AT At WINDOW ' CONT TAPE SEAL AND METAL FLASFiIN6 RZO FIB � INSULATI b" MTL STUDS ' AT 16%dr, i 1 VETA i L ' A4.1 1 a r-o. TITLE: BARRY • BRYMt ,e r DATE: DRWG NO: ' SECTION DETAIL ASSOCIATES (1991) UMITO JAN 1998 PROJECT. PROJECT NO: SCALE: CHECKED BY SKA7 ' OLDER ADULT COMMUNITY CENTRE 97175 1•=1'-0" C.M.E. MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON ADDENDUM 2 FQ7175A51 Aga U/ CONT BOND BEAM ' T� KA L M-ASHIMS = 1'-0' Sim STRiJGT WEEP HOLES AT 32"WC, SHELF AN64E , SEE STRMT PREFIN MET FLASHINS 18 6A INSUL MIL CURB WITH CONT WOOD NAILER EXTeV VAPOUR BARRIER UP KAU T BACK EXIST ROOFING AND SEAL CU i INSUL. MAKE 6000 x F040VE EXIST PARAPET r EXISTIN6 ROOF GONSTFWTION 1 EXIST MASONRY WALL a DETAIL A4.1 I'=I'-o• TIC: PARRY.- BRYAN DATE: DRWG NO: SECTION DETAIL ASSMATES (1991) LU10 JAN 1998 PROJECT. PROJECT NO: SCALE: CHECKED BY: SKA8 OLDER ADULT COMMUNITY CENTRE 97175 1"=1'-0" C.M.E. MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON ADDENDUM fi E9717SA51 A24 0 PREFINISHED METAL ROOF F FULLY ADHERED MEMBRANE I/2'EXTERIOR 6RADE 6YPSUM BOARD METAL F DECK RA ±-0. ' ST.ROOF RAFTERS R25 BAIT INSULATION 2 I/2' METAL.STUD FURRING a 16'O.C. 6 MIL CONTINUOUS V.B. 2 LAYERS TYPE 'X' "' 6Y0. ' 12 INSULATION BAFFLE 4 NISFED PREFI METAL GUTTER l Z),STL(AT VE51 2 FI VOID WITH GATT ' I TION PREFINISHED METAL N FASCIA PREFINISHED VENTED= METAL SOFFIT SEALANT 2'-4' ERIGK VENT AT —32TGTC' OL THRU WALL Z CONTINUE DRYWALL TO FLASHING u- WINDOW FRAME STL LINTEL SEE x STF O in E- LOUN6£w SEAL VAPOUR BARRIO t Fi-o-a-1 AT WINDOW FRAME Q 1 � 4 EAYr= DETAIL TITLE: �RY • BRY� : r DATE: DRWG NO: SECTION DETAIL ASSOCIATES (1991) UMITEO - m»oam JAN 1998 PROJECT: PROJECT NO: SCALE. CHECKED BY: SKA9 OLDER ADULT COMMUNITY CENTRE ' ' MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON 87175 1"=1 -0" C.M.E. ADDENDUM 21 F97175A51 A?4 I - i I 2-15M 00N�INLIOUS TOP OF WALL �. 1 � 'I a I . 0 I PIER 5EYONo --i I _ W VIA rMVPORATED YCEPINS TILE 6'azm ca&W STOPS FLL M FLIM FAMC, I 4• ' 4' �-��r►Icormwou�s r-e I 4 TYI•'I GAL FOUNDATION !MALL �2. nom' TYPICAL FOUNDATION BARRY • BRYAN : ;,= DATE: DRVUC N0: WALL ASSOCIATES (1991) L MIA D •.o wu.Am JAN. 16 PROJECT. OLDER ADULT PROJECT NO: SCALE: CHECKED BY S Ksl COMMUNITY CENTRE 97175 3/4"=1'-0" K.W.M. . Al 3 X 4 x 5/I6 WITH IOM A 24" O.G. -•Now WSx20 ■ SECTION THRU A-A ■ ------ - 12-x• - .-1- � Q % GHAN(S)= Cb TO WSx2O AND / MIN. 5' BEARIN6 IN WALL ADD W8x20 10'-W 5 X 6 X 5/8" BEARING ' PLATE r,&V V2' X 6' ANCHOR W6 x 20 ' b x 4 x 5/6 LOOSE LINTEL 105/411 F 1 DETAIL TITLE: 7/S2.4 BARRY • BRYAN ; DATE: - DRWG NO. ASSOCIATES (1991) UMTED JAN. 20, 199 PRO`FLT6ER ADULTS CENTRE PROJECT NO: SCALE CHECKED BY: bKS2 BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO 97175 1'=1'-0" K.W.M.. A48 O WIbx31 LI LI ' ADD T UNDER NEW tll� I UNITS AMP OPENINbs ' G6x8� X' ILC, 2-44 —�' I cvxb I ' cbx8� Q Q A n uj l I I i I I i TITLE: •Moneer DATE OR1MG N0: ROOF FRAMING UNDER VENT BARRY •BRYAN :�,�, SYSTEM ON EXISTING ROOF ASSOCIATES (1991) UWITID M#XAWM JAN. 20, 199 PRo%ER ADULTS CENTRE PROJECT NO: SCALE: CHECKED BY. KS31 BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO 97175 1'=1'-0" K.W.M.. A48' I i I i I I I I �, I � EX T Wibx �, I 115T Vex O \ (P INN\ MOT I OPENING ADD DOUBLE .015 T5I To MATCH EX15+1N6 I I -FLOOR JOISTS I UK Q I E 1ST. YVOOD ROGF�WK I I I I I Q OFF I � I 5TIN6 ROOF \ I ' ISTS A5 REQUIRd I T PRAM INGS I / ' I / „�„E� DATE: DRWG NO: ��' ROOF FRAMING UNDER VENT �hY �199�u�� � JAN. 20. 199 ' SYSTEM ON EXISTING WOOD KS PRO,JEEBER ADULTS CENTRE PROJECT NO: SCALE: CHECKED BY: 4 ' BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO 97175 1'=1'-0" I K.W.M.. A4F o . . I � I I i I I NBN ION BLOCK i YtALL ON£X15TiN6 10'POUNDATION I 4 7I ' 2• — — ,� /I 6x44 �- - - - - s — - - - b � - m � OP8�1 b4xC�� 1 -5 — — �/ ! I W8xx : — — �- - - - - - - - = ' OWSJ .— sue_ — — - - - - - - � 2 iV 4' SLAB ON 1 UY DECK IOM a 126 O.C.EA 100 N L1. f. 16" OWSJ r x DL 65 psf. 041 � CA owsJ -7T— DECK TO BE C014205tTE DECK nn'F— SECOND FLOOR FRAMING BARRY • BRYAN DATE: ORWG N0: Bloom ADDITION OF 4x4 ANGLE ASSOCIATES (1991) UNITED -Pau=umAws JAN. 20, 199 '�L�ER ADULTS PRO C ENTRE PROJECT NO: SCALE: CHECKED BY- K S 5 BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO 97175 1/4"=V-0" i K.W.M.. A48 t ' 6X6X1/2" SPACER PLATES ' 0 52" OZ. 8" BOND BEAM HILTI HVA 12 X 160 / WITH 2-IOM BARS 052" O.G. IN J- ' SOLID FILL BLOCK 10' BLOCK SOLID FILL TOP 6 X 6 X 1/4" BLOCK SHELF ANGLE ' BEAR SOLID NEW 10" BLOCK TO 10" BLOCK % WALL ON EXIST. 10' BLOCK / FOUNDATION t 4x4x3/5' }I 1 1/20 STEEL HILTI DECK,4" 12XI&O — INSIJLATiON ' AT 24' w8 X 24 t ADD ANGLE TO PROVIDE TEMPORARY SUPPORT DECK SUPPORT TO EXISTING Y�E IT 15 ROOF DECK, GUT BACK GUT SACK AND R1=MOVE AS REGV 6 1/2" t TO ADD NEW 10" BLOCK AAL.L �a Id. �EXISTIN6 WALL ' TO BE REMOVED 12"1 t jt DETAIL t t 1 t TITLE. 5/S2.4 BARRY • BRYAN ; DATE: DRWG NO: ' ASSOCIATES (1991) Ll111TED - JAN. 20, 199 PROJFSLTDER ADULTS CENTRE PROJECT NO. SCALE: CHECKED BY: SKS6 t BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO 97175 1'=1'-0" K.W.M.. A48 01/21/1998 18:55 705-741-1526 KIRKLAND $ OTS ENG PAGE 02 1 1 MECHANICAL ADDENDUM#2 DMGG 1_DEMOLIMN LAYOUT 1 ADDENDUM DRAWING SKM-1 1 .1 Second floor washrooms to remain. .2 Part of the combustion air duct to remain. .3 The owner is removing some of the plumbing. 1 .4 The existing counter and sink to be relocated to room 106. .5 Strip out the existing kitchen exhaust hood and fire suppression system. .6 The mechanical contractor shall refer to the extent of demolition shown on the architectural ' drawings and shall include all disconnections and removals as necessary to complete the work. The contractors are advised that the owner is currently undertaking to demolish certain areas of the building and will remove associated mechanical services and equipment. The contractor shall 1 visit the site to obtain a clear understanding of the extent of the demolitions required by this contract. DRAWING M2: HVAC LAYOUT 1 ADDENDUM DRAWING SKM-2 1 .1 Fire dampers added on HVAC-4 system. .2 Duct sizes added in room 130. , .3 Thermostats shown in room 130, 146 and 147. .4 Corridor 148/135 supply air ducts to bave type-B vertical fire dampers. ADDENDUM DRAWING SKM-3 1 .1 Thermostat for rad shown in room 127. .2 Horizontal type B fire dampers added to HVAC-1. ADDENDUM DRAWING SKM-4 .1 Added diffuser and return grille to room 138. 1 .2 Added fire dampers to kitchen exhaust hood. See revised spec 15807. .3 Added duct size and changed air flow in room 104. DRAWING M3: SANMRY LAYOUT ADDENDUM DRAWING SKM-5 .1 Deleted 2" funnellfloor drain in room 140. .2 Added cleanout to sink drain in room 136. .3 Mop sink relocated from room 115 to 116. .4 Added a funnel/floor drain in room 115 and revised pipe sizes. 1 01/21/1998 18:55 705-741-1526 KIRKLAND & OTS ENG PAGE 03 ADDENDUM DRAWING SW-4 t 1 Added interceptor detail reference&section. .2 Added 4" sanitary pipe below stairs for clarification. .3 Sink LV-2 drain from lunchroom above not kitchen. ' .4 Combustion air duct added. ADDENDUM DRAWING SKM-7 1 Steel support base for the oil interceptor supplied and installed by division 15. .2 See the architectural/structural drawings for the elevator sump pump pit construction details. ' ADDENDUM DRAWING SKM-8 .1 The rainwater leader and drain piping is extended to the south wall of the new addition. 12RAWING M4: PARTIAL PLANS,PLUMBING& DETAELS ADDENDUM DRAWING SKM-9 ' .1 Cold water supply pipe to the garbage room sprinkler system is 1-1/2 .2 Washroom 105 to remain as is. .3 Connect new combustion air duct to the existing duct in the basement. Insulate all new combustion air ductwork from the basement ceiling to the attic. .a Revised hot and cold water risers coming up from the basement. ' .5 Cold water supply to the boiler should be 3/4". ADDENDUM DRAWING SKM-10 ' .I New natural gas demand load shown at gas meter station- The contractor shall arrange with the Consumers Gab Company for a new regulator and meter. 2 The dotted lines indicate natural gas piping in the ceiling cavity below the roof. 3 Install additional valves where indicated. Provide access panels to all shut-off valves located in ,alas for the barbecue supplies. ' DRAW,I NCX MS: EVAC AND PIPINQ ED TAIIS ADDENDUM DRAWING SKM-11 .1 Change rock wool insulation to 3M Fire Barrier Duct Wrap as shown in section 15082. ADDENDUM DRAWING SKM-12 .1 Added missing stack dimension and revised sleeper detail number. ADDENDUM DRAWING SKM-13 ' A Deleted duct dimension. 01/21/1998 18:55 705-741-1526 KIRKLAND & OTS ENG PAGE 04 DRAWING M6e. 1 SCHEDULES AND E21NG DETAILS 1 ADDENDUM DRAWING SKM-14 1 .1 Added 2" ball valve. ADDENDUM DRAWING SKM-15 1 .1 Added static pressure, H.P., and heating output values to HVAC units 2, 4 & 5. ADDENDUM DRAWING SKM-16 1 1 Revised notes on units LV-2, SC-3 and HU. ADDENDUM DRAWING SKM-17 1 1 Detail of typical horizontal type B fire damper. GENERAL NOTES , 1 Spec section 15401 page 48, item 2.6.1.2: Watts Series 9,DM3 backflow preventers required ' for hurniditfters and canteen ruachines. .2 Spec section 15732 page 60, item 2.1.4: Design conditions for HVAC equipment. ' .3 Spec section 15751 page 65, item 3.1.9: Install baclflow preventers on humidifiers. .4 Spec section 15807 page 71, item 2.1.4.7: Provide fire dampers on supply and exhaust collars 1 of the kitchen exhaust hood. 1 t 1 1 1 _ 1 01/21/1998 18:55 705-741-1526 KIRKLAND & OTS ENG PAGE 05 RE-ROUTE REMOVE EXISTING 1 - N.6. VENT PIPE DUCTwoRK t FUEL ' REMOVE EXISTING 0.1 SANITARY PIPING. y ' INSTALL NEW AT FLOOR LEVEL.. SEE DW6 M5, DOILER ROOM STRIP OUT ALL PIPING AND CRAM SPACE Wl T H C.1, ' STORAISE OR COPPER DWV ' P3 MEN'S WASHR;OpM ' STRIP BACK HOT WATER Dl —--— —- WA5HROOM ' TO REMAIN 5TOR. WOMEN'S n AIN RELOCATE EXISTING TO �� u CONVECTOR AND PIPING 2 tSTOR. D 1 RELOCATE I SINK 4 KITCHEN COUNTER ot E REMOVE EXHAUST FAN / \ AND DUCTWORK STRIP BACK NATURAL GAS P1PIN6 AND FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM TO SHUT—OFF VALVE I IN BASEMENT AND GAP DI OLDER ADULT COMMUNITY CENTRE DRAWN: PTA SCALE: MPS DWG#: CHANGE5 TO DEMOLITION NOTES CHK.D: Oft X08#; q?175 SKM-1 LOTS EN61NEERING DATE: JAN 3I/'46 FILE: M-OI wc� - EDO PROJECT OLDER AVLLr CoMKNTY cEmTRE DWG NO. T17LE PIRE PAMPERS.tW�T SIZES *V THERMOSTATS SKM-2 SCALE: N175 IKOV AN 4*4im 99 jllll�v- ly'll-I?MOE:[ ry-111mr-Ily PROJECT OLDER ADULT COMMMITY CENTRE DWG NO. TITLE FIRE DAMPERS AND THERMOSTATS w ,m •m DRAWN: PTA SKM-3 fl-V NO. • I�w��s�wnwl�nlawfalr w�a�i w�w►w.n�aw��� all �� �■ .. _ aa�a.���a• 1�a� ' m UN alp fJA,w.!..r►1!■ ��ae�� ,► ► ��� o.,_ .�, FA IDWG NO. TITLE ADVITIONAL • , DRAWN: f"A SKM-41 �� ~ • MJW!r-ZW L •III � �-�-�-,:��..� .. -.-- ■ �lsZ!'lZwTA� LINE w■�r n..1,w. �� ��it • '-' �i� , .. �_ • ' ' . �■ -. 11 �`_ ■f • .�. ■■M! -------s- 60 ' t� PROJECT - DWG • T4TLE METED DRAIN RM. 140. - SKM-5 OTONABEE TECHNICAL 1 / M-05 REV NO. 0 4 M 4-IN S4WHEW Z ABOVE.WE PLAN FROM A OVE e rLom a 's ® rrc ELEV R>t u �•� i BOILER ROOM cA •• 1 STORA6E To Ec tv-y a a ELEVA7oR Am IN �j ro f•IT DRAIN p 1 ca TO �r E GRAV�P/�CE f- U LOP n NEW 4.O SANITARY 4*0 tn{ I R� STORAGE C STORAbC If CRAWLPAGE PROJECT OLDER ADULT COMMUNITY CENTRE ()WG NO. TITLE AL7VED REFEREWi E NUMBERS, SANITARY BELONI STAIRS,COMB. AIR DUCT r M3 SKM-6 CM ' OTC�NABEE TECHNICAL DRAWN: PTA SG1LE: NTS JOEL 97175 SERVICES -D CHK'D: 6FS DATE: 11SWIM FILE R AN r cs i I t eX 4•0 VENTS OFF INTLRC.EnoK � U°TNRU ROoF iswARATEI.Y) �1 1 14.1 VENT OFF STORAGE TANK JANI TORS 1.P TrfRU ROOF ISEPARATELY) IS2 r I c� T OIL INTURr-VPTOR IV* MAIN FROM ( to ' � IP PUIfP 6RAVITY pRAYI-0" 1 Q 5T$L WPFORT STORAGE TANK U 1 VIVI510N IS SIZE TO LIVAMr oil. 1 MAIN FLIR INTERCL°PTOR CAVITY. C i ►- ?'m VENT U ' n (J 9'0 VISC41AR6E TO SANITARY N MAUfINE RM_ TRAP SEAL PRti�E1Z ELECT.004mr I co e5W FLJZ ACGt:SB PIT PIT I �/i v Exg x PIT VeLL r Z '.+EE f= I Qc ORAIN� W „p m 0 SUMP PUMP(P)) QELE\/ATOR SUMP 4 OIL INTERCEPTOR DETAIL N.T.S. PROJECT OLDER ADULT COMMUNITY CENTRE DWG NO. m TITLE STEEL SLFPORT PROVIDED BY DIVISION 15. SUMP PIT BY OTHERS ^�� s�� r OTONA M TECHNICAL DRAWN: PTA SCALE: NTS .Iae,� 4�ns �ti✓ ��r/It SERVICES LMTED CNK'D: 6f DATE: JAN 21/41D FILE M-05 REV N0. 0 a a _ 5 1 U 4'O Rly. DOYW B �� O GGNGRETE co ( 2%SLGM°E GO i b Ff. SPLASH" 9 Pt.GIP 4'1 PIPE 4" 4'FV f GUT THM Y1ALL i 7 f t i i Q c n c �4 PARTIAL ROOF PLAN �ti�RT Z D PROJECT OLDER ADULT COMMUNITY CENTRE DWG NO. tcT' .¢ TITLE ROOF DRAIN PIPING EXTENCW TO SMTNWALL SKM-8 OTONABEE TECHPIICAL DRAWN: �rA SG4L£: NTS JOBS 4?175 .SERVICES LMTW CHK'D: 6F5 TF1L R 01/21/1998 18:55 705-741-1526 KIRKLAND & OTS ENG PAGE 13 I I Y-1 1 O � 1 Gf•1 I"AND f CIf7G. LINES TO 05w.5EE O PARTIAL OGMT.PLAN 2 r+s f4^DUCT lOs �04 mom 1 I ma 1 1 iil , 1 M4 r 9/4'0 UP FOR GONTlIiJAT1OH$f:E 1 1.210 UP oLL1""N6 1•L/lfde 210 JP 1/2-1 UP TO YV/R 'S/4Y ABOVE i 4 • I In•m GOILZR Room Gw tQ N04 44"M AIR fffLOc-ATw- pplLl9¢ o o. THft HCA GIASE MOT wATLR TO ROOT On ' 6005ENl.•GK 1/x-m: TANKS� . Hw a C44 aH6 REMAIN i TO 1 biw(LV-2)IN �® !. r I t I I M4 OLDER ADULT COMMUNITY CENTRE DRAWN: PTA SCALE: NTS DWG#: ' REVISED PIPE 51=5 4 ADD AIR PUOT CHK•D: &F9 Joao: dmi'm �-9 SKM OTS EN&NLLRIN& DATE: JAN 21AD FILE: M-04 a a A�PR�ox.bad-. WA0 1 400 MHH ro artnooR I PR0v1DE moOOR AND Q LC 0AMFa anOOOR SKM-OfW VALVVS so MSH FOR EARWiCUeS a 3/4.O} 1 VVIP Dom To riu4mN u AMD(� 400 eMEW � 1 1/2"1 11/2`0� 9/4•0 a v i IN GEILIN&SPAGE WACYS I1/4•m p 250 MBH 00M THRUUSH ROOF v #°ROOM lET6Q F1NA0-! •o i i/4•m a 250 KW NEA VEHAW TO flJTLRE 6AS 1 -2�H 3'm 3'O 9'm 2.1p 50 Pm E - --Pp71I� M 1 1/2'0 2•m) OFF VALVE,NIPPLE l t GAP HvXJa Pom TO IDL . 250 MBH k7o HYIT fFUTU��� -IO0 11/4.4 NVA" I56 ME1H C 04 C_ U PROJECT OLDER ADULT COMMUNITY CENTRE b DWG N0. D r,. TITLE ADDED METER LOAD AND MORE 5k1UT-OFF VALVES M4 aTONASC-EC� .AL [DRAWN: PTA SCALE: NT5 J09 97175__ I SK - 0 A SERVICES LIMITED CHKT: &FS DATE: JAN 21/18 1 FILE -04 R Cor N r r W CD TOTO ( m FAN i cn Ln � v 14'l� L FILL "TH ROCK WOOL. 1 INSULATION p, CONTINUOUS SOLDER JOINT ►' � 1 6ALV.STL COUNTERR. IlH6r Ui N CURB VETA. SEE ARGN,VH". RlaM.i! EXISTING STOPS BALLAST SINGLE PLY P�aANI: • '?iF' EXISTING STL. ~Z � L76GK 3M 2 INSULATION �?y�. < 6ALY.StL.COLLAR IN y < e EXISTING 24' U STEEL. BEAM b K I TCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCT THRU M5 ROOF DETAIL N.r.s. z • D PROJECT OLDER ADULT COMRMITY CENTRE OWG NO. IV* TI1LE INSULATION AROUND DUCT SKM-11 OTONAME TECHNICAL DRAWN: PTA SCALE: NTS JOB, 41115 SEFMES LIUYTED CHK•0. 6F5 DATE: JAN 21/48 FILE M-05 REV N0. O m r N r r tD W W r W W Ln i cn 1 A G,u r 'j" (4) EQUALLY SPACED N SUPPORTS o+ )O, 1110 INELDED JOINTS ONE TEST BOLT DUCT TO FAN PORT 2 TEST PORTS IWO 0° APART r EXHAUST D PAN z 0 a DRAIN EX1571N6 STL. ROOF SEE SLEEPER DETAIL (2 RCQ'D) i - M5 METAa L OF EF—I FAN ON ROOF M5 N,7.5. m PROJECT OLDER ADULT COMMUNITY CENTRE DWG NO. TITLE ADDED STACK DIMENSION. REVI5ED SLEEPER 0% NO. OTONABEE TECHNICAL. DRAWN: PTA SCALE: NTS JOB# 9'7115 SKM-12 SERVICES UIVRED CHK'D: 6IFS DATE: JAN 21!96 FILE M-05 _ REV N0. cs r kc N18 STEEL BEAM SEE STRUGT. DINGS. v a v 1 O r- 1 u v + 24 RUN DUGT TO UNDERSIDE OF STRUCTURAL BEAM C 4� O U fr1 AGOU5TIC CEILING TILE �o M5 D PROJECT OLDER ADULT COMKINITY CENTRE DWC N0. m TITLE DELETED DUCT DIMENSION F, OTONABEE '}�EC}iNiCAL DRAWN: PTA SCALE: NTS JOB) 971'13 KM--13 SERVICES LINKED CHK' D 6P5 DATE: .IAN 21fg8 FILE M-05 REV N0. O CS) N tD m �-- NEW 2"m DGW 5UPPLY m BALL VALVE cn m WATT5 SERIE5 qOq SIZE 2" rn A r PRE55URE REDUCER N 5ET TO '75 P.S.l. °' WATER METER LOCATED IN ROOM 8I2 ao REUSE EXISTING H r METER BYPASS z (NC, AND LOCKED BY UTILITY) 0 eo 0 -i tn m 2"m DGW � I GOLD WATER SUPPLY (NEW) FROM STREET ` I PROJECT OLDER ADULT COMMUNITY CEPITRlE DWG NO. TIT LE ADDED 2" . BAL. VALVE SKM-14 m M6 OTONABEE TEOI VICAL BRAWN: PTA SCALE: NT5 JOB# 41'11?5 SERVICES_l..�AtI�Q CHKID DATE: --+�► vae LE M-06 m _ . m HVAG EOU I PMENT 5GHEDULE tD TOTAL O/A H.P. AES,16% HT6 IDES 16H CL6 OD W T CAP. (BH NO. !U►KE/HOSE. VOLTA6L AIR FLAW VOLUHE E.8.P. (K.W ) pUTPUT AGCE560R1 E5 ►... (CFH) (GFM) (Hew LAT1rW SENS. Ln HVAG-1 SCE SPECS 205/3/60 WOO 4500 - - - - - we SPECS Ln J CD Ln v A AC-2 LENNOX L6Al2OHIY 20519160 '3600 400 1 .4 5 168 42,010 65.000 ECOHOHISER, 6RAVITY EXH. Ln HONMYi"ELL 1T300 T'STAT m m AND 1D101TE SENSORS, DIRTY F I LTt'R SK I TCN �WAG-Al LENNOX 6CS16-653 208/3/60 2001 135 0.1 5/4 100 15.000 46,000 El.OI4OHI61°_R, GRAVITY EXH. HO EYNELL T?300 T'5TAT AND P040TE 5ENSORS, DIRTY FILTER SNITCH H WjW,-g LE NOX 1.6A120MY 206/5/60 3450 6-15 1 .6 9 166 42,000 63,000 EC.OWOMISER, POMt EXH. D HONEYMELL MOO T'5TAT d AND REMOTE 58�, D S Wff 40 FILTER SNITCH o In m HUA•1 MAKE LP AIR 120/1/60 1000 .6 1/5 60 MOH ROOF CURB. REMOTE PANEL PROJECT OLDER ADULT COMy[MTY CENTRE DWG N0, f�l TITLE ADDED INFORMATION TO WAG UNITS 2, 4 t 5 SKM-15 OTONAWE TECHNICAL DRAWN: PTA SCALE: NTS JOB# 41175 SE WICE6 L%ATM CHK'D: 6P5 DATE: JAN 2V98 FILE M-06 REV N0. 0 m r N r PLUMBING FIXTURE 50HEDULE LD NO. DESCRIPTION HOT COLD DRAIN VENT MODEL REMARKS m KATER YtATER r LV-1 LAVATORY 1/2 1/2 1 1/2 11/4 Std SPECS - m m LV-2 LAVATORY 1/2 -1/2 1 1/2 1 .1/4 - RELOCATE EXISTIN6 to WG K"TER CLOSET 1/2 5 1 1/2 SEE SPECS - m UR URINAL 5/4 2 1 1/2 SEE SPECS - c1 p r 9G-1 STAINLESS 57M- SINK 1/2 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/4 SEE 5P5CS - ►�• rn N Q1 SO-2 STAINLESS STEEL SINK 1/2 1/2 2 1 1/2 SEE SPECS - 56-3 PRE-RINSE SINK 1/2 1/2 2 1 1/2 - RELOCATE EXISTIN6 MS MOP StNK 1/2 1/2 5 1 1/2 SEE SPEG5 FD FLOOR DRAIN 3 1 1/2. SM SPECS TRAP SEAL PRIMER PD-2 FLOOR DRAIN 1 4 1 1/2� 1 SEE 5P6C5 TRAP SEAL PRIMER X H Ft,-5 P~L/FLOOR DRAIN 2 1 1/2 SEE SPECS 'TRAP SEAL PRIMER D z d HU 1MIMIDIfI9t 1/2 i - SEE 5PEC5 a SCAIEDULE PROVIDE WATTS 4D BFP Qo 0 FM REFRI6. WATER COOLER 1/2 1 1/4 1 1/4 SEE SPECS - N m z G) DYI COMM0W,IAL DISHWASHER 3/4 2 11/2 - RELOCATE EXISTIN6. PROVIDE WATTS SERIES 404 BFP. Pi SUMP PUMP 1/$ HP 1 !/2 2 SEE 5P6C6 ELEVATOR SUMP. P2 CAWC LATOR 1/6 HP SEE SPECS 'DOMESTIC, N.A. REC,1RC. 1 i PROJECT OLDER ADULT COMMUNITY CENTRE DWG NO. TITLE REVISED NOTES ON LV2, SC3 A HU � ���� CD OTOMME TECHdlCAL DRAWN. PTA SCALE. HTS JOB# glI'75 SEfMES LIMED CHKT: 6FS DATE: JAN 21M8 FILE M-06 REV_NO. - - ---- � r r r r� rI� r r � r r r r r r r r s• � e n � F u ? 3 u a 4 a .47771. v 1 i x bbl ' i t F t • C 4 -n 8 11 a Q 6 IYPI GAL HORIZONTAL TYPE 'B' FIRE PAMPER NOT TO St-SALE r FIRE DAMPER NOTES, I . FIRE DAMPER C 2. 1�xI- X.05q" RETAININ6 ANGLE. MIN. I LAP OVER OPENING. a 3. DAMPER SLEEVE c 4. BOLT BETAININ6 ANGLES TO ONE END OF THE DAMPER SLEEVE z USiN6 1/4-20x3/4 ROUNDHEAD STOVE BOLTS AT 8' MAX. O.G. . I 5. ATTACH DAMPER TO SLEEVE KITH NO.8xl /2" SHEET METAL c SCREWS AT b", MAX. Q.G. 6. MIN. OPENIN6 SHALL BE LAR6ER BY 1/8' FOR EACH FOOT OF WIDTH OR HE16HT OF THE DAMPER, MAX. OPENIN6 SHALL BE 11,2" LARGER THAN THE ALLOWABLE MIN. -1. DUCTY40RK 8. FIRE SEPARATION q. DUCT CONNECTION (AS REOUIRED BY SIZE AND PRESSURE) 10. EXTENDED RETAININ6 ANGLE 11 . BLADE HEAD ' Z PROJECT OLDER ADULT C.OMMUNfTY CENTRE ptiyO 1,ip. TITLE TYPICAL HORIZOWAL TYPE 15'f IRE DAMPER SKM-17 ~ OT ONABEE 'EOINCaL DRAWN: PTA SCALE: NTS JOB# gll'15 SERVICES UMrfM CHK'D: 6F5 DATE: JAN 21/48 FILE M-02 REV NO. U111111y98 18:55 --TH5-141-10Lb KiKKLAND & oT5 ENG PAGE 22 January 21, 1998 Section 15401 OLDER ADULTS CENTRE PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 4t ACCESSORIES 2.6 BACK FLOW PREVENTERS(Sizes as indicated) ' .1 To CAN/CSA-864 Series. .1 Acceptable material:Watts Series 909WTS with Series 909AG. , .2 For humidifiers and canteen water supply pipes provide Watts Series 9DM3. 2.7 VACUUM BREAKERS A To CAN/CSA-B64 Series. .2 Atmospheric Vacuum Breaker: ' .1 Acceptable material:Watts 288A .3 Hose connection vacuum breaker: ' .1 Acceptable material: Watts 8 2.8 PRESSURE REGULATORS .1 Capacity: as indicated. ' .1 inlet pressure: 90 Psig. .2 Outlet pressure: 75 Psig. .3 Capacity: 136 GPM_ ' .4 Acceptable material: Watts Series 223, size 2 2.9 HOSE BIBB.S AND SEDIMENT FAUCETS ' .1 Bronze construction complete with integral back flow preventer, hose thread spout, replaceable composition disc, and chrome plated in finished area. .2 Acceptable material: Cambridge 32W201, Emco 10741. 2.10 WATER MAKE-UP ASSEMSLY(FOR EXISTING BOILER) , .1 Complete with backflow preventer, pressure gauge on inlet and outlet, pressure reducing valve to CSA B356, pressure relief valve on low pressure side and bail valves on inlet and , outlet. .2 Acceptable material: Watts Series 909QTS, 223 & 174A. 2.11 TRAP SEAL PRIMERS ' .1 All brass, with integral vacuum breaker, NPS Y4 solder ends, NPS % drip line connection. .2 Acceptable material: Ancon MS-810. , 2.12 STRAINERS .1 860 kPa, Y type with 20 mesh, monal, bronze or stainless steel removable screen. .2 NPS 2 and under, bronze body,screwed ends, with brass cap. A Acceptable material: ,Armstrong F4SC, Braukmann FY32, Crane 988-1/2, Leitch BE,_ Spirax BT, Toyo 380, Watts 777 Series. OTS 97119 sOWMANVILLE Page 4 01/21/1998 18:55 705-741-1526 KIRKLAND $ OTS ENG PAGE 23 Section 15732 January 21, 1998 PACKAGED ROOF TOP UNITS OLDER ADULTS CENTRE ' .4 Include following: ' .1 Provide, for each unit manufacturer's name, type, year, number of units, and capacity, 1.4 WARRANTY -- ' .1 Contractor hereby warrants refrigeration compressors in accordance with GC 24, but for 5 years. 2 e5Ql2t&.T,3 (HVAC-2, HVAC-4 & HVAC-5) ' 2.1 GENERAL .1 Roof mounted, self-contained, single zone unit with gas burner and DX refrigeration and bear label of CSA, CGA, and ULC. .2 Units to consist of cabinet and frame, supply fan, heat exchanger, burner with integral induced draft fan, heater control, air filter, refrigerant cooling coil, compressor(s), condenser coil and fans, motorized outside air damper, return damper, gravity exhaust damper (full ' economiser). HVAC-5 to include power exhaust. .3 Prefabricated roof curb to conform to requirements of National Roofing Contractors Association MICA), minimum height 450 mm and vibration isolation rails for all roof units. ..4 Design conditions: Outdoor winter-4F DB, 60%RH: Outdoor summer 86F DB, 74F WB. Indoor winter 74F DO, 35% RH: Indoor summer 75F DO, 55% RH 2.2 CABINET .1 Cabinets: weatherproofing tested and certified to AGA rain test standards and soundproofing tested to ARI 270. .2 Framing and supports: welded steel, galvanized after manufacture, with lifting lugs. .3 Outer casing: weather tight galvanized steel with baked enamel finish, complete with flashing. .4 Access: gasketed hinged doors or panels with screwdriver operated flush cam type fasteners. .5 Insulation: coated glass fibre on all surfaces where conditioned air is handled, 25 mm thick, 32 kg/m' density. 1 2.3 FANS .1 Centrifugal, forward curved impellers, statically and dynamically balanced. V-belt drive with adjustable variable pitch motor pulley, fan and motor integrally mounted on isolation base, separated from unit casing with flexible connections and spring isolators. Vibration isolators: 95% eff iciency. 2.4 'AIR FILTERS .1 50 mm thick, 30130 0/16 efficiency,throwaway, standard to unit manufacturer. ' .2 To meet ANSI/NFPA 90A, air filter requirements type Class 2. Page 60 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 01/21/1998 18:55 705-741-1526 KIRKLAND & OT5 ENG - -PAGE 24 Section 15751 January 21, 1998 ' • HUMIDIFIERS OLDER ADULTS CENTRE 2.2 DESIGN CONDITIONS: Indoor R.H. 35% at 74°F. Minimum duct temp. 55°F. , HVAC-2, 4 & 5 economiser control. HVAC-1"fixed fresh air volume of 4500 CFM. Maximum absorption distance 12'. ' 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: ' .1 Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions. ' .2 Humidifier to be new and clean when project is accepted. .3 Install humidistat as indicated. .4 Water service overflow drain! to manufacturers' recommendation. .5 Install in accessible location. , .6 Install access doors or panels in adjacent ducting. .7 When installing in ducting, provide waterproof duct up and downstream in accordance with Section 15811 - Ductwork- Low Pressure -Metallic to 500 Pa. , .8 Install drain connection at low point in duct and pipe to nearest funnel drain. .9 Install Watts Series 9DM3 backflow preventer on water supply pipe. •.��.• END ••�•.• , L � Page 65 80WMANVILLE OTS 97119 01/21/1998 18:55 705-741-1526 KIRKLAND & OTS ENG PAGE 25 ' Section 15807 January Z1, 1998 • OLDER ADULTS CENTRE PACKAGED KITCHEN EXHAUST HOODS 15807 PACKAGED KITCHEN EXHAUST HOODS ' 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES ' .1 ANSI/NFPA 96-1991, Vapor Removal from Cooking Equipment. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA .1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01005 - Submittals. 1.3 MAINTENANCE DATA .1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01005 - Submittals. ' 1.4 CERTIFICATION OF RATINGS .1 Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by him from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards. 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GREASE FILTER TYPE .1 To ANSI/NFPA 96. .2 ULC labelled. .3 Configuration: Combination exhaust/make-up-air hood with collar connections and face mounted supply grilles. Overall size: 36" x 96". .4 Materials: .1 Welded type 304 stainless steel. .2 Lights: incandescent. .3 Washable filters: Section 15861: .4 Drain connectors. .5 Supply air facia panels. .6 18 gauge st. stl. flat wall covering. .7 Fire dampers in the exhaust and supply collars. .5 Performance: 2400 CFM exhaust; 1000 CFM make-up-air ,7 Provide complete fire detection and suppression system. .6 Acceptable material: Ventmaster; Gaylord. 3 EXECUTION ' 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Install hoods in accordance with manufactuers instructions. ' .2 Operation sequences: Provide start switch for exhaust fan and interlock to start make-up-air unit. ' }},►}• End ..... ' OTS 97119 80WMANViLLE Pago KIRKLAND ENGINEERING LTD P.O.Box 1941 Tel: (705)745.2831 294 Rink Street ' Peterborough,Ontario Fax: (705)741-1526 Peterborough,Ontario K9J 7X7 _ — K9J 2K2 ' Date:January 21,1998 File:801 ADDENDUM #E1 Project: Older Adult Centre Owner: Municipality of Clarington ' Location: 26 Beech Ave.,Bowmanville 10 DRAWING El 1.1 Electrical Roof Plan: MUA-1 should read 120/1/60. , 1.2 Electrical Site Plan: Scale should read 1'=20'-0" , 2 0 DRAWING E2 2.1 Change fire detector in Receiving 116 to fixed temperature heat detector. 3.0 DRAWING E3 31 Basement Plan: all fluorescent fixtures in Activity room BI are type"A". 3.2 Add exit sign to south door of Activity room B2. , 3.3 Note" SEE PANEL LAYOUT DETAIL"should point to the electrical room. .4 PVC conduit is to be provided in elevator machine room from pit to above floor. Size to 3 p accommodate the cord set of sump pump. Seal conduit to maintain odour control 3.5 Refer to mechanical dra g proposed drawings for location of relocated water heaters. . p 3.6 Legend: Delete fixture"D" ' Fixture Types"A,B,and C"are existing. 3.7 Add one 12W emergency lighting fixture to corridor 202. ' 3.8 Fixtures in new stair and corridor 213 should be type _ F 3.9 Add 2 type"E" fixtures in storage 214. ' 3.10 New fixtures in storage 204 are type 4.0 D RAWINCz—E_4 4.1 Delete the two new outdoor receptacles from main entrance to existing building. 4.2 Receptacles beside sinks in bar 124,reception 136 and lunch 106 to be ground fault interrupter type. 4.3 Move receptacle in corridor 145 east to clear new closet. ' 4.4 Delete receptacles in stair 134. p ' 4.5 Add second receptacle above counter for microwave in reception 136. 4.6 Add telephone and computer outlets in north wall of office 137. 4.7 Add receptacle in north wall of washrooms 124 and 126. ' 4.8 Refer to architectural drawing A9.2 for mounting details of outlets in counter of reception 104. ' 4.9 Fan force heater in stair 109 to be recessed mounted. Surface back box not required. 4.10 Add one receptacle in corridor 112 and two in corridor 110. 4.11 The timer for EF-2 is a single channel electronic 24hr/7 day unit c/w battery backup model EC71/30S manufactured by Paragon. 4.12 The wall clocks are 12 inch dia,black case with white face,120V, model 2941-1 ' manufactured by Edwards. 4.13 Floor mounted receptacles are recess mounted with cover plate model B2536 c/w S3925 manufactured by Hubbell. 4.14 Hand dryers are 208V,145OW c/w automatic start IR detection,model 380000 ' manufactured by Nova. 4.15 Relocate receptacle in receiving 116 to north wall(sink moved from 115 to 116). { i 5 0 DRAWING ES , 5.1 Delete mounting note for lounge 103. 5.2 Delete fixture type"F"from washroom 105. Existing fixtures are to be retained. ' 53 Emergency lighting fixtures are as follows: ' -12W single remote head 12Vdc micro-quartz PAR 18,Lumacell MQl-12W-12VD .. -12W dual remote heads 12Vdc Vdcmucartz P,AR 36�umacell RS10Q-2 W 1� VDC.18,Lumaf-e -20W single remote head 12 q ' 5.4 Dusk to dawn timer for outdoor fixtures is single channel electronic cfw battery backup model ECTST-N3 Suntracker manufactured by Paragon ' 5.5 Incandescent dimmer is 2000W rated minimum,vertical slider model EW20 manufactured by Prescolite Controls. ' 5.6 Fan speed control switch is 3 speed solid state white model S-FAN c/w DES ` manufactured by Prescolite Controls. _ 6.0 SPECIFICATIONS ' 6.1 Specification section 16505,Lighting Equipment follows on the attached. Kirkland egg Ltd. ' an M. P.Eng. doc 801.2 ' section 16505 Jjkpnaxy 21, 1998 LIGMING XQUIPUM OLDER ADULT CENTRE ' 1 4ENM&AL _. 1.1 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA -" ' .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01005. ' 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LAMS Fluorescent lamps. Lamp Bulb shape Base Initial Life Description Wattage u PLI3WTT T4-TT-13 G x 23 250 10,000 CRI>75 FB032/6 T8-6U md.bip 2850 20,000 CRI>75 T8 T8-32 md.bip 2900 20,000 CRI>75 FT40DL TS-39/40 biax/2Gll 3050 10,000 CRI>7S 32PLT TTT-32 2400 10,000 CRI>75 ' .2 Metal Halide Lamps. Lamp Bulb Shape Base Initial Life Description Design Watta�P Lumens h M70/MED ED-17/70W Medium 5,200 15,000 clear 2.2 BALLASTS .l Baked enamel finish: .1 Ballasts are to be of the energy savings type. .2 Ballasts for T5, T8 and triple tube fluorescent systems shall be ' electronic type. .3 Ballasts for MH and HPS are to be high power factor. .2 Reflector and other inside surfaces finished as follows: ' .1 White, minimum reflection factor 85$. .2 Colour fastness: yellowness factor not above 0.02 and after 250 h exposure in Atlas fade-meter not to exceed 0.05. ' .3 Film thickness, not less than 0.03 mm average and in no areas less than 0.025 mm. .4 Gloss not less than 80 units as measured with Gardner 60/ g loss ' meter. .5 Flexibility: withstand bending over 12 mm mandrel without showing signs of cracking or flaking under 10 times magnification. f.6 Adhesion: 24 mm square lattice made of 3 mm squares cut through film ' to metal with sharp razor blade. Adhesive cellulose tape applied ' 801 BOWHANVILLE, ONTARIO Page 1 - Jaanart Zi, 1998 �� 3L6505 dMZR ADULT COME Z,IG8T7NG EQUZFNMT over lattice and pulled. Adhesion satisfactory if no coating removed. .3 Alzak finish: .1 Aluminum sheet fabricated from special aluminum alloys and chemically ' brightened, subsequently anodically treated to specifications established by Alcoa, to produce: .1 Finish for mild commercial service, minimum density of coating 7.8 g/m2, minimum reflectivity 83% for specular, 80.5% for semi- ' specular and 75% for diffuse. .2 Finish for regular industrial service, minimum density of coating 14.8 g/m2, minimum reflectivity 82% for specular and 73% for ' diffuse. .3 Finish for heavy duty service, minimum density of coating 21.8 g/m2, minimum reflectivity 858 for specular, 65% for diffuse. i 2.3 LUMINARIES .1 Fixture Type "A" - Existing fluorescent fixture (several , configurations) . .2 Fixture Type "B" - Existing incandescent fixture (several ' configurations). .3 Fixture Type "C" - Existing wall pack or outdoor wall mounted fixture. ' .4 Fixture Type "D" - Recessed 2' x 4' fluorescent fixture, three 4' T8 lamps, prismatic X12 lens in hinged and latched frame, electronic ballast, 120V. ' Acceptable Manufacturers: CFI: AA348-120-03 Columbia: 4PS24-332G-RSA12-3EB8120 ' .5 Fixture Type "E" - Recessed l' x 4' fluorescent fixture, two 4' T8 lamps, prismatic X12 lens *in hinged and latched frame, electronic ballast, 120V. ' Acceptable Manufacturers: CFI: AA248-120-SO Columbia: 4PS 14-2 32-G-RS-Al2-EB8120 , .6 Fixture Type "F" - Strip fluorescent fixture, single 4' T8 lamp, ' electronic ballast, 120V. Acceptable Manufacturers. CFI: SB148-120-SO Columbia: CS4-132-EB8120 ' 801 BOWMANVr1rLE, ONTMUO Page 2 , ' Jaanary Z1, 1998 section 16505 �OI.DER ]►DIILT CENTRE LIdSTl= EQUIPMENT 1 .7 Fixture Type "G" - Incandescent fixture, single 10OW A lamp,-cast base. — Acceptable Manufacturers: Lightolier: 4848 Prescolite: WB-9316 - ALUMINUM ' .8 Fixture Type "H" - Matching fixture to type "D" plus plaster ceiling mounting kit option. Acceptable Manufacturers: CFI: AA348-12003 c/w FK92%4 ' Columbia: 4PS24-332M-RSA1273EB8120 .9 Fixture Type "J" - 6h" HID pot light fixture, one 70W metal halide ' damp, alzak reflector, black baffle, glass guard, HPF 120V ballast. Acceptable Manufacturers: Lightolier: 1145HBK-1102H-70H3Y ' Prestolite: RHD802-70MHFE-WTH805L .10 Fixture Type "K" - Wall sconce, two 13W compact fluorescent lamps, ceramic printable, HPF ballast, 120V. ' Acceptable Manufacturer: Technilite Systems: CWSCer-HPF ' .11 Fixture Type "L" - 6" pot light, 15OW incandescent A21 lamp, specular alzak wide angle reflector, frame for tee-bar ceiling mounting. Acceptable Manufacturers: Lightolier: TRM7059AO-FRM7011 c/w frame kit Prestolite: INC600-ST1602 c/w B-24 ' .12 Fixture Type ."M" - Wallpack. 70W metal halide lamp, diecast housing, HPF ballast, 120V. Acceptable Manufacturers: ' Moldcast: MDL-1-00-19-12 Keene: 313070MA-1 .13 Fixture Type "N" - 6" pot light, single 32W triple tube compact ' fluorescent lamp, specular, clear alzak reflector, electronic ballast, 120V. Acceptable Manufacturers: Lightolier: 8031CL-6132BE120 Prestolite: CFT632HEB-STF602H ' .14 Fixture Type "P" - Stem hung decorative indirect fluorescent fixture, white, three 39W-TS (biax) lamps, one electronic ballast, 120V. r Acceptable Manufacturer: Lightolier: 40712WH 1 801 BOWHANVILLE, ONTARIO Page 3 January 21, 1998 sectioa 16505 t Off.DER ADULT. Cl UMM LIGMIM EQVIPNMT .15 Fixture Type "R" - Recessed 2' x 2' fluorescent fixture, two T8 U- tube lamps, prismatic K12 lens in hinged and latched frame, electronic ballast, 120V. Acceptable Manufacturers: CFI: AA2U6-120-SO , Columbia: 4PS22-232U6G-RSAI2-EB8120 3 4M , 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Locate and install luminaries as indicated. ' 3.2 WIRING .1 Connect luminaries to lighting circuits: .1 Directly for luminaire designs. ' .2 Through flexible rigid conduit for luminaire designs. 3.3 LUMINAIRE SUPPORTS .1 For ausp2n ed ceiling installations support luminaries independently from ceiling grid in accordance with local inspection rerru i rem&nt a 3.4 LUMINAIRE ALIT .1 Align luminaries mounted in continuous rows to form straight uninterrupted line. .2 Align luminaries mounted individually parallel or perpendicular to building grid lines. ' THE END 801 BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO Page 4 ' BARRY • BRYAN • ARCHITECT 11 Stanley Court ' • ENGINEER Whitby, Ontario 0N 8P9 ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED • PROJECT MANAGERS Telephone(905)666.5256 ADDENDUM NO. 3 PROJECT: Older Adult Community Centre PROJECT NO.: 97175 Municipality Of Clarington 26 Beech Avenue, Bowmanville DATE: January 28, 1998 Tender No. CL 98-1 Municipality of Clarington The following shall constitute Addendum No. 3. Bidders shall include all revisions/clarifications in their Total Stipulated Price. ' 1. Refer to Addendum No. 2 dated January 20, 1998. A. Article 2.H. Drawing S1.1 Foundation Plan, Details and Notes: ' .1 Item .1: Delete this item. All foundation work shown on the drawings including the west addition building foundation is part of the work of this tender(CL 98-1). ' .2 Item .2: Perimeter sub-drainage as specified here is to be provided at the perimeter of the west and north building foundations. 2. The building will be open for site tours for general contractors and sub-trades from 10:00 am until 2:00 pm on Friday, January 30 and Monday February 2, 1998. 3. SPECIFICATIONS A. Section 00100- Instructions to Bidders 1 Section 7 -Time is of the Essence (1) The amount of time necessary to complete the work will be a consideration in the award of this contract. (2) Bidders shall submit with the Tender, a revised Tender Form page 1(R) attached hereto, indicating amount of time necessary to complete the work. 7175A2801.#3.wpd Page 2 ' B. Section 06410-Cabinet Work .1 2.01 - Materials: Add the following: ' G. Stainless Steel: Type 304 16 gauge satin finish stainless steel. (Refer to detail 1 B/A9.1 for location of stainless steel gables adjacent to gas range in Kitchen 113). 1 C. Section 07530- Elastomeric Sheet Roofing .1 2.01 - System Description The following are approved equivalent to the specified roofing system: ' Cadise .2 2.02 - Materials , Change paragraph O. as follows: O. Tapered Insulation: Compatible with roofing system, slope as shown on drawings but not less than 1%, Posislope or Accuplane. 4. DRAWINGS ' A. Drawing A2.2 - Ground Floor Plan 1 Change north wall of Reception 136, and north and west walls of Office 137 from partition type P5 to P9. .2 Change width of Storage 141 and Corridor 142 from 3' - 6 1/2" (c/c studs) to 3' - 11". .3 Partition Schedule: (1) Add: P9 - 1 layer 5/8" Type `X' gypsum board on existing wood ' stud framing with existing solid masonry wall back-up. .4 Repair existing south wall of basement access Stair 134 where damaged , or disturbed by the work. Remove all existing wood panelling in Stair 134 and install new 5/8" Type `X' gypsum board wall finishes to provide fire separation and flame spread ratings required by the Ontario Building Code. B. Drawing A4.1 - Building Sections 1 Bidders shall note that all new roof structures shall have a 1 hour fire resistance rating, including all columns. Refer to details for typical construction information. - 801.#3.wpd a BARRY- BRYAN ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED Page 3 Roof structures above prefinished metal soffits shall have 2 layers 5/8" Type `X' gypsum board installed at underside of rafters. .2 Section 7/A2.2 Extend sprayed polyurethane insulation on concrete block to underside of roof joists above prefinished metal soffit(west wall of Stair 104). ' 5. Refer to Mechanical Addendum, 5 pages, attached. 6. Refer to Electrical Addendum, 4 pages, attached. 1 END OF ADDENDU NO. 3 C.M. Earle, MAATO CME/cb 0a5A2801.l13.wpd BARRY- BRYAN `C& ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 ' TENDER FORM Page 1(R) The Office of the Clerk ' The Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington 40 Temperance Street Bowmanville, Ontario L1 C 3E6 Re: OLDER ADULT COMMUNITY CENTRE THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON ' 26 BEECH AVENUE BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO TENDER NO. CL 98-1 Sir: 1.0 We agree for the (Company Name) Stipulated Price stated below to supply all necessary tabour, materials, plant, equipment, services and overtime work as may be required for the execution and completion of all work in connection with the above referenced project for the Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington, in accordance with Instructions to Bidders, The Municipality of Clarington's Standard Terms and Conditions, the General Conditions, Supplementary General ' Conditions, Specifications and Drawings, prepared for that purpose by Barry • Bryan Associates (1991) Limited, Whitby, Ontario and to the entire satisfaction of the Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington: STIPULATED PRICE (exclusive of GST) Dollars ($ ) 2.0 Further, to assist you with the necessary information for tax purposes, etc., the stipulated ' price includes the following: Provincial Sales Tax $ 3.0 Goods and Services Tax(GST) at 7% to be added to the Stipulated Price $ ' 4.0 The Stipulated Price includes CASH ALLOWANCES in the amount of $50,000 (Fifty Thousand Dollars) as listed in the Instructions to Bidders. 5.0 We agree the Owner reserves the right to accept or reject prices bid for the work or for any portion of the work. 6.0 We agree that the Owner reserves the right to take any financial benefit, from alternates submitted, into consideration in the evaluation of all tenders and the subsequent award of the Contract. 6.1 We propose to complete the work in weeks following award of Tender. 717W801.93.wpd D1/�B:i9Q8 08: 41 IDI-741-1525 KIRKLAND & OTS ENG PAGE �2 MECHANICAL,ADDENDUM##2 DRAWING M4: PARTIAT,PI A_NS,PLUMBING& DETAMS ADDENDUM DRAWING SKM-9, REV-01 1 The garbage room sprinkler system supply(1-1/2")piping shall begin ahead of the water metre located in the basement and shall run up to the garbage room separately as shown, Insulate only the piping located in chases and above ceilings (i.e. concealed). )Piping to be labelled as per section. 15075. 1 DRAWING MG: SCHEDIEaES AND PIPING=DETAILS ADDENDUM DRAWING SRM-14, REV.-01 ' .1 Relocated the 1-1/2" sprinkler supply pipe and valve assembly to the basement ahead of the water metre as shown. GENERAL 1 Spec section 15732 page 62, item 2.10: Acceptable material: Include Engineered Air Ltd. 2 Please add section 15916 "Heating and Cooling Controls-Electric", pages 1 & 2 to the Division 15 tender documents. 01/20/1998 08: 41 705-741-1526 KIRKLAND & OTS ENG PAGE 06 � rye • - .---- --- LOOA'1E VALVE ASSEMBLY i IN 5A5EMF-NT ' 1 _1 IVY"", LI E5 TO MKT.AND EE I ITC. �� — -I PARTIAL B'5MT.PLAN \ _ M4 ' GA DUCT pN IC�h I —�---. _r-... — MQ 9/4"m UP 1 1/2"m UP FoR GONTINU/�TION 5�E P�UM31N4 PLAN m" UP I I/2„4 I � 5pRIWGLER M4 1/2"0 UP To NUR I ABOVE L 3/4"0 — I I/2"A 60iLER ROOM — - 3/4"4p Gw T NEW COMB.AIR ICELOCAIgD 3/4"0 GU GT(12x12) UP rn EX15TIN6 u WL SPAC[ THRU NEW Gµ0450 HOT NUTM i TO ROOF c/A TANKS I6003ET-- -I ' /7"O Mb u Hw t aA i _ ' ReMA1N - UP TO SINK(LV-Z IN I I Gi•M7�01"11� iY I � I{ OLDER ADULT COMMUNITY' CENTRE DRAWN: PTA SCALE. NT5 DWG#: RE'\/ISED PIPE SIZES 4 ADD AIR 'DUCT CHK'Ds 61=5 JOB#: 61-1175 SKM-91 OT5 EN61NEI-RIN6 DATE' .IAN 28/48 FILE: M-04 REV. —01 L rI r rr ■r rr r rr rr r�r rr ri r rr r rr r� �r Ir irI �-- NEW 2"d� DCW SUPPLY p Lo BALL VALVE m PRE55URE RE DUCE R m ^^� SET TO 'I5 P.S.#. W A N J CD Ul J A RATER METER n LOCATED IN ROOM B12 m R.E-U5E EXISTING M METER BYPASS 1 112"0 TO SPRINKLER5 = (NG AND LOCKED BY UTILITY) LOCATED IN GARBA&E l ROOM �3 H r D Z d Ro g � WATTS SERIES qOq 0 SIZE 2" M4 m 1 2"(P GOLD HATER SUPPLY (NEA) FROM STREET PROJECT OLDER ADULT COMMUNITY CENTRE DWG NO, D D TITLE ADD£D 2" 0 BALL VALVE AND 5FRINKLUR%I�FLY PIPE KM-1 w m M6 OTONABEE TECHNICAL DRAWN: f'TA SCAT C: NT5 JOBS 91415 (•,�, SERVICES LIMITED CHK'D: GFS DATE: JAN, 28/18 FILE M-06 REV NO. 01 01/28/1998 08: 41 705-741-1526 KIRKLAND & OTS ENG PAGE 25 January 12, 1998 Section 15916 OLDER ADULTS CENTRE HEATING AND COOLING CONTROLS - ELECTRIC 15916 HEATING AND COOLING CONTROLS -ELECTRIC 1 GENERAL ' 1.1 PRODUCT DATA .1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 01005 - Shop Drawings and Product Data, 2 ' paQp 2.1 GENERAL .1. Control equipment to be Honeywell unless otherwise indicated, i 2.2 VENTILATION DAMPER- GARBAGE ROOM , .1 Damper to be as specified in Section 15822. ,2 Actuator to be a Belimo Model SF120-S c/w built in switch. 2.3 CARBON DIOXIDE SENSOR/TRANSMITTER- HVAC-1 & HVAC-2 .1 Return air duct mounted sensor with transmtter. .2 Manually adjustable setpoint set for 800 PPM. .3 Sensor to be self-calibrating. .4 Acceptable material: Valtronics Model 2088 2.4 HVAC UNITS #2, 4& 5 -THERMOSTATS ,1 provide Honeywell T73008 electronic programmable thermostat and 073008 subbase for each unit. Thermostats for HVAC units 1, 2 & 5 to be mounted In the General Office as shown. .2 Provide following remote sensors: , .1 HVAC 2 - 2 0 T7047G1000. .2 HVAC 4- 4 @ T7047C1025. .3 HVAC 5 - 2 @ T7047G1000. ,3 Set ail dip switches and programs as directed by Commissiong Agent, 2.5 HVAC UNIT #1 -THERMOSTAT , .1 Provide Honeywell T7300B electronic programmable thermostat and 073008 subbase and mount in General Office. .2 Provide following remote sensors: 1 @ T7047GI O00 & 2 @ T7047C1025 .3 Provide LED indication for heating/cooling and dirty filter. .4 Set all dip switches and programs as directed by Commissioning Agent OTS Job #97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 1 ' 01;26/1958 06: 41 705-741-1526 KIRKLAND & OTS ENG PAGE 06 Section 15916 January 12, 1998 ' ELECTRIC HEATING AND COOLING CONTROLS OLDER ADULTS CENTRE 2.6 HUMIDIFIERS IHVAC UNITS 1, 2, 4 & 5) .1 Provide wall mount, modulating type humidistats, duct mounted high limit humidistats and air proving pressure swithes. .2 Set controls as directed by Commissioning Agent. 2.7 HOT WATER HEATING CONTROL.VALVES .1 Provide Honeywell Model V8043 Control valves for each hot water radiator and convector indicated, ,2 Valves to be 24 V and controlled by Honeywell Model T822A thermostat. .3 Control Valve Schedule: Room # Valve # Thermostat # 127 8130 V8043G1109 T822A1258 146 & 147 V8043C1058 T822A1258 108 V8043C1066 /see below) .4 Sex thermostats to settings directed by Commissioning Agent. 2.8 VARIABLE VOLUME CONTROL BOX - V1 .1 Provide control power (24 Volts) through auxiliary Contact on VAV box to the two zone control valves on two radiators in Room #108. .2 Adjust the and of travel cam operated auxiliary switch to match the maximum open position of the bypass box in the heating mode. 2.9 RETURN AIR FAN (RF1) .1 Provide 24 Volt control power through the auxiliary relay on T7300 thermostat to pick up the control relay in the return air fan located in the ceiling above Room #106. .2 RF1 to operate during occupied hours only. 2.10 THERMOSTAT GUARDS .1 Thermostat guards: lockable, beige, metal housing with ventilation slots for air circulation to thermostat. 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Install control devices to manufacturers instructions. .2 A 120/24 volt power source will be provided by Division 16. .3 Test, adjust and regulate all controls provided in this Section to satisfaction of Commissioning Agent. Page 2 SOWMANVILLE OTS Job#97119 0i/2e/1999 15: 19 705-741-1526 KIRKLAND & OTS ENG PAGE 02 0 KIRKL,AND ENGINEERING LTD � P.O. Box 1941 Tel: (705) 745-2831 294 pink Street , Peterborough, Ontario Fax: (705) 741.1526 Peterborough, Ontario K9J 7X7 K9J 2K2 Date: January 27, 1998 File: 80 X AD�EDUM #E2 Project: Older Adult Centre Owner: Municipality of Clarington Location: 26 Beech Ave., Bowmanville 1.0 DRAWING E1 1.1 Clarington Hydro has requested that the new service for the tennis court lighting be entirely underground. Provide concrete encased duct bank for portion of run below ' driveway, Existing lighting pole is not to be upgraded for dip pole service. M COMPUTER AND TELEPHONE OUTLETS i 2.1 Computer and telephone systems are to share conduits and outlet back boxes. 2.2 Provide single gang back,box for each pair of computer and telephone outlets. 2.3 Provide empty 314 each EMT raceway from each outlet box to ceiling cavity above T-bar. Bend conduit 90 degrees to provide horizontal exit into ceiling cavity. Provide pull cord U more than two bends in run. 3.0 DRAWING E3 3.1 Basement Plan: Add 144W emergency lighting battery unit EMI and receptacle in electrical room; Lumacell RG12S144/2MQ. ' 3.2 Second Floor Plan: Add 144W emergency lighting battery unit EM2 and receptacle in storage room 214; Lumacell RG128144/0. 3.3 Second Floor Plan: Circuits fed from main floor panels which are being removed are to be refed from new twain floor panels. 01/28/1996 15: 19 705-741-1525 KIRKLAND & OTE ENG PAGE 0? 4.0 DRRAWIN E4 4.1 Provide receptacles for emergency lighting units noted in item 5.0. 4.2 Refer to item 2.0 regarding computer and telephone outlets. 1 5.0 D WING U 5.1 Add 72W emergency lightning battery unit EM3 in office storage room 138; Lumacell RG12S72/0. 5.2 Add 220W emergency lighting battery unit EM4 in receiving room 116; Lumacell RG12S220/0. 5.3 Add 144W emergency lighting battery writ EM5 in JaWtor room 132; Lumacell RG12S144/0. 5.4 Add.20OW emergency lighting battery unit EM6 in storage room 122; Lumacell RG12S200/0. 5.5 Delete one fixture type"E" from stairwell 109. 6.0 SPECIFICATIONS 6.1 Specification Section 16505, Lighting Equipment,item 2.3.10, fixture "K"should read "paintable" (not "Printable"). 6.2 Specification Section 16505, Lighting Equipment,item 2.3; The followin g are additional acceptable manufactured products to those listed in the specification: ' Fixture Type"p"; Columbia: J24-332G-FSA,12-3EBS-120 Fixture Type"E"; Columbia: J14-232G-FSAI2-EB8-120 Fixture Type "H"; Columbia: J24-332F-FSA12-3EB8-120 Fixture Type `°M"; GE Lighting: WM7SO71H1SN4DB Fixture Type"F"; Lucebella: CPS2717-339-120EB 01/28/1998 15: 19 705-741-1526 KIRKLAND & OTS ENG PAGE 04 7.0 DEMOLITION 7.1 The architect has advised the following: The electrical contractor shall refer to the extent of demolition shown on the architectural drawings and shall include all disconnections and removals as necessary to complete the work The electrical contractor is advised that ' the owner is currently undertaking to demolish certain areas of the building and will remove associated electrical services and equipment. The electrical contractor shall visit the site to obtain a clear understanding of the extent of the demolition required by this contract. , 8.Q PANELBOARDS AND CIRCUITING 8.1 New circuit breaker panels LP9 and LP10 are 120/208V,three phase 225A minimum, 42-circuit, bolted breakers, bottom fed, flush mounted c/w lockable door. Acceptable , manufactures are: Federal Pioneer series NBLP42B-4LFB Siemens series S1C42ML250 8.2 New circuit breaker panel LP8 is 120/208V,three phase 225A minimum,66-circuit, bolted breakers, bottom.fed,flush mounted c/w lockable door. Acceptable manufactures , are: Federal Pioneer series NBLP66B-4LFB Siemens series HR7-B 8.3 Allow a maximum of 21 fixtures per 15A circuit for fixture types"E" and"R". 8.4 Allow a maximum,of 14 fixtures per 15A circuit.for fixture types"D" and " " F YP H 8.5 Allow a mwdmum of 12 fixtures per 20A circuit for fixture type "L". j 8.6 Individual office rooms are to be circuited two rooms per 15A breaker. ' 8,7 Each photocopier and refrigerator requires dedicated branch circuit. 8.8 Receptacles not associated with task areas(such as corridors and washrooms)are , circuited six duplex per 15A breaker. 8.9 Each duplex outlet in kitchen is to have individual circuit. 8.10 Activity room 130, general o:tBce 107,boardroom 108 and reception 104 require 2 receptacle circuits per room. 8.11 Provide 6 spare 15A breakers in each new breaker panel. O1/2B/1998 15:19 705-741-1526 KIRKLAND & OTS ENG pAGE 05 i 9.0 COMPUTER AND jELEE& NE O TLET_S_ 9.1 Computer and telephone systems are to share conduits and outlet back boxes. ' 9.2 Provide single gang back box for each pair of computer and telephone outlets. 9.3 Provide empty 3/4 inch EMT raceway from each outlet box to ceiling cavity above T-bar. Bend conduit 90 degrees to provide horizontal exit into ceiling cavity. Provide pull cord if more than two bends to run. Kirld4nd Engm zing Ltd. a 1 M. Kir and,P.Eng. Idoc 801.3 NOON i f t 1 1 r OLDER ADULT COMMUNITY CENTRE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON 26 BEECH AVENUE, BOWMANVILLE TENDER NO. CL 98-1 SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1 1 DIVISION 9ECTION TITLE NO, OF PAGES 00 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 00100 Instructions to Bidders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Appendix A - Standard Terms and Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 00200 Tender Form 8 Appendix A- Bidders Experience Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Appendix B- Contractor Safety Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 00300 General Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 00400 Supplementary General Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 01 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 01005 General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 01100 Special Project Requirements 2 02 SITE WORK 02050 Demolition and Removals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 02200 Excavating, Backfilling and Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 02400 Asphalt Paving 5 02514 Concrete Sidewalks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 02516 Concrete Curbs and Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 02935 Sodding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 03 CONCRETE 03100 Concrete Formwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 03200 Concrete Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 03300 Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 04 MASONRY 04200 Masonry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 05 METALS 05120 Structural Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 05210 Steel Joists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 7175-T111C.wpd TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2 DIVISION SECTION TITLE NO. OF PAGES 05 METALS (Continued) r05310 Steel Roof Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 05320 Steel Floor Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 05500 Miscellaneous Metals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 06 WOOD AND PLASTICS r06100 Rough Carpentry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 06200 Finish Carpentry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 06410 Cabinet Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07160 Bituminous Dampproofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 07195 Air Barrier 5 07200 Building Insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 07218 Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Insulation 5 07270 Fire Stopping and Smoke Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 07411 Preformed Metal Siding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 07425 Lightweight Steel Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 07530 Eiastomeric Sheet Roofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 07610 Sheet Metal Roofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 07620 Metal Flashing and Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 07900 Sealants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 08 DOORS AND WINDOWS 08100 Hollow Metal Doors, Screens and Pressed Metal Frames . . . . 5 1 08120 Aluminum Windows, Doors, Frames and Screens . . . . . . . . . . 7 08210 Wood Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 08343 Rolling Shutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 r 08351 Sliding/folding Grilles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 08610 Wood Windows 5 08710 Finishing Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 08720 Electrically Operated Entrances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 08800 Glass and Glazing 5 09 FINISHES 09250 Gypsum Wallboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 09310 Ceramic Floor and Wall Tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 09500 Acoustical Ceilings 3 09660 Resilient Flooring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 09665 Resilient Sheet Flooring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 r 7175-TBLC.wpd 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 3 DIVISION SECTION TITLE NO. OF PAGES 09 FINISHES (Continued) 09680 Carpeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 09800 Stucco Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 09900 Painting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 09950 Wall Coverings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 ' 010 SPECIALTIES 10162 Metal Toilet Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 10652 Operable Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 10800 Washroom Accessories . . . . . . . . . 3 10950 Miscellaneous Specialties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 14241 Hydraulic Passenger Elevators (Alternate Price Item) . . . . . . 12 015 MECHANICAL 13930 Wet Pipe Sprinkler System . . . . 2 15010 Mechanical General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 15051 Pipe Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 15061 Pipe Hangers and Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 15075 Mechanical Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 15081 Thermal Insulation for Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 15082 Thermal Insulation for Ducting 3 15084 Acoustic Duct Insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 15111 Valves-Bronze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 15114 Valves-Lubricated Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 15122 Thermometers and Pressure Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 15142 Domestic Water Supply Piping-Copper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1 15151 Drainage, Waste and Vent Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 15152 Drainage, Waste and Vent Piping-Plastic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 15192 Piping, Valves & Fittings-Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 ' 15401 Plumbing Specialities &Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 15411 Plumbing Fixtures and Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 15440 Plumbing Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 15732 Packaged Roof Top Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 15751 Humidifiers 2 15762 Convectors & Finned Tube Radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 15785 Make Up Air Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 15807 Packaged Kitchen Exhaust Hoods 1 15811 Low Pressure Metallic Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 15813 Flexible Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 15820 Duct Accessories 3 15821 Balancing Dampers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 15822 Dampers-Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 7175-TBLC.wpd TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 4 DIVISION_ SECTION TITLE NO, OF PAGES 015 MECHANICAL (Continued) 15823 Dampers-Fire & Smoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 15831 Commercial Fans : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 3 15832 Domestic Fans 1 15851 Louvres, Intakes & Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 15852 Grilles & Diffusers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 ' 15861 Filters & Filter Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 15950 Testing, Adjusting & Balancing (TAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1 016 ELECTRICAL 16010 Electrical General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 16105 Concrete Encased Duct Banks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 16106 Installation of Cables in Trenches/Ducts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 16111 Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 16122 Wires and Cables 0- 1000 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 16132 Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings 2 16141 Wiring Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 16191 Fastenings and Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 16402 Underground Service 1 16440 Disconnect Switches - Fused and Non Fused . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 16450 Grounding - Secondary . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16471 Panelboards- Breaker Type 2 16477 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 16478 Fuses- Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 16496 Ground Fault Circuit Interupters - Class "A" 1 16519 Exit Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 16741 Computer and Telephone Raceway System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 I ' 7175-TBLC.wpd INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS TENDER NO. CL 98-1 7175-T PGS.Wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 1 SECTION 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Stipulated Price tenders executed and signed under seal, are invited for the supply of all labour, material, equipment and services to complete the work for the Older Adult Community Centre, Municipality of Clarington, 26 Beech Avenue, Bowmanville, Ontario, Tender No. CL 98-1, in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications prepared by Barry - Bryan Associates (1991) Limited. ' 1.2 A Mandatory Pre-bid meeting and site tour for General Contractors only will be held at 2:00 pm, Monday, January 26, 1998. The meeting will be held at 26 Beech Avenue, ' Bowmanville. Consultants will be represented at this meeting. Any other site visits must be arranged with the Municipality of Clarington through Mr. Fred Horvath, Property Manager, Administration Department, telephone (905) 623-3379. 1.3 The Tender Documents including the Contract Form (Canadian Standard Form of ' Agreement between Owner and Contractor, Canadian Standard Construction Document CCDC 2, 1994), as amended by the Supplementary General Conditions, the Instructions to Bidders including Appendix 'A', Specifications, Tender Form, and the Drawings listed in Section 8 hereof are all complementary and shall be read together. 1.4 Each Bidder shall examine the Tender Documents as soon as possible after receipt ' thereof, and should he discover any errors or omissions therein he shall notify the Consultant as soon as possible so that further instructions and/or Drawings may be issued to all Tenderers before the date set for receiving Tenders. ' 1.5 Tender documents will be available on Wednesday, January 14, 1998 at the Purchasing Department, The Municipality of Clarington, 40 Temperance Street, Bowmanville, Ontario L1C 3A6, Telephone (905) 623-3379. 1 Tender Documents will be provided to qualified General, Mechanical and Electrical Contractors on receipt of a non-refundable fee of $100.00 for each set of documents. ' Payment may be made in the form of cash or certified cheque, payable to The Municipality of Clarington. ' 1.6 Tender documents will be available for viewing at the offices of the Durham Construction Association, The Peterborough Construction Association, and the Toronto Construction Association. 1.7 Individual drawings and sections of specifications are not available. 1 1 7175-00100.wpd f DIVISION 0 ' SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 2 SECTION 1 - GENERAL (Cont'd) 1.8 Bidders are advised that enquiries regarding interpretation of the drawings and , specifications shall be directed to: Barry • Bryan Associates (1991) Limited , 11 Stanley Court Whitby, Ontario L1 N 8P9 ' Attention: Mr. D.L. Bryan, P. Eng. OAA or Mr. C.M. Earle, MAATO �. Telephone No. (905) 666-5252 Facsimile No. (905) 666-5256 1.9 The Consultant(s)will not accept any calls from bidders or sub-trades regarding enquiries on this project 24 hours prior to close of Tender. , 1.10 Bidders shall be responsible for the distribution of all Contract Documents and Addenda to all Subcontractors and suppliers. There will be no consideration given for extra payment due to the failure of any subcontractor or supplier to review all Documents prior to close , of tender. 1.11 No claims for payment will be accepted because of failure on the part of the Owner, the L Consultant or their representatives to supply any Subcontractor with all or part of the Contract Documents and Addenda thereto,which will have been supplied to the Bidder up to the closing date. ' 1.12 The successful bidder shall submit proof of Liability Insurance in the amount of Five Million dollars ($5,000,000.00)to the Municipality of Clarington, prior to the commencement of the work. Insurance policy shall name the Owner and the Consultants as additional insured. SECTION 2 - TENDER SUBMISSIONS 2.1 Tender submission shall be in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders and the Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington, Standard Terms and Conditions (Appendix A). 2.2 Tenders executed and signed under seal, will be received until 2:00 p.m. local time, on t Wednesday, January 28, 1998. 7175-00100mpd 1 DIVISION 0 SECTION 00100 ' INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 3 SECTION 2 - TENDER SUBMISSIONS (Cont'd) Submit Tender to: Office of the Clerk Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington 40 Temperance Street ' Bowmanville, Ontario L1C 3A6 2.3 Bidders are solely responsible for the delivery of Tenders to the Office of the Clerk, on or ' before the date and time set for the close of Tenders. 2.4 Each Tender shall state the stipulated PRICE/PRICES for which the Bidder will undertake ' to cant' out all the Work as described and/or shown in/on the Tender Documents. 2.5 The Tender Form , on the forms provided shall be filled in exactly as required, and shall be returned sealed in a Tender envelope provided by the Municipality of Clarington bearing the tenderer's name and clearly marked as indicated herein. 2.6 Two (2) sets of Tender Forms are provided. Bidders shall complete and return one (1) set of Tender Forms. 2.7 Bidders shall furnish all information requested and fill in all blanks in the Tender Form. ' Should any uncertainty arise as to the proper manner of completing the form, the requisite information will be given by the Consultant. 2.8 Tender Forms shall be completed in a legible manner. Incomplete tenders may not be considered. Bids must be typewritten or in ink. Erasures or noticeable changes to the Tender Forms must be initialled by the Bidder. 2.9 Incorporated Companies must attach Corporate Seal and Signatures of proper officers shall be affixed. Bids not signed are subject to rejection. ' 2.10 All prices (unless otherwise specifically requested in the Tender Documents) shall be "Work completed" prices, and shall be understood to include for all material, labour and 1 other expenses including all Provincial Sales Taxes, fees, insurance, compensation and other items required by governing regulations, as well as overhead and profit for the work concerned. Tender prices shall not include Goods and Services Tax. ' 2.11 It shall be understood that the Stipulated Price submitted in the Tender Form shall be open for acceptance and irrevocable for a period of sixty (60) days. ' 2.12 Tenders may not be submitted by telegram, facsimile, telephone or orally. 717s-00100.wp, t DIVISION 0 SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 4 ' SECTION 2 -TENDER SUBMISSIONS (Cont'd) 2.13 Late tenders will be returned unopened to the respective bidder. , P P 2.14 The lowest or any tender will not necessarily be accepted. 2.15 Bidders must not include restrictive or conditional statements to alter the format, or intent of the tender. ' 2.16 Tenders received in accordance with these instructions will be opened at a Public Meeting at the Municipal offices immediately following the close of the Tender period. The tender opening meeting will be held in Meeting Room#1, First Floor, 40 Temperance Street, Bowmanville, Ontario, and interested bidders are invited to attend. ' SECTION-3--ADDENDA ' 3.1 Bidders may, during the tendering period, be advised by Addenda of required additions to, deletions from, clarifications to, or alterations in the requirements of the Tender , Documents. All such changes shall become an integral part of the Tender Documents and shall be allowed for in the Stipulated Price. 3.2 Bidders shall insert, in the space provided in the Tender Form, the Addenda numbers of , all Addenda received by them. If no Addenda have been received, the word "NONE" shall be inserted in the space provided. SECTION 4- BASE BID TENDERS 4.1 Materials and equipment are specifically described and named in this Specification to establish a standard of materials and workmanship to which the Bidders shall strictly adhere. Where manufacturers trade names are used, the Stipulated Price shall be based , on the use of such materials and equipment as specified, no substitutions will be allowed. 4.2 Bidders may submit with their tender alternative proposals based on the use of alternative , material equivalent to the materials or equipment specified in quality and performance and provided clearances and dimensions shown on the drawings are maintained. For all such altemative proposals the Bidder shall include such proposals and the following information , in a letter accompanying his Tender, for consideration by the Consultant, at the time of opening Tenders. .1 Manufacturer's name and supplier's name. ' .2 Change in price if any. .3 Reason for proposing alternative. 7175-00100.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 5 SECTION 4 - BASE BID TENDERS(Cont'd) .4 Detailed description of alternative including identification of differences from specified products. .5 Statement assuming full responsibility that any equipment shall not exceed the space requirements allocated on the drawings. The successful Bidder shall be responsible for any additional installation cost, resulting from the acceptance of a substitute piece of equipment or product. .6 List of project references for proposed alternate equipment. .7 Any other information requested by the Consultant, including samples, as necessary to complete his evaluation of proposed alternates. Under no circumstances shall the value of an alternative material or equipment be included in the Stipulated Price. Under no circumstances will alternatives submitted after the closing of Tenders be ' considered. 4.3 The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject proposed alternatives as he sees fit, and also to claim for himself the financial benefit of a substitution, if a substitution is accepted. A rejection by the Owner of the proposed alternative is final and the Owner does not become obligated to give any reason for his action. 4.4 The Owner further reserves the right to take any such financial benefit into consideration in their final evaluation of all Tenders and the subsequent award of the Contract. SECTION 5 - TENDERS NOT NECESSARILY ACCEPTED 5.1 The Municipality of Clarington reserves the right to: a) Cancel the Tender at any time prior to acceptance of a bid. ' b) Reject any or all bids. c) Cancel any order if the goods or services are unsatisfactory. d) Accept the Tender in whole or in part. e) Disqualify any Tenders not submitted in strict accordance with the requirements of the Tender Documents. f) Require each Bidder to submit evidence of his, and his proposed Subcontractors' ' experience and competence in similar work previously performed. 5.2 The Owner reserves the power and right to reject Tenders received from parties who cannot show a reasonable acquaintance with, and preparation of the proper performance of the class of work herein specified and shown on the drawings. 5.3 Tenders containing escalator clauses will not be considered. 7175-00100.wpd DIVISION 0 t SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 6 SECTION 5 - TENDERS NOT NECESSARILY ACCEPTED (Cont'd) 5.4 Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, any tender which is incomplete, illegible or obscure, or which contains alterations not called for, or irregularities of any kind, may be rejected. SECTION 6 -TAXES 6.1 The Tender amount shall include all Excise Taxes and Government Duties on all materials required for the completion of the work of this Tender, provided that same are in force at , the time of signing the Contract. 6.2 Provincial Retail Sales Tax shall be included in tendered prices for material supplied under this contract. 6.3 The total Tender amount shall not include Goods and Services Tax(G.S.T.). SECTION 7 -TIME OF THE ESSENCE 7.1 The Contractor is cautioned that time is of the essence in this Contract and that the ability to complete the Work within the stipulated time period will be one of the factors considered in the award of the Contract. 7.2 Upon commencing work on site, all work must continue until completion without delay or work stoppage unless instructed otherwise by the Owner. 7.3 The Contractor shall co-ordinate the work to ensure completion of the work in accordance with the schedule set forth in Section 01100, Special Project Requirements. , 7.4 The Contractor will be required to provide all labour, material and equipment and direct his subcontractors and suppliers to work the number of shifts and days that are necessary to ' meet the Owner's schedule. 7.5 Bidders shall allow in their Stipulated Price for all premium time and other costs as ' necessary to meet the required completion date. 7175-00100.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00100 ' INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 7 ' SECTION 8 - LIST OF DRAWINGS 8.1 rchitectural Drawing No. Title Rev. No. Issued A1.1 Site Plan and Details 0 January 12, 1998 ' A2.1 Demolition Plans 0 January 12, 1998 A2.2 Ground Floor Plan 0 January 12, 1998 ' A2.3 Basement and Second Floor Plans 0 January 12, 1998 A2.4 Stair Section, Details and Enlarged 0 January 12, 1998 Plans A2.5 Roof Plan and Details 0 January 12, 1998 A2.6 Plan Details 0 January 12, 1998 AM Elevations and Details 0 January 12, 1998 A4.1 Building Sections 0 January 12, 1998 A5.1 Section Details 0 January 12, 1998 A5.2 Section Details 0 January 12, 1998 A6.1 Reflected Ceiling Plan and Details 0 January 12, 1998 A7.1 Floor Tile Layout 0 January 12, 1998 A8.1 Schedules 0 January 12, 1998 A9.1 Interior Elevations and Details 0 January 12, 1998 A9.2 =Details 0 JanuaEy 12, 1998 8.2 Structural Drawing No. Title Rev. No. Issued S1.1 Foundation Plan Details and Notes 0 January 12, 1998 S2.1 Foundation Details 0 January 12, 1998 S2.2 Foundation Details 0 January 12, 1998 S2.3 Roof Framing Plan 0 January 12, 1998 S2.4 Framin 0 Janua 12, 1998 ' 7175-00100.wpd DIVISION 0 ' SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 8 SECTION 8 - LIST OF DRAWINGS (Cont'd) 8.3 Mechanical Drawing No. Title Rev. No. Issued M1 Demolition Layout 0 January 12, 1998 M2 HVAC Layout 0 January 12, 1998 M3 Sanitary Layout 0 January 12 1998 ' , M4 Partial Plans, Plumbing & Details 0 January 12, 1998 M5 HVAC & Piping Details 0 1 January 12, 1998 M6 Schedules & Piping Details 0 L anua!y12, 1998 8.4 lectrical Drawing No. Title Rev. No. Issued ' E1 Electrical Site Plan and Roof 0 January 12, 1998 Equipment , E2 Fire Alarm System 0 January 12, 1998 E3 Basement and Second Floor 0 January 12, 1998 Electrical Layout E4 Ground Floor Electrical Layout 0 January 12, 1998 ' E5 Ground Floor Lighting Layout 0 January 12, 1998 E6 Electrical Services Single Line 0 January 12, 1998 ' Diagram E7 Demolition Instructions Ground Floor 0 January 12, 1998 ' E8 Demolition Instructions Basement& 0 January 12, 1998 Second Floor E9 Demolition of Existing Electrical 0 January 12, 1998 Services SECTION 9- EXECUTE CONTRACT 9.1 The Successful Bidder shall execute the Contract Documents within ten (10) calendar days ' of receipt of notification of Acceptance of Tender from the Owner. 7175-00100.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00100 ' INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 9 ' SECTION 9 - EXECUTE CONTRACT (Cont'd) 9.2 The Successful Bidder shall commence the Work at the site within three (3) calendar days of receipt of Notification to Commence Work, and complete all construction to the satisfaction of the Owner and the Consultant as indicated in Section 7 herein. 9.3 Failure by the Successful Bidder to meet the above requirements will entitle the Owner to cancel the award of the Contract. The Owner may then award the Contract to one of the other bidders or to take such other action as he chooses. SECTION 10 - LOCATION ' 10.1 The site is located at the former Lions Club, 26 Beech Avenue, Bowmanville. SECTION 11 - BID SECURITY 11.1 Each tender shall be accompanied by a certified cheque in the amount of $50,000.00, payable to the Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington, as evidence of good faith that, if awarded the Contract, the bidder will execute and enter into a formal agreement within the time required and to give the specified security to secure the performance of the terms ' and conditions of the Contract. Bids not accompanied by the required bid security will be rejected. ' 11.2 Bid bonds in the stipulated amount issued by a Surety, approved by, and in a form containing terms satisfactory to the Municipality's Treasurer, will be accepted in lieu of the Tender deposit. ' 11.3 All tender deposits will be returned to the respective bidders within ten (10) days after Tenders have been opened, except those of the two(2) low bidders which the Municipality of Clarington will retain until the successful bidder has executed the Contract Documents. ' The second low bidder may substitute a bid bond for his tender deposit cheque after the bids have been opened and checked. 11.4 The bid security deposit of the successful bidder will be returned when he has full complied with the conditions set forth in the Tender Documents with regards to the Execution of a Contract. ' 7175-00100.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 10 SECTION 12- AGREEMENT TO BOND 12.1 Include with the tender, an agreement to bond issued by a duly incorporated and nationally ' recognized surety company, guaranteeing the faithful performance of the contract including the warrantee period, in accordance with the Contract Documents. Agree to furnish to the Owner, a Performance Bond and a Labour and Material Payment Bond, each in the amount of One Hundred Percent (100%) of the Stipulated Price. 12.2 The premiums for all bonds shall be included in the Stipulated Price. SECTION 13- CASH ALLOWANCES 13.1 Include in the Stipulated Price, the following cash allowances. ' .1 Independent inspection and testing $5,000.00 .2 Signage $5,000.00 ' .3 Commissioning agent services for Mechanical equipment $5,000.00 .4 Contingency Allowance $35.000.00 TOTAL CASH ALLOWANCES $50,000.00 SECTION 15 - STANDARD TERMS AND CONDITIONS The Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington Standard Terms and Conditions attached as Appendix'A'to these Instructions to Bidders will be read in conjunction with the documents listed in Section 1, and will form a part of the contract, with the following amendments: 1. Delete the term "purchase order" and replace with "Canadian Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, Canadian Standard Construction Document CCDC-2, 1994 as amended by the Supplementary General Conditions". 2. In Article 7, Vh paragraph, change last sentence to read: , "Goods and Services Tax shall be extra. Provincial Sales Tax is to be included in the bid price". 3. In Article 17, 2"d paragraph, change "90 days"to"60 days". , 4. In Article 23, 1s1 paragraph, change insurance limits from $2,000,000 to $5,000,000 General Commercial Liability. 5. In Article 23 2nd add "Bar • Bryan Associates 1991 Limited" as , paragraph, rY ry ( ) additional named insured. 7175-00100.wpd APPENDIX A THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON STANDARD TERMS AND CONDITIONS ' 1. DEFINITIONS Municipality-The Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington, its successors and assigns. ' Bidder-The person, firm or corporation submitting a bid to the Municipality. Company-The person, contractor, firm or corporation to whom the Municipality has awarded the contract, ' it successors and assigns. Contract-The purchase order authorizing the company to perform the work, purchase order alterations,the ' document and addenda,the bid, and surety. Subcontractor-A person,firm or corporation having a contract with the company for, or any part of,the work. ' Document-The document(s)issued by the Municipality in response to which bids are invited to perform the work in accordance with the specifications contained in the document. Bid-An offer by a Bidder in response to the document issued by the Municipality. Work - All labour, materials, products, articles, fixtures, services, supplies, and acts required to be done, furnished or performed by the company,which are subject to the Contract. ' 2. SUBMISSION OF BID Bid invitation shall be in accordance with the Municipality of Clarington Purchasing By-law#94-129 and will ' apply for the calling, receiving, and opening of bids. The Municipality will be responsible for evaluating bids, awarding and administering the contract in accordance with the Purchasing By-law. ' The bid must be submitted on the form(s)and in the envelope supplied by the Municipality unless otherwise provided herein. The envelope must not be covered by any outside wrappings, i.e. courier envelopes or other coverings. ' The bid must be signed by a designated signing officer of the Bidder. If a joint bid is submitted, it must be signed on behalf of each of the Bidders. The bid must be legible, written in ink, or typewritten. Any form of erasure, strikeout or over-writing must be initialled by the Bidder's authorized signing officer. The bid must not be restricted by a covering letter,a statement added, or by alterations to the document unless otherwise provided herein. Failure to return the document or invitation may result in the removal of the Bidder from the Municipality's bidder's list. A bid received after the closing date and time will not be considered and will be returned, unopened. Should a dispute arise from the terms and conditions of any part of the contract, regarding meaning, intent or ambiguity, the decision of the Municipality shall be final. 3. CONTRACT The contract consists of the documents aforementioned. The contract and portions thereof take precedence in the order in which they are named above, notwithstanding the chronological order in which they are issued or executed. 7175-Appendix A.wpd Page 1 of 7 APPENDIX A THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON STANDARD TERMS AND CONDITIONS ' The intent of the contract is that the Company shall supply work which is fit and suitable for the Municipality's intended use and complete for a particular purpose. None of the conditions contained in the Bidder's standard or general conditions of sale shall be of any effect ' unless explicitly agreed to by the Municipality and specifically referred to in the purchase order. 4. CLARIFICATION OF THE DOCUMENT ' Any clarification of the document required by the Bidder prior to submission of its bid shall be requested through the Municipality's contact identified in the document. Any such clarification so given shall not in any way alter the document and in no case shall oral arrangements be considered. , Every notice, advice or other communication pertaining thereto will be in the form of a written addendum. No officer, agent or employee of the Municipality is authorized to alter orally any portion of the document. , 5. PROOF OF ABILITY , The bidder may be required to show,in terms of experience and facilities, evidence of its ability, as well as that of any proposed subcontractor, to perform the work by the specified delivery date. 6. DELIVERY ' Unless otherwise stated, the work specified in the bid shall be delivered or completely performed by the , Company as soon as possible and in any event within the period set out herein as the guaranteed period of delivery or completion after receipt of a purchase order therefor. A detailed delivery ticket or piece tally, showing the exact quantity of goods, materials, articles or equipment, shall accompany each delivery thereof. Receiving by a foreperson, storekeeper or other such receiver shall not bind the Municipality to accept the work covered thereby, or the particulars of the delivery ticket or piece tally therefor. Work shall be subject to further inspection and approval by the Municipality. ' The Company shall be responsible for arranging the work so that completion shall be as specified in the contract. Time shall be of the essence of the contract. 7. PRICING Prices shall be in Canadian Funds, quoted separately for each item stipulated, F.O.B. destination. ' Prices shall be firm for the duration of the contract. Prices bid must include all incidental costs and the Company shall be deemed to be satisfied as to the full ' requirements of the bid. No claims for extra work will be entertained and any additional work must be authorized in writing prior to commencement. Should the Company require more information or clarification on any point, it must be obtained prior to the submission of the bid. Payment shall be full compensation for all costs related to the work, including operating and overhead costs to provide work to the satisfaction of the Municipality. 7175-Appendix A.wpd Page 2 of 7 APPENDIX A ' THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON STANDARD TERMS AND CONDITIONS ' All prices quoted shall include applicable customs duty, excise tax, freight, insurance, and all other charges of every kind attributable to the work. Goods and Services Tax and Provincial Sales Tax shall be extra and not shown, unless otherwise specified herein. ' If the Bidder intends to manufacture or fabricate any part of the work outside of Canada, it shall arrange its shipping procedures so that its agent or representative in Canada is the importer of record for customs purposes. ' Should any additional tax, duty or any variation in any tax or duty be imposed by the Government of Canada or the Province of Ontario become directly applicable to work specified in this document subsequent to its submission by the Bidder and before the delivery of the work covered thereby pursuant to a purchase order ' issued by the Municipality appropriate increase or decrease in the price of work shall be made to compensate for such changes as of the effective date thereof. 8. TERMS OF PAYMENT Where required by the Construction Lien Act appropriate monies may be held back until 46 days after the 1 completion of the work. Payments made hereunder, including final payment shall not relieve the company from its obligations or liabilities under the contract. Acceptance by the company of the final payment shall constitute a waiver of claims by the company against the Municipality, except those previously made in writing in accordance with the contract and still unsettled. The Municipality shall have the right to withhold from any sum otherwise payable to the company such amount as may be sufficient to remedy any defect or deficiency in the work, pending correction of it. Payment may be made 30 days after delivery pursuant to the Bidder submitting an invoice, contract ' requirements being completed and work being deemed satisfactory. 9. PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS The company shall, at its expense, defend all claims, actions or proceedings against the Municipality based on any allegations that the work or any part of the work constitutes an infringement of any patent, copyright or other proprietary right, and shall pay to the Municipality all costs, damages, charges and expenses, including its lawyers'fees on a solicitor and his own client basis occasioned to the Municipality by reason thereof. ' The company shall pay all royalties and patent license fees required for the work. If the work or any part thereof is in any action or proceeding held to constitute an infringement,the company shall forthwith either secure for the Municipality the right to continue using the work or shall at the company's expense, replace the infringing work with non-infringing work or modify it so that the work no longer infringes. 10. ALTERNATES Any opinion with regard to the use of a proposed alternate determined by the Municipality shall be final. Any bid proposing an alternate will not be considered unless otherwise specified herein. ' 11. EQUIVALENCY Any opinion determined by the Municipality with respect to equivalency shall be final. 7175-Appendix A.wpd Page 3 of 7 APPENDIX A THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON STANDARD TERMS AND CONDITIONS , 12. ASSIGNMENT AND SUBCONTRACTING , The company shall not assign or subcontract the contract or any portion thereof without the prior written consent of the Municipality. ' 13. FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE COMPANY The Municipality is entitled to request of the Company to furnish reasonable evidence that financial , arrangements have been made to fulfill the Municipality's obligations under the Contract. 14. LAWS AND REGULATIONS ' The company shall comply with relevant Federal, Provincial and Municipal statutes, regulations and by-laws ' pertaining to the work and its performance. The company shall be responsible for ensuring similar compliance by suppliers and subcontractors. The contract shall be governed by and interpreted in accordance with the laws of the Province of Ontario. 15. CORRECTION OF DEFECTS If at any time prior to one year after the actual delivery date or completion of the work (or specified warranty/guarantee period if longer than one year)any part of the work becomes defective or is deficient or fails due to defect in design, material or workmanship, or otherwise fails to meet the requirements of the contract,the company, upon request, shall make good every such defect, deficiency or failure without cost to ' the Municipality. The company shall pay all transportation costs for work both ways between the company's factory or repair depot and the point of use. 16. BID ACCEPTANCE ' The Municipality reserves the right to award by item, or part thereof, groups of items, or parts thereof, or all ' items of the bids and to award contracts to one or more bidders submitting identical bids as to price;to accept or reject any bids in whole or in part;to waive irregularities and omissions, if in so doing,the best interests of the Municipality will be served. No liability shall accrue to the Municipality for its decision in this regard. Bids shall be irrevocable for 90 days after the official closing time. The placing in the mail or delivery to the Bidder's shown address given in the bid of a notice of award to a bidder by the Municipality shall constitute notice of acceptance of contract by the Municipality to the extent , described in the notice of award. 17. DEFAULT BY COMPANY ' a. If the company: commits any act of bankruptcy; or if a receiver is appointed on account of its insolvency or in respect of any of its property; or if the company makes a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors; then, in any such case, the Municipality may, without notice: terminate the , contract. 7175-Appendix A.wpd Page 4 of 7 APPENDIX A THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON STANDARD TERMS AND CONDITIONS ' b. If the company: fails to comply with any request, instruction or order of the Municipality; or fails to pay its accounts; or fails to comply with or persistently disregard statutes, regulations, by-laws or directives of relevant authorities relating to the work; or fails to prosecute the work with skill and diligence; or assigns or sublets the contract or any portion thereof without the Municipality's prior written consent; or refuses to correct defective work; or is otherwise in default in carrying out its part of any of the terms, conditions and obligations of the contract, then, in any such case, the Municipality may, upon expiration of ten days from the date of written notice to the company, terminate the contract. C. Any termination of the contract by the Municipality, as aforesaid, shall be without prejudice to any ' other rights or remedies the Municipality may have and without incurring any liability whatsoever in respect thereto. d. If the Municipality terminates the contract, it is entitled to: i) take possession of all work in progress, materials and construction equipment then at the project site(at no additional charge for the retention or use of the construction equipment), and finish the work by whatever means the Municipality may deem appropriate under the circumstances; ii) withhold any further payments to the company until the completion of the work and the expiry of all obligations under the Correction of Defects section; tiii) recover from the company loss,damage and expense incurred by the Municipality by reason of the company's default(which may be deducted from any monies due or becoming due to the company, any balance to be paid by the company to the Municipality). 18. CONTRACT CANCELLATION The Municipality shall have the right,which may be exercised from time to time, to cancel any uncompleted or unperformed portion of the work or part thereof. In the event of such cancellation,the Municipality and the Company may negotiate a settlement. The Municipality shall not be liable to the Company for loss of ' anticipated profit on the cancelled portion or portions of the work. 19. QUANTITIES Unless otherwise specified herein, quantities are shown as approximate, are not guaranteed to be accurate, are furnished without any liability on behalf of the Municipality and shall be used as a basis for comparison only. ' Payment will be by the unit complete at the bid price on actual quantities deemed acceptable by the Municipality. 20. SAMPLES Upon request,samples must be submitted strictly in accordance with instructions. If samples are requested subsequent to opening of bids,they shall be delivered within three(3)working days following such request, unless additional time is granted. Samples must be submitted free of charge and will be returned at the bidder's expense, upon request, provided they have not been destroyed by tests, or are not required for comparison purposes. The acceptance of samples by the Municipality shall be at its sole discretion and any such acceptance shall in no way be construed to imply relief of the company from its obligations under the contract. ' Samples submitted must be accompanied by current Material Safety Data Sheets(MSDS)where applicable. ' 7175-Appendix A.wpd Page 5 of 7 APPENDIX A THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON STANDARD TERMS AND CONDITIONS 21. SURETY ' The successful tenderer shall, if the Municipality in its absolute discretion so desires, be required to satisfy surety requirements by providing a deposit in the form of a certified cheque, bank draft or money order or other form of surety, in an amount determined by the Municipality. This surety may be held by the Municipality until 60 days after the day on which all work covered by the contract has been completed and accepted. The surety may be returned before the 60 days have elapsed providing satisfactory evidence is provided that all liabilities incurred by the company in carrying out the work have expired or have been satisfied and that a Certificate of Clearance from the Workers'Compensation Board has been received. The company shall, if the Municipality in its absolute discretion so desires, be required to satisfy fidelity bonding requirements by providing such bonding in an amount and form determined by the Municipality. Failure to furnish required surety within two weeks from date of request thereof by the Municipality shalt make the award of the Contract by the Municipality subject to withdrawal. ' 22. WORKERS'COMPENSATION All of the Company's personnel must be covered by Workers' Compensation. Upon request by the ' Municipality, an original Letter of Good Standing from the Workers'Compensation Board shall be provided prior to the commencement of work indicating all payments by the Company to the Board have been made. Prior to final payment, a Certificate of Clearance must be issued indicating all payments by the Company to ' the Board in conjunction with the subject Contract have been made and that the Municipality will not be liable to the Board for future payments in connection with the company's fulfilment of the contract. Further Certificates of Clearance or other types of certificates shall be provided upon request. 23. INSURANCE The company shall maintain and pay for Comprehensive General Liability insurance including premises and all operations. This insurance coverage shall be subject to limits of not less than$2,000,000.00 inclusive per occurrence for third party Bodily Injury and Property Damage or such other coverage or amount as may be requested. The policy shall include the Municipality as an additional named insured in respect of all operations performed ' by or on behalf of the Company. A certified copy of such policy or certificate shall be provided to the respective participant prior to commencement of the work. Further certified copies shall be provided upon ' request. 24. LIABILITY The company agrees to defend, fully indemnify and save harmless the Municipality from all actions, suits, claims, demands, losses, costs, charges and expenses whatsoever for all damage or injury including death to any person and all damage to any property which may arise directly or indirectly by reason of a requirement of the contract, save and except for damage caused by the negligence of the Municipality or its employees. The Company agrees to defend,fully indemnify and save harmless the group from any and all charges, fines, penalties and costs that may be incurred or paid by the Municipality if the Municipality or any of its employees shall be made a party to any charge under the Occupational Health and Safety Act in relation to any violation of the Act arising out of this contract. 7175-AppendixA.wpd Page 6of 7 APPENDIX A ' THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON STANDARD TERMS AND CONDITIONS 25. VISITING THE SITE The Company shall carefully examine the site and existing building and services affecting the proper execution of the work,and obtain a clear and comprehensive knowledge of the existing conditions. No claim for extra payment will be allowed for work or difficulties encountered due to conditions of the site which were visible or reasonably inferable, prior to the date of submission of Tenders. Bidders shall accept sole responsibility for any error or neglect on their part in this respect. 26. SAFETY ' The Company shall obey all Federal,Provincial and Municipal Laws, Act, Ordinances, Regulations, Orders-in- Council and By-laws,which could in any way pertain to the work outlined in the Contract or to the Employees of the Company. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the Company shall satisfy all statutory requirements imposed by the Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations made thereunder, on a contractor,a Constructor and/or Employer with respect to or arising out of the performance of the Company's obligations under this Contract. The Company shall be aware of and conform to all governing regulations including those established by the Municipality relating to employee health and safety. The Company shall keep employees and subcontractors informed of such regulations. The Company shall provide Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) to the Municipality for any supplied Hazardous Materials. 27. UNPAID ACCOUNTS The company shall indemnify the Municipality from all claims arising out of unpaid accounts relating to the work. The Municipality shall have the right at any time to require satisfactory evidence that the work in respect of which any payment has been made or is to be made by the Municipality is free and clear of liens, attachments, claims, demands, charges or other encumbrances. ' 28. SUSPENSION OF WORK The Municipality may,without invalidating the contract, suspend performance by the company from time to ' time of any part or all of the work for such reasonable period of time as the Municipality may determine. The resumption and completion of work after the suspension shall be governed by the schedule established by the Municipality. 29. CHANGES IN THE WORK The Municipality may, without invalidating the contract, direct the Company to make changes to the work. When a change causes an increase or decrease in the work,the contract price shall be increased or decreased by the application of unit prices to the quantum of such increase or decrease, or in the absence of applicable unit prices, by an amount to be agreed upon between the Municipality and the Company. All such changes shall be in writing and approved by the Municipality. 30. CONFLICT OF INTEREST ' No employee or member of Council of the Municipality shall sell goods or services to the Municipality or have a direct or indirect interest in a Company or own a Company which sells goods or services to the Municipality. 7175-Appendix A.wpd Page 7 of 7 ' TENDER FORM TENDER NO. CL 98-1 1 i 1 1 i i i THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON OLDER ADULT COMMUNITY CENTRE 26 BEECH AVENUE BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO TENDER NO. CL 98-1 NAME OF FIRM ADDRESS POSTAL CODE TELEPHONE NUMBER FAX NUMBER NAME OF PERSON SIGNING FOR FIRM POSITION OF PERSON SIGNING FOR FIRM TENDERS RECEIVED BY: The Office of the Clerk The Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington 40 Temperance Street Bowmanville, Ontario L1 C 3E6 7175-TFTP-wpd 1 DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Page 1 The Office of the Clerk The Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington 40 Temperance Street Bowmanville, Ontario L1 C 3E6 Re: OLDER ADULT COMMUNITY CENTRE THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON ' 26 BEECH AVENUE BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO TENDER NO. CL 98-1 Sir: 1 1.0 We agree for the (Company Name) Stipulated Price stated below to supply all necessary labour, materials, plant, equipment, services and overtime work as may be required for the execution and completion of all work in connection with the above referenced project for the Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington, in accordance with Instructions to Bidders, The Municipality of Clarington's Standard Terms and Conditions, the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Specifications and Drawings, prepared for that purpose by Barry • Bryan Associates (1991) Limited, Whitby, Ontario and to the entire satisfaction of the Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington: STIPULATED PRICE (exclusive of GST) Dollars ($ ) 2.0 Further, to assist you with the necessary information for tax purposes, etc., the stipulated price includes the following: Provincial Sales Tax $ 3.0 Goods and Services Tax(GST) at 7% to be added to the Stipulated Price$ 4.0 The Stipulated Price includes CASH ALLOWANCES in the amount of $50,000 (Fifty Thousand Dollars) as listed in the Instructions to Bidders. 5.0 We agree the Owner reserves the right to accept or reject prices bid for the work or for any portion of the work. 6.0 We agree that the Owner reserves the right to take any financial benefit, from alternates submitted, into consideration in the evaluation of all tenders and the subsequent award of the Contract. 7175-00200.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Page 2 7.0 We agree to complete all work including necessary overtime work pursuant to this Contract in the period required to meet the scheduled completion dates as specified. 8.0 We have received and included for Addenda No. to in the Stipulated Price. 9.0 We submit the following separate prices which are included in the Stipulated Price: (Separate prices shall exclude G.S.T.) ' A. Modifications to existing basement stair (Stair 134) as detailed. $ ' B. Supply and installation of Folding Partition#1 between Dining and Activity Rooms including all support framing and track. $ C. Cost to construct new elevator shaft, as detailed, complete. $ D. Supply and installation of electrically operated entrances, complete. $ 10.0 We submit the following alternate prices which are not included in the Stipulated Price: (Alternate prices shall exclude G.S.T.) A. Supply and installation of all wall mounted vinyl handrails shown on the drawings and specified in Section 10950, $ including all solid wood backing and hardware. extra/credit I B. Supply and installation of one hydraulic elevator, Dover Model Fleetwood 21H with front and rear opening as $ specified in Section 14241. extra/credit C. Supply and install two windows Type 'E' in south wall of Activity Room 130 as shown including all cutting, patching, $ latches and trim. extra/credit D. Supply, install and finish new strip maple hardwood flooring in Dining Room 118, and Activity Room 119, complete with recessed concrete slab, 6 mil polyethylene separation sheet $ and wood underlayment. extra/credit E. Alternate price to supply and install vinyl clad wood windows as manufactured by , in lieu of aluminum clad wood windows specified. $ extra/credit l 7175-OQ200.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Page 3 11.0 In the event that work extra to that included in the Contract is required, and is authorized in writing by the Owner, the Contractor will add the following percentages to the cost of the work. Overhead EI& General Contractor's Work Subcontractor's Work 12.0 We submit the names of subcontractors upon whose tender the stipulated price was based: TRADE FIRM ADDRESS Demolition Excavation and Backfill Asphalt Paving Damp Proofing Reinforcing Steel Concrete Finishing Masonry Miscellaneous Metals Structural Steel Steel Roof Deck Rough Carpentry Finish Carpentry Cabinet Work jMetal Roofing and Cladding E.P.D.M. Sheet Roofing Metal Flashing and Trim Hollow Metal Doors&Frames Wood Doors Electrically Operated Entrances Rolling Shutters Finish Hardware Aluminum Windows and Screens 7175-00200.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Page 4 TRADE FIRM ADDRESS Glass and Glazing Resilient Flooring Ceramic Tile Exterior Metal Stud Wall Systems Drywall and Acoustics Metal Toilet Partitions Painting Operable Walls Hydraulic Elevator(Alternate Price) Plumbing Amount Included in Tender Price HVAC Amount Included in Tender Price Electrical Amount Included in Tender Price 13.0 We agree that, when requested by the Consultant, additional work will be performed at following unit prices exclusive of Overhead and Profit which shall cover all charges for labour and materials, supervision, plant and tools. Deletions will be deducted from additions before these unit prices are applied. Credits will be deducted from extras before charges for overhead and profit are added. All work will be performed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Provincial Sales Tax is included in these unit prices. Goods and Services Tax is not included in these unit prices. Breakdown of all taxes will be submitted later. Unit Prices for Additions and Deletions Nature of Work Additions Deletions 1. Earth Excavation by machine, calculated r in its natural bed, including disposal off ■ the site per cubic metre. 7175-00200.Wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Page 5 Nature of Work Additions Deletions 2. Earth excavation by hand calculated in its natural bed, including disposal off the site per cubic metre. 3. Trenching up to 600 mm deep per cubic metre. 4. Trenching up to 1200 mm deep per cubic metre. 5. Trenching over 1200 mm deep per cubic metre. 6. OPSS Granular 'A' backfill (supply, place, and compact) per cubic metre. 7. OPSS Granular 'B' backfill (supply, place, and compact) per cubic metre. 8. Type 'C' Sand Fill, (supply, place, and compact) per cubic metre. 9. Reinforcing Steel, supply and place, per metric tonne. 10. 25 MPa concrete-in-place to walls, footings or piers per cubic metre. 11. 35 MPa concrete-in-place to floors per cubic metre. 12. Vertical formwork in place including all accessories and stripping per square metre of face area. 13. Concrete curbs as detailed per lineal metre. 14. Concrete sidewalks, 100 mm thick including sub-grade, compaction and all accessories as specified per cubic metre. 7175-00200.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 ITENDER FORM Page 6 Nature of Work Additions Deletions 15. HI-8 Asphalt paving, supply, place and compact per cubic metre. 16. HL3 Asphalt paving, supply, place and compact per cubic metre. ' 17. Duplex general purpose 15A, 120V receptacle on local circuit within 20 metres, each. 14.0 We have carefully examined all the Tender Documents, have visited the Site, and have a clear and comprehensive knowledge of the Work required under this Contract and of all the working conditions and schedule requirements. 15.0 We the undersigned agree that this Tender is valid and irrevocable and subject to acceptance by the Owner without notice to us for a period of Sixty(60) days from date of receipt of Tender, and that if notified of award of Contract, we will within ten (10) days of receipt of notification of Acceptance of Tender: a) Furnish to the Owner, in care of the Consultant, copies of insurance policies as required by the Conditions of the Contract. b) Furnish to the Owner a breakdown of the Stipulated Price in such form and detail as required by the Owner for progress payments, taxation and internal accounting purposes. c) Furnish to the Owner, a Performance Bond and a Labour and Material Payment Bond, issued by a Surety acceptable to the Owner, each for an amount equalling 100% of the Tender Price to ensure the full and proper completion of the Contract. d) Commence the work forthwith after the receipt of a letter of intent, contract or Purchase Order or when notified to do so by the Consultant and/or Owner and to execute the work continuously to completion. Time shall be the essence of the Contract and the work shall be completed in accordance with the schedule outlined in the Instructions to Bidders. ' e) Furnish to the Owner a Clearance Certificate of the Workers' Compensation Board. f) Submit within three (3) days of award of the contract a detailed construction schedule to the Owner for approval. g) Furnish to the Owner a copy of our Corporate Safety Policy. 7175-00200.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Page 7 16.0 Wherever the plural is used herein, the same shall be read and construed as if the singular had been used where the facts and context so requires and as if all necessary grammatical changes had been made. 17.0 Bid Security: Attached to this tender form is a bid deposit in the amount of $50,000.00. I/We the ' undersigned agree that if I/We withdraw this tender or default in executing a contract or providing the required Performance Security in accordance with the terms of the bid documents, the Owner shall have sustained liquidated damages in the amount equal to the difference between the amount of this bid and the amount for which the Owner legally contracts with another parry to perform the work, if the latter amount exceeds the former up to a maximum of$50,000.00 and such amount shall become the property of the Owner. 18.0 Bonds: Attached to this Tender Form is an agreement to bond in the amount of 100% for Performance, and 100% for Materials and Labour Payment. 19.0 Safety Form: tAttached to this Tender is a completed copy of the Municipality of Clarington Health and Safety Practice Form. 7175-00200.wpd 1 DIVISION 0 SECTION 00200 TENDER FORM Page 8 20.0 Signature and Seal of Bidder: Street Address Name of Company City or Town Signature of Company Official Postal Code Name and Title �( Telephone No. Signature of Company Official Date Name and Title SEAL Facsimile No. Tenderer's G.S.T. Registration No. r If the bidding firm is a limited company, the company seal must appear on this Bid Form with the signature(s) of the proper signing official(s). 7175-00200.wpd THE CORPORATION OF THE MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON CONTRACT CL 98-1 OLDER ADULT COMMUNITY CENTRE 26 BEECH AVENUE, BOWMANVILLE APPENDIX'A' - BIDDERS EXPERIENCE FORM Bidders shall complete this form and attach to the Tender Form. Include experience on projects similar in size and scope to this project. ' YEAR DESCRIPTION OF CONTRACT NAME OF ORGANIZATION CONTACT PERSON&TELEPHONE NO. ARCHITECT&TELEPHONE NO. VALUE OF CONTRACT YEAR DESCRIPTION OF CONTRACT NAME OF ORGANIZATION CONTACT PERSON&TELEPHONE NO. ARCHITECT&TELEPHONE NUMBER VALUE OF CONTRACT YEAR DESCRIPTION OF CONTRACT NAME OF ORGANIZATION CONTACT PERSON&TELEPHONE NO. ARCHITECT&TELEPHONE NO. VALUE OF CONTRACT Company Name APPENDIX 'B' CONTRACTOR SAFETY I1.1 POLICY AND PROCEDURE POLICY: Contractors and Sub-contractors are responsible to ensure that their personnel are updated on all safety concerns of the workplace and are aware of the safety requirements ' as required by the Contractor under the Occupational Health and Safety Act. Safety performance will be a consideration in the awarding of contract. Under the Occupational Health and Safety Act(Section 23 (1), (2)), it is the constructor's responsibility to ensure that: • the measures and procedures prescribed by the Occupational Health and Safety Act and the Regulations are carried out on the rig t; • every employer and every worker performing work on the rp oject complies with the Occupational Health and Safety Act and the Regulations (under the Act); and • the health and safety of workers on the roject is protected. • Where so prescribed, a constructor shall, before commencing any work on a project, give to a Director notice in writing of the project containing such information as may be prescribed. DEFINITIONS: Contractor-any individual or firm engaged by the Municipality to do work on behalf of the Municipality. Project- means a construction project, whether public or private, including: • the construction of a building, bridge, structure, industrial establishment, mining plant, shaft tunnel, caisson, trench, excavation, highway, railway, street, runway, parking lot, cofferdam, conduit, sewer, watermain, service connection, telegraph, telephone or electrical cable, pipe line, duct or well, or any combination thereof, • the moving of a building or structure, and • any work or undertaking, or lands or appurtenances used in connection with construction. Contractor Safetympd 1 APPENDIX `B' CONTRACTOR SAFETY POLICY AND PROCEDURE Continued... Construction - includes erection, alteration, repair, dismantling, demolition, structural ' maintenance, painting, land clearing, earth moving, grading, excavating, trenching, digging, boring, drilling, blasting, or concreting, the installation of any machinery or plant, and any work or undertaking in connection with a project. Constructor- means a person who undertakes a project for an owner and includes an owner who undertakes all or part of a project by himself or by more than one employer. Project Manager-means the municipal management representative who has responsibility for a contract. PROCEDURE: The following items are required before any Contractors are hired by the Municipality: a) Before beginning a project, the project manager or delegate must determine whether any designated substances/hazardous materials are (or will be) present at the site and prepare a list of all these substances. b) The project manager or delegate must include, as part of the request for tender/quotations, a copy of the above mentioned list. The list of designated substances/hazardous materials must be provided to all prospective constructors and/or contractors. c) The request for tender/quotations will require prospective contractors to include a list of the designated substances/hazardous materials that will be brought onto the work site and material safety data sheets. d) Before awarding a contract, contractor(s)will be required to complete and sign the Health and Safety Practice Form (Schedule "A"). The Purchasing Office will maintain all contractors safety performance records. e) As part of the tender/quotation conditions, before award of a contract, the contractor will be required to provide prof that all workers involved with the project have the proper WHMIS training, as required by the Occupational Health and Safety Act. Contractor Safety.wpd 2 APPENDIX V CONTRACTOR SAFETY POLICY AND PROCEDURE Continued... f) As part of the tender/quotation conditions, before award of a contract, the contractor must provide details of their Health and Safety program. g) The project manager or delegate must provide the successful contractor with a workplace orientation which will include, but not limited to identifying known potential hazards, hazardous material inventory and material safety data sheets for the sites. A workplace orientation/Job Safety Instruction Checklist to be completed. h) Before the start of the assignment, the following documentation will be provided to the successful contractor, by the project manager or delegate: i) Copies of the Municipal Corporate Health and Safety Program ii) Departmental health and safety policies iii) Workplace procedures regarding health and safety practices. i) The contractor has the responsibility to provide any and all prescribed personal protective equipment for their own workers,to include as a minimum but not limited to hard hats and safety boots. If a worker(s) fails to comply with any program, policy, rule or request regarding health and safety, that person(s) is not allowed on the site until the person(s) complies. The Municipality will retain the right to document contractors for all health and 1) P Y safety warnings and/or to stop any contractors' work if any of the previously mentioned items are not in compliance. Similarly, the Municipality will have the right to issue warnings and/or to stop work if there are any violations by the contractor of the Occupational Health and Safety Act, Municipal Health and Safety programs, policies, rules, and/or warnings and/or stop work orders can be given to contractors using Contractor Health and Safety Warnings/Stop Work Order Form (Schedule "B"). k) Where applicable,the Municipality will retain the right to allow municipal employees to refuse to work in accordance with the established policy and the Occupational Health and Safety Act, in any unsafe conditions. 1) The Purchasing Department will maintain current certificates of clearance until all monies owing have been paid to the contractor. m) Responsibility for ensuring contractor compliance to this policy falls upon the ' project manager or designate. This will include identification, evaluation and control practices and procedures for hazards and follow-up and issuing of Contractor Health and Safety Waming/Stop Work Orders. Contractor Safetympd 3 APPENDIX V CONTRACTOR SAFETY POLICY AND PROCEDURE Continued... HEALTH AND SAFETY PRACTICE FORM To Contractor(s): The Municipality of Clarington is committed to a healthy and safe working environment for all workers. To ensure the Municipal workplace is a healthy and safe working environment, contractors, constructors, and subcontractors must have knowledge of and operate in compliance with the Occupational Health and Safety Act and any other legislation pertaining to employee health and safety. In order to evaluate your company's health and safety experience, please provide the accidentrncident and/or Workers' Compensation (WCB) information noted below, where applicable. • The New Experimental Experience Rating (NEER) - The WCB experience rating system for non-construction rate groups ------------------------------------------------------------- • The Council Amended Draft#7 (CAD-7) Rating -The WCB experience rating system for construction rate groups ------------------------------------------------------------- • Injury frequency performance for the last two years - This may be available from the contractor's trade association ------------------------------------------------------------- • Has the contractor receive any Ministry of Labour warnings or orders in the last two years? (if the answer is yes, please include the infraction). • Confirmation of Independent Operator Status - The WCB independent operator number assigned: (Bidders to include the letter confirming this status and number from WCB with their bid submission) Contractor Safetympd 4 APPENDIX 'B' ' CONTRACTOR SAFETY tPOLICY AND PROCEDURE Continued... CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY As a contractor working for the Municipality of Clarington, I/we will comply with all procedures and requirements of the Occupational Health and Safety Act, Municipal safety policies, department and site specific policies and procedures and other applicable legislation or regulations. I/we will work safely with skill and care so as to prevent an accidental injury to ourselves, fellow employees and members of the public. 1. The contractor/successful tenderer certifies that it, its employees, its subcontractors and their employees, a) are aware of their respective duties and obligations under the Occupational Health and Safety Act, as amended form time to time, and all Regulations thereunder(the "Act'); and b) have sufficient knowledge and training to perform all matters required . pursuant to this contract/tender safely and in compliance with the Act. 2. In the performance of all matters required pursuant to this contract/tender, the contractor/successful tenderer shall, a) act safely and comply in all respects to the Act, and b) ensure that its employees, its subcontractors and their employees act safely an complying all respects with the Act. 3. The contractor/successful tenderer shall rectify any unsafe act or practice and any non-compliance with the Act at its expense immediately upon being notified by any person of the existence of such act, practice or non-compliance. 4. The contractor/successful tenderer shall permit representatives of the Municipality and the Health and Safety Committee on site at any time or times for the purpose ' of inspection to determine compliance with this contactor/tender. 5. No act or omission by any representative of the Municipality shall be deemed to be an assumption of any of the duties or obligations of the contractor/successful tenderer or any of its subcontractors under the Act. Contractor Safetympd 5 APPENDIX `B' CONTRACTOR SAFETY ' POLICY AND PROCEDURE Continued... 6. The contractor/successful tenderer shall indemnify and save harmless the Municipality, a) from any loss , inconvenience, damage or cost to the Municipality which may result from the contractor/successful tenderer or any of its employees, its subcontractors or their employees failing to act safely or to comply in all respects with the Act in the performance of any matters required pursuant to this contract/tender; b) against any action or claim, and costs related thereto, brought against the Municipality by any person arising out of any unsafe act or practice or any non-compliance with the Act by the contractor/successful tenderer or any of its employees, its subcontractors or their employees in the performance of any matter required pursuant to this contract/tender; and C) from any and all charges, fines, penalties, and costs that may be incurred or paid by the Municipality (or any of its council members or employees) shall be made a party to any charge under the Act in relation to any violation of the Act arising out of this contract/tender. -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Contractor Name of Person Signing for Contractor -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Signature of Contractor Date Contractor Safely.wpd 6 I APPENDIX `B' CONTRACTOR SAFETY POLICY AND PROCEDURE Continued... Schedule "B" CONTRACTOR T H AND SAFETY WARNING!WARNINGISTOP WORK The purpose of this form is to: (Issuer to check one of the following) Provide warning to the contractor to immediately discontinue the unsafe work 1 practice described below. Direct the contractor to immediately cease all work being performed under this contract due to the unsafe work practice described below. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THIS WARNING/STOP WORK ORDER SHALL CONSTITUTE A BREACH OF CONTRACT PART"A"-DETAILS OF CONTRACT 1 CONTRACT/P.O.# DESCRIPTION: NAME OF FIRM: i 1 Contractor Safety.wpd 7 ' APPENDIX `B' CONTRACTOR SAFETY - iPOLICY AND PROCEDURE Continued... PART"B"-DETAILS OF INFRACTION TO BE COMPLETED BY ISSUER DATE&TIME OF INFRACTION: DESCRIPTION OF INFRACTION INCLUDING LOCATION: ORDER GIVEN BY MUNICIPALITY: DID THE CONTRACTOR COMPLY WITH THIS ORDER? DATE&TIME OF COMPLIANCE: ISSUED TO: CONTRACTOR'S EMPLOYEE TITLE ISSUED BY: MUNICIPAL EMPLOYEE DEPARTMENT TITLE PART"C"-ADDITIONAL COMMENTS THIS SECTION IS TO BE USED INTERNALLY TO RECORD ADDITIONAL COMMENTS SUBSEQUENT TO ISSUING THE WARNING/STOP WORK ORDER,I.E.DATE AND TIME WORK RESUMED,FURTHER ACTION TAKEN,ETC. I Contractor Safetympd 8;, ' GENERAL CONDITIONS AND SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS TENDER NO. CL 98-1 1 1 1 1 DIVISION 0 SECTION 00300 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 1 1.0 GENERAL 1 .1 The Agreement, Definition and General Conditions of this Contract shall be the Canadian Standard Construction Document CCDC-2, 1994, Stipulated Price Contract, except as amended by the Supplementary General Conditions, Section 00400. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i - i 1 1 1 1 7175-00300.wpd ' DIVISION 0 SECTION 00400 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 1 1 1. GENERAL ' .1 The Definitions and General Conditions of the Canadian Standard Construction Document CCDC-2, 1994, Stipulated Price Contract are amended as follows: .2 The Municipality of Clarington Standard Terms and Conditions appended to Instructions to Bidders shall be read in conjunction with, and form part of, the Contract document. Wherever the contents of this document exceed the requirements of the General Conditions, provide such additional requirements. 2. DEFINITIONS The definitions set out on page 7 of the standard construction document are hereby amended by adding the following sentences to the appropriate paragraphs: .3 The term'Owner'The Municipality of Clarington, shall be understood to mean The Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington, Bowmanville, Ontario, or their authorized representatives. ' .7 The term 'Consultant', 'Architect' or'Engineer', refers to Barry - Bryan Associates (1991) Limited, or their authorized representatives, in conjunction with the Owner. 3. Gr 1 1 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1 .1 Delete from article 1.1.10 "sufficient copies of ...... work" and add: "15 sets of the drawings and specifications upon which the Contract is based. Additional copies of drawings and specifications will be issued to the Contractor at the Contractor's expense." 4. GC 2.3 - REVIEW AND INSPECTION OF THE WORK .1 Add the following to GC 2.3.2: The Contractor shall give the Consultant and the Testing Agency at least three working days notice of the date and time fixed for all required tests and shall supply all labour, materials and fuel, etc. as necessary. i 7175-00400.wpd DIVISION 0 ' SECTION 00400 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 2 5. GG 3.2-CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR OTHER CONTRACTORS .1 Add new article as follows: , 3.2.6 The Contractor shall afford all other Contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and the execution of their work. 6. GC 3.7- SUPERVISOR .1 Add new article as follows: ' 3.7.3 The Contractor's Supervisor shall be satisfactory to the Consultant and must be maintained on the job full time until all deficiencies have been t corrected and the completion of the Contract has been reached. Applications to replace the Supervisor during or prior to this period will not be considered. , 7. GC 3.9 - LABOUR AND PRODUCTS , .1 Add new article as follows: 3.9.4 Manufactured materials and equipment which are specified by their proprietary names or by part of catalogue numbers must be provided. Where a number of proprietary materials are specified for one use the Contractor may select any of the materials specified. No substitute for the materials specified will be allowed unless written approval of alternate material equipment is authorized by the Consultant prior to signing of the Contract. .2 Add new article as follows: 3.9.5 The Contractor shall use all proprietary materials and equipment in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. 8. GC 3.11 - SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Add new article as follows: 3.11.7 The Contractor shall arrange for the preparation of clearly identified shop drawings and submission of 1 sepia and 4 copies of such shop drawings, erection and setting drawings or diagrams including electrical wiring schematics. The Consultant will return 1 sepia and 1 copy to the Contractor. 71754MM.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00400 1 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 3 8. GC 3.11 - SHOP DRAWINGS (Cont'd) .2 Add new article as follows: 3.11.8 The term Shop Drawings shall include erection and setting drawings, data sheets and electrical wiring schematics. .3 Add new article as follows: 3.11.9 The Shop Drawing Review Stamp shall be as herein shown: ' "This review by Barry • Bryan Associates (1991) Limited is for the sole purpose of ascertaining conformance with the general design concept. This review shall not mean that Barry • Bryan Associates (1991) Limited approves the detail design inherent in the shop drawings, responsibility for which shall remain with the Contractor submitting same, and such review 1 shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings or of his responsibility for meeting all requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the job site for information that pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction and installation and for co-ordination of the work of all sub-trades". REVIEWED ( ) REVIEWED AS MODIFIED ( ) NOT REVIEWED ( ) BARRY • BRYAN ASSOCIATES (1991) LIMITED BY: DATE: .4 Add new article as follows: 3.11.10 Samples: 1 Reviewed samples will be returned to the Contractor or his Superintendent on the site. Materials ordered and/or received must match reviewed samples. Any materials, whether incorporated in the building project or not, which do not match reviewed samples, shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 7175-00400.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00400 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 4 9. GC 3.12 - USE OF THE WORK .1 Add new article as follows: 3.12.3 The Owner shall have the right to enter and occupy the building in whole, or in part, for the purpose of placing fittings and equipment or for other uses before completion of the contract. Such entry and occupation shall not be considered as acceptance of the work or in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to complete the contract. 10. GC 3.14- CLEAN-UP ' .1 Add new article as follows: 3.14.4 Clean concrete floor slabs free of all rubbish, waste, mortar droppings, oil, grease, foreign matter, laitencies, and paint. .2 Add new article as follows: 3.14.5 As soon as sections or areas of the work are completed and ready for painting, the Contractor shall remove all rubbish and waste, replace all broken glass and leave the areas clean suitable for painting to the Painter's approval. On completion of the work the Contractor shall remove the dust by washing and vacuuming with industrial quality vacuum from walls, ceiling, sills, ledges, etc., thoroughly wash, wax and polish all floors and bases, clean and polish all mirrors and glass (both inside and outside) and leave the work in a condition satisfactory to the Consultant. Remove all plant and equipment, sheds, offices, barricades, hoarding, temporary roads,walks, and temporary services, surplus materials, and leave the work ■ site in a condition satisfactory to the Consultant. s .3 Add new article as follows: 3.14.6 The Owner shall have the right to back charge cleaning to the Contractor if not done by the Contractor within 24 hours of notice to clean. .4 Add new article as follows: 3.14.7 The Owner shall have the right to back charge cost of damage to the site caused by contractor transportation in and out of the site if not repaired before final payment. 7175-00400.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00400 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 5 11. GC 4.1 - CASH ALLOWANCES S .1 Delete article 4.1.4 and insert the following: 4.1.4 In the event that the cost of the work covered by Cash Allowances should exceed the cash allowance, while the contract sum will be adjusted in conformity therewith, there shall be no adjustment to the Contractor's fee or other expenses such as overhead or profit, it being understood and agreed that the contract sum includes the Contractor's expenses and profit for all Cash Allowances whether or not they are exceeded. Work and ' material covered by Cash Allowance will be tendered later. The General Contractor shall sign the successful bidders as normal subcontractors and assume full responsibility for supervision, scheduling, guarantees and payment for this work. 12. GC 5.1 FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE OWNER .1 Delete entirely, Articles 5.1.1 and 5.1.2. 13. GC 5.3 - PROGRESS PAYMENT .1 Refer to Article 5.3.2-Change "(5)"to"(30)". .2 Add new paragraph: 5.3.3 The Consultant shall deduct, on each Certificate of Payment, after the 10% lien holdback has been deducted, a further 1%, to be set aside and held as a Contract Completion Security Account. The accumulated amount in this account shall be released to the Contractor upon Total Performance of the Work. Partial releases will not be made. If, within fifteen (15) days of written notification by Owner at any time after Substantial Performance, the Contractor does not reach Total Performance, by failing to completely finish outstanding work, the Owner shall have the right to complete such work and deduct the cost for such work together with an appropriate administration fee from the Contract Completion Security Account. 14. GC 5.5 - PAYMENT OF HOLDBACK UPON SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK 1 Delete Article 5.5.3 entirely. 7175-00400.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 00400 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 6 15. GC 5.6- PROGRESSIVE RELEASE OF HOLDBACK .1 Refer to Article 5.6.1 - Delete and replace with the following: "Holdback monies will not be released until 46 days after substantial performance of the Contract." 16. GC 5.7- FINAL PAYMENT .1 Refer to Article 5.7.4-Change "(5)"to "(30)". 17. GC 10.1 -TAXES & DUTIES .1 Add the following to GC 10.1.2: .1 The Contractor must provide a detailed breakdown of additional taxes if requested by the Owner in a form satisfactory to the Owner. .2 Profit and overhead shall not be included in the increase or decrease in costs incurred by the Contractor due to changes in the aforementioned taxes and duties. 18. GC 10.2 - LAWS. NOTICES, PERMITS AND FEES .1 Add new articles as follows: 10.2.6 It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to apply and pay for any Permits, including all Regional Municipality of Durham appropriate fees, the cost of which shall be included in the Stipulated Price except for the Municipality of Ciarington Building Permit which will be obtained and paid for by the Owner. 10.2.7 The Contractor will file a Notice of Project with the Ministry and will pay any associated fees. The Contractor will be the `Constructor' as defined by the Construction Health and Safety Act. 19. GC 11.1 - INSURANCE 1 Refer to P aragraph 11.1.1(1): change "Two Million ($2,000,000)" to read "Five Million ($5,000,000). 71754*400.wpa l DIVISION 0 SECTION 00400 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 7 19. GC 11.1 - INSURANCE (Cont'd) .3 Add new paragraph: 11.1.1(6) The Corporation of the Municipality of Clarington and Barry - Bryan Associates (1991) Limited are to be included in the list of insured. 20. GC 11.2 - BONDS .1 Add new article as follows: 11.2.3 The bonds shall cover payment of all obligations occurred in the event of the Contractor's default, including the following: Payment of all legal, architectural, mechanical, electrical and structural engineering expenses incurred by the Owner in determining the extent of work executed and work still to be executed and any additional work required as a result of the interruption of the work. Payment of additional expenses to the Owner in the form of Watchmen's services, light, heat, power, etc., payable over the period between the default of the original contract and commencement of the new contract. 21. GC 12.1 - INDEMNIFICATION .1 Paragraph 12.1.2 change $2,000,000 to $5,000,000. .2 Add new article as follows: 12.1.5 The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Consultant(s) for and against any and all costs and expenses (including legal and architect/engineering services and court costs) arising out of or a consequence of any default of the Contractor under the Contract. 22. GC 12.3- WARRANTY .1 Add the following to GC 12.3.3: The term defect shall not be construed as embracing such imperfections as would naturally follow misuse, failure to perform recommended maintenance, accident, or the wear and tear of normal use. 7175-00400.w,a DIVISION 0 , SECTION 00400 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 8 t 22. GC 12.3 - WARRANTY (Cont'd) Generally, any manufactured item or material, which when used as directed, must be capable of such use for the duration of the specified warranty period. Failure to comply with this requirement shall be considered as being a "defect". The costs of investigations,tests, repairs and/or replacement and the making good of any resulting damage shall be bome by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible to see that all required work is performed without undue delay. The carrying out of the replacement work and making good of defects shall be executed at such times as convenient with the Owner, which may entail overtime work on the part of the Contractor. The Owner shall give notice of observed defects promptly. Additional charges for overtime work in this regard must be borne by the Contractor. Prior to the expiry of the Warranty Period the Owner reserves the right to carry out a detailed and exhaustive inspection of the building with regard to all work carried out under the terms of this contract and the Contractor shall be required to make good the defective or unsatisfactory materials and/or workmanship observed. .2 Add new article as follows: 12.3.7 If extended warranties in excess of one year are required elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the provision of this article shall also apply for such extended periods. .3 Add new article as follows: 12.3.8 Any material or equipment requiring excessive servicing during the warranty period (or free maintenance period if applicable) shall be considered defective and the warranty (or free maintenance period) shall be deemed to take effect from the time that the defect has been corrected so as to cause excessive servicing to terminate. .4 Add new article as follows: 12.3.9 The Contractor shall make good in a permanent manner, satisfactory to the Owner, any and all damage to the work both during construction and during the period of warranty as aforesaid. The Contractor shall commence repairs on any work identified as defective within 48 hours or receipt of notice from the Owner or the Consultant. .5 Add new article as follows: 12.3.10 The decision of the Owner and Consultant shall be final as to the necessity for repairs or for work to be done under this Section. 75-00400.wpa I TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION TENDER NO. CL 98-1 I ,,,s.as� DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Table of Contents 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.02 SPECIFICATION FORMAT • . . . • . . . . ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.03 CO-OPERATION . 2 1.04 MATERIAL STORAGE AND HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.05 EXAMINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.06 CONCEALMENT OF PIPES. DUCTS. TUBING AND WIRING 3 1.07 SCAFFOLDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.08 PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.09 LINES, LEVELS AND DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 1.10 FASTENINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 1.11 STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 1.12 CUTTING AND PATCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1.13 CO-ORDINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1.14 COLD WEATHER WORKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 L1.15 SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1.16 TEMPORARY FACILITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 .1 Heat. Heating Equipment and Shelter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 .2 Weather Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 .3 Dust Screens and Hoardings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 .4 Hoisting Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 1 5 Toilets . . . . ff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 .8 Field Offices and Storage Sheds . 8 .9 Temporary Light and Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 j10 Barricades: Safety Fencing and Traffic Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 1.17 OVERLOADING 10 1.18 FINAL CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 1.19 ACCESS TO SITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 1.20 MAINTENANCE MANUALS 11 1.21 EXISTING SERVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 1.22 RECORD DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 1.23 ,CLOSING OFF AREAS . 11 1.24 TAKE-OVER PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 1.25 FIRE PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 ' 1.26 VERIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 1.27 PROGRESS REPORTS AND PROJECT MEETINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 1.28 OWNERSHIP OF MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 1.29 UTILITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 1.30 SAFETY PROGRAM AND SECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 1.31 DUST CONTROL ON DRIVEWAYS AND IN WORK AREAS.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 1.32 DAILY REPORTS AND OVERTIME WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 1.33 TAX ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 1.34 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 1.35 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY ACT 1991 - DESIGNATED SUBSTANCES . . . . . . . . . . 19 7175-01005.wpd DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Table of Contents 1 1.36 SECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 1.37 ,SIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 1.38 CASH ALLOWANCES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 1.39 QUALITY CONTROL . 21 1.40 SPILLS REPORTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 1 1.41 PROTECTION OF WATER QUALITY . . . . • .. . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . • . . . . . . • . . . . 23 1.42 FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS 24 7175-01005.wpd DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 PAR T GE NERA GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Pagel I •1. 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Unless specified otherwise,the provisions of this Section shall apply to all Sections of the specifications. B. Conform to the General Conditions of the Canadian Standard Construction Document CCDC 21994 Stipulated Price Contract as amended by Section 00400, The Supplementary General Conditions, and the Instructions to Bidders (including the Standard Terms and Conditions). C. Study all Contract Documents to determine additional work required by your Section on which the work of other Sections depend. D. Workmanship shall be of highest quality in accordance with best standard practice for this type of work, except where specified more precisely. F. All materials shall be exactly as specified or approved alternate. See Section 00100, Instructions to Bidders. G. It is a requirement of all Sections of the Work to review all the Documents in this Contract, and to make allowances for any and all items of the work of their respective Section regardless of which part of the Drawings and Specifications contain such requirements. The General Contractor is responsible to provide all of the work shown and specified. 1.02 SPECIFICATION FORMAT A. These specifications are not intended as a detailed description of installation methods but serve to indicate particular requirements in the completed work. B. Conform to The Building Code Act, Ontario Reg. 413/90 together with all its related supplements, hereinafter referred to as the"code"or"Code". Where Drawings and Specifications exceed Code requirements provide such additional requirements. C. Where a material is designated on Drawings or in the Specifications for a certain application, unless otherwise specified, that material shall conform to standards designated in the Code. Similarly, unless otherwise specified, installation methods and standards of workmanship shall also conform to standards invoked by the aforementioned Code. Where no particular material is specified for a certain use, the Contractor shall select from the choice offered in the Code in each case. D. Where the aforementioned Code or this specification does not provide all information necessary for complete installation of an item, then the manufacturer's instructions for first quality workmanship shall be strictly complied with. 7175-01005.wpd DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 2 1.03 CO-OPERATION A. Cooperate with and coordinate with other trades as required for the satisfactory L and expeditious completion of the work. Take field dimensions relative to this work. Fabricate and erect work to suit field dimensions and field conditions. Provide all forms, templates, anchors, sleeves, inserts and accessories required to be fixed to or inserted in the work and set in place or instruct the related trades as to their location. Pay the cost of extra work caused by and make up time lost as the result of failure to provide the necessary cooperation, information or items to be fixed to or built in, in adequate time. 1.04 MATERIAL STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store packaged materials in original, undamaged condition with manufacturers' labels and seals intact. Handle and store materials in accordance with manufacturers' and suppliers' recommendations and in manner to prevent damage to materials during storage and handling. Replace damaged materials. Material storage within the Owner's buildings shall be approved by the Owner. 1.05 EXAMINATION i A. Examine the work upon which your work depends. Report to Consultant in writing defects in such work. The commencement of your work or any part of it, shall be deemed acceptance of the work upon which your work or that part of it which has been applied depends. B. Drawings are, in part, diagrammatic and are intended to convey scope of work and indicate general and approximate location, arrangement and sizes of fixtures and equipment. Obtain more accurate information about locations, arrangement and sizes from study and coordination of shop drawings, including architectural, structural, mechanical, sanitary and electrical drawings and become familiar with conditions and spaces affecting these matters before proceeding with work. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated locations and arrangements, make changes at no additional cost to Owner. Similarly, where existing conditions interfere with new installation and require relocation, include such relocation in the work of this Contract. Install and arrange fixtures and equipment in such a way as to conserve as much headroom and space as possible. 7175-01005.wpd 1 rDIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 3 1.06 CONCEALMENT OF PIPES, DUCTS, TUBING AND IRIN ' A. Pipes, ducts, tubing and wiring shall be concealed in the floor, wall and ceiling construction of finished areas wherever possible except where specified more precisely. If any doubt arises as to the means of concealment, the Contractor shall request clarification from the Consultant before proceeding with the portion of the work in question. B. Mechanical and Electrical work shall be inspected and tested before being concealed. 1.07 SCAFFOLDING A. Erect scaffolding independent of walls. Use it in such a manner as to interfere as little as possible with other trades. When not in use, move it as necessary to permit installation of other work. Construct and maintain scaffolding in a rigid, secure and safe manner. Remove it promptly when no longer required. B. Design and construct scaffolding in accordance with CSA S269.2-M. i 1.08 PROTECTION A. Conform to the Ontario Ministry of Labour requirements and all applicable safety standards. B. Adequately protect trowelled concrete sub-floors and finished flooring from damage. Take special measures when moving heavy loads or equipment on finish floor slabs or flooring. C. Keep floors free of oils, grease or other materials likely to discolour them or affect bond of applied surfaces. D. Damaged work shall be made good by appropriate trades but at the expense of those causing damage. E. Protect existing Buildings, surfaces, equipment and work. Repair or replace any damage at no extra expense to the Owner, until final acceptance. tF. Special care is to be taken to protect the existing heritage building and finishes from damage. Provide all necessary protection and restrict traffic in areas as designated by the Consultant. Refer also to Section 01100. r 7175-01005.wpd DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 4 , 1.09 LINES. LEVELS AND DIMENSION A. Lay out work in accordance with lines and levels shown on Drawings and existing conditions. B. Verify lines, levels and dimensions and report errors or inconsistencies in the Drawings to Consultant before commencing shop drawing or the work. ■ C. Levels and dimensions necessary to relate the work of one Section to another Section are the responsibility of the General Contractor. 1.10 FASTENINGS A. Supply all fastenings, anchors and accessories and adhesives required for fabrication and erection of the work. , B. Exposed metal fastenings and accessories shall be of same texture, colour and finish as base metal on which they occur. C. Metal fastenings shall be of the same material as the metal component they are anchoring or of a metal which will not result in an electrolytic action which would cause damage to the fastening or metal component under moist or acidic conditions. D. Anchoring and fastening devices or adhesive shall be of appropriate type and shall be used in sufficient quantity in such a manner as to provide positive permanent anchorage of the unit to be anchored in position. Install anchors at spacing to provide for required load carrying capacity. E. Keep exposed fastenings to a minimum, evenly spaced and neatly laid out. F. Supply adequate instructions and templates and, if necessary, supervise installation where fastenings or accessories are required to be built into work of other trades. G. Fastenings which cause spalling or cracking of material to which anchorage is being made are not permitted. H. Powder actuated fastening devices will not be permitted on this project. 1.11 STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS A. Where a reference is made to specification standards produced by various organizations, conform to latest edition of standards, as amended and revised to date of Contract. r 7175-01005.wpd DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 5 1.11 STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS (Cont'd) ' B. Have a copy of each specified standard which relates to your work available on the site to be produced immediately on Consultant's request. t C. Where a standard designates authorities such as the "Engineer", the "Owner" (when used in a sense other than that defined in the General Conditions) the "Purchaser"or some other such designation, these designations shall be taken to mean the Consultant. D. Wherever the words"acceptable", "approved", "satisfactory", "selected", "directed", "submit", or similar words or phrases are used in standards or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, it shall be understood that they mean, unless the context provides otherwise, "acceptable to the Consultant", "approved by the Consultant", "satisfactory to the Consultant", "selected by the Consultant", "directed by the Consultant", "inspected by the Consultant", "instructed by the Consultant", "required by the Consultant" and "submit to the Consultants". 1.12 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, patch and make good to leave work in a finished condition where new work connects with existing and where existing work is altered. B. Do cutting and patching in the following manner: 1 Regardless of which Subcontractor or Section of the specifications is responsible for any portion of cutting and patching work, in each case tradesmen qualified in the work being cut and patched shall be employed to ensure that it is correctly done. .2 Do not cut, drill or sleeve load-bearing members without first obtaining Consultant's written authority for each condition. .3 Drill work carefully, leaving clean hole not larger than required. This applies to both new and existing work. .4 Cut holes after they are located by trades requiring them. j .5 Make cuts with clean, true, smooth edges. Fit units to tolerances established by existing work and in conformance with best standard practice for applicable class of work. Make patches invisible in finished work. 7175-01005.wpd DIVISION 1 r SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 6 1.12 CUTTING AND PATCHING (Cont'd) .6 Wherever it becomes necessary to cut or interfere in any manner with existing services and apparatus, do so at such times as approved by the Consultant. Give minimum advance notice of ten (10) days of such requirements. .7 Co-ordinate work of your Section with work of other Sections, taking into account existing installations to assure best arrangement of components in available space. For critical locations review with Consultant before commencing work. .8 Cutting and patching of any finishes in the original historical structure will be completed only with the prior permission of the Consultant, and will be undertaken by craftsmen with proven experience in the restoration of the , affected materials. 1.13 CO-ORDINATION i A. The Contractor shall co-ordinate all sections of the work. The responsibility as to which subcontractor, or supplier provides labour, material, equipment or services rests solely with the Contractor. The Consultant will not be required to settle disputes between the Contractor and subcontractors or suppliers. 1.14 COLD WEATHER WORKING A. Particular attention is drawn to the requirement that the Contractor shall commence work immediately upon Contract award and shall continue full scale operations until the work is completed and accepted by the Consultant. B. It is understood that the STIPULATED PRICE includes all costs for the provision of temporary heating, temporary shelters and all other necessary cold weather measures to enable all trades including any assigned sub-trades to proceed without delay regardless of weather, to complete the entire building. 1.15 SCHEDULES A Immediately after award of the Contract submit, in a form approved by the Consultant, a progress schedule for the work of the entire Contract. B. Include with the schedule if requested by the Consultant a cash flow chart r calendarized on a monthly basis in an approved manner. The cash flow chart shall indicate anticipated Contractor's monthly progress billings from commencement of the work to completion. 7175-W006.wpa DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS . Page 7 1.15 SCHEDULES (Cont'd) C. Completely update the progress schedule and cash flow chart whenever changes occur to the scheduling and in a manner and at times satisfactory to the Consultant. D. The Contractor shall provide all premium time required to meet the Owner's scheduled start dates for installation of his equipment and for start of tryout period. E. Submit a shop drawing schedule to the consultant prior to commencement of the work. 1.16 TEMPORARY FACILITIES rA. Provide, install, maintain and locate where directed the following temporary facilities for the work and for all trades except where specified otherwise and remove them upon completion of the work: .1 Heat Heating Eguil2ment and Shelter . IThe Contractor must keep that work which requires protection from cold adequately warm and sheltered from elements so that it may be done safely and with good workmanship meeting all code requirements. Provide minimum required temperatures and do everything necessary to produce a suitable environment for work to proceed without delay at all times of the year. The Owners electricity may not be used at any time for winter heat. .2 Weather Protection Provide adequate weather protection around and over all openings during the progress of the work to prevent damage to the existing building and completed work. Insulate openings or provide temporary heat to maintain Icomfort conditions in the area during construction. .3 Dust Screens and Hoardings Maintain adequate dust screens around demolition areas to protect buildings, equipment and staff. rInstall hoarding where necessary to protect existing building during construction. Hoarding shall be full height, insulated, wood partitions as described in Division 6. 7175-01005.wpd DIVISION 1 t SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 8 1.16 TEMPORARY FACILITIES (Cont'd) .4 Hoisting Equipment Hoisting equipment shall be provided and operated by a fully qualified hoist operator, all trades making their own financial arrangements with Contractor for use thereof. .5 Toilets Provide toilet facilities for all personnel on the work. Toilets shall be in accordance with the Ministry of Labour requirements and shall include running, potable water. Keep facilities clean and sanitary and provided with supplies at all times. Remove wastes from the site. .6 Ventilation Provide minimum 1 air change per hour for enclosed structures receiving architectural finishes. Prior to commencement of work where hazardous or volatile adhesives, coatings, or substances are used, install adequate mechanical ventilation. Do not allow excessive build-up of moisture inside building. .7 Water Water is available at the site for the contractors normal use. Excessive use of water will not be permitted, and the contractor will be required to supply water when the Owner determines that excessive use has or will occur. Conveniently locate water supply for use by all Sections of Work. Protect ' water lines against freezing. Water shall be potable and meet requirements specified under technical sections of specifications. .8 Field Offices and Storage Sheds A. Space and locations for field offices and storage sheds for the contractors own use shall be assigned by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall provide a room 20' x 12' minimum for the conducting of regular project meetings with the Owner and Consultant. The room shall be suitably heated, lighted and furnished to the satisfaction of the Consultant, and shall be equipped with a telephone and facsimile machine and photocopier for the use of the Consultant and Owner. 7175-01005.wpd DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 9 1.16 TEMPORARY FACILITIES (Cont'd) .9 Temporary Light and Power A. Power is available at the site for the Contractor's use. B. The Contractor shall provide all temporary electrical lighting and power systems for use by all trades. C. Where power requirements exceed available service, the Contractor shall arrange, obtain and pay for service of sufficient size to allow L use of required tools and equipment and adequate lighting levels for the proper execution of the work. The Contractor will be responsible for the supply, installation, maintenance and removal of the following: 1) Distribution transformers. 2) Distribution panel boards. 3) Branch wiring. 4) Grounding. 5) Lighting Fixtures. 6) Power Centres/Outlets. All equipment used shall be CSA approved. Wiring and method of installation shall conform to Ontario Hydro requirements and shall be reviewed by the Owner and the Consultant prior to installation. D. Temporary lighting as necessary will be provided by the General Contractor. .10 Barricades. Safety Fencing and Traffic Control A. Provide all necessary barricades, fencing, hoarding and railings to protect the work areas and prevent access by unauthorized personnel from entering the site. Provide all necessary safety screens and hoarding to protect pedestrians and vehicles passing ' through the work area when necessary. B. Provide all required flagmen and watchmen to safely direct traffic around the work areas. 7175-01005.wpd DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 10 1.17 OVERLOADING A. Load no part of structure during construction with loads greater than calculated to be supported safely when completed. Make every temporary support as strong as permanent support. Place no load on concrete slabs until they have achieved sufficient strength to safely carry such load. ' 1.18 FINAL CLEANING I A. Keep building and site free from accumulation of dirt, debris and excess materials. Remove oily rags and waste from premises at close of each day, or more often if required. B. Vacuum clean all areas prior to painting. Take care to settle and minimize dust , before painting begins. Use commercial type vacuum cleaners. C. Close rooms and areas finished by painter and decorators to all but authorized persons. , D. On completion of work remove stains and smudges from paint work, hardware, aluminum and other finished surfaces and wash and polish glass. , E. Replace all broken, damaged or scratched glass other than those which have been broken or damaged by those installing them which shall be replaced by the installers. F. Use appropriate apparatus and cleaning materials. Clean manufactured articles in strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions in each case. G. Upon completion of final cleaning, remove cleaning equipment, materials and debris from the Building and Site. H. Trademarks and labels will not be visible in the finished work. Where necessary, ' remove all trademarks and labels to the entire satisfaction of the owner. 1.19 ACCESS TO SITE r A. Height, width and weight restrictions must be verified by the Contractor prior to bringing equipment into the work area. B. Comply with all local and regional requirements for restricted vehicle loads during half load season. 7175-01005.wpd 1 DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 11 1.20 MAINTENANCE MANUAL ' A. Prior to issuance of the final certificate, assemble all warranties and guarantees submitted by manufacturers and called for throughout the specifications and printed or type-written copies of recommended maintenance procedures from those doing the work of each Section whose materials require regular maintenance on the part of the Owner. I Assemble this information in triplicate in matching 3-ring binders and deliver to the Consultant. Each binder shall contain a complete list of contents. Manuals shall be submitted and approved prior to final inspection. 1.21 EXISTING SERVICES ' A. Carry out the breaking into or connecting to existing services at such hours and times as recommended by the governing authorities and approved by the Consultant, and with no disturbance to the existing Complex. 1.22 RECORD DRAWINGS tA. Obtain sepia of floor plan and record any revisions to the work as detailed and shown on the Drawings. Provide Consultant with this sepia at completion of work. Recording of the 'as-built' changes shall be performed on a day-to-day basis. 1.23 CLOSING OFF AREAS A. Close off access routes by placing barricades or to prevent unauthorized personnel from having access to areas of the work. Unauthorized personnel shall mean the Owner's employees and anyone not directly concerned with the execution, supervision or inspection of the work. Obtain prior written approval from the Owner at least 10 working days in advance of any required closings . 1.24 TAKE-OVER PROCEDURE A. Take-over procedures will be as defined in the OAA/OGCA Document 100 dated November 1983"Recommended procedures concerning substantial performance of construction contracts and completion take-over of projects." 1.25 FIRE PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall provide temporary fire protection throughout the course of construction. Particular attention shall be paid to the elimination of fire hazards. r ' 7175-01005.wpd DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 12 1.26 VERIFICATION A. The Contractor and all subcontractors shall carefully check the drawings and ' specifications and shall draw to the attention of the Consultant any apparent discrepancies or dimensional errors before proceeding with the work. Any job deviation from the specifications and drawings shall be drawn to the attention of the Consultant for decision before proceeding with the work. The Contractor and all sub-contractors shall check and verify all dimensions at the job wherever referring to the work. All dimensions when pertaining to the work of other trades shall be verified with the Contractor concerned prior to start of the work. 1.27 PROGRESS REPORTS AND PROJECT MEETINGS A. The Contractor shall keep a permanent written record on the site of the progress of the work. This record shall be open to the inspection of the Consultant at all , reasonable times and a copy shall be furnished to the Consultant upon request. B. The record shall show the dates of commencement and completion of the different trades and parts of the work coming under the Contract and shall include particulars regarding daily weather conditions, demolition work, erection work, etc., and number of employees of the various trades engaged on the work. 1 C. After the award of the Contract and in consultation with the Consultant, the Contractor shall arrange regular weekly (or as otherwise required by the Owner) project meetings. The Contractor and the Owner shall be represented at these meetings, as well as any sub-contractor or supplier as may be invited to specific meetings. Minutes of such meetings shall be recorded by the Contractor, who shall forward a copy to all parties in attendance within three (3) days of the meeting. D. Prior to the regular project meetings with the Owner and Consultant the Contractor shall hold meetings with his workers and/or his sub-contractors and/or suppliers. Minutes of such meetings shall be submitted to the Consultant and Owner. E. During the course of the work on the site, the Contractor shall hold safety meetings , at least weekly with his subtrades. The Contractor shall minute such meetings and submit same to the Consultant and all present. This does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to inform the Consultant and the Owner immediately of any accident or unsafe conditions. r 7175-01005.wpd DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 13 1.28 OWNERSHIP OF MATERIALS A. All work or material delivered on the site or premises to form part of the works, shall be considered the property of the Contractor until installed and shall not be removed without the consent of the Owner, but the Contractor shall have the right to and shall remove the surplus material after he has completed the work. If so directed by the Consultant, such surplus material shall be removed at any time prior to the completion of the work. B. The General Contractors shall note that all demolition materials, concrete, steel, etc., shall be removed from the Owner's property, and disposed of at a location arranged for by the Contractor, and at the Contractor's expense, unless specifically noted otherwise. C. All material and equipment indicated on the Drawings to be removed and handed to the Owner shall be carefully removed and delivered to an area on the property as directed by the Consultant. Any damage to the removed materials that are to remain the property of the Owner shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense to ` the complete satisfaction of the Consultant. 1.29 UTILITIE5 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of all utilities where required. However, no claims will be considered which are based on delays or inconvenience resulting from relocation due to the Contractor failing to provide adequate protection. B. The location and depth of any underground utilities shown on the Contract Drawings are based on the investigations made by the Owner. It is, however, the Contractor's responsibility to contact the Owner for further information in regard to the exact location of all utilities to exercise the necessary care in construction operations and to take such other precautions as are necessary to safeguard the utilities from damage. ' 1.30 SAFETY PROGRAM AND SECURITY A. The attention of the Contractor and all sub-contractors is drawn to the fact that a total safety program is in effect on the Owner's property and shall be strictly radhered to. The Contractor will obtain a copy of the Municipality's "Corporate Safety and Health/Loss Control Plan", and shall adhere to the policies of this plan including the dress code for on the job safety. 1 7175-01005.wpd DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 14 , 1.30 SAFETY PROGRAM AND SECURITY (Cont'd) B. Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991 The Contractor shall obey all Federal, Provincial, and Municipal Laws, Acts, Ordinances, Regulations, Orders-in-Council and By-laws, which could in any way pertain to the work outlined in the Contract or to the Employees of the Contractor. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the Contractor shall satisfy all statutory requirements imposed by the Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations made thereunder, on a Contractor, a Constructor and/or Employer with respect to or arising out of the performance of the Contractor's obligations under this Contract. C. Confined Space If applicable to this project, the Contractor shall provide the Municipality with a copy , of its Confined Space Entry Procedures and, in the event that the Contractor does not have defined procedures, the said Contractor shall abide by the Occupational Health and Safety Act and regulations made thereunder and any procedures of the , Municipality of Clarington. The Contractor shall be aware of and confirm to all governing regulations, including those established by the Municipality, related to employee health and safety. The Contractor shall keep employees and Sub-Contractors informed of such regulations. D. The Owner subscribes to the principle that the safety of all persons, whether they be invitees or licensees, be maintained to all practicable extent, during all periods of time such persons remain on the Owner's property. E. The supervisor of the project, representing the Contractor, will be responsible for his employees and subcontractors/suppliers maintaining standard safety practices, as well as the specific safety rules listed below. F. The following Acts and the regulations made thereunder(latest revisions), shall not ' be contravened: i) The Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations for Industrial Establishments ii) The Power Commission Act ' iii) The Boiler and Pressure Vessels Act iv) The Elevators and Lifts Act V) The Operating Engineer's Act vi) The Occupational Health and Safety Act, 1991 and Regulations for Construction Projects vii) The Building Code viii) The Municipality of Clarington Corporate Safety Plan. 7175-01005.wpd DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 15 1.30 SAFF.TY PROGRAM RI (Cont'd) ' ix) The Ministry of Labour X) The Fire Marshals Act xi) Any other act or regulation of any authority having jurisdiction. G. The Owner reserves the right to order individuals to leave the site if the individual is in violation of any safety requirement or any Act, any expense incurred will be the responsibility of the Contractor. H. Without restricting the generality of the foregoing clauses, the following specific safety rules have been written: .1 Hard Hats-Hard Hats must be worn in construction area. The Contractor ' shall provide CSA approved hard hats for use by all visitors. .2 Safety Harness-A safety harness with a life line attached shall be worn by employees working in tanks or bins or in any area where there is a danger of anyone being overcome by fumes, or where it would be difficult to remove a man in case of emergency. An attendant must be stationed ' outside to render aid in case of trouble. .3 Padlocks and Danger Tags -Where there is a danger of equipment being energized, the motor switch on all individual motor drives shall be locked in the open position. The Contractor shall affix his own lock (I man = I lock) and in addition, a danger tag shall also be applied to the switch handle bearing a brief description of the work being done. The tag and lock shall remain in place until the work has been completed. In the case where air, steam or liquid is the motivating power the valves shall be locked in the closed position and blanked. .4 Electrical-Only three-wire grounded equipment shall be used for a 110 volt power supply. Plugs and cords shall be in good repair. Under no circumstances shall a connection be made to such an outlet except through an approved three-wire plug. Insertion of bare wires in a female outlet is strictly prohibited. .5 Fire Protection -The use of extension lights, electric drills, emery grinding wheels or any spark emitting device shall not be permitted in any area where flammable liquids are stored or used. No flammable liquids may be brought onto the site unless they are stored in approved safety cans. ' 7175-01005.wpd DIVISION 1 r SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 16 A A RI Cont'd , 1.30 SAFETY PROGRAM AND SECURITY ( ) .6 Oxygen - Acetylene and Arc Welding: If a gasoline powered generator is , used, adequate ventilation must be provided. All electrical supply lines for arc welding must be kept in good repair. .7 Compressed Gas Cylinders-The following rules shall apply to compressed gas cylinders on Owner's property: , i) Storage - All compressed gas cylinders must be stored in a ventilated area which is located away from traffic and free from falling material. Full cylinders must be stored in a separate area from empty cylinders. In all cases cylinders must be fastened securely in an upright position,the valves closed and safety caps in ' place, hand tight. ii) Transportation - All cylinders being transported must be fastened , securely in an upright position with the safety caps in place. No cylinder full or empty shall be transported lying across the forks of lift trucks, shop trucks, etc. iii) Usage - During use, cylinders must be fastened securely in an 9 9 Y upright position in an approved cart. In no case shall cylinders be used in a lying down position on shop trucks, stock baskets, etc. , They shall never be used as rollers or for any purpose other than to carry gas. Cylinders must be kept away from sparks, slag or excessive heat. Oil or grease should never come in contact with the bottles, lines or gauges. iv) Disposition of Empty Cylinders-When cylinders are empty, they are , to be taken to the empty storage area immediately. In no case are the empty cylinders to be left standing in the work area or left lying on the floor, on scrap heaps, shop trucks or left in the yard. When the Contract is complete, the Contractor will be responsible for removing all cylinders under their jurisdiction from the Owner's property. .8 Equipment- General All straight ladders must be free of damage; i.e. cracks or broken rungs, , and must have adequate safety feet. They must not be placed on boxes, etc. or placed in a doorway unless someone is stationed at the bottom. All ladders must be tied-off. Scaffolds must be in good condition'and if equipped with wheels, the wheels must be locked when in use. ' 7175-01005.wpd rDIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 17 ' 1.30 SAFETY PROGRAM AND SECURITY(Cont'd) Planking on scaffold must meet the requirements of the Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations for Construction Projects. ' Suspended loads must not be left unattended and must not be moved over the heads of anyone. When overhead work is in progress, the floor area should be roped off to prevent possible injury to anyone working or passing below. ' No one is to work over hot or corrosive materials without proper planking in addition to a safety belt and life line. ' Lift trucks must be equipped with an overhead screen guard and the forks must be straight and properly positioned. In addition, the vehicle should be large enough for the work involved. All welders and gasoline powered equipment to be vented to exterior. .9 Housekeeping Scra p and refuse should be removed from the work area daily. Oily and waste solvent rags are a fire hazard and should be deposited in approved containers. Conduit, pipe or structural steel must not be left in such a way that it constitutes a hazard. All openings in the roof or floor must be guarded to prevent anyone from falling through or to prevent stock or scrap from dropping down. Outside holes or pits must be guarded'and provided with warning lights. ' Loose equipment, tools, etc., must be cleaned off overhead areas before leaving each day. Boards with protruding nails must not be left on the floor. In addition, bolts, etc., must be cut off at floor level to eliminate a possible tripping hazard. ' Access routes to and from the work area from exterior shall be kept free from the accumulation of waste products and dirt. 7175-01005.wpd DIVISION 1 r SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 18 1.31 DUST CONTROL ON DRIVEWAYS AND IN WORK AREAS , A. The Contractor will be solely responsible for controlling dust nuisances resulting , from his operations, both within the work limits and elsewhere. Quantities of water and calcium chloride shall be supplied and applied by the Contractor to those areas as being necessary and unavoidable for the prevention of dust nuisance or hazard , to the area, as directed by the Consultant at no additional cost. B. Care shall be taken to control dust within the building. The Contractor shall provide ' adequate protections and dust screens to the complete satisfaction of the Consultant and as indicated on the drawings. 1.32 DAILY REPORTS AND OVERTIME WORK A. Sunday and Statutory Holiday Work ' .1 Work may be permitted on Sundays, only with written permission from the Municipality , and only to such extent as he may judge to be necessary. i .2 Under special circumstances, approval may be given for work on Statutory Holidays, at the discretion of the Municipality of Clarington. The Contractor must submit written notification at least four (4) days in advance of the Statutory Holiday on which he desires to work, indicating the location and nature of the work to be performed. The Contractor must obtain written permission from the Municipality of Clarington authorizing work on a specific Statutory Holiday. 1.33 TAX ASSISTANCE The Contractor shall provide to the Owner the following or other necessary information for t tax purposes in respect to the Contract if so requested: a) Material Cost b) Field Labour Cost c) Freight Charges d) Custom Duties and Excise Taxes e) Goods and Services Tax f) Provincial Retail Sales Tax 7175-01005.wpd r DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 19 1.34 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ' A. Workplace Hazardous Material Information System (WHMIS) Prior to the commencement of work the Contractor shall provide, to the Consultant, a list of those products controlled under WHMIS which he expects to use on this Contract. Related Material Safety Data Sheets shall accompany the submission. All containers used in the application of products controlled under WHMIS shall be ' labelled. The Contractor shall notify the Consultant of changes to the list in writing and provide the relevant Material Safety Data Sheets. , B. Hazardous Materials' will not be introduced for experimental or any other use prior to being evaluated for hazards. 1 C. Man common construction materials such as asbestos pipe and various Y p insulations are hazardous materials or contain hazardous materials and may not be used under any circumstances. D. When any material, which constitutes a hazard, is to be used, the Owners and ' Consultant should be consulted prior to bid submission to ensure adequate allowances have been made for the proper procedures to be followed at all times. r1.35 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY ACT 1991 - DESIGNATED SUBSTANCES A. In accordance with the requirements of Section 18a(1) of the Occupational Health and Safety Act, the Authority has determined that the following designated substances are present on the site and within the limits of this Contract: ' 1. Asbestos ' B. The Owner will make separate arrangements for the removal of all identified asbestos materials by others, prior to the commencement of the work. It is possible that asbestos may be present elsewhere in the building and the contractor is advised to immediately notify the Consultant whenever asbestos is found or rsuspected. C. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all Sub-Contractors performing work under this Contract have received a copy of this specification, where Designated Substances are identified as being present at the site of the work. D. The Contractor shall comply with the governing Ministry of Labour Regulations respecting protection of workers, removal, handling and disposition of the ' Designated Substances encountered on this Contract. 717e-01005.wpd 1 DIVISION 1 , SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 20 1.35 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY ACT 1991 - DESIGNATED SUBSTANCES ' (Cont'd) E. Prior to the commencement of this work, the Contractor shall provide written r notification to the Ministry of the Environment at 7 Ovedea Boulevard, Toronto, Ontario, M4H 1A8, of the location(s) proposed for disposal of Designated , Substances. A copy of the notification shall be provided to the Contract Administrator a minimum of two (2)weeks in advance of work starting. F. In the event that the Ministry of the Environment has concerns with any proposed r disposal location, further notification shall be provided until the Ministry of the Environment's concerns have been addressed. , G. All costs associated with the removal and disposition of Designated Substances herein identified, shall be deemed to be included in the appropriate tender items. H. Should a Designated Substance not herein identified be encountered in the work, then management of such substance shall be-treated as Extra Work. I. The existing asbestos jacketing at the Basement Boiler will remain in place and is not to be disturbed. 1 1.36 SECURITY A. Be responsible for security of all areas affected by work of this Contract, until taken r over by Owner. B. Take steps to prevent entry to the work by unauthorized persons and guard against , theft, fire and damage by any cause. r 1.37 SIGNS A. With the exception of project sign, safety signs or notices do not erect any signs ' unless approved by the Consultant. B. Erect signs related to safety on the work, or mandatory regulation notices. r C. Prior to commencement of work wherein hazardous or volatile cements, coatings, or substances are used, barricade entire area and post adequate number of"NO SMOKING" signs. 1.38 CASH ALLOWANCES A. Comply with requirements specified herein and with applicable requirements of the General Conditions of the Contract. 7175-01005.wpd r DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 21 ' 1.38 CASH ALLOWANCES (Cont'd) B. Unless otherwise specified, cash allowances shall cover the cost of the materials and equipment delivered F.O.B.job site, and all applicable taxes. The Contractor's handling costs on the site, labour, installation costs, overhead and profit and other expenses shall be included separately in the Contract Sum and not in the Cash Allowance. ' C. Where it is specified that a cash allowance is to include both supply and installation costs, such allowances shall cover the cost of the materials and equipment delivered and unloaded at the site, all applicable taxes, and the Contractor's handling costs on the site, labour and installation costs, and other expenses, except overhead and profit which shall be included separately in Contract Sum. D. Cash allowance for independent inspection and testing shall cover the cost of such ' services as provided by independent testing agency only. The Contractor's cost for labour, overhead and other expenses shall be included separately in the Contract Sum and not in the allowance. E. If the cost of the Work covered by allowances, when determined, is more or less than the allowance, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. F. The Contractor shall cause the work covered by allowances to be performed for such amounts and by such persons as the Architect may select and direct. G. Expenditures from cash allowances shall be authorized in writing by the Consultant. Trade Discounts and refunds shall be credited to the owner; only cash discounts (if any) on accounts paid by the Contractor before net due date being retained by the Contractor. rH. Refer to Section 00100 Instructions to Bidders, for list of Cash Allowances. ' 1.39 QUALITY CONTROL ' A. Requirements specified herein apply to independent inspection and testing specified under technical Specification Sections. B. Requirements specified herein do not apply to the following: .1 Inspection and testing required b laws,.ordinances, rules, regulations and P 4 Y orders by public authorities. .2 Testing, adjustment and balancing of mechanical and electrical systems and equipment. 7175-01005.wpd DIVISION 1 ! SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 22 , 1.39 QUALITY CONTROL (Cont'd) .3 Inspection and testing perforated exclusively for Contractor's convenience. ' C. Refer to technical specification sections for specific inspection and testing requirements. , D. Testing agency shall do the following: .1 Act on a professional and unprejudiced basis and carry out inspection and ! testing functions to establish compliance with requirements of Contract Documents. ' .2 Check work as it progresses. Failure to detect defective work or materials shall not in any way present later rejection when such defect is discovered, ' nor shall it obligate Consultant for final acceptance. .3 Prepare reports stating results of tests and conditions of work and state in , each report whether specimens tested conform to requirements of Contract Documents, specifically noting deviations. .4 Distribute reports as follows: ' a) Consultant-4 copies b) Contractor- 2 copies Testing agency is not authorized to amend or release any requirements of Contract Documents, nor to approve or reject any portion of work. ' E. Contractor shall do the following: 1 Notify testing agency 24 hours in advance of operations to allow for ! assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. .2 Provide testing agency with access to work at all times. ! .3 Supply material samples for testing. ! .4 Supply casual labour and other incidental services required by testing agency. ' .5 Provide facilities for site storage of samples. F. When initial inspection and testing indicates noncompliance with Contract ! Documents, any subsequent reinspection and retesting occasioned by noncompliance shall be performed by same testing agency and cost thereof borne by Contractor. 7175-01005.wpd DIVISION 1 SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 23 1.39 QUALITY CONTROL (Cont'd) ' G. Employment of independent testing agency shall in no way relieve Contractor of his obligation to perform work in accordance with requirements. Performance or non-performance of the Inspection and Testing Company shall not limit, reduce, or ' relieve the contractor of his responsibilities in complying with the requirements of the Documents. i1.40 SPILLS REPORTING A. Spills or discharges of pollutants or contaminants under the control of the ' Contractor, and spills or discharges of pollutants or contaminants that are a result of the Contractor's operations that cause or are likely to cause adverse effects shall ' forthwith be reported to the Consultant. Such spills or discharges and their adverse effects shall be as defined in the Environmental Protection Act R.S.O. 1980. B. All spills or discharges of liquid, other than accumulated rain water, from luminaries, internally illuminated signs, lamps, and liquid type transformers under the control of the Contractor, and all spills or discharges from this equipment that are a result of the Contractor's operations shall, unless otherwise indicated in the Contract, be assumed to contain PCB's and shall forthwith be reported to the Consultant. C. This reporting will not relieve the Contractor of his legislated responsibilities regarding such spills or discharges. 1.41 PROTECTION OF WATER QUALITY A. At all times,the Contractor shall maintain existing stream flows and shall control all construction work so as to allow sediment or other deleterious materials to enter streams. B. No waste or surplus organic material including topsoil is to be stored or disposed of within 30 metres of any watercourses. Run-off from excavation piles will not be ' permitted to drain directly into watercourses but shall be diffused onto vegetative areas a minimum of 30 metres from the watercourse. Where this measure is not sufficient or feasible to control sediment entering the watercourses, sedimentation traps or geotextile coverage will be required. C. If dewaterin 9 required,uired, the water shall be pumped into a sedimentation pond or q diffused onto vegetated areas a minimum of 30 metres from the watercourses and not pumped directly into the watercourses. 7175-01WS.wpa r DIVISION 1 i SECTION 01005 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Page 24 1.42 FIRE PROTECTION T A. Provide fire protection to the finished project as indicated on the drawings and in ' the Technical Sections of the Specifications. B. Test methods used to determine fire hazard classifications and fire performance , ratings of assemblies and materials shall be as required by the Ontario Building Code. C. When requested, furnish the consultant with evidence of compliance with the fire protection requirements. D. Materials and components used to construct fire rated assemblies and materials requiring fire hazard classification shall be listed and labelled or otherwise approved by the appropriate authority. Labelled materials and their packaging , shall bear fire rating authorities label showing product classification. E. Fire rated door assemblies shall include doors, frames, anchors and hardware and shall bear label of fire rating authority showing opening classification and rating. F. Materials having a fire hazard classification shall be installed in accordance with the fire rating authorities printed instructions. G. Fire rated assemblies and all components shall be in accordance with the referenced design criteria. Deviations from the requirements of the referenced authority will not be permitted. H. Construct all fire rated assemblies as continuous, uninterrupted elements, except for permitted openings. Extend rated walls or partitions from the floor to the underside of the structure above. I. Fill and patch voids and gaps around openings and penetrations and at the perimeter of the assembly to maintain continuity and to produce a fire resistant smoke tight seal. , 7175-01005.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 01100 SPECIAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS ' A. Work of this project is required to be constructed in stages and Contractor's use of site and premises may be limited to permit Owner to occupy and use facilities in accordance with scheduling requirements and commitments and with the least ' amount of inconvenience and disturbance possible. B. At all times restrict construction personnel, operations and procedures to designated locations and do not deviate from required procedures without prior approval by Owner. ' C. The building is a historically significant structure and contains numerous features which are not in any way to be damaged or altered without permission of the Owner. The contractor will provide all necessary protection and will restrict construction activities and traffic in areas where directed by the consultant. Prior to commencement of the work, record all existing conditions by videotape. Submit one copy of the videotape to the owner for record purposes. D. Periodically review proposed construction operations with Owner and Consult and co-operate as required to ensure that Owner's interests and requirements are not unduly compromised. ' E. Take over and assume responsibility for the area encompassed in this contract until Substantial Performance except as otherwise indicated. F. Provide and maintain access for Owner's staff and the public to areas designated for early take-over and occupancy. Carry out work at times and in manner preventing unreasonable interference with Owner's existing operations and use of facilities. Maintain access to the building and egress from occupied areas of the building to the requirements of the Ontario Building Code at all times. G. Erect dustproof, fire resistant screens to separate work areas from areas occupied by Owner. Control spread of dust and noxious fumes to occupied areas. Prevent disruption of life safety systems to occupied areas. Maintain required exits. H. Provide temporary weatherproof, insulated closures to protect openings made in exterior walls and roofs. I. Owner intends to store materials and equipment in designated areas within existing building. Be responsible for and protect such materials and equipment until Substantial Performance. Storage areas will be off limits to construction personnel except when permitted by the owner. The contractor will give a minimum of 48 hours notice of required access to these areas. 7175-01100.wpd DIVISION 0 SECTION 01100 SPECIAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS Page 2 , 1.02 SCHEDULING REQUIREMENTS A. There may be periods during construction where no excessive noise can occur and these operations would have to be scheduled at an approved time. Allowances must be made for this special scheduling and hardship or delay claims will not be ' considered. The following scheduling requirements shall apply: ' .1 Commence construction immediately upon award of contract. .2 The building will be vacated by the owner and turned over to the contractor immediately upon start of construction. .3 Construction activities will be restricted largely to the ground floor, except when necessary to facilitate the work. The owner will require access to the non-construction areas from time to time for service, maintenance, etc., and will not be obstructed in any way. .4 The existing tennis courts will be operated by the Bowmanville Tennis Club , commencing May 1, 1998. The contractor will complete all electrical work to reinstate the tennis court lighting, and will provide a minimum of four(4) parking spaces for the Tennis Club on that date. No disruption of power to the Tennis Courts after May 1, 1998 will be allowed without the owners permission. .5 The contractor will schedule operations to complete the new Activity Room and all interior alterations by June 1, 1998. .6 The owner has committed to the use of the Activity Room and adjacent facilities in June. Commencing June 1, 1998 the owner will occupy parts of the building as necessary to meet those commitments. .7 The project will be substantially complete by June 30, 1998. , B. The Contractor must prepare and submit for approval, a schedule and a work program based on the above general sequence taking into account key dates and scheduling requirements. C. Comply with local by-laws for noise levels with respect to hours of operation. , Restrict all construction traffic and operations accordingly. 7175-01100.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. B. Submit detailed written schedule and a proposal for demolition procedures to Consultant for review prior to commencement of demolition. C. Obtain and pay for all permits, and comply with all laws, rules, ordinances, and regulations relating to Building Demolition, disposal and preservation of public safety. ' D. Refer to requirements regarding hazardous substances in General Instructions, Section 01005. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Removal and disposal of existing masonry. B. Removal and disposal of existing partitions. C. Removal and disposal of roof deck and roofing. D. Removal and disposal of existing stair assemblies. ' E. Removal and disposal of existing windows and doors. F. Saw cutting, breaking out and disposal of existing concrete. G. Removal and disposal of existing finishes including walls, floors, and ceilings. H. Removal and disposal of existing cabinet work fittings and shelving. I. Removal and storage for reinstallation of all items shown on the drawings. J. All other removals as indicated on the drawings and as necessary to complete the ' work. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. General Instructions Section 01005 B. Excavating, Backfilling and Grading Section 02200 C. Structural Steel Section 05120 D. Miscellaneous Metals Section 05500 E. Rough Carpentry Section 06100 F. Roofing Section 07530 G. Mechanical Division 15 H. Electrical Division 16 7175-02050.wpd DIVISION 2 ' SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS Page 2 1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. The Building Code, Ontario Regulation 413/90. ' B. The Occupational Health and Safety Act, 1991 and Regulations for Construction , Projects. C. Laws, rules and regulations of other authorities having jurisdiction. ' D. The Ontario Fire Code, a regulation of the Fire Marshals Act. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS ' A. Materials from demolition shall become the property of the Contractor unless specified otherwise and shall be removed from the Site the same or next day after demolition. B. All equipment and materials to be handed over to the Owner as indicated on the ' drawings shall be delivered and unloaded on the Owners property as directed by the Consultant. PART 3• EXECUTION 3.01 DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL A. The Contractor shall note that the removal of certain Mechanical and Electrical , equipment and structural steel, is shown on the Mechanical, Electrical and Structural drawings. The Contractor shall fully review these drawings prior to commencement of demolition. , B. Before commencing demolition, the Contractor shall verify that existing sprinkler, water, gas, electrical and other services in areas being demolished are cut off, ' capped diverted or removed as required. Active services to the existing building shall be protected and maintained without interruption, unless otherwise approved by the Owner. Post warning signs on electrical lines and equipment which must remain energized to serve adjacent areas during period of demolition. C. Before work is commenced in any section of the existing building, the Owner will remove all movable materials and equipment, etc., that do not require , disconnecting from services. Material and equipment that cannot be moved shall be protected from damage by the Contractor. 7175-02050.wpd ' DIVISION 2 SECTION 02050 ' DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS Page 3 3.01 DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL (Cont'd) D. During the execution of the work keep the spread of dust to other building areas to an absolute minimum. Demolition of or alterations to any portion of the existing ' building shall be commenced only after approval of the Consultant has been obtained, and after weather-tight and dust-proof screens have been erected to provide thorough protection to the adjoining areas. All areas within the existing ' building which are to be altered or are affected by the work of the new addition including areas adjacent thereto shall be thoroughly cleaned by the Contractor's forces daily. E. Maintain the work areas and storage areas clean and orderly at all times and free of rubbish and debris. ' F. Provide safe access and egress from working areas using entrances, hallways, stairways or ladder runs, protected to safeguard the personnel using them from falling debris. G. Glass occurring in windows to be removed shall be removed before removal of the window frames is commenced. H. When permission has been ranted to proceed with demolition in the various P 9 P phasing of the work, it shall be carried forth expeditiously and continuously to completion. I. Particular attention shall be paid to prevention of fire and elimination of fire hazards which would endanger new work or existing premises. J. Ensure that all work in the existing building, such as floors, finishes, trim, etc., is protected completely. Cut, patch and make good all existing roofs, walls, floors and other finishes where damaged or affected by the alterations. ' K. All roof decks over which steel, concrete or mechanical equipment are to be hoisted or transported over shall be planked with 50 mm thick minimum planking as a safety precaution. Planking to be of thickness required to prevent the loads being transported from penetrating through the roof decks in the case of the material being accidentally dropped. Planking shall be reviewed by the Owner. ' L. Execute all cutting and removal of existing building walls, floor slabs, structural steel, roof deck, roofing and other removals as indicated on the drawings and as required. Neatly cut existing metal siding and remove block walls to accommodate connections for new structural steel framing. Removing existing sections of walls ' as indicated. M. All existing concrete to be removed shall be saw cut to a minimum depth of 25 mm before breaking out concrete. 7175-020511.wpd DIVISION 2 ' SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS Page 4 3.01 DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL (Cont'd) N. The Contractor shall be held responsible for maintaining the existing building in a weather and watertight condition at all times until the completion and acceptance ' of the work. All damage caused to the building interior/exterior and/or equipment, etc. of the existing buildings by the neglect of the Contractor or any of his forces shall be made good at the expense of the Contractor including all costs and charges which may be claimed by the Owner for damages or loss of production , suffered. O. The following methods of demolition will not be permitted in the work of this ' Contract: 1. Use of explosives. ' 2. Mechanical method of demolition whereby wrecking is accomplished by smashing the walls or floors with a heavy weight suspended by a cable ' from a boom or hoist or where masonry walls are collapsed using a power shovel, tractor or other mechanical means. P. At end of each day's work, leave work in safe condition so that no part is in danger ' of toppling or falling. (Protect interiors of building parts not to be demolished from exterior elements at all times.) Q. Demolish in a manner to minimize dusting. Keep dusty materials wetted. R. Demolish masonry and concrete walls in small sections. Carefully remove and lower structural framing and other heavy or large objects. S. Selling or burning materials on site is not permitted. , T. Remove contaminated or dangerous materials from site and dispose of in safe , manner to minimize danger at site or at any time during disposal. U. Where required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit for approval drawings, diagrams or details clearly showing sequence of disassembly work or supporting ' structures and underpinning. V. Drawings for structural elements of the demolition process shall bear signature and , stamp of qualified professional engineer registered in the Province of Ontario. W. Inspect site and verify with Consultant items designated for removal and items to , be preserved prior to starting demolition. X. Upon completion of work, remove debris, trim surfaces and leave work site clean. ' 717"2050.wpd ' DIVISION 2 SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS Page 5 3.01 DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL (Cont'd) ' Y. Reinstate areas and existing works outside areas of demolition to conditions that existed prior to commencement of work. Z. At all times protect the structure from overloading. AA. Prevent movement, settlement or damage 'of adjacent structures, services, adjacent grades, and existing building to remain. Make good damage and be liable for injury caused by demolition. BB. This Contractor shall provide kill,shoring and bracing required for the execution of the work. 3.12 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT TO BE HA N DED OVER TO OWNER A. Carefully remove and hand over to the Owner all items as indicated on the drawings. 1 7175-02050.wpd ' DIVISION 2 SECTION 02200 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL ' 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. ' 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all excavating, backfilling and rough grading called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the ' following: A. Clearing and grubbing. B. Stripping and grading of site to required elevations. C. Excavation for all footings and foundations. D. Excavation for all site services. E. Haul and dispose of excavated material off-site. F. Supply, place and compact granular material around new footings and foundations and below new slab on grade. G. Proof rolling of existing subgrade. ' H. Supply and place topsoil. I. Pumping and de-watering of excavations. J. Vapour barrier and sand fill below slabs. i 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Demolition Section 02050 B. Asphalt Paving Section 02400 C. Concrete Sidewalks Section 02514 D. Concrete Curbs and Gutters Section 02516 E. Sodding Section 02935 F. Concrete Work Section 03300 G. Bituminous Damp Proofing Section 07160 H. Building Insulation Section 07200 I. Mechanical Division 15 J. Electrical Division 16 75-02200.wpd DIVISION 2 , SECTION 02200 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING Page 2 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Earth: Site excavated material, including shale, rubble rock, building debris, shrub ' and tree roots and soil. B. Soil: Site excavated material, free from shale, rubble rock, building debris, shrub and tree roots. C. Fill: Approved materials, other than earth, clay and unapproved soil. Approved ' soil may be used only with approval of the Consultant in writing. D. Rock: All solid rock in ledges, stratified deposits, unstratified masses, and all , conglomerate deposits or any other material so firmly cemented by process of nature as to present all the characteristics of solid rock, being so hard or firmly cemented that it cannot be excavated and removed with a power ' shovel except after thorough and continuous drilling and blasting. E. Backfilling: The operation of supplying and installing fill and approved soil materials. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes. Regulations ' 1. Conform to the requirements of the Ontario Building Code and the Occupational Health and Safety Act, "November 1992 Ontario Regulation 213/91" and Regulations for Construction Projects. B. Examination 1. Examine the building site and determine the nature and extent of the materials to be removed or the additional fill required to provide depths and levels ' indicated on drawings. Field check the site to review existing conditions. C. Setting Out Work 1. The drawings indicate the building components location, and proposed and final grades. The Contractor shall be responsible to construct the work according to levels and locations shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall report any errors or discrepancies to the Consultant before commencing with the work. Commencement of any part of the work shall constitute acceptance of drawings as being correct. fins-oszoo.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02200 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING Page 3 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE (Cont'd) ' C. Setting Out Work (Cont'd) 2. The Contractor shall employ a competent instrument man and provide all lines and levels, limit lines and boundary stakes for the execution of the work as required. All bench marks shall be carefully protected. 3. The Contractor shall provide all Subcontractors with, and be responsible for, all lines, levels and dimensions which such trades require to relate their work to the work of the Contractor or other trades. All trades shall be notified that all such levels and dimensions must be obtained from the Contractor. D. Inspection and Testing 1. Provide proper and sufficient samples, ample opportunity and access at all times for the Consultant or Testing Agency to inspect materials, operations and completed works carried out under this Section. E. Soils Report 1. A soils report prepared by Gibson Associates Ltd. has been completed. The soils report is available at the Consultants Office for review. 1.06 PROTECTION A. Protection of Existing Services 1. Before starting the work, verify the location of all known underground services and utilities occurring in the work site area. 2. Notify the Owner, Public Utility or Municipal authorities in advance of planned excavations adjacent to their services. 3. Take care not to damage or displace encountered known and unknown services. 4. When such services are encountered during the execution of work, immediately notify the Consultant and protect, brace and support active services. Where repairs to these services become necessary use the following procedure: a. Known services, repair at no expense to the Owner. 7175-02200.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02200 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING Page 4 1.06 PROTECTION (Cont'd) A. Protection of Existing_Services (Cont'd) ' b. Unknown services,forward to the Consultant a complete breakdown of the estimated cost of such work. When Consultant's signed t Change Order has been received, proceed immediately with repairs. The amount approved therefore shall be considered as an addition to the Contract Sum. 5. In the case of damage to, or cutting off of an essential service, notify Consultant, the Owner, and Public Utility or Municipal authorities immediately and repair the service under the Consultant's direction. 6. Inform the Consultant about encountered services requiring adjustment, relocation or abandonment to arrange for disconnection and capping of pipe. B. Shoring and Bracing 1. Shoring and trench timbering, in addition to requirements of local authorities, shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of The Occupational Health and Safety Act, "November 1992 Ontario Regulation 213/91" and Regulations for Construction Projects by Ontario Ministry of Labour and to Construction Safety Association brochure "Trenching Safety April 1994". 2. Erect necessary shoring for excavations in such a manner that: , a. Whenever a trench or excavated face is to exceed 1200 mm in depth or height, the Contractor shall shore and brace to prevent failure. The Contractor shall engage a registered Professional Engineer fully qualified in this line of work to design, stamp shop drawings and assume responsibility for the shoring and bracing. All shop drawings shall be submitted to the Consultant for review as to compatibility with the overall project. b. It will properly retain the banks of the excavations and prevent caving-in or displacement or damage to surrounding or adjacent buildings or other property. C. All other work in connection with this Contract, including the Mechanical and Electrical Trades, may be carried out while it is still in place if necessary. 7175-02200.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02200 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING Page 5 ' 1.06 PROTECTION (Cont'd) B. Shoring and Bracing (Cont'd) d. It will be entirely free of footings, foundation walls or other such work so that it may be removed entirely or in sections when it is no longer required or when directed, without causing any damage or injury to the structural work that has been completed. C. Work Inside Existing Buildings 1. Notify the Consultant of proposed work schedule for approval seven (7) days prior to commencement. Provide adequate protection around work area for Owner's employees. Use only approved access routes. Provide adequate ventilation of equipment exhaust fumes. Control dust in the work area and provide dust enclosure all around the area. D. Work Adjacent to Existing Buildings 1. Exercise extreme caution when excavating adjacent to existing building. Do not damage existing building siding, foundation walls, or footings. 2. Review and obtain approval for procedures for excavation and backfill jadjacent to existing building with consultant prior to commencing work. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Type A Fill: Class "A" material conforming to OPSS Division 10, latest edition. B. Type B Fill: Class "B" material conforming to OPSS Division 10, latest edition. 1 C. Topsoil: Natural, activated medium loam, possessing the characteristics of good agricultural soils capable of producing heavy vegetation. It shall be neither sand nor heavy clay in nature and shall be free from living vegetation and roots, stone or other foreign matter larger than 25 mm in diameter. D. Sand Fill: All sand fill must be well graded, compactable sand. E. Crushed Stone: Crushed stone shall be composed of clean, hard, durable coarse gravel, or crushed rock fragments such that 100% of the particles pas the%" sieve and not more that 10% of the particles pass the No. 4 sieve. No clay or other objectionable materials shall be present. 1 7175-02200.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02200 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING Page 6 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) F. Drainage Pipe: Drainage piping to be 150 mm diameter(P erforated where shown ' on the drawings), P.V.C. sub-drain, CSA approved as supplied by Canron, Canplast or approved equal. Exposed ends of drainage piping (at outfalls) shall be protected with 6 mm galvanized steel mesh rodent screen, 16 gauge. G. Filter Cloth for Sub-drains: All sub-drains to be wrapped with filter cloth, Mirafi 140 or approved equal. H. Vapour Barrier: 6 mil clear polyethylene film to CAN/CGSB-51.34-M in roll width of 3000 mm. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clearing - Clear and remove all obstructions to excavating. B. Lines and Levels- Establish accurate lines and levels as required and supply batter boards, lines, stakes and templates and establish permanent reference lines and bench marks required. C. Stock Piles - Materials shall not be stockpiled on the site except with the prior approval of the Owner. 3.02 EXCAVATION WORK A. Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated or required by the work, plus sufficient space to permit erection of forms, shoring and inspection. Excavation shall be made to clean lines to minimize quantity of fill material required. B. The floor slab area on grade should be proof rolled to the density specified herein. Any soft spots which are revealed should be sub-excavated and backfilled with suitable compacted fill. Refer to 3.03 Backfilling herein. C. Remove large rocks, stumps and other obstructions of whatever nature encountered in the course of excavation and haul away off the site. 7175-02200.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02200 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING Page 7 3.02 EXCAVATION WORK (Cont'd) D. Unauthorized Excavation - Excavation to greater than required depth shall be corrected by the Contractor at his own expense in a manner as directed by the Consultant. Fill over-excavated areas under structure bearing surfaces and footings with concrete as specified for foundations. E. Keep excavation free of water by bailing, pumping or a system of drainage as required and provide pumps, suction and discharge lines or well points of sufficient capacity and maintain until such time as the permanent drainage system is installed or until the Consultant's approval of removal of equipment is obtained. Take all necessary measures to prevent flow of water into the excavation. F. Protect the bottom and sides of excavated pits and trenches from freezing. Protect also from exposure to the sun and wet weather to prevent cave-ins and softening of the bed upon which concrete or drains rest. G. Keep bottoms of excavations clean and clear of loose materials levelled and stepped at changes of levels with exception of excavations made for drainage purposes and those to slope as required. H. If the excavations reveal seepage zones, springs or other unexpected sub-surface conditions which may necessitate revisions or additions to any drainage system, inform the Consultant immediately so that remedial action can be taken. I. Protect existing trees scheduled to remain at all times during excavation. Do not damage roots. Refer to General Conditions. J. If removal of earth causes displacement of adjacent earth, the earth so disturbed shall be removed at no additional cost to the Owner. K. Conditions of Excavated Surfaces 1. Excavate to a depth sufficient to expose firm undisturbed subsoil, free of organic matter and to the Testing Agency's approval. 2. Hand trimming the bottom of foundations: Complete hand trimming of disturbed soil just prior to concrete placement. 3. Remove soft, wet or unconsolidated ground and organic material encountered in excavating. 4. Should the nature of the sub-soil at the depths shown prove to be unsatisfactory to the Consultant for the placing of the concrete work, then upon the Consultant's written order, the Contractor shall excavate to greater depth until a satisfactory bottom is reached. 7175-02200.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02200 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING Page 8 3.02 EXCAVATION WORK (Cont'd) L. Tolerances 1. General excavation shall be to the elevations shown on the drawings, plus or minus 25 mm. 2. Excavate for footings to elevations indicated on drawings, plus or minus 13 mm. 3. Sloped subgrade surfaces for the ice rink slabs must be within a tolerance of 13 mm, plus or minus. 3.03 BACKFILLING A. Proceed promptly with backfilling as the building progresses, and as work to be backfilied has been inspected and approved by the Consultant. The backfill in areas where settlement cannot be tolerated, e.g. service and footing trenches under the floor slab, should be compacted to at least 100 per cent of its Standard Proctor Maximum Dry Density. The backfill should be placed in lifts not greater than 8" (200 mm)thick in the loose state, each lift being compacted with a suitable compactor to the specified density. B. Do not commence backfilling operations until mechanical and electrical services, and site drainage systems have been inspected and approved by Consultant and authorities having jurisdiction. Existing floor subgrade must be proof rolled before backfilling. C. Withdraw shoring material during backfill. Lumber left in place without the Consultant's approval will not be paid for by the Owner. D. Backfill evenly on both sides of foundation walls to avoid unequal fill pressures on walls. E. Place fill around foundation walls and footings so that footings will have a minimum of 48" (1200 mm) coverage, measured at an angle of 45 degrees from bottom of footing to protect against frost until final grading is complete. F. Where fill is placed adjacent to structures or vulnerable building components or in restricted areas, the fill shall be compacted to the same degree as specified by suitable equipment approved by the Consultant. Avoid damage to or displacement of walls, columns, piers, underground services, and process/ production equipment. G. Add water in amounts required only to achieve the optimum moisture content. 7175-02200.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02200 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING Page 9 3.03 BACKFILLING (Cont'd) H. Backfill shall be free of snow and ice. 3.04 ROUGH GRADING A. Preparation and Layout 1. Establish extent of grading by area and elevation. j2. Prior to commencement of grading work, establish location and extent of all underground utilities occurring in work areas. Maintain, reroute or extend as required. Pay all costs for this work, except costs bome by utilities companies. 3. Slope grade away from building as indicated on drawings. 3.05 FILLS UNDER CONCRETE SLABS A. The fill shall be deposited in layers of such thickness that the equipment being used for compacting can produce the specified density. If lumps are present in the material each layer shall be continuously disced in order to ensure proper compaction. B. Immediately after levelling, each layer of fill shall be thoroughly compacted by the use of approved mechanical equipment. C. The exposed subgrade shall be proof rolled to at least 95% Standard Proctor Maximum Density using equipment approved by the Consultant. Any loose, wet or deleterious material shall be sub-excavated and replaced by the Contractor with Type 2 fill which must be compacted to 95% Standard Proctor Density. 3.06 COMPACTION DENSITY A. Use approved equipment for compaction. Maintain materials at optimum moisture content to obtain required compaction. Special care shall be taken to preven disturbance of the existing subgrade and adjacent structures and eauioment. B. Be responsible for damage to the subgrade and installed materials due to improper compaction methods. Make good to approval of the Consultant. 7175-02200.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02200 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING Page 10 3.06 COMPACTION DENSITY(Cont'd) C. The minimum density of fill in place shall be the following values of Standard proctor densities for corresponding locations in accordance with latest revisions of A.S.T.M. D698-(STD). 1. Type A Fill: To 100% Standard Proctor Maximum Density. 2. Type B Fill: To 98% Standard Proctor Maximum Density. D. If during progress of work, tests indicate that compacted materials do not meet specified requirements, remove defective work, replace and retest at own expense, as directed by Consultant. E. Ensure compacted fills are tested and approved before proceeding with placement of surface materials. 3.07 FILL LOCATIONS A. Type A Fill: 1. Under all interior and exterior concrete slabs 150 mm minimum thickness. 2. Under concrete sidewalks, 100 mm minimum thickness. B. Type B Fill: 1. Around all footings, foundations, grade beams and walls up to the underside of Type A fill. 2. Above all pipes and trenches for mechanical or electrical work. (Pipes to be , laid in sand bed.) C. Sand Fill: 1. Below floor slab, minimum 50 mm thick, over vapour barrier membrane. 2. Below all pipes and electrical services and in drainage trenches, minimum 150 mm deep. D. Topsoil: 1. Place topsoil below sodded or seeded areas to 100 mm minimum thickness. 7175-02200.wpd iDIVISION 2 SECTION 02200 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING Page 11 3.07 FILL LOCATIONS (Cont'd) E. Crushed Stone: 1. Under all interior and exterior concrete slabs and below interior asphalt paving, 8" minimum thickness. 2. Around all drainage pipe, minimum 200 mm thick. 3.08 WATER ON PREPARED SURFACES A. Promptly remove, by approved methods, water rising from seeping of the soil or resulting from rainfall wherever such water is on the surface of sub-grade soil and compacted fill. B. Where proper drainage and pumping is not carried out as specified herein, and any prepared sub-grade soil for under structural work, and any compacted fill for under concrete slabs, is softened or disturbed by water due to improper drainage and pumping, the Contractor shall remove the unsatisfactory soil and fill, and bear all incidental costs in connection with additional excavation and placing and compacting of granular fill under floor slabs, without extra cost to the Owner. - .3.09 SUB D RAIN AGE A. The Contractor shall do all drainage piping excavation of whatever substances are encountered to depth shown on the drawings. Excavated materials shall be removed off site. Excavation shall not be carried below required level to provide suitable bearing values. The Contractor shall remove by pumping or other means approved by the Consultant, any water accumulated in excavation at his ow expense. B. Lay filter cloth in trench and place 8" crushed stone base. All pipe shall be laid to line and grade sloped to ensure proper drainage. Complete installation by surrounding pipes with 8" crushed stone and lapping filter cloth over pipes completely enclosing crushed stone and drain piping. C. The pipe shall be properly backfilled with approved Granular'A' material as shown on the plans. The backfill shall be carefully placed and compacted to maintain the required alignment and grade to prevent the possibility of future settling. 7175-02200.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02200 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING Page 12 3.10 VAPOUR BARRIER INSTALLATION A. Immediately prior to commencement of concrete floor slab installation, lay polyethylene vapour barrier over granular base. All joints shall be lapped minimum 6". Turn edges up face of concrete wall. B. Restrict traffic over vapour barrier. C. Prior to placing of sand fill, inspect vapour barrier and repair all tom or damaged areas. D. Cover vapour retarder with minimum 2"clean sand fill after inspection of the vapour retarder by the Consultant. 3.11 SURPLUS SOIL DISPOSAL A. Surplus soil and excavated material shall be promptly removed and disposed of off the site at legal dump sites. Conform to local bylaw requirements for trucking and disposal. 3.12 CLEAN-UP A. As excavation proceeds, keep roads and aisles clean of dirt and excavated material. B. Clean up and wash down to remove all dirt and excavated materials caused by the work of this section daily. 7175-02200.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02400 ASPHALT PAVING Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENT i A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED Provide all labour, materials, equipment and services required to complete the work of this section. The work includes but is not limited to the following: A. Fine grading and proof rolling of subgrade. B. Supply, place and compact Granular'A' and Granular'B' base courses. C. Supply, place and compact asphalt paving. D. Painted pavement markings. 1.03 RELATED WORK P FI ED ELSEWHERE A. Excavating, Backfilling and Grading Section 02200 B. Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 03300 1.04 CODES AND REFERENCE STANDARDS A. All materials, equipment and methods shall conform to the Ontario Provincial Standard Specification (O.P.S.S). 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All work of this Section shall be completed by a bonafide road building Contractor engaged in paving work for at least five (5) years, and having all equipment necessary to complete the work as specified. 1.06 PROTECTION tA. Protect work of all trades and adjacent properties from damage from the work of this section. Barricade paved areas to prevent vehicle traffic for at least 24 hours after completion. 7175-02400.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02400 ASPHALT PAVING Page 2 1.07 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. The Owner shall appoint an independent inspection and testing company. B. The inspection and testing company shall perform the following services: 1. Sample proposed sources of fill materials and advise as to acceptability, maximum densities obtainable and compaction procedures. 2. Cary out density tests to ensure that the required density is achieved, and report the results of such tests in writing. C. The cost of employing the inspection and testing company shall be paid for by the Owner. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 GRANULAR BASE MATERIALS A. Granular 'B' Base Course: Crushed or uncrushed bank or pit gravel or stone t obtained from an approved source, conforming to requirements for Granular 'B' aggregate, Ontario Provincial Standard, Specifications Form No. 1010. B. Granular'A' Base Course: Crushed gravel onstone, obtained from an approved source conforming to requirements for Granular'A' aggregate, Ontario Provincial Standard, Specifications Form No. 1010. 2.02 ASPHALT MATERIALS A. Asphalt (H.L.8) conforming to O.P.S.S. Form 1150 Bituminous First Course - shall be dense graded, hot mixed, hot laid. The aggregate used shall be clean, hard, durable crushed stone. The aggregate shall comply with the following gradation: Maximum particle size 26.5 mm Passing 4 mesh sieve 30-50 Passing 200 mesh sieve 0% -7% 7175-02400.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02400 ASPHALT PAVING Page 3 2.02 ASPHALT MATERIALS (Cont'd) A. Asphalt (H L 8)conforming to O P.S S. Form 1150 (Cont'd) t The bituminous first course shall be laid to a compacted thickness as specified and graded to allow for 35 mm surface course. Void content - min. 2% max. 4% Marshall stability - min. 635 kg. at 60 deg. C. Marshall Flow - min. 9 B. Asphalt (H L 3) conforming to O P.S.S. Form 1150 Asphalt surface course shall be hot mixed, hot laid. The asphalt surface course shall be a suitable combination of coarse aggregate, fine aggregate, with or without filler, uniformly coated and mixed with asphalt I cement. It shall be laid to a compacted thickness as specified and the finished pavement shall have the following properties: Void content - min. 2% max. 4% Marshall stability - 725 kg. at 60 deg. C. Marshall Flow - 9 The aggregate used shall comply with the following: Maximum stone size - 16.0 mm Passing 4 mesh sieve -45-65 Passing 200 mesh sieve - 0% - 5% Emulsified Asphalt O.P.S.S. Form 1010. 2.03 PAINTED LINE MARKINGS A. To CGSB 1-GP-12C (White) Alkyd Traffic Paint. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS tA. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 7175-02400.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02400 ASPHALT PAVING Page 4 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS (Cont'd) B. Verify that asphalt pavement may be installed in strict accordance with the original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions of the referenced standards. C. Check rough grading, re-grade, re-level and re-compact as required. Soft spots, wet holes, shall be dug out and filled with granular fill placed in not over 150 mm layers and compacted. Remove surplus material from the site. D. Sub-grade shall be fully stabilized, compacted to 100% of standard Proctor Density and levelled to a tolerance of not more than 13 mm measured on a 3.0 metre straight edge. E. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Consultant. 3.02 PLACEMENT OF GRANULAR BASE COURSE A. Granular material shall be placed in layers of such thickness that the equipment being used can produce the specified density. B. Immediately after levelling the material shall be compacted to the specified density. C. Compaction: All granular material shall be compacted to a minimum of 98% Standard Proctor Maximum Density. D. Finished elevation tolerance will be to within 13 mm of the required elevation. 3.03 PLACEMENT OF ASPHALT SURFACING A. Asphalt surfacing shall consist of compacted thicknesses of H.L.8 and/or H.L. 3 fine laid in accordance with Ontario Provincial Standard Specification for Hot Mix Hot Laid Asphaltic Concrete. Materials, equipment and construction methods shall be in accordance with the current edition of O.P.S.S. Form No. 1010 including all amendments thereto. B. Place asphalt paving where indicated on the drawings and as follows: Medium Duty Asphalt Paving Compacted Subgrade 16" Granular'B' sub-base course 6" Granular'A' base course 2" H.L.8 asphalt binder course 1 1/2" H.L.3 asphalt surface course 7175-02400.wpd iDIVISION 2 SECTION 02400 ASPHALT PAVING Page 5 3.03 PLACEMENT OF ASPHALT SURFACING (Contd) C. Finished surface shall be smooth of uniform density and texture and true to established finished elevations. Paving shall be of thickness specified and when checked with a 3.0 metre straight edge shall show no irregularity exceeding 6 mm in depth. Surface shall be sloped in order that.all surface water will be drained to perimeter of asphalt, to catch basins or storm sewers. D. Paint contact edges of abutting concrete walls, catch basins and curbs with a thick coat of hot asphalt cement before paving mixture is placed against them. E. Joints in asphalt shall be kept to a minimum. Joints in base and top asphalt shall be staggered. F. Base asphalt shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to placing of top course of asphalt. G. Where asphalt does not adjoin concrete curbs, edges shall be trimmed and hand tamped to a clean straight line. 3.04 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS A. Pavement markings shall be painted after completion of the asphalt paving and in ( accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Restrict traffic over areas to be painted during and for 24 hours after painting. Repaint any areas which are disturbed. C. Markings shall be 4" wide, white. Locate as shown on the drawings. Paint lines 1 straight, or uniformly curved with well defined edges and full paint coverage in all directions. D. Handicapped parking spaces to be painted with O.P.S.S. standard handicapped symbol. 7175-02400.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02514 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A Excavating, Backfilling and Grading Section 02200 B. Asphalt Paving Section 02400 B. Concrete Curbs and Gutters Section 02516 C. Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03300 1 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C309-89 Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete B. ASTM D698-78 Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures Using 5.5-lb (2.49-kg) Rammer and I12-in. (305-mm) Drop C. CAN/CSA-A23.1-M90 Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction D. CAN/CSA-A23.2-M90 Methods of Test for Concrete E. OPSS 1010-88 Material Specification for Aggregates - Granular A, B, M and Select Subgrade Material F. OPSS 1308-83 Material Specification for Joint Filler(Concrete) PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL A. Base: Granular"A", OPSS 1010, as specified in Section 02200. B. Concrete: CAN/CSA-A23.1-M, CAN/CSA-A23.2-M, air entrained 5% to 7%, 25 MPa (3500 psi). Concrete shall be supplied in accordance with Section 03300. C. Curing Compound: Chlorinated rubber based, ASTM C309 Type 2. 7175-02514.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02514 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS Page 2 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) D. Joint Filler. Premoulded, non-extruding and resilient bituminous. OPSS 1308 Type A joint filler. E. Form Lumber: No. 2 S.P.F., 38 x 89 mm, free of twist and warp. F. Reinforcing Steel: 150 mm x 150 mm x 9 gauge steel mesh. G. Polyethylene Sheeting: 4 mil, to CGSB CAN2-53.33. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Establish lines and levels as required for completion of work. B. Check adequacy of preparations for sidewalks done under Section 02200. Ensure that sub-base is compacted to 98% of Standard Proctor density ASTM D698. 3.02 PLACING GRANULAR BASE A. Sub-grade must be dry and compacted to smooth surface and required grade prior to placing granular base material. B. Place Granular Base to a uniform cross-section over required area in minimum 100 mm thickness. C. Finish granular base surface true to sidewalk founding elevations and compact to minimum of 98% of Standard Proctor density, ASTM D698. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Erect formwork for sidewalks to achieve lines and grades shown on the drawings. B. Install one layer of reinforcing mesh over compacted base. Set mesh on plastic or concrete chairs, raised 25 mm above base. C. Cut expansion joint filler to full cross sectional shape of the sidewalk and place at intervals not exceeding 5 metres. Refer to plans for patterns. D. Place expansion joint filler between sidewalks and curbs, between sidewalks and building foundations and between sidewalk and any poured concrete bases or piers. 7175-02514.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02514 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS Page 3 3.03 INSTALLATION (Cont'd) E. Pour concrete on prepared sub-base to required levels and dimensions. Execute all concrete work to CAN/CSA A23.1, and CAN/CSA A23.2. F. Pour concrete sidewalks with minimum 100 mm depth, and with transverse slope of 6 mm/300 mm. G. Do not pour concrete when air temperature is, or may fail below 5° C (41° F) during or within 24 hours of pour, unless precautions are taken to prevent damage to concrete resulting from low temperature. H. Remove and replace any concrete damaged by freezing at no extra cost. I. Finish concrete with light broom finish, transverse to direction of travel. IJ. Trowel smooth edges, minimum 75 mm wide. K. Apply membrane forming curing compound as soon as surface is free of bleed water to uniformly cover exposed concrete surfaces at rate of not less than 1.0 litre/5 m2 1 7175-02514.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02516 CONCRETE CURBS AND GUTTERS Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. 1 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A Asphalt Paving Section 02400 B. Concrete Sidewalks Section 02514 C. Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03300 ' 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C309-89 Standard Specification' for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete B. ASTM D698-78 Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures Using 5.5-lb (2.49-kg) Rammer and 12-in. (305-mm) Drop C. CAN/CSA-A23.1-M90 Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction D. CAN/CSA-A23.2-M90 Methods of Test for Concrete E. OPSS 1010-88 Material Specification for Aggregates - Granular A, B, M and Select Subgrade Material F. OPSS1308-83 Material Specification for Joint Filler(Concrete) PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Base: Granular"A", OPSS 1010.05. B. Concrete: CAN/CSA-A23.1-M, CAN/CSA-A23.2-M, air entrained 5% to 7%, 25 MPa (3500 psi). C. Curing Compound: Chlorinated rubber based, ASTM C309 Type 2. D. Joint Filler: Premoulded, non-extruding and resilient bituminous. OPSS 1308 Type A joint filler. 7175-02516.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02516 CONCRETE CURBS AND GUTTERS Page 2 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) E. Reinforcing of concrete curbs shall be 2-10M bars as specified in Section 03200. ' F. Precast Concrete Curbs: existing to be reused. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Establish lines and levels as required for completion of work. B. Check adequacy of preparations for curbs done under Section 02200. Ensure that , sub-base is compacted to 98% of Standard Proctor density ASTM D698. 3.02 PLACING GRANULAR BASE A. Sub-grade must be dry and compacted to smooth surface and required grade prior to placing granular base material. B. Place Granular Base to a uniform cross-section over required area in layers not exceeding 150 mm (6") uncompacted thickness and to total depth shown on Drawings. C. Finish granular base surface true to curb founding elevations and compact to minimum of 98% of Standard Proctor density, ASTM D698. 3.03 PLACING CONCRETE CURBS AND GUTTERS A. Align concrete curbs and gutters with curves and tangents as shown on Drawings. , B. Reinforce concrete curbs with 2 continuous 10M bars. Refer to Specification Section 03200. C. Pour concrete on prepared sub-base to required levels and dimensions. Execute work, CAN/CSA-A23.1-M, CAN/CSA-A23.2-M. D. Do not our concrete when air temperature is, or may fall below 5° C 41° F during P Y ( ) 9 or within 24 hours of pour, unless precautions are taken to prevent damage to concrete resulting from low temperature. E. Remove and replace any concrete damaged by freezing at no extra cost. 7175-02516.wpd 1 DIVISION 2 SECTION 02516 CONCRETE CURBS AND GUTTERS Page 3 3.03 PLACING CONCRETE CURBS AND GUTTERS (ConVd) F. Finish concrete with a wooden float to produce an even gritty surface. G. Finish edges of concrete curbs and gutters in accordance with MBS Standard Drawings. H. Apply membrane forming curing compound as soon as surface is free of bleed water to uniformly cover exposed concrete surfaces at rate of not less than 1.0 litre/5 m2 (1.0 gal/27 sq. yd.). Maintain this protection for minimum 7 days. 1 3.04 JOINTS ' A. Joints between curb and gutter and any abutting sidewalk, catch basin and manhole frames, gutter outlets, or any structure, shall be formed with 12 mm (W) thick panels 1 of joint filler, except for control joints for extruded or formed curb and gutter, where they may be saw cut or formed with a "Guillotine" knife. 3.05 PRE-CAST CONCRETE CURBS A. Place and anchor pre-cast concrete curbs where indicated on Drawings. t 1 1 7175-02516.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02935 SODDING Page 1 IPART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENT A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Excavating, Backfilling, and Grading Section 02200 B. Hydraulic Seeding Section 02485 C. Planting Section 02950 1 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 A. Topsoil from each source, native and imported, shall be tested for N.P.K., altrazine, minor elements, as well as clay and organic matter contents and acidity (pH) range. Topsoil shall be tested, written test report submitted and approved by Consultant, ' prior to delivery to site. 1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Protect sod during transportation, for delivery to the site in a fresh and healthy condition. B. Install sod immediately, no later than 48 hours after arrival on site. Keep moist and fresh until installation. C. Handle sod carefully to prevent breaking or tearing. Immediately remove damaged and dried-out sod from the site. DART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOI A. Shredded, fertile and friable sandy loam with a minimum 2% organic matter content prior to mixing,with acidity value between pH 6.0 and 7.5, free from admixtures of subsoil, clay lumps, stones and roots over 50 mm diameter, free. of toxic substances or any other foreign matter which would inhibit growth. 7175-02935.wpd DIVISION 2 SECTION 02935 SODDING Page 2 2.02 SQL A. Sod shall be a Certified No. 1 sod, grown and sold in accordance with the latest specifications of the Nursery Sod Growers Association of Ontario (NSGA), composition of 50% Kentucky Blue Grass and 50% Merton Blue Grass. B. At the time of delivery, sod shall have a strong, fibrous root system, be free of disease, stones, burned or bare spots,with a healthy green colour and contain not , more than 1% twitch grass and other weeds. C. Sod shall be cut and rolled in sections of max. 1 sq. metre in area and , approximately 32 mm thick as specified by the NSGA. 2.03 WOODEN PEGS j A. Hardwood pegs, 25 x 25 mm square and at least 9" long, or longer as required for satisfactory anchorage of sod. 2.04 FERTILIZER , A. Commercial type having a 10-10-10 ratio and shall be applied such that actual nitrogen is 20 lbs./10 sq metres. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 SITE PREPARATION A. Adjust subgrade to allow the placing of topsoil to minimum depths specified. B. Scarify subgrade to at least 75 mm deep and remove debris and all stones 50 mm ' in diameter and larger. C. Arrange for inspection of finished subgrade by Consultant. D. Spread and grade topsoil evenly over approved subgrade. Provide minimum 125 mm thick topsoil. E. Finished sodded area top surface shall be uniform and evenly graded between elevations indicated, free of bumps, ridges and depressions. ed otherwise on soil analysis report, apply , F. Unless recommend Y P pP Y a 10-10-10 fertilizer at the rate of 20 lbs./10 sq metres. 7175-02935.wpd DIVISION 3 SECTION 03100 FORMWORK Page 3 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) ' 2. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, provide panels smooth and free of defects which would be reproduced as concrete blemishes. C. Lumber: Conforming to CSA 0141-1970 with grade stamp clearly visible. D. Chamfers: Cut from 3/4"x 3/4"wood, smooth with no open defects. E. Form Ties: At all surfaces, snap ties, with spreader washer and 1" break back. ' F. Nails, Spikes and Staples: Galvanized, conforming to CSA BIII - 1974. G. Form Release Agent: Colourless mineral oil which will not stain concrete. H. Metal forms shall be used only with the approval of the Consultant. I. Joint Tape: non-staining, water impermeable, self-release, as approved by Consultant. ' J. PVC Waterstop: Size as indicated, maximum possible lengths, Grace Durajoint, or W.R. Meadows Duo PVC. K. Tubular Forms: Sonotube forms, wax impregnated, paper forms thickness to suit, one piece. L. Isolation Joint Filler: Non-Bituminous Type: Premoulded, resilient, non-extruding, to ASTM 1752, and compatible with polysulphide urethane, polyepoxide urethane, or neoprene sealants, as applicable. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Before starting this work, examine work done by others which effects this work. B. Notify the Consultant of any conditions which would prevent proper completion of this work. C. Commencement of work implies acceptance of existing conditions. 7175-03100.wpd DIVISION 3 ' SECTION 03100 FORMWORK Page 4 ' 3.02 ERECTION A. Verify lines, levels and centres before proceeding with formwork. Ensure , dimensions agree with drawings. B. Align joints and make watertight, to prevent leakage of cement paste and , disfiguration of concrete. C. Construct formwork to produce concrete with dimensions, lines and levels within , tolerances specified in ACI 347. D. Provide formed openings where required for pipes, conduits, sleeves and other ' work to be embedded in and passing through concrete members. E. Install chamfers at all external comers exposed to view. t F. Co-ordinate work of other Sections and co-operate with trades involved in forming openings, recesses, chases and the setting of sleeves, bolts,and anchors. Do not embed wood in concrete. Tie anchor bolts securely in position, using templates to locate bolts. Verify that bolts have specified projection beyond concrete. G. Adequately brace and shore formwork to sustain loads (both concrete and working , loads) applied during construction. Engage services of Professional Engineer experienced in construction formwork and shoring design to prepare formwork , designs and drawings for all formwork supporting structural concrete and where concrete construction could be a safety hazard for workers. Submit stamped formwork and shoring drawing to Consultant for review prior to commencing work. H. Be responsible for safety of the structure both before and after the removal of forms, until the concrete has reached its specified 28 day strength. j 3.03 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS ' A. Review location of construction joints with Engineer and Architect. B. Form construction joints with bulkheads to ensure straight lines. C. Install continuous shear key in construction joints in walls and floors which are 6" , or more in thickness. D. Provide vertical construction joints in walls at not more than 75' centres. Install continuous PVC watersto s at locations shown on plan and for full length or , E. P height of joints between new and old construction. Heat seal joints to make watertight. , 7175.03100.wpd 1 DIVISION 3 SECTION 03100 FORMWORK Page 5 3.03 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS (Cont'd) F. Cut chase in existing structure with carborundum wheel and embed waterstop in chase with solidly packed metallic or chemical grout. 3.04 TREATMENT OF FORMWORK SURFACES A. Form Release Agent: .1 Coat formwork with form release agent before reinforcement, anchors, accessories, and other built-in items are installed. .2 Do not coat plywood forms pretreated with release agent. .3 On surfaces to receive finish materials, adhesives, sealers, paint or other 1 coatings or materials, use a compatible release agent. 3.05 STRIPPING OF FORMWORK ' A. Be responsible for safety of structure, both before and after removal of forms, until concrete has reached its specified 28 day strength. B. Strip formwork for soffits of beams, slabs and other spanning members which support weight of concrete only when concrete has reached its specified 28 day strength, except as specified hereafter. C. Strip formwork on vertical surfaces when concrete has hardened sufficiently that no damage will result from stripping operations. D. Remove formwork at architectural concrete surfaces after other formwork has been removed, to prevent damage to surfaces. E. Do not remove plywood formwork by jerking loose or by metal pinch bars. Use wood wedges and gradually force panels loose. Leave plywood forms in place as long as possible to permit maximum shrinkage away from concrete. F. Take particular care not to damage external comers when stripping formwork. G. When forms are stripped during curing period, cure and protect exposed concrete in accordance with Section 03300. 7175-03100.wpd DIVISION 3 SECTION 03100 FORMWORK Page 6 ' 3.06 DEFECTIVE WORK A. Variations in excess of specified tolerances, and failure of materials or workmanship to meet requirements of this specification, and which cannot be repaired by approved methods,will be considered defective work performed by this , Section. B. Replace defective work, as directed by Consultant. C. Contractor shall pay for additional inspection and testing, redesign, corrective measures, and related expenses, if work has proven to be deficient. , D. Movement and displacement of formwork during construction, variations in excess of specified tolerances and marked and disfigured surfaces that cannot be repaired , by approved methods will be considered defective work performed by this Section. E. Reconstruct defective formwork and replace concrete and reinforcement placed in , defective formwork at no additional cost to Owner. 7175-03100.wpd DIVISION 3 SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT Page 1 PART 1• GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUnED A. Reinforcing steel bars, and welded steel wire fabric for cast in place concrete complete with support chairs, bolsters, bar supports and spacers for reinforcing. 1 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Concrete Section 03300 B. Concrete Formwork Section 03100 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANQE A. Perform concrete reinforcing work in accordance with CAN/CSA A23.1-94 and CAN/CSA A23.2-94. 1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit bar lists and placing drawings for review in accordance with General Instructions. B. Clearly indicate bar sizes, spacing, laps, locations and quantities of reinforcing steel and wire fabric, bending and cutting schedules and supporting and spacing devices. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete Reinforcement: .1 Reinforcing steel, deformed billet steel bar conforming to CSA Standards G30.18 Grade 400R. .2 Wire reinforcement: Welded wire fabric, to CSA G30.5 and in flat sheets, not rolls. 7175-03200.wpd DIVISION 3 SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT Page 2 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) B. Chairs: Plastic, plastic tipped, or precast concrete. , 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate reinforcing steel in accordance with CAN/CSA A23.1-94 and with the drawings. B. Locate reinforcing splices, not indicated on drawings at points of minimum stress. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION , A. Before starting this work, examine work done by others which effects this work. B. Notify the Consultant of any conditions which would prejudice proper completion of this work. C. Commencement of work implies acceptance of existing conditions. ' 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Place reinforcing steel in accordance with reviewed placing drawings and CSA CAN 3-A23.1-94. B. Adequately support reinforcing and secure against displacement within tolerances permitted. C. Place reinforcing steel to provide concrete cover as follows: Item Coverage r Formed Surfaces and Slabs 2" (50 mm) Concrete Formed Against Earth 3" (75 mm) D. Reinforcement for separate toppings: .1 Reinforce all separate toppings over 2" in thickness. .2 Reinforce toppings 2" to 3" in thickness with 102 x 102 x MW 13.3 / MW 13.3. .3 Reinforce toppings 3" to 4" in thickness with 102 x 102 x MW 18.7 / MW r 18.7. .4 Place topping reinforcement 1 Y2" below concrete surface. .5 Use flat sheets only, no rolls. 7175-03200.wpd DIVISION 3 SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT Page 3 3.03 CLEANING A. Ensure concrete reinforcing is clean and free from oil and deleterious matter. B. Remove all loose scale and rust and any other deleterious matter from surfaces of reinforcing in a manner acceptable to Consultant. i 1 1 1 1 7175-03200.wpd DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 CONCRETE Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. ■ 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all execution of all plain and reinforced concrete work called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: A. All plain and reinforced cast-in-place concrete shown on drawings. B. All concrete accessories and rough hardware. C. Finishing formed concrete surfaces. D. Finish concrete floor, steps, stair tread finish on steel stairs. E. Curing compound and sealer on finished floors. F. Concrete curbs and sidewalks. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Demolition and Removal Section 02050 B. Formwork Section 03100 C. Concrete Reinforcement Section 03200 ' D. Cementitious Underlayment Section 03555 E. Concrete for Block Lintels Section 04200 F. Miscellaneous Metals Section 05500 1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES ' A. The latest issues of the following Codes and Standards shall govern the work of this Section: .1 CSA Standard, CAN3-A23.1-94, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction. .2 CSA Standard, CAN3-A23.2-94, Methods of Test for Concrete. .3 Exterior concrete curbs and sidewalks shall be constructed in accordance with applicable Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications (O.P.S.S.) and Details (O.P.S.D.) and Municipality of Clarington Works Department Standards. 7175-03300.wpd DIVISION 3 r SECTION 03300 CONCRETE Page 2 1.05 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Inspection and testing of concrete will be performed in accordance with CSA Standard CAN3-A23.2-94. B. Submit proposed mix design to Consultant and inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of work. C. Three(minimum)concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 100 cu. yds. or less of concrete placed. D. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather concreting and be cured on job site under same condition as the concrete it represents. E. Test results will be issued to Contractor, Engineer and Owner. 1.06 TOLERANCES OLE NCES A. Allowable tolerances for finished horizontal surfaces: 1 For tops of walls and curbs: within 1/8" of a 10'-0 long straight edge at any location, and within 1/8" of indicated elevation. .2 For slabs and other horizontal surfaces with no applied finish: within 1/8" of a 10'-0 long straightedge at any location and within 1/8" of indicated elevation in any 20'-0" square area. 1.07 PROJECT RECORDS A. Maintain record of all concrete pour related to time, date, delivery slip serial number and location of pour and test cylinders related to the pours. 1.08 JOB CONDITIONS t A. Protect floor slabs, and concrete surfaces exposed to view or on which finishes are to be applied, from grease, oil, and other soil which will affect the appearance of the concrete, or impair the bond of finish material. 7175-03300.wpd DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 ' CONCRETE Page 3 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. To meet specified requirements of CAN3-A23.1-94. ' B. Cement: Type 10, Normal Portland Cement unless noted. C. Aggregates: 3/4". Aggregate for slab or grade shall have fineness modulus of fine aggregate between 2.7 and 3.1. D. Admixtures: .1 Water-Reducing Admixture: Conforming to CSA CAN 3-A266.1-M78. Pozzolith by The Master Builders Company Limited. W.R.D.A. by W. R. Grace Company of Canada Limited. Porzite by Sternson Limited. .2 Air-Entraining Agent: Conforming to CSA CAN 3-A266.1-M78. M.B.V.R. by The Master Builders Company Limited. Darex A.E.A. by W. R. Grace Company of Canada Limited. N.V.R. by Stemson Limited. Air Content 7% Maximum, 5% Minimum. E. Premoulded Expansion Joint filler: .1 Asphalt impregnated fibreboard conforming to ASTM D1751, sizes indicated on drawings, W.R. Meadows Sealtite Fibre Expansion Joint, Grace Asphalt ' Impregnated Fibreboard, Sternson Flexcell. F. Sealer: Master builders Masterseal, Sternson Florseal. G. Sawcut Filler: Sawcuts will be filled with Loadflex by Sternson or approved equal. H. Sealant: On top of all joint filler self levelling three component polysulphic polymer based with polyethylene bond breaker. Duoflex N.S. - by Sternson Ltd., light grey colour. I. Mechanical Anchors- 'Kwik' Bolts, 'Cinch' Anchors or Parabolts. ' 7175-03300.wpd DIVISION 3 ' SECTION 03300 CONCRETE page 4 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) ' J. Adhesive Anchors- Hilti HVA Adhesive Anchors. 2.02 CONCRETE MIXES A. Ready Mix,with 28 day compressive strength as indicated on Drawings, except where ' the cement content required for floor finishing as specified in CAN3-A23.1.14 exceeds the cement content for strength. B. Design the concrete mix in conformance to Alternative Number 1 AN - , C 3 A23.1 Clause 16, and Table 11, and Clause 15, Table 7, 8, and 9, Class N for interior concrete and Class F-2 for foundations, and Class C-2 for exterior concrete slabs , C. Design the concrete mix with the minimum slump necessary for good placing and finishing. In no case, provide concrete with a slump exceeding 3". ' D. Submit evidence, and material samples, if requested, acceptable to the Inspection and Testing Company, to verify that the proposed concrete mix design will produce specified quality of concrete. E. List all proposed admixtures in mix design submission. Do not change or add admixtures to approved design mixes without Consultants approval. F. Concrete Weight: Air dry unit weight: minimum 145 lbs./cu.ft. adjusted proportionally for maximum air content listed in CAN3-A23.1, clause 15, table 9. G. Water cement ratio shall not exceed 0.50. 2.03 GROUT A. Grout shall be V3 by W.R. Meadows, M-Bed by Stemson or approved equal. B. Sand-Cement Mix Grout: (for filling sawcuts; cracks and stair treads): 1 part cement to 2 parts fine concrete sand wetted with additional water solution to manufacturer's direction to provide suitable mix. Colour, texture and strength to match adjacent surface. 7175-03300.wpd DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 ' CONCRETE Page 5 ' PART 3: EXECUTION ' 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Before starting this work, examine work done by others which effects this work. ' B. Notify Consultant of any condition which would prejudice proper completion of this work. ' C. Commencement of work implies acceptance of existing conditions. D. Ensure that surfaces on which concrete is to be placed are free of frost and water before placing. E. Ensure that reinforcement, control joints, inserts and all other built-in work are in place and secured. ' 3.02 TREATMENT OF FORMED SURFACES A. Conform to the requirements of CAN/CSA-A23.1-94. B. Treat concrete surfaces which will be exposed or painted in the completed building to provide a "Smooth Rubbed Finish" uniform in colour and texture. C. Obtain Engineer's approval of finished exposed concrete and grind or otherwise correct to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 3.03 PLACING CONCRETE ' A. Place concrete in accordance with requirements CAN/CSA-A23.1-94. B. Notify Engineer and inspection and testing firm at least 24 hours prior to commencement of concrete placing operation. C. Do not place concrete in water or open frozen surfaces. D. Remove contaminants which lessen concrete bond to reinforcement before concrete is placed. E. Maintain accurate records of cast-in-place concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature and test samples taken. 7175-03300.wpd DIVISION 3 , SECTION 03300 CONCRETE Page 6 3.03 PLACING CONCRETE (Cont'd) ' F. Ensure that reinforcement, inserts, embedded items, formed expansion joints and the like, are not disturbed during concrete placement ' G. Provide construction joint as indicated on the drawings. Ensure dowels are adequately anchored and placed at right angles to the joint before placing concrete. H. Place floor slabs to depth indicated on the drawings with 25 MPA minimum concrete unless otherwise noted on drawings but consistent with minimum cement content ' specified for exposed floors in this specification. 1. Hot and Cold Weather Concreting: ' 1 Conform CAN3-A23.1-94 and ensure that procedures used are approved by Consultant. 3.04 FINISHING CONCRETE A. Floor finishing shall be carried out by a company having a proven record of satisfactory workmanship for a period of at least five years prior to this contract. B. Refer to the drawings and/or the finish schedule for floor finishes and coverings. C. Screed the top of rough floor slabs to an even level or sloping surface at the proper elevation to receive the finish specified on the drawings and in finish schedule. D. Provide a smooth steel trowel finish on all areas. 3.05 CURING AND SEALING A. Cure finished concrete surface with an approved curing and sealing compound which will leave the surface with a uniform appearance and with a minimum of discolouration after drying. Ensure that the curing compound will be compatible with the architectural finishes or adhesives for architectural finishes to be applied later. Apply the compound in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Protect surface which will be exposed to direct sunlight during the curing period, with a light coloured, laminated waterproof paper immediately after the curing and sealing compound has hardened sufficiently for the paper to be placed without damage to the , sealed surface. Lap the paper a minimum of four inches and seal the laps. Leave the paper in place for at least seven days. 7175-03300.wpd DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 CONCRETE Page 7 3.06 GROUTING OF STEEL MEMBERS A. Provide and place nonshrink grout for setting column base plates and beam bearing plates. Co-operate with those performing the work of other Sections who supply and set plates. Install grout in a manner that will ensure positive bearing on the full area of the steel plate on top of the supporting surface. 3.07 ,JOINT SEALANT A. Provide sealant on top of joint filler with a polyethylene bond breaker between joint filler and joint sealant applied in accordance with manufacturer's direction. Sealant shall be light grey colour. 3.08 PARGING A. Parge all exposed foundation walls from top of wall to 6" below grade, with 1/4" ' sand/cement parging. 3.09 DEFECTIVE WORK ' A. Replace or modify concrete that is out of place or does not conform to lines, detail or grade as directed by the Engineer. ' B. Replace or repair defectively placed or finished concrete as directed by the Engineer. ' C. Testing and Replacement of Deficient Concrete in Place: .1 The Contractor shall pay for additional testing and related expenses if the concrete has proven to be deficient. .2 The Contractor shall replace or strengthen deficient concrete work as directed by the Engineer, and pay for all testing and related expenses for replaced work until approved by the Engineer. ' 3.10 CLEANING UP A. Clear away from the building site excess and waste materials and debris resulting from ' Work of this Section. Leave the premises in a condition acceptable to the Engineer before completion of the work. ' 7175-03300.wpd DIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 MASONRY Pagel PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. ' 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all masonry called for or implied by the drawings and ' specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: A. Facebrick B. Concrete Unit Masonry 1 C. Concrete Lintel Blocks, Bond Beams and Other Special Units D. Mortar and Grout for Masonry E. Concrete Fill for all Bond Beams, Bearing Blocks and Pilasters ' F. Masonry Reinforcement G. Masonry Accessories H. Installation of Bearing Plates I. Loose Steel Lintel Installation J. Building in Miscellaneous Metal Items, Door Frames and Other Items K. Building-in items recessed in Masonry ' L. Control Joints M. Cleaning of Masonry N. Salvage, clean and reuse existing facebrick where shown on the drawings O. Cutting and patching of existing masonry 1 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Concrete Section 03300 B. Miscellaneous Metals Section 05500 C. Spray Applied Polyurethane Insulation Section 07218 D. Lightweight Steel Framing Section 07425 E. Hollow Metal Door Frames and Screens Section 08100 F. Wood Windows Section 08610 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Do masonry work in accordance with CAN3-S304-M84 except where specified ' otherwise. 7175-04200.wpd DIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 2 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS (Cont'd) B. Masonry connectors shall comply with CAN3-A370-M94. C. Masonry construction shall conform to CSA A371-94. D. Mortar and grout shall conform to CSA A179-94. E. Conform to Ontario Building Code, Ontario Regulation 413/90 and local building bylaws. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. The masonry subcontractor shall have a minimum of five (5) years continuous ' Canadian experience in work of the type and quality shown and specified. Proof of experience shall be submitted with the Tender and shall be subject to the approval of the Consultant. 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Materials shall be kept clean and dry. B. Deliver cement, lime and mortar ingredients with manufacturer's seal and labels intact. C. Cementitious material and aggregates shall be stored in accordance with the requirements of CAN A23.1-94. D. Exposed units which become stained or chipped, surface marked or scratched, and materials which are affected by inadequate protection shall be replaced, at no additional expense to the Owner. L 1.07 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Examine work of other trades for defects or discrepancies and report same in writing to Consultant. B. Installation of any part of this work shall constitute acceptance of such surfaces as being satisfactory. 7175-04200.wpd DIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 3 1.08 COLD WEATHER REQUIREMENTS ' A. When air temperature is below 5 degrees C: p 9 Maintain temperatures of freshly placed masonry at not less than 5 degrees C for 24 hours by means of covers, enclosures and supplementary heat. ' 1.08 COLD WEATHER REQUIREMENTS (Cont'd) B. When air temperature is below 5 degrees C: Cary out masonry work within enclosures and with auxiliary heat provided to maintain a minimum air temperature within enclosure of 5 degrees C. Method of auxiliary heating shall not be detrimental to the work. Store masonry units within enclosure before use. Minimum temperature of masonry units when laid shall be not less than 5 degrees C. C. When air temperature is below 5 degrees C take following precautions in preparing and using mortar: - Heat sand slowly and evenly. Do not use scorched sand, having a reddish cast, in mortar. - Heat water to 70 degrees C maximum, 20 degrees C minimum. - After combining heated ingredients maintain temperature of mortar between 5 degrees C and 50 degrees C until used. - Protect mortar from rain and snow. D. Maintain dry beds for masonry and use dry masonry units only. Do not wet masonry units in winter. E. Maintain at work area, thermometers to monitor and verify material and air temperatures 1.09 HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS A. Protect freshly laid masonry from drying too rapidly by means of waterproof, non-staining coverings. 1 7175-04200.wpd DIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 4 1.10 PROTECTION A. Keep masonry dry using secure waterproof, non-staining coverings that extend over walls and down sides sufficient to protect walls from snow, rain and dirt, until masonry work is completed and protected by flashings or other permanent construction. B. Protect masonry and other work from marking and other damage. Protect , completed work from mortar droppings. Use non-staining coverings. C. Provide temporary bracing of masonry work during and after erection until mortar has cured and permanent lateral support is in place. 1.11 MOCK-UP ,t A. Prior to proceeding with the work of this section, construct a 48" long x 36" high panel mock-up to establish for the Architects review and acceptance, the general construction and appearance of the installed masonry walls including mortar colours. Mock-up panel shall incorporate each type of brick specified and will include all coursing types shown on the drawings. B. Erect as many panels as are necessary to obtain Architects' acceptance without additional cost to the Owner. Remove rejected panels from the site. C. Upon the Architects' acceptance, complete all masonry work in strict accordance with the standards established by the Architect in the mock-up. D. The accepted mock-up panel shall remain intact until the work of this section has been accepted by the Architect and shall serve as the basis of standard for the work. 1.12 SAMPLES A. Submit the following samples in accordance with Division 1: 1. Six of each type of facebrick and concrete masonry units specified. 2. Two of each type of masonry accessory specified. 3. Two of each type of masonry reinforcement and tie specified. t 7175-04200.wpd I IDIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 5 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Use materials specified herein. B. Facebrick: Burned clay, to CSA A82.1-M87 (R.1992) and ASTM C216-91, SW grade, Ontario modular size as manufactured by Canada Brick. Facebrick shall be selected by the Architect from full range of manufacturer's products. C. Concrete Masonry Units: Concrete Block: Modular, conforming to CSA A165 Series-M1977, Concrete Masonry Units. 1. H/15/A/M concrete, masonry units, autoclaved. At all locations unless noted otherwise. 2. Special Units- Bullnose and comer blocks, base blocks, fillers, bond beam and lintel blocks, and the like as may be required. Provide Bullnose units for all exposed corners. 3. Exposed block shall all be made by one manufacturer and shall be uniform in colour, shade and texture. D. Pre-manufactured Masonry Control Joint: The use of control joints in lieu of the specified Built-up type of joint is at the option of the Contractor. Control joints as manufactured by the following are approved: Blok-Tite by Blok-Lok Limited Rapid Control Joint-Wide Flange- by Dur-O-Wall Limited Safety Control Joint by Structural Specialties of Canada Limited. E. Masonry Reinforcement: 1. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: 9 gauge wire, deformed, bright finish for interior wall locations, sized 1-5/8" to 2" narrower than wall or partition, as manufactured by the following are approved: Block-Lok or Block-Truss by Blok-Lok Limited I Dur-O-Wall Truss or Ladder by Dur-O-Wall Limited Extra Heavy Duty Truss or Ladder Type by Debro Products Limited 2. Brick ties: for steel stud/masonry walls will be supplied and installed by Section 07425. 7175-"200.wpd DIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 6 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) 3. Dovetail anchors shall be Bloc Lok DT masonry anchors, hot dipped galvanized 1/6'thick with %" return, size to suit. 4. Column ties shall be 1/e"x 1%" adjustable galvanized ties with column clips welded to columns. 5. Lintel Reinforcement: Reinforcing steel 60 k.s.i. yield grade, deformed billet steel bar, conforming to the requirements of GSA Standard G30.12-M. F. Control Joint Filler-As manufactured by the following are approved: Unifoam R1009- Flexible by Goodco Limited Rescor Type S by W. R. Meadows Canada Limited G. Mortar Materials - Conforming to CSA A179-M1976 1. Aggregate: CSA A82.56-M1976, except that the maximum allowable percentage passing No. 30 sieve shall be 80% and maximum passing No. 50 sieve shall be 50%. 2. Cement: normal Portland to CAN3-A5-M77 or Masonry Cement to CAN3-A8-M77. 3. Water shall be clean, potable and free of deleterious amounts of acid, alkalies, or organic materials. 4. Hydrated Lime: CSA A82.43-Latest edition. 5. Type'M' mortar shall be used for all masonry work below grade and Type 'S' mortar shall be used for all other masonry. 6. Proprietary Mortar Mixes (in lieu of 2 and 4 above) Domtar Construction Materials Limited, St. Lawrence Cement Company, Canada Cement, St. Mary Cement or Lake Ontario Portland Cement Company. Mortar mixes shall conform to mix requirements specified. 7. Mortar colour for concrete block masonry work shall be grey. 8. Mortar colour for facebrick shall be coloured, colour to be selected by the Architect. Pigment for mortar colour shall be Extra Strong Mortar Colour as manufactured by Northern Pigment. , 7175-04200.wpd DIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 7 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) H. Brick Vents: "Goodco Brick Vents"screened, as distributed by Goodco Ltd. Colour to match mortar colour. I. Grout: to CSA A179. J. Concrete Fill: 3,500 psi compressive strength concrete conforming to CAN3-A23-1 and consisting of a mixture of Type 10 Portland Cement, sand and course aggregate, maximum 3/8" in size. K. Cavity Wall Insulation: Sprayed rigid polyurethane insulation as specified in Section 07218. L. Cavity Sealer: Continuous strip to fit tightly between inner and outer wythes of wall. Closed Cell Neoprene Ethofoam Polystyrene Dow Chemical of Canada Ltd. M. Air/Vapour Barrier/Flexible Membrane: Perm-A-Barrier(40 mil) manufactured by W.R. Grace and Co., or Blueskin SA by Bakor Inc., complete with primer and mastic (for use on block walls where indicated). N. Air/Vapour Barrier/Insulation Adhesive: Trowel consistency, solvent type, synthetic rubber based insulation adhesive, Air Bloc 21 as manufactured by Bakor Inc. 2.02 MIXES A. Mixing: Prepare and mix mortar materials under strict supervision, and in small batches only for immediate use. Mix proprietary mortars in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions to produce the specified mortar types in accordance with CSA AI79-M1976. Do not use retempered mortars. B. For bedding steel bearing plates, lintels, for laying bearing courses under concentrated loads: Use Type 'M' cement mortar, having a compressive strength of 17 MPA (minimum) composed of: 1 part grey Portland cement 1/4 part hydrated lime - or 1 part Proprietary Masonry cement or approved equal plasticizer. 3 parts aggregate. 7175-04200.wpd t DIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 8 2.03 DAMP COURSE AND FLASHINGS A. Peel and stick modified SIBS bitumen membrane fully compatible with spray applied polyurethane insulation: Vedagard Non-slip by Bakor Inc. Bituthene 5000 by W.R. Grace & Co. Mel-Dek by W.R. Meadows 2.04 FABRICATION , A. Lintels in non-load bearing walls shall be constructed with special bond or lintel block units unless shown otherwise on plans. Lintels shall bear 6" minimum and bearing shall be isolated with two layers of heavy asphalt coated paper. B. Reinforcing steel in lintels shall be 2 x 10 M bars or as noted on drawings. C. Concrete fill for lintels shall be 25 MPA or as noted on the drawings. PART 3: EXECUTION i 3.01 GENERAL A. General lines and levels are provided under Division 1. Maintain dimensions, lines and levels. B. A competent masonry foreman shall supervise and direct the work and only skilled masons shall execute the work of this Section. The workmanship in construction of exposed masonry walls shall be of highest calibre and first class in all respects. C. Chipped, cracked or stained, and unsatisfactory material or workmanship of all masonry work shall be replaced at no additional expense to the Owner. D. Co-ordinate work of this Section with others such as, field welding of anchors to steel work, insulation application, and the like. Prepare all items to built-in as the work proceeds, either supplied and installed by other trades or installed under this Section. E. Walls shall be constructed as true planes and when tested with a 10 ft. straight edge placed anywhere on the wall in any direction shall be true within 1/8". 7175-04200.v,pd l DIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 9 3.01 GENERAL (Cont'd) F. Variation in the Sizes of Wall Openings: A 1/4 inch maximum variation is allowed from the actual designated size of wall openings. G. Horizontal and vertical joints in alternating courses in line, and all horizontal courses carried at a uniform height around the room. H. Buttering comers of units, throwing mortar droppings into joints, deep or excessive furrowing of bed joints, will not be permitted. Do not shift or tap units after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustment must be made after mortar has started to set, remove mortar and replace with fresh supply. Bed and vertical joints shall be Ievenly and solidly filled with mortar. I. All mortar shall be used and placed in final position within 2-1/2 hours of mixing. Mortar not used within this time limit shall be discarded. J. Lay all joints 3/8 1 thick (uniform) unless otherwise specified or otherwise indicated on drawings or instructed by the Consultant. All joints shall be full of mortar except where specifically designated to be left open. K. All joints shall be slightly concave. Use sufficient force to press mortar tight against masonry units on both sides of joints. Remove excess material or burrs left after jointing by means of a trowel or rubbing with burlap bag. L. Cut exposed masonry with power driven abrasive cutting disc or diamond cutting wheel for flush mounted electrical outlets, grilles, pipes, conduits, leaving 1/8" maximum clearance. M. Notwithstanding current trade practices in this regard fill all vertical and bed joints, including plain end faces, through the entire wall thickness solidly with mortar. iN. In masonry walls where shown on drawings provide through wall control joints full height of wall. Joint shall be 3/8"wide and formed by building up one side of the control joint and applying a double layer of tarred paper or asphalt emulsion to prevent mortar bonding. The other side of joint shall be built up to the same height and the resulting key cavity filled solid with mortar as each course is laid. Rake out vertical joint between block ends to a depth of 3/4" full height both sides and leave ready for caulking sealant. Pre-manufactured control joints as specified herein may be used in lieu of built-up type of joint. 7175-04200.wpd DIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 10 3.02 BLOCKWORK A. Provide special shapes and sizes as required such a halves,jambs, lintels, solids, corners, bullnoses and double bullnoses, semi-solids, ashlar, etc. Use bullnose and double bullnose block at all external comers where block is to be left exposed. B. Lay block with webs to align plumb over each other with thick ends of webs up. The top course of all partitions which do not pass through a ceiling or up to the underside of a roof deck shall have the open cells filled solid. C. Do not wet concrete masonry before or during laying in wall. D. Bond intersecting block walls in alternate courses. E. Do not break bond of exposed walls where partitions intersect and if bond would show through on exposed face of walls. Bond these partitions to walls they intersect with prefabricated intersection masonry reinforcement in each course. 3.03 PARTITIONS A. Terminate non load bearing walls within 3/4" of structure above. B. Where walls are pierced by structural members, ducts, pipes, fill voids with mortar to within 3/4" of such members. C. Fill spaces between non-load bearing walls and structure, ducts and pipes with compressed glass fibre or mineral wool insulation completely from one side of wall to other. 3.04 BRICK VENEER A. Build masonry plumb, level and true to line, with vertical joints in alignment. B. Layout coursing and bond to achieve correct coursing heights, and continuity of bond above and below openings with minimum of cutting. C. Mixing and blending: Mix units within each pallet and with other pallets to ensure uniform blend of colour and texture. D. Where necessary to temporarily stop horizontal runs of masonry and in building corners: 1. Step-back masonry diagonally to lowest course previously laid. 2. Do not"tooth" new masonry. 3. Fill in adjacent courses before heights of stepped masonry reach 48". 7175-04200.wpd 1 DIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 11 3.04 BRICK VENEER (Cont'd) E. Except in cold weather,wet Gay brick having an initial rate of absorption exceeding 1 g/min/100 mmZ,wet to uniform degree of saturation, 3 to 24 hours before laying, and do not lay until surface dry. F. Wet tops of walls built of bricks qualifying for wetting, when recommencing work on such walls. G. Coursing Height: 11"for four(4) bricks and four(4)joints as indicated. H. Jointing: Allow joints to set just enough to remove excess water, then tool with round jointer to provide smooth, compressed, uniformly concave joints where concave joints are indicated. I. Tie masonry veneer to backing in accordance with CAN3-S304-M78. J. Veneer in cavity wall construction shall be well tied to block back-up together with masonry reinforcing as specified herein. K. The cavity shall be kept free of mortar droppings at all times, by means of boards set in between and raised as the face block work progresses. 1 L. Place continuous damp course and flashing membrane at the bottom of all cavities, including at the bottom of walls and over all openings. Flashing shall extend from exterior face of block, turned up block face and built into the first horizontal block joint unless otherwise indicted. Lap all joints 6" and seal with adhesive. M. Install weep hole vents in vertical joints immediately over flashings at base of walls and at horizontal shelf angles, in exterior wythes of cavity wall and masonry veneer wall construction at horizontal spacing not exceeding 2'-8" o.c. Install top of wall vents at horizontal spacing not exceeding 2'-8" in top course of walls. N. Install cavity wall reinforcing in first and second bed joints and at 16" c/c. O. Facebrick shall be laid up in running bond with vertical joints in successive courses centring on mid point of unit below. Provide soldier coursing, lentil coursing, quoins and inlay patterns where shown on the plan. P. Mitre facebrick at all comers other than 900. Mitre soldier course at all corners. Rake joints at these locations. Q. The cavity shall be kept free of mortar droppings at all times, by means of boards set in between and raised as the face brickwork progresses. 7175-04200.wpd DIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 12 3.04 BRICK VENEER (Cont'd) R. Place continuous damp course and flashing membrane at the bottom of all cavities, including at bottom of walls and over all openings. Lap joints 6" and seal with adhesive. S. Leave vertical joints open at not over 24" centres at the top of all walls, at the bottom of cavities, above and below openings, etc.,for ventilation and weeping and install cavity weep hole vents in each open vertical joint. T. Provide continuous control joints as indicated on the drawings. U. Install loose steel lintels. Centre over opening width. V. Install brick sills at locations shown on the drawings. Set sills and anchor to facebrick with ties set in solid mortar, fill in brick cores. 3.05 REINFORCEMENT A. Unless otherwise noted on plans, all masonry walls shall be reinforced with joint reinforcement. Reinforcement shall be installed in the first and second bed joints, 8" apart immediately above lintels and below sill at openings, and in bed joints at 16" vertical intervals elsewhere. Reinforcement in the second bed joint above or below openings shall extend two feet beyond the jambs. All other reinforcement shall be continuous except that it shall not pass through vertical masonry control joints. Side rods shall be lapped at least 6" at splices. Use prefabricated comer and tee sections for continuous reinforcement at corners and intersecting walls. 3.06 ILT-IN A. Build in items provided by other Sections, including bearing plates, door frames, j anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts and loose steel lintels. Build in items to present a neat, rigid, true and plumb installation. Leave wall openings required for ducts, grilles, pipes and other items. B. Fill voids between masonry and metal frames with masonry mortar or insulation, as shown or as required to provide a neat finished appearance. C. Set wall plates on masonry in non-shrink grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 71 7s-aasoo.wpa DIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 13 3.06 BUILT-INS (Cont'd) D. Do all cutting, fitting, drilling, patching and making good for other trades in masonry work. E. Consultant's approval shall be obtained before cutting. 3.07 REPOINTING OR TUCK-POINTING A. Repoint defective joints as follows: (a) Cut back joints 1/2", taking care not to damage units. Remove dust and j loose materials by brushing or by water jet. If water jet is used, allow excess water to drain before repointing. (b) Repoint with original mix. (c) Pack mortar tightly in thin layers, and tool to required joint finish. 3.08 CLEANING A. Obtain and follow manufacturer's written instructions for Cleaning. Test sample area, 10'-0" x 10'-0", to judge effectiveness of cleaning procedures and secure Consultant's approval. B. Keep wall clean and free of mortar stains during laying. Allow mortar droppings which adhere to wall to dry out but not set. Then rub with small piece of masonry followed by brushing to remove all traces. On completion of masonry, after mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean masonry thoroughly. C. Protect windows, trim and metal from cleaning agents. D. Remove mortar with wood paddles and scrapers before wetting. Saturate masonry with clean water and flush off loose mortar and dirt. Clean block work using water, scrubbing brushes and wood paddles only. E. Clean brick masonry as follows: 1. Remove large particles with wood paddles without damaging surface. Saturate masonry with clean water and flush off loose mortar and dirt. 7175-04200.wpd DIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 14 3.08 CLEANING (Cont'd) 2. Scrub with solution of 25 ml trisodium phosphate and 25 ml household detergent dissolved in 1 L of clean water using stiff fibre brushes, then clean off immediately with dean water using hose. Alternatively, use proprietary compound recommended by brick masonry manufacturer in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 3. Repeat cleaning process as often as necessary to remove mortar and other stains. 4. Use acid solution treatment for difficult to clean masonry as described in Technical Note No. 20 published by Brick Institute of America, dated Sept./Oct. 1977. 5. Test add cleaning method on designated area of wall, followed by waiting period of at least one week, before proceeding with cleaning. i 1 t 7175-04200.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all structural steel called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: A. Steel columns, base plates, levelling plates, and anchor bolts. B. Beams, girts, channels and bearing plates. C. Lintels. D. Roof framing, framing for openings. E. Bracing. F. Reinforcing existing structural steel. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Concrete Section 03300 B. Installation Of Bearing Plates Section 04200 C. Steel Joists Section 05210 D. Steel Roof Deck Section 05310 E. Miscellaneous Metals Section 05500 F. Lightweight Steel Framing Section 07425 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. Undertake welding and/or welding inspection by welders fully approved to one or more of the following codes and reference standards where applicable: CSA W47.1-1983 Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures CSA W59-1989 Welded Steel Construction (Metal-Arc Welding) CSA W178.1-96 Certification of Welding Inspection Organizations CSA W178.2-96 Certification of Welding Inspectors B. Fabricate structural steel only by a Fabrication Member of the Canadian Institute of Steel Construction. 7175-05120.wpd 1 l DIVISION 5 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 2 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work of this Section in conformance with the specified requirements of: 1. CAN/CSAOG264-M92, Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles 2. CAN/CSA-S16.1-94, Limit States Design of Steel Structures 3. CAN/CSA-S136-94, Cold Formed Steel Structural Members 4. SSPC-SP 6-91, Structural Steel Painting Council, Commercial Blast Cleaning 5. ASTM A 653/A653M-95, Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized), or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process 6. ASTM A 570/A570M-95, Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot- Rolled, Structural Quality 7. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, Section 10, Architectural Exposed Structural Steel, latest edition B. Connections: , 1. Connections designed by Consultant: Submission of shop drawings for connections which have been detailed on Drawings by Consultant shall represent acceptance by Contractor that connection can be executed successfully. 2. Other connections: (a) Design of other connections which cannot be selected from standard designs tabulated in CISC Handbook of Steel Construction shall be by a Professional Engineer, licensed in the Province of Ontario, experienced in structural steel connection design. (b) Consultant will review connection arrangement to verify general conformance with overall design concept of structure. (c) Connection design engineer shall be insured against professional liability in accordance with section 74 subsection (1) of Regulation 941 of the Ontario Professional Engineers Act. The alternative of compliance with subsection (2) is not acceptable. C. Design: 1. Connections: (a) Provide bolted or welded connections, unless shown otherwise on Drawings. 7175-05120.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 3 1 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE (Cont'd) (b) Use high strength bolts, except that A307 bolts may be used for connections of roof purlins, bridging, girts and trimmer beams not connecting to columns, unless otherwise noted on Drawings. (c) Use slip resistant (friction-type) connections for bolted joints designed to resist reversible forces, except that bolt capacity need not be so limited under seismic force. (d) Provide tension adjustment hardware at rod type bracing and at flat bar type bracing. (e) Do not permit connections to encroach on clearance lines required for installation of Work of other Sections. 1 2. Beam Connections: (a) Provide connections adequate to resist reaction of beam, when beam is loaded to maximum flexural capacity under uniformly distributed load, unless reaction or connection detail is shown on Drawings. For composite beam construction, use flexural capacity of composite section based on 100 percent shear connection of beam to slab. (b) Provide flexible beam connections for unrestrained members in accordance with CSA S16.1, unless shown otherwise on Drawings. (c) Select connections, wherever possible, from standard designs tabulated in current edition of CISC Handbook of Steel Construction, except that length of beam web angles shall not be less than half the depth of beam, and single angles shall not be used for beams deeper than 24". (d) Provide direct connections to flanges of spandrel beams (exterior perimeter beams) to restrain twisting. (e) Do not use fish plate, shear plate or tab connection. 1 D. Random Splicing: Obtain in writing from Consultant, prior to commencement of shop drawings, special requirements that will be imposed as a necessary condition of acceptance of members with randomly located butt welded splices. 1.06 TOLERANCES tA. In addition to tolerances specified in CAN 3-S16.1, erect shelf angles and sash angles attached to steel frame within a tolerance of 1/8" plus or minus, with abutting ends of members at the same level. 7175-05120.wpd j DIVISION 5 ' SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 4 1.07 INSPECTION & TESTING A. Inspection and testing of materials and shop fabrication of Work of this Section, and field quality control, will be performed by an Inspection and Testing Company appointed by the Owner. B. The Inspection and Testing Company shall meet qualification requirements of CSA W178.1, and shall be certified by the Canadian Welding Bureau in Category 1 Buildings. C. Welding Inspectors and supervisors shall be certified by Canadian Welding Bureau to CSA W178.2, to minimum level 2 certification. D. Provide free access for inspectors to all places work is being performed, whether on site or off. E. Mill inspection shall ensure that materials conform to specified requirements. Mill test reports, properly correlated to the materials, will be accepted in lieu of physical tests. F. Shop inspection shall ensure that structural steel is fabricated in accordance with , the shop drawings, and the specified fabrication and welding procedures. G. The cost of inspection and testing of splices introduced by the fabricator and not required on the Contract Documents will be paid by the Contractor. H. Inspection and Testing Company when appointed shall carry out shop inspection to verify: 1. Structural materials and paint conform to Specifications. Mill test reports, properly correlated to the materials, will be accepted in lieu of physical tests of structural materials. 2. Fabrication and welding conforms to Specifications and dimensioned shop drawings. 3. Shop painting, and cleaning and preparation for same, conform to specified requirements. 4. Surfaces inaccessible for cleaning and painting after assembly are treated , before assembly. 5. For surfaces painted with zinc rich paint or zinc primer, specified surface preparation is followed and specified paint thickness is applied. 6. Non-destructive Testing of Welded Connections: 7175-05120.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 5 1.07 INSPECTION &TESTING (Cont'd) Carry out non-destructive testing of welded connections chosen at random as follows: - 10% of moment connections involving use of fillet welds, by magnetic particle inspections. - all moment connections and all connections in direct tension involving use of sf Full Penetration Groove welds, by ultrasonic testing. j - Where moments are transferred by either fillet welds or groove welds into end plates in "T' joint configurations, examine base metals for lamellar tearing or cracking, by ultrasonic testing. I 1.08 SUBMITTALS A. Submit proof of connection design engineers professional liability insurance when requested by the Consultant. B. Submit shop and erection drawings in accordance with General Conditions. Submit typical details of connections and any special connections for review before preparation of shop drawings. Assume responsibility for the accuracy of Work. Review of submitted shop drawings is to ensure only that the Contract Documents are being correctly interpreted. C. Professional Engineer responsible for connection design shall sign and seal each shop drawing. D. Show on shop drawings the size, spacing, and the location of structural steel members, connections, attachments, reinforcing, anchorage and all necessary plans, elevations and details. E. Show splice locations and details. F. Welded connections shall be designated by welding symbols in compliance with American Welding Society, AWS 2.068, Welding Symbols, and indicate clearly net weld lengths. G. Submit design calculations if requested by the Consultant. H. Submit to the Engineer for review, diagrams showing proposed methods of erection. I. Field Work Drawings shall be submitted as shop drawings. 7175-05120.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 6 1.08 SUBMITTALS (Cont'd) J. Submit paint manufacturers claim that performance of specified paint will meet the requirements of the CISC/CPMA standard specified. K. Notify Consultant in writing of any deviations in shop drawings from the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.09 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver products that are only supplied under work of this Section to those who are , responsible for their installation, to the place they direct and to meet construction schedule. B. Handle and store structural steel in such a manner that no damage, including corrosion, is caused to the stored or erected work, or to other property. C. Protect architecturally exposed steel during fabrication, handling storage and erection to prevent marring of surfaces exposed to view, by marking, bending, coarse grinding or denting. 1.10 UNIT PRICES A. Unit prices requested as a part of the Tender shall include work erected in place and preparation and submittal of necessary shop drawings. B. Unit prices shall serve as a basis for computing the value of additional or deleted Work, and alterations including cutting and reinforcing of holes, performed as Changes to the Work. C. Base estimate of steel tonnage on the CISC standard method of computing j weights. Use net dimensions of shapes and plates without allowance for weight variations due to mill tolerances. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Rolled shapes, hollow structural sections, plates and rods: new steel, in compliance with CSA and/or ASTM Standards indicated on Structural Drawings. 7175-05120.wpd i DIVISION 5 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 7 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) B. High Strength Bolts: to meet specified requirements of ASTM A325M-83. Specification for High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints, including Suitable Nuts and Plain Hardened Washers. Machine Bolts: to meet specified requirements of ASTM A307, Specification for Carbon Steel, Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners. Anchor Bolts: to meet specified requirements of ASTM A307, Specification for Carbon Steel, Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners. C. Welding Electrodes-to meet the requirements set forth in the applicable standard of the CSA W48 Series on welding electrodes. (Any process which produces i deposited weld metal meeting the requirements of the applicable W48 Series Standard for any grade of arc welding electrodes shall be accepted as equivalent to the use of such electrodes.) iD. Shop Coat Paint- to meetspecified requirements of CISC/CPMA Standard 2.75 , A Quick-drying Primer for use on Structural Steel. Zinc Rich Paint-to meet specified requirements of CGSB Specification 1-GP-181a, coating, Zinc Rich, Organic, Ready Mix: Galvafroid by W.R. Meadows Glid Zinc by Glidden Company (Canada) Ltd. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. Fabricate work of this Section in compliance with CAN 3-S16.1, and as specified following. B. Connections- Make bolted or welded connections. Use high strength bolts, except that machine bolts may be used for connections of roof purlins, bridging, secondary bracing, girts and trimmer beams not connecting to columns, unless otherwise noted on Drawings. Use friction type high strength bolts for the connections of bracing members (Diagonal Kickers) resisting the effects of applied lateral loads. Provide tension adjustment at flat bar and rod type lateral bracing. i 7175-05120.wpd I DIVISION 5 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 8 3.01 FABRICATION (Cont'd) Do not permit connections to encroach on the clearance lines required for the installation of work of this Section. C. Beam Connections: Provide beam connections adequate to resist the reactions produced by the framing or load conditions. Provide beam to column connections that apply vertical reaction with negligible eccentricity at the connecting face of the column, such as single or double beam web connections, end plate connections or unstiffened seats, unless otherwise shown on Drawings. Submit for review, in advance of the preparation of shop drawings, connections which do not meet these requirements. Provide connections complying with the requirements of the CISC Handbook of , Steel Construction, except that the length of beam web angles shall not be less than half the depth of the beam and single angles shall not be used for beams deeper than 24". Provide direct connections to flanges of spandrel beams to restrain twisting. Do not use fish plate or shear plate connections. D. Holes in Structural Members: Punch holes 7/16"to 1-1/16"in diameter as required for attaching the work of other Sections to structural steel members. Locate holes so that no appreciable reduction of the strength of members is caused. , Provide holes for pipes and ducts, and reinforce openings as indicated on drawings. Cutting of holes in structural members in the field will not be permitted except with written approval of the Engineer. Provide effective drainage holes to prevent the accumulation of water in tubular members. E. Built-up Compression Members- General Requirements Comply with the requirements of Clause 19 of CAN 3-S16.1, for all built up compression members of fabricated joists and trusses. 7175-05120.wpd i DIVISION 5 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 9 3.01 FABRICATION (Cont'd) F. Column Bearing Plates ' Mill column bearing plates under column bearing unless plate is sufficiently flat to give adequate contact bearing between column and plate. G. Fabricated Joist Bearing Shoes Design fabricated joist bearing shoes to transfer reaction to the supporting member in such a manner that the supporting member will not be overstressed by the effect of any eccentricity of the centre-line of the joist bearing and the centre-line of the supporting reaction. The bearing detail of the joist shall be proportioned to include the effect of the eccentricity between the centre of bearing and the intersection of the axes of the chord or end diagonal members resulting from any bearing eccentricity. Submit shoe details to Engineer for approval. 1 H. Masonry Anchors Provide masonry strap anchors welded to structural steel. Provide for attachment of adjustable flexible anchors that are supplied by mason. Provide wall anchors for beams bearing on masonry or concrete. I. Masonry Lintels Provide 6" bearing for angle lintels, and bolt or weld together upstanding legs at 24" centres. J. Structural Steel Painting Paint steel in the shop under cover: keep painted members under cover until the paint has dried. Clean and prepare surfaces, as appropriate for paint specified, in accordance with CISC/CPMA Standard 2-75 or clean steel in compliance with SSPC-SP6, Steel Structures Painting Council Standard for Commercial Blast Cleaning, where zinc rich paint is shop applied. Where paint is applied adjacent to welded joints, remove it to bare metal for a distance of at least 2" beyond sides of joints. Do not paint surfaces and edges to be field welded, contact surfaces of friction type connections assembled by high strength bolts, surfaces encased in or in contact with concrete, (including top flanges of beams supporting cast-in-place slabs), surfaces to be spray fireproofed. 7175-05120.wpd DIVISION 5 , SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 10 I 3.01 FABRICATION (Cont'd) Give surfaces of all beams, columns, bracing, checkered plate, etc. which will be ' exposed on the exterior of the building and any other areas noted on the structural drawings, one coat of zinc rich paint applied to a minimum dry film thickness averaging 4 mils but not less than 3 mils. Give all other steel surfaces not noted above which are to receive a top coating, j one shop coat of prime paint. 3.02 EXAMINATION j A. Verify, before delivery of structural steel, that work of other Sections on which work of this Section is dependent is correctly installed and located. 3.03 PREPARATION t A. Supply anchor bolts, base and bearing plates and other members to be built in under work of other Sections as the work progresses. Co-operate with installers ' of this work and provide instructions for setting items to be built-in. B. Where new work connects to existing construction, determine field conditions and dimensions accurately in the field before preparing shop drawings and making any necessary adjustments. Report any adjustments required to Engineer. 3.04 ERECTION A. Comply with CAN 3-S16.1 and the By-Laws of the Municipality in erection of work t of this Section. B. Make adequate provision for horizontal and vertical erection loads and for sufficient temporary bracing to keep structural frame plumb and in true alignment until the completion of erection, and the installation of masonry, concrete work, and floor and roof decks which provide the necessary permanent bracing. C. Adequately shore existing structure prior to reinforcing of existing columns as required. D. Provide temporary steel members as may be required for erection purposes and remove them when no longer required. E. Erect all steel in the sequence specified and approved by the Engineer. 7175-05120.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 11 ' 3.04 ERECTION (Cont'd) F. Installation of Bearing and Column Base Plates- Install bearing plates and standard government wall anchors for beams bearing on masonry or concrete. Set loose beam bearing plates and column base plates, at proper elevation, true and level, with steel shims, ready for grouting as specified under work of other Sections. 3.05 COATING TOUCH-UP A. Clean welds with wire brushes and wash down with clean water to ensure no residue from electrodes is present. B. After erection, give one coat of prime coat or zinc rich paint as applicable and specified for shop coat to field bolts, field connections, burnt areas, and abrasions ' or damage to shop coats. C. Touch up all areas with an adequate paint film thickness. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection and Testing Company, when appointed as specified in Source Quality Control elsewhere in this Section, shall perform: ' 1. Inspection of erection and fit-up, including placing, plumbing, levelling and temporary bracing and conformance with specified tolerances. 2. Inspection of bolted connections, including verification that A307 A325/A325M snug tight only bolts, and A324/A325M pretensioned bolts have been used appropriately, and that threads are excluded from shear plane where required. 3. Inspection of welded joints, including slag removal. 4. General inspection of field cutting and alterations; report immediately to Consultant, alterations or cutting not shown on reviewed shop drawings. 5. General inspection of shop coating touch-up. 6. Inspection of zinc primer and zinc-rich paint, including surface preparation and coating thickness. ' 7175-05120.wpd DIVISION 5 r SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 12 3.07 DEFECTIVE WORK A. Variations in excess of specified tolerances, and failure of materials or workmanship to meet requirements of this specification, and which cannot be repaired by approved methods, will be considered defective Work performed by this Section. B. Replace defective Work, as directed by Consultant. C. Contractor shall pay for additional inspection and testing, redesign, corrective measures, and related expenses if Work has proven to be deficient. 7175-05120.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS Page 1 ' PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENT 1 A. Conform to the requirements of the General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all steel joist work called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: A. Steel joists and bearing plates. B. All bridging and ties to structural steel and masonry walls including built-in wall brackets. I1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Concrete Reinforcement Section 03200 B. Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 03300 C. Unit Masonry Section 04200 D. Structural Steel Section 05120 E. Steel Decking Section 05310 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Undertake welding only by welders fully approved to one or more of the following codes and reference standards as appropriate: CSA W47.1 Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures. I CSA W59-M1989 Welded Steel Construction (Metal-Arc Welding). CSA W178.1 Certification of Welding Inspection Organizations. CSA W178.2 Certification of Welding Inspectors 2. Design of joists shall be by a Professional Engineer, licensed in the Province of Ontario. I7175-05210.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS Page 2 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE (Cont'd) 3. Joist design engineer shall be insured against professional 9 p nal liability in accordance with Section 74, subsection (1) of Regulation 941 of the Ontario Professional Engineers Act. The alternative of compliance with , subsection (2) is not acceptable. B. Reference Standards 1. Perform work of this Section in conformance with the specified requirements to the following standards, including all revisions thereto: The National Building Code of Canada CSA/CAN3 S16.1 Steel Structures for Buildings-(Limit States Design). CAN/CSA-S136 Cold Formed Structural Steel Members C. Design Criteria 1. Design steel joists to carry loads indicated on structural drawings. 2. Design for deflections not exceeding limits given in Appendix I of CSA , Standard CAN/CSA-S16.1, unless otherwise indicated on Drawing. In Appendix I, interpret finishes susceptible to cracking to mean brittle finishes such as but not restricted to drywall, plaster, masonry and ceramic the 3. Design roof joists and fastenings to resist the following minimum gross unfactored uplifts, where widths of"s", "c"and Y'areas are defined in the Supplement to the National Building Code of Canada, Commentary B, Figure B-9. Edge strips "s" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.30 kPa [27 psf] , Comer areas "c" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.30 kPa [27 psf] Other roof areas "r" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.06 kPa [22 psf] Dead load of roof deck construction may be deducted from these uplifts, after applying relevant load factors for wind load and dead load resisting uplift. 4. Analyse joists composed wholly or in part of cold formed structural members as rigidly connected linear elastic frame works, including all joint eccentricities. Design cold formed members for combined axial loads and bending moments predicted by analysis. Design hot rolled members for combined axial load and bending moment if eccentricity at one or both ends exceeds limits of reference standards above. 7175-05210.wpd i ' DIVISION 5 SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS Page 3 ' 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE (Cont'd) C. Design Criteria (Cont'd) 5. Tie Joists: Where be joists are used, design be joist, columns and connections to resist the member forces predicted by a linear elastic analysis. 6. Design special joist components to allow the passage of mechanical and electrical services through webs of joists, where so indicated on the structural drawings. 7. Warrant that design of joists has been made by a qualified designer to the requirements of this Specification by submitting a written guarantee signed by a professional engineer registered in the Province of Ontario and experienced in the structural design of steel joists, stating that the design complied with this Specification. D. Source Quality Control 1. Inspection and testing of materials and shop fabrication of work of this Section, and field quality control specified elsewhere in this Section, will be performed by an Inspection and Testing.Company appointed by the Owner. 2. The Inspection and Testing Company, and welding inspectors and supervisors shall meet qualification requirements of CSA W178, and shall ' be certified by the Canadian Welding Bureau in Category (1), Buildings. 3. Provide free access for inspectors to all places work is being performed. 4. Shop Inspection Inspection shall ensure that materials conform to specified requirements. Mill test reports, properly correlated to the materials, will be accepted in lieu of physical tests. Inspection shall ensure that fit-up, fabrication, and shop painting conform to specified requirements and dimensioned shop drawings. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Professional Liability Insurance 1. Submit proof of design engineers professional liability insurance coverage Ispecified in paragraph 1.04, A. 3. I7175-05210.wpd DIVISION 5 , SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS Page 4 1.05 SUBMITTALS (Cont'd) B. Shop Drawings , 1. Submit steel joist shop drawings in accordance with the General Conditions , of the Contract and submit joist design drawings as defined in reference standards. 2. Indicate, in addition, dimensioned intersections of members, critical bending moments due to eccentricities, joist spacing, framing for openings, and slopes. 3. Detail welded connections using standard symbols for welding joints as published in the current CISC Handbook of Steel Construction. 4. Indicate on erection drawings, for each type of joist and bearing condition, the centre of bearing assumed in design and the maximum allowable distance from this point to the intersection of the axes of the chord and the end diagonal. 5. Prior to submission to the Engineer, the Contractor shall review all shop ' drawings. By this review, the Contractor represents that he has determined and verified all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalogue number and similar data or will do so and that he has checked i and co-ordinated each shop drawing with the requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents. The Contractor's review of each shop drawing shall be indicated by stamp, date and signature of a responsible person. , 6. At time of submission, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of any deviations in the shop drawings from the requirements of the Contract Documents. 7. The Engineer will review and return shop drawings in accordance with any , schedule agreed upon, or otherwise with reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay. The engineer's review will be for conformity to the design concept and for general arrangement only and such review shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings or of responsibility for meeting all requirements of the Contract Documents unless a deviation on the shop drawings has been approved in writing by the Engineer. , 8. The Contractor shall make any changes in shop drawings which the Engineer may require consistent with the Contract Documents and resubmit unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. When resubmitting the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of any revisions other than those requested by the Engineer. 7175-05210.wpd ( DIVISION 5 SECTION 05210 1 STEEL JOISTS Page 5 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver products that are supplied only under work of this Section to those who are responsible for their installation, to the place they direct and to meet construction ' schedule. B. Handle and store joists in such a manner that no damage, including corrosion, is caused to the stored or erected work, or to other property. 1 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 UNIT PRICES ' A. Unit prices requested as a part of the Tender shall include work erected in place, and preparation and submittal of necessary shop drawings. ' B. Unit prices shall serve as a basis for computing the value of additional or deleted work, performed as changes to the work in accordance with the General ' Conditions. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Provide new material in accordance with the Referenced Standards. ' B. Steel Joists Formed of hot rolled or cold formed shapes, hollow structural sections, plates and rods meeting requirements of specified reference standards. C. Paint 1. Shop Coat Paint, for joists that will not receive finish coat: to CISC/CPMA Standard 1-73a, A Quick-Drying One-Coat Paint for Use on Structural Steel. 2. Prime Paint, for joists to receive finish coat: to CISC/CPMA Standard 2-75, A Quick-Drying Primer for Use on Structural Steel. ' 3. Verify that prime paint is compatible with finish coat of paint. 4. Zinc-Rich Paint- Organic, Ready Mixed: Galvafroid, by W.R. Meadows Ltd. Glid-Zinc 100, by Glidden Company (Canada) Ltd. 7175-05210.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS Page 6 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate joists with their attachments and accessories in accordance with the , reference standards. B. Prepare joists for attachment of other work as indicated on drawings and required , for construction. C. Fabricate bridging not less than 1/8" in thickness. D. Extend bottom chords of joists where required to support ceiling or walls as shown , on drawings. E. Fabricate joists and shoes to accommodate roof slopes shown on drawings. ' F. Fabricate web systems to allow clearances for transverse mechanical and electrical services to pass through where so indicated on structural drawings. G. Provide shoe depths to suit elevations of bearings in each location. H. Fabricate bearing plates and supply plates and anchors to installer. At masonry, provide sufficient bearing area to ensure that bearing pressure does not exceed 175 psi. I. Fabricate joists of uniform appearance for erection in areas where they are exposed to view. J. Cleaning and Painting , 1. Remove rust, loose mill scale, dirt and all contaminants prior to painting. ' 2. Prior to painting, clean welds with wire brushes and wash down with clean water to ensure no residue from electrodes is present. 3. Give joists one coat of shop paint and keep under cover until paint has dried. ' 4. Do not paint surfaces and edges to be field welded. K. Mark joists to indicate erection orientation when they are fabricated to special ' design or loading requirements. L. Identify each joist with mark corresponding to shop drawing designation. , 7175-05210.wpd r rDIVISION 5 SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS Page 7 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXECUTION ' A. Verify, before delivery of joists, that work to receive joists is located correctly and at proper levels. 3.02 PREPARATION ' A. Provide necessary instructions to other trades for installation of bearings and anchors installed under work of other Sections. Assist in installation if requested. ' B. If steel surfaces are painted where connections are made by welding at the site, remove paint to bare metal for a distance of at least two inches beyond sides of joints. rC. Where new work connects to existing construction, determine conditions and dimensions accurately in the field before making any adjustments. Report adjustments to the Engineer. 3.03 ERECTION A. Comply with requirements of specified reference standards as applicable, and the ' by-laws of the Municipality, in erection of work of this Section. B. Refer to drawings for the work of other Sections and locate joists to avoid interference with ceiling construction, recessed lights, mechanical and electrical ' services, and similar work. C. Install shims, packing or special shoes to support joists at proper elevation. D. Carry joists to centre line of beams, with a tolerance of+0" and -1"for beams with joists bearing from both sides, and +1" and -0"for beams with joists bearing from ' one side only. E. Weld each joist at bearings on structural steel members and bearing plates, or as indicated on drawings. For joists of span of 60'-0" and over, bearing on structural steel, provide bolted anchorage, minimum one 3/4" diameter bolt at each end bearing. rF. Install framing for openings between joists as indicated on drawings, and as specified for metal deck. 1 ' 7175-05210.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS Page 8 3.03 ERECTION (Cont'd) G. Bridging 1. Install steel bridging, transverse to joist spans to meet specified requirements of reference standards. 2. Locate bridging at panel points wherever possible. ' 3. Locate bridging to ensure no interference with recessed lights, and mechanical and electrical services. , 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ' A. Perform field inspection by Inspection and Testing Company to meet requirements specified under Source Quality Control of this Section, and to include: 1. Inspection of erection and fit-up, including placing, plumbing, levelling and temporary and permanent bracing. 2. Verification for each end of each joist that the distance from the centre of ' bearing to the end tension web member does not exceed the maximum dimension given on the drawings. 3. Inspection of welded and bolted connections. 4. General inspection of shop coating touch-up. , 3.05 COATING TOUCH-UP A. After erection, give one coat of paint specified for shop coat to field bolts, field , connections, burnt areas, and abrasions or damage to shop coats. 7175-05210.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05310 STEEL ROOF DECK Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the requirements of the General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED ' This Section of the contract includes the supply and installation of all building roof deck called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. ' 1.03 WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 03301 B. Unit Masonry Section 04200 C. Structural Steel Section 05120 D. Steel Joists Section 05210 E. Steel for Deck Section 05320 F. Lightweight Steel Framing Section 07410 G. Painting Section 09900 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Design of steel roof deck shall be by a Professional Engineer licensed in the Province of Ontario, experienced in steel deck design. 2. Consultant will review general arrangement to verify general conformance with overall design concept of structure. 3. Steel deck design engineer shall be insured against professional liability in accordance with Section 74 subsection(1)of Regulation 941 of the Ontario Professional Engineers Act. The alternative of compliance with subsection ' (2) is not acceptable. 4. Undertake welding and/or welding inspection only by personnel fully approved to one or more of the following Codes and reference standards ' where applicable: CSA W59, Welded Steel Construction (Metal-Arc Welding). CSA W178.1, Qualification Code for Welding Inspection Organizations. CSA W178.2, Certification of Welding Inspectors. 7175-05310.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05310 STEEL ROOF DECK Page 2 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE (Cont'd) , B. Reference Standards Perform work of this Section in conformance with the specified requirements of: ' 1. CAN3-S136-94, Cold Formed Steel Structural Members. 2. CSSBI Articles referred to in this Section that are contained in "Standard for Steel Roof Deck", published by Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute. 3. All standards referenced are latest editions. C. Design Criteria Design roof deck in conformance with CSSBI 10M Article 8.6: to ensure that the ' roof deck is capable of supporting the dead plus live loads shown on the drawings; and, concentrated loads stipulated in NBC Table 4.1.6.13 to provide anchorage of roof deck to supporting framework; to resist the following minimum gross , unfactored uplifts. The dead load of the roof deck construction may be deducted from these uplifts. 1. 1.25 kPa for the parallel to the edge strips and 2.38 kPa for the comer , areas denoted as S and C respectively in the Supplement to the National Building Code of Canada 1990, Commentary B, figure B-9. 2. 1.0 kPa for all other roof areas. 3. Design roof deck and fastening, including side lap flashing, for diaphragm action and to resist diaphragm shears shown on Drawings. ' D. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies Fabricate and install roof deck which forms a part of a required fire rated system exactly as specified in Underwriters' Laboratories test design specification that validates required rating. , E. Tolerances Comply with requirements of CSSBI 10M, Clause 5.2. r Lay and position roof deck within a tolerance of 6 mm in 12 m for unit alignment. , F. Source Quality Control 1. Inspection and testing of materials and fabrication of work of this Section, and for field quality control specified elsewhere in this Section, will be performed by an Inspection and Testing Company appointed by the Consultant. I 7175-05310.wpd i ' DIVISION 5 SECTION 05310 STEEL ROOF DECK Page 3 ' 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE (Cont'd) F. Source Quality Control (Cont'd) 2. Review provided by Inspection and Testing company does not relieve Contractor of his sole responsibility for quality control over Work. ' Performance or non-performance of Inspection and Testing company shall not limit, reduce, or relieve Contractor of his responsibilities in complying with the requirements of the Specification. ' 3. The Inspection and Testing Company, and welding inspectors and supervisors shall meet qualification requirements of CSA W178, and shall Ibe certified by the Canadian Welding Bureau in Category (a), Buildings. 4. Payment for specified work performed by the Inspection and Testing Company will be made from a cash allowance specified in Section 01005. 5. Provide free access for inspectors to all places work is being performed. ' 6. Shop Inspection Inspection shall ensure that materials, thickness of sheet steel, profile, rwelding and protective coating conform to the requirements of this specification. Mill test reports, properly correlated to the materials, will be accepted in lieu of physical tests. ' 1.05 SUBMITTALS H. Professional Liability Insurance 1. Submit proof of design engineers professional liability insurance coverage specified in paragraph 1.04, A, 3. I. Shop Drawings i1. Submit shop and erection drawings in accordance with Section 00300 and 00400. 2. Each shop drawing shall bear the signature and seal of the Professional Engineer responsible for deck design. ' 7175-05310.wpd i DIVISION 5 ' SECTION 05310 STEEL ROOF DECK Page 4 1.05 SUBMITTALS (Cont'd) ' A. Shop Drawings (Cont'd) 3. Indicate design loading, thicknesses of material, material grade and zinc coating designation, layout of units, framing and supports, bearings, anchorages, openings and reinforcement, accessories and details of construction. 4. Prior to submission to the Consultant the Contractor shall review all shop drawings. By this review, the Contractor represents that he has determined , and verified all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalogue number and similar data or will do so and that he has checked and co-ordinated each shop drawing with the requirements of the work and , of the Contract Documents. The Contractors review of each shop drawings shall be indicated by stamp, date and signature of a responsible person. 5. At time of submission, the Contractor shall notify the Consultant in writing of any deviations in the shop drawings from the requirements of the Contract documents. i 6. The Consultant will review and return shop drawings in accordance with any schedule agreed upon, or otherwise with reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay. The Consultant's review will be for conformity to the design concept and for general arrangement only and such review shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings or of responsibility for meeting all requirements of the Contract Documents unless a deviation on the shop drawings has been approved in writing by the Consultant. ' 7. The Consultant shall make any changes in shop drawings which the Engineer may require consistent with the Contract Documents and resubmit unless otherwise directed by the Consultant. When resubmitting, the Contractor shall notify the Consultant in writing of any revisions other than those requested by the Consultant. B. Inspection Reports 1. Distribute inspection reports as follows: i To Consultant: 2 copies. To Roofing Subcontractor: 1 copy. , To Contractor: 1 copy. i 7175-05310.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05310 STEEL ROOF DECK Page 5 1.05 SUBMITTALS (Cont'd) B. Inspection Reports (Cont'd) 2. Submit reports at least weekly when shop and site work of this Section is in progress. 3. Sign report by the inspector who performs the inspection, and describe progress of work, the deficiencies found and the actions taken to correct them. J. Submit evidence that deck design and all materials meet or exceed the ' requirements of Factory Mutual ' 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Ship, store and install roof deck to prevent damage to the finish, denting, ' deformation and rusting by both careful handling and physical protection. Remove and replace deck that has suffered damage. B. Stack deck tilted for drainage. Raise off ground and provide spacers between each panel, with wood blocking. C. Cover stored deck and other components with waterproof material and provide air ' circulation. D. Tightly band bundles of deck when hoisting at site. ' E. During erection, secure deck units to supports with temporary fastening until they are permanently welded in place, to ensure no displacement from any cause. ' F. Secure loose bundles of deck in place at end of working day. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 UNIT PRICES A. Provide unit prices as requested on the Tender Form. All work shall be "work ' completed". B. Unit prices requested as a part of the Tender shall include work erected in place, and preparation and submittal of necessary shop drawings. 7175-05310.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05310 STEEL ROOF DECK Page 6 2.01 UNIT PRICES (Cont'd) , C. Unit prices shall serve as a basis for computing the value of additional or deleted work, performed as changes to the work. , 2.02 MATERIALS , A. Sheet Steel To meet specified requirements of CSSBI 101M. , Grade 'A', minimum. , Minimum Core thickness: Nominal 0.76 mm. Coating. Zinc coating designation of ZF75. B. Zinc Rich Paint: To meet specified requirements of CGSB Specification 1-181, coating, zinc rich, organic, ready mixed. 2.03 FABRICATION , A. Fabricate roof deck to meet specified requirements of CSSBI 10M, Clause 5 of depth (and profile if noted) and to support dead and live loads, as indicated on drawings, and in accordance with Factory Mutual Data Sheet 1-28. B. Form deck units in lengths to span continuously over at least three supports ' wherever possible. C. Work shall include sheet steel angles, curbs, cover plates: sell closures; fasteners; , stiffeners; and accessories as required. D. Holes in Deck , Provide holes in deck as indicated on drawings and for required services. Ensure that information on size and location of holes is obtained before fabrication commences. 1. Separate framing will be supplied under work of Section 05120 for holes ' with dimensions across flutes greater than 450 mm. 2. Do not reinforce openings of less than 150 mm. , 3. Reinforce openings from 150 mm to 450 mm across flutes in accordance with CSSBI 10M, Clause 8.7. 7175-05310.wpd ' DIVISION 5 SECTION 05310 STEEL ROOF DECK Page 7 ' PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION ' A. Verify and approve alignment and levels of supporting members before laying roof deck. Do not proceed with erection until conditions are made satisfactory. 3.02 ERECTION A. Erect roof deck by its fabricator or experienced contractor. ' B. Placing Roof Deck Units 1. Place units aligned end to end and to provide a minimum bearing on structural steel members of 45 mm. Install necessary steel packing to level funits. 2. Do not force units into place causing them to warp or deflect. 3. Lap ends of panels no less than 50 mm. C. Fastening Roof Deck Units 1. Weld flutes to steel supports with 20 mm diameter arc welds unless otherwise indicated on drawings. 2. Provide welds at end laps, and at intermediate supports, at maximum spacing of 400 mm o.c. 3. Secure panels to each other by clinching side laps at 600 mm o.c., or by 25 mm welds at 600 mm o.c., or by self-tapping screws at 600 mm o.c. D. Cutting and Fitting 1. Cut and fit deck and accessories around projections through roof. E. Reinforcement 1. Reinforce all elements at top and bottom by a continuous web of sheet metal the same gauge as deck where they are cut longitudinally 50 mm or ' more from a vertical web. 2. Reinforce holes cut in floor deck in the field as specified under Article 2.03, Fabrication. 7175-05310.wpd DIVISION 5 , SECTION 05310 STEEL ROOF DECK Page 8 i 3.02 ERECTION (Confd) ' F. Cover Plates 1. Install sheet steel cover plates as may be required to support cants, insulation and similar roofing components. 2. Secure cover plates by either sheet metal screws or welding. ' G. Closures 1. Install sheet metal closures in flutes where indicated on drawings and where required to close openings as at junction of walls and partitions with deck. , 2. Secure closures by either sheet metal screws or welding. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection by Inspection and Testing Company to meet requirements , specified under Source Quality Control of this Section, and to include: 1. Erection and fastening. 2. General inspection of coating touch-up. ' 3.04 COATING TOUCH-UP AND REPLACEMENT OF DEFECTIVE WORK ' A. After erection,wire brush, clean and paint welded areas, rush spots, and scratched or otherwise damaged areas of zinc coating on deck and shop-applied prime paint ' on structural members. B. Apply two coats of zinc rich paint to zinc coated areas specified above. ' C. Apply one coat of prime paint to prime painted areas specified above. Ensure that touch-up paint is the same type as shop coat. D. Replace dented, punctured or weld-perforated deck where exposed to view. 7175-05310.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05320 ' STEEL FLOOR DECK Page 1 ' PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENT A. Conform to the requirements of the General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED ' This Section of the contract includes the supply and installation of all steel floor deck called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and ' meaning of the drawings and specifications. 1.03 WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 03301 ' B. Unit Masonry Section 04200 C. Structural Steel Section 05120 D. Steel Joists Section 05210 E. Steel Roof Deck Section 05310 F. Miscellaneous Metals Section 05500 G. Painting Section 09900 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Qualifications Undertake welding and/or welding inspection only by personnel fully approved to ' one or more of the following Codes and reference standards where applicable: CSA W59, Welded Steel Construction (Metal-Arc Welding). ' CSA W178.1, Qualification Code for Welding Inspection Organizations. CSA W178.2, Certification of Welding Inspectors. B. Reference Standards Perform work of this Section in conformance with the specified requirements of: 1. CAN3-S136-M94, Cold Formed Steel Structural Members. ' 7175-05320.wpd DIVISION 5 ' SECTION 05320 STEEL FLOOR DECK Page 2 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE (Cont'd) B. Reference Standards (Cont'd) , 2. CSA C22.2 No. 79, Cellular Metal and Cellular Concrete Floor Raceways and Fittings. 3. CSSBI Articles referred to in this Section that are contained in "Standard for Steel Floor Deck", published by Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute. C. All standards referenced are latest editions. , D. Design Criteria 1. Design floor deck in conformance with CSSBI Article 8.6: ' To ensure that the floor deck is capable of supporting the dead plus , live loads, including concentrated loads in accordance with NBC 1990, Clause 4.1.6.4, without exceeding the allowable stresses. To ensure that floor deck is capable of supporting the dead load of ' wet concrete plus construction loads without exceeding the specified maximum allowable steel stress. To ensure that maximum allowable deflection of 1/240 of the span , under total dead and live loads, including construction loads is not exceeded. ' Design composite deck sections in accordance with the National Building Code of Canada, 1990, for concrete strength indicated on ' drawings. E. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies , Fabricate and install deck which forms a part of a required fire rated system exactly as specified in Underwriters' Laboratories test design specification that validates ' required rating. F. Tolerances Lay and position floor deck within a tolerance of%"to centre line of columns, and with units parallel to column centre lines, and with cellular units aligned within a , tolerance of 1/16" 7175-05320.wpd ' DIVISION 5 SECTION 05320 STEEL FLOOR DECK Page 3 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE (Cont'd) ' G. Source Quality Control 1. Inspection and testing of materials and fabrication of work of this Section, and for field quality control specified elsewhere in this Section, will be performed by an Inspection and Testing Company appointed by the ' Consultant. 2. The Inspection and Testing Company, and welding inspectors and supervisors shall meet qualification requirements of CSA W178-173, and shall be certified by the Canadian Welding Bureau in Category (a), Buildings. ' 3. Payment for specified work performed by the Inspection and Testing Company will be made from a cash allowance specified in Section 01005. 4. Provide free access for inspectors to all places work is being performed. H. Shop Inspection 1. Inspection shall ensure that materials, thickness of sheet steel, profile, welding and protective coating conform to the requirements of this specification. 2. Mill test reports, properly correlated to the materials, will be accepted in lieu eof physical tests. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit shop and erection drawings in accordance with Section 00300 and 00400. ' 2. Indicate thicknesses of material, layout of units, framing and supports, bearings, anchorages, openings and reinforcement, accessories and details ' of construction. 7175-05320.wpd 1 DIVISION 5 ' SECTION 05320 STEEL FLOOR DECK Page 4 i 1.05 SUBMITTALS (Cont'd) A. Shop Drawings (Cont'd) ' 3. Prior to submission to the Consultant the Contractor shall review all shop , drawings. By this review, the Contractor represents that he has determined and verified all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalogue number and similar data or will do so and that he has checked ' and co-ordinated each shop drawing with the requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents. The Contractor's review of each shop drawings shall be indicated by stamp, date and signature of a responsible person. 1 4. At time of submission, the Contractor shall notify the Consultant in writing of any deviations in the shop drawings from the requirements of the i Contract documents. 5. The Consultant will review and return shop drawings in accordance with i any schedule agreed upon, or otherwise with reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay. The Consultant's review will be for conformity to the design concept and for general arrangement only and such review shall not ' relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings or of responsibility for meeting all requirements of the Contract Documents unless a deviation on the shop drawings has been approved in writing by the Consultant. 6. The Contractor shall make any changes in shop drawings which the ' Consultant may require consistent with the Contract Documents and resubmit unless otherwise directed by the Consultant. When resubmitting, the Contractor shall notify the Consultant in writing of any revisions other i than those requested by the Consultant. B. Inspection Reports 1. Distribute inspection reports as follows: To Consultant: 2 copies. i To Consulting Structural Engineer: 1 copy. To Contractor: 1 copy. 2. Submit reports at least weekly when shop and site work of this Section is , in progress. 3. Sign report by the inspector who performs the inspection, and describe ' progress of work, the deficiencies found and the actions taken to correct them. i 7175-05320.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05320 STEEL FLOOR DECK Page 5 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Label each floor deck unit to indicate Underwriters' Laboratory approved, fire rating and test design specification number. ' B. Ship, store and install roof deck to prevent damage to the finish, denting, deformation and rusting by both careful handling and physical protection. Remove ' and replace deck that has suffered damage. C. Co-ordinate work of this Section with work specified in other sections for structural bearing members, and arrange to deliver and install deck in accordance with erection schedule of bearing members. Install steel deck at the proper times to serve as safety planking during steel erection. ' D. Stack deck tilted for drainage. Raise off ground and provide spacers between each panel, with wood blocking. ' E. Cover stored deck and other components with waterproof material and provide air circulation. 1 F. Tightly band bundles of deck when hoisting at site. G. During erection, secure deck units to supports with temporary fastening until they 1 are permanently welded in place, to ensure no displacement from any cause. H. Secure loose bundles of deck in place at end of working day. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel To meet specified requirements of ASTM A446M, Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Structural Physical) Quality. - Grade 'A', minimum. - Minimum Core thickness: Nominal 0.030"for single element cellular steel floor. -Coating: Zinc coating designation of Wiped Coat with total weight on both sides of 91 g/m2 with a minimum of 76 g/m2 when subjected to triple spot test in accordance with ASTM A90, Tests for Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles. B. Zinc Rich Paint: To meet specified requirements of CGSB Specification ' 1-GP-181M, coating, zinc rich, organic, ready mixed. 7175-05320.wpd DIVISION 5 ' SECTION 05320 STEEL FLOOR DECK Page 6 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate floor deck to meet specified requirements of CSA S136. B. Form deck units in lengths to span continuously over at least three supports , wherever possible. C. Work shall include sheet steel angles, curbs, cover plates: flashings at junction of , columns, openings and walls with concrete slabs, and similar locations to prevent leakage of concrete topping; cell closures; fasteners; stiffeners; and accessories as required. , D. Form deck units to prevent male and female side lap joints. E. Holes in Deck ' Provide holes in deck as indicated on drawings and for required services. Ensure ' that information on size and location of holes is obtained before fabrication commences. 1. Separate framing will be supplied under work of Section 05120 for holes with dimensions across flutes greater than 12". 2. Do not reinforce openings of less than 6". ' 3. Reinforce openings from 6" to 12" across flutes with 2%" x 2'/a" x structural steel angles. Provide reinforcing across flutes at both ends of , each opening with members extending 18" at each side of opening. Weld angles to deck with 1" long tack weld on each side at 6" o.c. F. Cover Plates Form cover plates of steel sheet with minimum core thickness of 0.04" and shaped to match contour of floor deck units at gaps between units that exceed 'A". G. Closure strips ' Form closure strips of steel sheet with minimum core thickness of 0.04" and shaped to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of cells or flutes and sides of floor deck. 1 7175-05320.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05320 ' STEEL FLOOR DECK Page 7 2.02 FABRICATION (Cont'd) H. Composite Non-Cellular Floor Deck Provide bond between deck and concrete by deformations rolled into the vertical webs and/or tops of flutes. 1 - Profile: Vic West Steel Inc. HI-Bond HB938 INV, 1%' deep. End Joints - swagged for 2" overlap and to provide faces of deck in same plant. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION ' A. Verify and approve alignment and levels of supporting members before laying roof deck. Do not proceed with erection until conditions are made satisfactory. 3.02 ERECTION A. Erect floor deck by its fabricator. B. Placing Floor Deck Units 1. Place units with cells aligned end to end and to provide a minimum bearing on structural steel members of 13/:'. Install necessary steel packing to level units. 2. Do not force units into place causing them to warp or deflect. ' 3. Lap ends of panels no less than 2". 4. Ensure that ends of panels are free from distortion and rough ends, and ' butt them. Align units with hardwood blocks. Do not install with gap greater than 3/s" between ends of cells at joints. C. Fastening Floor DeCK Units 1. Weld flutes to steel supports with %" diameter arc welds unless otherwise ' indicated on drawings. 1 7175-05320.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05320 STEEL FLOOR DECK Page 8 , 3.02 ERECTION (Cont'd) C. Fastening Floor Deck U nits Contd) 2. Provide welds at ends of units and at end laps, and at intermediate ' supports, at maximum spacing of 16" o.c. 3. Where two units abut, each unit shall be separately fastened to supports. 4. Tack weld end closures at 48" o.c. 5. Tack weld side closures at 36" o.c. , 6. Secure panels to each other by clinching side laps at 24" o.c., or by 1" ' welds at 24" o.c. D. Cutting and Fitting ' 1. Cut and fit floor deck and accessories around projections through floor. 2. Make cuts square with neatly trimmed edges. t E. Reinforcement 1. Reinforce all elements at top and bottom by a continuous web of sheet metal the same gauge as deck where they are cut longitudinally 2" or more from a vertical web. 2. Reinforce holes cut in floor deck in the field as specified under Article 2.03, Fabrication. F. Cover Plates 1. Install sheet steel cover plates over all gaps wider than 3 mm between ' units, at expansion joints, and at intersections of units that span in different directions. Cover plates shall prevent leakage of wet concrete. 2. Secure cover plates by either sheet metal screws or welding. G. Closures and Flashing 1. Install sheet metal flashing to contain concrete at columns, openings and , similar locations where other construction does not perform this function. 2. Secure closures and flashings by either sheet metal screws or welding. ' 7775-05320.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05320 STEEL FLOOR DECK Page 9 3.02 ERECTION (Cont'd) G. Closures and Flashing (Cont'd) 3. Install flashing for side and end concrete forms at holes through floor and at perimeter of building, where indicated on drawings. ' 3.03 FIELD QUALITY( CONTROL A. Perform field inspection by Inspection and Testing Company to meet requirements specified under Source Quality Control of this Section, and to include: 1. Erection and fastening. 2. General inspection of coating touch-up. 3.04 COATING TOUCH-UP AND REPLACEMENT OF DEFECTIVE WORK ' A. After erection, wire brush, clean and paint welded areas, rush spots, and scratched or otherwise damaged areas of zinc coating on deck and shop-applied prime paint on structural members. B. Apply two coats of zinc rich paint to zinc coated areas specified above. tC. Apply one coat of prime paint to prime painted areas specified above. Ensure that touch-up paint is the same type as shop coat. ' 7175-05320.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS Page 1 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENT A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. 1 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Refer to Item 3.03 Schedule. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Poured in place concrete Section 03300 B. Steel Deck Section 05320 C. Carpentry Section 06100 D. Painting Section 09900 1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. The latest issue of the following Codes and Standards shall govern the work of this Section. 1. CAN3-S136-M84 Cold Formed Steel Structural Members. 2. CAN3-G40.21-M81 Structural Quality Steel. 3. CSA W59.M-84 General Specifications for Welding of Steel Structures. 4. CSSB1 12M-84 Standard for Composite Steel Deck. 5. CAN/CSA S16.1-M89 Limit States Design of Steel Structures. 6. Design guardrails and handrails in accordance with sub-section 4.1.10 of the Ontario Building Code with respect to horizontal and vertical design ' loads. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Work of this Section shall be executed by a firm thoroughly conversant with laws, bylaws and regulations which govern and capable of workmanship of best grade of modem shop and field practice known to recognized manufacturers specializing in this work. Use workmen skilled in work of this Section. B. Design of all connections shall be by a Professional Engineer in the Province of Ontario who shall sign and seal all shop drawings prior to submission. 1115-05500.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS Page 2 , 1.06 DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Label, tag or otherwise make work supplied for installation by other sections to indicate its function, location and shop drawing description. B. Protect work from damage and deliver to a location at the site in order to meet the ' scheduling requirements. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit Shop and Erection Drawings in accordance with General Conditions , to the Consultant for review before fabricating miscellaneous metal work. 2. Verify site dimensions before proceeding with shop fabrication and to suit field conditions and field openings. 3. Show and describe in detail all the work of this Section including large scale ' detail of members and materials, of connection and jointing details, and of anchorage devices, dimensions, gauges, thicknesses, description of materials, metal finishing, as well as all other pertinent data and information, including type, size and description of all fasteners and anchors. 4. Shop drawings for framing, stairs, handrails, guards, landings, ladders, and pit covers shall bear the stamp of a Professional Engineer registered in the Province of Ontario. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Use materials specified herein. B. Structural Steel Sections and Steel Plate: CAN3-G40.21, Grade 400W. C. Hollow Structural Steel Sections: CAN G40.21 Grade 350W. D. Architectural and Miscellaneous Mild Steel: CAN3-G40.21, Grade 300W. E. Machine Bolts and Nuts: ASTM Standard A307 low carbon steel externally and internally threaded standard fasteners. Dimensions, sizes, thread, strength, quality and type of items shall be designed for the work intended. 7175-05500.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS Page 3 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) F. Sheet Steel: (Structural Quality) ASTM-A570. G. Sheet Steel: (Commercial Quality)ASTM-A366, stretcher levelled or temper rolled. H. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Hot dipped galvanizing with minimum zinc coating of 600 1 g/sq. metre to CSA G164-1972. I. Pre-Paint Finish: For galvanized surfaces to be exposed and finish painted -ASTM D2092. J. Metal floor deck (at stair landings only): 1Y2" deep, ribbed profile, composite galvanized metal floor deck, C.N.T. =0.030",with zinc coating designation of ZF75 to CSSB1 101M, grade 'A' sheet steel. Steel deck at roof structure shall be supplied by Section 05320. tK. Galvanizing: All steel specified to be galvanized except above, ASTM A123, zinc (Hot-Galvanized) coatings on products fabricated from rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strips. Galvanized after all welding complete. No welding of galvanized products allowed. L. Welding Materials: CSA W59.M-1984 and CSA W48 series. M. Metal Filler: Epoxy, Hysol 6C epoxy adhesive kit (or 4297 in bulk) manufactured by Hysol (Canada) Limited, or approved equal. N. Wire mesh reinforcing for stair treads shall conform to CSA G40.5, galvanized. O. Steel pipe for handrails, guardrails and bollards shall conform to ASTM A120 or ASTM A53, Schedule 40, Grade B. ' P. Primer: CGSB 1-GP-40M, colour to be grey to match structural steel. Q. Checkerplate shall be 3/16" steel plate to CAN 3-G40.21, Grade 400 W, raised checkerboard pattern. R. Non-shrink grout: Por Rok by Hallemite Products Ltd. or SET 15 Minute anchoring ' cement by SET Products Ltd. S. Gratings: Borden Safety Steps with cast abrasive nosing, 133/8'wide treads, 1%" x 3/16" bar size, galvanized. Landings: Borden grating to match treads. 7175-05500.wpd i DIVISION 5 S SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS Page 4 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. General 1. Fabricate to reviewed shop drawings and in general to details, sizes and materials indicated on drawings and specified herein. 2. Fabricate work complete with all components required for anchoring; bolting or welding to structural frame; standing free or resting in frames or sockets; in a safe and sure manner. 3. Where possible fit and shop assemble various sections of the work and deliver to site in largest practicable sections. Where shop fabricating is not possible make trial assembly in shop. 4. Grind and fill all welds after inspection and acceptance and leave ready for prime painting. 5. Fill all open joints, depressions, seams with metallic paste filler or by continuous brazing or welding and grind smooth to true sharp arises and profiles. 6. Fit joints and intersecting members accurately. Make work in true planes with adequate fastenings. 7. Supply all fastenings, anchors, accessories required for fabrication and erection of work of this Section. Such items occurring on or in an exterior wall or slab shall be hot dip galvanized. Make thread dimensions such that nuts and bolts will fit without re-threading or chasing threads. 8. Make exposed metal fastenings and accessories of same material, texture, ' colour and finish as base metal on which they occur unless otherwise shown or specified. Keep exposed fastenings to an absolute minimum evenly spaced and neatly laid out. Make fastenings of permanent type unless otherwise indicated. 9. At no time during or after fabrication of structural components, allow the ' cutting, notching, or drilling of such components by other trades. B. Shop Painting 1. Clean ferrous metals to remove rust, mill scale, oil dirt, and other foreign 9 matter before commencing shop painting, in accordance with CGSB 31-GP-404a. 7175-05500.wpd i DIVISION 5 SECTION 05500 ' MISCELLANEOUS METALS Page 5 3.01 FABRICATION (Cont'd) B. Shop Painting_ (Cont'd) 2. Clean welds by wire brushing and wash down with clean water, to remove the chemical residues left by the electrodes, prior to painting. ' 3. The following surfaces shall not be painted: a) Surfaces and edges to be field welded. If painted, remove paint for field welding for a distance of at least two inches on all sides of the joint, to ensure proper fusion of the metal. b) The contact surfaces of friction type connections assembled by high 1 strength bolts. C) Portions of steel members which are to be encased in or in contact with concrete. 4. All other ferrous metal work shall be iven one ne pane paint coat type CGSB 1-GP-40M. Work paint into all comers and all joints. Metal parts in contact shall be primed before shop assembly. Priming damaged during erection or through lack of protection shall be cleaned and touched up. 5. Metals in contact with other dissimilar metals, concrete or masonry materials shall be insulated or separated from one another to prevent corrosion, staining or electrolysis by use of bituminous paint, butyl tape, building paper or other approved methods and materials. C. Steel Stair and Handrails ' 1. Interior Stair treads shall be concrete filled metal pan type. Exterior stairs shall be steel grating type as detailed. ' 2. Stairs shall be constructed to safely sustain a live load of 125 p.s.f. evenly distributed over treads and landings with a maximum deflection of U360. Furnish all supporting members required to connect to the building. 3. Stringers and fascias and supporting members throughout shall be of size and weight as shown on drawings. Stringers shall be continuous. All edges shall be ground smooth. 4. Handrails, guardrails and brackets shall be designed in accordance with Subsection 4.1.10 of the Ontario Code in regard to horizontal and vertical 7175-05500.wpd i DIVISION 5 t SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS Page 6 loading. 3.01 FABRICATION (Cont'd) , C. Steel Stair and Handrails (Cont'd) 5. Sub-treads, risers and landings shall be 12 gauge sheet steel formed as detailed and continuously welded to supporting members. Treads and ' landings to be concrete filled,with welded wire mesh reinforcing. Risers to be exposed metal, with a formed 3/4"dust cove. 6. Fabricate handrails and guardrails as detailed. Cap all ends with 1/8" steel plug, neatly welded and ground smooth. Extend handrails horizontally at top and bottom of each flight of stairs as shown on the drawings but not less than 12" beyond stair nosing at top of stair and 24" at bottom of stair. 7. Provide all necessary angles, channels, clips, plates etc., as required to support all stair treads and landings and as shown on the drawings. B. Fabricate stair landings as detailed on the drawings with 1%' galvanized metal floor deck and welded wire mesh. Spot weld deck to framing W i diameter puddle welds at 6"c/c along entire length of all framing members. Place reinforcing mesh. 9. Make provisions for support of metal furring around perimeter of areas where gypsum board soffits are to be installed. D. Steel Pipe Bollards 1. Steel pipe bollards schedule 40 standard weight, steel pipe of size shown, complete with anchors and sleeves, install plumb and free of defects detrimental to appearance and performance. Bollards should be one piece construction no welds allowed. 2. Concrete supplied and installed under the work of Section 03300. E. Vanity Support Brackets i 1. Provide triangular supports to vanities where indicated, constructed of 3 mm steel plate with 38 mm wide horizontal, angular and vertical legs formed to profile indicated. 7175-05500.wpd DIVISION 5 SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS Page 7 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Work shall be fabricated and erected square, plumb and true, straight, level and accurately fitted to size detailed on reviewed Shop Drawings. All joints shall be welded unless otherwise specified or shown on Drawings. Exposed welds shall be ground smooth and/or flush. Rivetted parts shall be made with countersunk heads or blind rivets. Exposed work shall be finished smooth and even, close joints and neat connections. Exposed welds continuous for full length of joints. B. Where anchors or fastenings, sleeves, have to be built in by other trades, supply all necessary templates, instructions and supervision to ensure satisfactory installation. C. Do all drilling, cutting and fitting necessary to attach this work to adjoining work and make it complete. D. Grind all field welds smooth, touch up shop coat of prime paint where damaged by field erection. 3.03 SCHEDULE A. General 1. Supply and install all miscellaneous metal work and structural steel indicated on Drawings and not included in the work of other Sections in addition to items listed below. Where items are required to be built into masonry, concrete or other work supply such items to respective Sections with all anchors and accessories for building in. 2. All items shall be of sizes and as detailed on drawings. B. Itemized List 1 1. Steel stairs including steel floor deck at landings and wire mesh reinforcing. 2. Handrails and guardrails, handrail brackets. 3. Masonry wall lateral support angles. 4. Vanity support brackets. 5. Exterior steel grating stair. 6. Roof access ladder(galvanized). 7. Pit edge framing and gasketted covers. 8. Elevator pit access ladder. 9. Folding partition support framing and through bolts. 10. Light valance support brackets. 11. Decorative exterior columns. 12. Miscellaneous steel angles, plates and channels as indicated on the Drawings. 13. Other metal fabrications shown on the Drawings. 7175-05500.wpd DIVISION 6 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all carpentry called for or implied by drawings and 1 specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to full intent and meaning of drawings and specifications. Work includes but is not limited to the following: A. Sleepers, parapets, control joints and wood cants. B. Rough bucks, furring and blocking. C. Set all steel door frames. D. Temporary handrails, guardrails, ladders, stairs and doors. E. Temporary hoardings. F. All rough hardware required to complete the work of this Section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Demolition and Removals Section 02050 B. Formwork Section 03100 C. Miscellaneous Metals Section 05500 D. Finish Carpentry Section 06200 E. Cabinet Work Section 06410 F. Roofing Section 07530 G. Hollow Metal Door Frames and Screens Section 08100 1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Structural members shall conform to CAN3-086-M84, 'Engineering Design in Wood'. D B. Sawn lumber shall be identified by the grade stamp of an association or independent grading agency approved to grade lumber. C. Plywood identification shall be by grade mark in accordance with applicable CSA tStandards. D. Pressure treated materials shall conform to CSA 0132.1. 7175-06100.wpd t DIVISION 6 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 2 1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES (Cont'd) i E. Hoardings shall be designed by a Professional Engineer to withstand all applicable i loads including wind loads. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Materials shall not be delivered before they are required for proper conduct of the work. B. Protect materials, under cover, both in transit and on the site. C. Store materials to prevent deterioration or the loss or impairment of their structural and other essential properties. Do not store materials in areas subject to high humidity and areas where masonry and concrete work are not completely dried out. D. Protect work from damage during storage, handling, installation and until the building is turned over to the Owner. Make good damage and loss without additional expense to the Owner. E. Store sheathing materials level and flat, in a dry location. Protect panel edges from moisture at all times. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings for hoardings. B. Shop drawings shall bear the stamp and signature of a Professional Engineer registered in the Province of Ontario. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS ' A. General: Use materials specified herein. B. Timber Material shall be 'Grade Stamped'. I 7175-06100.wpd l iDIVISION 6 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 3 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) C. Construction Lumber: Grading shall conform to the CSA 0141-1970 "Softwood Lumber" graded to NLGA Standard for Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber, published by the National Lumber Grades Authority. All lumber shall bear grade stamps. Moisture content of softwood lumber not to exceed 19% at time of installation. 1. Framing lumber, plates, furring, blocking, No. 1 SPF. 1 2. All wood curbs, blocking and cant strips on roof shall be No. 2 Pine or better pressure treated as herein specified. 3. Nailing strips, furring and strapping: No. 4 Common Pine. 4. Fitment framing: No. 1 Common Pine. tD. Panel Materials: Type, grade and thickness as specified in accordance with the following standards: 1. Douglas Fir Plywood: To CSA 0121-M1978, standard construction, good one side, thickness as shown on the drawings. Plywood used for interior finishes shall be select grade veneer, with fire retardant finish. 2. Waferboard: To CAN3-0437.0-M85, good one side, square edge 12 mm thick. E. Rough Hardware: Nails, screws, anchors and special fastening devices required for the erection of framing and hoarding. Items for rough carpentry shall be galvanized and conform to CSA Standards 13111-1974, B34-1967 (R1972). F. Sealan : Mono' as manufactured by Tremco Manufacturing Ltd. G. Wood Preservative: ' 1. Pressure treated: CCA-Wolmanized Koppers Company Inc. 2. Surface-Applied: Pentox (Green) Osmose Pentox Inc. H. Building Paper: To CAN2-51.32M77, 15#asphalt impregnated paper. 71 76-os1 oo.wpa DIVISION 6 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 4 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Workmanship 1. Execute work using skilled mechanics according to best practice, as specified herein and indicated on drawings. 2. Lay out work carefully and to accommodate work of other trades. Accurately cut and fit; erect in proper position true to dimensions; align, level, square, plumb, adequately brace, and secure permanently in place. Join work only over solid backing. B. Rough Hardware , 1. Work shall include rough hardware such as nails, bolts, nuts, washers, screws, clips, hangers, connectors, strap iron, and operating hardware for temporary enclosures. 2. Fasten rough hardware; to hollow masonry units with adequate size toggle , bolts; to solid masonry or concrete surfaces with expansion shields and lag screws. Where screws are required, use lead or inorganic fibre plugs. Wood or organic plugs are not permitted. Do not ramset fastenings into l concrete floor or concrete block or structural steel sections. C. Cant Strips. Roof Blocking and Sleepers 1. Provide and install framing, blocking and sleepers as indicated on the drawings. Anchor blocking securely in permanent manner as indicated on the drawings. D. Installation of Door Frames 1. Set frames plumb, square and level, maintaining door width and height. 2. Brace frames securely in position while being built-in. Install temporary , wood spreader at mid height of frame until adjacent masonry work is complete. E. Surface Applied Wood Preservative: 1. Treat surfaces of material with wood preservative before installation. Apply preservative after materials have been cut and fit to size. To cut end two coats of preservative shall be applied. 7175-06100.wpd DIVISION 6 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 5 3.01 INSTALLATION (Cont'd) 2. Apply preservative by dipping, or by brush or spray to completely saturate and maintain wet film on surface for minimum 3 minute soak on lumber and one minute soak on plywood. 3. Retreat surfaces exposed by cutting, trimming, or boring with 2 coats of brush application of preservative before installation. 4. All wood in contact with masonry or concrete shall be dipped in a tank of preservative for two minutes after fabrication. G. Hoarding 1. Erect hoarding as necessary to complete the work. 2. Provide additional hoarding and blank off openings in building walls to secure and protect the structure. 7175-06100.wpd DIVISION 6 SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY Page 1 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all finished carpentry called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: A. Installation of Doors B. Installation of Finishing Hardware C. Wood Shelving D. Wood Handrails E. Wood Casings, and Trim F. Custom Wood Base And Trim To Match Existing Historic Material ' G. Wood Handrails H. Miscellaneous Finish Woodwork I. Installation of Coat Racks, Wall Mounted Vinyl Handrails, and Washroom Accessories as specified in Division 10. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Rough Carpentry Section 06100 B. Cabinet Work Section 06410 C. Miscellaneous Metals Section 05500 D. Wood Doors Section 08210 E. Finish Hardware Section 08710 F. Painting and Finishing Section 09900 G. Miscellaneous Specialties Section 10950 H. Washroom Accessories Section 10800 I. Door Grilles Division 15 i ' 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Do millwork to Millwork Standards of Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada (AWMAC) 1972. 7175-06200.wpd i � DIVISION 6 , SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY Page 2 1.05 SPECIAL PROTECTION A. Store finished carpentry items in clean dry area. During shipment and storage, materials shall have protective covering. B. Cover plastic laminate items with heavy Kraft paper and place in corrugated cardboard cartons with comers well padded to avoid damage. 1.06 SAMPLES A. Submit duplicate 12" x 12" samples of each type of solid wood or plywood to receive stain or natural finish, in accordance with Division 1. B. Submit samples of each type of trim, base and mouldings. , 1.07 WARRANTY ' A. Provide a written guarantee stating that "finished carpentry work shall be , guaranteed for two years against warpage, opening of joints, cracking, shrinking, delamination of plastic laminate and similar defects." 1.08 SHOP DRAWING A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Division 1. B. Clearly indicate details of construction, profiles,jointing, fastening and other related details. C. Submit templates of custom wood trim, bases and mouldings to match existing material. PART 2: PRODUCTS , 2.01 MATERIALS A. Softwood Lumber: (for concealed framing of cupboards and fitments) ' To CSA 0141 and National Lumber Grades Authority requirements, with maximum moisture content of 6% for interior work, Ponderosa Pine species, to AWMAC premium grade. r 7175-06200.wpd DIVISION 6 SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY Page 3 1 i 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) ' B. Hardwood Lumber: To National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA)requirements, moisture content of 6% maximum red oak species for handrail to AWMA custom grade; birch species where indicated. C. Softwood lumber for custom trim, base and mouldings to CSA 0141, Premium Select grade kiln dried Pine species. D. Hardwood Veneered Particle Board: To CSA 0115-1967, of thickness indicated, rotary cut face Birch veneer, unless specified otherwise on the drawings; good two sides for work with two sides exposed to view; good one side for work with one side exposed to view. Use particle board core with Type I bond. Select veneer to provide random match. 1 ! E. Douglas Fir Plywood: tTo CSA 0121-M1978, good two sides, tight face select sheathing, high density overlaid. F. Poplar Plywood: To CSA 0153-1976 sanded grade construction grade overlaid grade. G. Mat-Formed Wood Particle Board: To CAN3-0188.1-M78 grade, sanded faces, of thickness indicated. H. Nails and Stagles: To CSA 6111-1974; plain finish, spiral thread nails. 1 1. Rough Hardware: Bolts, lag screws, anchors, nails and expansion shields required to secure this portion of work. Rough hardware hot dip galvanized conforming to latest edition of CSA Specification G164. ! 7175-06200.wpd i DIVISION 6 SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY Page 4 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION , A. General: Fabricate casework to AWMAC conventional construction custom grade. Set nails and screws, apply stained plain wood filler to indentations, sand smooth and leave ready to receive finish. Provide 3/8"thick solid matching wood strip on plywood and particle board edges 1/2" or thicker, exposed in final assembly. B. h ves: Shall be 3/4" birch veneered particle board. Exposed edges of fixed shelves shall have 1/4"wide birch strips by full thickness of plywood. Adjustable shelves shall have 1/4"wide birch strips applied to both edges and both ends. Strips shall be glued and securely fixed to plywood edges. C. Trim: , Fabricate trim to profiles shown or, to match existing profiles, in maximum possible lengths. Use of finger jointed material is not permitted. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Provide grounds as necessary for secure installation of cabinetwork. B. All wood surfaces shall be sanded smooth, ready to receive finish. C. Provide all cutouts required by all plumbing, electrical, or other fixtures or j equipment. D. Install and adjust cabinet hardware. Recess shelf standards. , E. Set and secure materials and components in place, rigid plumb and square. F. Provide heavy duty fixture attachments for wall mounted cabinet work. 7175-06200.wpd DIVISION 6 SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY Page 5 I 3.03 FINISH HARDWARE INSTALLATION A. Finish hardware will be supplied for installation under this Section. ' B. Install finish hardware complete in all respects, haing doors and make adjustments necessary. C. Doors shall swing freely. Where thresholds are to be used, door bottom shall be finished to suit thresholds as required. Where)indicated on door schedules or drawings under-cut doors. 3.04 MISCELLANEOUS A. Install door grilles as shcwn on door schedule (supplied by Division 15). B. Install wall mounted vinyl handrails in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Fasten to solid blocking behind drywall surfaces using hardware supplied by handrail manufacturer. (Alternate price item, not included in Base Bid Tender). ' C. Install coat rod and shelves in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. rD. Install washroom accessories as specified in Section 10800. 7175-06200.wpd DIVISION 6 SECTION 06410 CABINETWORK Page 1 DART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This section of the contract includes the supply and installation of all cabinetwork called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the 1 following: A. All cabinets and cupboards. B. Reception counter. C. Display case. D. Washroom vanities. ' E. Plastic laminated pass through counters. F. Finishing of all exposed interior wood surfaces of cabinet work. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Metal fabrications, including supply of steel angle supports for wall mounted cabinetwork Section 05500 B. Rough Carpentry Section 06100 C. Finish Carpentry Section 06200 1 D. Wood Doors Section 08210 E. Display Case Doors Section 08800 F. Tackboards for Display Case Section 10950 G. Eggcrate Lens for Display Case Section 10950 H. Plumbing Fixtures and Trim Division 15 I. Electrical outlets Division 16 1.04 DEFINITION tA. "Exposed" when referred to in this Section, shall mean all parts which can be viewed and shall include interiors of cupboards, cabinets and countertops, backs of doors, shelving, gables, and drawers. 7175-06410.wpd 1 DIVISION 6 SECTION 06410 CABINETWORK Page 2 r 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: unless otherwise specified, carry out finish carpentry work r in accordance with requirements of "Millwork Standards" (latest issue) of Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers'Association of Canada (AWMAC), Custom , Grade. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit detailed shop drawings for cabinetwork showing proposed assembly, connections, anchorage, materials, dimensions, thickness, and finishes. B. Submit samples of each type of solid wood and plywood used in exposed work, complete with transparent finish, prior to fabrication of cabinetwork. , C. Submit sample of each type of cabinet hardware component used. r 1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY. HANDLING &STORAGE A. Protect against damage, including damage by excessive changes in moisture , content, during delivery and storage. Maintain minimum storage temperature of 16 0c, and relative humidity of 25% to 55%, r B. Cover plastic laminate faces at shop with heavy Kraft paper. C. Do not deliver finish carpentry components to site before all wet trades are completed, the building is closed in and humidity conditions on site are acceptable. Do not deliver during rain or damp weather. D. Store materials on site in such a way o y as prevent deterioration or loss or impairment of essential properties. Prevent excessive moisture gain of materials. 1.08 PROTECTION A. Provide coverings as necessary to protect finish carpentry components from r damage of any kind during storage and after installation. r r r 7175-06410.wpd r rDIVISION 6 SECTION 06410 CABINETWORK Page 3 r1.09 WARRANTY A. At no cost Owner, remedy any defects in work of this Section due to delamination r and warping of plastic laminated finish carpentry components for a period of two (2) years from date of Substantial Performance. Provide Owner with a written warranty to this effect. PART 2: PRODUCTS r2.01 MATERIALS A. Solid Wood: .1 Unless otherwise indicated, provide AWMAC Premium Grade. r .2 All wood materials shall be new, straight and clean, free of sap, knots, pitch, and other defects, except as permitted by applicable grading rules. r .3 All wood shall be kiln dried to a maximum moisture content of 7%. .4 Hardwood: plain sawn Birch for exposed locations unless otherwise r indicated. Trim and mouldings where shown on the drawings shall be red oak. Inlay material shall be cherry wood. .5 Softwood: to CSA 0141-1970, dressed all sides used in concealed rlocations. B. Plywood: r .1 Hardwood plywood: to CSA 0115-M1982, Type II Good Grade Birch, where transparent finish is required and Solid Grade where paint finish is required. ' .2 Soft plywood: to CSA 0151-M1978 Standard Grade, solid two sides. Use in concealed locations only, except as indicated. 1 C. Hardboard: r .1 To CGSB 11-GP-3M, Type 2, '/4' thick or as indicated: Tempered "Masonite". r7175-06410.wpd DIVISION 6 , SECTION 06410 CABINETWORK Page 4 , 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) ' D. Plastic Laminated Components: .1 Plastic laminate facing sheet: CSA CAN3-A172-M79, PF-S and GP-S; ' colours, gloss and texture will be selected by Consultant from full range of products by Pionite, Formica, Arborite, Nevamar, or Wilsonart (2 or more manufacturers may be selected). , .2 Backing sheet: BK Grade by manufacturer of facing sheet. .3 Core: CAN3-0188AM78, Grade R. t .4 Laminating adhesive: CAN3-0112 Series M1977. .5 Core sealer: clear water resistant synthetic resin sealer. E. Fasteners and Adhesive: , .1 Nails and staples: CSA B111-1974, galvanized. , .2 Screws: zinc, cadmium or chrome plated steel. .3 Adhesive: waterproof type as approved by Consultant. Contact bond not , acceptable. F. Cabinet Hardware: ' Products listed below are a standard of acceptance. Products by other manufacturers, of equal quality and similar appearance may also be accepted subject to review and approval by Consultant. .1 Hinges for W door Blum 91-650, 1700 with self closing spring. , .2 Door to drawer pull: GSH 302 x 100 mm CTC 7.5 mm o.d. brushed stainless steel. .3 Drawer slides: KV 1429 full extension for 45 kg load @ 20". .4 Drawer locks: CCL 0738 pin tumbler MK& KA by room. , .5 Cabinet locks: CCL 0737 pin tumbler MK& KA by room. .6 Elbow catch: Ives 2-A14 on inactive door of locked pair. 7175-06410.wpd ' DIVISION 6 SECTION 06410 ' CABINETWORK Page 5 2.01 MATERIALS (Confd) ' .7 Pilaster& clips: KV 255, 256. ' .8 Hardware finish: Chrome or nickel plated. 2.02 FABRICATION A. General Requirements: .1 Exposed joints and edges: a. Uniformly space exposed joints unless otherwise indicated. b. No edge grain shall be visible; mitre external corners, house internal fasteners. Glue mitred comers. C. All exposed edges of plywood and particle board shall have solid wood edging, pressure glued. .2 Mechanical Fasteners: a. Inconspicuously locate mechanical fasteners. Wherever possible, ' conceal fastenings. b. Countersink nail heads. C. Where exposed to view, countersink screw and bolt heads and fill holes with matching wood plugs. d. Cutting and fitting: make cutouts in work of this Section as required to accommodate work of other Sections. e. Make provisions in cabinetwork to accept built-in appliances, provided by others. .3 Standing and Running Trim: a. Fabricate trim of hardwood. b. Length: standing trim shall be in one piece. Running trim shall be in longest practicable lengths. C. Thickness: unless otherwise indicated, minimum '/Z'. .4 Plastic Laminate Components: a. Unless otherwise specified herein, comply with requirements of CAN3-A172-M79 Appendix'A'. b. Assembly: Bond plastic laminate to core with adhesive, under pressure. C. Core: unless otherwise indicated: %"thick; countertops 11/6" thick. ' 7175-06410.wpd DIVISION 6 , SECTION 06410 CABINETWORK Page 6 2.02 FABRICATION (Cont'd) d. Balanced construction: plastic laminate covered components shall ' be of balanced construction, with plastic laminate on both faces of core. Seal core edges not covered with plastic laminate. e. Use largest practicable plastic laminate sheet size. f. Provide joints symmetrically; provide joints as comers and at changes in superficial areas; provide concealed draw bolt anchors , and joints. All butt joints shall have a blind spine. g. Construct countertops postformed or selfedged as detailed on Drawings. ' h. Apply self-edged minimum 0.04"thick plastic laminate to exposed ends of countertops. i. Construct splashbacks minimum 4" high or higher where indicated. ' Do not return postformed splashback at ends except where specifically called for. j. Openings and cutouts: , L Radius internal corners at least 1/a" and chamfer edges. ii. Where core edge is to remain exposed, cover with plastic laminate edging. ' iii. Where core edge is to be concealed, seal with sealer. .5 Cabinetwork: a. Except where otherwise detailed, use flush overlaid construction. , Tenon, dado, dowel, or rabbet interior construction with all parts well glued. Shoulder mitre all exposed corners. Open ends or skeleton , frames against walls are not permitted. Unless otherwise permitted by Consultant, use unitized construction system for all components. b. Unless otherwise indicated, construct all exterior components of cabinetwork, counters, cupboards, such as doors, drawer fronts, exposed end gables, from plastic laminate covered plywood; use Solid Grade hardwood plywood for interior components, not visible , when cabinet doors, cupboard doors, drawers, are in closed position. C. Provide cupboards with %"thick plywood backs. ' d. Construct gables of plastic laminate faced plywood. Rout gables for pilaster strips where adjustable shelving is required. e. Construct shelving of%" hardwood faced veneer core plywood. , f. Construct doors and drawer fronts of %" plastic laminate faced plywood. g. Construct doors with %" plywood sides and back, with sides tongued into front and back housed into sides. Construct bottom with Y2" hardboard housed into front and sides. Plywood top edge for sides and back may be exposed. 7175-06410.wpd ' DIVISION 6 SECTION 06410 CABINETWORK Page 7 2.02 FABRICATION (Cont'd) ' h. Install cabinet hardware in accord with hardware manufacturer's directions. Unless otherwise indicated, provide each drawer and door with pull, each drawer with extension hardware and each door with minimum two hinges. Provide locks where indicated. L Apply moisture repellent sealer to concealed backs of cabinetwork. 2.03 FINISHES ' A. Shop applied polymerizing two component catalytic conversion varnish system, stain colour and varnish sheen selected by Consultant. The individual components of the system used must be chemically compatible to assure perfect adhesion and top quality, durable final finish. B. All surfaces shall be carefully prepared and sanded, free of machine marks, before and between finish coats. C. Exposed interior of display cases, doors and drawer fronts shall be finished as follows: .1 One coat wipe-on bleaching stain, Benjamin Moore solvent based 1 penetrating pickling stain. Colour to be selected by the Architect. .2 One coat sealer (Wood Kote liquid plastic, exterior polyurethane satin ' #850-4). .3 Sand. .4 One clear top coat. ' D. Cabinet interior(cabinet with doors) and drawer bodies shall be finished as follows: .1 One coat sealer. .2 Sand. e .3 One tinted top coat. E. Cabinet and case backs unexposed to view shall be given one coat of moisture repellent sealer. 7175-06410.wpd DIVISION 6 , SECTION 06410 CABINETWORK Page 8 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION ' A. Install cabinetwork components plumb, true and level and securely fasten in place. Accurately scribe and closely fit components to irregularities of adjacent surfaces. B. Accurately fit joints in true plane, locate joints over bearing or supporting surfaces. C. Provide mechanical fastening devices such as nails, screws and bolts required for fastening wood components. Unless permitted, provide concealed fastening of ' components. D. Install wall mounted cabinets with steel angle supports secured to wall with drilled, , self-tapping screw anchors. E. Where permitted, nail with small headed finishing nails. Countersink nail heads with nail setter. F. Install plastic laminate components using concealed fastening devices. G. Where components are fastened with screws or bolts, countersink screw and bolt heads and provide wood plugs matching surrounding wood. H. Where cabinetwork abuts other building elements, provide wood trim matching cabinetwork except where otherwise detailed. I. Where access is required to valves and other mechanical and electrical components, located behind cabinetwork, provide removable plywood access panels of size required and secure with four brass screws. , J. Check operation of all moveable parts and, if necessary, adjust to ensure proper and smooth function. , K. Upon completion of installation, inspect work of this Section and touch-up, where required, minor or damaged surface finish to restore it to original condition. Replace damaged components which, in the opinion of the Consultant, cannot be satisfactorily repaired. L. Fabricate display case as detailed. Coordinate the work and install the following ' items supplied by other Sections: Sliding glass door track Section 08800 , Eggcrate and trim Section 10950 Fabric covered tackboard Section 10950 7175-06410.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07160 ' BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes the supply and installation of all bituminous dampproofing called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together With all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. ' 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03300 B. Masonry Section 04200 ' 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Do dampproofing in accordance with CGSB 37-GP-3M. B. Do sealing work in accordance with CGSB 37-GP-11M except where specified otherwise. ' C. Do priming of surface in accordance with CGSB 37-GP-15M except where specified otherwise. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Approved by material manufacturer. B. Workmanship Standards: 1. Prepare and apply materials in accordance with material manufacturer's specifications. ' 2. Keep copy of manufacturer's specifications on site for duration of work. ' 7175-07160.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07160 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING Page 2 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. Do not proceed with work when wind chill effect would tend to set bitumen before proper curing takes place. B. Do not apply dampproofing in wet weather. C. Provide forced air circulation during installation and curing periods for enclosed , applications. D. Apply dampproofing only when air temperature is within limits specified by material , manufacturer. E. Protect surrounding building surfaces from damage. ' F. During cold weather, store materials at minimum 40°F until immediately prior to , application. 1.07 WARRANTY ' A. At no cost to Owner, remedy any defects in work, including work of this and other Sections, due to faults in materials or workmanship provided under this Section of , Specifications appearing within a period of two (2) years from date of substantial performance of entire work of the contract as certified by Architect. Provide Owner with a written warranty to this effect. , 1.08 SUBMITTALS , A. Submit WHMIS Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)for all products prior to delivery to the site. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL A. Asphalt: 1. For application and curing at temperatures above 5°C: To CGSB 37-GP-1M. Package label or bill of lading for bulk hot liquid asphalt must indicate type, , softening point, flash point, equiviscous temperature range and final blowing temperature. 7175-07160.wpd e ' DIVISION 7 SECTION 07160 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING Page 3 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) 2. For application and curing at temperatures above 0°C but below 5°C: To CGSB 37-GP-6Ma+Arndt-Oct-78. Package label or bill of lading for bulk hot liquid asphalt must indicate type, softening point, flash point, equiviscous temperature range and final blowing temperature. ' B. Sealing Compound: Plastic cutback asphalt cement to CGSB 37-GP-5M. ' C. Asphalt Primer: To CGSB 37-GP-9Ma. ' 2.02 COMPATIBILITY A. Ensure that all materials used are compatible. B. Provide proof of compatibility. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP A. Keep hot asphalt: 1. Below its flash point. 2. At or below its final blowing temperature. 3. Within its equiviscous temperature range at place of application. 3.02 PREPARATION A. All surfaces which are to receive dampproofing must be smooth, clean, dry, frost-free and in sound condition. All moisture, frost, grease, oils, or other foreign materials ' which may impede the adhesion of the dampproofing must be removed. B. Before applying dampproofing: Seal exterior joints between foundation walls and ' footings, joints between concrete floor slab and foundation and around penetrations through dampproofing with sealing compound. 3.03 APPLICATION ' A. Apply primer. 7175-07160.wpd DIVISION 7 , SECTION 07160 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING Page 4 3.03 APPLICATION (Cont'd) B. Apply dampproofing in accordance with applicable CGSB application standard as follows: ' Material Application CGSB 37-GP-1M use CGSB 37-GP-3M , CGSB 37-GP-6Ma+Amdt-Oct-78 use CGSB 37-GP-12M 3.04 SCHEDULE A. Apply continuous, uniform coating to entire exterior faces of foundation walls and at ' all other locations shown on the drawings from 50 mm below finished grade level to and including tops of foundation wall footings. B. Apply two additional coats of dampproofing to vertical corner and construction joints Pp Y J for a minimum width of 230 mm on each side, and all around and for 230 mm along pipes passing through walls. 3.05 INSPECTION AND REPAIR A. Inspect membrane thoroughly immediately before backfilling and make any corrections to cracks, voids and other obvious defects which would impede the membrane from performing as intended. 7175-07160.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07195 AIR BARRIER Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED ' This Section of the contract includes the supply and installation of all air barriers called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and ' meaning of the drawings and specifications. This work includes but is not limited to the following: A. Cleaning and verification of substrates. B. All air barrier membranes. C. Air and Vapour Seals. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Masonry Section 04200 B. Pre-Engineered Building Section 05550 C. Building Insulation Section 07200 D. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Insulation Section 07218 E. Metal Wall Cladding Section 07410 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The latest issues of the following codes and standards shall govern the work of this Section: 1. The Ontario Building Code 2. CAN2 51.33.M86 3. ASTM D-624 ' 4. ASTM T-412 5. CGSB 57GP52M ' 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Approved by membrane material manufacturer. 7175-07195.wpd DIVISION 7 , SECTION 07195 AIR BARRIER Page 2 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE (Cont'd) ' B. Workmanship Standards: 1. Prepare and apply materials in accordance with membrane material manufacturer's specifications. 2. Keep copy of manufacturer's specifications on site for duration of work. , C. Ensure that membrane manufacturers field representative is present at site to observe ' installation of air barrier system and that he, upon completion of work, confirms in writing that work is installed as specified. 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE , A. Deliver material to the site in the original unbroken packages bearing the name of ' manufacturer. B. Store materials in an approved manner at the site preceding application and protect ' from damage at all times. 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS A. Apply membrane only when air temperature is within limits specified by material manufacturer. B. Protect surrounding building surfaces from damage. , C. During cold weather, store materials at minimum 40 deg. F until immediately prior to application. ' 1.08 WARRANTY A. At no cost to Owner, remedy any defects in work, including work of this and other Sections, due to faults in materials or workmanship provided under this Section of Specifications appearing within a period of two (2) years from date of substantial performance of entire work of the contract as certified by Architect. Provide Owner with a written warranty to this effect. 7175-07195.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07195 ' AIR BARRIER Page 3 ' 1.09 SUBMITTALS A. Submit three copies of manufacturers product data and installation instructions. B. Submit two 300 mm square samples of membrane. ' C. Submit MSDS data sheets for all products and materials prior to delivery to the site. ' PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS ' A. General: Use materials specified. ' B. Air barrier membrane shall be an SBS modified bitumen peel and stick membrane, in roll widths of 914 mm, with the following minimum physical properties: ' Thickness 1.45 mm Permeability (ASTM E96) 0.05 perms Tensile Strength 8.8 N/mm ' C. Flexible air barrier shall be comprised of a high strength fibreglass centre scrim with S.B.S. modified bitumen both sides and covered face and back with polypropylene. The modified bitumen shall consist of at least 80% of the overall thickness of the ' sheet. Material must be compatible with spray applied polyurethane insulation specified in Section 07218. ' D. Acceptable Products: Vedagard Non-Slip by Bakor Inc. ' Bituthene 5000 by W.R. Grace & Co. Mel-Dek by W.R. Meadows ' E. Primers, adhesives and mastics shall be as recommended by the air barrier membrane manufacturer. ' PART 3: EXECUTION ' 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine all surfaces to ensure conformance to the manufacturer's recommended ' surface conditions. 7175-07195.wpd DIVISION 7 , SECTION 07195 AIR BARRIER Page 4 , 3.01 INSPECTION (Cont'd) ' B. Do not proceed with air barrier application until all substrate defects are repaired in accordance with the directions in 3.02 "Preparation". ' 3.02 PREPARATION , A. All surfaces which are to receive flexible air barrier must be smooth, clean, dry, frost-free and in sound condition. All moisture, frost, grease, oils, or other foreign ' materials which may impede the adhesion of the air barrier must be removed. B. Concrete must be cured 28 days and dry before air barrier membrane is applied. Use , form release agents which will not transfer to the concrete or adversely effect the adhesion of the membrane to the ultimate cured concrete. If concrete is cured with curing compounds, the compounds must not contain any oil, wax or other compounds ' which may impede or effect the adhesion of the membrane to the surface. Remove any and all sharp protrusions and repair any defects such as spalled or loose aggregate areas. ' 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Apply I membrane in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed directions. , B. Apply membrane at locations shown on drawings, to bridge all gaps in the masonry ' wall including control joints. Minimum width each side of joint shall be 150 mm. C. Apply membrane by heating the surface in contact with the substrate with a , trigger-activated propane torch, type as recommended by the manufacturer. D. All side and end laps shall be overlapped a minimum of 50 mm and fused to the ' adjacent sheet. E. At all window, wall and door openings, return the air barrier and terminate it in the , rough opening. F. Co-ordinate the construction of the roof/wall junction with the roofing contractor, the ' metal siding contractor, and the pre-engineered building supplier so as to maintain continuity of the air barrier from the wall to the roof. 7175-07195.wpd ' DIVISION 7 SECTION 07195 AIR BARRIER Page 5 ' 3.04 INSPECTION AND REPAIR A. Inspect membrane thoroughly before covering and make any corrections to punctures, ' tears, voids and other obvious defects which would impede the membrane from performing as intended. B. Restrict construction traffic and equipment movement near the completed air barrier to only essentially related trades. For any other trades continuing to work near the completed air barrier, appropriate protection shall be provided. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. Install air barrier membrane where required to provide a completely sealed building envelope at the following locations: 1. At junction between masonry cavity walls and metal siding. 2. At all control joints in masonry cavity walls prior to the application of spray applied insulation (interior and exterior walls). 3. At all perimeters through masonry cavity walls. ' 4. At masonry cavity walls to provide air/vapour seal at junction between wall and roof assemblies. ' 5. At metal clad walls to provide air/vapour seal at junction between wall and roof assemblies. ' 6. At junction between wall assemblies and insulated soffits. ' 7. At all exterior door and window openings. 8. At all other locations shown on the drawings. 7175-07195.wpd 1 DIVISION 7 SECTION 07200 BUILDING INSULATION Page 1 _PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1 A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. 1 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes the supply and installation of all building insulation called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary 1 incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. This work includes but is not limited to the following: ' A. All wall and ceiling insulation B. All perimeter and under slab insulation 1 C. All wall and ceiling vapour barriers D. All loose fill insulation E. Insulating sheathing and wind barrier i 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ' A. Excavating, Backfilling and Grading Section 02200 B. Masonry Section 04200 1 C. Rough Carpentry Section 06100 D. Air Barrier Section 07195 E. Spray Applied Polyurethane Foam Insulation Section 07218 1 F. Roof Insulation Section 07500 G. Sheet Metal Roofing Section 07610 H. Gypsum Wallboard Section 09250 1 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver material to the site in the original unbroken packages bearing the name of manufacturer. B. Store materials in an approved manner at the site preceding application and protect from damage at all times. i 1 7175-07200.wpd DIVISION 7 , SECTION 07200 BUILDING INSULATION Page 2 ' PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS , A. General- Use materials specified. ' B. Wind Barrier Membrane: Spun bonded olefin fibres, interwoven in sheet form, in roll widths of 9'-0", TYVEK Housewrap as manufactured by E. I. duPont de ' Nemours & Co. Inc. C. Rigid Insulation: ' .1 Rigid insulation at perimeter of ground floor slab and below grade shall be extruded expanded polystyrene to CAN/ULC S701-97 Styrofoam SM ' insulation as manufactured by Dow Chemical Canada Inc. Thickness as detailed. .2 Adhesive shall be as recommended and manufactured by Dow Chemical. D. Batt Insulation: Fibreglass unfaced friction fit baits to CSA A101-M1983, Type 1 for wall and ceiling application,width and thickness as shown on details, Fibreglas Pink as manufactured by Fibreglas Canada Inc. E. Insulatin Sheathing: 1"thick, Glasclad rigid insulation board with Tyvek facing as ' manufactured by Fibreglas Canada Inc. F. Vapour Retardant: ' .1 Vapour retardant 6 mil polyethylene film in roll width of 10'-0" to CAN/CGSB-51.34-M. ' .2 For vapour retardant below slab refer to Division 2. G. Building Paper: To CAN 2-51.32 M77,15#asphalt impregnated paper. ' H. Rough Hardware: Nails and staples as required for installation of insulation and , membrane materials, galvanized to CSA B111-1974 and B34-1967. I. Sheathing Tape: Pressure sensitive self-adhesive biaxially oriented polypropylene , film, minimum 2%'wide, Y-8086 Contractors Sheathing Tape by 3M Canada Inc. 7175-07200.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07200 BUILDING INSULATION Page 3 ' PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Batt Insulation and Loose Insulation .1 Install friction fit batt insulation in walls and ceilings, fit tight to framing. ' Ensure complete coverage and fill all voids in framing. Leave eave vents at roof edge unobstructed. Do not compress insulation. Fit insulation tight to all penetrations. .2 Pack loose fibreglass insulation in crevices between exterior concrete and door and window frames and about lintels, frames, beams around ducts at ' holes and other places where shown or required to eliminate air infiltration. .3 Pack loose fibreglass into voids around mechanical and electrical pipes and 1 ducts where they pass through walls and slabs. .4 Install friction fit insulation in spaces as shown on drawings. C. Perimeter Insulation ' .1 Install perimeter insulation just prior to backfilling. .2 Apply adhesive in gobs or pads to the back of the insulation board at a rate of 64 to 107 square feet per gallon. Pads of adhesive shall be on ' approximately 12" centres and 2" in diameter. Joints shall be left dry with joints brought into tight contact. Apply insulation to the wall with a slight sliding motion to ensure good contact. ' .3 Protect insulation from damage until time for backfilling. D. Vapour Barrier Retardant 1 Vapour retardant shall be installed full height of walls and over all ceilings without breaks on warm side of insulation and run perpendicular to framing in the largest length possible. .2 All joints shall be lapped 6" minimum and taped. .3 Vapour retardant shall be secured at top of wall with fasteners just prior to application of the gypsum board. Provide additional air seal vapour barriers at junctions of all walls and openings in walls. 4 Install vapour barrier retardant over underside of existing roof trusses in existing building. Lap all joints 6" and tape. ' 7175-07200.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07200 BUILDING INSULATION Page 4 ' 3.01 INSTALLATION (Cont'd) ' E. Loose Fill Insulation .1 Pneumatically place loose fill insulation above existing insulation in existing roof space to thickness indicated on the drawings. .2 Insulation shall be evenly distributed over entire attic space. Ensure all ceiling areas exposed to outside air are insulated. .3 Ensure unobstructed air circulation at eave vents. ' F. Insulating Sheathing .1 Install 1" thick insulating sheathing over gypsum sheathing in steel ' stud/masonry walls in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. .2 Secure sheathing to steel studs with self tapping sheet metal screws. .3 Tape all joints in sheathing, to seal wind and rain barrier facing. F. Wind Barrier .1 Install wind barrier membrane on exterior walls, over entire surface of wall ' sheathing prior to installation of masonry veneer and siding in strict accordance with manufacturers direction. Tape to sheathing. .2 Lap all joints minimum 12" and tape. .3 Pull fabric snug. Sags or wrinkles will not be permitted. ' .4 At door and window openings, cut fabric diagonally from corner to corner, pull loose material inside opening and fasten to studs. Tape or seal all joints between windows and air barrier. .5 Tape all joints using self adhesive sheathing tape, 66 mm wide. Tape membrane to foundation wall at bottom, and at all other wall penetrations. .6 Seal wind barrier at perimeter in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. .7 Coordinate with installation of air barrier membrane as specified in Section 07195 at roof/wall junctions. 7175-07200.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07218 1 SPRAYED POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION Page 1 ' PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENT ' A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. I1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. The work of this section includes all spray applied polyurethane foam insulation called for or implied by the drawings and specifications together with all incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Cast-in-place Concrete Section 03300 B. Masonry Section 04200 C. Pre-Engineered Building Section 05550 D. Rough Carpentry Section 06100 E. Air Barrier Section 07195 ' F. Building Insulation Section 07200 G. Sealants Section 07900 1.04 REG ULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. CAN/CGSB 581.23-92 Thermal Insulation, Urethane, Spray in place. 1 B. CAN/CGSB 51.39-92 Spray Application of Rigid Polyurethane Cellular Plastic Thermal Insulation for Building Construction. C. Manual for Installers of Spray Polyurethane Foam Thermal Insulation, Canadian 1 Urethane Foam Contractor's Association. D. Canadian Urethane Foam Contractors Association (CUFCA) Quality Assurance Program, June, 1992. E. National Energy Conservation Association (NECA). 1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Provide materials which maintain continuity of thermal insulation and air barrier at ' building enclosure in conjunction with thermal and air barrier materials specified elsewhere. B. Finished RSI value of spray applied insulation shall be minimum RSI 2.10 (R12) but in no case shall insulation thickness be less than 50 mm. ' 7175-07218.wpd DIVISION 7 t SECTION 07218 SPRAYED POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION Page 2 1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS (Cont'd) C. Ypolyurethane S ra foam to meet air leakage requirements of air barriers (<0.02 , P Us•m2 at 75 Pa). D. Spray polyurethane foam to have permeance rating of 19 ng/Pa-s-m2 for 50 mm ' thickness. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Before commencing work under this section, submit in accordance with Division 1: ' 1. Copy of Foam Contractors license under the CUFCA Quality Assurance Program; ' 2. Copy of applicator certification by CUFCA/NECA; 3. Submit WHMIS Data Sheets(MSDS)for all spray applied insulation and primers prior to material deliver to the site; 4. Field quality control procedures to be utilized by the applicator to ensure proper preparation and installation of the materials specified. 1.07 TEST REPORT A. Submit test reports, verifying qualities of insulation that meet or exceed requirements , of this specification. 1.08 QUALIFICATIONS r A. Contractor must be licensed under CUFCA and approved by the material manufacturer to perform work under this section. B. The contractor must have at least 5 years experience in the application of spray ' polyurethane foam insulations. 1.09 MOCK-UP A. Spray apply material in specified thickness to mock-up panel specified in Section 04200. Cooperate with masonry contractor to ensure timely completion of mock-up panel prior to commencement of the masonry wall construction. 1 1.10 PROTECTION A. Protect all adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage by over spray. ' 7175-07218.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07218 SPRAYED POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION Page 3 ' 1.10 PROTECTION (Cont'd) B. Apply spray insulation only at times and in conditions in accordance with ' manufacturers recommendations. C. Limit exposure of spray insulation to ultra violet light by providing opaque covers, tarpaulins and the like. Spray insulation which will be exposed for 48 hours before installation of the masonry shall be covered. ' 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store material as recommended by manufacturer's written instructions in ' original, sealed, labeled containers in accordance with Division 1. B. During cold weather, store raw materials in heated storage. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Warrant work of this Section against defects or deficiencies for a period of two (2) years from date of substantial completion in accordance with General Conditions. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS 1 A. Spray polyurethane foam insulation to CAN/CGSB 51.23-92 and meeting the following criteria: PHYSICAL PROPERTIES TEST PROCEDURE UNITS RESULT Density ASTM D1622 Kg/M3 39.2 ' Compressive Strength ASTM D1621 KPa 185 Tensile Strength ASTM D1623 KPa 385 Shear Strength ASTM C273 KPa 264 Flexural Strength ASTM C273 KPa 230 Thermal Resistance 2 days at 23°C ASTM C518 m21C/W per 25 mm 1.39 ' Water Absorption ASTM D2842 %by Volume 0.48 Water Vapour Permeance ASTM E96 25 mm Thickness ng/Pa•s•m2 2819 50 mm Thickness ng/Pa-s-m2 7175.07218.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07218 SPRAYED POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION Page 4 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) PHYSICAL PROPERTIES TEST PROCEDURE UNITS RESULT 1 Closed Cell Content ASTM D2856 % 97 , Air Leakage 50 mm Thickness ASTM E283 and 1/S.M2 0.000167 E330 Flame Spread CAN/ULC 8-102 25-500 B. The sprayed polyurethane foam shall exceed the requirements for type III air barriers, , as outlined by the Institute for Research in Construction - National Research Council of Canada (0.05 Us•m2. Indoor Humidity greater than 55%). C. Insulation to be CFC free formulation. ' D. Primers: in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations if required for surface conditions. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are suitable to accept work required in this section. B. Report, in writing, defects in surfaces or conditions which may adversely affect the performance of products installed under this section to the Engineer; prior to commencement of work. C. Do not commence work until defects have been corrected. t 3.02 PREPARATION t A. Mask and cover adjacent areas to protect from over spray. B. Apply primers for special condition as required by foam manufacturer. ' C. Clean work area prior to commencing spray operations. D. Surfaces to receive sprayed polyurethane foam insulation shall be frost free and not coated with release agents or other deleterious substances. Commencement of work ' shall be deemed as acceptance of existing work and conditions. 7175-07218."d DIVISION 7 SECTION 07218 ' SPRAYED POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION Page 5 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply insulation to _ pp y clean surfaces m accordance with CAN/CGSB 51-39 92 and manufacturer's printed instructions. Use primer where recommended by manufacturer. B. Cooperate with other sections to ensure all air barrier, flashing membranes and the 1 like have been installed as necessary. C. Apply air barrier membrane material in accordance with Section 07190 to bridge all gaps and control joints in the masonry wall, prior to application of spray applied insulation. ' D. Spray polyurethane foam insulation only during periods when ambient air temperatures are within range of 5° C to 32° C. 1 E. Finished polyurethane foam shall be free of voids and embedded foreign materials and to minimum thicknesses shown or specified on drawings. ' F. Fill all door frames as indicated on the drawings with sprayed insulation ' 3.04 TOLERANCE A. Maximum variation from required thickness: 3 mm. 1 3.05 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS ' A. Installed assembly will be tested and inspected for conformance with specifications by an independent inspection and testing company retained and paid for by the owner. 7175-07218.wpd eDIVISION 7 SECTION 07270 FIRE STOPPING AND SMOKE SEALS Page 1 ' PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. i1.02 RELATED WORK A. Sealants Section 07900 B. Fire stopping at Mechanical Electrical Penetrations Divisions 15 & 16 1.03 QUALITY CONTROL 1 A. Fire stopping components shall be listed and labelled by ULC. O1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to start of work, submit list of proposed fire stopping and smoke seal materials together with suitable documentation to verify that specified requirements will be met. B. Upon Consultants request, submit samples of materials. ART : PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Fire stopping and smoke seal systems: in accordance with CAN4-S115-M85, 1 asbestos free and capable of maintaining an effective barrier against flame, smoke and gases in compliance with requirements of jurisdictional authorities; labelled by ULC. Fire resistance rating of installed systems shall be equal to fire resistance rating of adjacent/surrounding building components. B. Fire stopping materials: foamed in place insulation, mortar, grout, gun grade sealant, mineral fibre felt, or other materials bearing ULC label for required fire rating. C. Smoke seals and fire stopping exposed to view: sealant type. D. Service penetration assemblies: certified by ULC in accordance with CAN4-S115-M85 and listed in ULC Guide No. 40 U19. ' 7175-07270.wpd DIVISION 7 ' SECTION 07270 FIRE STOPPING AND SMOKE SEALS Page 2 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) , E. Service penetration fire stop components: certified by ULC in accordance with CAN4- S115-M85 and listed in ULC Guide No. 40 U19.13 and ULC Guide No. 40 U19.15 under the Label Service of ULC. F. Fire stopping and smoke seals at openings intended for ease of re-entry such as cables: elastometric seal; do not use cementitious or rigid seal at such locations. G. Fire stopping and smoke seals at openings around penetrations for pipes, ductwork and other mechanical items requiring sound and vibration control; elastometric seal; do not use a cementitious or rigid seal at such locations. Primers: to manufacturer's recommendation for specific material, substrate and end , use. H. Water (if applicable): potable, clean and free from injurious amounts of deleterious substances. I. Damming and back-up materials, supports and anchoring devices: to manufacturer's ' recommendations, and in accordance with tested assembly being installed as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. J. Sealants for vertical joints: non-sagging. , K. Ensure fire stopping materials used are suitable for each particular application. Where fire stopping will be subjected to loading, use and install materials which will support the load. Obtain Consultant's approval before proceeding with installation. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION , A. Examine sizes and conditions of voids to be filled to establish correct thickness and installation of materials. Ensure that substrates and surfaces are clean, dry and frost free. B. Prepare surfaces in contact with fire stopping materials and smoke seals to , manufacturer's instructions. C. Maintain insulation around pipes and ducts penetrating fire separation. , D. Mask where necessary to avoid spillage and over coating onto adjoining surfaces, remove stains on adjacent surfaces. 7175-07270.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07270 FIRE STOPPING AND SMOKE SEALS Page 3 1 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install fire stopping and smoke seal materials in accord with manufacturer's 1 recommendations and ULC test requirements. B. Provide fire stopping and smoke seal at control joints, between fire rated ' walls/partitions and structural deck above, and at other locations, as required, to maintain integrity of smoke and fire barriers. ' C. Fire stopping and smoke seal in locations exposed to view shall be of the sealant type, alternatively, other fire stopping material may be used, provided it is covered by a bead of sealant. ' D. Seal holes or voids made by through penetrations, poke-through termination devices, and unpenetrated openings or joints to ensure continuity and integrity of fire separation are maintained. E. Provide temporary forming as required and remove forming only after materials have gained sufficient strength and after initial curing. F. Tool or trowel exposed surfaces to a neat finish. ' G. Remove excess compound promptly as work progresses and upon completion. 3.03 INSPECTION A. Notify consultant when ready for inspection and prior to concealing or enclosing fire stopping materials and service penetration assemblies. 1 3.04 CLEAN-UP A. Remove excess materials and debris and clean adjacent surfaces immediately after application. B. Remove temporary dams after initial set of fire stopping and smoke seal materials. 7175-07270.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07411 PREFORMED METAL SIDING Page 1 I PART 1: GENERA_ L ' 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. Comply with the requirements of Division I. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all preformed metal siding, soffits and fascia called ' for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. ELSEWHERE 1.13 RELATES WORK SPECIFIED L ' A. Masonry Section 04200 B. Rough Carpentry Section 06100 C. Lightweight Steel Framing Section 07425 ' D. Sheet Metal Roofing Section 07610 E. Metal Flashing and Trim Section 07620 ' 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Do preformed metal siding work to CGSB 93-GP-2M and CGSB 93-GP-5M+Amdt-Sep-78, except where specified otherwise. ' 1.05 SAMPLES 1 A. Submit duplicate 600 mm long samples of siding material, of colour and profile specified in accordance with Division 1. rPART 2: PRODUCTS 1 2.01 MATERIALS A. Siding, Soffits and Fascias: To CGSB 93-GP-2M, minimum 0.6 mm base thickness, prepainted aluminum panels. Colour to be selected by the Architect. 1 B. Siding: Clapboard profile for horizontal application, smooth finish, with preformed p male and female lip joints, prepunched nailing strip. 1115-01411.wpd DIVISION 7 , SECTION 07411 PREFORMED METAL SIDING Page 2 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) C. Soffit: Of exterior flat sheet, "V"crimped for stiffness. Ventilated with prepunched ' holes and elongated slits. Provide insect screens at vents. D. Fascias: Of exterior flat sheet with preformed drip edge at bottom, horizontal "V" crimp for stiffness. E. Accessories: Exposed trim, closures, cap pieces etc. preformed, of same material and colour as siding. F. Fasteners: To CSA B111-1974, hot dipped galvanized coated steel. All fasteners shall be concealed. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION , A. Install starter strips, inside comers, continuous outside comers, edgings, soffits and drip, cap and sill flashings. ' B. Install siding and attachments sequentially from starter strips up, to manufacturer's instructions. ' C. Install facing on soffit and fascia where indicated. D. Install exterior comers, fillers and closure strips with individually formed and profiled work using concealed fasteners. E. Maintain joints in exterior sheets, true to line, tight fitting. ' 7175-07411.wpd ' DIVISION 7 SECTION 07425 LIGHTWEIGHT STEEL FRAMING Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all lightweight steel framing systems called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: ' A. Exterior steel stud wall framing. B. Lightweight steel roof joists and rafters. C. Masonry ties and accessories. D. Bridging and bracing. E. Connections including slotted connections to accommodate movement of building ' structure. F. Gypsum sheathing. ' 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Masonry Section 04200 B. Rough Carpentry Section 06100 C. Building Insulation Section 07200 D. Sealants Section 07900 E. Hollow Metal Doors, Screens and Pressed Metal Frames Section 08100 F. Gypsum Wallboard Section 09250 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The National Building Code of Canada. B. The Ontario Building Code. C. CAN/CSA G164-M92 Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles. D. CAN/CSA-S16.1-M89 Limit States Design of Steel Structures. E. CAN/CSA S136-M89 Cold Formed Steel Structural Members. F. ASTM A653 Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process. G. ASTM A446. H. CSSBI Lightweight Steel Framing Manual 50-M. I. ASTM A525M General Requirements for Sheet Steel, Zinc coated by the Hot Dip Process. 7175-07425.wpd 1 DIVISION 7 SECTION 07425 LIGHTWEIGHT STEEL FRAMING Page 2 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS J. ASTM A591 Sheet Steel Cold Rolled Electrolytic Zinc Coated. ' K. CBSB 1-GP-181M Standard for Coating, Zinc Rich, Organic Ready Mix. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Use all means necessary to protect all materials before, during and after installation ' and to protect the installed work and materials of other trades affected by this work. B. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary r to the approval of the Consultant and at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.06 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit six(6) copies of shop drawings indicating layout and details of fabrication , and erection. Clearly indicate sizes and gauges of materials, framing, method of fastenings, spacing of all members, bridging and bracing. Indicate design loads. B. Exterior steel stud wall systems shall be designed by, and shop drawings shall bear ' the stamp of a registered Professional Engineer licensed to practice in the Province of Ontario. C. Submit duplicate samples of brick veneer ties specified for Consultant's approval. D. Submit six (6) copies of engineering calculations or data verifying the capacity of the members and the ability of the assemblies to meet the design requirements. E. Submit three (3) copies of field review reports. 1.07 PROTECTION A. Provide and maintain adequate temporary bracing for all work of this Section until permanent lateral support is in place. B. Provide and maintain scaffolding independent of walls in such a manner as to interfere as little as possible with other trades. Construct scaffolding in a rigid, t secure and safe manner in accordance with Ministry of Labour requirements. 7175-07425.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07425 LIGHTWEIGHT STEEL FRAMING Page 3 ' 1.08 DESIGN A. Design shall be based on Limit States Design Principles using factored loads and resistances. B. Loads and load factors shall be in accordance with the National Building Code of Canada. C. Resistances and resistance factors shall be determined in accordance with the National Building Code and CAN3-S136. D. Maximum allowable deflection of metal studs under specified loads shall be U600. ' E. Design bridging as necessary to align members during erection, and to provide necessary structural integrity during construction and in the completed structure. Design bridging to prevent stud rotation and translation perpendicular to the minor ' axis. F. Design lintels over all openings in accordance with the National Building Code. G. Maximum deflection of roof joists and rafters under specified loads shall be U360. H. Design components or assemblies to accommodate specified erection tolerances of the structure. I. Member spacing shall not exceed the following: 1. Wall studs: 16" o.c. 2. Roof rafters and joists: 16" o.c. J. Allow for movement of the structure. Design wind bearing stud end connections to accommodate floor/roof deflections such that the studs are not loaded axially. K. Connections between lightweight steel framing members shall be by bolts, welding or sheet metal screws. rL. Resistances for sheet metal screws shall be based on the manufacturer's lower bound test values multiplied by the appropriate resistance factor, 0, given in CAN3-S 136. ' 7175-07425.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07425 LIGHTWEIGHT STEEL FRAMING Page 4 1.09 GUARANTEE , A. The Contractor represents that he has the special qualifications for doing the work and that the plans and specifications are, in his opinion, appropriate and adequate for the construction and/or renovations set out therein. ' B. The Contractor hereby warrants the work of this Section against defects of workmanship and material, for a period of two years from the date of Substantial , Performance and agree to make good promptly any defects which occur or become apparent within the warranty period. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL STUD FRAMING ' A. Steel shall conform to the requirements of CAN3-S136 and shall be identified as , to specification, type, grade and mechanical properties. B. Steel shall meet the requirements of ASTM A-525M, General Requirements for ' sheet steel, zinc coated (galvanized) by the hot dip process, structural (physical) quality. Minimum grade, Grade 'D', 50 ksi yield, galvanized Z180 coating. C. Steel stud framing shall be as manufactured by Bailey Metal Products Ltd. , D. Steel studs shall be 6" deep, gauge to be determined to suit design criteria specified herein but not less than 0.048" uncoated thickness. E. Welding Electrodes: E480XXX. F. Provide all necessary tracks, bridging, fasteners, hardware and other accessories as required for a complete installation. G. Zinc rich paint for touch-up: CGSB 1-GP-181 M. 2.02 FASTENINGS A. Sheet Metal Screws: self tapping with a minimum coating thickness of 0.008 mm of zinc or cadmium. B. Sheathing Screws: 1", Type S-12 cadmium plated self-tapping screws. 7175-07425.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07425 LIGHTWEIGHT STEEL FRAMING Page 5 ' 2.03 GYPSUM SHEATHING A. CGC Gyplap Sheathing, 1/2" thick square edge with water repellant facings, to ASTM A82.7-M. 2.04 ACCESSORIES ' A. Brick Ties: Bailey Metal Products Ltd. adjustable veneer anchors designed for use with steel stud, Model (WAT) 10-18, 4" high, with 3/4" backieg, screw fastened. Stud connector to be 14 gauge G-90(2275)galvanized Grade D steel, 50 ksi yield to ASTM A-446. Wire ties to be 3/16" diameter, galvanized, size to suit wall thickness. Fasten stud connector to steel studs with two self-tapping galvanized ' screws as supplied by the manufacturer. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Fabrication and erection shall conform to the approved shop drawings. Modifications required to accommodate as-built conditions (other than minor ' dimensional changes) shall be submitted for approval. 3.02 WELDING A. Companies engaged in welding shall be certified by the Canadian Welding Bureau to CSA Standard W47.1. Companies shall have welding procedures approved and ' welders qualified for the base material types and thicknesses that are to be welded. B. Welds shall conform to CSA W59. ' C. For metal less than 3 mm thick, shop drawings may shown nominal weld leg sizes. For such material, the effective throats of welds shall not be less than the thickness ' of the thinnest connected part. D. Touch-up welds with zinc rich paint. 3.03 SCREWS ' A. Steel screws shall equal or exceed the minimum diameter indicated on the shop drawings. ' B. Penetration beyond joined materials shall be not less than 3 exposed threads. 7175-07425.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07425 LIGHTWEIGHT STEEL FRAMING Page 6 3.03 SCREWS (Cont'd) C. For material less than 3 mm thick, shop drawings may shown nominal weld leg sizes. For such material, the effective throats of welds shall not be less than the thickness of the thinnest connected part. ' D. Touch-up welds with zinc rich paint. 3.04 FABRICATION A. Where specified, provide cut-outs centred in the webs of members to accommodate services. Unreinforced cut-outs shall be limited to the dimensions in Table 1. The effect of cut-outs on the strength and stiffness of the member shall ' be considered. B. Fabrication tolerances for members shall conform to Table 2. ' C. The steel thickness exclusive of coating shall be marked on each member by embossing, stamping with indelible ink or by colour coding. ' 3.05 ERECTION A. Methods of construction may be either by piece (stick-built) or by fabrication into panels (panelized) either on or off site. B. Lightweight steel framing shall be erected true and plumb within the specified ' tolerances. Temporary bracing shall be employed wherever necessary to withstand all loads to which the structure may be subject during erection and subsequent construction. Temporary bracing shall be left in place as long as required for the safety and integrity of the structure. The Erector shall ensure that during erection, a margin of safety consistent with the requirements of the National , Building Code and CAN3-S136 exists in the uncompleted structure. C. Erection Tolerances: , 1. For the purposes of this section, camber is defined as the deviation from straightness of a member or any portion of a member with respect to its major axis, and sweep is defined as the deviation from straightness of a member or any portion of a member with respect to its minor axis. 2. For axial load bearing studs, out of plumbness and out of straightness ' (camber and sweep) shall not exceed 1/1000th of the member length. 7175-07425.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07425 ' LIGHTWEIGHT STEEL FRAMING Page 7 ' 3.05 ERECTION (Cont'd) 3. For wind bearing studs, out of plumbness shall not exceed 1/500th of the ' member length. 4. For rafters and joists, out of straightness (camber and sweep) shall not exceed 1/1000th of the member length. ' 5. For track, camber shall not exceed 1/1 000th of the member length. 6. Studs shall seat into top and bottom tracks. The gap between the end of the stud and the web of the track shall not exceed 1.5 mm for axial load bearing studs or 4 mm for wind bearing studs. ' 7. Spacing of studs shall not be more than 3 mm from the design spacing. The cumulative error in spacing shall not exceed the requirements of the ' finishing materials. D. Make all field measurements necessary to insure the proper fit of all members. E. Cutting of members may be by saw or shear. Torch cutting is not permitted. F. All axially loaded members shall be aligned vertically to allow for full transfer of the loads down to the foundation. Vertical alignment shall be maintained at floor/wall intersections. rG. Completed bearing shall be maintained under tracks to provide for load transfer in axially loaded assemblies. Any discrepancy shall by brought to the attention of the Architect or Project Engineer. H. Joists and rafters, or their end stiffeners, shall be located directly over axial load bearing studs. Alternatively, a load distribution member shall be provided to transfer loads. The use of track as a load distribution member is not permitted. I. Holes that are field cut into lightweight steel framing members shall conform to the requirements of Section 3.04 and 3.05. J. Splicing of axial load bearing members is not permitted. ' K. Insulation equal to that specified shall be placed in all jamb and header assemblies that will be inaccessible after their installation into the wall. Insure that insulation ' is kept dry and not compressed. L. Handling and lifting of prefabricated panels shall not cause permanent distortion 1 to any member or collateral material. 7175-07425.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07425 LIGHTWEIGHT STEEL FRAMING Page 8 3.06 SHEATHING , A. Install gypsum sheathing horizontally, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation, using self tapping sheet metal screws. 3.07 INSPECTION A. The lightweight steel framing Design Engineer, responsible for the production of , the shop drawings, shall provide periodic field review during construction and shall submit reports in accordance with Section 1.06. ' 1. The cost of this field review shall be paid for by the Contractor. B. Additional inspection and testing of materials and workmanship shall be carried out ' by a qualified Independent Inspection Agency appointed by the Architect. 1. The cost of this additional inspection shall be paid for out of the Cash ' Allowances for Inspection and Testing. 2. Any testing or inspection required by the Architect because of an error by , the Contractor or due to departure from the contract documents by the Contractor, shall be paid for by the Contractor. , 3. Inspection shall include. a. Checking that mill test reports are properly correlated to materials. b. Sampling fabrication and erection procedures for general conformity to the requirements of the specification. C. Checking that the welding conforms to the requirements of this specification. d. Checking fabricated members against specified member shapes. e. Visual inspection of all welded connections including sample checking of joint preparation and fit-up. f. Sample checking of screwed and bolted joints. g. Sample checking that tolerances are not exceeded during fit-up or ' erection. h. Additional inspection and testing of welded connections as required by CSA W59. , L General inspection of field cutting and alterations required by other trades. j. Submission of reports to the Architect, the Project Engineer, the , Contractor and the authorities having jurisdiction covering the work inspected with details of deficiencies discovered. 7175-07425.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07425 LIGHTWEIGHT STEEL FRAMING Page 9 ' 3.07 INSPECTION (Cont'd) 4. The Contractor shall provide the necessary cooperation to insure that the inspection can proceed. ' 5. The inspection provided in this section does not relieve the Contractor of p his responsibility for the performance of the contract. The Contractor is ' solely responsible for quality control and he shall implement his own supervisory and quality control procedures. 6. Materials or workmanship not conforming to the requirements of the contract documents may be rejected at any time during the progress or work. Table 1 —Allowable Dimensions for Unreinforced Cut-outs Member Depth Across the Member Web Along the Member Length *Centre to Centre Spacing (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) 92, 102 40 max. 105 max. 600 min. >152 65 max. 115 max. 600 min. The distance from the centerline of the last unreinforced cut-out to the end of the member shall be not less than 400 mm. Table 2— Fabrication Tolerances for Lightweight Steel Framing Members Member Type Member Depth Flange Width Lip Length Thickness Inside Radius Corner A B C t r Angles (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) Track, -1, +2 -1, +2 -0, +4 -0 t30 stud,joist or rafter * Only applicable to members subjected to web crippling. For rs2t+28% For 2t<rs4t+9% 1 Where r is the manufacturer's specified inside bend radius and t is the thickness exclusive of coating. ** Where drywall is attached directly to the flange, the minimum flange width shall be 31 mm. Member Type Length Tracks N/A ' Wind Bearing Studs f3 mm Axial Load Bearing Studs t1.5 mm Joists And Rafters t3 mm 7175-07425.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07530 1 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL ' 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. Comply with the requirements of Division I. ' 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all single ply E.P.D.M. roofing called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: ' A. Vapour barrier B. Roof insulation, mechanical fasteners C. E.P.D.M. roof membrane and flashing, gravel surface D. Flexible flashings and bituminous flashings E. Control joints and expansion joints ' F. Caulking G. Make good existing roofing and sheet metal work where affected by demolition and where new work connects to existing. H. Removal and disposal of existing roofing, curbs, flashing, parapets and blocking down to existing deck to the schedule as specified. I. All cutting in and flashing at temporary curbs and waterproofing, including column work pockets temporary patches where roof mounted equipment has been removed or modified to provide a watertight roof at all times. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Metal Roof Deck Section 05310 B. Wood Blocking (Rough Carpentry) Section 06100 C. Air Barrier Section 07195 D. Roof Drains And Mechanical Equipment Division 15, Mechanical ' 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE ' A. The roofing contractor shall have adequate facilities or access to facilities to take receipt of and store roofing materials so that the materials are ready to be built in. ' B. Deliver and store materials undamaged in original unopened containers with manufacturer's label and seals intact. Containers shall be stored upright and roofing membrane shall be stored on end to prevent flattening. All materials shall be protected from moisture at all times. No material shall be placed in direct contact with the earth. 7175-07530.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07530 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING Page 2 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE (Cont'd) C. All materials, except membrane, must be stored between 5° C and 27° C. If exposed to lower temperature, restore materials to 5° C minimum temperature before using. D. All materials, except membrane, must be stored in a dry area and protected from water and direct sunlight. Damaged materials shall be replaced at roofing Contractor's expense. ' E. Storage of insulation and roofing materials, etc. on the roof is prohibited. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Apply roofing in periods only approved by the roofing inspector. ' B. The roofing contractor must receive written authorization from the roofing inspector to proceed. C. Do not work during periods of rain, fog, sleet, snow or cold temperatures (below-15° C) 1.06 PROTECTION , A. Provide adequate protection of materials and work of this trade from damage by weather, traffic and other causes. Schedule roofing installations in such a manner that traffic over the completed portions of roofing will be avoided. At the end of each day's work seal exposed edges of roofing membrane. Protect work of other trades from damage resulting from the work of this trade. Make good such damage at no ' additional expense to the Owner and to the satisfaction of the Consultant. 1.07 GUARANTEE A. The Contractor represents that he has the special qualifications for doing the work and that the plans and specifications are, in his opinion, appropriate and adequate for the ' construction and/or renovations set out therein. B. The roofing Contractor hereby warrants the work of this Section, including vapour retardant, insulation and sheet metal work against defects of workmanship and ' material, and against any actual leakage for a period of five years from the date of Substantial Performance and agree to make good promptly any defects which occur or become apparent within the warranty period, such defects to include but not be ' restricted to leaking, failure to stay in place, undue expansion, lifting, deformation, loosening and splitting of seams, joint deformation, failure to adhere, deterioration, blisters, etc. 7175-07530.wpd ' DIVISION 7 SECTION 07530 ' ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING Page 3 1.07 GUARANTEE (Cont'd) C. The Contractor shall furnish the Guarantee Warranty in writing, on forms issued and approved by the Canadian Roofing Contractors Association, signed by the roofing tContractor. 1.08 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Consultant, samples and manufacturer's literature for all materials. B. Submit shop drawings of all components and accessories and including layout drawings and details for the tapered insulation system. ' C. Submit shop drawings detailing roof size, membrane sheet placement, location and type of penetrations, type of vapour retarder, insulation and insulation fasteners. ' D. Submit WHMIS Data Sheets for all products to be used on this project. 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The roofing and sheet metal Contractor shall be of recognized standing with a proven record of satisfactory installations, and shall be a member in good standing of the Canadian Roofing Contractors Association. B. All membrane work shall be carried out by applicators fully experienced in this type of work, and approved by the system manufacturer. I C. Roofing and sheet metal work shall be executed under the full time supervision of a competent foreman. D. A membrane manufacturer's representative shall be available to review installation procedure and to impact the completed installation to verify compliance with all specifications and details. E. The Owner will appoint and pay for an Independent Inspection Company to provide roofing inspection. The contractor shall provide full co-operation to the roofing inspector. ' 1.10 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Canadian Roofing Contractor's Association (CRCA) Metric Specification Manual, 1979, except as specified herein. ' 7175-07530.wpd DIVISION 7 , SECTION 07530 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING Page 4 1.10 REFERENCE STANDARDS (Cont'd) B. Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation (FM): "Loss Prevention Data, Insulated Steel Deck 1-28", FM "Approval Guide" including Revisions to date. C. Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC) "List of Equipment and Materials Volume II Building Construction" including supplements to date. D. Provide membrane roofing systems including insulation and all related materials to i conform to"ULC Class A"and"FM Class I"design criteria, as shown and as specified herein. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ' The roofing system shall be a loose laid, ballasted roofing system, Design 'B' Lexcan or ' approved equal, and including the following components: 1. Vapour retarder. , 2. Rigid roof insulation including tapered insulation. 3. EPDM roofing membrane. 4. Ballast. 5. All accessories, hardware and material required for a complete installation as described on the drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer of the roof membrane. , 2.02 MATERIALS ' A. General 1. Use materials as specified herein only, or approved equal. , 2. Compatibility between roofing system components is essential. All materials used on the roof shall be endorsed for compatibility by the applicator and the materials manufacturer. 3. All packed materials shall bear the manufacturer's name brand, weight and applicable specification number and printed instructions for storage, application, etc. Materials not identified shall be removed off the site. ' 4. Materials shall conform to the CSA or CGSB specification numbers.named including all revisions to date or shall be the product named. B. Vapour Retardant- Lexsuco Permate (Ultra) vapour retarder and Permate adhesive. ' 7175-07530.wpd iDIVISION 7 SECTION 07530 _ ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING Page 5 2.02 MATERIALS (Cont'd) ' C. Roofing membrane shall be 1.1 mm Lexcan E.P.D.M. (Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer) Elastomer, supplied in factory fabricated sheets up to 12.2 m x 30 m and meeting the physical characteristics shown in the following table: ' PROPERTY A.S.T.M. TYPICAL TEST METHOD TEST VALUES Thickness Tolerance D-751 ± 10% Tensile Strength D-412, Die C 9.0 MPa. (1305 psi)min. Elongation, Ultimate D-412 400%min. ' Tear Resistance D-642, Die C 35.0 kN/m min. (200 Ibf/in.) Ozone Resistance D-1149 No Cracks @ 7x magnification [7 days at 100pphm, 40°C, 50%ext.] ' Brittleness D-2137 Does not break @-60°C Water Absorption, mass D471 ± 1% Linear Dimensional Change D-1204 ±2% [28 days @ 115°C] ' Factory Seam Strength D-816 9.6 kN/m min. (55 Ibs/in.) After Heat Aging; 28 days @ 115°C Tear Resistance D-642, Die C 26.3 kN/m min. (150 Ibf/in.) Elongation, Ultimate D-412 200%min. Tensile Strength D-412, Die C 8.3 MPa (1205 psi)min. D. Bonding Adhesive - Lexcan#BA-90 or SAS 8000. ' E. Splicing Adhesive - Lexcan#SA-747. F. Splicing Tape- 100 mm wide Lexcan Splice Tape. G. Lap Sealant- Lexcan Lap Sealant. ' H. Night Sealant- Lexcan Frothpak. I. Water Cut-Offs- Lexcan water cut-off mastic or 50 mm x 1.6 mm Elastic Sealer Tape. J. Splice Cleaner- Lexcan SC-1 seam cleaner. K. Pourable Sealer- Lexcan pourable sealer. 7175-07530.wpd DIVISION 7 i SECTION 07530 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING Page 6 ' 2.02 MATERIALS (Cont'd) L. Termination Bar- Lexbar termination bar. ' M. Termination Tape- Lexcan 50 mm sealer tape. N. Roof board insulation- Lexsuco Isocyanurate with black facers or approved equal as recommended by the membrane manufacturer, thickness as shown on the drawings. ' O. Tapered Insulation: Posislope. P. Ballast- 19 to 38 mm diameter well graded, round washed river stone, clean and dry, , free from dust, sand or organic impurities, soft or friable materials. Q. Stack jacks (vent pipe flashings) - Copper stack jacks supplied by Lexsuco Canada , Ltd. applicable at all plumbing vent pipes. Sleeves supplied by other trades will not be acceptable. ' R. Elastic flashings- Field fabricated with E.P.D.M. membrane or Lexflash, 1.6 mm thick by Lexcan. Lexflash adhesive shall be Lexcan#SA-747. , S. Insulation Fasteners - where required by the manufacturer to meet FM uplift requirements, Lexsuco"screw and plate", Weatherguard Fasteners' "Dekfast", Grefco "Permafastener" or other FM - approved screw and plate fastener system with , compatible screws in length to suit insulation thickness, and tested with specified insulation to FM 1-90 Uplift Classification. T. Substitutions- If this Contractor substitutes materials or trade names specified herein with others such materials shall be removed immediately from the site making good all other work disturbed for such removals. ' PART 3: EXECUTION ' 3.01 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Examine work of other trades and notify in writing to the Consultant and Contractor that the work is acceptable or of any defects or discrepancies. Verify that work of other trades which penetrates roof deck or requires men and equipment to transverse ' roof deck has been completed or adequate protection is provided. B. Examine surfaces for inadequate anchorage, foreign material, moisture and unevenness which would prevent the execution and quality of application of the roofing system as specified. Do not proceed with application of the roof system until defects are corrected. Installation of any part of the work without the written acceptance of such surfaces shall require immediately removal of such installed work. 7175-07530.wpd 1 ' DIVISION 7 SECTION 07530 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING Page 7 3.02 WORKMANSHIP A. Workmanship shall be of the highest quality. Use only competent mechanics and execute work in accordance with drawings and specifications. ' B. Regard the manufacturer's printed recommendations and specifications as the minimum requirement for materials, methods and workmanship not otherwise ' specified. C. Maintain roofing equipment in good working order. D. Unsuitable or damaged materials shall immediately be removed from the site. E. Materials shall not be applied during inclement weather. Do not apply roofing over wet ' decks, or where frost or snow is present. 3.03 APPLICATION OF VAPOUR RETARDANT ' A. Install vapour retarder membrane and seal all laps, edges and penetrations in accordance with the manufacturers installation instructions. B. Apply in straight lines, free from wrinkles, tears or open laps. Minimum 150 mm end ' laps and 50 mm side laps tightly sealed with a continuous mopping of adhesive. At perimeters, vertical walls and curbs, etc. apply a 300 mm wide strip of vapour retardant and seal to air barrier membrane. ' C. No more vapour retardant shall be applied in any one working day than can be covered with insulation and properly"dried-in". D. Vapour retardant shall not be installed to bridge across expansion joints or similar devices. ' 3.04 INSTALLATION OF ROOF INSULATION A. Keep insulation dry at all times. Insulation showing evidence of having been dampened since its manufacture or separation of laminations shall not be used. Lay insulation panels with all joints staggered. Insulation shall be laid with the longest side ' parallel to the flutes unless the manufacturer stipulates otherwise. Lay board in tight contact to prevent gaps and resulting loss of thermal insulation value. Cut boards to fit neatly around projections through roof. ' B. At roof drains, reduce the insulation thickness by 13 mm for a distance of 600 mm from the centre of the drain. Fill the flutes of the steel deck at roof drains with insulation board adhered with adhesive for a distance of 600 mm from the centre of ' the drain to ensure total support at all drains prior to placement of vapour retardant. ' 7175-07530.wpd DIVISION 7 , SECTION 07530 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING Page 8 ' 3.04 INSTALLATION OF ROOF INSULATION (Cont'd) C. Protect all exposed edges of insulation where roofing temporarily terminates at the end of a working day by forming a water cut-off. Water cut-off shall consist of E.P.D.M. membrane, extending from the surface of the roof membrane minimum 200 , mm onto the deck. Ensure water cut-off is continuously secured to the deck and is removed prior to proceeding with work the following day. D. Insulation shall be installed in 2 layers with staggered joint. ' E. Insulation shall not be installed to bridge across expansion joints or control joints. F. Perimeter insulation and insulation around large protrusions shall be mechanically fastened to the requirements of Factory Mutual for a Class I roof, and as required by , the roof system manufacturer. 3.05 ROOF MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. Roof membrane shall consist of 1 ply of E.P.D.M. Elastomer sheets, loose laid and covered with ballast. B. Unroll membrane and position sheets, lapping edges a minimum of 100 mm. Allow , sheets to relax a minimum of thirty (30) minutes. C. Bond membrane to all vertical surfaces using bonding adhesive applied evenly with ' no globs or puddles, using a lambswool paint roller, to both membrane and substrate. Allow adhesive to dry until tacky, but not stringing to the touch. Roll coated membrane into adhesive, avoiding wrinkles. D. Fold top sheet of splice area back and clean seam area using white gas or other recommended solvent to remove talc on membrane surface. Apply seaming adhesive to both matting surfaces with a clean paint brush, using a circular motion to ensure ' proper coverage. E. Install seaming tape to folded edge of membrane and roll heavily with a hand roller. Remove paper backing and close joint allowing membrane to fall into place without stretching. Roll completed seam with steel hand roller. Apply lap sealant to all seam edges and feather with suitable tools as recommended and provided by the manufacturer. F. Flash all comers, vent pipes and curbs in accordance with the manufacturer's ' standard recommended details. Use either E.P.D.M. membrane or Lexflash flashing for field fabrication. Where SA-747 adhesive is applied, use lap sealant at Lexflash seam edge. Seal drains with water cut-off mastic or Elastic Sealer tape as per ' manufacturer's standard recommended details. 7175-07530.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07530 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING Page 9 3.05 ROOF MEMBRANE APPLICATION (Cont'd) G. Adhere membrane to scuppers in accordance with the manufacturer's standard recommended details. H. All roof hoppers shall be temporarily blocked when gravel on roof is being placed to prevent gravel from falling down leaders into drains. Exercise care to remove temporary blocking when work is not proceeding to avoid flooding. I. Form control joints and expansion in membrane where indicated on the drawings and ' install elastic flashing. ' 3.06 BALLAST INSTALLATION A. Upon completion of each section of roofing membrane, and after inspection by manufacturer's representative, install gravel ballast evenly over entire area. B. Ensure that lifts of 9 ravel ballast do not exceed roof design loads as noted on the ' structural drawings. C. Ballast shall be gently spread over membrane, taking care to protect membrane at all times. Ballast shall be installed at a rate of 50 kg/square metre (10 lbs./sq. ft.) and ' shall be of uniform thickness over entire roof area. ' 3.07 METAL FLASHING A. The roofing contractor shall complete all metal flashings in accordance with Section ' 07620. ' 3.08 PITCH POCKETS A. Provide and install pitch pockets around columns, handrail balustrades and other ' protrusions through the roofing, including the work of the Mechanical and Electrical Trades. Pockets shall be fabricated from 20 gauge steel with a Zinc Coating Designation G90 to ASTM A446 (latest edition) Class 'A', to a size 6" greater on each ' side of the protrusion. Solder all seams and comers. B. Flash in the pitch pockets with Lexflash Flashing in accordance with the ' manufacturer's standard recommended details. C. Completely fill the pockets with plastic cement. Slope the top of the filled pockets down from the centre to finish flush with the outside edges. 1175-07530.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07530 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING Page 10 ' 3.09 TEMPORARY FLASHING ' A. Install temporary roofing and flashings in all areas of modifications as necessary to provide a weathertight roof. 3.10 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Provide necessary facilities and co-operate with designated inspection and testing agency. B. Upon completion of the roofing system, an authorized manufacturers representative ' Will make an inspection of the installation for warranty acceptance. 7175-07530.wpd tDIVISION 7 SECTION 07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. ' 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all Sheet Metal Roofing called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: ' A. Sheet metal roofing, flashing, trim, and accessories. B. Membrane eave protection ' C. Felt underlayment. D. Thermal break spacers. ' 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Building Insulation Section 07200 ' B. Lightweight Steel Framing Section 07425 C. Roofing Section 07530 D. Metal Flashing and Trim Section 07620 1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES ' A. The latest issues of the following Codes and Standards shall govern the work of this Section. 1. The Ontario Building Code. 2. CSA S136 Cold Formed Steel Structural Members. ' 3. CSSBI - Standard Practice. 4. ASTM A446. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with General Conditions of the Contract. B. Indicate } types arrangements of sheets and joints es and locations of fasteners sheet 9 1 profile, lap dimensions, and details, attachments, anchorage, caulking, closures ' and special shapes. Include all necessary plans and details. 7175-07610.wpd 1 DIVISION 7 SECTION 07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING Page 2 , 1.05 SUBMITTALS (Cont'd) ' C. Submit for approval duplicate samples in the selected colour(s). 1.06 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING ' A. All products shall be handled and stored on the job in such a manner that no , damage shall be done to the material or the structures. B. Material showing evidence of improper handling and storage shall be rejected and removed from the site at no additional expense to the Owner. 1.07 SPECIAL CONDITIONS ' A. The erector shall be responsible for the examination and acceptance of surfaces , and the conditions affecting the proper installation of his materials and shall not proceed until all satisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. All dimensions must be verified in the field prior to submittal of Shop Drawings. ' 1.08 GUARANTEE ' A. The Contractor guarantees that he has the special qualifications for doing the work and that the plans and specifications are, in his opinion, appropriate and adequate for the construction set out herein. B. The Contractor and Subcontractor hereby jointly and severally warrant the work of , this Section against defects of workmanship and against any actual leakage for a period of Two (2)Years from the date of Substantial Performance and agree to make good any defects which occur or become apparent within the warranty ' period, such defects to include but not be restricted to leaking, failure to stay in place, lifting, loosening, etc. C. The manufacturer shall further guarantee the roof material for a period of 5 years ' against loss of finish. D. The Contractor shall fumish the Guarantee Warranty in writing or forms issued and ' approved by the Canadian Roofing Contractors Association, signed and countersigned by the General Contractor and Subcontractor. ' 7175-07610.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07610 ' SHEET METAL ROOFING Page 3 PART 2: PRODUCTS ' 2.01 MATERIALS A. Use materials as specified herein. B. Metal roof panels to ASTM A446, Grade W, prefinished, galvanized sheet steel, ' Stelco 5000 Series, colour to be selected by the Architect, from full range of manufacturers standard colours minimum 0.61 mm core nominal thickness. Profile shall be interlocking batten ribs at 18" c/c. Marquis Roof Sheet as manufactured ' by Vicwest Steel Inc. C. Flashing, trim, drip edge, gutters, down spouts, and accessories shall be same ' material and thickness as roof panels. Gable end wall cap flashing shall be supplied and installed by Section 07620. D. Roof panel support system shall be Concealed fastener, purpose made clip system with Z275 zinc coating as manufactured by Vicwest Steel Inc. ' E. Metal roof system accessories, closures and batten covers shall be Vicwest Steel Inc. Marquis Roof System Standards as required for a complete installation. Colour match to roof panels. Batten covers shall be 2" high snap on type. ' F. Eave Protection: 1. Ice and water shield, self adhesive Bituthene membrane, 40 mils minimum ' thickness, in roll widths of 920 mm, as manufactured by W.R. Grace & Co. of Canada Ltd. ' 2. Primer: Ice and water shield primer as manufactured by W.R. Grace &Co. Ltd. ' G. Roof Vents to be as recommended by the manufacturer, colour matched to roof material, roll formed prefinished sheet steel ridge ventilators with glass fibre weather filter. Provide all accessories including end plugs, connector plugs, straps ' and fasteners. H. Subframing shall be cold formed lightweight steel channels, 1 Y2"thick as detailed ' on the drawings with thermal break spacers. I. Fasteners: To CSA B111-1974, hot dipped galvanized coated steel. All fasteners ' shall be concealed. J. Isolation Coating: alkali resistant bituminous paint. ' K. Plastic cement: to CGSB 37-GP-5M. 7175-07610.wpd DIVISION 7 , SECTION 07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING Page 4 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) L. Snow Guards: Galvanized steel snow guards, prefinished sheet steel colour , matched to roof panels, and sealant adhesive as recommended by the roofing manufacturer. Zaleski Snow Guards and Roofing Specialties Inc., or approved equal. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXISTING CONDITIONS ' A. Examine work of other trades and notify in writhing to the Consultant and Contractor that the work is acceptable of any defects or discrepancies. B. Examine surfaces for inadequate anchorage, foreign material, moisture and unevenness which would prevent the execution and quality of application of the ' roofing system as specified. Do not proceed with application of the roof system until defects are corrected. Installation of any part of the work without the written acceptance of such surfaces shall require immediately removal of such installed work. , 3.02 WORKMANSHIP ' A. Workmanship shall be of the highest quality. Use only competent mechanics and execute work in accordance with drawings and specifications. , B. Regard the manufacturer's printed recommendations and specifications as the minimum requirement for materials, methods and workmanship not otherwise , specified. C. Maintain roofing equipment in good working order. D. Unsuitable or damaged materials shall immediately be removed from the site. 3.03 FABRICATION A. Form individual pieces in full length sheets, horizontal splices will not be allowed. ' Make allowances for expansion at joints. B. Hem exposed edges on underside %", mitre and seal. , C. Form sections square, true and accurate to size, free from distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance of performance. ' 7175-07610."d tDIVISION 7 SECTION 07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING Page 5 ' 3.03 FABRICATION (Cont'd) D. Apply minimum 0.2 mm dry film thickness coat of plastic cement to both faces of ' dissimilar metals in contact. E. Protect metals against oxidization by back painting with isolation coating where indicated. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Install purlin subframing over steel roof joists at 24" centre/centre. ' B. Install thermal break separators over each purlin. C. Install drip edge along eaves, overhang %z'with minimum 4"flange extending onto ' roof decking. Screw to subframing at 8" o.c. D. In accordance with referenced standards and manufacturers instructions, install metal flashings, install metal step flashings and apply eave protection, underiayment and roof clips. Lap underlayment minimum 4". Install all accessories in accordance with reviewed shop drawings. ' E. Install roof sheet on panel support clips, using manufacturers recommended installation procedures. Ensure batten is positively locked for full length of roof. ' Field cut mitres and install batten caps. F. Provide notched and formed closures, sealed against weather penetration at ' changes in pitch and at ridges. G. Install ridge vents in accordance with O.B.C. requirements and as shown on ' drawings. H. Provide snow guards, 1 row, adhered to sheet metal roofing between seams, at 16" c/c maximum. 3.04 TOUCH-UP AND CLEANING A. Touch up minor paint abrasions with touch up paint supplied by the Manufacturer. B. Clean roof by Dry wiping. 7175-07610.wpd ' DIVISION 7 SECTION 07620 ' METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 1 ' PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENT tA. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all metal flashing and trim called for or implied by the ' drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: A. Metal flashing and trim and roof edges and parapets. ' B. Metal counter flashing. C. Metal roof curb flashings. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ' A. Masonry Section 04200 B. Rough Carpentry Section 06100 C. Elastomeric Sheet Roofing Section 07530 ' D. Metal Roofing Section 07610 E. Roof Specialties and Accessories Section 07900 1.04 SUBMITTALS 1 A. Submit 12" x 12" samples of each type of sheet metal material in accordance with Division 1. ' B. Submit shop drawings showing all work of this Section. Drawings shall clearly show materials, profiles, fastenings, sealants, lap joints and the like. ' C. Submit duplicate colour charts showing full range of manufacturers available colours. D. Submit MSDS Data Sheets for all material proposed for use on the site. Material Data ' Sheets must be approved in writing by the Owner, prior to delivery to the site. ' 7175-07620.wpd DIVISION 7 , SECTION 07620 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 2 1.05 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Appearance: neatly and evenly lay out and install components. Exposed fastening , devices not permitted. B. Effects of Wind: resist positive and negative wind pressures without detrimental effects. C. Water Control: prevent passage of water. ' D. Thermal Movement: accommodate expansion and contraction of component parts , without buckling, failure of joints, undue stress on fasteners and other detrimental effects. E. Compatibility: components shall be compatible with dissimilar metals and materials ' with which they are in contact or fastened to so as to prevent corrosion, staining and other detrimental effects. If required, treat or separate contact surfaces with inert and ' non-staining insulation material to achieve compatibility. 1.06 REFERENCE STANDARDS ' A. Comply with the applicable provisions of the following reference standards: ASTM B32 - Solder Metal ' ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants Canadian Roofing Construction Association Specification Manuals. ' 1.07 WARRANTY , A. Submit a warranty to repair or replace metal flashing work for a period of five (5) years from date of substantial completion of work of this Section does not remain watertight , or free of material or workmanship defects affecting structure and appearance. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Work of this Section shall be performed by a qualified sheet metal contractor with a ' minimum of 5 years experience in the type of work required and specified. Submit proof of experience where requested by the Architect. 7175-07620.wpd ' DIVISION 7 SECTION 07620 ' METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 3 ' PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL ' A. Use materials only as specified herein and matching exactly, all approved samples. B. Ensure compatibility of all materials in contact with roof membranes. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Sheet Metal: 24 gauge galvanized sheet steel, commercial quality to ASTM A526-71 with Z275 designation zinc coating. primed, protected and finished with 0.025 mm ' nominal coating thickness, Stelco or Dofasco 5000 series, colour as selected by the Architect. ' B. Continuous hook on strips and metal bellows: 24 gauge galvanized sheet steel, zinc coating designation ZF275. C. Isolation Coating: Alkali resistant bituminous paint to CAN/CGSB-1.108-M89. D. Plastic Cement: To CGSB 37-BP-5M. ' E. Nails, Bolts, Screws and Other Flashings: same metal finish as sheet metal being used. The size of fastenings shall suit the applicable conditions. All nails, screws, and other flashings shall be subject to the approval of the Consultant or his representative. ' F. Caulking Sealant: Parr Uniseal Polysulphide as supplied by Parr Paints and Sealants Ltd.,.Toronto or PRC rubber caulk#5000 as supplied by PRC Chemical Corporation ' of Canada Ltd. G. Underlayment: No. 15 perforated asphalt felt to CSA A123.3. H. Cleats: of same material and thickness as sheet metal, minimum 2"wide. ' PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install sheet metal work in accordance with CIRCA specifications and as detailed. DIVISION 7 ' SECTION 07620 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 4 ' 3.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate metal flashings and other sheet metal work in accordance with applicable CIRCA specifications and as indicated. , B. Form pieces in 8'-0" maximum lengths. Make allowance for expansion at joints. C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2". Mitre and seal comers with sealant. , D. Form sections square, true and accurate to size,free from distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance or performance. E. Apply isolation coating (two coats) to metal surfaces to be embedded in concrete or mortar or dissimilar metals. , F. Install underlayment below sheet metal in accordance with CIRCA "FL" Series details. Lap all joints 4" minimum. Secure with large head roofing nails. ' G. All seams shall be of the "slip lock type" that permit adequate movement without resulting in deformation or loosening of metal flashings. Lapped joints or exposed raw ' edges will not be accepted. Exposed edges shall be "double back" at least %". At eaves, parapets, etc., metal shall be hooked over continuous starter strips minimum 1 gauge thicker than the metal used for flashing. Secure starter strips at 12" on centre , or closer as required. H. Where metal terminates under fascia boards, secure metal at 7-0" centre using specified fasteners. At curbs to openings or at sleepers, etc., provide locked or standing seams at comers. Solder mitred comers, pop rivet or form standing seams. I. Secure metal flashings in reglets at 7-0" centres and further secure metal to vertical , surfaces at locks as required. J. All flashings shall be installed in perfectly straight lines. Irregular or badly fitted work ' will not be accepted. Exposed fastenings will only be permitted where concealed fastening is not possible. Provide neoprene washers for exposed fasteners. K. Imperfections in metal flashing work such as holes, dents, creases, or oil-canning will not be accepted. 71 7"762o.YvO , 1 rDIVISION 7 SECTION 07620 ' METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 5 r3.03 CAULKING OF FLASHINGS A. Caulk all joints in flashing. B. Dissimilar metals in contact, or metals in contact with adjacent surfaces shall be separated from one another to prevent corrosion, staining, or electrolysis by use of approved methods and materials. C. Do caulking between metal flashing and concrete, through roof openings, and all reglets using caulking as specified. D. Caulking compound shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's application instructions. Use proper surface primers where necessary. ' E. Colour of caulking compound shall be the integral colour of the abutting material. 1 1 r r r r r r r r ' 7175-07620.wpd DIVISION 7 SECTION 07900 SEALANTS Pagel i ' PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENT ' A. Conform with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all caulking and sealant called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Firestopping and Smoke Seals Section 07270 B. Caulking in Connection with Roof Flashing Section 07620 C. Acoustical Caulking in Connection with Gypsum Board Partitions Section 09100 i1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Sealant and substrate materials to be minimum 5 degrees C. B. Should it become necessary to apply sealants below 5 degrees C, consult sealant manufacturer and follow their recommendations and review with Consultant. ' 1.05 WARRANTY A. Warrant that caulking and sealant work will not leak, crack, crumble, melt, shrink, run, lose adhesion or stain adjacent surfaces in accordance with General Conditions clause GC 24. Warranty for caulking and sealants shall be for three years. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Installation of caulking shall be performed only by workmen thoroughly skilled and specially trained in the techniques of caulking. ' B. Caulking work shall be carried out in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed directions. i ' 7175-07900.wpd DIVISION 7 , SECTION 07900 SEALANTS Page 2 1.07 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Use all means necessary to protect caulking materials before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. B. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and relacements necessary to , the approval of the Consultant and at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Store all caulking materials and equipment under conditions recommended by its ' manufacturer. D. Do not use materials stored for a period exceeding the maximum recommended ' shelf-life of the material. E. Materials shall be delivered to the job in their original containers or wrapping with the ' manufacturer's seal and labels intact. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS ' A. Comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System , (WHMIS) regarding use, handling, storage, and disposal of hazardous materials, and regarding labelling and provision of material safety data sheets. B. Conform to manufacturer's recommended temperatures, relative humidity, and substrate moisture content for application and curing of sealants including special conditions governing use. C. Ventilate area of work as directed by Consultant by use of approved portable supply and exhaust fans. ' PART 2: PRODUCTS ' 2.01 MATERIALS A. Primers: Type recommended by sealant manufacturer. ' B. Joint Fillers: - General: Compatible with primers and sealants, outsized 30 to 50%. - Polyethylene, Urethane, Neoprene or Vinyl: ' 7175-07900.wpd ' DIVISION 7 SECTION 07900 SEALANTS Page 3 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) ' B. Joint Fillers (Cont'd) ' Extruded closed cell foam, Shore A hardness 20, tensile strength 20 psi to 29 psi (140 to 200 kPa). ' Sealtight-Etha Foam Backer Rod W. R. Meadows Canada Ltd. Premoulded Joint Filler: rUnifoam R1009 Goodco Limited C. Sealants: Vulken 116 Mameco of Canada Limited ' Dymeric Tremco Manufacturing Co. Uniparmastic Parr Industries Limited Betaseal Sternson Limited Colour of Sealants to be selected by Consultant. D. Bond Breaker Tape: ' Polyethylene bond breaker tape which will not bond to sealant. ' E. Joint Cleaner: Xylol, methylethyleketon or non-corrosive type recommended by sealant manufacturer and compatible with joint forming materials. ' PART 3: EXECUTION ' 3.01 INSPECTION A. Inspect conditions and substrates upon which work of this Section is dependent. ' Report to Consultant in writing any defects that may jeopardize the performance of this work. Commencement of work implies acceptance of conditions. ' 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove dust, paint, loose mortar and other foreign matter. Ensure joint surfaces are ' dry and free of frost. 7175-07900.wpd r DIVISION 7 r SECTION 07900 SEALANTS Page 4 ' 3.02 PREPARATION (Cont'd) ' B. Remove rust, mill scale and coatings from ferrous metals by wire brush, grinding or sandblasting. C. Remove oil, grease and other coatings from non-ferrous metals with joint cleaner. D. Do not apply sealants to joint surfaces treated with sealer, curing compound, water , repellent, or other coatings unless tests have been performed to ensure compatibility of materials. Remove coatings as required. E. Prepare concrete, masonry glazed and vitreous surfaces to sealant manufacturer's ' instructions. F. Examine joint sizes and conditions to achieve correct depth ratio 1/2 of joint width with r minimum width and depth of 1/4" (6 mm), maximum width 1" (25 mm). G. Install joint filler to achieve correct joint depth. r H. Where necessary to prevent staining, mask adjacent surface prior to priming and ' caulking. I. Apply bond breaker tape where required to ensure performance of sealant. J Prime sides of joints when required to ensure performance of sealant immediately prior to caulking. ' 3.03 APPLICATION r A. Apply sealants in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, in continuous beads, to provide watertight joint. Apply sealant using gun with proper size nozzle. Use ' sufficient pressure to fill voids and joints solid. Superficial pointing with skin bead is not acceptable. B. Form surface of sealant with full bead, smooth, free from ridges, wrinkles, sags, air ' pockets, embedded impurities. Neatly tool surface to a slight concave joint. C. Apply sealant to joints between window or door frames to adjacent building ' components, around perimeter of every external opening, to control joints in masonry walls where shown. 1 1 7175-07900.wpd ' ' DIVISION 7 SECTION 07900 SEALANTS Page 5 3.03 APPLICATION (Cont'd) D. Clean adjacent surfaces immediately and leave work neat and clean. Remove excess sealant and droppings using recommended cleaners as work progresses. Remove ' masking after tooling of joints. E. Caulk joints in surfaces to be painted before surfaces are painted. Where surfaces ' to be caulked are primed in shop before caulking, check to make sure prime paint and caulking are compatible. If they are incompatible, inform Consultant and change caulking to compatible type approved by Consultant. ' F. Sealant Locations: ' 1. Joints between metal or wood frames (both sides) with concrete and masonry. 2. Joints between drywall ceilings with concrete and masonry walls. 3. Joints between steel stair stringers and adjacent walls. ' 4. Joints at metal frames and resilient flooring. 5. Joints in metal frames. 6. Construction and control joints. 7. Junction of masonry and other types of partitions. 8. At intersecting masonry wall. 9. Between vanities/countertops and walls. 10. Between window stools and window frames and wall. 11. Other locations where caulking is required to provide a neat clean junction. 12. Caulk the entire perimeter of all mechanical and electrical material or piping extending through or occurring in masonry walls. 7175-07900.wpd ' DIVISION 8 SECTION 08100 HOLLOW METAL DOORS, SCREENS AND PRESSED METAL FRAMES Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all hollow metal doors, screens and pressed metal frames called for or implied by drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. Work includes but is not limited to ' the following: A. Supply of hollow metal doors. ' B. Supply of pressed metal frames and screens. ' 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Masonry Section 04200 ' B. Carpentry Section 06100 C. Wood Doors Section 08120 D. Finishing Hardware Section 08710 ' E. Glass and Glazing Section 08800 1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Fabricate and install labelled steel fire rated doors and frames to NFPA 80-1975 and 1 U LC CA N4-S 105-79. ' 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Draw'ngs 1. Submit shop drawings in accordance with General Conditions to the Consultant for approval before fabricating hollow metal doors and frames. Co-ordinate with ' the Finish Hardware supplier. 7175-08100.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08100 HOLLOW METAL DOORS, SCREENS AND PRESSED METAL FRAMES Page 2 ' 1.05 SUBMITTALS (Cont'd) A. Shop Drawings (Cont'd) , 2. Show each type of frame, door size, hardware blanking, reinforcing, tapping and ' drilling arrangements, metal gauges, thicknesses and finishes. Submit door and frame schedule identifying each unit. Each unit shall bear a legible identifying mark corresponding to that listed in the door and frame schedule. ' B. Samples 1. Supply, for Consultant's approval, sample of frame corner showing construction, , workmanship and finish if requested. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS ' A. Sheet Steel: Cold rolled or hot rolled, commercial quality, stretcher levelled, coated (galvanized), conforming to ASTM A526-64 light zinc coated (0.50 oz. per sq. ft.) , conforming to ASTM A366-62. B. Gauges (min. thicknesses): ' Thickness (inches) Member Galvanized Gauge Uncoated , Frames 0.064 16 0.060 Spreaders 0.052 18 , 0.048 Anchors 0.052 18 0.048 Boxes 0.022 26 0.018 Reinforcement 0.139 10 0.135 Door Faces (Interior) 0.052 18 0.048 ' Door Faces (Exterior-Insulated) 0.052 18 0.048 Stiffeners 0.040 20 ' 0.036 C. Door Fill Interior Doors: Honeycomb core material bearing ULC Label. 7175-08100.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08100 ' HOLLOW METAL DOORS, SCREENS AND PRESSED METAL FRAMES Page 3 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) ' D. Door Fill Exterior Doors: Semi-rigid fibrous insulation. Minimum density 2.4 kg/cu. m. ' E. Door Bumpers: Grey or black neoprene, single stud. Glynn Johnson Model No. GJ64. F. Glazing Stops: Minimum 1 mm base thickness sheet steel with W25 wipe zinc finish to ASTM A525-80a. Tamperproof screws on exterior doors and frames. G. Primer(for touch-up): To CGSB 1-GP-181M. 2.02 FABRICATION ' A. Welding ' 1. Conform to CSA Standard W59. 2. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush. Fill all open joints, seams and ' depressions with filler or by continuous brazing or welding, and grind smooth to true shape and profile, sand to smooth, true, uniform finish. B. Hardware Requirements 1. Blank, mortise, reinforce, drill and tap doors and frames to receive templated hardware as required. Check hardware lists for requirements. ' C. Frames 1. Fabricate frames to profiles shown fit with rubber bumpers. 2. Mitre corners of frames. Cut frame mitres accurately and weld continuously on ' inside of frame. 3. Where site welding or splicing is required due to size of unit, the location of field joints shall be shown on the shop drawings and strictly adhered to. 4. Protect strike and hinge reinforcements and other openings with metal guard ' boxes welded to frame. 5. Fit frames with channel or angle spreaders, two per frame, to ensure proper frame alignment. Install stiffener plates or spreaders between frame trim where ' required, to prevent bending of trim and to maintain alignment when setting and during construction. 7175-08100.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08100 HOLLOW METAL DOORS, SCREENS AND PRESSED METAL FRAMES Page 4 2.02 FABRICATION (Cont'd) 6. Where frames occur in masonry provide an adjustable tee anchor for every 2 ft. , of jamb length or as required by U.L.C. to provide the rating of the door. 7. Where frames are to terminate at finished floor level, provide plates for anchorage to slabs. D. Doors ' 1. Fabricate to present one continuous face free from joints, tool markings and abrasions. Assembly by welding. 2. Provide steel top and bottom caps on all exterior doors. ' 3. Provide honeycomb core or thermal insulating material to fill all voids in doors. 4. Reinforce edges with channel reinforcing. Form seam between faces and door ' edges by tack welding, followed by continuous welding and grinding smooth. Bevel stiles 1/8". 5. Provide stiffeners for doors over 3'-0"wide or 7'-0" high. ' E. Finishes , 1. Doors and frames shall be wipe coat zinc, ready for painting. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION ' A. Set frames plumb, square, level and at correct elevation. B. Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction. C. Brace frames rigidly in position while building-in. Install temporary horizontal wood spreaders at third points of door opening to maintain frame width. Provide vertical support at centre of head for openings over 4'-0"wide. Remove temporary spreaders ' after frames are built-in. D. Make allowances for deflection to ensure structural loads are not transmitted to frames. ' E. Install doors and hardware in accordance with templates and manufacturer's instructions. 7175-08100.wpd ' DIVISION 8 SECTION 08100 HOLLOW METAL DOORS, SCREENS AND PRESSED METAL FRAMES Page ,55 3.01 INSTALLATION (Cont'd) ' F. Install rated doors in accordance with U.L.C. requirements. ' G. Modify and prepare existing door frames scheduled to be reused, to suit new door and hardware. ' H. Touch up doors and frames with primer where galvanized finish is damaged during fabrication and installation. 7175-08100.wpd ' DIVISION 8 SECTION 08120 ALUMINUM WINDOWS, DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL ' 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes the supply and installation of all aluminum doors and screens called for or implied by the drawings and specifications together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. i 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE fA. Preparing openings, building in inserts and assisting in installation of work of this Section: ' Masonry Section 04200 Lightweight Steel Framing Section 07425 ' B. Glazing for work of this Section: Glass and Glazing Section 08800 ' C. Caulking other than that related to work of this Section: Sealants Section 07900 D. Wood Windows Section 08610 E. Electrically Operated Entrances Section 08720 1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES ' A. Products shall be designed to meet or exceed air and water infiltration criteria of the applicable C.G.S.B. Specifications. 7175-08120.wpd DIVISION 8 , SECTION 08120 ALUMINUM WINDOWS, DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS Page 2 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS , A. The Subcontractor executing the work of this Section shall have had at least five years continuous Canadian experience in the successful manufacture and installation of work of the type and quality shown and specified. ' B. Submit proof of experience upon Consultant's request. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings for review in accordance with the General Conditions. B. Indicate and identify all items, show assembly, installation details and methods. i PART 2. i 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: .1 Use materials specified herein. ' .2 Extrusion framing system shall be as manufactured by the Kawneer Company of Canada Limited or equal, as approved by the Architect. B. Aluminum Sections: Extruded from Alcan 6063-T54 alloy and temper with wall ' thickness of 1.6 mm, 3.2 mm and 1.3 mm for frames, door stiles and glazing stops. C. Fasteners: Series 300 stainless steel or Series 400 stainless steel cadium plated, of sufficient strength to perform the functions for which they are intended. D. Thermal Break: All members in exterior framing systems to have extruded rigid ' polyvinyl chloride. E. Bituminous Paint: Bituminous paint for back painting shall be acid and alkali resistant , type in accordance with CGSB Specification 1-GP-108C. F. lass: Refer to Section 08800, Glass and Glazing for glass for doors and screens which shall be glazed by the wet seal and glazing splines method. G. Glazing Gaskets: shall be extruded, black, closed cell or dense elastomer of ' durometer appropriate to the function. I. Finish: two coat termosetting flouropolymer paint finish, Kawneer Duranar with Kynar 500 resin base, to AAMA 605.2. Colours will be custom colour, selected by Architect. 7175-08120.wpd , DIVISION 8 SECTION 08120 ALUMINUM WINDOWS, DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS Page 3 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) J. Extrusion Framing System: ' 1. Entrance Screens: Trifab 451T thermally broken 50 mm x 115 mm extruded aluminum with thermal break separator for double glazed sealed units. 2. Doors: Series 240 extruded aluminum swing doors with 3 1/16" top rail, 5 3/4" ' bottom rail and 2 7/16" stiles. Door shall be single glazed, 1 3/4" thick. K. a Ikin : Sealants as manufactured by the following are accepted, colour shall be 1 selected by the Consultant. Product Manufacturer ' Vulkem 116 Mameco of Canada Limited Mono Tremco Manufacturing Co. Uraflex Stemson Limited 2.02 FABRICATION ' A. Screens, 1. Fabricate frames square to profiles shown and prepare for glazing. Fill frames with manufacturer's insulation. 2. Design and fabricate necessary brackets and anchorage devices so that, when ' installed, they will compensate for unevenness and dimensional difference in the structure to which they are secured, will allow full expansion and contraction of framing members as a result of such expansion and contraction of framing ' members and will adequately sustain themselves, the windows and superimposed wind and rain loads and all other stresses. 3. Take field measurements prior to fabrication. ' 4. Jig assemble components in shop and partially disassemble. 5. Accurately form joints and intersections to tight, hairline fit. 6. Nick threads to prevent loosening of nuts. Make bolted and screwed work as ' inconspicuous as possible. 7. Welding of component members will be permitted providing it does not in any way mar the surface appearance and with points made tight, in true plane, ground ' and sanded smooth,flush with base metal. Do all welding on concealed surface. 8. Provide thermal break to maintain the interior surface of frames and glass free from condensation and frosting under conditions of minimum -12 degrees C outside temperature with 24 degrees C inside temperature at 35% relative humidity. ' 9. Weathering and glazing spline of extruded black neoprene or"Durometer". 7175-08120.wpd DIVISION 8 , SECTION 08120 ALUMINUM WINDOWS, DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS Page 4 2.02 FABRICATION (Cont'd) 10. Construction a) Construct units from extrusions of size and shapes shown on the drawings ' and formed with clean, sharply defined profiles. Joints to be accurately machined, fitted, assembled and sealed to provide neat weathertight joinery. ' b) Draw joints together and secure by means of screws driven through the walls and into the integrally extruded screw channels of abutting extrusions. c) Intermediate members within units may be either solid or tubular design to suit windloading and weight carrying requirements. d) Design coupling mullions to eliminate the "seam joint" on the weathered side, while providing a functional split to permit unit module construction ' and provide for thermal expansion. When required, reinforce wind load carrying members with steel bars suitably treated to prevent electrolytic action. ' e) Overlap and seal glazing flanges of abutting members for the entire depth and width of the flanges to provide a solid, unbroken water barrier. Glass stops shall be screwless, lock-in type. , f) Equip sill base with splice plate back up sections at joint in long runs. Seal ends and jambs to provide neat, weathertight joints. g) All members to have extruded P.V.C. thermal break integrated with the ' inner and outer aluminum extrusions by a roll-crimping process to form a rigidly interconnected assembly without the use of fasteners or other thermal bridging elements. h) Provide adequate, shielded drainage and pressure equalization where ' required. 11. Fabricate oversized head frame to suit brick coursing as detailed. ' B. Doors 1. Fabricate units where practical in shop. The methods of construction, ' reinforcement anchorage, details of finish,jointing, etc. shown on approved Shop Drawings shall be accurately followed. t 2. Units too large for handling or shipping shall be fitted and assembled in the shop to check accuracy, disassembled and marked for shipping and field assembly. 3. Frames consisting of sill, head,jamb and mullion members shall be securely and ' neatly assembled by approved methods. 4. Concealed fastenings shall be used to the greatest possible extent. 5. Aluminum doors for entrances shall be made of portable aluminum extrusions. Comers of doors shall be accurately joined and fitted to flush hairline joints. All welding shall be on the unexposed sides in order to prevent pitting, discolouration, weld halo or other surface imperfections. Bottom, top and side ' rails of doors shall be a continuous extruded section. 7175-08120.wpd iDIVISION 8 SECTION 08120 ' ALUMINUM WINDOWS, DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS Page 5 1 2.02 FABRICATION (Cont'd) 6. Glazing stops for doors shall be interlocking snap-in type with neoprene bulb blazing. Exterior stops shall be lock-in tamper proof type. Exposed screws not 1 permitted. Equip each door leaf with an adjusting mechanism located in top rail, near lock stile to permit minor clearance adjustments after installation. Door edges shall be bevelled. i 7. Isolate joints of unlike materials with bituminous paint to prevent electrolytic action or chemical reaction. Provide all necessary holes for connections and fastenings. i 8. Provide weep holes in horizontal members as required. Weep holes shall drain to the exterior. 9. Glazing must withstand a specified combined dead, live and wind load in accordance with requirements of the Ontario Building Code for the building location, with a maximum deflection of U200 of the span. 2.03 DOOR HARDWARE ' Provide the following hardware for each door: A. Style 'CS-9' Architects Classic pull with finish to match door. ' B. Dor-o-matic 1990 series, rim exit device. C. Butt hinges, 1'/z pair per door, chrome finish. iD. Concealed heavy-duty closer 5010 LCN iE. Glynn Johnson Series 120 holder for interior and exterior doors. F. Extruded aluminum threshold seal underside with 2 beads of caulking prior to iinstallation. G. Provide weatherseal to head and jamb of all exterior doors. Door seal to be i aluminum with sponge neoprene a minimum of 1/4" (6 mm) thick, width to suit frame stop Type -TW2000. ' H. Door sweeps to be Sealeze EB 395 x door width. i 1 i7175-08120.wpd 1 DIVISION 8 i SECTION 08120 ALUMINUM WINDOWS, DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS Page 6 1 PART 3: EXECUTION , 3.01 CONDITION OF BUILDING A. Commence installation only when variations or discrepancies on the Site which will , prevent satisfactory installation of this Section's work are corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION 1 A. Screens 1 1. Provide all fastenings or anchors to be built in under other Sections. 2. Conceal all fastenings of frame components from view. 1 3. Securely install frames plumb, true, square and straight in openings and free from distortion using the manufacturer's recommended anchors, anchor bolts and fasteners. 4. Clean and restore primer and bituminous paint to surfaces disturbed by field welding or other operations. 5. Aluminum to be placed in contact with concrete mortar, plaster or dissimilar metals shall be given a heavy coat of bituminous paint on contacting surfaces. 1 6. Caulk internal joints. Seal joints between interior framing and masonry/drywall and between interior framing and mullion members in such a manner as to produce a completely airtight and watertight installation. 1 7. Caulk external joints. Seal joints between exterior metal and masonry and between frame and sill in such a manner as to produce a completely watertight installation. 1 8. Leave final installation water and weathertight. B. Doors 1 1. Use concealed fastenings where possible. Where concealed fasteners are not feasible, use flatheaded screws in countersunk holes. Exposed bolt or nut heads ' are not permitted. 2. Match exposed fastenings with finish or surfaces on which they occur. 3. Assess each component for appearance and colour. Any variations in 1 appearance and colour will not be permitted. 4. Secure work adequately and accurately to the structure in the required position. 5. Glaze aluminum doors in accordance with Section 08800. ' 6. Apply hardware in accordance with hardware templates and manufacturer's instructions. i 1 7175-08120.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08120 ALUMINUM WINDOWS, DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS Page 7 3.03 CLEANING A. Immediately prior to the final cleaning of the glass and before handing over the Building to the Owner, make good all damage and disfigurement to the work, and ' remove all protective coatings, stains and foreign matter from all exposed, exterior and interior surfaces of work supplied under this Section, and leave in a uniform colour and in first class condition to the Consultant's satisfaction. B. Use soap and water, or water and approved solvents not injurious to aluminum, glass, glazing and sealant compounds. Abrasives shall not be used. i 3.04 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES A. At completion of the project submit three copies of manufacturers maintenance, cleaning and operating instructions for aluminum doors and windows for inclusion into maintenance manuals as specified in Division 1. 3.05 EXTENDED GUARANTEE A. Submit a guarantee covering the maintenance, repair or replacement of defective work for a period of four (4) years from the expiration of the standard one (1) year guarantee included in the contract under Article GC-24 Warranty in the General Conditions of the contract. Leaking, loosening, fading, discolouration, deforming and ' failures of glazing units will be judged as defective work. i 1 1 I 1 7175-08120.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08210 WOOD DOORS Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS tA. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes the supply of all solid core wood doors called for or ' implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Finish Carpentry Section 06200 B. Hollow Metal Doors, Screens and Pressed Metal Frames Section 08100 C. Finishing Hardware Section 08710 D. Glass and Glazing Section 08800 E. Painting Section 09900 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING ' A. Use all means necessary to protect doors before, during and after installation and to protect the installed finish. ' B. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Consultant at no additional cost to the Owner. ' 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit one 300 mm x 300 mm comer sample of each wood door type showing door construction, core and faces. B. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Division 1. Indicate door types, sizes, thicknesses and details of construction. 7175-08110.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08210 WOOD DOORS Page 2 1.06 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATING AGENCIES A. Door shall meet or exceed the following requirements: 1. CSA Standard 0132-M1977. , 2. AWMAC Division 400 Standard. 3. NWMA Industry Standard 1.S. 1-78 Series. 4. Architectural Woodwork Institute Standard for Type SLC. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All door materials to conform to CSA 0132.2-M1977. , B. Acceptable Products: Premdor No. P3200 or approved equal. C. Doors shall be constructed with solid wood core with 3 mm thick red oak veneer surface, 50 mm stiles and 75 mm top and bottom rails. Stiles to have 19 mm facing , strips of birch. D. Core shall consist of low density wood blocks, random lengths with staggered joints. All cores shall be drum sanded both sides. E. Door to be 45 mm thick. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION , A. Fabricate doors and panels in accordance with CSA 0132.2-M1977. , B. Vertical edge strips to match face veneer. C. Bevel vertical edges of single acting doors 3 mm on lock side and 1.5 mm on hinge ' side. D. Prepare doors for hardware, including continuous hinges where specified on the drawings. E. Fabricate doors with reinforced openings for door grilles and lites. Provide manufacturer's standard trim and stops. 7175-08210.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08210 WOOD DOORS Page 3 3.02 INSTALLATION ' A. Installation of doors will be by Division 6. B. Install doors and hardware in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Adjust hardware for correct function. ' D. Install grilles and stops where specified. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT ' A. Re-adjust doors and hardware just prior to completion of building to function freely and properly. 7175-0821O,Wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08343 ROLLING SHUTTERS Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL ' 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS IA. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all rolling shutters called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: ' A. Supply and installation of rolling shutters. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ' A. Masonry Section 04200 B. Miscellaneous Metals Section 05500 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings Submit shop drawings in accordance with General Conditions to the Consultant for approval before fabricating rolling shutters. 1.05 WARRANTIES A. Rolling shutters shall be unconditionally guaranteed for one year from date of substantial completion against any defects in manufacturing, or faulty workmanship during installation. Provide a written guarantee to this effect. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL ' A. Rolling shutters as manufactured by the following are approved: Amstel Manufacturing Inc. Dynamic Closures Dynaflair Corporation 7175-08343.wpd DIVISION 8 r SECTION 08343 ROLLING SHUTTERS Page 2 2.02 MATERIALS , A. Rolling shutters shall be heavy duty"Slim Line" counter shutters as manufactured by Amstel Manufacturing Inc. or approved equal B. Curtain: Constructed of extruded aluminum (6063 alloy) flat slats. Slats shall be 32 mm wide, 12.7 mm deep. Material thickness'to be minimum 1.27 mm. Alternate slats to have end locks. Bottom bar shall be extruded aluminum tubular member with slide bolts for locking into guides. Bottom edge shall be furnished with black vinyl astragal. Shutter to be fitted with slide bolts at each jamb with padlock hasp and keeper. , C. Guides: Heavy extruded aluminum sections with upset shoulders for curtain retention. Each guide shall be fitted with pile liners and snap in cover moulds. , D. Counterbalance Assembly: Spring counterbalance shall be housed in a steel pipe of sufficient diameter to carry the door load with maximum deflection of 2.5 mm per lineal metre of opening width. Doors shall be evenly balanced helical torsion springs designed to include an overload factor of 25%. Spring tension shall be adjustable from outside of end bracket plates. Supply sealed ball bearings at , rotating support points. E. Hood: 24 gauge galvanized steel. Supply hood primed, ready for paint. F. Brackets: Bracket plates shall be of sufficient thickness to support counter balance assembly and curtain and to act as enclosures and support for the hood. Steel plates shall be minimum 4.5 mm thick. G. Finishes: As selected by the consultant from the manufacturer's full range of standard finishes. H. Operation: Hand crank, face mounted. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION , A. Installation shall be by manufacturer or his authorized representatives. B. Supply, for installation into masonry, all necessary hardware, anchors and accessories required to support counterbalance assembly and guides. ' C. Install rolling shutters in strict accordance with the manufacturers printed instructions. 7175-08343.wpd 1 ' DIVISION 8 SECTION 08343 ROLLING SHUTTERS Page 3 3.01 INSTALLATION (Cont'd) D. Secure guides, brackets and hood to adjacent construction. 1 E. Install and adjust shutters and operators to ensure smooth, dependable operation. i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 7175-08343.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08351 SLIDING/FOLDING GRILLES Page 1 ART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all sliding/folding grilles called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings ' and specifications. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Masonry Section 05100 ' B. Carpentry Section 06100 C. Cabinet Work Section 06410 D. Finishing Hardware Section 08710 E. Gypsum Board Section 09250 1.04 DESIGN A. Design folding grilles to withstand all vertical and horizontal loading. B. Field measure openings before fabrication. 1.05 SUBMITTALS ' A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit shop drawings in accordance with General Conditions to the Consultant for approval before fabricating sliding/folding grilles. 2. Indicate type, construction, finishes, operating mechanism, hardware, ' clearances, unit weight, and pocket details. 7175-08311.wpd DIVISION 8 , SECTION 08351 SLIDING/FOLDING GRILLES Page 2 , PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Sliding/folding grilles to be Dynaflair Guardian Series manually operated aluminum security grille as manufactured by Dynaflair Corporation Canada Inc. B. Equal products as determined by the Architect by the following manufacturers are acceptable: Amsteel Dynamic C. Curtain: Constructed of 1/8"x 5/8"x 5-5/8"flat horizontal links connected to vertical ' 5/16" diameter aluminum rods. Links to be secured in place by 1/2" diameter aluminum sleeves over alternate vertical rods. Spacing between rods to be 2". Track: The overhead track is to be of extruded aluminum 1-15/16"wide b 1-9/ 6" D y 1 high. Curves where indicated are to have a 10" radius. , E. Locking: Leading member to be equipped with manufacturer's maximum security lock assemblies complete with standard mortice cylinders on each side. Leading member to engage a full height wall jamb to provide full security floor to ceiling. Trailing member to be free floating self locking at top and bottom inside the storage pocket. Traveling intermediate member is to be located at all curves and on straight sections at intervals not to exceed 10'. Intermediate members are to be equipped with concealed locking devices on one side only engaging a dust proof counter top socket. F. Finishes: Clear, anodized, natural architectural Class II coating in compliance with NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual. PART 3: EXECUTION , 3.01 INSTALLATION , A. Provide and install all incidentals including angles, plates and anchoring devices to secure grille in place. B. Set track level and at correct elevation. C. Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction. r D. Make allowances for deflection to ensure structural loads are not transmitted to frames. , 7175-08351.wpd 1 DIVISION 8 SECTION 08351 SLIDING/FOLDING GRILLES Page 3 1 3.01 INSTALLATION (Cont'd) E. Install doors and hardware in accordance with templates and manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 ADJUST AND CLEF A. Adjust installation to operate smoothly and easily. Clean surfaces with manufacturer's recommended cleaners. r 1 1 1 i r 1 r 1 r r r 7175-M51.wpd r ' DIVISION 8 SECTION 08610 WOOD WINDOWS Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL ' 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. Conform with the requirements of Division 1. ' 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes the supply and installation of all wood windows complete with glazing and all hardware, trim and accessories, called for or implied by the drawings and specifications together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work of this Section includes, but is not limited to the following: A. Aluminum clad wood windows, fixed and operable. ' B. Glass and glazing for wood windows. C. Operable hardware. D. Weatherstripping. ' E. Insect screens. F. Muntin bars. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Preparing openings, building in inserts and assisting in installation of work of this Section: Masonry Section 04200 Lightweight Steel Framing Section 07425 B. Wood Siding Section 07461 C. Insulation Section 07200 ' D. Caulking other than that related to work of this Section: Sealants Section 07900 Aluminum Windows, Doors, Frames and Screens Section 08120 Electrically Operated Entrances Section 08720 r1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Do wood windows in accordance with CSA 0132.1-M1977 except where specified ' otherwise. 7175-08610,"d 1 DIVISION 8 ' SECTION 08610 WOOD WINDOWS Page 2 ' 1.05 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Products shall be designed to meet or exceed air and water infiltration criteria of the applicable C.G.S.B. and ASTM Specifications. B. Window assembly shall withstand positive and negative wind-loads, acting normal ' to the plane of the window, in accordance with all applicable codes. r 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. The Subcontractor executing the work of this Section shall have had at least five r years continuous Canadian experience in the successful manufacture and installation of work of the type and quality shown and specified. B. Submit proof of experience upon Consultant's request. 1 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings for review in accordance with the General ' Conditions. B. Indicate and identify all items, show assembly, installation details and methods, ' dimensions, component connections, anchorage methods and locations and hardware details. r 1.08 WARRANTY A. Contractor hereby warrants all wood windows against leakage, defects and r malfunctions under normal usage in accordance with the General Conditions, for a period of 3 years. ' 1.09 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to job site in manufacturers packaging, undamaged, complete with installation instructions. ' B. Store off ground, under cover, protected from weather and construction activities. r r 7175-08610.wpd 1 DIVISION 8 SECTION 08610 ' WOOD WINDOWS Page 3 ' PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS ' A. e e al: Use materials specified herein. 1 B. Operable Windows: shall be custom manufactured Pella Designer Series Clad Casement Units as manufactured by Pella Corporation. Factory assembled aluminum clad wood window with opening sash installed in the frame. C. Fixed and Bow Windows: shall be Pella Designer Series,clad frame windows as manufactured by Pella Corporation. Factory assembled aluminum clad, wood fixed windows. D. Components: ' 1. Frame - Select softwood, water repellent preservative vacuum treated in accordance with NWWDA I.S-4; interior exposed surfaces clear western pine, exterior surfaces clad with aluminum. Overall frame depth 5". ' 2. Sash - Select softwood water repellent preservative vacuum treated in accordance with NWWDA 1.S-4, finished on edges; interior exposed ' surfaces clear western pine, exterior surfaces clad with aluminum lap jointed and sealed. Comers mortised and tenoned, glued and secured with metal fasteners. Sash thickness: 1%". ' 3. Screen to CGSB 79GP-1 M half size, black vinyl coated 18/16 mesh fibreglass screen cloth set in aluminum frame fitted to inside of operable windows, supplied complete with all necessary hardware. Screen frame finish shall be manufacturer's standard. 4, Interior Muntins-Colonial Profile removable solid wood bars, stainless steel rpinned at joints and fitted to sash stops with concealed steel clips and tacks. Unfinished, ready for site finishing. ' 5. Weatherstripping- Flexible polymeric dual durometer design, compressed between sash and frame. ' 6. Panels- Embossed panels shall be prefinished aluminum, colour matched to window frames with laminated 2"thick rigid insulating core. ' 7175-08610.wpd DIVISION 8 , SECTION 08610 WOOD WINDOWS Page 4 ' 2.02 FINISH ' A. Exterior Finish: exterior aluminum surfaces shall be cleaned, etched and coated with baked enamel, Pella Endura Clad Plus Exterior Finish System, Kynar 500 thermoplastic enamel. Colour of aluminum exterior surfaces shall be a custom , colour selected by the Architect. Clad thermosetting exterior finishes shall pass the following tests. Adhesion: 1/16" cross-hatch, wet Salt Spray resistance 3,000 hours , Humidity resistance 1,000 hours Detergent resistance 3% at 100° F, 72 hours Acid resistance 10% Muriatic- 15 minutes ' Alkali resistance mortar spot test- 24 hours Direct impact 1/10" distortion - no film removal 2.03 HARDWARE A. Casement operators shall be manufacturer's standard, including sash pivots and ' removable handle. B. Finish shall be baked enamel, Champagne colour. ' 2.04 GLAZING ' A. Quality float glass to ASTM C 1036, Insulshield argon filled, double low-E coated, dual seal insulating glass, wet glazed with interior removable stops. ' 2.05 ACCESSORIES , A. Supply windows with manufacturers standard hardware and including masonry clips, mullion and jamb extenders, trim and the like for a complete installation. , PART 3: EXECUTION ' 3.01 CONDITION OF BUILDING A. Prior to fabrication, site verify all opening dimensions. ' B. Commence installation only when variations or discrepancies on the site which will prevent satisfactory installation of this Section's work are corrected. , 7175-08610.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08610 ' WOOD WINDOWS Page 5 3.02 FABRICATION ' A. Fabricate windows to accommodate the following opening o enin tolerances: ' 1. Vertical dimensions between high and low points: plus %" or minus 0". ' 2. Width dimensions: plus %" or minus 0". 3. Masonry openings: plus or minus %"from plumb tB. Windows shall be custom sized to dimensions on the drawings. C. Fabricate wood windows as indicated, complete with embossed, insulated panels, to requirements of CSA 0132.1-M1977. D. Manufacturer's nameplates on windows are not acceptable. E. Brace frames to maintain squareness and rigidity during shipment and installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION rA. Install windows in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, to achieve weathertight and freely operating installation. B. Maintain alignment with adjacent work. Secure assembly to framed openings, plumb, square, without distortion, and in a manner not restricting normal movement. C. Place insulation in shim spaces around unit perimeter to maintain continuity of building thermal barrier. D. Install sealant and related backing materials at perimeter of assembly in accordance with Section 07900. E. Adjust opening sash and hardware to operate smoothly. ' F. Leave window units closed and locked. ' 3.04 FINAL CLEANING A. Clean window frames and glass. SB. Remove labels and visible markings. 1115-011610.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08710 FINISHING HARDWARE Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Supply and installation of all finishing hardware. ' B. The supply of the finishing hardware shall include the supply and delivery F.O.B. Job Site of Finishing Hardware, and the service of a competent mechanic to ' inspect the installation of all hardware furnished under this Section and supervise all adjustment (by trades responsible for fixing) which are necessary to leave hardware in perfect order. Installation will be by the General Contractor as specified herein. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ' A. Finish Carpentry Section 06200 B. Hollow Metal Doors, Screens and Pressed Metal Frames Section 08100 ' C. Aluminum Doors Section 08120 D. Wood Doors Section 08210 E. Electrically Operated Entrances Section 08720 1.04 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit 12 copies of the approved hardware list in accordance with general conditions to Consultant for approval. B. Show each item location type finishes, identifying mark corresponding to the door schedule. rC. Hardware list shall be prepared by a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant. ' PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT HANDLING BY THE CONTRACTOR ' A. Receive the delivery of the Finishing Hardware and identify all items against the Finishing Hardware Schedule. Advise the finish hardware supplier and Consultant ' in writing of errors or omissions. 7175-08710.wpd DIVISION 8 ' SECTION 08710 FINISHING HARDWARE Page 2 2.01 PRODUCT HANDLING BY THE CONTRACTOR (Cont'd) B. Store Finishing Hardware in locked room or storage shed. Ensure each hardware ' items is accompanied by the correct template, installation instructions, special tools, fastening devices and other loose items. , 2.02 SPECIFIED PRODUCTS , A. All hardware shall be supplied as specified herein. , 2.03 REFERENCES , A. The following manufacturers' product numbers have been used in the preparation of this schedule. , Butts Hager Hinge Canada Limited Locksets and Passage Latches Schlage Door Closers L.C.N. Closers ' Kick Plates, Pulls and Push Plates Hager Hinge Canada Limited Stops and Bumpers Hager Hinge Canada Limited Panic device Von Duprin ' Door sweep and weatherstrip K.N. Crowder Thresholds K.N. Crowder Signs PM Industries Bolts Hager Sliding Door Tracks Crowdertrack 2.04 DESCRIPTION OF FINISHES A. Symbol Finishes ' 619 (15) Satin Nickel Plated 626 (26D) Satin Chromium 628 (28) Satin Aluminum 630 (32D) Satin Stainless Steel , 689 Aluminum Paint SRI Special Rust Inhibiting Primer AEA Extruded Aluminum-Anodized EA Extruded Aluminum , R Rubber PLA Plated 7175-08710.wpd ' DIVISION 8 SECTION 08710 FINISHING HARDWARE Page 3 ' 2.05 FASTENERS A. FMS Full Machine Screw ' MS Machine Screw SMS Sheet Metal Screw MS/ES Machine screws in expansion shields SS/ES Steel stud in expansion shields ' FWS Full wood screw WS Wood screw LS Lag screw STS Self tapping screw TB Through bolt ' 2.06 KEYING A. All lock cylinders and cores shall be supplied complete by the Contractor construction keyed. Owner will key doors to suit the Owner's master system. 2.07 HARDWARE LIST Item No. 1 1 By-pass Door#1 Exterior from Vestibule 101 Item No. 2 1 By-pass Door#2 Vestibule 101 from Lobby 102 2 sets By-pass Aluminum Doors and Frames All hardware by door supplier, except: 1 Rim Cylinder 20-021 x 605 (Door#101) ' Item No. 3 1 single Door#3 Reception 104 to Washroom 105 RH 9 p Item No. 4 1 single Door#6 General Office 107 to Boardroom 108 LH 2 -3070 x 1,75 Wood Door x Wood Frame Existing hardware to remain as is ' Item No. 5 1 single Door#5 Exterior to General Office 107 RH 1 - 2666 x 1.375 Wood Door x Wood Frame with screen Existing hardware to remain as is ' Item No. 6 1 single Door#4 General Office 107 to Lunch Room 106 RH 1 - 3068 x 1.75 Solid Core Wood Door x Pressed Steel Frame 1 Y2 pair hinges BB1279 x 4Y x 4 x 619 1 lock set D53PD x RHO x ASA x 626 1 wall stop HA120OX x 619 Item No. 7 1 single Door#8 Corridor 133 from Lunch Room 106 LH 1 - 2668 Wood Door x Wood Frame Existing hardware to remain as is 7175-08710.wpd DIVISION 8 ' SECTION 08710 FINISHING HARDWARE Page 4 ' 2.07 HARDWARE LIST (Cont'd) Item No. 8 1 single Door#9 Stair 109 from Lobby 102 LHR ' Item No. 9 1 single Door#63 Stair 210 from Corridor 215 RHR Item No. 10 1 Single Door#61 Corridor 215 from Nursery 212 RHR ' 3 3070 x 1.75 Hollow Metal Door x Pressed Steel Frame 3/4 Label 4% pair hinges BB1279 x 4%2 x 4 x 619 , 3 exit devices 99L-F x 992L x 628 3 closers 4041 x 689 3 kick plates HA 9550 x 8 x 34 x 630 , 3 wall stops HA 120OX x 619 Item No. 11 1 pair Door#21 Activity 119 from Storage 120 LHR/RHR ' Item No. 12 1 pair Door#22 Activity 119 from Storage 121 LHR/RHR Item No. 13 1 pair Door#24 Activity 119 from Storage 122 LHR/RHR 6 - 3070 x 1.75 x Wood Door x Pressed Steel Frame (RHR Active) ' 9 pair hinges BB1168 x 4%x 4 x NRP x 619 3 lock sets D70PD x RHO x ASA x 626 , 6 flush bolts HA 1272 x 626 6 door holder 455H x 626 Item No. 14 1 single Door#10 Exterior from Stair 109 LHR Item No. 15 1 single Door#18A Exterior from Dining Room 118 LHR Item No. 16 1 single Door#33 Exterior from Corridor 129 LHR 3- 3070 x 1.75 x Hollow Metal Door x Pressed Steel Frame 4% pair hinges BB1191 x 4Y x 4 x NRP x 619 3 exit device 99NL x 990NL-R x 628 ' 3 closers 4040 CUSH x 689 3 kick plates HA9550 x 8 x 34 x 630 3 sets weatherstrip W13 x 17'-0"x 628 , 3 sweeps W13S x 36"x 628 3 thresholds CT-9 x 36"x 628 Item No. 17 1 single Door#28 Corridor 112 to Women's Washroom 125 LH , Item No. 18 1 single Door#29 Corridor 112 to Men's Washroom 126 RH 2 - 3070 x 1.75 Solid Core Wood Door x Pressed Steel Frame 3 pair hinges B131 168 x 4%2 x 4 x 619 2 push plates HA9500 x 4 x 16 x 630 2 door pulls HA5509 x 630 2 closers 4041 x DEL x 689 2 kick plates HA9550 x 8 x 34 x 630 2 floor stops HA1119X x 619 ' 7175-08710.wpd ' DIVISION 8 SECTION 08710 FINISHING HARDWARE Page 5 2.07 HARDWARE LIST (Cont'd) ' 1 icto ram PMP - Handicapped/Female ed/Female Item 17 P 9 PP 1 pictogram PMP- Handicapped/Male Item 18 Item No. 19 1 single Door#13 Corridor 112 to Kitchen 113 LH Item No. 20 1 single Door#26 Corridor 112 to Bar 124 LH ' 2 - 3070 x 1.75 x Solid Core Wood Door x Pressed Steel Frame 3 pair hinges BB1279 x 4%2 x 4 x 619 2 lock sets D70PD x RHO x ASA x 626 2 floor stops HA1119X x 619 ' Item No. 21 1 single Door#40 Corridor 110 from Corridor 133 LHR Item No. 22 1 single Door#60 Hall 201 from Corridor 202 RHR 2-3070 x 1.75 x Solid Core Wood Door x Pressed Steel Frame x%hr Label ' 3 pair hinges BB1279 x 4%2 x 4 x 619 2 exit device 99L-F x 992L x 628 ' 2 closers 4041 x 689 2 kick plates HA9550 x 8 x 34 x 630 2 floor stops HA1119X x 619 1 Item No. 23 1 single Door#44 Reception 136 to Office 137 LH Item No. 24 1 single Door#46 Corridor 142 to Office 139 LH Item No. 25 1 single Door#47 Corridor 142 to Office 140 RH ' Item No. 26 1 single Door#49 Corridor 142 to Office 143 LH Item No. 27 1 single Door#50 Corridor 142 to Office 144 RH Item No:28 1 single Door#51 Corridor 145 to Office 146 LH ' Item No. 29 1 single Door#52 Corridor 145 to Office 147 LH 7 - 3070 x 1.75 Solid Core Wood Door x Pressed Steel Frame 10%2 pair hinges BB1279 x 4%z x 4 x 619 7 lock sets D53PD x RHO x ASA x 626 7 floor stops HA1119X x 619 Item No. 30 1 single Door#45 Office 137 from Storage 138 RHR Item No. 31 1 single Door#48 Corridor 142 from Storage 141 RHR Item No. 32 1 single Door#53 Corridor 145 from Closet 145A RHR 2-21070 x 1.75 x Solid Core Wood Door x Pressed Steel Frame(item 30, 31) 1 -2670 x 1,75 x Solid Core Wood Door x Pressed Steel Frame (Item 32) ' 4%2 pair hinges BB1279 x 4%2 x 4 x 619 3 latch sets D10S x RHO x ASA x 626 7 floor stops HA1119X x 619 ' 7175-08710.wpd DIVISION 8 , SECTION 08710 FINISHING HARDWARE Page 6 , 2.07 HARDWARE LIST (Cont'd) ' Item No. 33 1 single Door#14 Kitchen 113 to Storage 115 RH 1 - 3070 x 1.75 Solid Core Wood Door x Pressed Steel Frame 1% pair hinges BB1279 x 4%x 4 x 619 1 push plate HA9500 x 4 x 16 x 630 1 door pull HA5509 x 630 ' 1 closer 1460 x CUSH x 689 1 floor stop HA1119X x 619 1 kick plate HA9550 x 8 x 34 x 630 Item No. 34 1 single Door#15 Storage 115 to Washroom 114 LH 1 - 21070 x 1.75 Solid Core Wood Door x Pressed Steel Frame , 1% pair hinges BB1279 x 4%x 4 x 619 1 privacy lock D40S x RHO x ASA x 626 , 1 floor stop HA1119X x 619 1 pictogram PMP-186 H/C Washroom Item No. 35 1 single Door#16 Kitchen 113 from Storage 113A RHR , 1 -2070 x 1.75 x Solid Core Wood Door x Pressed Steel Frame 1% pair hinges BB1279 x 4%s x 4 x 619 ' 1 latch set D10S x RHO x ASA x 626 1 floor stop HA1119X x 619 Item No. 36 1 single Door#39 Corridor 129 to Janitor 132 RHR , Item No. 37 1 single Door#58 Activity Room BR froM Machine Rm B3 LHR 2 - 3070 x 1.75 Hollow Metal Door x Pressed Steel Frame , 3 pair hinges BB1279 x 4%x 4 x 619 2 lock sets D80PD x RHO x ASA x 626 ' 2 closers 1460 CUSH x 689 2 kick plates HA9550 x 8 x 34 x 630 2 floor stops HA1119X x 619 ' Item No. 38 1 pair Doors#19 Exterior from Activity Room 119 RHR/LHR Item No. 39 1 pair Doors#20 Exterior from Activity Room 119 RHR/LHR ' Item No. 40 1 single Door#18 Exterior from Dining Room 118 LHR 5 3070 x 1.75 Aluminum Door x Aluminum Frame All hardware by door supplier except: , 5 Rim Cylinders 20-021 x 605 7175-08710.wpd ' DIVISION 8 SECTION 08710 ' FINISHING HARDWARE Page 7 2.07 HARDWARE LIST (Cont'd) ' Item No. 41 1 pair Doors#11 Exterior from Garbage Room 117 RHR/LHR 2 - 3070 x 1.75 x Hollow Metal Door x Pressed Steel Frame 3 pair hinges BB1191 x 4%x 4 x NRP x 619 1 lock set D53PD x RHO x ASA x 626 ' 1 set weatherstrip W13 X 21'-0"X 628 2 sweep W1 3S x 36"x 628 1 threshold CT-9 x 6'-0"x 628 1 set bolts HA1297 x 619 2 chain stops HA1246 ' Item No. 42 1 single Door#12 Exterior from Receiving 116 RHR 1 - 3070 x 1.75 Hollow Metal Door x Pressed Steel Frame ' 1% pair hinges 13131191 x 4%x 4 x NRP x 619 1 exit device 99NL x 99ONL-R x 628 1 closer 404OH-CUSH x 689 ' 1 set weatherstrip W13 x 17'-0"x 628 1 sweep W1 3S x 36"x 628 1 kick plate HA9550 x 8 x 34 x 630 1 threshold CT-9 x 36"x 628 ' Item No. 43 1 pair Doors#17 Kitchen 113 to/from Dining Room 118 LHR/RH 2 - 3070 x 1.75 Solid Core Wood Door x Pressed Steel Frame ' 3 pair hinges BB1279 x 4Y x 4 x 619 2 closers 404OH-CUSH x DEL x 689 ' 2 push plates HA9500 x 4 x 16 x 630 2 pulls HA5509 x 630 2 mortise locks B270D x ASA x 626 ' 2 kick plates HA9550 x 8 x 34 x 630 Item No. 44 1 pair Doors#23 Activity Rm 119 from Activity Rm 127 RHR/LHR ' 2 - 3070 x 1.75 Solid Core Wood Door x Pressed Steel Frame 3 pair hinges 13131168 x 4%x 4 x 619 1 lock set D70PD x RHO x ASA x 626 2 door stops 454H x 626 2 flush bolts HA1272 x 619 ' 7175-08710.wpd DIVISION 8 ' SECTION 08710 FINISHING HARDWARE Page 8 , 2.07 HARDWARE LIST (Cont'd) ' Item No. 45 1 pair Doors#25 Corridor 112 from Activity 119 RHR/LHR 2 - 3070 x 1.75 Solid Core Wood Door x Pressed Steel Frame 3 air hinges BB1279 x 4%x 4 x 619 , P 9 2 exit device 9927L x 992L x 628 2 closers 4041 x DEL x 689 ' 2 kick plates HA9550 x 8 x 34 x 630 2 floor stops HA1119X x 619 Item No. 46 1 single Door#27 Bar from Storage 123 LHR , 1 - 3070 x 1.75 x Hollow Metal Door x Pressed Steel Frame 1% pair hinges BB1168 x 4%x 4 x 619 t 1 lock set D70PD x RHO x ASA x 626 1 door stop 454S x 626 ' Item No. 47 1 single Door#30 Corridor 129 from Activity 127 LHR Item No. 48 1 single Door#34 Corridor 129 from Activity 130 RHR , 2 - 3070 x 1.75 x Solid Core Wood Door x Pressed Steel Frame 3 pair hinges BB1168 x 4Y x 4 x 619 ' 2 lock sets D70PD x RHO x ASA x 626 2 wall stops HA1200 x 619 Item No. 49 1 single Door#31 Activity 127 from Storage 128 RHR , Item No. 50 1 single Door#35 Activity 130 from Storage 131 LHR 2 - 3070 x 1.75 x Solid Core Wood Door x Pressed Steel Frame 3 pair hinges BB1168 x 4Y x 4 x 619 , 2 lock sets D70PD x RHO x ASA x 626 2 wall stops 455H x 626 ' Item No. 51 1 single Door#32 Exterior from Activity Room 127 LHR Item No. 52 1 single Door# 36 Stair from Activity Room 130 LHR , Item No. 53 1 single Door# 37 Exterior from Stair LHR Item No. 54 1 single Door#38 Exterior from Stair RHR 4 - 3070 x 1.75 x Door x Frame ' All hardware existing. 7175-08710.wpd ' DIVISION 8 SECTION 08710 ' FINISHING HARDWARE Page 9 ' 2.07 HARDWARE LIST (Cont'd) Item No. 55 1 single Door#41 Corridor 133 from Stair 134 RHR 1 - 3070 x 1.75 Hollow Metal Door x Pressed Steel Frame % hr Label ' 1%s P air hinges BB1279 x 4'/x 4 x 619 1 exit device 99L-F x 992L x 628 1 kick plate HA9550 x 8 x 34 x 630 1 closer 4041 x 689 1 floor stop HA1119X x 619 Item No. 56 1 single Door#43 Corridor 135 from Reception 136 LHR Item No. 57 1 single Door#7 Corridor 135 from General Office 107 1 - 3070 x 1.75 Solid Core Wood Door x Pressed Steel Frame '/. hr Label 3 pair hinges BB1279 x 4%x 4 x 619 2 lock set D53PD x RHO x ASA x 626 2 closer 4040 CUSH x 689 2 kick plate HA9550 x 8 x 34 x 630 ' Item No. 58 1 single Door#55 Exterior from Corridor 135 RHR 1 - 30 x 610 x 1.75 Solid Core Wood Door x Pressed Steel Frame All hardware existing. Item No. 59 1 single Door#54 Corridor 135 to Boardroom 108 LH ' 1 - 3274 Wood Door x Wood Frame All hardware existing. ' Item No. 60 1 single Door#62 Corridor 215 to Storage 214 LH 1 3070 x 1.75 Hollow Metal Door x Pressed Steel Frame 1% pair hinges BB1279 x 4%x 4 x 619 1 lock set D70PD x RHO x ASA x 626 1 wall stop HA1200X x619 Item No. 61 1 single Door#64 Roof from Corridor 215 1 - 3070 x 1.75 Hollow Metal Door x Pressed Steel Frame ' 1 Y2 pair hinges BB1191 x 4%x 4 x NRP x 619 1 lock set D80PD x RHO x ASA x 626 1 closer 404OH-CUSH x 689 1 kick plate HA9550 x 8 x 34 x 630 1 set weatherstrip W13 x 17'-0"x 628 1 sweep W135 x 36"x 628 1 threshold CT-9 X 36"x 628 ' 7175-08710.wpd DIVISION 8 ' SECTION 08710 FINISHING HARDWARE Page 10 ' 2.07 HARDWARE LIST (Cont'd) ' Item No. 62 1 single Door#65 Nursery School 206 from Storage 209 RHR 1 -2268 x 1.375 Solid Core Wood Door x Wood Frame All hardware existing, relocated. , Item No. 63 1 pair Doors#57 Bi-pass Doors Coats from Corridor 145 2 -3070 Solid Core Wood Door 1 set sliding door track C2025 ' 1 finger pull C20 x 626 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION BY THE CONTRACTOR A. Examination 1. Before installing any hardware, carefully check all architectural drawings of the , work requiring hardware, verify door swings, door and frame materials and operating conditions, and assure that all hardware will fit the work to which it is ' to be attached. 2. Check all shop drawings and frame and door lists affecting hardware type and installation, and certify to the correctness thereof, or advise the hardware ' supplier and Consultant in writing of required revisions. B. Templates ' 1. Check the hardware schedule, drawings and specifications, and furnish promptly to the applicable trades any patterns, templates, template information ' and manufacturer's literature required for the proper preparation for and application of hardware, in ample time to facilitate the progress of the work. C. Installation t 1. All hardware shall be installed by carpenter, skilled in the application of ' architectural hardware. Instruction sheets, details and templates shall be read and understood before installation. 2. Install all materials as listed in the Finishing Hardware Schedule on the doors ' and frames listed. INTERCHANGING OF HARDWARE WILL NOT BE ALLOWED. , 7175-08710.wpd ' DIVISION 8 SECTION 08710 ' FINISHING HARDWARE Page 11 3.01 PREPARATION BY THE CONTRACTOR (Cont'd) 3. After installation, templates, installation instructions and details shall be put in a file and turned over to the Owner, when building is Substantially Performed. ' D. Inspection by Hardware Manufacturer After installation of all hardware and before building is accepted, the Contractor shall request the hardware manufacturers of lock and latch sets, panic bolts, holders and closers to inspect the installation and certify in writing to the Consultant that the ' hardware is properly installed and supplied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and finishing hardware schedule. ' E. Guarantee The hardware supplier and the Contractor shall guarantee and warrant through the Contractor all hardware for a period of 2 years from the date of Substantial Performance of the General Contract, from defects in materials, workmanship and improper installation. F. Maintenance Schedule The hardware supplier shall through the Contractor provide a written maintenance ' program for all finish hardware requiring maintenance and the name and address of the supplier for future repairs and replacement. 7175-08710.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08720 ELECTRICALLY OPERATED ENTRANCES Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 QENERAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. Conform with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes the supply and installation of all electrically operated entrances called for or implied by the drawings and specifications together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Masonry Section 04200 B. Carpentry Section 06100 ' C. Glass and Glazing Section 08800 D. Caulking other than that related to work of this Section: Sealants Section 07900 E. Electrical Division 16 1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES 1 A. Products shall be designed to meet or exceed air and water infiltration criteria of CAN3-A440-M90. ' B. All automatic entrance equipment is to comply with ANSI A156.10 and be U.L./C.S.A. listed. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. The Subcontractor executing the work of this Section, shall have had at least five years continuous Canadian experience in the successful manufacture and installation of work of the type and quality shown and specified. B. Submit proof of experience upon Consultant's request. C. Installation: by installer approved and trained by the manufacturer in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1 7175-08720.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08720 ELECTRICALLY OPERATED ENTRANCES Page 2 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Shol2 Drawings. Submit shop drawings for review in accordance with the General Conditions. B. Indicate and identify all items, show assembly, installation details and methods. C. Submit all necessary wiring diagrams and all data necessary for the preparation of openings and the proper preparation of interface connections by other trades. 1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials under protective cover and store within dry enclosed spaces at the building. Protect from damage prior to and during installation. B. Verify conditions and dimensions at the site prior to delivery of materials to site. 1.08 EXTENDED GUARANTEE ' A. Submit a guarantee covering the maintenance, repair or replacement of defective work for a period of four (4) years from the expiration of the standard one (1) year ' guarantee included in the contract. PART 2• PRODUCTS t 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Use materials specified herein. ' B. All aluminum sections shall be extruded from 6063 alloy with T5 temper. , C. Finish shall be baked thermoplastic enamel, Kynar 500 or equal, in custom colour to be selected by the Architect. ' D. Fasteners: Series 300 stainless steel or Series 400 stainless steel cadium plated, of sufficient strength to perform the functions for which they are intended. E. Bituminous Paint: Bituminous paint for back painting shall be acid and alkali resistant type in accordance with CGSB Specification 1-GP-108C. ' 7175-08720.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08720 ELECTRICALLY OPERATED ENTRANCES Page 3 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) F. aulki : Sealants as manufactured b the following are accepted, colour shall be � na Y selected by the Consultant. Product Manufacturer Vulkem 116 Mameco of Canada Limited Mono Tremco Manufacturing Co. Uraflex Sternson Limited 2.02 ENTRANCE SYSTEM ' A. Single and double slide entrance door systems complete with sidelights, operators and hardware, Dura-Glide 3000 system as manufactured by Stanley Canada Inc., Mississauga, Ontario, (905) 670-8111. B. The sliding door systems shall be completely engineered, manufactured, and assembled by the manufacturer. All operator components shall be factory assembled in the header, adjusted and tested. No field wiring or operator adjustment shall be required other than the connection to job-site power. C. The header shall be extruded aluminum to which the operator and the door mounting components are attached. The header shall be capable of supporting bi-parting doors of 220 lbs. per leaf over a span of 14 feet with minimal deflection. The door track and the anti riser guide shall be an integral part of the structural member. The cover shall ihave a continuous self-locking hinge which allows it to open approximately flush with the top of the header. The doors shall slide on 2Y2" diameter polyurethane wheels with precision steel life- time lubricated ball-bearing centres. Door height shall be adjustable t W'to suit field conditions. The doors shall be held on the track by means of 2" diameter anti-riser ' wheels. All sliding doors height and anti-rising adjustments shall be fully accessible with the hinge cover in the open position. Sliding doors shall be supported from the hanger assembly by a factory adjusted cantilever support and pivot assembly. This assembly shall allow the sliding panels to swing outward for emergency egress without the need for a lower door pivot support. Sidelights shall swing out and allow sliding doors to "breakaway"to the full open position so as to provide instant egress at any point in the doors movement in compliance with NFPA 101. Doors in the "breakout" mode shall disconnect automatic operation to allow for safe egress. The product shall include Safety Search Circuitry which will recycle the doors when an object is encountered during the closing cycle, then search for that object on the next closing cycle by reducing the damp speed at the location where 7175-08720.wpd DIVISION 8 SECTION 08720 ELECTRICALLY OPERATED ENTRANCES Page 4 2.02 ENTRANCE SYSTEM (Cont'd) the obstruction was previously encountered and continue closing at damp speed until the doors are fully closed at which time the door will reset to normal speed - if the obstruction is encountered again, the doors will come to a full stop. The door will remain stopped until the obstruction is removed and an operate signal is given, resetting the door to its normal speed. Doors in the full "breakout" mode shall provide double the normal entrance opening. The bi-part sliding door system shall include a two-point lock securing the lead edges of the door stiles together and to the hanger assembly. The door package shall include security hooks that latch the swing outside panels in the closed position when the sliding doors are in the fully closed position. The sliding doors shall be provided with a key cylinder on the exterior and a thumb turn on the interior in accordance with NFPA 101. Door holders shall be provided for all panels to control the doors as they swing in the direction of egress. All door panels shall have removable glass stops. D. The Entrance Door System shall be driven by an electro-mechanical operator and as regulated electronic controller. The operator components shall consist of a DC permanent magnet 1/a h.p. motor, gear reduction drive, POZI-TRAC position encoder, and a microcomputer control box. The operator shall drive a reinforced timing belt , whose position and tension are determined by an idler pulley which is factory mounted and preset. The microcomputer control box shall be factory-set to provide operating speeds and forces as prescribed by ANSI A156.10. The microcomputer control box in conjunction with the position encoder shall automatically set the opening and closing speeds, the opening and closing check positions and the full open and fully closed position of the door systems. E. Provide manufacturer's standard doorway pressure sensing device installed at the underside of the header. It shall be a self-contained fully adjustable sensor system which shall work in conjunction with motion sensors. A sensor shall produce a door , opening signal when activated by approaching traffic. Simultaneously with the door opening signal the sensor shall be energized. The sensor shall emit a 30" deep by 96" (maximum) wide elliptical shaped infrared presence zone centred on the doorway , threshold line. The door shall close after the sensors detect a clear surveillance field. F. The actuating controls shall be the STAN-RAY Motion Sensor as manufactured by Stanley Canada Inc. The unit shall detect objects moving at a rate of 2 or more inches per second within a semi-circular area approximately 5 feet deep by 7 feet wide when the unit is mounted 84" above the finished floor level. The sensor shall be mounted to the header. The location of the detection zone shall be adjustable from the face of the door (00 to 700). The sensitivity of the detection zone shall be adjustable from 0 mw to 10 mw maximum. The zone sensitivity adjustment shall be accessible only when the cover of the STAN-RAY sensor is removed. The unit shall operate between -30°F to +130"F in all ambient environmental conditions. 7175-08720.wpd , t ' DIVISION 8 SECTION 08720 ELECTRICALLY OPERATED ENTRANCES Page 5 2.02 ENTRANCE SYSTEM (Cont'd) The sensor shall have discriminating signal input circuitry that automatically compensates for line voltage variations and automatic rejection of fixed objects within the detection zone. The unit shall be designed to operate on 12 volts AC, 50/60 Hz, 5.1 VA. Power density of the sensor at any 5 centimetres from its surface shall be maximum 0.3 milliwatts per square centimetre. G. Entrance system shall include the following: .1 Adjustable nylon sweeps on the bottom of the sliding doors. .2 Double pile weatherstripping on the lead edges of the sliding doors including the area at the lock. .3 Single pile weatherstripping between the carrier and the header, on the lead stiles of the sidelights, and the pivot stiles of the sliding doors. .4 A selector switch located on the inside of building allows doors to open at full or reduced width according to weather and traffic conditions. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate frames square to profiles shown and prepare for glazing. B. Design and fabricate necessary brackets and anchorage devices so that, when installed, they will compensate for unevenness and dimensional difference in the structure to which they are secured,will allow full expansion and contraction of framing 1 members as a result of such expansion and contraction of framing members and will adequately sustain themselves, and superimposed wind and rain loads and all other stresses. ' C. Take field measurements prior to fabrication. 1 D. Jig assemble components in shop. E. Accurately form joints and intersections to tight, hairline fit. ' F. Nick threads to prevent loosening of nuts. Make bolted and screwed work as inconspicuous as possible. i7175-08720.wpd DIVISION 8 ' SECTION 08720 ELECTRICALLY OPERATED ENTRANCES Page 6 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 CONDITION OF BUILDING A. Commence installation only when variations or discrepancies on the Site which will , prevent satisfactory installation of this Sections work are corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Provide all fastenings or anchors to be built in under other Sections. B. Conceal all fastenings from view. C. Securely install frames plumb, true, square and straight in openings and free from distortion using the manufacturer's recommended anchors, anchor bolts and fasteners. D. Clean and restore primer and bituminous paint to surfaces disturbed by field welding or other operations. E. Aluminum to be placed in contact with concrete mortar, plaster or dissimilar metals shall be given a heavy coat of bituminous paint on contacting surfaces. F. Caulk internal window joints. Seal joints between interior framing and masonry/drywall ' and between interior framing and mullion members in such a manner as to produce a completely airtight and watertight installation. ' G. Caulk external window joints. Seal joints between exterior metal and masonry and between frame and aluminum sill in such a manner as to produce a completely watertight installation. H. Leave final installation water and weathertight. , 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN , A. After repeated operation of completed installation, readjust door operators and controls for optimum operating condition and safety. Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installation. Advise general contractor of protective treatment and other ' precautions required through the remainder of the construction period, to ensure that automatic entrances will be without damage or deterioration (other than normal weathering) at the time of acceptance. 7175-08720.wpd i l DIVISION 8 SECTION 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all glass and glazing called for or implied by the 1 drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: A. Supply and install glazing to hollow metal doors, frames and screens. B. Supply and install glazing to aluminum framed windows. C. Supply and install glazing to electrically operated aluminum doors and screens. D. Supply and install glazing to wood doors. E. Supply and install tempered glass shelves and sliding doors to display cases. F. Supply and install unframed mirrors. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Hollow Metal Doors, Screens and Pressed Metal Frames Section 08100 B. Wood Doors Section 08210 C. Aluminum Windows, Doors, Frames, and Screens Section 08120 D. Wood Windows Section 08610 E. Washroom accessories Section 10800 F. Finish Carpentry Section 06200 G. Cabinetwork Section 06410 H. Electrically Operated Entrances Section 08720 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General 1. Materials shall be free from bubbles, waves, discolouration, distortion and defects. 7175-08800.wpd DIVISION 8 t SECTION 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING Page 2 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) A. General (Cont'd) 2. Material manufacturers shall label every piece of glass. Labels shall remain in ' place until final cleaning. Label shall note"manufacturer, registered name of the products, weight and quality of glass". 3. Design glass to satisfy opening size and applied loads in accordance with the , Ontario Building Code with a maximum deflection of L/200. B. Products manufactured by the following are accepted: t 1. Pilkington Glass 2. Canadian Pittsburgh Industries-A Division of PPG Industries Canada Limited 3. Glaverbel Glass Limited 4. 3M 5. Tremco Manufacturing Company Limited C. ass: 1. Polished Plate or Float Glass: To CAN2-12.3, glazing quality of thickness indicated. 2. Wired Glass: To CAN2-12.11, type Georgian polished, wire mesh style. 3. Insulating Glass Units: To CAN2-12.8, with outer pane of float glass and inner pane of float glass with '/s' air space thickness for windows and screens. Solar cool bronze reflective exterior sheet, clear interior sheet. -Twinsulite Pilkington -Twindow Canadian Pittsburg Industries 4. Safety Glass: Tempered glass to CAN2-1.1,thickness as noted on the drawings (clear). Glass shelves and sliding display case doors shall have all exposed edges ground with pencilled edges. 5. Unframed Mirrors: To CGSB CAN2-12.5, silvered, 1/4"thick, ground and polished edges of sizes indicated. 7175-08800.wpd t DIVISION 8 SECTION 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING Page 3 2.01 MATERIAL(Cont'd) D. Accessories: 1. Glazing Tape: Black, as manufactured by the following is approved: Tremco 440 by Tremco Manufacturing Co. Limited Durribon No.1082 by Canadian Pittsburgh 3M by Minnesota Mining& Manufacturing Co. Ltd. 2. Glazing Sealant: Two component polysulphide, bearing Thiokol Hallmark, conforming to CGSB 19-GP-3M. Colour as selected by Consultant. 3. Setting Blocks & Spacers: Neoprene, setting blocks 70-90 shore"A" hardness. Spacers - neoprene 40-60 shore "A" hardness; or oil resistant rubber as approved by glass material manufacturer. E. Display Cabinet Track: Knape and Vogt Canada Ltd. Ezy Roll aluminum track assembly #P992 and #965 adjustable lock with satin nickel finish, complete with duplicate keys. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Replace all stops in their original positions, tighten all screws. B. Glaze doors, windows and screens scheduled to be glazed. C. Mark each light with a large white cross to indicate presence of glass. D. Replace under the work of this section, defective, damaged or broken glass due to faulty setting, handling or storage. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF GLAZING A. Wipe dry and clean surfaces receiving tapes and sealants. B. Cut glazing tape to proper lengths. Apply tape against fixed stop, setting head and sill first,jambs will then be set. Weld corners together by butting tapes. Do not lap or run tape around corners. ' 7175-08800.wpd DIVISION 8 ' SECTION 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING Page 4 3.02 INSTALLATION OF GLAZING (Cont'd) C. Place neoprene setting blocks, at quarter points of fixed openings. D. Paper backing from tape shall be removed just prior to setting the glass. Dab comers , of tape with sealant to insure a good seal. E. Set glass on setting blocks, align edges and centre glass using shims at 24" (610 mm) , to both sides of glass. Keep spacers below sight lines. Press glass securely into tape for complete contact and adhesion. F. Apply heel bead of sealant around perimeter of glass, maintain minimum 1/8" (4.8 mm) bite onto glass and a positive bond to sash. The void around glass shall be sealed completely. Ensure that sealant heel beads are large enough so that sealant will partially fill channel between glass and removable stops when they are set. 3.03 DISPLAY CASE , A. Co-ordinate work with Section 06410. B. Supply and install %"thick tempered glass shelves with ground and polished edges. C. Fabricate aluminum track assembly and install tempered glass doors to suit finished dimensions of display case. Adjust hardware and provide adjustable lock. Glass doors to have finger pulls ground into leading edges. 3.04 MIRRORS A. Fabricate 18"x 48" unframed mirrors. , B. Install mirrors where shown on the drawings in Coat Room, Women's Washroom and Men's Washroom, complete with concealed mounting devices. All exposed edges of , mirrors shall be polished. 3.04 COMPLETION A. Upon completion, go over all work of this trade, remove all surplus glazing and other , foreign materials, taking care not to scratch or damage the glass or sash. B. Clean up and remove from building and site all debris, surplus glazing and other foreign materials, tools and equipment and leave entire premises in a neat and tidy condition. 7175-08800.wpd r DIVISION 8 SECTION 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING Page 5 3.05 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES A. At completion of the project submit three copies of manufacturer's maintenance procedures for cleaning of glass surfaces for inclusion into maintenance manuals. r 1 r 1 r r r r r 1 r r r7175-08800.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09250 GYPSUM WALLBOARD Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all gypsum board and framing called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. This work includes but is not limited to the following: A. Gypsum Board (not including exterior gypsum sheathing) , B. Metal Stud System (not including exterior steel stud wall and roof systems) C. Metal Furring D. Acoustic insulation in metal stud partitions. , E. Fire rated duct shafts. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE F. Rough Carpentry Section 06100 G. Finish Carpentry Section 06200 H. Exterior Steel Stud Wall Systems Section 07425 I. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Section 08100 J. Acoustical Ceiling Section 09500 K. Painting Section 09900 L. Access Doors and Panels Section 15000 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Do work in accordance with CSA A82.31-M1980 except where specified otherwise. B. Do metal framing and furring in accordance with applicable requirements of CSA ' A82.30-M1980. In standard, delete references to lath and plaster and substitute gypsum board. 1.05 FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENT A. Comply with the requirements of General Instructions, Section 01005. B. Provide fire rated gypsum board components and assemblies as indicated on the drawings. 7175-09250.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09250 GYPSUM WALLBOARD Page 2 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING ' A. Use all means necessary to protect gypsum board materials before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of other trades ' affected by this work. B. Store materials in a dry area inside the building. Do not remove wrapping until ready for use. Prevent damage to all edges and surfaces. C. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary ' to the approval of the Consultant and at no additional cost to the Owner. ' PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM BOARD A. Plain: To CSA A82.27-M standard for non-rated applications, Type X for rated applications, 1219 mm wide x maximum practical length, ends square cut, edges tapered with round edge, 12.7 mm thick or to thickness indicated on drawings. B. Water Resistant Board: To CSA A82.27-M standard 12.7 mm thick, 1219 mm wide x maximum practical length. ' C. Shaft Wall Liner: 1"Thick CGC Shaftwall Liner to CSA A82.27-M. 2.02 METAL FURRING AND SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Metal Furring Runners, Hangers, Tie Wires, Inserts, Anchors: To CSA A82.30-M1980, electro-zinc coated steel. B. Runner Channels: 38.1 mm x 19.0 mm x 1.52 mm and 38.1 mm x 9.5 mm x 1.22 mm, hot dip or electro-galvanized sheet steel. Use of various sizes governed by applied loads and applicable spans. C. Furring Channels: 19.0 mm x 38.1 mm x 1.22 mm and 38.1 mm x 9.5 mm x 1.22 mm, hot dip or electro-galvanized stud steel. Use of various sizes governed by applied loads and applicable spans. D. Drywall Furring Channel: Channel shaped furring member for screw attachment of drywall with knurled face. For interior use. Furring masonry or concrete surfaces. Cross furring under steel joist or suspended metal channels in suspended ceiling systems: 66.7 mm x 22.2 mm with knurled face, hot dip or electro-galvanized sheet steel. tE. Hangers: 6.4 mm diameter mild steel rods. ' 7175-08250.wpd DIVISION 9 , SECTION 09250 GYPSUM WALLBOARD Page 3 2.03 METAL STUDS A. Non-Load-bearing Channel Stud Framing: To ASTM C645-76; to sizes indicated on drawings; roll formed from minimum 0.5 mm thickness electro-galvanized steel sheet; for screw attachment of gypsum board. Knock-out service holes at 460 mm , centres. B. Floor and Ceiling Tracks: To ASTM C645-76; in widths to suit stud sizes, 25 mm flange height. C. Metal Channel Stiffener: 2 mm thick cold rolled steel, coated with rust inhibitive , coating. D. Shaft Wall Framing: CGC Cavity Shaft Wall Framing including C-H studs, E studs and runners. 2.04 FASTENINGS AND ADHESIVES t A. Drywall Screws: To CSA A82.31-M1980, self drilling, self tapping, case hardened. B. Stud Adhesive: To CGSB 71-GP-25M. C. Joint Tape: 2" perforated with preformed seam. , D. Laminating Compound: To CSA A82.31-M1980, asbestos-free. E. Joint Filler and Topping: Casein, vinyl or latex base, slow setting. F. Tie Wire: 1.63 mm, galvanized, soft annealed, steel wire or clip as recommended by the manufacturer of furring channels. G. Drywall Screws: Number 6 gauge, self drilling, case hardened gypsum board screws, length to suit board thickness and provide minimum 12 mm penetration of screw through metal support. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Casing Beads 'L' and 'J'Type, Comer Beads (Fill Type): 0.5 mm base thickness commercial grade sheet steel with G90 zinc finish to ASTM A525-80A; perforated flanges; one piece length per location. r B. Reveal Trim: 12.7 mm high, snap-on trim, of 1.6 mm base thickness galvanized sheet prefinished in satin enamel white colour. 7175-09250.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09250 ' GYPSUM WALLBOARD Page 4 ' 2.05 ACCESSORIES (Cont'd) C. Acoustic Sealant: To CGSB 19.21.M. D. Polyethylene: To CAN 2-51.33-M80, Type 2, 6 mil polyethylene film and Y-8086 Contractors Sheathing Tape by 3M Canada. E. Insulating Strip: Rubberized, moisture resistant, 13 mm thick closed cell neoprene strip, 12 mm wide, with self sticking permanent adhesive on one face; lengths as required. F. Joint Compound: To CSA A82.31-M1980, asbestos-free. G. Sound Attenuation Batts: 70 mm thick glass fibre RSI 1.4 (R8) noise stop blanket. H. Control Joints: Performed bellows shaped sections with perforated flanges. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Prior to installation of gypsum wallboard, ensure that all required vapour barriers installed under another Section have been inspected and accepted by Municipal authorities and the Architect. Failure to do so will result in removal of all gypsum wallboard installed prior to approval. 3.02 ERECTION OF METAL STUDS A. Align partition tracks at floor and ceiling and secure at 600 mm O.C. maximum. 1 Erect metal studding to tolerance of 1:1000. B. Place studs at 406 mm o.c. and not more than 50 mm from abutting walls, and at ' each side of openings and comers. Position studs in tracks at floor and ceiling. Cross brace steel studs as required to provide rigid installation to manufacturer's instructions. C. Attach studs to floor and ceiling track using screws. D. Co-ordinate erection of studs with installation of door/window frames and special supports or anchorage for work specified in other Sections. 7175-09250.wpd DIVISION 9 , SECTION 09250 GYPSUM WALLBOARD Page 5 ' 3.01 ERECTION OF METAL STUDS (Cont'd) ' E. Provide two studs extending from floor to ceiling at each side of openings wider than stud centres specified. Secure studs together, using column clips or other approved means of fastening. F. Erect track at head of doorAMndow openings and sills of sidelight/window openings to accommodate intermediate studs. Secure track to studs at each end, in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Install intermediate studs above and below openings in same manner and spacing as wall studs. G. Provide stud or furring channel secured between studs for attachment of fixtures behind lavatory basins, toilet and bathroom accessories, and other fixtures including grab bars and towel rails, attached to steel stud partitions. Wood blocking provided by Section 06100. H. Install steel studs or furring channel between studs for attaching electrical and other boxes. I. Extend partitions to ceiling height except where noted otherwise on drawings. J. Maintain clearance under beams and structural slabs or provide slip connection to avoid transmission of structural loads to studs and possible damage of studs. , K. Install continuous insulating strips to isolate studs from uninsulated surfaces. L. Install two continuous beads of acoustical sealant behind studs and tracks around perimeter of sound control partitions, (indicated on drawings as being acoustically insulated). 3.02 SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS A. Erect hanger and runner channels for suspended gypsum board ceilings in accordance with CSA A82.31-M1980 except where specified otherwise and indicated on drawings. , B. Securely anchor hanger to structural supports 1219 mm o.c. maximum along runner channels and not more than 150 mm from ends. Under no circumstances shall hanger wires be secured to or supported from mechanical or electrical materials or equipment or penetrate mechanical ductwork. 7175-09250.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09250 GYPSUM WALLBOARD Page 6 ' 3.02 SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS (Cont'd) C. Space runner or furring channels as shown on drawings and not more than 600 mm o.c. maximum nor 150 mm from walls. Run channels in long direction of board. Bend hanger sharply under bottom flange of runner and securely wire in place with a saddle tie. Provide channels below mechanical or electrical equipment and mechanical ductwork to maintain maximum spacing. D. Install furring channels transversely across runner channels in short direction of wallboard at 600 mm o.c. maximum or 150 mm from walls and interruptions in ceiling continuity. Secure channels to support with furring clips or wire. Where splicing is necessary lap minimum 200 mm and wire tie each end with double loops of 1.63 mm galvanized tie wire, 25 mm from each end of overlap. E. Support light fixtures by providing additional ceiling suspension hangers within 6" (150 mm) of each corner and at maximum 24" (600 mm) around perimeter of fixture. Coordinate with Division 16. F. Install work level to tolerance of 1:1200. G. Frame with furring channels, perimeter of openings for access panels, light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, etc. H. Install furring channels parallel to, and at exact locations of steel stud partition header track. I. Furr for gypsum board faced vertical bulkheads within or at termination of ceilings. 3.03 WALL FURRING A. Install wall furring for gypsum board wall finishes in accordance with CSA A82.31-M1980, except where specified otherwise and shown on drawings. B. Frame openings and around built-in equipment, cabinets, access panels, etc., on four sides. Extend furring into reveals. Check clearances with equipment suppliers. C. Furr duct shafts, beams, columns, pipes and exposed services where indicated. 1 3.04 INSULATION A. Install sound insulation where indicated on the partition schedule. Fit tight between studs and cut around all penetrations. Insulation thickness shall be as noted, but not less than 3"thickness. 7175-09250.wpd DIVISION 9 , SECTION 09250 GYPSUM WALLBOARD Page 7 ' 3.05 GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION ' A. Do not apply gypsum board until bucks, anchors, blocking, electrical, and mechanical work are approved. B. Apply gypsum board at right angles to framing members or furring using screw fasteners. Maximum spacing of screws 300 mm o.c. or in accordance with ULC standards for fire rated assemblies. Apply type X gypsum board where indicated , to obtain fire ratings as shown on the drawings. C. Apply water resistant gypsum board where ceramic wall tiles to be applied; , adjacent to slop sinks in janitors room; washrooms, locker rooms, shower and drying areas, walls and ceilings. Apply water-resistant sealant to edges, ends, and cut-outs which expose gypsum core. Leave space at base of board to prevent ' soaking up of moisture. D. Apply 12 mm diameter bead of acoustic sealant continuously around periphery of , each face of sound insulated partitions to seal gypsum board/structure junction where partitions abut fixed building components. Seal full perimeter of cut-outs around electrical boxes, ducts, and other penetrations in partitions where perimeter sealed with acoustical sealant. 3.06 ACCESSORIES r A. Erect accessories straight, plumb or level, rigid and at proper plane. Use full length pieces where practical. Make joints tight, accurately aligned and rigidly secured. Mitre and fit comers accurately, free from rough edges. B. Install casing beads where gypsum board butts against surfaces having no trim concealing junction and where indicated. C. Install insulating strips continuously at edges of gypsum board or casing beads abutting metal window or exterior door frames, to provide thermal break. 3.07 CONTROL JOINTS A. Construct control joints of preformed units or two back-to-back casing beads set in gypsum board facing and supported independently on both sides of joint. B. Provide continuous polyethylene dust barrier behind and across control joints. C. Locate control joints at changes in substrate construction, at approximately 10 m spacing on long corridor runs. Install control joints straight and true. 7175-09250.wpd ' DIVISION 9 SECTION 09250 GYPSUM WALLBOARD Page 8 ' 3.08 TRIM A. Install reveal trim at gypsum board/ceiling juncture and at door and window jambs where indicated. 3.09 ACCESS DOORS A. Install access doors to electrical and mechanical fixtures specified in respective Sections. B. Rigidly secure frames to furring or framing systems, to satisfy fire rating requirements. 3.10 TAPING AND FILLING ' A. Finish face panel joints and internal angles with joint system consisting of joint compound,joint tape and taping compound installed according to manufacturer's directions and feathered out onto panel faces. ' B. Finis comer h beads,.control Joints and tams as required with two coats of Joint compound and one coat of taping compound, feathered out onto panel faces. C. Fill screw head depressions with J oint and taping compounds to bring flush with adjacent surface of gypsum board so as to be invisible after painting is completed. D. Sand lightly to remove burred edges and other imperfections. Avoid sanding adjacent surface of board. E. Completed installation to be smooth, level or plumb, free from waves and other defects and ready for painting. 3.11 VAPOUR BARRIER INSTALLATION A. Install polyethylene on warm side of insulation. Apply with adhesive to framing members. Tape and seal areas where staples penetrate vapour barrier. B. Extend vapour barrier tight to perimeter of windows and other items interrupting continuity of membrane. Lap all joints minimum of 150 mm and tape seal. 7175-09250.wpd DIVISION 9 , SECTION 09310 CERAMIC FLOOR AND WALL TILE Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all ceramic file called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: , A. Ceramic Tile as indicated on the Room Finish Schedule and Drawings. FI V , 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED E A. Resilient Flooring Section 09660 B. Concrete Section 03300 C. Gypsum Wallboard Section 09250 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. For the actual installation of ceramic tile, use only skilled tradesmen who are familiar with the referenced standards and with the requirements for this Work. B. Do tile work in accordance with Installation Manual 200 - 1979, "Ceramic Tile", by r Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada, except where this specification is more stringent. 1.05 SAMPLE, A. After award of Contract and before any ceramic file are delivered to the job site, submit samples of file to the Consultant for approval. Samples to be submitted on 12 inch x 12 inch sample board for each colour, texture, size and pattern of tile in accordance with Division 1. Grout sample joints for representative sample of final installation. 7175-09310.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09310 ' CERAMIC FLOOR AND WALL TILE Page 2 ' 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver all materials of this Section to the job site in their original unopened containers with all labels intact and legible at time of use. B. Store all materials under cover in a manner to prevent damage and contamination; store only the specified materials at the job site. C. Use all means necessary to protect the materials, before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. D. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to ' the approval of the Consultant and at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials shall be graded and containers grade sealed, delivered to the job site in their original packages or containers with the manufacturer's labels and seals intact. 2.03 WALL TILE tA. Wall tiles shall be 2" x 2" matte glazed ceramic, cushion edge, Windsor Ontario Series Ceramic Wall Tile as manufactured by Olympia, or approved equal, complete with round edge trim, coves, angle beads, etc. Colour will be selected by the Consultant from the manufacturers standard range of colours. Four(4) colours will be selected (2 field colours and 2 accent colours). 2.04 SETTING COMPOUND A. Setting compound shall be "L & M Wall Mix"for wall tiles, or reviewed alternate. ' 2.05 GROUTING COMPOUND A. Grouting compound for wall tiles shall be "L& M Ceramic Mosaic Grout", or reviewed alternate, in colour as later selected by the Consultant. 7175-09310.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09310 CERAMIC FLOOR AND WALL TILE Page 3 , PART 3: EXECUTION , 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Surfaces on which file is to be applied, shall be thoroughly cleaned down. , B. Drywall surfaces on which file is to be applied, shall be free from dust, excess plaster and shall be plain and true without any irregularities. C. Concrete and masonry walls on which tile are to be applied, shall be thoroughly cleaned down and all dust, efflorescence, dirt, etc. removed. Concrete and masonry wall surfaces to which wall file is to be applied shall be levelled off as required with "L & M Wall Mix"to produce true flat surfaces. ' D. In the event of discrepancies, immediately notify the Consultant and do not proceed with installation in such areas until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.02 TILED WALLS ' A. Refer to Drawings and Room Finish Schedules for locations. Wall tiles shall be set by the thinset method, using setting and grouting compound, in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. , B. Tile shall be laid out in pattern as detailed on the Drawings with 1/16" joints and square with wall. , C. Cut and fit tiles neatly around all projections, curbs, recesses, fixtures, etc., spacing tiles accurately so that pattern is uninterrupted. 3.03 SETTING BED ' A. Apply a thin pressured on skim coat of setting compound to substrate in the area to be tiled. Do not spread more mortar than can be covered before skinning occurs. ' Follow skim coat immediately with a doubling coat to form a 3/16"to 1/4"thick layer of mortar. Do not touch until just before placing tile. B. Just before placing file, notch the Thin-Set mortar bed with a suitable notched trowel, combing an area that can be covered within 5 minutes in hot dry surroundings, or no more than 10 minutes at under cooler, moister conditions. 7175-M310.wpd r DIVISION 9 SECTION 09310 CERAMIC FLOOR AND WALL TILE Page 4 1 3.03 SETTING BED (Cont'd) C. Place individual tiles against freshly combed setting compound with moderately firm ' pressure. Follow soon with a thorough beat-in. Beat-in should be sufficient to cause ribs of notched mortar bed to flow together into a continuous layer. Make any necessary adjustments in alignment promptly following beat-in. D. Clean out joints for receipt of grouting compound and clean up smudges of mortar with a sponge moistened with clean water. rE. Grouting shall be performed at any time after initial set has occurred. r3.04 GROUTING A. As soon as file beds have sufficiently set, the the shall be washed clean and grouted with grouting compound in strict accordance with "L & M" printed instructions. B. Joints in wall tile shall be filled solid and flush with "L & M Ceramic Mosaic Grout". r C. Prepare joints and mix grout in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Force maximum amount of grout into joints, avoiding air traps or voids. ' D. Remove all excess rout b washing diagonally across the joints. Check for voids, air 9 Y g 9 Y pockets and gaps and fill same. Remove all discoloured grout and replace with new. E. Cure all joints. 1 3.05 CLEANIN A. Upon completion of wall tile installation and grouting, thoroughly clean and polish all exposed surfaces of ceramic wall tile. r3.06 EXTRA STOCK A. Upon completion of the installation and as a condition of acceptance, deliver to the Owner one carton of each colour and pattern of ceramic tiles installed under this section for the Owner's maintenance program. Identify each carton for location and installation date. 1 7175-09310.wpd r DIVISION 9 r SECTION 09500 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Page 1 ' PART 1: GENERAL ' 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENT A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. r 1.02 WORK INCLUDED r This Section of the contract includes all acoustical ceilings called for or implied by the drawings and specifications,together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or , not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: A. Acoustical ceiling suspension system, panels and sound blankets as indicated on the Room Finish Schedule and Drawings. 1 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Gypsum Wallboard Section 09250 ' B. Stucco Finish Section 09800 C. Mechanical Division 15 ' D. Electrical Division 16 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS , A. The installation of all acoustic ceilings shall be carried out by an Acoustical Contractor approved by the manufacturer of the acoustical materials and ' thoroughly experienced in this work. 1.05 SAMPLES A. Submit duplicate, full size samples of materials to the consultant for approval prior ' to commencement of work. PART : PRODUCTS r 2.01 PANELS ' A. Acoustic panels shall be glass or mineral fibre with flame spread rating of 25 or less, and NRC range of 0.65 to 0.75, as manufactured by CGC Interiors. 1 1175-09500.wpd ' DIVISION 9 SECTION 09500 ' ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Page 2 2.01 PANELS (Cont'd) Panel Type 1: Acoustone Frost, fine texture, 24"x 48" x%" square edge. Panel Type 2: Acoustone Sandrift natural texture, 24" x 24" x %", shadowline ' edge. 2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Suspension System - Interlocking Tee Grid, 15/16"wide formed out of cold rolled zinc bonded steel, matte white baked enamel finish. "Donn DX Fast-Loc System". B. Edge Trim 24 gauge, zinc coated, cold rolled steel, "L"type with white matte baked enamel finish. "Donn M6" or other as recommended by manufacturer. rC. Hangers galvanized mild steel '/e" dia. rods and 1" x 3/16" flats and #9 gauge galvanized wire. D. Tie Wire#18 gauge galvanized annealed steel wire. t2.03 SOUND BLANKETS ' A. 2-1/2" sound blankets as manufactured by Fiberglas Canada Inc. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP A. Measure the ceiling area and lay out centre lines, both ways, providing balanced borders at room perimeter unless matching existing grid. B. Establish ceiling elevation by use of a water level or transit. Install the wall mould accurately in position to provide correct finished ceiling height. ' C. Frame openings for light fixtures or air diffusers and at changes in ceiling heights. Obtain the weights of the various electric light fixtures and install extra hangers as required to support these fixtures. Conform to Ontario Hydro regulations. ' D. All joints shall be straight in alignment and the exposed surfaces shall be flush and level. Edge moulding shall be installed wherever the acoustic ceiling abuts walls, columns and other vertical surfaces. E. Where Reflected Ceiling Plans have been provided, the location of diffusers and light fixtures must conform to the layouts indicated. See Electrical, Mechanical and ' Architectural Drawings. 7175-09500.wpd DIVISION 9 , SECTION 09500 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Page 3 , 3.02 INSTALLATION: LAY-IN SYSTEM A. The suspension system shall be installed according to "Specifications for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceiling Suspension Systems", published by the Acoustical Materials Association, the Reflected Ceiling Plans, and to the ' satisfaction of the Consultant. B. Install hanger rods at minimum 48" centres both ways suspended from structure above and crimp lower ends at correct height to engage the holes in the main tees. Hangers must not be more than 5 degrees from vertical. C. Main tee members may run either the long or short dimension of the room. Starting , at one comer of the room, install the main tees and cross tees. Cut the ends of tees at the wall mould allowing some space for expansion. Frame up with tees, , openings for light fixtures or air diffusers and at changes in ceiling height. D. The grid layout shall be as indicated on the Drawings. 3.03 INSTALLATION: ACOUSTIC PANELS , A. Lay in the acoustic ceiling panels carefully cutting and trimming to provide the specified layout. ' B. Remove and replace any damaged or marked panels. C. Install acoustic insulation after panels are installed. D. Provide one extra sealed carton of each type of acoustic panel upon completion of the project for the Owner's use. Identify cartons. 3.04 SCHEDULE ' A. Install acoustic panel Type 1 and 2 where shown on the reflected ceiling plans. 7175-09500.wpd DIVISION 9 ' SECTION 09660 RESILIENT FLOORING Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. ' 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all resilient tile flooring and rubber base called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether , referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: A. Resilient tile flooring. , B. Rubber base, including rubber base at carpet and resilient sheet flooring. C. Rubber stair nosings. D. Preparation of new and existing floor slabs scheduled to receive resilient flooring. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Concrete Floors Section 03300 Ceramic Tile Section 09310 Carpeting Section 09680 Resilient Sheet Flooring Section 09665 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Before any resilient flooring materials are delivered to the job site, submit to the r Consultant, a complete list of all materials proposed to be furnished and installed under this portion of the Work, stating manufacturer's name and catalogue number for each item, and product samples in colours specified. B. Accompanying the materials list, submit two copies of the manufacturer's current recommended method of installation for each item. C. Provide maintenance data for resilient flooring for Operation and Maintenance Manual , specified under Division 1. 7175-09660.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09660 ' RESILIENT FLOORING Page 2 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Use all means necessary to protect resilient flooring materials before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. ' B. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Consultant and at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2: PRODUCTS A. Vinyl composition file shall be 12" x 12" x 1h" thick, to CSA 126.1-M1984., non asbestos, through pattern tile with static load of not less than 75 p.s.i. VCT#1 Premium Excelon, Canvas, as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries Inc. VCT#2 Premium Excelon, Companion Square, as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries Inc. VCT#3 Premium Excelon, Feature Tile/Feature Strips, as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries Inc. VCT#4 Standard Excelon, Imperial Texture, as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries Inc. Colours will be selected by the Architect from full range of manufacturer's standards. Up to 5 colours of each the may be selected for each type of tile, in patterns as detailed on the drawings. Colour for shuffleboard court inlay pattern shall be VCT#3, colour to be selected by the Architect. B. Base shall be 4" high, top set extruded, fire retardant, homogeneous multi process, CO-EX90 Nitrile rubber plasticized vinyl, not less than 0.095" thick with preformed internal and external corners as manufactured by Finercraft Plastics Products. Colours will be selected by the Consultant from the manufacturer's standard range of 80 colours, up to 4 colours will be selected. Base for carpet shall be toeless type. Provide cove base in all other locations. ' D. Resilient stair nosings shall be 2%" deep x full width of tread. Safety rib tread Type 110 by Finercraft or equal. 7175-09660.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09660 RESILIENT FLOORING Page 3 ' 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) ' E. Primers and Adhesives shall be non-flamable, waterproof, best quality formulated for the application of the resilient floor coverings and base over sub floor and wall surfaces as indicated on the drawings and Room Finish Schedules. Primers and ' adhesives to be type and brand recommended by the manufacturer of the products for use with his materials and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions. , F. Sub-floor filler and leveller shall be white premixed latex compatible with tile adhesive. G. Floor Wax shall be as recommended by the resilient flooring manufacturer. ' H. Transition strips shall be rubber, as manufactured by Finercraft, with lip to extend under floor tile with tapered edge. I. All colours and patterns shall be as selected by the Consultant from the standard range of colours and patterns of the selected manufacturer, colours and patterns will be limited to not more than one per room unless specifically called for and detailed on drawings. ' PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. B. Confirm that resilient flooring may be installed in accordance with the original design ' and the manufacturer's recommendations. C. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Consultant. D. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install all resilient flooring in strict accordance with the original design and the , manufacturer's recommendations. 7175.09660.wPa ' DIVISION 9 SECTION 09660 RESILIENT FLOORING Page 4 3.02 INSTALLATION (Cont'd) ' B. Do not lay floor coverings and base until all trades, except painter, have completed their work and just prior to completion of the building. ' C. The temperature of room floor surface and material shall be at least 70 deg. F. 24 hours before, during and 24 hours after installation. ' D. Fill all cavities, cracks,joints and all other surface imperfections in concrete substrate with latex fill or other approved subfloor filler in order to produce a smooth, flat, hard surface for receipt of resilient flooring. Scrape off all ridges, droppings, scale and other projections. Clean floor with an industrial vacuum cleaner. Remove all substance and materials affecting adhesive bond. E. Prime concrete floors and apply adhesive uniformly with notched spreaders, at correct coverage as recommended by the manufacturer. Do not spread more adhesive than can be covered before initial set takes place. F. Roll floor coverings, after laying,with a polished clean roller weighing at least 150 lbs. ' to ensure uniform adhesion and to remove air pockets. G. Where tiles terminate at doorways, or where tiles of different type or colour butt together the joint shall centre on the door. ' H. Provide and install transition strips where resilient floor tiles terminate against a concrete floor where no applied architectural floor finish is required. Transition strip 1 shall be installed below centre of door where a door occurs. I. Tile shall be laid with all joints square and tightly butted together. Start installation from centre of rooms to ensure equal max. size edge tiles. Pattern and direction of tile shall be as directed by the Consultant. Refer to detailed floor layout drawings. J. Tile to be laid full depth of closets, toe spaces, recesses, etc. Cut and fit tiles tightly against openings, breaks, frames,fixtures, columns and other vertical surfaces. Carry tile under all movable fitments. ' K. Install 4" high top set rubber cove base in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Apply adhesive to wall surface, not to back of base. Set base with waterproof adhesive of the type to suit the surface on which the base is to be applied. Fit and sandbag the base tightly against wall and floor surfaces. Space joints uniformly. 7175-09660.wpd DIVISION 9 , SECTION 09660 RESILIENT FLOORING Page 5 3.02 INSTALLATION (Cont'd) , L. Base shall be installed in long lengths with tight, well fitted joints. All comers shall be formed with preformed internal and external moulded comer sections. Cut and fit base tightly against frames, breaks, columns, fixtures, fitments, etc. M. Cut rubber stair treads to fit, and set in place using adhesive. ' 3.03 CLEANING A. Remove surplus adhesive from resilient floor coverings, carpet and base as the work progresses. B. Five days after installation of coverings, clean with cleaner, rinse, dry and apply one coat of wax in accordance with flooring manufacturers recommendations. Protect with non-staining building paper. , C. Immediately prior to final inspection, remove protection, clean, dry or damp mop floors and apply one additional coat of wax. , 3.04 EXTRA STOCK ' A. Upon completion of the installation, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver to the Owner one carton of each colour and pattern of floor tiles, installed in this Work, for , the Owners future use in patching. Label each carton for proper identification. Extra stock to be same production run as materials installed under this section. 7175-09660.wpd DIVISION 9 , SECTION 09665 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING Page 1 ' PART 1: GENERAL ' 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. ' 1.02 WORK INCLUDED ' This Section of the contract includes all resilient sheet flooring called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or r not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: A. Resilient sheet flooring. , B. Preparation of existing and new floor slabs scheduled to receive resilient sheet flooring. , C. Heat welding of all seams. D. Cove base where shown on the drawings. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Resilient Flooring and Rubber Base Section 09660 , B. Carpeting Section 09680 C. Ceramic Tile Section 09310 ' 1.04 SUBMITTALS , A. Submit duplicate 12"x 12"samples of full range of manufacturer's standard colour range for selection by the Architect. ' B. Before any resilient sheet flooring materials are delivered to the job site, submit to the Consultant a complete list of all materials proposed to be furnished and installed under this portion of the Work, stating manufacturer's name and catalogue ' number for each item, and product samples in colours specified. C. Accompanying the materials list, submit two copies of the manufacturer's current recommended method of installation for each item. D. Provide maintenance data for resilient sheet flooring for Operation and Maintenance Manual specified under Division 1. 7175-09665.wpd , DIVISION 9 SECTION 09665 ' RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING Page 2 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Use all means necessary to protect resilient sheet flooring materials before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other ' trades. B. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary ' to the approval of the Consultant and at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Sheet Vinyl: To C.S.A. A126.3. ' B. Products: .1 SVF #1: 0.080" thick, TRANSLATIONS commercial quality sheet vinyl flooring as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries Inc. Colours will be selected by the Architect from full range of manufacturer's standards. Up to 4 colours may be used. C. Primers and adhesives shall be waterproof, best quality formulated for the application of the resilient floor coverings over subfloor surfaces as indicated on ' the drawings and Room Finish Schedules. Primers to be type and brand recommended by the manufacturer of the products for use with his materials and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Adhesive shall be Armstrong S575 and S580 Adhesives. ' D. Subfloor filler and leveller shall be white premixed latex compatible with tile adhesive. E. Floor wax shall be as recommended by the resilient flooring manufacturer. ' F. Transition strips shall be rubber, as manufactured by Finercraft Rubber Products, with lip to extend under floor the with tapered edge. G. All colours and patterns shall be as selected by the Consultant from the standard range of colours and patterns of the selected manufacturer. Colours and patterns will be limited to not more than one per room unless specifically called for and ' detailed on drawings. 7175-09665.wpd DIVISION 9 ' SECTION 09665 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING Page 3 ' PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other ' trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. B. Confirm that resilient flooring may be installed in accordance with the original design and the manufacturer's recommendations. C. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Consultant. D. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies ' have been fully resolved. 3.02 INSTALLATION , A. Apply adhesive uniformly using recommended trowel. Do not spread more ' adhesive than can be covered by flooring before initial set takes place. B. Lay out flooring in patterns as detailed. La flooring with seams parallel to building lines to produce a minimum number of C. y 9 P 9 seams. Border widths minimum 1/3 width of full material. D. As installation progresses, roll flooring with 150 lb. roller to ensure full adhesion. ' E. Cut flooring neatly around fixed objects. ' F. Continue flooring over areas which will be under built-in furniture. G. Terminate flooring at centreline of door in openings where adjacent floor finish or ' colour is dissimilar. H. Install metal edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges where flooring , terminates. I. Do not lay floor coverings and base until all trades, except painter, have completed ' their work and just prior to completion of the building. J. Provide sheet flooring cove base in Kitchen and Receiving areas to manufacturer's ' standard detail. 7175-09665.wpd ! DIVISION 9 SECTION 09665 ! RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING Page 4 3.02 INSTALLATION (Cont'd) K. All seams shall be heat welded with manufacturer's colour matched seaming rods, in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. ! 3.03 CLEANING ! A. Remove surplus adhesive from resilient floor coverings, carpet and base as the work progresses. ! B. Five days after installation of coverings, clean with cleaner, rinse, dry and apply one coat of wax in accordance with flooring manufacturer's recommendations. ! Protect with non-staining building paper. C. Immediately prior to final inspection, remove protection, clean, dry or damp mop ' floors and apply one additional coat of wax. ! 3.04 EXTRA STOCK A. Upon completion of the installation, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver ! to the Owner 2 sq. yds. of each colour and pattern of sheet flooring, installed in this work, for the Owner's future use in patching. Extra stock to be same production run as materials installed under this section and properly labelled. ! ! ! ! ! 7175-09665.wpd ! DIVISION 9 , SECTION 09680 CARPETING Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. ' 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all carpeting called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following A. Carpeting B. Carpet Base C. Preparation of new and existing floor slabs scheduled to receive carpeting. , 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Resilient Flooring and Rubber Base Section 09660 B. Resilient Sheet Flooring Section 09665 1.04 SAMPLES A. Submit duplicate 12" square pieces of full line of each type of carpet specified for selection of colours by the Architect. 1.05 MAINTENANCE DATA A. Provide maintenance data for carpet maintenance for incorporation into Operation and Maintenance Manual. 1.06 DELIVERY A. Deliver carpet to site in clear, polyethylene wrapping bearing manufacturer's label ' stating type of carpet, colour and pattern number and material thickness. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Submit carpet seam layout to Architect for review prior to start of work. ' 7175-09680.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09680 CARPETING Page 2 1 1.08 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee: Carpets shall be guaranteed 10 years against normal wear and shall have a lifetime anti-static warrantee. Include guarantee in maintenance manuals. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS ' A. Carpets will be selected by the Architect. Include for the supply of all carpets in the Stipulated Price at the following amounts: Carpet Type 1 $25.00/sq. yd. Carpet Type 2 $34.00/sq. yd. 1. Locate carpet and carpet base where shown on the room finish schedule. 2. Up to two (2) colours of each carpet may be selected. B. Carpet Base: 4"high, to match carpet, with bound edge. Binding colour to match carpet. jC. Rubber Thresholds: Black rubber strip material, 127 mm wide by 12.7 mm high bevelled edge, Series E890, "Johnsonite", supplied by Reynolds Smith Corporation, Waterloo, Ontario. D. Binder bar: Roberts Nap Lok 8912, aluminum pinless type. E. Direct Glue Down Adhesive and Seaming Cement: to CAN/CGSB-71.28-M86 and as recommended by carpet manufacturer. F. Subfloor sealer, filler, and leveller shall be as recommended by carpet manufacturer, compatible with carpet adhesive. ' G. Carpet Protection: Non-staining heavy duty kraft paper or 0.15 mm thick polyethylene film. ' 7175-09680.wpd DIVISION 9 1 SECTION 09680 CARPETING Page 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP A. Use maximum widths and lengths, with pile running the same direction, free from end joints in a run and with a minimum number of side seams. Side seams parallel to each other. Select materials for colour and pattern consistency, using matching pieces in each location. ' B. Where variations of colour within normal textile tolerance occur, change in colour shall be restricted to between individual rooms, with such changes occurring at the door line. No room shall have two variations of same colour and pattern within it. C. Rooms less than 12'-0"wide shall have no seams. End seams are not permitted except at door openings. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare floor surfaces in accordance with CGSB 4-GP-156 and manufacturer's printed instructions. Provide epoxy self levelling filler over all depressions or voids in new and existing slabs. Grind all protrusions. B. Ensure toeless type resilient base is installed before proceeding with carpeting. C. Seal concrete substrates in accordance with sealer manufacturer's directions. 3.03 CARPET INSTALLATION A. Glue-down Installation Install glue-down carpet in accordance with CGSB 4-GP-156 and manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Pre-condition, stretch and install carpet following manufacturer's printed instructions. Fit neatly around architectural, mechanical, electrical and telephone outlets, and furniture fitments, around perimeter of rooms into recesses, and around projections. C. Seal edges of cut-outs with latex. 7175-09680.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09680 CARPETING Page 4 1 3.04 CARPET BASE INSTALLATION A. Install carpet base to match adjacent carpet flooring, where indicated aligned straight and level. B. Attach carpet to wall with adhesive. Neatly fit against floor carpet. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Vacuum carpets clean. Protect traffic areas of carpeted floors with carpet protection. Tape edges and joints to prevent shifting. 3.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide an additional 100 square feet of each type of carpet for maintenance purposes. B. Carpet supplied for maintenance purposes shall be from the same dye lot used for the installation and shall be in one piece, rolled up, wrapped, and identified as to contents. i 7175-09680.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09800 STUCCO FINISH Page 1 ' PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all spray texture coatings called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: A. Sprayed Stucco finish for ceilings. B. Maintenance repair of stucco ceiling finish of existing building. C. Repair of all existing stucco ceiling finishes damaged by other trades. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Masonry Section 04200 B. Gypsum Wallboard Section 09250 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Where shown on the drawings and elsewhere in the specifications, the term spray textured coating (STC) refers to stucco finish. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. S a m pLe—s 1 Prepare samples of various finishes for Consultant's approval either on site or by submitting samples as directed at least two weeks before materials are required. Identify each sample as to job, finish, colour name, number, date and name of subcontractor. .2 Submit duplicate colour charts showing full range of manufacturers standard colours for selection by the Architect. 7175-09800.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09800 STUCCO FINISH Page 2 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to site in their original containers with labels intact. Notify the consultant in writing that materials are on site and request examination by the 1 consultant before labels are broken on the original container. Store in place directed by the Consultant. Keep stored materials covered. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Tem erature 1 Do not store in temperatures less than 45 deg. F (7 deg. C). Keep from freezing. .2 Keep away from direct heat. .3 Do not apply stucco finish in temperatures less than 45 deg. F (7 deg. C). B. Protection 1 Provide metal pans or adequate tarpaulin to protect surfaces in areas assigned for the storage or mixing of materials. .2 Use sufficient drop cloths and protective coverings for the full protection of floors, walls, windows, furnishings, etc. not receiving the stucco finish. Protect all mechanical, electrical, special equipment, hardware and all other components of the building which may be affected by the stucco work from spotting and other spoiling during the application. .3 Leave all areas clean and free from evidence of occupancy or•work upon completion. PART 2: PRODUCTS ' 2.01 MATERIALS A. General- Use material specified herein. B. Brand Manufacturer's Name: Durabond Products Ltd., unless noted otherwise, is used to establish a quality basis. C. Interior stucco shall be Durex Interior Decorative Stucco Spray - colour shall be selected by the Architect from full range of manufacturers standards. 7175-09800.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09800 STUCCO FINISH Page 3 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) D. Priming material shall be Durex Brush Coat same colour as stucco spray. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Check all surfaces prior to application. B. Remove dust, grease, oil and all extraneous matter prior to commencing. 9 C. Do not apply finish on wet materials. D. If surface requires cleaning, wash with 10% solution of muriatic acid followed with ample rinsing with clean water. Allow to dry prior to application of brush coat. 3.02 APPLICATION A. General: .1 Installation of stucco finishes shall be in accordance with manufacturers printed recommendations. B. Workmanship , .1 Execute work using experienced skilled mechanic according to the best practice as specified herein. C. Prime Coat .1 Prime surface to be covered with Durex Brush Coat in the same colour as the Durex Stucco Spray. .2 Remix the brush coat prior to beginning application. ' .3 Apply brush coat by means of a high pile roller, brush or airless spray gun at a thickness of 20 mils. .4 Allow surface to dry to the touch before applying stucco spray. .5 Protect the newly finished surface from rain, hail and maintain temperature above 45 deg. F during application and for a period of 24 hours thereafter. 7175-09800.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09800 jSTUCCO FINISH Page 4 j3.02 APPLICATION (Cont'd) D. Finishing Coat .1 Apply in a series of thin coats by means of an air compressor and a Goldblatt Pattern Pistol, using a constant pressure throughout. Medium texture - 150 sq. ft./pail (60 sq. ft./gal). .2 Where a section must be done in two stages, at the joint thin spray out to a light thin spray and when doing next section blend new spray by overlapping the previous thin spray section with a light overspray, taking care not to apply too heavily. .3 Allow a minimum of 15 minutes between coats. .4 Repeat until approved medium texture is achieved. Avoid excessive build up with any one coat. .5 Allow a minimum of 24 hours for curing and drying. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Locate testing area in building to establish standard of workmanship, texture and coverage. B. Retain test area until completion of work. Use approved work in test area as standard for corresponding work throughout the building. Correct and refinish work which does not compare with approved application. 3.04 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 1 A. At completion of the project submit three copies of manufacturer's cleaning proceedings, for inclusion into maintenance manuals as specified under Division 1. 3.05 REPAIR OF EXISTING STUCCO DAMAGED BY OTHER TRADES A. Repair all existing stucco finishes damaged by other trades. Repair in accordance 1 with the manufacturer's directions to restore the stucco finish to original condition. Mix colour to match as necessary. i7175-09800.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09900 PAINTING Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all painting called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: A. Paint gypsum board walls, ceilings and bulkheads. B. Painting of underside of exposed roof decking. C. Finishing of wood doors including exposed edges. D. Painting of all exposed structural steel. E. Painting of all concrete walls as scheduled. F. Painting of miscellaneous metals. G. Painting of new and existing steel stairs including stringers, risers, guards, pickets, and handrail brackets. H. Painting of all hollow metal doors and pressed metal frames, including existing. I. Painting of concrete block walls. J. Finishing of wood, trim, mouldings, and casings. K. Finishing of millwork items except interior surfaces of cabinetwork. L. Opaque finish system on all exposed Architectural woodwork and wood doors. M. Special coatings. N. Paint exposed steel lintels. O. Painting of exposed gas piping. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Finishing of Exposed Surfaces of Cabinetwork Section 06410 B. Pipe Identification Division 15 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Paint manufacturer colour charts .1 Submit five (5)copies of the paint manufacturer's colour charts from which the Consultant will prepare proposed colour schedules. 7175-09900.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09900 PAINTING Page 2 1.04 SUBMITTALS (Cont'd) B. Samples .1 Prepare samples of various finishes for Consultant's approval either on Site or by submitting samples, as directed, at least thirty days before materials are required. Identify each sample as to job, finish, colour name, number, sheen name and gloss units, date and name of Sub-contractor. C. List of Materials 1 A list of materials proposed for use on the work, prepared by the pain t manufacturer, shall be submitted in writing to the Consultant for review at least 30 days before the materials are required. The list shall bear the manufacturer's official certification that the materials listed thereon are equal to those specified herein. If products to be used are from various manufacturers submit a list from each manufacturer. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Site in their original containers with labels intact. Notify the Consultant in writing that materials are on site and request examination by the Consultant before labels are broken on the original container. Store in space directed by Consultant. Keep stored materials covered at all times and take all necessary precautions against fire. B. Provide CO2 fire extinguisher of minimum 20 lbs. capacity in paint storage area. 1 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Temperature 1 Do not paint or finish in unclean or improperly ventilated areas. Do not paint in temperatures lower then 10 degrees C or varnish in temperatures lower than 18 degrees C. B. Protection .1 Provide metal pans or adequate tarpaulin to protect surfaces in areas assigned for the storage and mixing of paints. 7175-09900.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09900 PAINTING Page 3 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS (Cont'd) .2 Use sufficient drop cloths and protective coverings for the full protection of floors, furnishings and work not being painted. Protect mechanical, electrical and special equipment, hardware, all other components of the building which do not require painting, from paint spotting and other soiling during the painting process. .3 Leave above areas clean and free from evidence of occupancy upon completion of painting. .4 Protect paint materials from fire and freezing. .5 Keep waste rags in metal drums containing water and remove from building at end of each working shift. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Use material specified herein. B. Brand Manufacturer's Name: Pratt and Lambert, unless noted otherwise, is used to establish a quality basis, except for Special Coatings. C. Equal products of the following manufacturers will be accepted subject to approval of List of Materials requested in Item 1.04 Submittals. The Consultant reserves the right to reject materials which are not equal to the specified material. The Contractor will be required to supply the specified material for those materials rejected at no additional cost to the Owner: Manufacturer Benjamin Moore & Company Ltd. Glidden Pratt and Lambert Pittsburg Paints Sherwin Williams D. Special Coatings: Glazetite Type II by Master Builders including primers, sealants and foundation coat as recommended by the manufacturer. 7175-09900.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09900 PAINTING Page 4 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Condition of Surfaces .1 Check all surfaces with electric moisture metre and do not proceed if reading is higher than 12-15 without written permission from Consultant. .2 Proceed with work only when surfaces and conditions are satisfactory for production of a first class job. .3 Remove dust, grease, rust and extraneous matter from all surfaces (except that rust occurring on items specified to be primed under other Sections shall be removed and work reprimed under those Sections). 3.02 PREPARATION IA. Concrete and Masonry .1 Test surfaces for alkalinity with pink litmus paper or other recognized method. .2 Where extreme alkalinity occurs, wash surface with 4% solution tetrapotassium pyrophosphate(5 oz. per gallon of water) where latex base paint is to be used and with zinc sulphate solution (3 lb. per gal. water) where other paint bases are to be used. B. Metal 1 Clean unpainted and shop painted metal, remove loose rust and prime bare metal with zinc chromate primer. Feather out edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. ' C. Galvanized Surfaces 1 Phosphatize galvanized metal surfaces using CGSB 32-GP-116 pretreatment or prime with galvanized metal primer. D. Woodwork 1 Inspect millwork to assure surfaces are smooth free from machine marks and that nailheads have been countersunk. Seal all knots and sapwood in surfaces to receive paint, with a sealer compatible with finish specified. 7175-00 00.wpd r DIVISION 9 SECTION 09900 PAINTING Page 5 3.02 PREPARATION (Cont'd) D. Woodwork (Cont'd) .2 Sand smooth all woodwork which is to be finished and clean surfaces free of dust before applying first coat. In the case of painted woodwork fill nail holes, splits and scratches with non-shrinking filler after first coat is dry. When these occur on a surface to receive a transparent finish, use putty tinted to match local grain condition. Between coats and lightly with No. 00 sand paper and remove dust. E. Gypsum Board .1 Inspect drywall to assure surface as free from marks and blemishes. .2 Clean surfaces free of dust before applying first coat. .3 Inspect surface after prime coat and touch up and re-prime as necessary. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Finishes and number of coats specified in Finish Schedule are intended to cover surfaces completely. If they do not, apply further coats until complete coverage is achieved as required. B. Any areas exhibiting incomplete or unsatisfactory coverage shall have the entire plane painted. Patching will not be acceptable. C. Spraying will not be allowed without written permission. D. Arrange to have traffic barred from completed areas wherever possible. E. Apply materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions and specifications and be familiar with those directions and specifications. F. Apply primer-sealer coats by brush or roller method. Permit paint to dry before , applying succeeding coats, tough up suction spots and sand between coats with No. 00 sand paper. G. Prime woodwork designated for painting as soon as possible after woodwork is delivered to Site. Prime all surfaces of such woodwork, whether exposed or not, before installation. Back prime woodwork which is to receive transparent finish with one coat of transparent finish reduced 25%. 7175-09900.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09900 PAINTING Page 6 3.03 APPLICATION (Cont'd) H. Where two coats of the same paint are to be applied, tint the first coat to differentiate from the final coat. I. Apply final coats on smooth surfaces by roller or brush. Hand brush wood surfaces. jJ. Paint shall be uniform in sheen, colour and texture, free from brush or roller marks, sags, runs or other defects. K. Work by This Section as Related to Mechanical and Electrical Work 1 .1 Finish paint primed mechanical equipment listed hereafter. a) All exposed gas piping, interior and exterior, new and existing. b) All exposed ductwork. .2 Paint insulated and bare P i P P es exposed to view in rooms scheduled to have painted walls and ceiling or other finished surfaces. .3 Prime and paint exposed, unfinished electrical raceways, fittings, outlet boxes,junction boxes, pull boxes and similar items in rooms scheduled to have painted walls or ceiling or other finished surfaces. .4 Replace identification markings on mechanical and electrical work when painted over or spattered. .5 Paint work to match adjacent walls and ceilings unless directed otherwise. .6 Paint interior surfaces of air ducts that are visible through grilles and louvres with one coat of flat black metal paint to limit of sight line. .7 Where walls and ceilings are not scheduled to be painted, the work described above shall be painted a colour selected by the Consultant except where galvanized or plated. .8 Paint all electrical distribution panels. Colour selected by Owner. 3.04 FIELD ALITY CONTROL A. Locate testing area in Building to establish standard of workmanship, texture, gloss and coverage where designated. 7175-09900.wpd r DIVISION 9 SECTION 09900 PAINTING Page 7 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL (Cont'd) B. Apply samples of all finishes on each type of surface to be coated with correct material, number of coats, colour, texture and degree of gloss required. C. Retain test area until completion of work. Use approved work in test areas as standard for corresponding work throughout Building. Correct and refinish work which does not compare with approved finishes. 3.05 FINISH SCHEDULE A. General .1 In instances where materials specified are not suitable for a particular job t application or are contrary to manufacturer's recommendations for use on a particular surface, such condition shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Consultant for clarification and instructions. .2 Finishes shall match approved samples but Consultant reserves the right to make reasonable changes to finish specifications to obtain desired results without additional cost or obligation of Owner. .3 Gloss terms shall have following values (ASTM D523-67 "Test for Specular Gloss"): Gloss Term Gloss Value Flat 5 to 20 Eggshell 20 to 40 Semi-gloss 40 to 60 Gloss, medium 60 to 80 Gloss, high 80 to 90 .4 A colour chart giving colour schemes and gloss values for various areas will be prepared after tendering by Consultant. .5 Do not paint baked enamel, chrome plated, stainless steel, aluminum or other surfaces finished with a final factory finish. All primed surfaces shall be finish painted under this Section. 7775-09900.wpd r DIVISION 9 SECTION 09900 PAINTING Page 8 3.05 FINISH SCHEDULE (Cont'd) 1 B. Schedule of Surfaces and Number of Coats 1 .1 Exterior Schedule a) Galvanized Metal: 1 st Coat- Vinyl wash primer 1-GP-121 M 2nd Coat- Steel primer 1-GP40d 3rd Coat- Exterior enamel 1-GP-59M b) Primed Ferrous Metal Surfaces: ' 1 st Coat- Spot priming 1-GP-40d 2nd Coat- Exterior enamel 1-GP-59M 3rd Coat- Repeat second coat .2 Interior Schedule a) Galvanized and Zinc coated Metal: 1st Coat- Vinyl wash primer 1-GP-121M 1 2nd Coat- Enamel Undercoat 1-GP-38M 3rd Coat- Semi-gloss enamel 1-GP-57M b) Primed Metal Surfaces: Touch up primer as required. 1st Coat-Alkyd enamel 1-GP-57M 2nd Coat- Repeat first coat c) Masonry: 1st Coat- Block Filler 1-GP-188 2nd Coat- Semi-Gloss Enamel 1-GP-57M 3rd Coat- Repeat second coat. d) Gypsum Board Ceilings and Bulkheads: 1st Coat- Primer-sealer 1-GP-1 19M 2nd Coat-Alkyd flat 1-GP-118M 7775-09900.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09900 PAINTING Page 9 3.05 FINISH SCHEDULE (Cont'd) .2 Interior Schedule (Cont'd) e) Gypsum Board Walls: 1st Coat- Primer-sealer 1-GP-118M 2nd Coat- Eggshell Alkyd 1-GP-202CP 3rd Coat- Repeat second coat f) Wood-Paint Finish: 1 st Coat- Enamel Undercoat 1-GP-38M 2nd Coat-Alkyd flat 1-GP-118M ' 3rd Coat- Repeat second coat g) Wood/Hardwood-Varnish Finish: 1st Coat- paste-filler 2nd Coat- Shellac 1-GP-16M, Type 2 3rd Coat- Varnish gloss 1-GP-36M, Type 1 4th Coat-Varnish satin, 1-GP-36M h) Wood-Varnish Stain Finish: 1st Coat- Pigmented Stain 1-GP-145M Type 2 2nd Coat- Shellac 1-GP-16M Type 2 3rd Coat- Varnish semi-gloss 1-GP-145M Type 2 4th Coat- Repeat third coat. i) Wood - Opaque Finish: 1 st Coat- Benjamin Moore solvent based penetrating pickling stain 2nd Coat- Repeat 1st coat. 3rd Coat-Wood Kote Liquid plastic- Exterior Polyurethane, Satin #850-4. j) Special Coatings: Paint walls and ceilings in Kitchen area with special coatings in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. 717"9900.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09900 PAINTING Page 10 1 3.05 FINISH SCHEDULE (Cont'd) C. Surfaces: The following surfaces shall be painted/varnished: .1 Miscellaneous metals and structural steel. .2 Exposed steel lintels, guardrails. .3 Masonry walls. .4 Drywall partitions and ceilings. .5 Wood trim (opaque finish). .6 Wood window frames, trim, casings and muntin bars. .7 Wood doors and frames (including exposed edges of wood doors) (opaque finish). .8 Exposed wood at cabinetwork and wood handrails (opaque finish). ' .9 Hollow metal doors, frames and screens. .10 Cabinet work except interior of cabinets as specified in Section 06410. .11 Exposed mechanical and electrical equipment mounted on the roof including primed and galvanized surface but not factory pre-finished painted surface. .12 Exposed mechanical ductwork and bare and insulated pipes. .13 Exposed mechanical and electrical lines located on wall or ceiling surfaces to be painted. .14 Gas piping. 3.06 PAINT MANUFACTURER'S INSPECTION REPORTS A. The Contractor shall arrange to have the paint manufacturer's representative of the product being used on the project submit written inspection reports to the Consultant. B. The representative shall visit the site as many times as required to assist the painting contractor in the proper application of the products to ensure a satisfactory job. C. In addition to the requirements of 3.06 B the representative shall visit the site and submit a written inspection report to the Consultant at the following times: .1 Prior to painting to see that proper surface preparation is carried out. .2 During each individual coat application including primer stage to see that there is no detrimental deviation from the manufacturer's specifications and the requirement specified herein. .3 At the final completion of painting to ensure a satisfactory job has been obtained. 7175-09900.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09900 PAINTING Page 11 3.07 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES A. At completion of the project submit three copies of manufacturers cleaning procedures in regards to each paint product type and gloss finish specified herein for inclusion into maintenance manuals as specified under Division 1. i T 1 1 1 t 1 7175-09900.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09950 WALL COVERINGS Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all wall coverings called for or implied by the Room Finish Schedules, drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. After award of the Contract and before any materials pertaining to this work are delivered to the job site, submit duplicate samples of the full range of standard colours for selection by the Architect. 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Use all means necessary to protect the work of this Section, before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. B. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary, to the approval of the Consultant and at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS t A. Wall Coverings Wall coverings will be selected by the Architect. Include in the Stipulated Price for the supply of all wall coverings in the amount of$16.00/sq. metre. B. Adhesives , Waterproof type recommended by wall covering manufacturer. C. Seale r Sealer to be as recommended by wall covering manufacturer. 7175-09950.wpd DIVISION 9 SECTION 09950 WALL COVERINGS Page 2 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 REPARATION OF SURFACES 1 A. Prepare surfaces firm, smooth and dry, free from loose material and lime burn, and as recommended by wall covering manufacturer. B. Work penetrating substrate to be completed before installing wall covering. C. Size and treat wall surfaces to receive wall covering as recommended by manufacturer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturers printed directions, using tradesmen with proven skill in the installation of vinyl wall coverings and as follows: .1 Use fabric rolls in consecutive numerical sequence of manufacture. .2 Place fabric panels consecutively in the exact order they are cut from roll, including filling spaces above or below windows, doors, or similar penetrations. .3 Hang fabric by reversing alternate strips except on match patterns. .4 Trim deeply textured strip matched patterns on work table with metal straight edge and industrial razor blade. .5 Trim additional selvage where required to achieve colour and pattern match at seams. .6 Follow the manufacturer's printed instructions for mixing adhesive. .7 Apply adhesive to fabric back using a roller or paste brush. .8 Hang non-matched patterns by overlapping the edges and double cutting 1 through both thicknesses with 0.04" or 0.06" thick zinc or aluminum strip back-up to prevent cutting the substrate. .9 Wrap fabric 6" beyond inside and outside corners. No cutting at corners permitted. ' .10 No horizontal seams permitted. 7175-09950.wpd DIVISION 9 I SECTION 09950 WALL COVERINGS Page 3 3.02 INSTALLATION (Cont'd) .11 Install vinyl-coated fabric before installation of casings, bases, cabinets, etc. .12 Use stiff bristled brush or flexible broad knife to eliminate air pockets and secure fabric to substrate. .13 Remove excess adhesive with damp sponge from seams as work progresses, and wipe clean and dry with cloth towel. .14 Leave completed work smooth, clean, without wrinkles, gaps, overlaps, or air pockets. 3.03 EXTRA STOCK A. Upon completion of the work, supply to the Owner, minimum 5 square yards of each wall covering type and colour selected. 3.04 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS t A. Provide for inclusion in the Maintenance Manuals, copies of the material manufacturers printed instructions for cleaning and repair of wall coverings. j 7175-09950.wpd DIVISION 10 SECTION 10162 METAL TOILET PARTITIONS Page 1 ' PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENT A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes all toilet partitions and screens called for or implied by the drawings and specifications,together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Masonry Section 04200 B. Miscellaneous Metals Section 05500 C. Washroom Accessories Section 10800 1.04 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with General Conditions. Show and describe in detail materials, finishes, dimensions, details of connections and fastenings, elevations, plans, sections, metal gauges, hardware and any other pertinent information. B. Submit duplicate samples of full range of manufacturer's standard colour charts. 1.05 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Toilet partitions shall comply to the requirements of the Ontario Building Code and , the National Building Code of Canada with respect to Barrier Free Access. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS i A. Design: Overhead braced type steel toilet partitions manufactured by Hadrian. Products manufactured by Watrous, AAMCO or GSW are acceptable alternatives subject to available colour and finish selection. Base bid tender price shall be for Hadrian products as specified. i 7175-10162.wpd , DIVISION 10 SECTION 10162 METAL TOILET PARTITIONS Page 2 B. Sheet Steel: Commercial quality, stretcher levelled standard of flatness; plain commercial galvanized or wipe coated conforming to ASTM A526; or uncoated (not galvanized) cold rolled carbon steel conforming to ASTM A366. 1 C. Minimum Thicknesses: Member Thickness (Millimetres) Doors 0.71 (22 ga) Pilasters 0.91 (20 ga) Panels 1.71 (22 ga) D. ore: Of manufacturer's choice which will not delaminate and will keep panels and pilasters rigid, straight, flush and smooth under normal use. E. Hardware: Adjustable, chrome-plated non-ferrous castings, bottom hinge having cam units activated by spring, concealed within door, with self lubricating thermoplastic nylon bearings. Hinges flush, heavy duty, chrome plated. Hardware shall include door pull, barrier free lever handle, and robe hook. Hardware shall be tamper resistant. ' F. Metal Filler: Epoxy. G. Colou r As selected by Consultant from manufacturers standard range of colours. Notwithstanding colour selected, all paint shall be alkali resistant. H. Fasteners: Use tamper proof screws. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate toilet partitions. Take site measurements for areas where partitions are to be located and fabricate partitions to suit site dimensions. B. Fabricate doors, panels and pilasters from sheet steel laminated to both sides of core material. If fibreboard is used as door core, use not less than.0.71 mm sheet steel. >ev` (7 nkA�lk '5 1�rs out G S 1 M_a 44)6Q U+._f 4- C. Form all edges of doors, p anels and pilasters and secure together with lock seam edge or seal edge with continuous flat locking strip with mitred and welded corners. D. Provide chrome plated brass, or stainless steel hardware. Include pilaster shoes, hinges, latch and keepers, rubber cushioned door bumper, 1 coat hook per door and fastening brackets. E. Reinforce all partitions to receive washroom accessories and grab bars. Grab bars will be installed in all toilet compartments. 7175-10162.wpd DIVISION 10 , SECTION 10162 METAL TOILET PARTITIONS Page 3 2.03 PAILITING A. Fill depressions and cavities with metal filler, sand smooth, degrease and clean thoroughly. Prime bare sheet metal. Chemically pretreat galvanized surfaces according to ASTM D2092. , B. Apply 2 coats top quality, alkali resistant baking enamel and bake on conform to CGSB 1-GP-88E, Type 2. PART 3:--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide all anchorage devices and attachments as required and install toilet i partitions by anchoring securely to floor and walls. Hang doors and adjust hinges or doors to operate properly. Doors to hang open at rest except doors on handicap stalls which shall swing closed. 3.02 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ' A. At completion of the project submit three copies of manufacturer's cleaning and maintenance procedures for prepainted finished surfaces, and adjustment date for hardware for toilet partitions for inclusion in maintenance manuals. 7175-10162.wpd DIVISION 10 , SECTION 10652 OPERABLE PARTITIONS Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED ' This Section of the contract includes supply and installation of all operable partitions as called for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. The work includes but is not limited to the following: ' A. Supply and installation of operable partition including all hanger assemblies and accessories as noted. B. Supply of templates for operable partitions to Section 05500 for preparation of steel framing. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Miscellaneous Metal Supports Section 05500 B. Insulation at Head Section 09250 C. Rough Carpentry Section 06100 1.04 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Design and fabricate operable partitions with minimum STC of 50 Class 'F' tested as per ASTM E90-70. ' B. Use finish for partition covering with maximum flame spread 20 fuel contributed, smoke developed 40, when tested to ASTM E84-70. , 1.05 SAMPLES A. Submit duplicate samples of full range of manufacturers partition surface finish and ' colour. i 7175-10652.wpd DIVISION 10 SECTION 10652 OPERABLE PARTITIONS Page 2 1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings. ' B. Indicate installation requirements including dimensions, head and jamb conditions, track layout, stacking arrangement, switching, hardware, finish pattern and colour, operating mechanism and location. C. Submit test data from an independent, recognized testing agency to verify that partition meets specified sound transmission and fire hazard classification. D. Submit templates to general contractor for preparation of steel suspension framing. j1.07 MAINTENANCE DATA A. Provide operation and maintenance data for operating partitions, hardware for incorporation into Operation and Maintenance Manual. 1.08 GUARANTEE A. Supply a written one (1) year guarantee, signed and issued in the Owner's name, against defects in material and workmanship. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS ' A. Operable wall shall be Acousti-seal double panel model 932 as manufactured by Modernfold Inc. B. Approved equal products with all welded panels as manufactured by the following, are acceptable subject to Architects' review of proposed alternate details, materials, and finishes: ARPRO PANELFOLD ' CONTRACT SALES MODERCO C. Panel Core: Steel frame and acoustical insulation, manufacturer's standard fabrication. All framing elements shall be minimum 16 gauge steel. 7175-10652.wpd DIVISION 10 SECTION 10652 OPERABLE PARTITIONS Page 3 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) D. Sheet Metal Panel: 21 gauge thick sheet metal. ' E. Panel Finish: Factory applied wall covering and upholstery fabric not less than 12 , oz./yd., colour as selected by the Consultant from manufacturer's standards and shall meet or exceed ASTM E84-70. F. Suspension System: .1 Suspension system shall be Modemfold#16 suspension system all steel, with a minimum 11 gauge formed steel track. Track shall be supported by adjustable steel hanger brackets connected to structural support by pairs of 0.38" diameter threaded rods. .2 Track soffit shall be all steel. Soffit shall be prefinished Off White, and permit mounting to track brackets without exposed fasteners. Plywood, particle board, or aluminum soffits are not permitted. Track soffit must accommodate termination of plenum sound barrier on both sides of track. .3 Trolleys shall be all steel,with four(4)ball-bearing, steel tired wheels. Non- steel tired trolleys will not be used. .4 Suspension system shall provide automatic indexing of panels into stack area using pre-programmed switches without moving parts. .5 Carriers shall attach to panels with a shock absorbing mounting to prevent stress to structural, ceiling and carrier elements due to abusive handling of panels. G. Hardware: Equip partition with manufacturer's standard hardware. Hardware finish , selected from manufacturer's standard finishes. H. Vertical sound seal between panels shall be of a reversible tongue and groove configuration permitting universal panel operation. Astragals shall be steel. I. At top of panels, provide continuous contact extruded vinyl bulb shape sound seal r with pairs of non-contacting vinyl fingers. J. Provide heavy duty bulb seal at leading partition edge. 7175-10652.wpd ' DIVISION 10 SECTION 10652 OPERABLE PARTITIONS Page 4 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) ' K. Operable floor seal: ' 1 Provide operable travel of 2Y2' to accommodate +'/s" to -1%2" floor variation/deflection. ' .2 Both seals on panel pairs shall operate concurrently from the trail edge of the trail panel. Downward seal pressure shall assume an acoustical seal and shall restrict panel movement. ' L. Final closure of partition shall be accomplished by a hinged closure panel. M. Accessories: Provide manufacturer's standard stack jamb and fly panel with recessed handle. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. Fabricate operable partitions in the factory. ' B. Panels shall be minimum 3" thick. Panel skins shall be lockformed and directly welded to frames to form a unitized panel for non-racking rigidity and durability. C. Panel cores shall be insulated to provide acoustical rating as specified and to provide rigid backing for skins. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Secure and level track. B. Install folding partitions and pocket doors straight and plumb in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Adjust and leave partitions in smooth operating condition. Adjust clearances and check function of all movable parts. D. Clean all exposed surfaces. 7175-10652.wpd DIVISION 10 ' SECTION 10800 WASHROOM ACCESSORIES Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS , A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Supply of all washroom accessories and miscellaneous accessories as noted herein. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Finish Carpentry Section 06200 B. Miscellaneous Specialties Section 10950 C. Glass and Glazing Section 08800 D. Metal Toilet Partitions Section 10162 E. Electrical Division 16 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and/or manufacturers'data sheets and in sets in accordance with the General Conditions of Contract. B. Submit samples of washroom accessories, finishes and fastening devices as required. 1.05 REFERENCES A. All washroom accessories for barrier free accessible areas shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the Ontario Building Code O. Reg. 413/90 and CAN/CSA 8651-M90. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General , .1 Use materials specified herein. 7175-108W.wpa DIVISION 10 SECTION 10800 WASHROOM ACCESSORIES Page 2 2.01 MATERIALS (Cont'd) A. General (Cont'd) .2 Stainless steel products as manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment ' of Canada are used for the purpose of establishing quality. Approved equal stainless steel products of the following manufacturers will be accepted: • Frost • Twin-Cee Limited • Watrous Sales Inc. .3 Other non-stainless steel products shall be of manufacturers specified in list of materials. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION fA. Stainless steel surfaces shall have bright polished finish. B. Grab bars shall have preened gripping surface. ' C. Washroom accessories and fasteners shall be fabricated to permit strong, concealed fastening to the respective surfaces. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install washroom accessories securely with the concealed fasteners,supplied by the respective accessory manufacturer in accordance with recommendations of the manufacturers to the satisfaction of the consultant. B. Mounting heights and locations of accessories at Barrier Free Washrooms to be as per requirements of the Ontario Building Code. PART 4: LIST OF MATERIALS 4.01 GENERAL A. Use the materials and equipment specified herein or approved equal products of manufacturers listed in 2.01, A.2. Products shall be equal to or better than the specified products and equipment as determined by the Architect. Products not meeting this requirement shall be rejected and the Contractor shall supply and ' install the specified products at no additional cost to the Owner. 7175.10800.wQd DIVISION 10 j SECTION 10800 WASHROOM ACCESSORIES Page 3 4.01 GENERAL (Cont'd) B. Washroom Equipment .1 One wall mounted liquid soap dispenser WATROUS W902 at each lavatory , in Washrooms 115, 125 and 126, at each hand sink in Kitchen 113, Lunch Room 106, and Bar 124. .2 One partition/wall mounted single roll toilet tissue dispenser Bobrick B-273 ' at each new water closet in Washroom 114, 125, and 126. .3 One wall mounted tilting mirror Bobrick B-294-1630 with 1/4'float/plate glass mirror, type 304 stainless steel angle frame continuous bottom hinge and self locking tilt mechanism, at lavatory in Washroom 114 and at one hand sink in Kitchen 113. .4 One wall mounted fixed tilt mirror Bobrick B293-1830 with %" float/plate ' glass mirror and type 304 stainless steel frame at each handicap lavatory in Washrooms 125 and 126. .5 One wall mounted mirror, Bobrick B165-1830 with 1/4"float/plate glass mirror and type 304 one piece stainless steel channel frame at each lavatory in Washrooms 125 and 126 except as noted above for handicap lavatories. .6 One surface mounted paper towel dispenser Bobrick 8262 with type 304 stainless steel cabinet at Washroom 114, Lunchroom 106, Kitchen 113, and Bar 124. .7 Stainless steel grab bars, Bobrick 6200 series 1%2' diameter with preened finish, and concealed mounting as follows: One B-6206.99 x 24" long behind each new water closet in Washrooms 114, 125, and 126. , One B-6206.99 x 30" long beside each new water closet in Washrooms 114, 125, and 126. Supply grab bars with Bobrick 256 series anchor plates for mounting on , wood or metal stud walls, Bobrick 258 series anchor plates for mounting on toilet compartment walls and 257 series anchors for solid walls. 4.02 PRODUCT DATA SHEETS A. At completion of project submit three copies of manufacturer's product data sheets showing size, capacity and operating instructions for each product specified herein. 7175-10800.wpd i DIVISION 10 ' SECTION 10950 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS i A. Comply with the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Rough Carpentry Section 06100 B. Finish Carpentry Section 06200 , C. Cabinet Work Section 06410 D. Washroom Accessories Section 10800 E. Operable Partition Section 10652 ' 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit detailed shop drawings and where applicable complete colour charts or colour samples for each item specified herein. 1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Wall mounted handrails shall comply with the Ontario Building Code and the National Building Code of Canada with respect to handgrip size, wall setback, projection into corridors, and point loading. B. Handrail extrusions shall be U.L.C. tested and labelled with a Class 1 fire rating in accordance with CAN 45102-M83. PART 2: PRODUCTS ' 2.01 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Items specified herein shall be standard manufactured items, modified if required , and as specified to suit conditions of this project. B. Fabricate work true to dimensions, square and plumb, to suit site conditions. C. Thickness of metals shall be adequate for the various conditions with requirements specified as a minimum. , D. Finished work shall be free from warping, open seams, weld marks, rattles and other defects. Drilling shall be reamed and exposed edges finished smooth. 7176-10950.wpd DIVISION 10 SECTION 10950 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES Page 2 2.01 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION (Cont'd) E. Fastenings shall be concealed or theft proof type where possible. Exposed fastenings shall be neatly executed and shall be of the same material and finish as the base metal on which they occur. ' PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install manufactured items in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations. 3.02 SCHEDULE OF ITEMS A. Supply the following items and install where shown on Drawings, in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations. .1 Eagcrate Lens: American Louvre of Canada Ltd. Type 15 white acrylic eggcrate louvres, %"x Y2" x SY2'thick. Support trim to be maximum Y2'wide metal 'L' frame, white baked enamel finish. Install eggcrate lens at display case and at light valances. .2 Wall Mounted Handrails: A. C/S Acrovyn Handrails Model HR-6C as manufactured by Construction Specialties Inc., Mississauga Ontario (274-3611). Handrails shall be manufactured from 0.078"thick, high impact, vinyl/acrylic extrusions, designed to absorb shocks and resist mars and abrasions under impact, with matt finish pebblette grain surface. Colour shall be selected by the Architect from full range of manufacturer's standards. Aluminum retainers shall be 6063-T6 alloy, minimum 0.072" thick. End caps and mounting brackets shall be colour matched to handrail. All mounting brackets and hardware shall be supplied by the manufacturer. Handrails shall return to walls at ends. Handrail shall be mounted 33" above floor, fastened at 32" c/c to solid blocking built into walls. Installation shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. (Note: Wall mounted handrails are to be carried as an Alternate Price item in the Tender Form). ' B. Alternate Product: Pawling Corp. Pro.Tek Model BR-1200 as supplied by MW McGill &Associates Ltd., Pickering, Ontario (905) 420-0485. 7175-10950.wpd DIVISION 10 SECTION 10950 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES Page 3 ' 3.02 SCHEDULE OF ITEMS (Cont'd) , .3 Coat Rod and Shelf: Custom Line Model No. AA200E Coat and Hat rack as manufactured by Vogel Peterson Co. Shelves shall consist of 4-3/4"diameter 18 gauge anodized aluminum tubes, closed and protected at ends with plastic plugs. Brackets shall be steel with pressure caps to prevent tube movement and finished in baked enamel paint. Mount ' brackets to wall on 14 gauge steel "U" channel mounting, capped at ends and providing vertical adjustment. Channel mount and brackets shall be spaced as per manufacturer's standards but not more than 38" c/c. Hanger bar shall be 1" diameter 18 gauge chrome steel tube plugged at ends. Colours shall be selected from full range of manufacturer's standards. .4 Tackboard for display case shall be custom fabricated to suit size of display case. Product shall be Architectural School Products Series 5000, custom size comprised of 1/4"fine grain natural cork tackboard laminated to 114" thick solid backing in clear anodized aluminum frame. Tackboard shall be covered with "Bur-fab" nylon display fabric as manufactured by Architectural School Products Limited. Colour of fabric shall be selected by the Architect from full range of manufacturer's standards. Supply display case tackboard to Section 06410 for installation in display case. 7175-10950.wpd DIVISION 14 SECTION 14241 HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS (ALTERNATE PRICE ITEM) Page 1 PART 1: GENERAL , 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the requirements of Division 1. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED This Section of the contract includes the supply of all hydraulic passenger elevators called ' for or implied by the drawings and specifications, together with all necessary incidentals whether referred to or not, as will be required to complete the work to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. ' 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Excavation and Backfill Section 02200 B. Concrete Section 03300 ' C. Masonry Section 04200 D. Miscellaneous Metals Section 05500 E. Resilient Flooring Section 09650 F. Electrical Division 16 1.04 CODES AND REFERENCES A. ASTM A139 - Electric-Fusion (Arc) Welded Steel Pipe (Sizes 4 in. and over). B. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. C. ASTM A366- Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. D. ASTM A446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, ' Structural (Physical) Quality. E. ASTM B221 -Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes. F. CAN3-A172 - High Pressure Paper Base, Decorative Laminates. G. CAN3-G40.21 - Structural Quality Steels. ' H. CAN4-S104M - Standard Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 7175-14241.wpd DIVISION 14 SECTION 14241 HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS (ALTERNATE PRICE ITEM) Page 2 ' 1.04 CODES AND REFERENCES (Cont'd) I. CSA B44 including Appendix 'E' - Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiters, ' Escalators, and Moving Walks. J. CSA B44S3 - Supplement to No. 3 to B44-1975. ' K. CSA G164M - Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles. L. CSA W47.1 - Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures. M. CSA W55.3- Resistance Welding Qualification Code for Fabrication of Structural Members used in buildings. N. CGSB 85-GP-10M - Shop Painting Structural Steel. O. CGSB 85-GP-16M - Painting Galvanized Steel. P. CAN/CSA B355-M86. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing elevator equipment with ten years minimum documented experience. ' B. Design structural components under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of the work of this Section and registered in the ' Province of Ontario. C. Welding: Conform to CSA W47.1 and CSA W53.3. D. Door and Frame Assemblies: ULC/UL- 1-1/2 hour, Class B label. ' 1.06 SYSTEM POWER REQUIREMENTS A. Elevator system to operate on 208 V, 3 phase, 60 hz service provided by Division ' 16. B. Protect equipment against damage or malfunction due to change, to and from, ' normal power supply and emergency power supply. C. Include for WYE-DELTA starting. 7175-14241.wpd DIVISION 14 ' SECTION 14241 HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS (ALTERNATE PRICE ITEM) Page 3 ' 1.07 PERMITS INSPECTIONS. TESTS , A. Obtain and pay for all necessary Municipal or Provincial inspections and permits, and make such tests as called for by the regulations of such authorities. Make ' tests in the presence of authorized representatives of such authorities. B. Supply Consultant with test certificates. ' C. Comply with CAN3-B355-M81. 1.08 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Division 1. ' B. Indicate the following minimum information on shop drawings: ' .1 Motor and hydraulic pump, valves, controller, motor generator, selector, governor and other component locations. .2 Car, guide rails, buffers and other components in hoist-way. .3 Rail bracket spacing and maximum loads on guide rails. .4 Reactions at points of support. .5 Weights of principal components. ' .6 Top and bottom clearance and over travel of car. , .7 Location of circuit breaker, switchboard panel or disconnect switch, light switch and feeder extension points. , .8 Locations in hoist-way and machine room of travelling cables and connections for car light. ' .9 Elevator control functions and operational description.. C. Provide product data on the following items: , .1 Signal and operating fixtures, operating panels, indicators. ' .2 Cab design and components. .3 Doors and frame details. , 7175-14241.wpd ' DIVISION 14 SECTION 14241 HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS (ALTERNATE PRICE ITEM) Page 4 ' 1.09 SAMPLES A. Submit samples in accordance with Division 1. B. Submit duplicate 12" x 12" samples illustrating floor material, cab interior, cab ceiling, cab door, hoist-way entrance door and frame finishes. 1.10 SPECIAL PROTECTION A. Protect metal doorways and trim with removable tape or other type of covering and maintain such protection until Consultant authorizes removal. 1.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA ' A. Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Division 1. B. Include description of elevator system's method of operation and control including ' motor and pump unit, door operation, signals, emergency power operation, and special or non-standard features provided. C. Provide parts catalogues with complete list of equipment replacement parts with equipment description and identifying numbers. ' 1.12 WARRANTY A. Provide three (3) months free service to elevator and maintenance from date of approval by inspectors. B. The entire elevator and all components to carry a one (1) year warranty. C. The warranty to include coverage of replacement, at no extra cost of defective parts but shall not include the labour costs required to replace the defective part or parts. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER A. Work of this section shall be supplied and installed by Dover Elevator Ltd., Toronto, Ontario. 7175-14241.wpd DIVISION 14 ' SECTION 14241 HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS ' (ALTERNATE PRICE ITEM) Page 5 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER (Cont'd) ' B. Equivalent products manufactured by the following are acceptable subject to the Architect's approval: Montgomery-Kone Otis ' Schindler 2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Elevator shall be Dover Oildraulic Passenger- Fleetwood 21 Holeless elevator. ' B. Characteristics of the elevator as follows: .1 Capacity 2000 lbs. .2 Rated Speed Max. 100 ft/m in both directions while carrying rated load .3 Travel Distance 25-9" t .4 No. of Stops 3 .5 No. of Openings 3 (2 front/1 back) .6 Door Type Power operated horizontally sliding car and landing doors opened and closed automatically .7 Door Size 3'-0" x 7'-0" (conforming to CSA/CAN3-B44-M85 Safety Code for Elevators Appendix E) ' .8 Car Size 51%2'x 68" (conforming to CSA/CAN3-B44-M85) (Clear Inside) Safety Code for Elevators Appendix E) 2.03 MATERIALS A. Rolled Steel Sections, Shapes, Rods: CAN3-G40.21 M. B. Casing: ASTM A139, Grade A steel. , C. Sheet Steel: ASTM A446 Grade B, zinc coated to G90. D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167 Type 304, No. 4 finish. E. Aluminum: ASTM 6221, extruded 6063 alloy with T6 temper. F. Plywood: CSA 0151 M softwood plywood, exterior grade. 7175-14241.wpd DIVISION 14 SECTION 14241 HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS (ALTERNATE PRICE ITEM) Page 6 ' 2.03 MATERIALS (Cont'd) G. Plastic Laminate: CAN/CSA-A172M; colour/pattern as selected from standard range by Consultant, matte finish. H. Galvanizing: CSA G164M to 380 gm/sq. m. I. Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: CGSB 85-GP-16M. ' J. Primer for Plain Steel Surfaces: CGSB 85-GP-10M. K. Finish Paint for Metal Surfaces: Alkyd enamel, semi-gloss, colour as selected. 2.04 EQUIPMENT ' A. Plunger: Accurately ground and polished seamless steel tubes, bottom fitted with a heavy steel disc welded in place and provided with a suitable extended edge to provide a positive stop designed to prevent the plunger from leaving the cylinder. B. Cylinder machined from steel pipe with a machined flange at upper end and a heavy steel bulkhead welded in the lower end; provided with a fitting for connecting to oil line and air bleeder. C. Pumping Unit and Motor: Integral design including an electric motor connected to a pump, a hydraulic control system, a storage tank, necessary flexible piping connections and a controller compactly designed and mounted on a structural steel bedplate as a single self-containing unit. tD. Hydraulic Control System: Dover Fleetwood 21, compact design suitable for operation under required pressures, having control valve with "up", "down", and check valve section. Control section, including solenoid valves, will direct main valve and control up and down starting, transition from full speed to levelling speed, up and down stop, pressure relief and manual lowering. Down speed and up and down levelling will be controlled at main valve sections. Pre-adjust control systems at factory and make all rfunctions fully adjustable. E. Automatic Levelling: Provide a self-levelling feature which will automatically bring car ' to floor landings automatically and independent of operating devices. This device shall also correct for over-travel and under-travel. Maintain car floor within 6 mm level with landing floor irrespective of load. F. Piping, Valves, Fittings: Provide piping complete with necessary fittings and valves (including relief and check valves)with a special control valve designed and installed to provide positive control of elevator at all times. 7175-14241.wpd DIVISION 14 SECTION 14241 HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS (ALTERNATE PRICE ITEM) Page 7 2.04 EQUIPMENT (Cont'd) , G. Supply and fill systems with necessary hydraulic oil of proper grade and quality. Valves and seals shall be compatible and designed to suit oil. Attach a card to pumping unit giving specification of proper oil to be added when needed. H. Guide Rails and Fastenings: Planed steel standard section guide rails weighting 12.4 kg/m erected plumb, securely fastened to hoist way framing by heavy steel brackets. Ends of guide rails shall be tongued and grooved, forming matched joints and connected with steel fishplates. Provide supports as required for guide rail brackets. I. Buffers: Provide spring buffers for car and counterweights. J. Car: ' .1 Platform: All steel construction equipped with aluminum threshold. .2 Car Frame fabricated from formed or structural steel members with adequate bracing. .3 Car Enclosure: Plastic laminate panels on sides, and back with stainless steel ' trim, bolted together. Front panel to be stainless steel. Provide fluorescent light mounted above eggcrate ceiling. Provide perimeter ventilation. Provide emergency exit in top of car. .4 Car Operating Switch Panel: Stainless steel complete with large push button ' controls and "Emergency Stop" button, mounted at accessible level for easy operation. .5 Door: Stainless steel. ' .6 Handrails: Stainless steel. 2.05 DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construction: 1/16" stretcher levelled steel or cold rolled steel. shapes 1'/4' thick. Finish baked enamel. B. Hangers: 3'/"polyurethane tired sheaves on polished steel track. Bottom 9 uides on non-metallic shoes in threshold grooves. C. Mechanical Door Edge Protection Device: Full height projecting but retracing to flush door opening. If edge is touched door will open completely and remain open for a short time. , 7175-14241.wpd t DIVISION 14 SECTION 14241 HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS ' (ALTERNATE PRICE ITEM) Page 8 2.05 DOORS AND FRAMES (Cont'd) D. Doors and Frames: Stainless steel. iE. Sills: Aluminum, grooved, anti-slip surface. 2.06 PUMPING UNIT AND CONTROL A. The pumping unit and control shall be integrally mounted. The control enclosure shall be mounted on the pump unit frame and be prewired and tested prior to shipment. Control circuitry to be 'solid state' and located in car control station enclosure. The pump unit control valve shall be a'unit'type which includes all hydraulic control valving ' inherently. This valve shall incorporate the following features: .1 Up direction acceleration speed adjustment, for a smooth start. .2 Down direction valve opening speed adjustment, for a smooth start. Smooth stops, at each landing shall be an inherent feature of the valve. .3 Other inherent features of the unit valve: 1 Adjustable pressure relief valve. .2 Manually operable down valve to lower lift in the event of an emergency. ' .3 Pressure gauge, indicating in BARS/psi. ' .4 Pressure gauge isolating valve, manually operable. .5 Gate valve, to isolate cylinder from pump unit. .6 Adjustable flow control valve to set maximum down direction speed. 7 Electrical solenoid for down direction control. The pump unit shall be of the submersible type, for quiet operations. 2.07 CAB ENCLOSURE A. The cab clear platform shall be a minimum 6-0"x 64"with enclosed sides at least 6'- 8" high. Cab enclosure shall be bolted together to form a rigid, plumb and square assembly to accept Y2" cladboard panels. 7175-14241.wpd 1 DIVISION 14 , SECTION 14241 HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS , (ALTERNATE PRICE ITEM) Page 9 2.07 CAB ENCLOSURE (Cont'd) 1 .1 The cab enclosure shall also incorporate the following as standard features: .1 Emergency lights to automatically operate in the event of a power failure. .2 Audible alarm to operate when STOP button is pressed. Alarm to remain operational in the event of a failure in the normal building power supply. .3 Telephone Compartment. .4 Terminal limit switches, auto re-levelling assembly and alarm to be mounted on the cab sling and be pre-wired to the cab operating panel wiring enclosure. .5 Key switch and stop button to be pre-assembled, mounted and pre-wired to the cab wiring enclosure. .6 Pre-wire travelling cable to cab wiring enclosure. .7 Construct cab platform of steel frame and plywood. .8 Cab platform and sling to be steel, and securely bolted together plumb and square. .9 Bolt all cab components for ease of repair or removal. 2.08 GUIDES AND BRACKETS A. Securely fasten steel guide brackets to the building structure. B. Ensure that brackets securely hold the guides in plumb and straight position regardless of cab loading. C. Bolt guides through the hoist way enclosure with back-up plates, washers and nuts. Alter only with approval of the Consultant. 2.09 JACK UNIT , A. Fasten plunger to cab sling. Use either bolts or pins. B. Equip cylinder with an oil drain release, an air release, a packing head incorporating t a substantial top collar. Supply piston with steel stop ring, to prevent plunger from leaving the cylinder. 2.10 FINISHES A. Structural Metal Surfaces: Clean surfaces of rust, oil or grease; wipe clean with solvent, prime two coats. 7175-14241.wpd 1 DIVISION 14 SECTION 14241 HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS (ALTERNATE PRICE ITEM) Page 10 2.10 FINISHES (Cont'd) B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean with neutralizing solvent; prime one coat. C. Baked enamel on Steel: Clean and de-grease metal surface; apply one coat of zinc oxide primer sprayed and baked; two coats of semi-gloss enamel sprayed and baked; colour as selected. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer. B. Verify that power supply is available and of the correct characteristics. C. Verify that hoist way, pit and machine room are ready for work of this Section. D. Verify shaft and openings are of correct size and within tolerances. ' E. Verify location and size of machine foundation and position of machine foundation bolts. ' F. Verify that anchoring devices are ready to receive installation of platform lift. G. Beginning of installation means acceptance of site conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION ' A. Arrange for temporary electrical power to be available for installation work and testing of elevator components. 3.03 EXAMINATION A. Examine work on which work of this Section depends. B. Do not install work of this Section until work which is to receive it, and conditions, are satisfactory. 1 717&14241.wpd DIVISION 14 SECTION 14241 HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS , (ALTERNATE PRICE ITEM) Page 11 3.04 INSTALLATION OF CYLINDER AND PUMPING EQUIPMENT A. Install equipment and cylinder in accordance with reviewed shop drawings. B. Securely fasten all equipment in place. 3.05 GUIDE RAILS AND BRACKETS A. Erect guide rails plumb and parallel within maximum deviation of 1/81'. ' B. Use metal shims only and provide lock washers under all nuts and tapped bolts. C. Compensate for expansion and contraction of guide rails. D. Use splice plates and guide rails with contact surfaces accurately machined to form smooth joints. E. Provide self-drilling expansion bolt anchors, for support of brackets. Where Consultant considers any concrete fastener improperly installed, either replace fastener or demonstrate stability of fastener by performing on site test under which fastener is subjected to four times manufacturer's safe pullout or working load. , 3.06 SILLS FASCIA PLATES. BUFFERS ' A. Erect sills, struts, headers, hanger covers, and unit frames in conjunction with erection of rough walls and set in proper relation to car guide rails. Install door frames before front wall is built. Co-ordinate with Section 04200- Masonry. B. Install fascia plates of 16 gauge sheet steel extending from top of hanger to sill above and not less than 6" wider than clear openings to entrance properly reinforced and ' designed to conform to details shown on drawings. Provide all necessary supports required to secure fascia plate in place. C. Install buffers in pit under car supported on structural steel framing. 3.07 TOUCH-UP A. Upon completion, touch-up and restore to new condition, damaged or defaced factory finished surfaces. B. Remove protective coverings and clean exposed surfaces after completion and leave in first class condition. 717&14241.wpd 1 DIVISION 14 SECTION 14241 HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS (ALTERNATE PRICE ITEM) Page 12 3.07 TOUCH-UP (Cont'd) C. Co-ordinate with Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring for installation of flooring in elevator cab. 1 ! 1 1 1 1 1 ' 7175-14241.wpd MUNICIPALITY OF CLARINGTON 40 Temperance Street ' Bowmanville,Ontario MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR OLDER ADULT COMMUNITY CENTRE 26 BEECH AVE BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO Prepared by: ' OTONABEE TECHNICAL SERVICES LTD. P.O. Box 1941, 294 Rink Street Peterborough, Ontario K9J 7X7 T January 12, 1998 January 12, 1998 Section 13930 OLDER ADULTS CENTRE WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 13930 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM , 1 GENERA NOTE• ALL WORK TO CONFORM TO DIVISION 1 DOCUMENTS 1.1 REFERENCES ' .1 ANSI/NFPA 13-1989, Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA , .1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01005 - General Requirements and in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 13, working plans and design requirements. ' 1.3 SAMPLES .1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01005 -Submittals. .2 Submit samples of following: .1 Each type of sprinkler head. , .2 Signs. 1.4 ENGINEERING DESIGN CRITERIA .1 Hazard: .1 To suit occupancy as indicated. .2 Pipe size and layout: (as shown). .3 Zoning: .1 System zoning as indicated. 1.5 MAINTENANCE DATA .1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01005 - General Requirements. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS .1 Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01005. .2 Provide spare sprinklers and tools as required by ANSI/NFPA 13. , 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE, FITTINGS AND VALVES .1 Pipe: .1 Ferrous: to ANSI/NFPA 13. .2 Copper tube: to ANSI/NFPA 13. .2 Fittings and joints to ANSI/NFPA 13: r .1 Ferrous: screwed, welded, flanged or roll grooved. .2 Copper tube: screwed, soldered, brazed. OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 1 , MECHANICAL SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLE SUBMISSIONS , The mechanical contractor shall submit the following shop drawings to the consultant for review: Division 15 Section Items , 13930 Sprinkler heads,flow switch, supervised switches, valves. 15061 Pipe hangers. 15075 Nameplates (samples). 15081 Pipe insulation. 15082 Duct insulation. 15084 Acoustic duct liner. 15111 Valves. 15114 Valves. 15122 Thermometers and pressure gauges. 15142 Confirm type L"pipe. 15401 Floor drains, Roof drains, Clean outs, Wall hydrants, Water hammer arrestors,Back flow preventers,Hose bibbs, Trap seal primers, Grease interceptor, Oil interceptor&holding tank. 15411 Water closets,Urinals, Lavatories, Mop sinks, Refrigerated water cooler, and trim for fixtures. 15440 Pumps. l 15732 HVAC units, controls and control drawings. 15751 Humidifiers and controls. 15762 Convectors. , 15785 Make-up-air unit, controls and control drawings. 15807 Kitchen exhaust hood and ancilliaries. , 15811 Duct sealant system. 15813 Flexible duct. 15820 Access doors, Test ports. 15821 Dampers. 15822 Dampers. 15823 Fire dampers and installation drawing. 15831 Fans. 15832 Fans. 15851 Louvres. 15852 Grilles and Diffusers. 15861 Filters and Filter switches. 15916 Damper actuator, Carbon dioxide sensor, Thermostats and sensors, Humidistats, Control valves and thermostats, VAV box and controls, Thermostat guards. i 1 TESTS AND REPORTS REQUIRED Division 15 Section Testing Witness By 13930 Sprinkler system Local authority 15010 Hydronic piping Consultant Natural gas piping Consultant DWV piping Consultant, Plbg Insp. Domestic water piping Consultant 15051 Welded pipe MCCR Insp. 15401 Back flow preventers Consultant Trap seal primers Consultant 15411 Flush valves Consultant 15440 Pumps Consultant 15732 HVAC units& start up Consultant& Comm. Reports 15751 Humidifiers& controls Consultant& Comm. 15785 Make-up-air unit& start up Consultant& Comm. Report 15807 Kitchen exhaust hood Local Authority 15823 Fire dampers Local Authority 15831 Fans Consultant& Comm. , 15832 Fans Consultant& Comm. 15861 Filter switches Comm. Agent 15916 Controls Comm. Agent 15950 Testing&Balancing Comm. Agent TABLE OF CONTENTS DESCRIPTION PAGE TESTS AND REPORTS REQUIRED MECHANICAL SHOP DRAWINGS 13930 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 15010 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 3 15051 PIPE WELDING . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 15061 PIPE HANGERS&SUPPORTS . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 15081 THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 15082 THERMAL INSULATION FOR DUCTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 15084 ACOUSTIC DUCT LINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 15111 VALVES-BRONZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . ..... . ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 15114 VALVES-LUBRICATED PLUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 15122 THERMOMETERS&PRESSURE GAUGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 15142 DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY PIPING-COPPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 15151 DRAINAGE,WASTE&VENT PIPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 15152 DRAINAGE,WASTE&VENT PIPING-PLASTIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 15192 PIPING,VALVES&FITTINGS-GAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 15401 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES&ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 ' 15411 PLUMBING FIXTURES&TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 15440 PLUMBING PUMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 15732 PACKAGED ROOF TOP UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 15751 HUMIDIFIERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 15762 CONVECTORS&FINNED TUBE RADIATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 15785 MAKE-UP AIR UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 ' 15807 PACKAGED KITCHEN EXHAUST HOODS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 15811 LOW PRESSURE METALLIC DUCTWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 15813 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 76 15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 15821 BALANCING DAMPERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 15822 DAMPERS-OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 15823 DAMPERS-FIRE&SMOKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 15831 COMMERCIAL FANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 15832 DOMESTIC FANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 15851 LOUVRES,INTAKES&VENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 15852 GRILLES,REGISTERS&DIFFUSERS . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . ...... ..... ... . .. 93 15861 FILTERS&FILTER GAUGES . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING&BALANCING(TAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Section 13930 January 12, 1998 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM OLDER ADULTS CENTRE .3 Valves: .1 ULC listed for fire protection service. .2 Up to NPS 2: bronze, screwed ends, OS&Y gate. .3 Swing check valves. .4 Pipe hangers: I .1 ULC listed for fire protection services. 2.2 SPRINKLER HEADS t .1 General: to ANSI/NFPA 13 and ULC listed for fire services. 2.3 SPRINKLER HEAD TYPE B .1 Pendant chrome link and lever type. 2.4 SUPERVISORY SWITCHES .1 General: to ANSI/NFPA 13 and ULC listed for fire service. ' .2 Valves: .1 Mechanically attached to valve body, with normally open and normally closed contacts and supervisory capability. j .3 Flow switch type: .1 With normally open and normally closed contacts and supervisory capability. 2.5 SIGNS .1 Bilingual Signs for control drain and test valves: to ANSI/NFPA 13. 2.6 SPARE PARTS CABINET .1 For storage of maintenance materials, spare sprinkler heads and special tools. .2 Construct to sprinkler head manufacturers standard. 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Install, inspect and test to acceptance in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 13 and FC 403. .2 Testing to be witnessed by authority having jurisdiction. + ««.. End *.«.. ' Page 2 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 January 12, 1998 Section 15010 , OLDER ADULTS CENTRE MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1 GENERAL NOTE: ALL WORK TO CONFORM TO DIVISION 1 DOCUMENTS ' 1.1 This section covers items common to all sections of Division 15. , 2 EQUIPMENT LIST 2.1 Complete list of equipment and materials to be used on this project and forming part of tender documents by adding manufacturer's name, model number and details of materials, and submit for approval. 2.2 Submit for approval at time of tender. 3 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION ' 3.1 Unions or flanges: provide for ease of maintenance and disassembly. 3.2 Space for servicing, disassembly and removal of equipment and components: provide as recommended by manufacturer or as indicated. 3.3 Equipment drains: pipe to floor drains. 3.4 Install equipment, rectangular cleanouts and similar items parallel to or perpendicular to building lines. 4 ANCHOR BOLTS AND TEMPLATES , 4.1 Supply anchor bolts and templates for installation by other divisions. , 5 CUTTING AND PATCHING 5.1 General: .1 Do work to Section 01005 - General Requirements. .2 Perform cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete the Work. 5.2 Execution: .1 Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work. .2 Provide openings in non-structural elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical work. .3 Provide structural steel supports over ductwork openings greater than 16" wide in block walls or as indicated. .4 Perform work to avoid damage to other work. .5 Cut rigid materials using power saw or core drill. Pneumatic or impact tools not allowed. .6 Restore work with new products in accordance with Contract Documents. .7 Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves,ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. .8 At penetration of fire-rated wall, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with O.B.C. fire-rated material, full thickness of construction element. .9 Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes; for continuous surfaces refinish to nearest intersection; for an assembly, refinish entire unit. OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 3 ' Section 15010 January 12, 1998 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OLDER ADULTS CENTRE 6 TRIAL USAGE 6.1 Consultant may use equipment and systems for test purposes prior to acceptance. Supply labour, ' material, and instruments required for testing. 6.2 Trial usage to apply to following equipment and systems: .1 HVAC units. 7 PROTECTION OF OPENINGS 7.1 Protect equipment and systems openings from dirt, dust, and other foreign materials with materials appropriate to system. 8 ELECTRICAL 8.1 Electrical work to conform to Division 16: .1 Control wiring and conduit is specified in Division 16. Connections below 50 V which are related to control systems are specified in Division 15. Refer to Division 16 for quality of materials and workmanship. 9 MOTORS 9.1 Provide motors for mechanical equipment as specified. 9.2 If delivery of specified motor will delay delivery or installation of any equipment, install motor approved by Consultant for temporary use. Final acceptance of equipment will not occur until specified motor is installed. 9.3 Motors under 'h HP: speed as indicated, continuous duty, built-in overload protection, resilient mount, single phase, 120 V, unless otherwise specified or indicated. 9.4 Motors Y2 HP and larger: EEMAC Class B, squirrel cage induction, speed as indicated, continuous ' duty, TEFC, ball bearing, maximum temperature rise 40°C, 3 phase, 208 V, unless otherwise specified or indicated. 10 BELT DRIVES 10.1 Fit reinforced belts in sheave matched to drive. Multiple belts to be matched sets. 10.2 Use cast iron or steel sheaves secured to shafts with removable keys unless otherwise specified. 10.3 For motors under 00 HP): standard adjustable pitch drive sheaves, having plus or minus 10% range. Use mid-position of range for specified r/min. 10.4 For motors 0 0 HP) and over: sheave with split tapered bushing and keyway having fixed pitch unless specifically required for item concerned. Provide sheave of correct size to suit balancing. 10.5 Minimum drive rating: 1.5 times nameplate rating on motor. Keep overhung loads within manufacturer's design requirements on prime mover shafts. 10.6 Motor slide rail adjustment plates to allow for centre line adjustment. Page 4 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 January 12, 1998 Section 15010 ' OLDER ADULTS CENTRE MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 11 GUARDS 11.1 Provide guards for unprotected drives. 11.2 Guards for belt drives: ' .1 Expanded metal screen welded to steel frame. , .2 Minimum 0 8 Ga) sheet metal tops and bottoms. .3 1% inch dia holes on both shaft centres for insertion of tachometer. .4 Removable for servicing. 11.3 Provide means to permit lubrication and use of test instruments with guards in place. 11.4 Install belt guards to allow movement of motors for adjusting belt tension. 11.5 Guard for flexible coupling: .1 "U" shaped, minimum (16 Ga) galvanized mild steel. .2 Securely fasten in place. .3 Removable for servicing. 11.6 Unprotected fan inlets or outlets: .1 Wire or expanded metal screen, galvanized, (Y4 inch) mesh. .2 Net free area of guard: not less than 80% of fan openings. .3 Securely fasten in place. .4 Removable for servicing. 12 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS , 12.1 Equipment supports supplied by equipment manufacturer: specified elsewhere in Division 15. 12.2 Equipment supports not supplied by equipment manufacturer: fabricate from structural grade steel meeting requirements of Section 05120- Structural Steel for Building. Submit structural calculations with shop drawings. 12.3 Mount base mounted equipment on chamfered edge housekeeping pads, minimum of (4 inch) high and (2 inch) larger than equipment dimensions all around. Concrete specified in Section 03300- Cast-in-Place Concrete. 13 SLEEVES 13.1 Pipe sleeves: at points where pipes pass through masonry, concrete or fire rated assemblies and as indicated. 13.2 Schedule 40 steel pipe. , 13.3 Sleeves with annular fin continuously welded at midpoint: .1 Through foundation walls. .2 Where sleeve extends above finished floor. 13.4 Sizes: minimum ('/4 inch) clearance all around, between sleeve and uninsulated pipe or between sleeve and insulation. OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 5 , Section 15010 January 12, 1998 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OLDER ADULTS CENTRE ' 13.5 Terminate sleeves flush with surface of concrete and masonry walls, concrete floors on grade and one inch above other floors. ' 13.6 Fill voids around pipes: .1 Caulk between sleeve and pipe in foundation walls and below grade floors with waterproof fire retardant non-hardening mastic. .2 Where sleeves pass through walls or floors, provide space for firestopping. Where pipes/ducts pass through fire rated walls, floors and partitions, maintain fire rating integrity. .3 Ensure no contact between copper tube or pipe and ferrous sleeve. .4 Fill future-use sleeves with lime plaster or other easily removable filler. .5 Coat exposed exterior surfaces of ferrous sleeves with heavy application of zinc rich paint to CGSB 1-GP-181 M+Amdt-Mar-78. 14 PREPARATION FOR FIRESTOPPING 14.1 Firestopping material and installation within annular space between pipes, ducts, insulation and ' adjacent fire separation: specified in Section 07840-Firestopping. 14.2 Uninsulated unheated pipes not subject to movement: no special preparation. ' 14.3 Uninsulated heated pipes subject to movement: wrap with non-combustible smooth material to permit pipe to move without damaging firestopping material. 14.4 Insulated pipes and ducts: ensure integrity of insulation.and vapour barrier at fire separation. 15 ESCUTCHEONS 15.1 On pipes passing through walls, partitions, floors and ceilings in finished areas. 15.2 Chrome or nickel plated brass or Type 302 stainless steel, one piece type with set screws. 15.3 Outside diameter to cover opening or sleeve. 15.4 Inside diameter to fit around finished pipe. 16 TESTS 16.1 Give 24 h written notice of date for tests. 16.2 Insulate or conceal work only after testing and approval by Consultant. 16.3 Conduct tests in presence of Consultant. 16.4 Bear costs including retesting and making good. 16.5 Piping: ' .1 General: maintain test pressure without loss for 4 h unless otherwise specified. .2 Hydraulically test hydronic piping systems at 1 Y2 times system operating pressure or minimum (80 psi), whichever is greater. .3 Test natural gas systems to CAN 1-B 149.1-M86 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. .4 Test drainage, waste and vent piping to Ontario Building Code and authorities having jurisdiction. Page 6 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 January 12, 1998 Section 15010 , OLDER ADULTS CENTRE MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .5 Test domestic hot, cold and recirculation water piping at 1% times system operating pressure or minimum 025 psi), whichever is greater. .6 Test fire systems in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and as specified elsewhere. ' 16.6 Equipment: test as specified in relevant sections. 16.7 Prior to tests, isolate all equipment or other parts which are not designed to withstand test , pressures or test medium. 17 PAINTING 17.1 To Section 09900- Interior Painting 17.2 Apply at least one coat of corrosion resistant primer paint to ferrous supports and site fabricated , work. 17.3 Prime and touch up marred finished paintwork to match original. ' 17.4 Restore to new condition, finishes which have been damaged too extensively to be merely primed and touched up. 18 SPARE PARTS 18.1 Furnish spare parts as follows: , .1 One set of belts for each piece of machinery. .2 One filter cartridge or set of filter media for each filter or filter bank in addition to final operating set. 19 SPECIAL TOOLS 19.1 Provide one set of special tools required to service equipment as recommended by manufacturers , and in accordance with Section 01005 - Maintenance Materials Special Tools and Spare Parts. 20 ACCESS DOORS 20.1 Supply access doors to concealed mechanical equipment for operating, inspecting, adjusting and servicing. 20.2 Flush mounted 24 in x 24 in for body entry and 12 in x 12 in for hand entry unless otherwise noted. Doors to open 1800, have rounded safety corners, concealed hinges, screwdriver latches and anchor straps. 20.3 Material: ' .1 Special areas such as tiled or marble surfaces: use stainless steel with brushed satin or polished finish as directed by Consultant. .2 Remaining areas: use prime coated steel. 20.4 Installation: .1 Locate so that concealed items are accessible. .2 Locate so that hand or body entry (as applicable) is achieved. .3 Installation is specified in applicable sections. OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 7 ' rSection 15010 January 12, 1998 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OLDER ADULTS CENTRE ' 20.5 Acceptable material: Buensod, Le Hage, Zurn. 21 DIELECTRIC COUPLINGS 21.1 General: ' .1 To be compatible with and to suit pressure rating of piping system. .2 Where pipes of dissimilar metals are joined. 21.2 Pipes NPS 2 and under: isolating unions. 21.3 Pipes NPS 2Y2 and over: isolating flanges. t22 DRAIN VALVES 22.1 Locate at low points and at section isolating valves unless otherwise specified. 22.2 Minimum NPS % unless otherwise specified: bronze, with hose end male thread and complete with cap and chain. 23 DEMONSTRATION AND OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 23.1 Supply tools, equipment and personnel to demonstrate and instruct operating and maintenance ' personnel in operating, controlling, adjusting, trouble-shooting and servicing of all systems and equipment during regular work hours, prior to acceptance. 23.2 Where specified elsewhere in Division 15, manufacturers to provide demonstrations and instructions. 23.3 Use operation and maintenance manual, as-built drawings, audio visual aids, etc. as part of instruction materials. 23.4 Where deemed necessary, Owner may record these demonstrations on video tape for future reference. 24 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 24.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01005 - Submittals. 24.2 Operation and maintenance manual to be approved by, and final three copies deposited with, Consultant before final inspection. 24.3 Operation data to include: .1 Control schematics for each system including environmental controls. .2 Description of each system and its controls. 1 .3 Description of operation of each system at various loads together with reset schedules and seasonal variances. .4 Operation instruction for each system and each component. .5 Description of actions to be taken in event of equipment failure. ' .6 Valves schedule and flow diagram. .7 Colour coding chart. 1 Page 8 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 January 12, 1998 Section 15010 OLDER ADULTS CENTRE MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 24.4 Maintenance data shall include: .1 Servicing, maintenance, operation and trouble-shooting instructions for each item of , equipment. .2 Data to include schedules of tasks, frequency, tools required and task time. 24.5 Performance data to include: .1 Equipment manufacturer's performance data sheets with point of operation as left after commissioning is complete. .2 Equipment performance verification test results. .3 Special performance data as specified elsewhere. .4 Testing, adjusting and balancing reports as specified in Section 15950-Testing, Adjusting , and Balancing. 24.6 Approvals: ' .1 Submit 2 copies of draft Operation and Maintenance Manual to Consultant for approval. Submission of individual data will not be accepted unless so directed by Consultant. .2 Make changes as required and re-submit as directed by Consultant. ' 24.7 Additional data: .1 Prepare and insert into operation and maintenance manual when need for same becomes , apparent during demonstrations and instructions specified above. 25 ;SHOP DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA 25.1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01005 - Submittals 25.2 Shop drawings and product data shall show: .1 Mounting arrangements. ' .2 Operating and maintenance clearances. eg. access door swing spaces. 25.3 Shop drawings and product data shall be accompanied by: .1 Detailed drawings of bases, supports, and anchor bolts. 1 .2 Acoustical sound power data, where applicable. .3 Points of operation on performance curves. .4 Manufacturer certification as to current model production. .5 Certification of compliance to applicable codes. 25.4 In addition to transmittal letter referred to in Section 01005 - Submittals: use MCAC "Shop ' Drawing Submittal Title Sheet". Identify section and paragraph number. 26 EXISTING SYSTEMS , 26.1 Connections into existing systems to be made at time approved by Consultant. Request written approval of time when connections can be made. 26.2 Be responsible for damage to existing plant by this work. , OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 9 ' Section 15010 January 12, 1998 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OLDER ADULTS CENTRE 27 CLEANING 27.1 Clean interior and exterior of all systems including strainers. Vacuum interior of ductwork and air handling units. 27.2 In preparation for final acceptance, clean and refurbish all equipment and leave in operating condition including replacement of all filters in all air and piping systems. j28 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS 28.1 Site records: .1 Consultant will provide 1 set of reproducible mechanical drawings. Provide sets of white prints as required for each phase of the work. Mark thereon all changes as work progresses ' and as changes occur. This shall include changes to existing mechanical systems, control systems and low voltage control wiring. .2 On a weekly basis, transfer information to reproducibles, revising reproducibles to show all ' work as actually installed. .3 Use different colour waterproof ink for each service. .4 Make available for reference purposes and inspection at all times. 28.2 As-built drawings: .1 Prior to start of Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB), finalize production of as-built drawings. .2 Identify each drawing in lower right hand corner in letters at least 12 mm high as follows: - "AS BUILT DRAWINGS: THIS DRAWING HAS BEEN REVISED TO SHOW MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AS INSTALLED" (Signature of Contractor) (date). .3 Submit to Consultant for approval and make corrections as directed. .4 TAB to be performed using as-built drawings. .5 Submit completed reproducible as-built drawings with Operating and Maintenance Manuals. 28.3 Submit copies of as-built drawings for inclusion in final TAB report. +rwr.+r END +►«*.« S r Page 10 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 January 12, 1998 Section 15051 , OLDER ADULTS CENTRE PIPE WELDING 15051 PIPE WELDING i 1 GENERA 1.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS .1 Do the work in accordance with the following standards except where specified otherwise: , .1 ANSI/ASME B31.1-1989, Power Piping. .2 ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code - 1992: .1 Section 1: Power Boilers. , .2 Section V: Non-destructive Examinations. .3 Section IX: Welding and Brazing Qualifications. .3 CSA W47.2-M 1987, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Aluminum. .4 CSA W48 series-M 1980, Electrodes. , .5 CSA B51-M 1991 Boiler, Pressure Vessel and Pressure Piping Code. .6 CAN/CSA-W117.2-M87, Safety in Welding, Cutting and Allied Processes. .7 CSA W178-1990, Certification of Welding Inspection Organizations. .8 CSA W 178.2-1990, Certification of Welding Inspectors. ' .9 CAN/CGSB 48.2-92, Spot Radiography of Butt Joints in Ferrous Materials. .10 AWS B3.0-1980, Welding Procedures and Performance Qualifications. .11 AWS C1.1-66, Recommended Practices for Resistance Welding. , .12 AWS W1-1980, Welding Inspection. .13 ANSI/AWWA C206-88, Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe. 1.2 WELDERS QUALIFICATIONS .1 Welding qualifications to be in accordance with CSA 851. .2 Use qualified and licensed welders possessing certificate for each procedure to be performed from authority having jurisdiction. .3 Furnish welder's qualifications to Consultant. .4 Each welder to possess identification stamp issued by authority having jurisdiction. .5 Certification of companies for fusion welding of aluminum to be in accordance with CSA W47.2. 1.3 INSPECTORS QUALIFICATIONS ' .1 Inspectors to be qualified to CSA W178.2. 1.4 WELDING PROCEDURES .1 Registration of welding procedures in accordance with CSA B51. .2 Copy of welding procedures to be available for inspection at all times. .3 Safety in welding, cutting and allied processes to be in accordance with CAN/CSA-W117.2. 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRODES .1 Electrodes in accordance with CSA W48 Series. , OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 11 ' Section 15051 January 12, 1998 PIPE WELDING OLDER ADULTS CENTRE 3 EXECUTION ' 3.1 WORKMANSHIP .1 Welding to be in accordance with ANSI/ASME B31.1, ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Sections I and IX and ANSI/AWWA C206, using procedures conforming to AWS B3.0, AWS C1.1, applicable requirements of provincial authority having jurisdiction. 3.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS .1 Identify each weld with welder's identification stamp. .2 Backing rings: .1 Where used, fit to minimize gaps between ring and pipe bore. .2 Do not install at orifice flanges. .3 Fittings: .1 NPS 2 and smaller: install welding type sockets. ' .2 Branch connections: install welding tees or forged branch outlet fittings. 3.3 INSPECTION AND TESTS -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .1 Review all weld quality requirements and defect limits of applicable codes and standards with Consultant before any work is started. .2 Formulate "Inspection and Test Plan" in co-operation with Consultant. .3 Do not conceal welds until they have been inspected, tested and approved by inspector. r .4 Provide for inspector to visually inspect all welds during early stages of welding procedures in accordance with AWS W1. Repair or replace all defects as required by codes and as specified herein. 3.4 SPECIALIST EXAMINATIONS AND TESTS .1 General .1 Perform examinations and tests by specialist qualified in accordance with CSA W178.1 and W178.2 and approved by Consultant. .2 To ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code, Section V, CSA B51 and requirements of authority having jurisdiction. .3 Inspect and test all welds in accordance with "Inspection and Test Plan" by non- destructive visual examination and magnetic particle (hereinafter referred to as "particle") tests. .2 Hydrostatically test all welds to requirements of ANSI/ASME B31.1. .3 Visual examinations: include entire circumference of weld externally and wherever possible internally. Page 12 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 January 12, 1998 Section 15051 ' OLDER ADULTS CENTRE PIPE WELDING .4 Failure of visual examinations: .1 Upon failure of any weld by visual examination, perform additional testing as directed by Consultant of 100°x6 of all welds, by radiographic tests. 3.5 DEFECTS CAUSING REJECTION .1 As described in ANSI/ASME B31.1 and ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code. ' 3.6 REPAIR OF WELDS WHICH FAILED TESTS .1 Re-inspect and re-test repaired or re-worked welds at Contractor's expense. 3.7 CLAIMS AGAINST CROWN FOR DELAYS , .1 Claims against Crown for delays in completion of project will not be entertained for reasons of failures of welds to pass examinations. •Mr+t«« END wwrMMk , 1 r r r r r r r r r OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 13 ' Section 15061 January 12, 1998 ' PIPE HANGERS & SUPPORTS OLDER ADULTS CENTRE 15061 PIPE HANGERS & SUPPORTS 1 GENERAL , 1.1 REFERENCES: .1 ANSUASME 831.1-1989, Power Piping, .2 ASTM A125-81(1988), Specification for Steel Springs, Helical, Heat-Treated. .3 ASTM A307-94, Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. .4 ASTM A563-94, Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. , .5 MSS-SP-58-1988, Pipe Hangers and Supports-Materials, Design and Manufacture. .6 MSS-SP-69-1983, Pipe Hangers and Supports-Erection and Application. 1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS .1 Construct pipe hanger and support to manufacturer's recommendations utilizing manufacturer's's regular production components, parts and assemblies. .2 Base maximum load ratings on allowable stresses prescribed by ASME B31.1 or MSS SP-58. .3 Ensure that supports, guides, anchors do not transmit excessive quantities of heat to building structure. .4 Design hangers and supports to support systems under all conditions of operation, allow free expansion and contraction, prevent excessive stresses from being introduced into pipework or connected equipment. .5 Provide for vertical adjustments after erection and during commissioning. Amount of adjustment to be in accordance with MSS SP-58. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA: .1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01005 - General Requirements. .2 Submit shop drawings and product data for following: ' .1 All bases, hangers, and supports. .2 Connections to equipment and structure. .3 Structural assemblies. .4 Riser clamps. 1.4 MAINTENANCE DATA: .1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01005 - General Requirements. 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL: .1 Fabricate hangers, supports and sway braces in accordance with ANSI 831.1 and MSS-SP58. , .2 Use components for intended design purpose only. Do not use for rigging or erection . purposes. Page 14 BOWMANViLLE OTS 97119 ' January 12, 1998 Section 15061 OLDER ADULTS CENTRE PIPE HANGERS & SUPPORTS t2.2 PIPE HANGERS .1 Finishes: .1 Pipe hangers and supports: painted with zinc-rich paint after manufacture. .2 Ensure steel hangers in contact with copper piping are copper plated. .2 Upper attachment structural: Suspension from lower flange of I-Beam. .1 Cold piping NPS 2 maximum: Ductile iron C-clamp with hardened steel cup point setscrew, locknut and carbon steel retaining clip. .1 Rod: 9 mm UL listed. .2 Cold piping NPS 2 1/2 or greater, all hot piping: Malleable iron beam clamp, eye rod,jaws and extension with carbon steel retaining clip, tie rod, nuts and washers, to MSS-SP-58 and MSS-SP-69. .3 Upper attachment structural: Suspension from upper flange of I-Beam. .1 Cold piping NPS 2 maximum: Ductile iron top-of-beam C-clamp with hardened steel cup ' point setscrew, locknut and carbon steel retaining clip, UL listed to MSS-SP-69. .2 Cold piping NPS 2 1/2 or greater, all hot piping:Malleable iron top-of-beam jaw-clamp with hooked rod, spring washer, plain washer and nut UL listed. .4 Upper attachment to concrete. .1 Ceiling: Carbon steel welded eye rod, clevis plate, clevis pin and cotters with weldless forged steel eye nut. Ensure eye 6 mm minimum greater than rod diameter. .2 Concrete inserts: wedge shaped body with knockout protector plate UL listed to MSS-SP-69. .5 Hanger rods: threaded rod material to MSS SP-58. .1 Ensure that hanger rods are subject to tensile loading only. ' .2 Provide linkages where lateral or axial movement of pipework is anticipated. .3 Do not use 22 mm or 28 mm rod. ' .6 Pipe attachments: material to MSS SP-58. .1 Attachments for steel piping: carbon steel black. .2 Attachments for copper piping: copper plated black steel. .3 Use insulation shields for hot pipework. .4 Oversize pipe hangers and supports. .7 Adjustable clevis: material to MSS SP-69 UL listed, clevis bolt with nipple spacer and vertical adjustment nuts above and below clevis. .1 Ensure "U" has hole in bottom for rivetting to insulation shields. .8 Yoke style pipe roll: carbon steel yoke, rod and nuts with cast iron roll, to MSS SP-69. ' .9 U-bolts: carbon steel to MSS SP-69 with 2 nuts at each end to ASTM A 563. .1 Finishes for steel pipework: black. ' OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 15 Section 15061 January 12, 1998 PIPE HANGERS & SUPPORTS OLDER ADULTS CENTRE .2 Finishes for copper, glass, brass or aluminum pipework: black, with formed portion , plastic coated. .10 Pipe rollers: cast iron roll and roll stand with carbon steel rod to MSS SP-69. ' 2.3 RISER CLAMPS: .1 Steel or cast iron pipe: black carbon steel to MSS-SP58, type 42. UL listed. .2 Copper pipe: carbon steel copper finished to MSS-SP58, type 42. .3 Bolts: to ASTM A 307. .4 Nuts: to ASTM A 563. , 2.4 INSULATION PROTECTION SHIELDS .1 Insulated cold piping: .1 64 kg/m3 density insulation plus insulation protection shield to: MSS SP-69, galvanized ' sheet carbon steel. Length designed for maximum 3 m span. .2 Insulated hot piping: .1 Curved plate 300 mm long, with edges turned up, welded-in centre plate for pipe sizes NPS 12 and over, carbon steel to comply with MSS SP-69. 2.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS , .1 Fabricate equipment supports not provided by equipment manufacturer from structural grade steel meeting requirements of Section 05120 - Submit calculations with shop drawings. 2.6 EQUIPMENT ANCHOR BOLTS AND TEMPLATES .1 Provide templates to ensure accurate location of anchor bolts. 2.7 HOUSE-KEEPING PADS , .1 For base-mounted equipment: Concrete, at least 100 mm high, 50 mm larger all around than equipment, and with chamfered edges. .2 Concrete: to Section 03300-Cast-in-place Concrete. , 2.8 OTHER EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS .1 From structural grade steel meeting requirements of Section 05120. .2 Submit structural calculations with shop drawings. 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION ' .1 Install in accordance with: .1 manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. .2 Vibration Control Devices: ' .1 Install on piping systems at pumps, boilers, chillers, cooling towers, elsewhere as indicated. , Page 16 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 ' ' January 12, 1998 Section 15061 OLDER ADULTS CENTRE PIPE HANGERS & SUPPORTS ' .3 Clamps on riser piping: .1 Support independent of connected horizontal pipework using riser clamps and riser clamp lugs welded to riser. ' .2 Bolt-tightening torques to be to industry standards. .3 Steel pipes: Install below coupling or shear lugs welded to pipe. .4 Cast iron pipes: Install below joint. ' .4 Clevis plates: .1 Attach to concrete with 4 minimum concrete inserts at each corner. ' .5 Provide supplementary structural steelwork where structural bearings to not exist or where concrete inserts are not in correct locations. ' .6 Use approved constant support type hangers where: .1 vertical movement of pipework is 13 mm or more, .2 transfer of load to adjacent hangers or connected equipment is not permitted. 3.2 HANGER SPACING: .1 Spacing and middle attachment (rod) diameter as specified in paragraphs below or as in table below, whichever is more stringent. .1 Plumbing piping: most stringent requirements of Ontario Plumbing Code or authority having jurisdiction. .2 Fire protection: to applicable fire code. .3 Gas and oil piping: up to NPS %: every 1.8 m. .4 Copper piping: up to NPS %: every 1.5 m. ' .5 Flexible joint roll groove pipe: in accordance with table below, but not less than one hanger at joints. .6 Within 300 mm of each horizontal elbow. ' MAX PIPE MIN ROD MAX SPACING: MAX SPACING: SIZE SIZE STEEL COPPER ' Up to1'/. 10 mm 3A in. 2.1m 7 f 1.8m 6 f 1h 10 mm 3A in. 2.7m 9 f 2.4m 8 f ' 2 10mm 3/e in. 3.0m loft 2.7m 9 f 2'h 10 mm 3A in. 3.6m 12ft 3.0m loft 3 10 mm 3A in. 3.6m 12ft 3.0 m loft 3% 10 mm shin. 3.9m 13ft 3.3m 11 ft r4 10 mm 3A in. 4.2m 14 ft 3.6m 12ft 5 10 mm 3/a in. 4.8m 16ft 6 22 mm 'k in 5.1 m 17 ft 8 22 mm 7/b in 5.7m 18ft ' OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 17 Section 15061 January 12, 1998 PIPE HANGERS & SUPPORTS OLDER ADULTS CENTRE 3.3 HANGER INSTALLATION: ' .1 Install hanger so that rod is vertical under operating conditions. .2 Adjust hangers to equalize load. .3 Support from structural members. Where structural bearing does not exist or inserts are not in ' suitable locations, provide supplementary structural steel members. 3.4 HORIZONTAL MOVEMENT ' .1 Angularity of rod hanger resulting from horizontal movement of pipework from cold to hot position not to exceed 40 from vertical. .2 Where horizontal pipe movement is less than 13 mm, offset pipe hanger and support so that , rod hanger is vertical in the hot position. 3.5 FINAL ADJUSTMENT .1 Adjust hangers and supports: .1 Ensure that rod is vertical under operating conditions. .2 Equalize loads. .2 Adjustable clevis: .1 Tighten hanger load nut securely to ensure proper hanger performance. , .2 Tighten upper nut after adjustment. .3 C-clamps: .1 Follow manufacturer's recommended written instructions and torque values when r tightening C-clamps to bottom flange of beam. .4 Beam clamps: ' .1 Hammer jaw firmly against underside of beam. x «.+►. END «N• rr Page 18 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 ' January 12, 1998 Section 15075 OLDER ADULTS CENTRE MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 09900- Painting. 1.2 REFERENCES .1 CAN/CGSB-1.60-89, Interior Alkyd Gloss Enamel .2 CGSB 24.3-92, Identification of Piping Systems. .3 ANSI A13.1, Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems ' .4 CAN/CGA 8149.1-M95 .5 NFPA 13-1989, Installation of Sprinkler Systems. .6 NFPA 14-1986, Standpipe and Systems. ' 1.3 PRODUCT DATA .1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 01005 -General Requirements. ' .2 Product data to include paint colour chips and all other products specified in this section. 1.4 SAMPLES ' .1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01005 - General Requirements. .2 Samples to include nameplates, labels, tags, and lists of proposed legends. ' 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES .1 Provide metal or plastic laminate nameplate mechanically fastened on each piece of ' equipment. .2 Lettering and numbers to be raised or recessed. .3 Information to include, as appropriate: .1 Equipment: To match Mechanical Drawings/Specs.. 2.2 SYSTEM NAMEPLATES .1 Colours: ' .1 Hazardous: red letters, white background. .2 Elsewhere: black letters, white background (except where required otherwise by applicable codes). .2 Construction: .1 3 mm thick, laminated plastic or white anodized aluminum, matte finish, square corners, letters accurately aligned and machine engraved into core. ' OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 19 Section 15075 January 12, 1998 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION OLDER ADULTS CENTRE .3 Sizes: ' .1 Conform to following table: Size Dimensions No. of Letter # (mm x mm) Lines Height (mm) 1 10 x50 1 3 2 13x75 1 5 ' 3 13x75 2 3 4 20 x 100 1 8 , 5 20 x 200 1 8 6 20 x 100 2 5 ' 7 25 x 125 1 12 8 25 x 125 2 8 ' 9 35 x 200 1 20 .2 Use maximum of 25 letters/numbers per line. , .3 Use size #6 for terminal cabinets and control panels. .4 Locations: ' .1 Terminal cabinets, control panels: Use size #5. .2 Equipment in Mechanical Rooms: Use size #9. ' 2.3 PIPING SYSTEMS GOVERNED BY CODES .1 Identification: .1 Natural gas: to CAN/CGA 8149.1 & authority having jurisdiction. .2 Sprinklers: to NFPA 13. .3 Standpipe and hose systems: to NFPA 14. 2.4 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS , .1 Identify contents by background colour marking, pictogram (as necessary), legend, direction of flow by arrows. To CGSB 24.3 except where specified otherwise. .2 Pictograms: where required, to Workplace Hazardous Materials Information Systems (WHMIS) regulations. .3 Legend: Block capitals to sizes and colours listed in CAN/CGSB-24.3. ' .4 Arrows showing direction of flow: .1 Outside diameter of pipe or insulation less than 75 mm: 100 mm long x 50 mm high. ' .2 Outside diameter of pipe or insulation 75 mm and greater: 150 mm long x 50 mm high. .3 Use double-headed arrows where flow is reversible. Page 20 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 ' January 12, 1998 Section 15075 OLDER ADULTS CENTRE MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION ' .5 Extent of background colour marking: ' .1 To full circumference of pipe or insulation. .2 Length to accommodate pictogram, full length of legend and arrows. .6 Materials for background colour marking, legend, arrows: .1 Pipes and tubing 20 mm and smaller: waterproof and heat resistant plastic marker tags. .2 All other pipes: pressure sensitive vinyl with protective overcoating, waterproof contact adhesive undercoating, suitable for ambient of 100% RH and continuous operating temperature of 150°C and intermittent temperatuare of 200°C. .7 Colours and Legends: .1 Where not listed, obtain direction from Consultant. .2 Colours for legends, arrows: to following table: Background Colour Legend, Arrows ' Yellow Black Green White Red White ' .3 Background colour marking and legends for piping systems: ' CONTENTS MARKING LEGEND City water CITY WATER Green Domestic hot water supply DOM. HW SUPPLY Green ' Dom hot water recirc DOM. HW CIRC Green Hot water heating supply H.W.H.S. Yellow ' up to 120°C Hot water heating return H.W.H.R. Yellow up to 120°C Make-up water M.U.W Yellow ' Storm sewer S.S Green Sanitary sewer SAN.S Green Combination san/storm C.S.S.S Green ' sewer ' OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 21 Section 15075 January 12, 1998 ' MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION OLDER ADULTS CENTRE CONTENTS MARKING LEGEND ' Steam indicate pressure S kPs Yellow ' Natural gas NAT.GAS Yellow ' Fire protection water F.P.W Red Sprinkler water S.W Red ' Vent plumbing V.P Green ' 2.5 DUCTWORK ' .1 50 mm high stencilled letters and directional arrows 150 mm long x 50 mm high. .2 Colours: black, or co-ordinated with base colour to ensure strong contrast. ' 2.6 VALVES, CONTROLLERS .1 Brass tags with 12 mm stamped identification data filled with black paint. ' .2 Include flow diagrams of each system, of approved size, showing charts and schedules for each tagged item, valve type, service, function, normal position, location of tagged item. 2.7 CONTROLS COMPONENTS IDENTIFICATION ' .1 Identify all systems, equipment, components, controls and sensors with system nameplates specified in this section. .2 Inscription to identify function and, (where appropriate) fail-safe position. 2.8 LANGUAGE .1 Identification to be in English. ' 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL .1 Provide identification only after all painting specified Section 09900-Painting has been completed. .2 Perform work in accordance with CGSB 24.3 except as specified otherwise. .3 Provide ULC and CSA registration plates, as required by respective agency. 3.2 NAMEPLATES .1 Locations: in conspicuous location to facilitate easy reading form operating floor. .2 Stand-offs: Provide stand-offs for nameplates on hot surfaces and insulated surfaces. .3 Protection: Do not insulate, paint, or cover over in any way. Page 22 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 ' January 12, 1998 Section 15075 OLDER ADULTS CENTRE MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 3.3 LOCATION OF IDENTIFICATION ON PIPING & DUCTWORK SYSTEMS .1 On long straight runs in open areas in boiler rooms, equipment rooms, galleries, tunnels: at ' not more than 17 m intervals and more frequently if required to ensure that at least one is visible from any on viewpoint in opreating areas and walking aisles. .2 Adjacent to each change in direction. ' .3 At least once in each small room through which piping passes. .4 On both sides of visual obstruction or where run is difficult to follow. .5 On both sides of any separation such as walls, floors and partitions. .6 Where system is concealed in pipe chases, ceiling spaces, gallery or other confined spaces, at entry and exit points, and at each access opening. .7 At beginning and end points of each run and at each piece of equipment in run. .8 At point immediately upstream of major manually operated or automatically controlled valves, ' dampers, etc. Where this is not possible, place identification as close as possible, preferably on upstream side. .9 Identification to be easily and accurately readable from usual operating areas and from access points. ' .10 Position of identification to be approximately at right angles to most convenient line of sight, considering of operating positions, lighting conditions, risk of physical damage, reduced visibility over time due to dust and dirt. ' 3.4 VALVES, CONTROLLERS ' .1 Secure tags with non-ferrous chains or closed "S" hooks for valves and operating controllers except at plumbing fixtures and radiation. .2 Install one copy of flow diagram and valve schedule mounted in frame with non-glare glass ' where directed by Consultant. Provide one copy, reduced in size if necessary, in each operating and maintenance instruction manual. 1 .3 Number valves in system consecutively. END 1 OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 23 ' Section 50 1 81 January 12, 1998 THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING OLDER ADULTS CENTRE 15081 THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING I GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 01005 - Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and Mock-ups. .2 Section 07900 -Joint Sealers. ' 1.2 REFERENCES .1 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-51.2-M88, Thermal Insulation, Calcium Silicate, for Piping, Machinery and 1 Boilers. .2 CAN/CGSB-51.9-92, Mineral Fibre Thermal Insulation for Piping and Round Ducting. .3 CAN/CGSB-51.11-92, Mineral Fibre Thermal Insulation Blanket. .4 CAN/CGSB-51.12-M86, Cement, Thermal Insulating and Finishing. .5 CAN/CGSB-51.40-M80, Thermal Insulation, Flexible, Elastomeric, Unicellular, Sheet and Pipe Covering. .6 CGSB 51-GP-52Ma-89, Vapour Barrier Jacket and Facing Material for Pipe, Duct and ' Equipment Thermal Insulation. .7 CGSB 51-GP-53M-77, Jacketing, Polyvinyl, Chloride Sheet,for Insulating Pipes, Vessels and Round Ducts. . .2 Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC-S102-M88, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies. ' .3 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) .1 ASTM B 209M-92s, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate. .2 ASTM C 335-95, Test Method for Steady State Heat Transfer Properties of Horizontal Pipe Insulation. ' .3 ASTM C 411-82(1992), Test Method for Hot-Surface Performance of High-Temperature Thermal Insulation. .4 ASTM C 449M-88, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber-Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement. .5 ASTM C 795-92, Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use with Austenitic Stainless Steel. .6 ASTM C 921-89, Practice for Determining the Properties Jacketing Materials for Thermal ' Insulation. .4 American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) .1 ASHRAE Standard 90.1-1989 .5 Manufacturer's Trade Associations .1 Thermal Insulation Association of Canada (TIACI: National Insulation Standards. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01005 - General Requirements. ' .2 Submit for approval manufacturer's catalogue literature related to installation, fabrication for pipe, fillings, valves and jointing recommendations. 1.4 SAMPLES .1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01005 - General Requirements. .2 Submit for approval: complete assembly of each type of insulation system, insulation, coating, and adhesive proposed. Mount sample on 12 mm plywood board. Affix typewritten label beneath sample indicating service. Page 24 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 January 12, 1998 Section 15081 , OLDER ADULTS CENTRE THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING 1.5 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS , .1 Submit manufacturer's installation instructions in accordance with Section 010015- General ' Requirements. .2 Installation instructions to include procedures to be used, installation standards to be achieved. ' 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS .1 Installer to be specialist in performing work of this section, and have at least 3 years ' successful experience in this size and type of project, qualified to standards of TIAC. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ' .1 Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address. , .2 Protect from weather, construction traffic. .3 Protect against damage from any source. .4 Store at temperatures and conditions required by manufacturer. 1.8 DEFINITIONS , .1 For purposes of this section: ' .1 "CONCEALED" - insulated mechanical services and equipment in suspended ceilings and non-accessible chases and furred-in spaces. .2 "EXPOSED" -will mean "not concealed" as defined herein. ' 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.1 FIRE AND SMOKE RATING .1 In accordance with CAN/ULC-S102: .1 Maximum flame spread rating: 25. .2 Maximum smoke developed rating: 50. 2.2 INSULATION .1 Mineral fibre as specified herein includes glass fibre, rock wool, slag wool. , .2 Thermal conductivity ("k" factor) not to exceed specified values at 24 C mean temperature when n tested in accordance with ASTM C 335. , .3 TIAC Code A-1: Rigid moulded mineral fibre without factory applied vapour retarder jacket. .1 Mineral fibre: to CAN/CGSB-51.9. ' .2 Maximum "k" factor: to CAN/CGSB-51.9. .4 TIAC Code A-3: Rigid moulded mineral fibre with factory applied vapour retarder jacket. .1 Mineral fibre: to CAN/CGSB-51.9. .2 Jacket: to CGSB 51-GP-52 Ma. .3 Maximum "k" factor: to CAN/CGSB-51.9. OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 25 ' Section 15081 January 12, 1998 THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING OLDER ADULTS CENTRE ' .5 TIAC Code C-2: Mineral fibre blanket faced with factory applied vapour retarder jacket (as scheduled in PART 3 of this section). ' .1 Mineral fibre: to CAN/CGSB-51.11. .2 Jacket: to CGSB 51-GP-52 Ma. .3 Maximum "k" factor: to CAN/CGSB-51.11. 2.3 INSULATION SECUREMENT ' .1 Tape: Self-adhesive, aluminum, reinforced, 50 mm wide minimum. .2 Contact adhesive: Quick setting. .3 Canvas adhesive. Washable. .4 Tie wire: 1.5 mm diameter stainless steel. ' 2.4 CEMENT ' .1 Thermal insulating and finishing cement: .1 To CAN/CGSB-51.12. .2 Air drying on mineral wool, to ASTM C 449. ' 2.5 VAPOUR RETARDER LAP ADHESIVE .1 Water based, fire retardant type, compatible with insulation. ' 2.6 INDOOR VAPOUR RETARDER FINISH 1 Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation. 2.7 OUTDOOR VAPOUR RETARDER FINISH .1 Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation. .2 Reinforcing fabric: Fibrous glass, untreated 305 g 1m2. 2.8 JACKETS ' .1 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): (Exposed Locations and All Elbows) .1 One-piece moulded type to CGSB 51-GP-53M with pre-formed shapes as required for 1 elbows. .2 Colours: to match adjacent finish paint. .3 Minimum service temperatures: -20°C. .4 Maximum service temperature: 65°C. .5 Moisture vapour transmission: 0.02 perm. .6 Fastenings: .1 Use solvent weld adhesive compatible with insulation to seal laps and joints. ' .2 Tacks. .3 Pressure sensitive vinyl tape of matching colour. .7 Special requirements: .1 All elbows to be packed and covered with PVC Jacket. .2 Outdoor: UV rated material at least 0.5 mm thick. 1 ' Page 26 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 January 12, 1998 Section 15081 , OLDER ADULTS CENTRE THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS , .1 Pressure testing of piping systems and adjacent equipment to be complete, witnessed and certified. .2 Surfaces to be clean, dry, free from foreign material. ' 3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Install in accordance with TIAC National Standards. ' .2 Apply materials in accordance with manufacturers instructions and this specification. .3 Use two layers with staggered joints when required nominal wall thickness exceeds 75 mm. .4 Maintain uninterrupted continuity and integrity of vapour retarder jacket and finishes. , .1 Hangers, supports to be outside vapour retarder jacket. .5 Supports, Hangers: .1 Apply high compressive strength insulation, suitable for service, at oversized saddles and ' shoes where insulation saddles have not been provided. 3.3 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULES .1 Includes valves, valve bonnets, strainers, flanges and fittings unless otherwise specified. ' .2 TIAC Code: A-1. ' .1 Securements: Tape @ 300 mm oc. .2 Seals: lap seal adhesive, lagging adhesive. .3 Installation: TIAC Code 1501-H. ' .3 TIAC Code. A-3. .1 Securements: Tape @ 300 mm oc. .2 Seals: VR lap seal adhesive, VR lagging adhesive. ' .3 Installation: TIAC Code: 1501-C. .4 TIAC Code: C-2 with vapour retarder jacket. .1 Insulation securements: Tape @ 300 mm o.c. .2 Seals: lap seal adhesive, lagging adhesive. .3 Installation: TIAC Code: 1501-C. .5 Thickness of insulation to be as listed in following table. ' .1 ** Run-outs to individual units and equipment not exceeding 4000 mm long. .2 ** Do not insulate exposed runouts to plumbing fixtures, chrome plated piping, valves, fittings. Application Temp TIAC Pipe Sizes (NPS) and Insulation Thickness ' °C Code (mmy Run- to 1 1'/. - 2% - 5 - 6 8 & out 2 4 over Steam, Saturated (Humidifiers) up to 175 A-1 38 50 60 75 90 90 OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 27 ' ' Section 15081 January 12, 1998 THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING OLDER ADULTS CENTRE Application Temp TIAC Pipe Sizes (NPS) and Insulation Thickness °C Code (mm) ' Run to 1% - 2% - 5 - 6 8 & out 2 4 over ' Humdifier Condensate Return Piping 60- 94 A-1 25 38 38 38 38 38 Only New Hot Water up to 59 A-1 25 25 25 25 38 38 Heating S & R Piping 60- 94 A-1 25 38 38 38 38 38 ' All New and Existing Domestic HWS A-1 25 25 25 38 38 38 All New and Existing ' Domestic CWS A-3 25 25 L25 25 25 25 All RWL's and RWP's C-2 25 25 25 25 25 J. .6 Finishes: ' .1 Exposed indoors: PVC jacket. .2 Exposed in mechanical rooms: PVC jacket. .3 Concealed, indoors: PVC on fittings. No further finish. ' .4 Use vapour retarder jacket on TIAC code A-3 insulation compatible with insulation. .5 Finish attachments: SS bands, @ 150 mm oc. Seals: closed. .6 Installation: To appropriate TIAC code CRF/1 through CPF/5. END «««««« 1 ' Page 28 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 ' January 12,1998 Section 15082 OLDER ADULTS CENTRE THERMAL INSULATION FOR DUCTING ' 15082 THERMAL INSULATION FOR DUCTING ' 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES ' .1 ASTM C411-82(1992),Test Method for Hot-Surface Performance of High-Temperature Thermal Insulation. .2 CAN/ULC-S102-M88,Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies. .3 ANSI/NFPA 90A-1989,Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. ' .4 ANSI/NFPA 90B-1989,Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. .5 CAN/CGSB 51.10-92,Mineral Fibre Board Thermal Insulation. .6 CAN/CGSB 51.11-92,Mineral Fibre Thermal Insulation Blanket. ' .7 CGSB 51-GP-52Ma-89,Vapour Barrier Jacket and Facing Material for Pipe, Duct and Equipment Thermal Insulation. .8 ASTM B209M-92a,Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01005-General Requirements. ' .2 Submit for approval manufacturer's catalogue literature related to installation. 1.3 SAMPLES SUBMITTALS .1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01005-General Requirements. .2 Submit for approval:complete assembly of each type of insulation system,insulation, coating, and adhesive proposed.Mount sample on 12 mm plywood board.Affix typewritten label beneath ' sample indicating service. 1.4 DEFINITIONS .1 For purposes of this section: .1 "CONCEALED"-insulated mechanical services and equipment in hung ceilings and non- accessible chases and furred spaces. .2 "EXPOSED"-will mean"not concealed"as defined herein. .3 Insulation Systems-insulation material,fasteners,jackets,etc. 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL .1 Components of insulation system to have maximum flame spread rating of 25 and maximum smoke developed rating of 50 in accordance with CAN/ULC S102. ' .2 Materials to be tested in accordance with ASTM C411. 2.2 D-2 MINERAL FIBRE BLANKET WITH VAPOUR BARRIER MINUS 40 to PLUS 65°C. .1 Application:on round or oval ducting,either cold or dual temperature. (Exhaust Ducts) .2 Material: .1 CGSB 51-GP-52M, mineral fibre blanket with vapour barrier. .2 Acceptable material:Schuller, Knauf. ' .3 Thickness: 25 mm. ' OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 29 Section 15082 January 12, 1998 THERMAL INSULATION FOR DUCTING OLDER ADULTS CENTRE 2.3 D-3 HIGH TEMPERATURE DUCT WRAP ' .1 Application: on hot rectangular ducting. (Kitchen hood exhaust duct) .2 Materials:3M Fire Barrier Firemaster Duct Wrap Overlap. ' .1 Blanket type to NFPA96. , .2 Acceptable material:3M. .3 Thickness:Two 1.5"layers. 2.4 D-4 MINERAL FIBRE RIGID WITH VAPOUR BARRIER TO 65°C , .1 Application: on cold or dual temperature rectangular ducting for: ' .1 Supply air ducting. .2 Fresh air intakes from louvre to mixing box coil damper. .3 Exhaust air ducting from fan damper to exhaust louvre. .2 Material: .1 CAN/CGSB 51.10, rigid mineral fibre board;CGSB 51-GP-52Ma vapour barrier,jacket and ' facing material. .2 Acceptable material: Schuller,Knauf. .3 Thickness: f .1 One 25 mm layer on: cold and dual temperature supply air ducts. ' .2 One 50 mm layer on: intakes. 2.5 FASTENINGS .1 Tape: self adhesive, 100 mm wide,aluminum, ULC labelled for less than 25 flame spread and ' less than 50 smoke developed. .1 Acceptable material:Fattal Insultape by S.Fattal Canvas Inc. .2 Contact adhesive: quick-setting. .1 Acceptable material: Armstrong 520,Childers CP.82, Foster 85-20 asbestos free,5 m2/L. , .3 Lap seal adhesive: quick-setting for joints and lap sealing of vapour barriers. ' .1 Acceptable material:Childers CP.80,Foster 85-75 asbestos free,6 m2/L. .4 For Canvas: ' .1 Washable adhesive for cementing canvas lagging cloth to duct insulation. .2 Acceptable material:Childers CP-52,Foster 8142W asbestos free, 1.25 M21L. .5 Pins: .1 Weld pins 4 mm diameter,with 35 mm diameter head for installation through the insulation. Length to suit thickness of insulation. , .1 Acceptable Material: Duro Dyne,Clip-Pin. .2 Weld pins 2 mm diameter,for installation prior to applying insulation. Length to suit thickness of insulation. Nylon retain clips 32 mm square. Page 30 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 , January 12, 1998 Section 15082 OLDER ADULTS CENTRE THERMAL INSULATION FOR DUCTING t .1 Acceptable Material:Duro Dyne spotter pins with spotter clips or stop clips as required. ' 3 EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION ' .1 Apply insulation after required tests have been completed and approved by Consultant. .2 Surfaces shall be clean and dry during application of insulation and finishes. .3 Apply insulation materials,accessories and finishes to manufacturer's recommendations and as specified. t .4 Vapour barriers and insulation to be unbroken over full length of duct or surface,without penetration for hangers,standing duct seams and without interruption at sleeves and supports. ' .5 Use stand-offs for all duct mounted control accessories. .6 Apply 1.0 mm thick galvanized sheet metal corners to all ductwork in mechanical rooms. ' 3.2 INSTALLATION .1 General: ' .1 Install in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 90A and ANSI/NFPA 90B. .2 Adhere and seal vapour barrier using vapour seal adhesives. ' .3 Stagger longitudinal and horizontal joints,on multi-layered insulation. .2 Mechanical Fastenings: .1 On rectangular ducts, use 50% coverage of insulating cement and weld pins at not more than 200 mm centres, but not less than 2 rows per side and bottom. ....�. END.,..�* OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 31 rSection 15084 January 12, 1998 ACOUSTIC DUCT LINING OLDER ADULTS CENTRE 15084 ACOUSTIC DUCT LINING ' 1 SiENEBAI. 1.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS r .1 SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible-1985. .2 ASTM C177-85, Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus. .3 CAN/ULC-S102-M88, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies. .4 CGSB 51-GP-1 OM-76, Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, Block or Board, for Ducting, Machinery and Boilers. .5 CGSB 51-GP-11 M-76, Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, Blanket, for Piping, Ducting, ' Machinery and Boilers. .6 ANSI/NFPA 90A-1989, Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. .7 ANSI/NFPA 90B-1989, Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. ' 1.2 PRODUCT DATA .1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 01005 - General Requirements. r 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCT LINER .1 General: r .1 Fibrous glass duct liner: air stream side coated with black neoprene. .2 Flame spread rating shall not exceed 25. Smoke development rating shall not exceed 50 ' when tested in accordance with CAN/ULC-S102. .2 Rigid: .1 Use on flat surfaces where indicated. .2 38 mm thick, to CGSB 51-GP-10M,fibrous glass rigid board duct liner. .3 Density: 36 kg/m3. .4 Thermal resistance to be minimum 1.15 M2.00/W for 38 mm thickness when tested in accordance with ASTM C177, at 241C mean temperature. .5 Acceptable Material: Schuller Manville Permacote Linacoustic R-300. ' .3 Flexible: .1 Use on round or oval surfaces. ' .2 38 mm thick, to CGSB 51-GP-11 M, fibrous glass blanket duct liner. .3 Density: 24 kg/m3. .4 Thermal resistance to be minimum 1.11 m2•0 C/W for 38 mm thickness when tested in accordance with ASTM C177, at 241C mean temperature. ' .5 Acceptable Material: Schuller Permacote Linacoustic HP. 2.2 ADHESIVE .1 Meet requirements of ANSI/NFPA 90A and ANSI/NFPA 90B. .2 Flame spread rating shall not exceed 25. Smoke development rating shall not exceed 50. Temperature range -290C to +930C. .3 Acceptable Material: Duro Dyne 1 A-22; Foster 85-60 Page 32 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 January 12, 1998 Section 15084 OLDER ADULTS CENTRE ACOUSTIC DUCT LINING 2.3 FASTENERS , .1 Weld pins 2.0 mm diameter, length to suit thickness of insulation. Metal retaining clips, 32 mm square. ' .2 Acceptable Material: Duro Dyne PN series with NC or PC-1 series clips 2.4 JOINT TAPE , .1 Poly-vinyl treated open weave fibreglass membrane 50 mm wide. .2 Acceptable Material: Duro Dyne FT2 2.5 SEALER , .1 Meet requirements of ANSI/NFPA 90A and ANSI/NFPA 90B. , .2 Flame spread rating shall not exceed 25. Smoke development rating shall not exceed 50. Temperature range minus 68°C to plus 93°C. .3 Acceptable Material: Duro Dyne S-2, Foster 30-35 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL , .1 Do work in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA duct liner standards as indicated in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, 1985, except as ' specified otherwise. .2 Line inside of first ten feet of all supply and return air ducts. .3 Duct dimensions, as indicated, are clear inside duct lining. , 3.2 DUCT LINER .1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, and as follows: ' .1 Fasten to interior sheet metal surface with 100° coverage of adhesive. .2 In addition to adhesive, install weld pins not less than 2 rows per surface and not more ' than 425 mm on centres. 3.3 JOINTS , .1 Seal all butt joints, exposed edges, weld pin and clip penetrations and all damaged areas of liner with joint tape and sealer. Install joint tape in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, and as follows: ' .1 Bed tape in sealer. .2 Apply 2 coats of sealer over tape. .2 Replace badly damaged areas of liner at discretion of Consultant. .3 Protect leading and trailing edges of each duct section with sheet metal nosing having 15 mm overlap and fastened to duct. , «««««« END «««««« OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 33 ' Section 15111 January 12, 1998 VALVES - BRONZE OLDER ADULTS CENTRE 15111 VALVES - BRONZE 1 GENERA 1.1 REFERENCES ' .1 ANSI/ASME B1.20.1-1983(111992), Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch). .2 ASTM A276-92, Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes. .3 ASTM B62-93, Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. .4 ASTM B283-91, Specification for Copper and Copper Alloy Die Forgings (Hot-Pressed). .5 ASTM 8505-93, Specification for Copper-Base Alloy Continuous Castings. .6 MSS SP-25-1993, Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and Unions. .7 MSS SP-80-1987, Bronze Gate Globe, Angle and Check Valves. r1.2 PRODUCT DATA .1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 01005-General Requirements. 1 .2 Submit data for all valves specified this section. ' 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS .1 Submit maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01005-General ' Requirements. 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.1 GENERAL .1 Except for specialty valves,to be single manufacturer. ' 2.2 END CONNECTIONS .1 Connection into adjacent piping/tubing: .1 Steel pipe systems: Screwed ends. .2 Copper tube systems: Solder ends. 2.3 LOCKSHIELD KEYS .1 Where lockshield valves are specified,provide 10 keys of each size: malleable iron cadmium ' plated. 2.4 GLOBE VALVES .1 Requirements common to all globe valves, unless specified otherwise: .1 Standard specification:MSS SP-80. .2 Bonnet:with hex.shoulders. .3 Connections:with hex.shoulders. .4 Pressure testing:to MSS SP-80.Tests to be hydrostatic. .5 Stuffing box:threaded to bonnet with gland follower,packing nut,high grade non-asbestos ' packing. .6 Handwheel: non-ferrous.Nut: bronze to ASTM B 62. .7 Acceptable Material:Crane,Jenkins. ' Page 34 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 January 12, 1998 Section 15111 r OLDER ADULTS CENTRE VALVES - BRONZE .2 NPS 2 and under,composition disc,Class 125: .1 Body and bonnet:screwed bonnet. .2 WP= 860 kPa(125 psi)steam, 1.4 MPa(200 psi)WOG. .3 Disc and seat:renewable rotating PTFE disc(composition to suit service conditions), regrindable bronze seat,loosely secured to bronze stem to ASTM B 505. ' .4 Operator: Handwheel. 2.5 CHECK VALVES .1 Requirements common to all check valves, unless specified otherwise: .1 Standard specification:MSS SP-80. , .2 Connections:with hex.shoulders. .3 Acceptable Material: Jenkins,Crane. .2 NPS 2 and under,swing type,bronze disc,Class 125: , .1 Body:Y-pattern with integral seat at 45°,screw-in cap with hex head. .2 WP = 860 kPa (125 psi)steam, 1.4 MPa(200 psi)WOG. .3 Disc and seat:renewable rotating disc,two-piece hinge disc construction;seat:regrindable. ' 2.6 BALL VALVES .1 NPS 2 and under: , .1 Body and cap:cast high tensile bronze to ASTM B62. ' .2 Pressure rating:Class 125,860 kPa (125 psi)steam,WP= 1.4 MPa (200 ps)WOG. .3 Connections: Screwed ends to ANSI 81.20.1 and with hex.shoulders solder ends to ANSI. .4 Stem:tamper-proof ball drive. .5 Stem packing nut: external to body. .6 Ball and seat: replaceable stainless steel solid ball and teflon seats. .7 Stem seal:TFE with external packing nut. .8 Operator: removable lever handle. ' .9 Acceptable Material: Jenkins,Crane. 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION ' .1 Install rising stem valves in upright position with stem above horizontal. , .2 Remove internal parts before soldering. ..... END «.... OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 35 ' Section 15114 January 12, 1998 VALVES -LUBRICATED PLUG OLDER ADULTS CENTRE ' 15114 VALVES - LUBRICATED PLUG 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES ' .1 ANSI/ASME B1.20.1-1983(R1992), Pipe Threads,General Purpose (Inch). .2 ANSI/ASME B16.1-1989,Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, 125. .3 ANSI/ASME B16.11-1991, Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded. .4 ANSI ASME B16.25-1986,Buttwelding Ends. .5 ANSI/ASME 816.34-1988,Valves-Flanged,Threaded and Welding End. .6 ASTM A 126-84(1991), Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves,Flanges,and Pipe Fittings. .7 ASTM B 62-93, Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. .8 ASTM B 209-92, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 1.2 PRODUCT DATA ' .1 Submit data for all valves specified this section. ' 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL .1 Except for specialty valves,to be of single manufacturer. 2.2 LUBRICATED PLUG VALVES .1 Valve: .1 Body:cast iron to ASTM A 126 Class B semi-steel. ' .2 Rating: Class 125,tested to 150 psig. .3 Plug:cylindrical or tapered,with regular pattern port-90° from full open to fully closed. .4 Number of ports:2. .5 Ends:with hexagon shoulders,ends screwed to ANSI 131.20.1, flanged to ANSI B16.1,butt welding to ANSI B16.25,socket-welding to ANSI 616.11. .6 Lubrication system,nickel-plated. .7 Lubricant:to suit type,temperature and pressure of contained fluid. .8 Feeding system:lubricant forced into lubrication grooves between seating surfaces of plug ' and body to form positive seal,leakproof operation,and corrosion preventing film. Lubricant receptacle to hold additional lubricant. Lubricant screw for lubrication. Check valve to prevent reverse flow of lubricant. O-rings between body and plug. .2 Operator:manual-lever. .3 Accessories: lubricant gun. ' .4 Testing:to ANSI 816.34. 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF LUBRICATED PLUG VALVES .1 Install with line pressure acting to hold plug against body port(s)which are to be cut-off from ' higher pressure. .....END�...« Page 36 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 ' January 12, 1998 Section 15122 OLDER ADULTS CENTRE THERMOMETERS & PRESSURE GAUGES 15122 THERMOMETERS & PRESSURE GAUGES 1 SaENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES: ' .1 ANSI/ASME 840.1-1990, Gauges- Pressure, Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element. .2 CAN/CGSB-14.5-M88, Thermometers, Bimetallic, Self-Indicating, Commercial/Industrial Type. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA: .1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01005 - Submittals. .2 Indicate on manufacturer's catalogue literature the following items: .1 Thermometers. ' .2 Wells. 1.3 MAINTENANCE DATA: .1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01005 - Submittals. 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL: .1 Thermometers and pressure gauges to operate at mid point of scale or range. .2 Ranges: as indicated. 2.2 DIRECT READING THERMOMETERS: .1 Industrial, variable angle type, Bi-metal, 3" dia. Dial size: to CAN/CGSB 14.5. ' .1 Acceptable material: Trerice B83600 or Wekslar. .2 Range: 20°F to 240°F. 2.3 THERMOMETER WELLS: .1 Copper pipe: use copper or bronze. .2 Steel pipe: use brass or stainless steel. 2.4 PRESSURE GAUGES: .1 41/2" dial type to ANSI/ASME B40.1, Grade 2A, stainless steel bourdon tube having 0.5% accuracy full scale. .1 Acceptable material: Trerice 600C, or Wekslar. .2 Range: 0 to 60 psig. .3 Provide snubber and bronze stop cock. ' OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 37 Section 15122 January 12, 1998 ' THERMOMETERS & PRESSURE GAUGES OLDER ADULTS CENTRE 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL: , .1 Install so they can be easily read from floor or platform. If this cannot be accomplished, install remote reading units. .2 Install between equipment and first fitting or valve. 3.2 THERMOMETERS: .1 Install in wells on all piping. Provide heat conductive material for inside of well. , .2 Install in Locations as Indicated and on Inlet and Outlet of: .1 DHW tanks. ' .3 Install wells as indicated only for balancing purposes. .4 Use extensions where thermometers are installed through insulation. 3.3 PRESSURE GAUGES: .1 Install upstream and downstream of PRV valve on boiler make-up-water supply and the building main incoming domestic cold water supply. , .2 Install on suction and discharge of boiler circulating pumps and discharge pipe of sump pumps. ..««+►+r END «*«««s Page 38 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 January 12, 1998 Section 15142 OLDER ADULTS CENTRE DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY PIPING - COPPER ' 15142 DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY PIPING -COPPER 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES .1 ANSI/ASME B16.15-1985, Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings, Classes 125 and 250. .2 ANSI 816.18-1984, Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. .3 ANSI/ASME B16.22-1989, Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings. .4 ASTM A307-89, Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile. ' .5 ASTM B88-89, Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric). .6 MSS-SP-80-1987, Bronze, Globe, and Check Valves. ' 1.2 PRODUCT DATA .1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 01005 - General Requirements. ' .2 Submit data for following: valves. 1.3 MAINTENANCE DATA ' .1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01005 - General Requirements. 1.4 NEW DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE ' .1 Contractor to make arrangements with the local public utility for the new 2" connection to the public water supply on Beech Street. Contractor to carry the cost of the utilities price to make the street connection in the tender price. 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.1 PIPING .1 Domestic hot, cold and recirculation systems, within building. .1 Above ground: copper tube, hard drawn, type L: to ASTM B88M. .2 Buried and embedded: copper tube, soft annealed, type K: to ASTM B88M, in long lengths and with no buried joints. 2.2 FITTINGS .1 Cast bronze threaded fittings, Class 125 and 250: to ANSI/ASME B16.15. .2 Cast copper, solder type: to ANSI B16.18. .3 Wrought copper and copper alloy, solder type: to ANSI 816.22. ' 2.3 JOINTS .1 Solder: 95/5 and to contain less than 0.2% lead and to suit application. .2 Brazing: 95/5 silver. .3 Teflon tape: for threaded joints. .4 Dielectric connections between dissimilar metals: dielectric fitting to ASTM F492, complete with thermoplastic liner. 2.4 SWING CHECK VALVES (See Section 15111) ' OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 39 Section 15142 January 12, 1998 , DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY PIPING -COPPER OLDER ADULTS CENTRE 2.5 BALL VALVES JSee Section 15111) 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Install in accordance with Provincial Plumbing Code and local authority having jurisdiction except where specified otherwise. .2 Cut square, ream and clean tubing and tube ends, clean recesses of fittings and assemble without binding. ' .3 Assemble all piping using fittings manufactured to ANSI standards. .4 Install tubing close to building structure to minimize furring, conserve headroom and space. Group exposed piping and run parallel to walls. , .5 Install CWS piping below and away from HWS and HWC and all other hot piping so as to maintain temperature of cold water as low as possible. .6 Connect to fixtures and equipment in accordance with manufacturers instructions unless otherwise indicated. .7 Connect to fixtures and equipment in accordance with manufacturers instructions unless otherwise indicated. .8 Buried Tubing: .1 Lay in well compacted washed sand in accordance with AWWA Class B bedding. .2 Bend tubing without crimping or constriction. Minimize use of fittings. , 3.2 VALVES .1 Isolate equipment, fixtures and branches with ball valves. , .2 Balance recirculation system using lockshield globe. Mark settings and record on as-built drawings on completion. , 3.3 PRESSURE TESTS .1 Conform to requirements of Section 15010-General Requirements. , 3.4 DISINFECTION .1 Flush out, disinfect and rinse system to requirements of authority having jurisdiction. ' END Page 40 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 ' ' January 12, 1998 Section 15151 OLDER ADULTS CENTRE DRAINAGE, WASTE &VENT PIPING ' 15151 DRAINAGE, WASTE & VENT PIPING ' 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES .1 ASTM B-32-89, Specification for Solder Metal. .2 ASTM B306-88, Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV). .3 ASTM C564-88, Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe, Waste Pipe, Traps, ' Bends and Accessories. .4 CAN/CSA-B70-M91, Cast Iron Soil Pipe, Fittings and Means of Joining. .5 CAN/CSA-B125-M93, Plumbing Fittings. 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS .1 Above ground sanitary storm and vent Type DWV to: ASTM B306. .1 Fittings. ' .1 Cast brass: to CAN/CSA 8125. .2 Wrought copper: to CAN/CSA B125. .2 Solder: 95:5. 2.2 CAST IRON PIPING AND FITTINGS .1 Buried sanitary storm and vent minimum NPS 3, to: CAN/CSA-B70, with one layer of protective coating. .1 Joints: .1 Mechanical Joints: .1 Neoprene or butyl rubber compression gaskets: to ASTM C564 or CAN/CSA- ' B70. .2 Stainless steel clamps. .2 Hub and Spigot: .1 Caulking lead: to CSA B67. .2 Cold caulking compounds. ' .2 Above ground sanitary storm and vent: to CAN/CSA-B70. ' .1 Joints: .1 Hub and Spigot: .1 Caulking lead: to CSA B67. .2 Mechanical Joints: .1 Neoprene or butyl rubber compression gaskets with stainless steel clamps. ' OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 41 Section 15151 January 12, 1998 DRAINAGE, WASTE &VENT PIPING OLDER ADULTS CENTRE 3 EXECUTION , 3.1 INSTALLATION , .1 Install in accordance with Provincial Plumbing Code and local authority having jurisdiction except where specified otherwise. .2 Install buried pipe on 150 mm bed of clean washed sand, shaped to accommodate hubs and fittings, to line and grade as indicated. Backfill with 150 mm of clean washed sand. .3 Install above ground piping parallel and close to walls and ceilings to conserve headroom and , space, and to grade as indicated. END *«x+t•at ' Page 42 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 , tJanuary 12, 1998 Section 15152 OLDER ADULTS CENTRE DRAINAGE, WASTE &VENT PIPING- PLASTIC ' 15152 DRAINAGE, WASTE&VENT PIPING- PLASTIC 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES .1 ASTM D2235-88, Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrille-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. .2 ASTM D2564-91, Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl-Chloride) (PVC) Plastic ' Pipe and Fittings. .3 CAN/CSA-B181.1-M 90, ABC Drain, Waste and Vent Pipe and Pipe Fittings. .4 CAN/CSA-B181.2-M87, PVC Drain, Waste and Vent Pipe.and Pipe Fittings. .5 CAN/CSA-B182.1 M87, Plastic Drain and Sewer Pipe and Pipe Fittings. 1.2 NEW SANITARY MAIN ' .1 Contractor to make arrangements for the new 6" sanitary main connection on Beech Street with the local public utility. Contractor to carry the cost of the utilities price to make the street connection in the tender price. 1 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING AND FITTINGS .1 For buried DWV piping to: .1 CAN/CSA-B181.1. .2 CAN/CSA-8181.2. .3 CAN/CSA-B182.1. 2.2 JOINTS .1 Solvent weld for PVC: to ASTM D2564. ' .2 Solvent weld for ABS: to ASTM D2235. 3 EXECUTION, 3.1 INSTALLATION ' .1 Install in accordance with Provincial Plumbing Code and local authority having jurisdiction and to following standards except where specified otherwise. .2 Install buried pipe on 150 mm bed of washed clean sand, shaped to accommodate fittings, to line and grade as indicated. Backfill with washed clean sand. END ««*«* OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 43 Section 15192 January 12, 1998 PIPING, VALVES & FITTINGS -GAS OLDER ADULTS CENTRE ' 15192 PIPING, VALVES & FITTINGS -GAS 1 GENERA ' 1.1 REFERENCES: ' .1 ANSI 1316.5-1988, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. .2 ANSI 816.18-1984, Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. .3 ANSI 816.22-1989, Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings. ' .4 ANSI B18.2.1-1981, Square and Hex Bolts and Screws. .5 ASTM A47M-90, Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. .6 ASTM A53 90a, Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless. 1 .7 ASTM B32-89, Specification for Solder Metal. .8 ASTM B75M-90, Specification for Seamless Copper Tube Metric. .9 CAN/CGA B149.1-M86, Natural Gas Installation Code. .10 CSA W47.1-1983, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures.. 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE: ' .1 Steel pipe: to ASTM A53, Schedule 40, seamless as follows: .1 NPS %s to 2, screwed. .2 NPS 2'/z and over, plain end. .2 Copper tube: to ASTM B75M. ' 2.2 JOINTING MATERIAL: .1 Screwed fittings: pulverized lead paste. .2 Welded fittings: to CSA W47.1. .3 Flange gaskets: non-metallic flat. .4 Soldered: to ASTM 632, tin antimony 95/5. ' 2.3 FITTINGS: .1 Steel Pipe Fittings, Screwed, Flanged or Welded: ' .1 Malleable iron: screwed, banded, Class 150. .2 Steel pipe flanges and flanged fittings: to ANSI/ASME 1316.5. .3 Steel butt-welding fittings. .4 Unions: malleable iron, brass to iron, ground seat, to ASTM A47M. .5 Bolts and nuts: to ANSI B18.2.1. .6 Nipples: Schedule 40, to ASTM A53. ' .2 Copper pipe fittings, screwed, flanged or soldered: .1 Cast copper fittings: to ANSI 816.18. 1 .2 Wrought copper fittings: to ANSI/ASME 816.22. ' Page 44 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 January 12, 1998 Section 15192 ' OLDER ADULTS CENTRE PIPING, VALVES & FITTINGS -GAS 2.4 VALVES: .1 Provincial Code approved, lubricated plug or approved ball type. 3 EXECUTION ' 3.1 PIPING: .1 Install in accordance with applicable Provincial/Territorial Codes. , .2 Install in accordance with CAN 1-8149.1. .3 Assemble piping using fittings manufactured to ANSI standards. .4 Connect to equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instruction unless otherwise indicated. .5 Slope piping down in direction of flow to low points. .6 Install drip points: ' .1 At low points in piping system. ' .2 At each connection to equipment. .7 Use eccentric reducers at pipe size change installed to provide positive drainage. ' .8 Provide clearance for access and for maintenance. .9 Ream pipes, clean scale and dirt, inside and out. .10 Install piping to minimize pipe dismantling for equipment removal. 3.2 VALVES: .1 Install valves with stems upright or horizontal unless otherwise approved by Consultant. .2 Install valves at all branch take-offs to isolate each piece of equipment, and as indicated. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: .1 Test system in accordance with CAN/CGA 13149.1 and requirements of authority having jurisdiction. 3.4 PURGING: , .1 Purge after pressure test in accordance with CAN/CGA B149.1. +tNM+►N+t END OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 45 ' Section 15401 January 12, 1998 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES &ACCESSORIES OLDER ADULTS CENTRE ' 15401 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES & ACCESSORIES ' 1 GENERA 1.1 REFERENCES .1 ASTM A-126-84(1991), Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fittings. .2 ASTM B62-93, Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. ' .3 CAN/CSA-B64 Series-M88, Backflow Preventers and Vacuum Breakers. .4 CAN3-B79-M79, Floor Drains and Trench Drains. .5 CSA-B356-M 1979, Water Pressure Reducing Valves for Domestic Water Supply Systems. .6 PDI-G101-81, Testing and Rating Procedure for Grease Interceptors with Appendix of Sizing ' and Installation Data. .7 PDI-WH201-77, Water Hammer Arrestors. ' 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01005 - General Requirements. .2 For shop drawings, indicate dimensions and construction details and materials. ' .3 For product data, indicate dimensions, construction details and materials for all items specified herein. ' 1.3 MAINTENANCE DATA .1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01005 -General Requirements. .2 Data to Include: ' .1 Description of plumbing specialties and accessories, giving manufacturers name, type, model, year and capacity. .2 Details of operation, servicing and maintenance. .3 Recommended spare parts list. 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FLOOR DRAINS .1 Floor drains and trench drains: to CAN3-B79. ' .2 Type 1: general duty; cast iron body round, adjustable head, sediment basket, nickel bronze strainer, integral seepage pan, and clamping collar. ' .1 Acceptable material: Ancon, Zurn. .3 Type 3: combination funnel floor drain; cast iron body with integral seepage pan, clamping collar, nickel-bronze adjustable head strainer with integral funnel. ' .1 Acceptable material: Ancon, Zurn. 2.2 ROOF DRAINS 1 .1 Type 2: standard roof drain with cast iron body with aluminum or cast iron dome, under deck clamp to suit roof construction, flashing clamp ring with integral gravel stop. .1 Acceptable material: Ancon, Zurn. ' Page 46 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 January 12, 1998 Section 15401 ' OLDER ADULTS CENTRE PLUMBING SPECIALTIES &ACCESSORIES 2.3 CLEANOUTS ' .1 Cleanout plugs: heavy cast iron male ferrule with brass screws and threaded brass or bronze plug. Sealing-caulked lead seat or neoprene gasket. ' .1 Acceptable material: Ancon, Zurn. .2 Access covers: .1 Wall access: face or wall type, polished nickel bronze round cover with flush head ' securing screws, bevelled edge frame complete with anchoring lugs. .1 Acceptable material: Ancon, Zurn. .2 Floor access: round cast iron body and frame with adjustable secured nickel bronze top and: .1 Plugs: bolted bronze with neoprene gasket. , .2 Cover for unfinished concrete floors: cast iron round, gasket, vandal-proof screws. , .1 Acceptable material: Ancon, Zurn. .3 Cover for terrazzo finish: polished nickel bronze with recessed cover for filling with terrazzo, vandal-proof locking screws: .1 Acceptable material: Ancon, Zurn. .4 Cover for tile and linoleum floors: polished nickel bronze with recessed cover for linoleum or tile infill, complete with vandal-proof locking screws: ' .1 Acceptable material: Ancon, Zurn. .5 Cover for carpeted floors: polished nickel bronze with deep flange cover for carpet infill, complete with carpet retainer vandal-proof locking screw. .1 Acceptable material: Ancon CO 200 Series, Zurn ZN1600 Series. ' 2.4 NON FREEZE WALL HYDRANTS: .1 Recessed with integral vacuum breaker, NPS 3/4 hose outlet, removable operating key. , Chrome plated. .2 Acceptable material: Ancon Series HY-700-VB. ' 2.5 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS .1 Copper construction, piston type: to PDI-WH 201. ' .2 Acceptable material: Ancon SHOK-GARD. OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 47 ' Section 15401 January 12, 1998 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES & ACCESSORIES OLDER ADULTS CENTRE ' 2.6 BACK FLOW PREVENTERS (Sizes as indicated) .1 To CAN/CSA-B64 Series. .1 Acceptable material: Watts Series 909WTS with Series 909AG. 2.7 VACUUM BREAKERS .1 To CAN/CSA-B64 Series. i .2 Atmospheric Vacuum Breaker: .1 Acceptable material: Watts 288A 1 .3 Hose connection vacuum breaker: .1 Acceptable material: Watts 8 2.8 PRESSURE REGULATORS ' .1 Capacity: as indicated. .1 Inlet pressure: 90 Psig. .2 Outlet pressure: 75 Psig. .3 Capacity: 136 GPM. .4 Acceptable material: Watts Series 223, size 2". 2.9 HOSE BIBBS AND SEDIMENT FAUCETS .1 Bronze construction complete with integral back flow preventer, hose thread spout, ' replaceable composition disc, and chrome plated in finished area. .2 Acceptable material: Cambridge 32W201, Emco 10741. ' 2.10 WATER MAKE-UP ASSEMBLY(FOR EXISTING BOILER) .1 Complete with backflow preventer, pressure gauge on inlet and outlet, pressure reducing valve to CSA B356, pressure relief valve on low pressure side and ball valves on inlet and outlet. .2 Acceptable material: Watts Series 909OTS, 223 & 174A. ' 2.11 TRAP SEAL PRIMERS .1 All brass, with integral vacuum breaker, NPS '/2 solder ends, NPS %z drip line connection. .2 Acceptable material: Ancon MS-810. 2.12 STRAINERS .1 860 kPa, Y type with 20 mesh, monel, bronze or stainless steel removable screen. ' .2 NPS 2 and under, bronze body, screwed ends, with brass cap. .1 Acceptable material: ,Armstrong F4SC, Braukmann FY32, Crane 988-1/2, Leitch BE, ' Spirax BT, Toyo 380, Watts 777 Series. 1 Page 48 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 Janua ry 12, 1998 Section 15401 OLDER ADULTS CENTRE PLUMBING SPECIALTIES &ACCESSORIES 2.13 GREASE INTERCEPTORS .1 White epoxy coated fabricated steel, with multi-weir baffle assembly, visible code approved deep seal trap, cover, cover securing handles, powder or liquid injection port, stainless steel calibrated orifice plate and aluminum epoxy coated cover. Unit suitable for recess mounting. .2 Capacity: 7 usgpm flow rate, 14 lbs grease capacity, NPS 3 inlet and outlet, female threads. .1 Acceptable material: Ancon GI-107, Enpoco, Zurn. 2.14 OIL INTERCEPTOR .1 White epoxy coated fabricated steel, with multi-weir bucket assembly, visible code approved deep seal trap, adjustable automatic draw-off assembly, double vent connections, cover, cover securing handles, stainless steel calibrated orifice plate and aluminum epoxy coated cover. Unit suitable for floor mounting. .2 Capacity: 35 usgpm flow rate, NPS 4 inlet and outlet, female threads. .3 Acceptable material: Ancon 01-335, Enpoco, Zurn. ' .4 Provide a separate, vented, epoxy coated steel storage tank to match capacity of the above interceptor. 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION ' .1 Install in accordance with provincial codes, and local authority having jurisdiction. .2 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified. ' 3.2 CLEANOUTS ' .1 In addition to those required by code, and as indicated, install at base of all soil and waste stacks, and rainwater leaders. .2 Bring cleanouts to wall or finished floor unless serviceable from below floor. ' .3 Building drain cleanout and stack base cleanouts: line size to maximum NPS 4. 3.3 NON FREEZE WALL HYDRANTS ' .1 Install 600 mm above finished grade unless otherwise indicated. ' 3.4 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS .1 Install on branch supplies to each fixture or group of fixtures and where indicated. 3.5 BACK FLOW PREVENTERS ' .1 Install in accordance with CAN/CSA B64 Series, where indicated and elsewhere as required by code. , OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 49 ' Section 15401 January 12, 1998 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES & ACCESSORIES OLDER ADULTS CENTRE .1 Install on all humidifiers, boiler, dishwasher, canteen machines. ' .2 Pipe discharge to over nearest drain and or service sink. 3.6 HOSE BIBBS AND SEDIMENT FAUCETS 1 .1 Install at bottom of all risers, at low points to drain systems, and as indicated. ' 3.7 TRAP SEAL PRIMERS .1 Install for all floor drains and elsewhere, as indicated. .2 Install on cold water supply to nearest frequently used plumbing fixture, in concealed space, to approval of Consultant. .3 Install soft copper or plastic tubing to floor drain. 3.8 STRAINERS ' .1 Install with sufficient room to remove basket. 3.9 GREASE AND OIL INTERCEPTORS i .1 Install with sufficient space, as indicated, for ease of maintenance. 3.10 WATER MAKE-UP ASSEMBLY .1 Install on valved bypass. .2 Pipe discharge from relief valve to nearest floor drain. 3.11 START-UP .1 Floor drains: .1 Prime, using trap primer. .2 Clean out baskets. .2 Roof Drains: 1 .1 Clean out baskets. .3 Rectify start-up deficiencies. ' 3.12 COMMISSIONING .1 In context of this paragraph, "verify" to include "demonstrate" to Consultant. .2 Timing: commission only after start-up deficiencies rectified. .3 Access doors: verify size and location relative to items to be services. .4 Adjust to suit site conditions, including, but not necessarily limited to, following: .1 Floor drains: .1 Verify proper operation of trap primer, flushing features. ' Page 50 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 January 12, 1998 Section 15401 OLDER ADULTS CENTRE PLUMBING SPECIALTIES&ACCESSORIES .2 Verify security and removability of strainers. ' .2 Roof drains: .1 Verify installation at low points in roof. .2 Verify security and removability of dome. .3 Verify provision for movement of roof and integrity of roof drain piping system. .3 Cleanouts: .1 Verify covers are gastight, secure and easily removable. .2 Verify that cleanout rods can probe as far as next cleanout. .4 Non-freeze wall, ground hydrants: .1 Verify complete drainage. , .2 Verify operation of vacuum breaker. .5 Water hammer arrestors: .1 Verify accessibility. ' .6 Backflow preventers, vacuum breakers: .1 Verify installation of correct type to suit application. .2 Test and adjust as necessary to ensure proper operation. .3 Verify visibility of discharge. .7 Pressure regulators: .1 Adjust settings to suit installed locations, required flow rates. .8 Hose bibbs, sediment faucets: , .1 Verify operation. .9 Water make-up assembly: .1 Verify operation. .10 Trap seal primers: .1 Verify operation. .2 Adjust flow rate to suit site conditions. .11 Pipeline strainers: .1 Verify accessibility of basket. .2 Clean out during commissioning until system clean. .12 Grease and oil interceptors: .1 Activate, using manufacturer's recommended activation procedures and materials. ' .5 Commissioning reports: .1 Record all results on approved report forms. ' .2 Include signature of tester and supervisor. .3 To be countersigned by Consultant. .6 Verification: , .1 Notify Consultant 24 h before commencing tests. .2 All tests and procedures to be witnessed by Consultant. .3 All reported results subject to verification by Commissioning Manager. .7 Training: .1 Train O&M personnel in start-up, operation, monitoring, servicing, maintenance and shut-down procedures. ' .8 Demonstrations: .1 Demonstrate full compliance with Design Criteria. ' .2 Demonstrations also to show completeness of 0&M personnel training. OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 51 ' Section 15411 January 12, 1998 PLUMBING FIXTURES &TRIM OLDER ADULTS CENTRE 15411 PLUMBING FIXTURES &TRIM I GENERAL 1.1 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT SUPPLIED UNDER THIS SECTION .1 Install rough-in for equipment supplied by others, complete with valves on hot and cold water supplies, waste and vent. .2 Equipment supplied by others. (Dishwasher, Canteensl .1 Connect with unions. .3 Equipment not installed. 1 .1 Capped for future connection by others. 1.2 REFERENCES: ' .1 ANSI/ARI 1010-84, Drinking Fountains and Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking Water Coolers. .2 ANSI/AR1 1020-84, Application and Installation of Drinking-Fountains and Drinking Water ' Coolers. .3 CAN/CSA-645 Series-88, CSA Standards on Plumbing Fixtures. .4 CAN/CSA-13125-93, Plumbing Fittings. .5 CAN/CSA-8651-M90, Barrier-Free Design. 1.3 PRODUCT DATA: .1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 01005 - General Requirements. .2 Indicate, for all fixtures and trim: .1 Dimensions, construction detail, roughing-in dimensions. ' .2 Factory-set water consumption per flush at recommended pressure. .3 For urinals: minimum pressure required for flushing. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS: .1 Provide maintenance data including monitoring requirements for incorporation into manuals specified in Section 01005 - General Requirements. I .2 Include: .1 Description of fixtures and trim, giving manufacturers name, type, model, year, capacity. ' .2 Details of operation, servicing, maintenance. .3 List of recommended spare parts. ' 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL: .1 Fixtures: manufacture in accordance with CAN/CSA-1345 Series. .2 Trim, fittings: manufacture in accordance with CAN/CSA-B125. ' .3 Exposed plumbing brass to be chrome plated. .4 Number, locations: Architectural drawings to govern. .5 Fixtures in any one location to be product of one manufacturer and of same type. .6 Trim in any one location to be product of one manufacturer and of same type. Page 52 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 January 12, 1998 Section 15411 OLDER ADULTS CENTRE PLUMBING FIXTURES &TRIM ' 2.2 WATER CLOSETS: .1 WC: Floor-mounted, flush tank for handicapped. .1 Top of seat to be between 407 mm and 445 mm from finished floor. .2 Bowl: vitreous china, floor mounted, syphon jet, elongated rim, close-coupled, bolt caps. .3 Closet tank: vitreous china with tank liner, flapper type flush valve assembly for ultra low flush cycle: factory set to 5.7 litres/flush. .1 Acceptable material: American Standard AF-2606, Crane. ' .4 Seat: white, elongated, open front moulded solid plastic, cover, stainless steel check hinges, stainless steel or solid brass insert post. .1 Acceptable material: Beneke 527CH, Entoco Plastics 1500cc, Moldex MW170, Olsonite 95CC. 2.3 URINALS: .1 U-1: wall mounted, ultra-low flush, exposed flush valve, top spud. t .1 Urinal: vitreous china, siphon jet, integral flushing rim, extended shields, integral trap, removable stainless steel strainer, back outlet. Colour: White. .1 Acceptable material: American Standard "Trimbrook", Crane "Ambassador". .2 Manual flush valves: chrome plated, non-hold open, exposed diaphragm, externally ' adjustable, with NPS 3/4 angle screwdriver stop, oscillating handle, wall and spud flange, vacuum breaker. Ultra low flush cycle: set to 3.8 litres/flush. .1 Acceptable material: Cambridge Brass, Crane, Sloan Valve (Royal). 2.4 LAVATORIES: .1 LV-1: for handicapped. .1 Vitreous china, self-rimming counter top, front anti-splash lip, with integral back, contoured front, shallow front basin, rear overflow, supply openings on 203 mm centres. Sizes: 615 x 457 x 178mm. .1 Acceptable material: Crane 1-337, American Standard. .2 Waste fitting: NPS 1% offset waste with open strainer. ' .3 Trim: .1 Wheelchair supply fitting with gooseneck spout, aerator, 150 mm blade handles with indexed buttons, bent tailpiece. ' .2 Provide accessories to limit maximum flow rate to 8.35 L/minute at 413 kPa. .3 Acceptable materials: Crane CH-8050. ' .4 Waste fitting: plug and chain. ' OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 53 Section 15411 January 12, 1998 ' PLUMBING FIXTURES &TRIM OLDER ADULTS CENTRE 2.5 MOP SINKS IMSI: , .1 Sink: moulded stone, 300 mm high, undrilled integral back. Size: 610 x 610 x 305 mm deep. .1 Acceptable material: Fiat TSB-100. .2 Supply fitting: with built-in elevated vacuum breaker, indexed cross handles, 1400 mm long , rubber hose, escutcheons, union inlets, heavy cast brass spout with pail hook, brace to wall, integral stop valves. Provide accessories to limit maximum flow rate to 8.35 L/minute at 413 kPa. Mop hanger bracket. , .1 Acceptable material: Fiat 830 AA, 832-AA, 889-CC. .3 Waste fitting: chrome plated cast brass outlet strainer. .1 Acceptable material: Fiat 1453-BB. .4 Rim guard: stainless steel. , .1 Acceptable material: Fiat E-88-AA-24. 2.6 STAINLESS STEEL COUNTERTOP SINKS: .1 SC-1: single compartment, ledge-back. , .1 From 1.0 mm thick type 302 stainless steel, self-rimming, undercoated, clamps. Overall sizes: 520 x 510 x 180 mm. .1 Acceptable materials: American-Standard AE-1123, Kindred Industries QL-2/3, Wessan 201-3. .2 Trim: chrome plated brass, with swing spout, aerator, single lever handle, washerless , controls, accessories to limit maximum flow rate to 8.35 litres/minute at 413 kPa. .1 Acceptable materials: American-Standard 4200-010, Delta 100, Moen 7531, , Symmons S93, Waltec 24W113. .3 Waste fitting: integral stainless steel basket strainer/stopper,tailpiece, cast brass P-trap with cleanout. .2 SC-2: Three compartment, ledge back: , .1 From 1.0 mm thick type 302 stainless steel, self-rimming, undercoated, clamps. Overall sizes: 47%" x 21" x 10" deep . .1 Acceptable materials: Kindred Aristaline LBT6410-1 C. ' .2 Trim: chrome plated brass, with 14" swing spout, 2 USGPM aerator, 4" colour indexed blade handles, washerless controls„ spray fitting. .1 Acceptable materials: Cambridge Brass 27T2544. .3 Waste fitting: integral stainless steel basket strainer/stoppers, tailpieces, cast brass , P-trap with cleanout. .1 Acceptable Material: Cambrideg Brass. Page 54 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 ' January 12, 1998 Section 15411 OLDER ADULTS CENTRE PLUMBING FIXTURES &TRIM ' 2.7 REFRIGERATED WATER COOLERS: .1 RWC: flush to wall. ' .1 Refrigeration system: packaged hermetic HFC-134a unit with precooler, insulated double wall chiller, storage tank, air cooled condenser, thermostatically controlled, capacity 8 1 usgph from 80°F to 50°F with ambient air temperature of 90°F in accordance with ANSI/ARI 1010. .2 Cabinet: two level design with wheel chair access on lower level, type 302 stainless steel, satin finish fountain top, integral back, strainer, elevated bubbler base. Bonderized ' steel apron. Baked enamel finish. Colour selected by Architect. .3 Bubbler: self regulating, angle stream, squirt proof with nozzle and guard. Pushbutton operated. ' .4 Push button type glass filler. .5 Electrical: grounded electrical cord with plug, 120 V, 60 cycles. CSA certified. .6 Acceptable material: Elkay Model EBFATL-8; Aquarius; Halsey Taylor; Haws. 2.8 FIXTURE PIPING: .1 Hot and cold water supplies to each fixture: chrome plated flexible supply pipes each with ' screwdriver stop, reducers, escutcheon. 2.9 WASTE: .1 Brass P traps complete with cleanout on each fixture not having built-in traps. .2 Chrome plated in all exposed places. .3 Insulate waste piping on handicap fixtures. 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Connect fixtures complete with supplies and drains, trapped, supported level and square. Hot ' water faucets shall be on left. Fixtures on outside walls to have supplies from floor; other fixtures to be served from wall. Wall hung fixtures to be securely and firmly mounted. .2 Mounting heights: .1 Standard: to comply with manufacturers recommendations unless otherwise'indicated or specified. .2 Wall-hung fixtures: measured from finished floor. .3 Physically handicapped: to comply with most stringent of either NBCC or CAN/CSA B651. ' .3 Drinking fountains and water coolers: in accordance with ANSI/ARI 1020. 3.2 ADJUSTING .1 Conform to water conservation requirements specified in this section. ' .2 Adjustments. .1 Adjust water flow rate to design flow rates. .2 Adjust pressure to fixtures to ensure no splashing at maximum pressures. .3 Adjust flush valves to suit actual site conditions. ' OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 55 Section 15411 January 12, 1998 ' PLUMBING FIXTURES &TRIM OLDER ADULTS CENTRE .4 Adjust water cooler, drinking fountain flow stream to ensure no spillage. , .3 Checks. .1 Water closets, urinals: flushing action. ' .2 Aerators: operation, cleanliness. .3 Vacuum breakers, backflow preventers: operation under all conditions. .4 Refrigerated water coolers: operation, temperature settings. , w*«r�+► END •r+►*r 1 Page 56 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 ' January 12, 1998 Section 15440 ' OLDER ADULTS CENTRE PLUMBING PUMPS 15440 PLUMBING PUMPS ' 1 GENERAL 1.1 DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA .1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01005 - Submittals. .2 Indicate: .1 Equipment, including connections, fittings, control assemblies and ancillaries. Identify whether factory or field assembled. , .2 Wiring and schematic diagrams. .3 Dimensions and recommended installation. .4 Pump performance and efficiency curves. 1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS .1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01005 - Submittals. .2 Data to include: , .1 Manufacturers name, type, model year, capacity and serial number. .2 Details of operation, servicing and maintenance. .3 Recommended spare parts list with names and addresses. 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DOMESTIC HOT WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS (132) ' .1 Capacity: 5 GPM against total differential head of 10Ft. .2 Construction: closed-coupled, in-line centrifugal, all bronze construction, stainless steel shaft, stainless steel or bronze shaft sleeve, self lubricated graphite bearings. Design for 140 Psig wp and 105°C continuous service. , .3' Motor: drip-proof, with thermal overload protection, 120/1/60. .4 Supports: provide as recommended by manufacturer. , .5 Acceptable material: Armstrong SSC-50; Bell & Gossett; Taco. 2.2 SUMP PUMP SUBMERSIBLE (P1) .1 Capacity: 20 GPM at 25 Ft. head. .2 Construction: simplex CSA approved, housing epoxy coated cast iron, stainless steel shaft, non-clog bronze impeller, mechanical shaft seal. .3 Motor: '/3 hp hermetically sealed, with automatic overload protection. 120/1/60. .4 Control: mercury free mechanical float switch and simplex control box. .5 Acceptable material: Myers Model ME3F. OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 57 , Section 15440 January 12, 1998 PLUMBING PUMPS OLDER ADULTS CENTRE 3 EXECUTION ' 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Make piping and electrical connections to pump and motor assembly and controls as indicated. .2 Ensure pump and motor assembly do not support piping. ' 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 Check power supply. ' .2 Check starter protective devices. .3 Start up, check for proper and safe operation. ' .4 Check settings and operation of all hand-off-auto selector switch, operating, safety and limit controls, audible and visual alarms, over-temperature and other protective devices. **«* End * **. r i Page 58 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 January 12, 1998 Section 15732 ' OLDER ADULTS CENTRE PACKAGED ROOF TOP UNITS 15732 PACKAGED ROOF TOP UNITS , 1 GENERAL ' 1.1 REFERENCES .1 ANSI/ARI 210/240-89, Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air Source Heat Pump Equipment. ' .2 ARI 270-84, Standard for Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment. .3 CSA B52-95, Mechanical Refrigeration Code. .4 CSA C22.1-1990, Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1. ' .5 Ontario Electrical Safety Code, 21 Edition, 1994 .6 ANSI/NFPA 9OA-1993, Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems, Installation of. .7 ANSI/UL 465-1984, Air Conditioners, Central Cooling. .8 UL 900, Standard for Air Filters. ' 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01005 -General Requirements. , .2 Indicate: A Equipment, piping, and connections, together with valves, strainers, control assemblies, , thermostatic controls, auxiliaries and hardware, and recommended ancillaries which are mounted, wired and piped ready for final connection to building system, its size and ' recommended bypass connections. .2 Piping, valves, fitting shipped loose showing final location in assembly. .3 Control equipment shipped loose, showing final location in assembly. .4 Complete internal panel wiring and any external panel wiring, both as schematics and as , actually assembled. .5 Dimensions, internal and external construction details, recommended method of installation with proposed structural steel support, mounting curb details, sixes and ' location of mounting bolt holes; include mass distribution drawings showing point loads. .6 Detailed composite wiring diagrams for control systems showing factory installed wiring and equipment on packaged equipment or required for controlling devices or ancillaries, accessories, controllers. ' .7 Fan performance curves. .8 Details of vibration isolation. .9 Estimate of sound levels to be expected across each individual octave band in DB ' referred to A rating. .10 Type of refrigerant used. 1.3 MAINTENANCE DATA , .1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01005 - General Requirements. .2 Indicate: .1 Brief description of unit, indexed, with details of function, operation, control, and service ' for each component. .3 Manufacturer's installation instructions shall govern installation and unless otherwise noted, , operation, maintenance and service of items. Include names and addresses of spare part suppliers. i OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 59 , Section 15732 January 12, 1998 PACKAGED ROOF TOP UNITS OLDER ADULTS CENTRE .4 Include following.. .1 Provide, for each unit manufacturer's name, type, year, number of units, and capacity. ' 1.4 WARRANTY .1 Contractor hereby warrants refrigeration compressors in accordance with GC 24, but for 5 years. ' 2 PRODUCTS (HVAC-2, HVAC-4 & HVAC-5) 2.1 GENERAL .1 Roof mounted, self-contained, single zone unit with gas burner and DX refrigeration and bear label of CSA, CGA, and ULC. .2 Units to consist of cabinet and frame, supply fan, heat exchanger, burner with integral induced draft fan, heater control, air filter, refrigerant cooling coil, compressor(s), condenser coil and fans, motorized outside air damper, return damper, gravity exhaust damper (full economiser). HVAC-5 to include power exhaust. .3 Prefabricated roof curb to conform to requirements of National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA), minimum height 450 mm and vibration isolation rails for all roof units. 2.2 CABINET .1 Cabinets: weatherproofing tested and certified to AGA rain test standards and soundproofing tested to ARI 270. .2 Framing and supports: welded steel, galvanized after manufacture, with lifting lugs. .3 Outer casing: weather tight galvanized steel with baked enamel finish, complete with flashing. .4 Access: gasketed hinged doors or panels with screwdriver operated flush cam type fasteners. .5 Insulation: coated glass fibre on all surfaces where conditioned air is handled, 25 mm thick, 32 kg/m'density. ' 2.3 FANS .1 Centrifugal, forward curved impellers, statically and dynamically balanced. V-belt drive with adjustable variable pitch motor pulley, fan and motor integrally mounted on isolation base, ' separated from unit casing with flexible connections and spring isolators. Vibration isolators: 95% efficiency. 2.4 AIR FILTERS .1 50 mm thick, 30/30% efficiency, throwaway, standard to unit manufacturer. .2 To meet ANSI/NFPA 90A, air filter requirements type Class 2. ' Page 60 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 January 12, 1998 Section 15732 OLDER ADULTS CENTRE PACKAGED ROOF TOP UNITS 2.5 HEAT EXCHANGERS AND BURNERS t .1 Gas fired, multiple flue passes, with primary heating surface of aluminized steel; secondary , heating surface, aluminized steel tubes. .2 Gas burner: factory mounted, wired and fire tested complete with operating and safety controls. .1 Induced draft continuous port steel multi-slotted non-clogging cast iron inshot type. .2 Spark ignited pilot with pilot flame safety shut-off. ' 2.6 REFRIGERATION .1 Conform to CSA B52 and ANSI/UL 465 requirements. ' .2 Compressor/condensing section .1 Hermetic compressors, vibration isolated with flexible suction and discharge connections, ' oil sight glass, oil pressure switch, crankcase heater, and automatic pump down system with control to liquid line solenoid valve. .2 Fans: propeller type with single piece spun venturi outlets and zinc plated guards. Motors shall be sequenced for head pressure control. .3 Electrical system shall have operating controls, oil and refrigerant pressure protection, motor overload protection, weatherproof electrical wiring with weatherproof, rain tight , disconnect. .4 Include refrigerant piping with sight glass, filter and valves. .5 Condenser: staggered copper tube aluminum fin coil assembly with sub-cooling rows to provide sub-cooling. , .6 Capacity reduction: Provide fan control for head control for low ambient operation down to 0°C ambient temperature. .3 Evaporator , .1 Rated to ARI 210/240. ' .2 Thermostatic expansion valve, with adjustable super heat and external equalizer. .3 Coil: NPS 'hod staggered seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins and insulated condensation pan. .4 Cooling coil condensate drain pans: designed to avoid any standing water, to be easily ' cleaned or removable for cleaning. Drain connection to have deep seal trap. 2.7 CONTROLS , .1 In addition to combustion safety controls, provide CO, control of ventilation air for HVAC-2. .2 Single Zone Heat-Cool Unit , .1 Low voltage, adjustable room thermostat controls burner operation, heater stages in sequence with delay between stages, compressor and supply fan shall maintain room temperature setting. r .2 Thermostat: include system selector switch heat-cool-off-auto and fan control switch (on-auto). .3 Automatic changeover thermostat: with 2 stage heating and 2 stage cooling. Electronic programmable with battery back up. Honeywell T7300 with remote sensors. OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 61 ' ' Section 15732 January 12, 1998 PACKAGED ROOF TOP UNITS OLDER ADULTS CENTRE .3 Unoccupied mode: unit cycles as unit heater with 100% recirculation on winter or summer cycles. ' .4 Unoccupied set-back: 65°F; unoccupied set-up 78°F. 2.8 REMOTE PANEL ' .1 Provide remote readout panel for each unit containing: .1 Signal lights indicating system status, dirty filters. .2 System heat-coot-auto-off switch. .3 Fan on-off switch. 2.9 CAPACITY .1 As indicated on drawing schedule: 2.10 Acceptable material: Trane, Lennox, Carrier, York. ' 3 PRODUCTS (HVAC-1) 3.1 HVAC-1 - Custom outdoor roof mounted gas heating/electric cooling unit complete with enthalpy heat recovery section. Occupied outdoor air maximum volume of 4,500 cfm and occupied exhaust air maximum volume of 3500 cfm and recirculation volume of 2,500 cfm (i.e. total supply air volume of 7,000 cfm). Outdoor air volume to be controlled by a modulating CO2 controller to keep return air CO2 concentration below 800 PPM. Unoccupied outdoor air/exhaust air volume zero cfm and recirculation volume 7,000 cfm. Supply air external static pressure 1.0" W.C. Return/exhaust air external pressure .75" W.C. Estimated sensible cooling load - 172,000 BTUH* Estimated latent cooling load - 75,000 BTUH* Estimated heating load - 70,000 BTUH* *The above figures DO NOT include the outdoor ventilation loads or heat recovery. Provide corrugated style, aluminum substrate with dessicant coating, enthalpy type rotary energy recovery wheel complete with drive and motor controls, sized for 4500 cfm of outdoor/exhaust air during occupied hours. Media to be bacteriostatic treated, maximum cross contamination: .2% of supply air volume and .04% of exhaust volume. Control strategy: During occupied hours the HVAC unit shall provide a variable outdoor air volume and a variable exhaust air volume of indoor air and recirculation of indoor air controlled by CO2 1 sensor. The outdoor air and exhaust air shall pass through the energy recovery wheel and the mixed supply air to the space be heated or cooled as the space thermostat demands. During the winter months the supply air temperature shall not drop below 68 F DB during the occupied hours (unless the room thermostat calls for cooling). During the summer cooling months the supply air temperature shall not drop below 60 F. During unoccupied hours the outdoor/exhaust air volumes will be set to zero cfm, the heat ' recovery wheel shut off and 100% of the 6000 cfm shall be recirculated on an intermittent basis. The HVAC unit shall provide heating of cooling on a demand only basis from the space thermostat. Page 62 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 January 12, 1998 Section 15732 OLDER ADULTS CENTRE PACKAGED ROOF TOP UNITS General construction details: Complete unit to be completely factory assembled and tested and shipped to the site in one piece with lifting lugs for hoisting. Construct on minimum 6 inch structural galvanized steel base with cross members to carry the loads. Provide factory fabricated steel roof curb and heavy duty spring vibration isooation curb cap. Unit casing to be 18 gauge satin coat galvanized steel with enamel paint finish. Walls, roof and floor to be of interlocking construction with the roof joints broken out for rigidity. All joints to be caulked and water ' proofed with suitable sealant. Provide hinged, gasketed access doors to fans, motors,filters, burner, heat recovery wheel , and control panel. Complete unit shall be insulated with 1.5 inch thick 3 lb density foil faced fibreglass thermal insulation. The burner section and the complete floor areas shall be covered with a galvanized steel interior liner. The supply and return/exhaust fans shall be forward curved centrifugal design with AMCA , ratings. The fan and motor assemblies shall be mounted on 95% efficient, spring type vibration isolated base and flexible glass fabric connections provided at the fan outlet connections. Provide heavy duty grease lubricated block type roller bearings with minimum 100,000 hours life. The two position outdoor air and exhaust air dampers shall be low leakage thermally broken , type IT.A. Morrison series 90001 parallel blade type with two position spring to close Belimo actuators. Provide 2" thick 30/30 throwaway type filters for the heat recovery exhaust section and the outdoor air intake supply. Provide a differential pressure switch for each filter bank wired back to the thermostat indicator light. Heating section to consist of stainless steel primary and secondary heat exchangers with a fully modulating 10:1 ratio natural gas burner and Honeywell burner controls. ' Cooling section to consist of DX coils, R22 refrigerant, scroll compressors for two stage operation, hot gas bypass and air cooled condenser section designed to 95 F ambient air ' temperature in the summer and head pressure controls for 0 F ambient in the winter. Controls: , Provide control panel complete with disconnect switch, starters, overloads, control transformer, firestat, freezestat, relays, burner controls, etc to meet the control requirements. Provide a T7300 thermostat and two T7047C1025 and one T7047G1000 remote sensors. Provide six sets of shop drawings for review as stipulated. Installation and commissioning: Provide complete control drawings and technical assistance to the control contractor during installation and necessary sheaves for the final air balancing. Supply one complete set of spare filters for each filter bank and spare drive belts for the fans. 4 EXECUTION ' 4.1 INSTALLATION .1 Install as per manufacturers' instructions on roof curbs and vibration isolation bases provided by manufacturer. .2 Manufacturer to certify installation, and provide start-up and commissioning of unit. Provide , three copies of the start-up report to the consultant. ******* END ******* 1 OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 63 Section 15751 January 12, 1998 HUMIDIFIERS OLDER ADULTS CENTRE 15751 HUMIDIFIERS 1 GENERAL , 1.1 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA: .1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01005 -General Requirements. .2 Indicate following: capacity, electrical requirements, controls, dimensions and weight, access requirements, construction. .3 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01005 - General Requirements. 1.2 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS: .1 Furnish list of individual manufacturer's recommended spare parts for equipment, addresses of r suppliers, list of specialized tools necessary for adjusting, repairing or replacing, for inclusion into operating manual. 1.3 MANUFACTURED ITEMS: ' .1 Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by him from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards in force. 2 PRODUCT 2.1 PACKAGED ELECTRIC ELEMENT/ELECTRODE STEAM GENERATING TYPE: (SEE DRAWING , SCHEDULE) .1 CSA certified and ULC listed. ' .2 All components housed in factory fabricated cabinet with factory enameled finish and electrically interlocked door. .3 Stainless steel cleanable steam cylinder or tank complete with factory installed incoloy alloy ' electrodes to suit water condition. .4 Controls: , .1 Solid state panel. .2 Solenoid valve on water and drain lines. ' .3 Wall humidistat range, 30-45% with modulating control. .4 Airflow proving switch. (Pressure type). .5 Adjustable flush cycle timer. .6 High limit humidistat (duct mounted). .5 Duct distribution header (s) complete with condensate drain and flexible supply hose. .6 Acceptable material: DriSteem (Vapormist), Neptronic (SK300). Page 64 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 ' January 12, 1998 Section 15751 OLDER ADULTS CENTRE HUMIDIFIERS ' 2.2 DESIGN CONDITIONS: Indoor R.H. 35% at 74°F. Minimum duct temp. 55°F. HVAC-2, 4 & 5 economiser control. HVAC-1 fixed fresh air volume of 4500 CFM. ' Maximum absorption distance 12". 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: .1 Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions. .2 Humidifier to be new and clean when project is accepted. .3 Install humidistat as indicated. ' .4 Water service overflow drain: to manufacturers' recommendation. .5 Install in accessible location. .6 Install access doors or panels in adjacent ducting. .7 When installing in ducting, provide waterproof duct up and downstream in accordance with Section 15811 - Ductwork- Low Pressure- Metallic to 500 Pa. .8 Install drain connection at low point in duct and pipe to nearest funnel drain. END i ' OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 65 Section 15762 January 12, 1998 CONVECTORS & FINNED TUBE RADIATION OLDER ADULTS CENTRE 15762 CONVECTORS & FINNED TUBE RADIATION , 1 GENERAL 1.1 SHOP DRAWINGS: .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01005 - General Requirements. , .2 Indicate: .1 Equipment, capacity, piping, and connections. .2 Dimensions, internal and external construction details, recommended method of installation with proposed structural steel support, sizes and location of mounting bolt holes. ' .3 Special Enclosures. 1.2 MAINTENANCE DATA: , .1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01005 - General Requirements. 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DAMPERS: ' .1 Factory built, internal damper, at enclosure air outlet grille for each convection type heating unit not thermostatically controlled. Refer to schedules on drawings. 2.2 CAPACITY: .1 As indicated, based on 180°F average water temperature, 20°F temperature drop and 65°F E.A.T. 2.3 FINNED TUBE RADIATION: ' .1 Heating Elements: Single row, NPS 3/4 seamless copper tubing, 1.2 mm minimum wall thickness, mechanically expanded into flanged collars of evenly spaced aluminum fins, 100 x ' 100 mm nominal, 50 fins per foot suitable for sweat fittings. .2 Element Hangers: ball bearings plastic lined cradle type providing unrestricted longitudinal ' movement on enclosure brackets. Space brackets 900 mm centres maximum. .3 Standard Enclosures: 1.6 mm thick steel complete with die formed end caps having no knock-outs. Provide full length channel and sealer strip at top of wall edge. Joints and filler , pieces to be flush with cabinet. Support rigidly top and bottom, on wall mounted brackets. Joints and filler pieces to be clear of grilles located to provide easy access to valves and vents. Provide access doors for valves, vents and traps. Finish cabinet with factory applied baked primer coat. , .4 Enclosures: 16" high, Type WF-1, 60" long. .5 Dimensions for enclosures: measure site conditions. Do not scale from drawing. , .6 Provide for noiseless expansion of all components. .7 Acceptable material: Sterling; Engineered Air; Trane. i Page 66 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 January 12, 1998 Section 15762 OLDER ADULTS CENTRE CONVECTORS & FINNED TUBE RADIATION ' 3 EXECUTION ' 3.1 INSTALLATION: .1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. ' .2 Install in accordance with piping layout and reviewed shop drawings. .3 Provide for piping movement during normal operation. .4 Maintain sufficient clearance to permit performance of service maintenance. .5 Check final location with Consultant if different from that indicated prior to installation. Should deviations beyond allowable clearances arise, request and follow Consultant's directive. .6 Valves: .1 Install valves with stems upright or horizontal unless approved otherwise. .2 Install isolating ball valves on inlet and balancing valves on outlet of each unit. .7 Venting: ' .1 Install automatic air vent with shut-off cock on continuous finned tube radiation. .8 Clean finned tubes and comb straight. .9 Install flexible expansion compensators as indicated. wr««+r• END «* • ,► OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 67 Section 15785 January 12, 1998 MAKE-UP AIR UNITS OLDER ADULTS CENTRE 15785 MAKE-UP AIR UNITS , 1 GENERA 1.1 REFERENCES ' .1 ARI 430-85, Standard for Central Station Air Handling Units. ' .2 CGSB 1-GP-181M-77, Coating, Zinc-Rich, Organic Ready Mixed. .3 CGA 3.2-1976, Industrial and Commercial Gas-Fired Package Furnaces. .4 CAN/CGA-8149.1 M86, Natural Gas Installation Code. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA .1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01005 - Submittals. ' .2 Indicate following:fan fan curves showing point of operation motor drive bearings filters dampers heat exchanger roof curb plus all performance data. 1.3 MAINTENANCE DATA .1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01005 - ' Operation and Maintenance Manual. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS ' .1 Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01005 - Maintenance Materials, Special Tools and Spare Parts. .2 Provide one spare set of filters and belts. .3 Furnish list of individual manufacturer's recommended spare parts for equipment such as , bearings and seals, and addresses of suppliers, together with list of specialized tools necessary for adjusting, repairing or replacing, for placement into operating manual. 1.5 MANUFACTURED ITEMS , .1 Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by him from independent testing agency signifying adherence ' to codes and standards in force. .2 Provide confirmation of testing. , 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL ' .1 Factory assembled components to form unit supplying air at designed conditions, as indicated. .2 Certify ratings: to ARI 430. Unit shall bear ARI seal. .3 Horizontal type roof mounted, as indicated, having air tight modular components, consisting of ' casing, fan section with motor and drive, filter section, dampers, heat exchanger, roof curb inlet hood. Page 68 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 ' ' January 12, 1998 Section 15785 OLDER ADULTS CENTRE MAKE-UP AIR UNITS ' .4 Acceptable material: Trane Canada Inc.; Engineered Air. 2.2 CASINGS .1 Galvanized steel reinforced and braced for rigidity. Removable panels shall provide access for maintenance of internal parts. Steel parts, where not galvanized, to be painted over with ' corrosion resistant paint to CGSB 1-GP-181 M. Finish entire units, inside and out, with rust resistant enamel. ' 2.3 ACOUSTIC LINER .1 Insulate internal surface of panels with 25 mm neoprene coated rigid duct liner of 72 kg/m3 ' density. Apply with 100% coverage of adhesive with clip pins. Cover leading and trailing edges with sheet metal nosing and at all edges around access doors and panels complete with 15 mm overlap. ' 2.4 FANS .1 Centrifugal fans with forward curved wheels, selected to operate in stable part of performance curve at all times and heavy duty 100,000 h service self aligning split pillow ' block bearings. Provide internally mounted motor complete with adjustable V-belt drive and guard. Motor: ' .2 Maximum sound power levels, as indicated. 2.5 VIBRATION ISOLATION ' .1 Flexible connections at inlet and outlet of fan section: to Section 15820- Duct Accessories. .2 Vibration isolators on fan section. ' 2.6 FILTER BOX ' .1 Material to match casing. For V type filter arrangement. Provide access to filter through hinged door with suitable hardware. ' .2 Provide blank-off plates and gaskets to prevent air bypass. .3 Filters: to Section 15861 - Filters and Filter Gauges. ' 2.7 DAMPERS .1 Provide two position, spring to close, intake damper and actuator to Section 15822 -Dampers Operating. ' 2.8 CAPACITY .1 Output: 80,000 BTUH. .2 1000 CFM standard outdoor air. ' .3 External static pressure: .6 W.C. .4 Input: 100,000 BTUH. ' OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 69 Section 15785 January 12, 1998 ' MAKE-UP AIR UNITS OLDER ADULTS CENTRE .5 Electrical characteristics: 120/1/60. , 2.9 HEAT EXCHANGER AND BURNERS .1 Stainless steel , 2.10 COMBUSTION CHAMBER , .1 To manufacturers standard. 2.11 CONTROLS ' .1 Gas firing: .1 Operating controls: , .1 Duct mount thermostat sensor control with remote temperature selector. .2 Intermittent electronic pilot ignition. .3 Manual main shut-off valve, automatic safety pilot, pilot and gas bleed filtration, , automatic electric valve and gas pressure regulator. .4 Continuous fan operating control with exhaust fan interlock. .5 Gravity venter. .2 Safety controls: , .1 Electronic combustion control relay with flame recetification sensor to detect and supervise flame by shutting off fuel upon flame failure or safety interlock signal within seconds and in sequence prepurge-pilot ignition and supervision-main valve ' opening-pilot cut-off-burner operation. .3 Burner assembly shall bear CSA and ULC seals attesting that it meets safety codes of authorities having jurisdiction. ' .2 System Operation: .1 Provide discharge duct mount heating sensor with remote temperature selector. ' .2 Provide remote mount console with indicating lights for fan on; heat on; dirty filter; temperature selector. .3 Make-up-air damper actuator to be activated by supply fan and spring close with fan off. ' .4 Control circuit to include a firestat and freezestat, motor starter, overload protection and disconnect switch, exhaust interlock. 3 EXECUTION ' 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Install units in accordance with manufacturers instructions and as indicated. , 3.2 FANS ' .1 Install fan sheaves required for final air balance. .2 Install flexible connections at fan inlet and fan outlets. .3 Install vibration isolators on fan and motor assembly. , 3.3 START-UP .1 Manufacturer to certify installation and provide start-up and commissioning of equipment. , ««.. End « *.. Page 70 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 ' January 12, 1998 Section 15807 ' OLDER ADULTS CENTRE PACKAGED KITCHEN EXHAUST HOODS 15807 PACKAGED KITCHEN EXHAUST HOODS 1 GENER01 1.1 REFERENCES .1 ANSI/NFPA 96-1991, Vapor Removal from Cooking Equipment. , 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA .1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01005 - Submittals. ' 1.3 MAINTENANCE DATA .1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01005 - ' Submittals. 1.4 CERTIFICATION OF RATINGS , .1 Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by him from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and , standards. 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.1 GREASE FILTER TYPE .1 To ANSI/NFPA 96. ' .2 ULC labelled. .3 Configuration: Combination exhaust/make-up-air hood with collar connections and face mounted supply grilles. Overall size: 36" x 96". .4 Materials: ' .1 Welded type 304 stainless steel. .2 Lights: incandescent. .3 Washable filters: Section 15861. ' .4 Drain connectors. .5 Supply air facia panels. .6 18 gauge st. stl. flat wall covering. .5 Performance: 2400 CFM exhaust; 1000 CFM make-up-air , .7 Provide complete fire detection and suppression system. .6 Acceptable material: Ventmaster; Gaylord. ' 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION ' .1 Install hoods in accordance with manufacturers instructions. .2 Operation sequences: Provide start switch for exhaust fan and interlock to start make-up-air , unit. ..... End «.... OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 71 ' Section 15811 January 12, 1998 , LOW PRESSURE METALLIC DUCTWORK OLDER ADULTS CENTRE 15811 LOW PRESSURE METALLIC DUCTWORK ' 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS: .1 SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, 1985. ' .2 SMACNA HVAC Duct Leakage Test Manual, 1985. .3 ASTM A480/A480M-90, Specification for General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. , .4 ASTM A525M-87, Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process. (Metric). .5 ASTM A621/A621 M-820 988►, Specification for Steel Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled, Drawing Quality. ' .6 ANSI/NFPA 90A-1989, Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. .7 ANSI/NFPA 90B-1989, Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. .8 ANSI/NFPA 96-1991, Vapour Removal from Cooking Equipment. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA: t .1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01005 - General , Requirements .2 Indicate following: ' .1 Sealants. .2 Tape. .3 Proprietary Joints. ' 1.3 CERTIFICATION OF RATINGS: .1 Catalogue or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer ' or independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards. 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.1 CLASSIFICATION: .1 Ductwork classification as follows: ' MAXIMUM SMACNA ' PRESSURE SEAL ("w.c./Pa) (Class) " 2.2 SEAL CLASSIFICATION: .1 Class C: Transverse joints and connections made air tight with sealant& tape. Longitudinal ' seams unsealed. 2.3 SEALANT: , .1 Sealant: oil resistant, polymer type flame resistant duct sealant. Temperature range of-22°F 1-30°C) to +200"F (+93°C). Page 72 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 , January 12, 1998 Section 15811 OLDER ADULTS CENTRE LOW PRESSURE METALLIC DUCTWORK ' .1 Acceptable material: Duro Dyne S-2; Foster 30-02 2.4 TAPE: .1 Tape: polyvinyl treated, open weave fibreglass tape, 50 mm wide. .1 Acceptable material: Duro Dyne FT-2 2.5 DUCT LEAKAGE: .1 In accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Leakage Test Manual, 1985. 2.6 FITTINGS: .1 Fabrication: to SMACNA. .2 Radiused elbows: ' .1 Rectangular: standard radius or short radius with single thickness turning vanes. Centreline radius: 1.5 times width of duct. .2 round: smooth radius 5 piece. Centreline radius: 1.5 times diameter. .3 Mitred elbows, rectangular: .1 To 16" (400) mm: with single thickness vanes. .2 Over 16" (400) mm: with double thickness vanes. .4 Branches: ' .1 Rectangular main and branch: with 450 entry on branch. .2 Round main and branch: enter main duct at 450 with conical connection. .3 Provide volume control damper in branch duct near connection to main duct. .4 Main duct branches: with splitter damper. ' .5 Transitions: .1 Diverging: 201 maximum included angle. .2 Converging: 301 maximum included angle. ' .6 Offsets: short radiused elbows as indicated. .7 Obstruction deflectors: maintain full cross-sectional area. Maximum included angles as for transitions. ' 2.7 FIRESTOPPING: .1 Retaining angles all around duct, on both sides of fire separation. ' .2 Firestopping material and installation must not distort duct. 2.8 GALVANIZED STEEL: ' .1 Lock forming quality: to ASTM A525M-86, Z90 zinc coating. .2 Thickness, fabrication, and reinforcement: to ASHRAE and SMACNA. .3 Joints: to ASHRAE and SMACNA or proprietary manufactured duct joint. Proprietary manufactured flanged duct joint shall be considered to be a class A seal. .1 Acceptable material (proprietary joint systems): Ductmate Canada Ltd.; Exanno Nexus. 2.9 KITCHEN EXHAUST SYSTEMS: .1 Construct in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 96. ' .2 Material: Black steel sheet. .3 Thickness: 16 gauge minimum. .4 Fabrication: To NFPA96. ' .5 Reinforcement: To NFPA96. .6 Drainage: To NFPA96. OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 73 Section 15811 January 12, 1998 , LOW PRESSURE METALLIC DUCTWORK OLDER ADULTS CENTRE .7 Grease filters: to Section 15861. ' 2.10 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: .1 Hanger Configuration: to ASHRAE and SMACNA. .2 Hangers: black steel angle with black steel rods to following table: Duct Size Angle Size Rod Size (in) (mm) (in) (mm) (in) (mm) , up to 30 u to 750 1 x1 x'I 25x25x3 % 6 30 to 40 751 to 1050 1%x1%x'/ 40x4Ox3 '/. 6 ' 41 to 59 1051 to 1500 1 Y2X1 Y2X'!, 40x4Ox3 3/2 10 60 to 82 1501 to 2100 2x2x'/ 50x5Ox3 3/ 10 ' 83 to 94 2101 to 2400 2x2x3/ 50x5Ox5 3/ 10 95 and over 2401 and over 2x2x'/a 50x5Ox6 3/ ::1:0 ' .3 Upper Hanger Attachments: .1 For Concrete: manufactured concrete inserts. .1 Acceptable material: Myatt fig. 485 ' .2 For Steel Joist: manufactured joist clamp or steel plate washer. .1 Acceptable material: Grinnell Fig 61 or 86 for joist clamps, Grinnell Fig 60 for plate , washer. .3 For Steel Beams: manufactured beam clamps: ' .1 Acceptable material: Grinnell Fig 60 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL: ' .1 Do work in accordance with ASHRAE CSA B228.1 and SMACNA. .2 Do not break continuity of insulation vapour barrier with hangers or rods. ' .3 Support risers in accordance with ASHRAE and SMACNA. .4 Install breakaway joints in ductwork on each side of fire separation. .5 Install proprietary manufactured flanged duct joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. ' .6 Manufacture duct in lengths to accommodate installation of acoustic duct lining. 3.2 HANGERS: ' .1 Angle Hangers: complete with locking nuts and washers. .2 Hanger Spacing: As follows: ' Page 74 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 , January 12, 1998 Section 15811 OLDER ADULTS CENTRE LOW PRESSURE METALLIC DUCTWORK Duct Size Spa in ' (in) (mm) (ft) (mm) to 60" to 1500 10 3000 over 60" 1501 and over 8 2500 ' 3.3 WATERTIGHT DUCT: .1 Provide Watertight Duct For: ' .1 Fresh air intakes. .2 Minimum 5 ft from duct mounted humidifier manifold in all directions. ' .3 As indicated. .2 Form bottom of horizontal duct without longitudinal seams. Solder or weld joints of bottom and side sheets. Seal all other joints with duct sealer. ' .3 Slope horizontal branch ductwork down towards fume hoods served. Slope header ducts down towards risers. ' .4 Fit base of rise with 6" deep drain sump and NPS 1 drain connected, with deep seal trap and discharging to open funnel drain. ' 3.4 KITCHEN EXHAUST SYSTEMS: .1 Install to ANSI/NFPA 96 and as indicated. ' 3.5 SEALING AND TAPING: ' .1 Apply sealant to outside of joint to manufacturer's recommendations. .2 Bed tape in sealant and recoat with minimum of 1 coat of sealant to manufacturer's recommendations. END OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 75 Section 15813 January 12, 1998 ' FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK OLDER ADULTS CENTRE 15813 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK 1 GENER01 ' 1.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS: .1 CAN/ULC S110-M8, Fire Tests for Air Ducts. ' .2 UL 181-1981, Factory Made Air Ducts and Connectors. .3 ANSI/NFPA 90A-1989, Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. .4 ANSI/NFPA 90B-1989, Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. ' .5 SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards- Metal and Flexible, 1985. 1.2 PRODUCT DATA: .1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 01005 -General Requirements. , .2 Indicate the following: , .1 Thermal properties. .2 Friction loss. .3 Acoustical loss. ' .4 Leakage. .5 Fire rating. 1.3 CERTIFICATION OF RATINGS: ' .1 Catalogue or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer , or independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards. 1.4 SAMPLES: .1 Submit samples with product data of each different type of flexible duct being used in , accordance with Section 01005 - General Requirements. 2 PRODUCTS , 2.1 GENERAL: .1 Factory fabricated to CAN/ULC S110. .2 Pressure drop coefficients listed below are based on relative sheet metal duct pressure drop coefficient of 1.00. ' .3 Flame spread rating not to exceed 25. Smoke developed rating not to exceed 50. 2.2 METALLIC ACOUSTIC INSULATED- MEDIUM PRESSURE: .1 Type 5: Spiral wound, flexible perforated aluminum with factory applied 37 mm thick flexible ' glass fibre thermal insulation and sleeved by mylar laminate Type M vapour barrier. .2 Performance: , .1 Factory tested to 2.5 kPa without leakage. .2 Maximum relative pressure drop coefficient: 3. ' .3 Acoustical performance: Minimum attenuation (dB/m) to following table: Page 76 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 , January 12, 1998 Section 15813 OLDER ADULTS CENTRE FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK Duct Frequency (Hz) ' Diameter 125 250 500 1000 2000 100 mm 0.6 3 12 27 0 ' 150 mm 1.2 3 12 22 27 200 mm 2.0 5 12 19 20 300 mm 2.4 5 12 15. 15 3 Acceptable material: Flexmaster T/L-A: Type M 3 EXECUTION ' 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION: .1 Install where indicated and in accordance with: SMACNA. ' .2 Maximum length of flexible duct: 2 m. w«r+►r►*« END ' OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 77 Section 15820 January 12, 1998 DUCT ACCESSORIES OLDER ADULTS CENTRE 15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES ' 1 GENERAL 1.1 PRODUCT DATA: , .1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 01005 - General Requirements. ' .2 Indicate the following: .1 Flexible connections. .2 Sealants and tapes. .3 Duct access doors. .4 Turning vanes. ' .5 Instrument test ports. 1.2 CERTIFICATION OF RATINGS: ' .1 Catalogue or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards. 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS: ' .1 Manufacture in accordance with CSA 13228.1. .2 Frame: galvanized sheet metal frame .66 mm thick with fabric clenched by means of double , locked seams. .3 Material: ' .1 Fire resistant, self extinguishing, neoprene coated glass fabric, temperature rated at -40°C to +90°C, density of 1.3 kg/M2. 2.2 ACCESS DOORS IN DUCTS: .1 Non-insulated ducts: sandwich construction of same material as duct, one sheet metal thickness heavier, minimum 0.6 mm thick complete with sheet metal angle frame. .2 Insulated ducts: sandwich construction of same material as duct, one sheet metal thickness heavier, minimum 0.6 mm thick complete with sheet metal angle frame and 25 mm thick rigid , glass fibre insulation. .3 Gaskets: neoprene or foam rubber. .4 Hardware: ' .1 Up to 300 x 300 mm: 2 sash locks complete with safety chain. .2 301 to 450 mm: 4 sash locks complete with safety chain. ' .3 451 to 1000 mm: piano hinge and minimum 2 sash locks. 2.3 TURNING VANES: ' .1 Factory or shop fabricated single thickness and double thickness without trailing edge, to recommendations of SMACNA and as indicated. ' Page 78 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 , January 12, 1998 Section 15820 OLDER ADULTS CENTRE DUCT ACCESSORIES ' 2.4 INSTRUMENT TEST PORTS: ' .1 Zamac alloy casting complete with screw-in alloy plug. .2 19 mm (0.75") inside diameter opening. .3 Neoprene mounting gasket. .4 Acceptable material: Duro Dyne IP-4 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: .1 Flexible Connections: ' .1 Install in Following Locations: ' .1 Inlets and outlets to supply air units and fans. .2 Inlets and outlets of exhaust and return air fans. .3 As indicated. .2 Length of connection: 100 mm. .3 Maximum distance between metal parts when system in operation: 75 mm. Minimum distance 50 mm. .4 Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA. .5 When Fan is Running: ' .1 Ducting on each side of flexible connection to be in alignment. .2 Ensure slack material in flexible connection. .2 Access Doors and Viewing Panels: .1 Size: ' .1 600 x 600 mm for person size entry. .2 450 x 450 mm for servicing entry. .3 300 x 300 mm for viewing. ' .2 Location: .1 At fire and smoke dampers. .2 At control dampers. .3 At devices requiring maintenance. .4 At locations required by code. ' .5 At reheat coils. .6 Elsewhere as indicated. .3 Instrument Test Ports: ' .1 General: ' .1 Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. .2 Locate to permit easy manipulation of instruments. ' .3 install insulation port extensions as required. ' OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 79 Section 15820 January 12, 1998 1 DUCT ACCESSORIES OLDER ADULTS CENTRE .4 When located on water tight ducts, apply teflon tape to male end of plug. ' .2 Locations: .1 For Traverse Readings: 1 .1 At ducted inlets to roof and wall exhausters. ' .2 At inlets and outlets of other fan systems. .3 At main and sub-main ducts. .4 And as indicated. .2 For Temperature Readings: 1 .1 At outside air intakes. .2 In mixed air applications in locations as approved by Consultant. .3 At inlet and outlet of coils. .4 Downstream of junctions of two converging air streams of different 1 temperatures. .5 And as indicated. .4 Turning Vanes: ' .1 Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA and as indicated. END •«ar�►+rM« 1 i 1 1 1 1 Page 80 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 ' January 12, 1998 Section 15821 , OLDER ADULTS CENTRE BALANCING DAMPERS 15821 BALANCING DAMPERS , 1 GENERA 1.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS: ' .1 SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, 1985. ' 1.2 PRODUCT DATA: .1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 01005 -General Requirements. , 2 PRODUCTS , 2.1 GENERAL .1 Manufacture to SMACNA standards. ' 2.2 SPLITTER DAMPERS .1 Of the same material as duct but one sheet metal thickness heavier, with appropriate stiffening. .2 Single thickness construction. .3 Control rod with locking device and position indicator. ' .4 Rod configuration to prevent end from entering duct. .5 Pivot: piano hinge. .6 Folded leading edge. ' 2.3 SINGLE BLADE DAMPERS .1 Of same material as duct, but one sheet metal thickness heavier. V-groove stiffened. ' .2 Size and configuration to recommendations of SMACNA. .3 Locking quadrant with shaft extension to accommodate insulation thickness. .4 Inside and outside nylon end bearings. .5 Channel frame of same material as adjacent duct, complete with angle stop. 2.4 MULTI-BLADED DAMPERS .1 Factory manufactured of material compatible with duct. .2 Opposed blade: configuration, metal thickness and construction to recommendations of ' SMACNA. .3 Maximum blade height: 100 mm. .4 Bearings: self-lubricating nylon. .5 Linkage: shaft extension with locking quadrant. ' .6 Channel frame of same material as adjacent duct, complete with angle stop. OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 81 ' ' Section 15821 January 12, 1998 BALANCING DAMPERS OLDER ADULTS CENTRE 3 EXECUTION ' 3.1 INSTALLATION: .1 Installation where indicated. .2 Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. ' .3 For supply, return and exhaust systems, locate volume dampers in each branch duct. .4 Runouts to registers and diffusers: install single blade damper located as close as possible to main ducts. ' .5 All dampers to be vibration free. END ""•«««. r Page 82 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 January 12, 1998 Section 15822 , OLDER ADULTS CENTRE DAMPERS -OPERATING 15822 DAMPERS -OPERATING 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL ' .1 This section applies to operating dampers not specified in Section 15916 - Heating and Cooling Controls- Electric. 1.2 REFERENCES , .1 ASTM A525M-90, Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process. 1.3 PRODUCT DATA ' .1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 01005 - General Requirements. ' 1.4 MAINTENANCE DATA .1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01005 -General Requirements. 1.5 CERTIFICATION OF RATINGS ' .1 Catalogue or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by him from independent testing agency. 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MULTI-LEAF DAMPERS (D1) ' .1 Parallel blade type as indicated. .2 Extruded aluminum, interlocking blades, complete with extruded vinyl seals, spring stainless , steel side seals, extruded aluminum frame. .3 Pressure fit self-lubricated nylon bearings. .4 Linkage: plated steel tie rods, brass pivots and plated steel brackets, complete with plated steel control rod. .5 Operator: to Section 15916. .6 Performance: ' .1 Leakage: in closed position to be less than 2% of rated air flow at 1" W.C.differential across damper. .2 Pressure drop: at full open position to be less than .2" W.C. differential across damper at maximum air flow of 250 CFM. .7 Insulated aluminum dampers: .1 Frames: insulated with extruded polystyrene foam with R factor of 5.0. .2 Blades: constructed from aluminum extrusions with internal hollows insulated with polyurethane or polystyrene foam, R factor of 5.0. .8 Acceptable material: T.A. Morrison"Tamco". i OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 83 ' Section 15822 January 12, 1998 DAMPERS -OPERATING OLDER ADULTS CENTRE ' 3 EXECUTION ' 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Install where indicated. ' .2 Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. +►«.*�+►,► END r«*wry Page 84 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 January 12, 1998 Section 15823 OLDER ADULTS CENTRE DAMPERS - FIRE& SMOKE 15823 DAMPERS - FIRE & SMOKE ' 1 GENERA 1.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS ' .1 ANSI/NFPA 90A-1989, Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. , .2 CAN4-S112-M82(R1987j, Fire Test of Fire Damper Assemblies. .3 CAN4-S112.2-M84, Fire Test of Ceiling Firestop Flap Assemblies. .4 ULC-S505-1974, Fusible Links for Fire Protection Service. 1.2 PRODUCT DATA .1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 01005 - General Requirements , .2 Indicate the following: .1 Fire dampers .2 Smoke dampers. .3 Fire stop flaps. .4 Operators. .5 Fusible links. ' 1.3 MAINTENANCE DATA .1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01005 -General ' Requirements. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS .1 Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01005 - General Requirements. .2 Provide following: ' .1 6 fusible links of each type. 1.5 CERTIFICATION OF RATINGS ' .1 Catalogue or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer ' or those ordered by him from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards. 2 PRODUCTS , 2.1 FIRE DAMPERS .1 Fire dampers: arrangement Type B , listed and bear label of ULC, meet requirements of provincial fire authority and authorities having jurisdiction. Fire damper assemblies to be fire tested in accordance with CAN4-S112. .2 Mild steel, factory fabricated for fire rating requirement to maintain integrity of fire wall and/or ' fire separation. .3 Top hinged: round or square; multi-blade hinged or interlocking type; sized to maintain full duct cross section as indicated. ' .4 Fusible link actuated, weighted to close and lock in closed position when released. .5 40 x 40 x 3 mm retaining angle iron frame, on full perimeter of fire damper, on both sides of fire separation being pierced. ' OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 85 Section 15823 January 12, 1998 DAMPERS - FIRE & SMOKE OLDER ADULTS CENTRE ' .6 Horizontal types with pull-tab release for bottom access. .7 Acceptable material: Nailor Model 0120. 2.2 FIRE STOP FLAPS .1 To be ULC listed and labelled and fire tested in accordance with CAN4-S112.2. ' .2 Construct of minimum 1.5 mm thick sheet steel with 1.6 mm thick non-asbestos ULC listed insulation and corrosion-resistant pins and hinges. .3 Flaps to be held open with fusible link conforming to ULC-S505 and close at 74 °C or as indicated. 3 EXECUTION ' 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Install in accordance with NFPA 90A and in accordance with conditions of ULC listing. .2 Maintain integrity of fire separation. .3 After completion and prior to concealment obtain approvals of complete installation from authority having jurisdiction. .4 Install access door adjacent to each damper. See Section 15820- Duct Accessories. .5 Use fire dampers with pull-tab release for horizontal mount installations where access only from below. .6 Coordinate with installer of fire stopping. ««««««« END ««««««« ' Page 86 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 January 12, 1998 Section 15831 i OLDER ADULTS CENTRE COMMERCIAL FANS 15831 COMMERCIAL FANS t 1 GENERA 1.1 REFERENCES ' .1 AMCA 99-1986, Standards Handbook. ' .2 ANSI/AMCA 210-1985, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating. .3 AMCA 300-1985 Revised 1987, Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans. .4 AMCA 301-1990, Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data. .5 ANSI/ASHRAE 51-1985, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating. ' .6 CGSB 1-GP-181 M-77, Coating, Zinc Rich, Organic, Ready Mixed. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA .1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01005 - General Requirements. .2 Provide fan curves and sound rating data, showing point of operation, bhp, efficiency. .3 Indicate the following: motors, pulleys, bearings, shafts, belts, etc. 1.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA ' .1 Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01005 General Requirements. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS .1 Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01005 - Maintenance Materials, , Special Tools and Spare Parts. .1 Spare parts to include: .1 Matched sets of belts. .2 Furnish list of individual manufacturer's recommended spare parts for equipment such as , bearings and seals, and addresses of suppliers, together with list of specialized tools necessary for adjusting, repairing or replacing, for placement into operating manual. , 1.5 MANUFACTURED ITEMS .1 Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer ' or those ordered by him from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards in force. .2 Provide confirmation of testing. ' 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FANS - GENERAL , .1 Capacity: flow rate, static pressure, bhp, efficiency, revolutions per minute, power, model, size, sound power data and as indicated on schedule. .2 Fans: statically and dynamically balanced, constructed in conformity with AMCA 99. OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 87 Section 15831 January 12, 1998 COMMERCIAL FANS OLDER ADULTS CENTRE ' .3 Sound ratings: comply with AMCA (Air Moving and Conditioning Association) 301, tested to AMCA 300. Unit shall bear AMCA certified sound rating seal. ' .4 Performance ratings: based on tests performed in accordance with ANSI/AMCA 210, and ANSI/ASHRAE 51. Unit shall bear AMCA certified rating seal. .5 Motors: .1 Sizes as specified. .6 Accessories and hardware: matched sets of V-belt drives, adjustable slide rail motor bases, belt guards, coupling guards, fan outlet dampers and vanes and as indicated. ' .7 Factory primed before assembly in colour standard to manufacturer. .8 Scroll casing drains: as indicated. ' .9 Bearing lubrication systems plus extension lubrication tubes where bearings are not easily accessible. ' .10 Vibration isolation: spring isolation vibration rails for EF-1 only. .11 Flexible connections: to Section 15820- Duct Accessories (except EF-1). 2.2 CENTRIFUGAL FANS (EF-1) ' .1 Fan wheels: .1 Welded aluminum construction. .2 Maximum operating speed of centrifugal fans not more than 50% of first critical speed. .3 Air foilbackward inclined blades, as indicated. .2 Bearings: heavy duty split pillow-block grease lubricated ball or roller self aligning type with ' oil retaining, dust excluding seals and a certified minimum rated life of 100,000 h in accordance with (Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association) AFBMA L-10 life standard. Bearings to be rated and selected in accordance with AFBMA 9 and AFBMA 11. ' .3 Housings: .1 Volute with inlet cones: fabricated steel for wheels 300 mm or greater, steel or aluminum, for smaller wheels, braced, and with welded supports. .2 Provide latched airtight access doors with handles. .4 Acceptable material: Buffalo, New York Blower, Sheldons, Delhi. 2.3 CABINET FANS -GENERAL PURPOSE (EF-2& RF-1) ' .1 Fan characteristics and construction: as centrifugal fans. .2 Single or multiple wheel with DWDI centrifugal fans in factory fabricated casing complete with vibration isolators, motor, V-belt drive or direct drive as indicated. .3 Fabricate casing of zinc coated or phosphate treated steel. Provide removable panels for ' access to interior. Uncoated, steel parts shall be painted over with corrosion resistant paint to Page 88 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 January 12, 1998 Section 15831 ' OLDER ADULTS CENTRE COMMERCIAL FANS CGSB 1-GP-181 M. Finish over prime coat, with rust resistant enamel. Internally line cabinet ' with 50 mm thick rigid acoustic insulation, pinned and cemented. .4 Acceptable material: Delhi, Greenheck, Sheldons. ' 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FAN INSTALLATION .1 Install fans as indicated, complete with resilient mountings, flexible electrical leads and ' flexible connections in accordance with Section 15820 - Duct Accessories. .2 Flexible connections shall not be in tension during running (do not install on EF-1). ' .3 Provide sheaves and belts required for final air balance. .4 Bearings and extension tubes to be easily accessible. ' .5 Access doors and access panels to be easily accessible. END " �►««.« . o t OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 89 Section 15832 January 12, 1998 ' DOMESTIC FANS OLDER ADULTS CENTRE 15832 DOMESTIC FANS 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES t .1 AMCA 201-1990, AMCA Fan Application Manual - Fans and Systems. .2 ANSI/AMCA 210-85, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating. .3 AMCA 301-1990, Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data. .4 AMCA 300-85 Rev. 87, Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans. .5 AMCA 302-73, Application of Sone Ratings for Non-Ducted Air Moving Devices. ' .6 AMCA 303-79, Application of Sound Power Level Ratings for Fans. .7 ANSI/ASHRAE 51-1985, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA , .1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01005 - General. Requirements. ' 1.3 MAINTENANCE DATA .1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01005 - General Requirements. 1.4 CERTIFICATION OF RATINGS .1 Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by him from independent testing agency signifying adherence ' to codes and standards. 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FANS GENERAL .1 Standard of rating: .1 AMCA 201 for fan application. .2 AMCA 302 for application of sone loudness ratings for non-ducted air moving devices. .2 Maximum loudness: 5 sones. 2.2 WALL AND CEILING DISCHARGE FANS , .1 Centrifugal direct drive, with plug-in type electric motor suitable for ceiling installation, zinc coated rectangular metal housing. .2 Sizes and capacity: as indicated on drawing schedule. .3 Toggle switch operated complete with integral electrical outlet box. .4 Duct outlet with integral backdraft damper. .5 Roof jack complete with spring loaded backdraft damper with neoprene gasket. .6 Silver anodized aluminum grille. .7 Acceptable material: Nutone. 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Page 90 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 ' January 12, 1998 Section 15851 ' OLDER ADULTS CENTRE LOUVRES, INTAKES & VENTS 15851 LOUVRES, INTAKES &VENTS ' 1 GENERAL .1 ANSI/NFPA 96-1991, Vapour Removal from Cooking Equipment. .2 ASTM E90-90, Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. , 1.1 PRODUCT DATA: .1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 01005 - General Requirements. ' .2 Indicate the following .1 Pressure drop. .2 Face area. .3 Free area. .4 Colour. ' 1.2 CERTIFICATION OF RATINGS: .1 Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by him.from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards. , 1.3 TEST REPORTS: .1 Submit certified data from independent laboratory substantiating acoustic and aerodynamic performance to ASTM E90. 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GOOSENECK HOODS: .1 Thickness: to SMACNA. .1 Kitchen: to ANSI/NFPA 96. .2 Elsewhere: to SMACNA. .2 Fabrication: to and SMACNA. .3 Joints: to SMACNA or proprietary manufactured duct joint. Proprietary manufactured flanged duct joint shall be considered to be a class A seal. .4 Acceptable material: Ductmate Canada Ltd., Exanno Nexus ' 2.2 FIXED LOUVRES -ALUMINUM ( L1 1 .1 Construction: welded with exposed joints ground flush and smooth. ' .2 Material: extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T5. .3 Blade: stormproof pattern with centre watershed in blade, reinforcing bosses and maximum blade length of 1500 mm. .4 Frame, head, sill and jamb: 100 mm deep one piece extruded aluminum, minimum 3 mm thick with approved caulking slot, integral to unit. .5 Mullions: at 1500 mm maximum centres. .6 Fastenings: stainless steel (Society of Automotive Engineers) SAE-194-8F with SAE-194-SFB nuts and resilient neoprene washers between aluminum and head of bolt, or between nut, ss washer and aluminum body. OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 91 ' Section 15851 January 12, 1998 LOUVRES, INTAKES & VENTS OLDER ADULTS CENTRE .7 Screen: 19 mm intake mesh, 2 mm dia. wire aluminum birdscreen on inside face of louvres in formed U-frame. .8 Finish: anodized. Colour: to Architects approval. .9 Acceptable material: Airolite Co., Alumavent Ind. Ltd., Construction Specialities Ltd., T.A. Morrison "Tamco" Series 2000. ' 3 EXECUTION 1 3.1 INSTALLATION: .1 In accordance with manufacturers and SMACNA recommendations. .2 Reinforce and brace air vents, intakes and goosenecks to withstand local wind speeds as indicated. .3 Anchor securely into opening. Seal with caulking all around to ensure weather tightness. ' .,r+r+►«*« END * « +rM 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ' Page 92 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 January 12, 1998 Section 15852 OLDER ADULTS CENTRE GRILLES, REGISTERS & DIFFUSERS 15852 GRILLES, REGISTERS & DIFFUSERS 1 GENERAI 1.1 RELATED WORK .1 Door Grilles: See Schedule on Drawings. ' 1.2 PRODUCT DATA .1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 01005 - General Requirements. ' .2 Indicate the following: .1 Capacity. .2 Throw and terminal velocity. .3 Noise criteria. , .4 Pressure drop. .5 Neck velocity. .6 Colour. 1.3 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS .1 Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01005 - General Requirements. , .2 Include: .1 Keys for volume control adjustment. .2 Keys for air flow pattern adjustment. 1.4 MANUFACTURED ITEMS ' .1 Grilles, registers and diffusers of same generic type to be product of one manufacturer. 1.5 CERTIFICATION OF RATINGS , .1 Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by him from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and ' standards. 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL .1 To meet capacity, pressure drop, terminal velocity, throw, noise level, neck velocity as ' indicated. .2 Frames: .1 Full perimeter gaskets. .2 Plaster frames where set into plaster or gypsum board and as specified. .3 Concealed fasteners. .3 Concealed operators. OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 93 ' ' Section 15852 January 12, 1998 GRILLES, REGISTERS & DIFFUSERS OLDER ADULTS CENTRE ' .4 Colour: See schedules on drawing. .5 Acceptable material: Krueger; E.H. Price Ltd.; Nailor. 2.2 SUPPLY GRILLES AND REGISTERS .1 Type SB; aluminum, 25 mm border, double deflection with airfoil shape, vertical face and horizontal rear bars. Finish: White. Model: See drawing schedule. ' 2.3 RETURN AND EXHAUST GRILLES AND REGISTERS .1 General: with opposed blade dampers, concealed manual operator and gaskets. .2 Type RB; steel, 19 mm border, egg crate type face bars. Finish: White. Model: See drawing schedule. .3 Type RC; steel, egg crate type face bars. Finish: White. Model: See drawing schedule 2.4 DIFFUSERS .1 General: flow straightening devices and gaskets. .2 Type DB; steel, square type, having fixed pattern, lay-in or surface mounted. Finish: White. ' Model: See drawing schedule. 3 EXECUTION ' 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions. .2 Install with oval head stainless steel screws in countersunk holes where fastenings are visible. «««««« END «««««« Page 94 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 January 12, 1998 Section 15861 ' OLDER ADULTS CENTRE FILTERS & FILTER GAUGES 15861 FILTERS & FILTER GAUGES , 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES ' .1 ASHRAE 52-76, "Method of Testing Air Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter". .2 ULC C710-1980, "Grease Extractors for Exhaust Ducts". .3 CAN4-S111-M80, "Fire Tests for Air Filter Units". .4 ANSI/NFPA 96-1991, Vapour Removal from Cooking Equipment. ' .5 CAN/CGSB-115.10-M90, Disposable Air Filters for Removal of Particulate Matter from Ventilating Systems. .6 CAN/CGSB-1 15.1 1-M85, Filters, Air, High Efficiency, Disposable, Bag Type (Reaffirmed April 1985). .7 CAN/CGSB-115.12-M85, Filters, Air, Medium Efficiency, Disposable, Bag Type (Reaffirmed April 1985) .8 CAN/CGSB-115.14-M91, High Efficiency Cartridge Type Supported Air Filters for Removal of , Particulate Matter from Ventilating Systems 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA .1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01005 - General Requirements. 1.3 MAINTENANCE DATA , .1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01005 - General Requirements. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS .1 Furnish list of individual manufacturer's recommended spare parts for equipment such as , frames and filters, addresses of suppliers, list of specialized tools necessary for adjusting, repairing or replacing for inclusion in operating manual. 1.5 CERTIFICATION OF RATINGS .1 Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards. 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL , .1 Media: suitable for air at 100% RH and air temperatures between minus 40 and 500C. .2 Number of units, size and thickness of panels, overall dimensions of filter bank, configuration and capacities: as indicated. .3 Pressure drop when clean and dirty, sizes and thickness: as indicated on schedule. , OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 95 Section 15861 January 12, 1998 FILTERS & FILTER GAUGES OLDER ADULTS CENTRE 2.2 ACCESSORIES .1 Holding frames: permanent "T" section or channel section construction of galvanized steel. I .2 Seals: to ensure leak proof operation. .3 Blank-off plates: as required, to fit all openings and of same material as holding frames. .4 Access and servicing: through doors/panels on each side. ' 2.3 FIBROUS GLASS PANEL FILTERS .1 Disposable fibrous glass media: to CAN/CGSB- 115.10 with adhesive. .2 Performance: minimum average synthetic dust weight arrestance to ASHRAE 52. .3 Fire rated: to CAN4-S111. .4 Nominal thickness: 50 mm. .5 Acceptable material: Farr 30/30. 2.4 GREASE FILTERS .1 Media: washable, 50 mm thick: to ULC C710, NSF No. 2, and ANSI/NFPA 96. .2 Holding frame: 1 mm thick stainless steel V or inclined as indicated. 1 .3 Stainless steel blank-off plates. ' .4 Individual, removable drip trays with handles. 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION GENERAL .1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and with adequate space for access, maintenance and replacement. ' 3.2 REPLACEMENT MEDIA .1 Replace all media with new upon acceptance. ' .2 Filter media to be new and clean, at time of acceptance. «w«.. End �,►..« ' Page 96 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 January 12, 1998 Section 15950 ' OLDER ADULTS CENTRE TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING (TAB) 15950 TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING (TAB) 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL , .1 TAB means to test, adjust and balance to perform in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents and to do all other work as specified in this section. 1.2 QUALIFICATIONS OF TAB PERSONNEL .1 Names of all personnel proposed to perform TAB to be submitted to and approved by ' Consultant within 30 days of award of contract. .2 Provide documentation confirming qualifications, successful experience. 1.3 PURPOSE OF TAB .1 Test to verify proper and safe operation, determine actual point of performance, evaluate qualitative and quantitative performance of equipment, systems and controls at design, average and low loads using actual or simulated loads .2 Adjust and regulate equipment and systems so as to meet specified performance requirements and to achieve specified interaction with all other related systems under all normal and emergency loads and operating conditions. .3 Balance systems and equipment to regulate flow rates to match load requirements over full operating ranges. 1.4 EXCEPTIONS .1 TAB of systems and equipment regulated by codes, standards to be to satisfaction of ' authority having jurisdiction. 1.5 CO-ORDINATION .1 Schedule time required for TAB (including repairs, re-testing) into project construction and completion schedule so as to ensure completion before acceptance of project. .2 Do TAB of each system independently and subsequently, where interlocked with other systems, in unison with those systems. 1.6 PRE-TAB REVIEW .1 Review contract documents before project construction is started and confirm in writing to Consultant adequacy of provisions for TAB and all other aspects of design and installation pertinent to success of TAB. .2 Review specified standards and report to Consultant in writing all proposed procedures which vary from standard. .3 During construction, co-ordinate location and installation of all TAB devices, equipment, ' accessories, measurement ports and fittings. OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 97 Section 15950 January 12, 1998 TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING (TAB) OLDER ADULTS CENTRE 1.7 START-UP .1 Follow start-up procedures as recommended by equipment manufacturer unless specified otherwise. .2 Follow special start-up procedures specified elsewhere in Division 15. 1.8 OPERATION OF SYSTEMS DURING TAB .1 Operate systems for length of time required for TAB and as required by Consultant for verification of TAB reports. 1.9 START OF TAB .1 Notify Consultant 7 days prior to start of TAB. .2 Start TAB only when building is essentially completed, including: .1 Installation of ceilings, doors, windows, other construction affecting TAB. .2 Application of weatherstripping, sealing, caulking. .3 All pressure, leakage, other tests specified elsewhere Division 15. ' .4 All provisions for TAB installed and operational. .5 Start-up, verification for proper, normal and safe operation of all mechanical and associated electrical and control systems affecting TAB including but not limited to: .1 Proper thermal overload protection in place for electrical equipment. 1 .2 Air systems: .1 Filters in place, clean. .2 Duct systems clean. ' .3 Ducts, air shafts, ceiling plenums are airtight to within specified tolerances. .4 Correct fan rotation. .5 Fire, smoke, volume control dampers installed and open. ' .6 Coil fins combed, clean. .7 Access doors, installed, closed. .8 All outlets installed, volume control dampers open. .3 Liquid systems: 1 .1 Flushed, filled, vented. .2 Correct pump rotation. .3 Strainers in place, baskets clean. .4 Isolating and balancing valves installed, open. .5 Calibrated balancing valves installed, at factory settings. .6 Chemical treatment systems complete, operational. ' 1.10 APPLICATION TOLERANCES .1 Do TAB to following tolerances of design values: .1 HVAC systems: plus 5%, minus 5%. .2 Hydronic systems: plus or minus 10%. .3 Exhaust systems: plus or minus 5%. 1.11 ACCURACY TOLERANCES ' .1 Measured values to be accurate to within plus or minus 2% of actual values. ' Page 98 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 January 12, 1998 Section 15950 ' OLDER ADULTS CENTRE TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING (TAB) 1.12 INSTRUMENTS , .1 Prior to TAB, submit to Consultant list of instruments to be used together with serial numbers. .2 Calibrate in accordance with requirements of most stringent of referenced standard for either applicable system or HVAC system. .3 Calibrate within 3 months of TAB. Provide certificate of calibration to Consultant. , 1.13 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit, prior to commencement of TAB: , .1 Proposed methodology and procedures for performing TAB if different from referenced standard. 1.14 PRELIMINARY TAB REPORT .1 Submit for checking and approval of Consultant, prior to submission of formal TAB report, ' sample of rough TAB sheets. Include: .1 Details of instruments used. .2 Details of TAB procedures employed. , .3 Calculations procedures. .4 Summaries. 1.15 TAB REPORT t .1 Format to be in accordance with referenced standard. .2 TAB report to show all results in Imperial units and to include: ' .1 Project record drawings. .2 System schematics. .3 Submit 6 copies of TAB Report to Consultant for verification and approval, in English in D-ring binders, complete with index tabs. 1.16 VERIFICATION .1 All reported results subject to verification by Consultant. ' .2 Provide manpower and instrumentation to verify 50% of all reported results. .3 Number and location of verified results to be at discretion ofConsultant. , .4 Bear costs to repeat TAB as required to satisfaction of Consultant. 1.17 SETTINGS I .1 After TAB is completed to satisfaction of Consultant, replace drive guards, close all access doors, lock all devices in set positions, ensure sensors are at required settings. .2 Permanently mark all settings to allow restoration at any time during life of facility. Markings not to be eradicated or covered in any way. ' OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 99 ' Section 15950 January 12, 1998 TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING (TAB) OLDER ADULTS CENTRE 1.18 COMPLETION OF TAB .1 TAB to be considered complete only when final TAB Report received and approved by Consultant. 1.19 AIR SYSTEMS .1 Standard: TAB to be to most stringent of TAB standards of AABC or NEBB. ' .2 Do TAB of all systems, equipment, components, controls specified in Division 15 and shown on drawings. .3 Qualifications: personnel performing TAB to be qualified to standards of AABC or NEBB. ' .4 Quality assurance: Perform TAB under direction of supervisor qualified to standards of AABC or NEBB. .5 Measurements: to include, but not limited to, following as appropriate for systems, equipment, components, controls: air velocity, static pressure, flow rate, pressure drop (or loss), temperatures (dry bulb, wet bulb, dewpoint), duct cross-sectional area, RPM, electrical power, voltage, amperage. .6 Locations of equipment measurements: To include, but not be limited to, following as 1 appropriate: .1 Inlet and outlet of each damper, filter, coil, humidifier, fan, other equipment causing changes in conditions. .2 At each controller, controlled device. .7 Locations of systems measurements to include, but not be limited to, following as appropriate: Each main duct, main branch, sub-branch, run-out (or grille, register or diffuser). 1.20 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS .1 Definitions: for purposes of this section, to include low pressure hot water heating. .2 Standard: TAB to be to most stringent of TAB standards of AABC or NEBB. .3 Do TAB of all systems, equipment, components, controls specified in Division 15. .4 Qualifications: personnel performing TAB to be qualified to standards of AABC or'NEBB. .5 Quality assurance: perform TAB under direction of supervisor qualified to standards of AABC or NEBB. .6 Measurements: to include, but not limited to, following as appropriate for systems, equipment, components, controls: Flow rate, static pressure, pressure drop (or loss), temperature, specific gravity, density, RPM, electrical power voltage, amperage. .7 Locations of equipment measurement: To include, but not be limited to, following as appropriate: .1 Inlet and outlet of each heat exchanger (primary and secondary sides), pump, PRV, ' control valve, other equipment causing changes in conditions. .2 At each controller, controlled device. Page 100 BOWMANVILLE OTS 97119 January 12, 1998 Section 15950 , OLDER ADULTS CENTRE TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING (TAB) .8 Locations of systems measurements to include, but not be limited to, following as appropriate: , Supply and return of each primary and secondary loop (main, main branch, branch, sub-branch of all hydronic systems, inlet connection of make-up water. 1.21 OTHER SYSTEMS .1 Plumbing systems: ' .1 TAB procedures: .1 Flush valves: adjust to suit project pressure conditions. .2 Pumped storm water and elevator sump pump systems: test for proper operation at ' all possible flow rates. .3 Pressure reducing valves. ...•. End .«..« OTS 97119 BOWMANVILLE Page 101 January 12, 1998 Section 16010 ' OLDER ADULT CENTRE ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1 GENERAL .1 Conform to the requirements of Division 1. .2 This section covers items common to Sections of Division 16. This , section supplements requirements of Division 1. 1.1 CODES AND STANDARDS .1 Do complete installation in accordance with Ontario Hydro Electrical Safety Code, 21st Edition, based upon CSA C22.1-1994 except where ' specified otherwise. .2 Where drawings and/or specifications exceed Code requirements, satisfy additional requirements. 1.2 CARE, OPERATION AND START-UP .1 Instruct operating personnel in the operation, care and maintenance of equipment. 1.3 VOLTAGE RATINGS .1 Operating voltages: to CAN3-C235-83. .2 Motors, electric heating, control and distribution devices and equipment to operate satisfactorily at 60 Hz within normal operating , limits established by above standard. Equipment to operate in extreme operating conditions established in above standard without damage to equipment. 1.4 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTION .1 Submit to Electrical Inspection Department and Building Inspection Department inspection necessary number of drawings and specifications for examination and approval prior to commencement of work. .2 Pay associated fees. .3 Owner will provide drawings and specifications required by Electrical Inspection Department and Building Inspection Department at'no cost. .4 Notify Engineer of chancres required by Electrical Inspection nppartment or Building Inspection Department_nrior to making changes. , .5 Furnish Certificates of Acceptance from Electrical Inspection Department and authorities having jurisdiction on completion of work to Engineer. ' 1.5 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT .1 Provide materials and equipment in accordance with Section 01005. .2 Equipment and material to be CSA certified. Where there is no alternative to supplying component equipment which is not CSA certified, obtain special approval from Electrical Inspection ' Department for assemblies. 801 BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO Page 1 1 January 12, 1998 Section 16010 OLDER ADULT CENTRE ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .3 Factory assemble control panels and component assemblies. 1.6 ELECTRIC MOTORS, EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS .1 Supplier and installer responsibility for Division 16 is indicated on electrical drawings and related Division 15 responsibility is indicated on Mechanical drawings. .2 Control wiring and conduit is specified in Division 16 except for conduit, wiring and connections below 30 V which are related to 1 control systems specified in Division 15 and shown or specified on Mechanical drawings. . 1.7 FINISHES .1 Shop finish metal enclosure surfaces by application of rust resistant primer inside and outside, and at least two coats of finish enamel. .2 Clean and touch up surfaces of shop-painted equipment scratched or marred during shipment or installation, to match original paint. .3 Clean and prime exposed non-galvanized hangers, racks and fastenings to prevent rusting. 1.8 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION ' .1 Identify electrical equipment with nameplates as follows: .2 Nameplates: .1 Lamicoid 3 mm (1/8 inch) thick plastic engraving sheet, black face, white core, mechanically attached. NAMEPLATE SIZES Size 1 10 x 50 mm (3/8„x2") ,� 1 line 3 mm high letters (1/8") Size 2 12 x 70 mm (1/2 x2-3/4 ) 1 line 5 mm high letters (3/16") Size 3 12 x 70 mm (1/2x2-3/4") 2 lines 3 mm high letters (1/811) Size 4 20 x 90 mm (3/4 1lx3-1/2") 1 line 8 mm high letters (5/1611) Size 5 20 x 90 mm (3/4 11x3-1/2") 2 lines 5 mm high letters (3/1611) Size 6 25 x 100 mm (1"x4") 1 line 2 mm high letters (1/2") ' Size 7 25 x 100 mm (1"x4") 2 lines 6 mm high letters (1/411) .3 Wording on nameplates to be approved by Engineer prior to ' manufacture. .4 Allow for average of twenty-five (25) letters per nameplate. .5 Identification to be English. .6 Nameplates for junction boxes to indicate system. .7 Disconnects and contactors: indicate equipment being controlled and voltage. ' .8 Terminal cabinets and pull boxes: indictae system. 801 BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO Page 2 t January 12, 1998 Section 16010 OLDER ADULT CENTRE ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.9 WIRING IDENTIFICATION .1 Identify wiring with permanent indelible identifying markings, either numbered or coloured plastic tapes, on both ends of conductors and , cables. .2 Maintain colour coding throughout. 1.10 CONDUIT AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION .1 Colour code conduits, boxes and metallic sheathed cables. .2 Code with plastic tape or paint at points where conduit or cable enters wall, ceiling, or floor, and at 15 m (50 feet)intervals. .3 Colours: 25 mm (1 inch) wide prime colour and 20 mm (3/411) wide auxiliary colour. Prime Auxiliary Telephone green ----- ' Other communication systems green blue Fire alarm red ----- Security systems red yellow 1.11 WIRING TERMINATIONS .1 Lugs, terminals, screws used for termination of wiring to be suitable i for either copper or aluminum conductors. 1.12 EQUIPMENT AND CABLE .1 Manufacturer's labelling to be visible and legible after equipment is installed. , 1.13 WARNING SIGNS .1 As specified and to meet requirements of Electrical Inspection Department and Engineer. .2 Decal signs, minimum size 175 x 250 mm (6-3/4" X 9-3/411) . , 1.14 LOCATION OF OUTLETS .1 Locate outlets in accordance with drawings. ' .2 Do not install outlets back-to-back in wall; allow minimum 150 mm (611) horizontal clearance between boxes. .3 Change location of outlets at no extra cost or credit, providing , distance does not exceed 3 m (101 ), and information is given before installation. .4 Locate light switches on latch side of doors. , 801 BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO Page 3 , January 12, 1998 Section 16010 OLDER ADULT CENTRE ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.15 MOUNTING HEIGHTS .1 Mounting height of equipment is from finished floor to centreline of equipment unless specified or indicated otherwise. .2 If mounting height of equipment is not specified or indicated, verify before proceeding with installation. .3 Install electrical equipment at following heights unless indicated otherwise. .1 Local switches: 1400 mm (4' 7") . .2 Wall receptacles: ' .1 General: 300mm (12") . .2 In mechanical rooms: 900 mm (3' ). .3 Above top of counters or splash backs: 175 mm (7") . .4 For supply of emergency lighting equipment: 2500 mm (8' 2") . .3 Panelboards: as required by Code or as indicated. .4 Fire Alarm pull stations: 1500 mm (51 ) . .5 Fire alarm bells: 2100 mm. (71 ) . .6 Fire alarm monitor and control modules: 1500 mm. (51 ) . .7 Emergency lighting equipment: 2000 mm (6'-711) minimum. .4 Where Bull stations, switches and intercom controls are located in areas designated for barrier-free travel (wheelchair) they shall be mounted at 1200 mm 1.16 LOAD BALANCE .1 Measure phase current to panelboards with normal loads (lighting) operating at time of acceptance. Adjust branch circuit connections as required to obtain best balance of current between phases and record changes. 1.17 CONDUIT AND CABLE INSTALLATION .1 Install cables, conduits and fittings to be embedded or plastered over, neatly and close to building structure so furring can be kept ' to minimum. 1.18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ' .l Conduct and pay for following tests: .1 Voltage and current measurement at feeders to each 120/208 V panel. ' .2 Provide instruments, meters, equipment and personnel required to conduct tests during and at conclusion of project. ' .3 Submit test results for Engineer's review. Include results in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.19 CO-ORDINATION OF PROTECTIVE DEVICES .1 Ensure circuit protective devices such as overcurrent trips, relays 801 BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO Page 4 January 12, 1998 Section 16010 ' OLDER ADULT CENTRE ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIRMENTS and fuses are installed to required values and settings. ' 1.20 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Supply all materials, equipment and labour to provide a complete , operating installation as designated in this specification and as indicated on the drawings except where otherwise noted. THE END I 801 BOWNANVILLE, ONTARIO Page 5 ' January 12, 1998 Section 16105 OLDER ADULT CENTRE CONCRETE ENCASED DUCT BANKS 1 fiMEM" 1.1 RELATED WORK , .1 Electrical General Requirements: Section 16010 .2 Protection and Safety: Section 01005, General Requirements , 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PVC DUCTS .1 PVC ducts, type EB/DB TYPE 2, encased in reinforced concrete. ' 2.2 PVC DUCT FITTINGS , .1 Rigid PVC opaque solvent welded type couplings, bell end fittings, plugs, caps, adaptors as required to make complete installation. .2 Expansion joints. , .3 Rigid PVC 5° angle couplings. 2.3 CABLE PULLING EQUIPMENT ' .1 Pulling iron made of galvanized steel rods, size and shape as , indicated. .2 6 mm (1/4") stranded nylon pull rope tensile strength 5 kN (1125 lb) ' continuous throughout each duct run with 3 m (101 ) spare rope at each end. 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION GENERAL .1 Install underground duct banks including formwork. ' .2 Build duct bank on undisturbed soil or on well compacted granular fill not less than 150 mm (6") thick, compacted to 95% of maximum proctor dry density. .3 Open trench completely before ducts are laid and ensure that no obstructions will necessitate change in grade of ducts. .4 Install ducts at elevations and with slope as indicated and minimum slope of 1 to 400. .5 Install base spacers at maximum intervals of 1.5 m (51 ) levelled to grades indicated for bottom layer of ducts. ' .6 Lay PVC ducts with configuration and reinforcing as indicated with preformed interlocking, rigid plastic intermiediate spacers to 801 BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO Page 1 January 12, 1998 Section 16105 OLDER ADULT CENTRE CONCRETE ENCASED DUCT BANKS tmaintain spacing between ducts at not less than 60 mm (2-'/e") horizontally and vertically. Stagger joints in adjacent layers at least 150 mm (6") and make joints watertight. Encase duct bank with 100 mm (4") thick concrete cover. Use galvanized steel or PVC conduit for sections extending above finished grade level. .7 Make transpositions, offsets and changes in direction using 50 bend sections, do not exceed a total of 20° with duct offset. 1 .8 Use conduit to duct adapters when connecting to conduits. .9 Cut, ream and taper end of ducts in field in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, so that duct ends are fully equal to factory-made ends. .10 Allow concrete to attain 50% of its specified strength before backfilling. .11 Use anchors, ties and trench jacks as required to secure ducts and prevent moving during placing of concrete. Tie ducts to spacers with twine or other non-metallic material. Remove weights or wood braces before concrete has set and fill voids. .12 Clean ducts before laying. Cap ends of ducts during construction and ' after installation to prevent entrance of foreign materials. .13 Immediately after placing of concrete, pull through each duct a steel mandrel, followed by stiff bristle brush to remove sand, earth and ' other foreign matter. Avoid disturbing or damaging ducts where concrete has not set completely. Pull stiff bristle brush through each duct immediately before pulling-in cables. 3.2 INSPECTIONS ' .1 Advise Engineer, Ontario Hydro Inspection and Supply Utility so that the may inspect ducts prior to placing of concrete and clean-out. THE END 801 BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO Page 2 January 12, 1998 Section 16106 , OLDER ADULT CENTRE INSTALLATION OF CABLES IN TRENCRES/DUCT$ 1 4EN88I+ 1.1 RELATED WORK .1 Concrete Encased Duct Banks: Section 16105. 1 2 CABLE INSTALLATION IN DUCTS .1 Install cables as indicated in ducts. .2 Do not pull spliced cables inside ducts. ' .3 Install multiple cables in duct simultaneously. .4 Use CSA approved lubricants of type compatible with cable jacket to reduce pulling tension. .5 After installation of cables, seal duct ends with duct sealing ' compound. 2.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL , .1 Perform tests in accordance with Section 16010 - Electrical General Requirements. ' .2 Perform tests using qualified personnel. Provide necessary instruments and equipment. .3 Check phase rotation and identify each phase conductor of each ' feeder. .4 Check each feeder for continuity, short circuits and grounds. Ensure ' resistance to ground of circuits is not less than 50 megohms. .5 Remove and replace entire length of cable if cable fails to meet any of test criteria. END ********** 801 BOWNANVILLE, ONTARIO Page 1 ' January 12, 1998 Section 16111 ' OLDER ADULT CENTRE CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND CONDUIT 1 9ZHE$8L 1.1 RELATED WORK .1 Conduit and Cable Installation: Section 01005, Electrical General Requirements. 2 PRODUCTS .1 Drawings do not indicate all conduit runs. Those indicated are in , diagrammatic form only. 2.1 CONDUITS .1 Rigid galvanized steel threaded conduit. .2 Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): with couplings. ' .3 Rigid PVC conduit. .4 Flexible aluminum conduit and liquid-tight flexible metal conduit. ' 2.2 CONDUIT FASTENINGS .1 One hole malleable iron straps to secure surface conduits 50 mm (210) and smaller. Two hole steel straps for conduits larger than 50 mm .2 Beam clamps to secure conduits to exposed steel work. .3 Channel type supports for two or more conduits. , .4 Threaded rods to support suspended channels. 2.3 CONDUIT FITTINGS .1 Fittings: manufactured for use with conduit specified. Coating: same as conduit. ' .2 Factory "ells" where 900 bends are required for 25 mm (1") and larger conduits. 3 EXECUTION .1 Provide and install polypropylene cord in all conduits not containing conductors, unless otherwise indicated. 801 BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO Page 1 , ' January 12, 1998 Section 16111 OLDER ADULT CENTRE CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND CONDUIT ' 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Install conduits to conserve headroom in exposed locations and cause ' minimum interference in spaces through which they pass. .2 conceal conduits in finished areas having wall and/or ceiling cavities. .3 Use rigid galvanized steel threaded conduit where subject to mechanical damage or outdoors. i .4 Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT) except where embedded in concrete or subject to undue moisture or mechanical damage. ' .5 Use rigid PVC conduit in concrete, below grade or outdoors where not subject to mechanical damage. .6 Use flexible metal conduit for connection to motors in dry areas, connection to recessed incandescent fixtures, or connection to surface or recessed fluorescent fixtures where strain relief is required. .7 Use liquid-tight flexible metal conduit for connection to motors or vibrating equipment in damp or wet locations. .8 Bend conduit cold. Replace conduit if kinked or flattened more than 1/10th of its original diameter. .9 Mechanically bend steel conduit over 19 mm dia. (3/4") .10 Field threads on rigid conduit must be of sufficient length to draw ' conduits up tight. .11 Install separate bonding conductor in rigid threaded conduit or EMT where subject to mechanical damage. 3.2 SURFACE CONDUITS .1 Run parallel or perpendicular to building lines. .2 Group conduits wherever possible on surface channels. .3 Do not pass conduits through structural members except as indicated. .4 Do not locate conduits less than 75 mm (3 in) parallel to steam or ' hot water lines with minimum of 25 mm (1")at crossovers. 801 BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO Page 2 January 12, 1998 Section 16111 ' OLDER ADULT CENTRE CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND CONDUIT 3.3 CONDUITS IN CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ' .1 Locate to suit reinforcing steel. Install in centre one third of 1 slab. .2 Protect conduits from damage where they stub out of concrete. .3 Install sleeves where conduits pass through slab or wall. , ********** THE END i 1 i 1 i i 1 801 BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO Page 3 , January 12, 1998 Section 16122 , OLDER ADULT CENTRE WIRES AND CABLES 0-1000 V 1 4ENEB8T+ , 1.1 RELATED WORK ' .1 Codes and Standards: Section 16010, Electrical General Requirements. 2 PRODUCTS , 2.1 BUILDING WIRES .1 Conductors: stranded for 10 AWG and larger. Minimum size: 12 AWG ' unless otherwise specified. .2 Copper conductors 90° insulation: size as indicated, with 600 V insulation of chemically cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene material type RW90 - XLPE. .3 Copper conductors 900 insulation: size as indicated, with 600V , insulation of nylon jacketed thermoplastic-insulated material type T90-NYLON. .4 Copper conductors, 75° insulation: size as indicated, with 600 V thermoplastic insulation type TW75. 2.2 ARMOURED CABLES .1 Conductors: insulated, copper, size as indicated. .2 Type: AC90 or ACWU90. .3 Armour: interlocking type fabricated from aluminum strip. , 2.3 ALUMINUM SHEATHED CABLE .1 Conductors: copper, size as indicated. ' .2 Insulation: type RA90 rated 1000 V. .3 Sheath: aluminum applied to form continuous sheath. .4 Outer jacket of pvc applied over sheath for direct burial or wet locations. .5 Fastenings for aluminum sheathed cable: .1 One hole malleable iron straps to secure surface cables 25 mm (111) , and smaller. Two hole steel straps for cables larger than 25 mm (1") r e 1 BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO Pa ' 801 5 ' January 12, 1998 Section 16122 OLDER ADULT CENTRE WIRES AND CABLES 0-1000 V 2.4 CONTROL CABLES .1 Type LVT: 2 soft annealed copper conductors, sized as indicated, with thermoplastic insulation, outer covering of thermoplastic jacket. ' 2.5 FIRE ALARM CABLES .1 Conductors: copper, minimum 16 AWG ' .2 Type FAS 105: fire alarm and signal cable .3 Type RW90 or T90: building wire .4 Class 2 cable (such as LVT) not permitted. ' .5 Insulation: minimum 300 V. 3 EBECUTION ' 3.1 INSTALLATION OF BUILDINGi WIRES .1 Install wiring as follows: ' .1 In conduit systems in accordance with Section 16111, . 3.2 INSTALLATION OF ALUMINUM SHEATHED CABLE .1 Group cables wherever possible on channels. THE END ******a*** 1 ' 801 BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO Page 2 January 12, 1998 Section 16132 ' OLDER ADULT CENTRE OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS 1 aanT. , 1.1 RELATED WORK .1 Wiring Devices: Section 16141. 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.1 OUTLET AND CONDUIT BOXES GENERAL .1 Size boxes in accordance with CSA C22.1. ' .2 102 mm (4") square or larger outlet boxes as required for special devices. ' .3 Gang boxes where wiring devices are grouped. .4 Blank cover plates for boxes without wiring devices. ' .5 Combination boxes with barriers where outlets for more than one system are grouped. ' 2.2 SHEET STEEL OUTLET BOXES .1 Electro-galvanized steel single and multi gang flush device boxes for flush installation, minimum size 76 x 50 x 38 mm or as indicated. 102 mm (411) square outlet boxes when more than one conduit enters one , side with extension and plaster rings as required. .2 102 mm (4") square or octagonal outlet boxes for lighting fixture outlets. ' .3 102 mm (411) square outlet boxes with extension and plaster rings for flush mounting devices in finished walls. ' 2.3 MASONRY BOXES .1 Electro-galvanized steel masonry single and multi gang boxes for , devices flush mounted in exposed block walls. 2.4 CONCRETE BOXES ' .1 Electro-galvanized sheet steel concrete type boxes for flush mount in concrete with matching extension and plaster rings as required. 2.5 CONDUIT BOXES .1 Cast FS or FD aluminum boxes with factory-threaded hubs and mounting feet for surface wiring of switches and receptacles. 801 BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO Page 1 ' 1 ' January 12, 1998 Section 16132 OLDER ADULT CENTRE OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS ' 2.6 FITTINGS - GENERAL ' .1 Bushing and connectors with nylon insulated throats. .2 Knock-out fillers to prevent entry of debris. ' .3 Conduit outlet bodies for conduit up to 32 mm (1 h") and pull boxes for larger conduits. .4 Double locknuts and insulated bushings on sheet metal boxes. 3 EXECUTION ' 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Support boxes independently of connecting conduits. .2 Fill boxes with paper, sponges or foam or similar approved material to prevent entry- of debris during construction. Remove upon completion of work. .3 For flush installations mount outlets flush with finished wall using plaster rings to permit wall finish to come within 6 mm of opening. ' .4 Surface mounted boxes to be cast FS or FD aluminum. * ***sr**** THE END *x******** 1 801 BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO Page 2 January 12, 1998 Section 16141 , OLDER ADULT CENTRE WIRING DEVICES 1 GENERAL 1.1 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA .1 Supmit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01005. 2 gRJQDM i 2.1 SWITCHES , .1 20A, 120 V, single pole, switches. .2 20A, 120 V, three-way switches. , .3 Manually-operated general purpose ac switches with following features: , .1 Terminal holes approved for No. 10 AWG wire. .2 Silver alloy contacts. .3 Urea or melamine molding for parts subject to carbon tracking. .4 Suitable for back and side wiring. , .5 Ivory toggle. .6 Specification grade. .4 Toggle operated fully rated for tungsten filament and fluorescent ' lamps, and up to 80% of rated capacity of motor loads. .5 Switches of one manufacturer throughout project. , 2.2 RECEPTACLES .1 Duplex receptacles, CSA type 5-15 R, 125 V, 15 A, U ground, with ' following features: .1 Ivory urea molded housing. ' .2 Suitable for No. 10 AWG for back and side wiring. .3 Break-off links for use as split receptacles. .4 Eight back wired entrances, four side wiring screws. .5 Triple wipe contacts and rivetted grounding contacts. , .6 Specification grade. .2 Ground fault duplex receptacles; as above c/w Class 'A, ground fault , circuit interupter. .3 Other receptacles with ampacity and voltage as indicated. .4 Receptacles of one manufacturer throughout project. i 801 BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO Page 1 1 January 12, 1998 Section 16141 OLDER ADULT CENTRE WIRING DEVICES ' 2.3 SPECIAL WIRING DEVICES .1 Special wiring devices as specified on drawings. i2.4 COVER PLATES .1 Cover plates for wiring devices. .2 Cover plates from one manufacturer throughout project. .3 Stainless steel, vertically brushed, cover plates for wiring devices mounted in flush-mounted outlet box. .4 Sheet metal or cast cover plates for wiring devices mounted in ' surface-mounted FS or FD type conduit boxes. .5 Weatherproof double lift spring-loaded cast aluminum cover plates, ' complete with gaskets for duplex receptacle mounted outdoors. 3 EXECUTION ' 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Switches: .1 Install single throw switches with handle in "UP" position when switch closed. .2 Install switches in gang type outlet box when more than one switch is ' required in one location. .3 Mount toggle switches at height specified in Section 16010 - Electrical General Requirements or as indicated. .2 Receptacles: .1 Install receptacles in gang type outlet box when more than one receptacle is required in one location. .2 Mount receptacles at height specified in Section 16010 - Electrical General Requirements or as indicated. .3 Install receptacles with ground position up. ' .3 Cover plates: .1 Protect stainless steel cover plate finish with paper or plastic film until painting and other work is finished. ' .2 Install suitable common cover plates where wiring devices are ground. THE END 801 BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO Page 2 January 12, 1998 Section 16191 , OLDER ADULT CENTRE FASTENINGS AND SUPPORTS 1 S�E1iEB8L ' 1.1 RELATED WORK .1 Materials and Equipment: Section 16010 - Electrical General Requirements 2 PRODUCT ' 2.1 SUPPORT CHANNELS .1 U shape, size 41 x 41 mm, 2.5 mm thick (1 5/0" X 1 5/8" X 3/32") surface mounted or suspended. 3 EXECUTION , 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Secure equipment to hollow or solid masonry, tile and plaster , surfaces with lead anchors. .2 Secure equipment to poured concrete with expandable inserts. , .3 Support equipment, conduit or cables using clips, spring loaded bolts, cable clamps designed as accesories to basic channel members. , .4 Fasten exposed conduit or cables to building construction or support system using straps. ' .1 One-hole malleable iron straps to secure surface conduits and cables 50 mm (2") and smaller. .2 Two-hole steel straps for conduit and cables larger than 50 mm (2") . .3 Beam clamps to secure conduit to exposed steel work. .5 Suspended support systems. .1 Support individual cable or conduit runs with 6 mm ('h") dia threaded rods and spring clips. .2 Support 2 or more cables or conduits on channels supported by 6 mm (h") dia threaded rod hangers where direct fastening to building construction is impractical. , .6 For surface mounting of two or more conduits use channels. .7 Provide metal brackets, frames, hangers, clamps and related types of ' support structures where indicated or as required to .support conduit and cable runs. .8 Ensure adequate support for raceways and cables dropped vertically to i equipment where there is no wall support. .9 Do not use wire lashing or perforated strap to support or secure ' 801 BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO Page 1 , ' January 12, 1998 Section 16191 OLDER ADULT CENTRE FASTENINGS AND SUPPORTS ' raceways or cables. .10 Do not use supports or equipment installed for other trades for conduit or cable support except with permission of other trade and approval of Engineer. ' .il Install fastenings and supports as required for each type of equipment cables and conduits, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation recommendations. THE END ********** r 801 $OWMANVILLE, ONTARIO Page 2 January 12, 1998 Section 16402 , OLDER ADULT CENTRE UNDERGROUND SERVICE 1 DZURAL , .1 Co-ordination with power supply authority. 2 PRODUCTS .1 Co-ordinate and meet requirements of power supply authority. Ensure , availability of power when required. 2.1 MATERIALS ' .1 Underground ducts: to Section 16105 - Concrete Encased Duct Banks, rigid type EB/DB2, size as indicated. .2 Rigid PVC conduit and fittings: to Section 16111 - Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings. .3 Conductors: copper, type RW90 - XLPE, to Section 16122, size and number of conductors as indicated. 3 EXECUTION , 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Install cables in ducts in accordance with Section 16106 Installation of Cables in Trenches and in Ducts. .2 Allow adequate conductor length for connection to supply by power supply authority. .3 Allow adequate conductor length for connection to service equipment. ' .4 Make grounding connections in accordance with Section 16450 Grouding - Secondary. ' .5 Acceptance Test. .1 Perform tests in accordance with Section 16010 - Electrical General Requirements. ' .2 Perform additional tests if required by authority having jurisdiction. THE END 801 BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO Page 1 ' January 12, 1998 Section 16440 ' OLDER ADULT CENTRE DISCONNECT SWITCHES - FUSED AND NON FUSED 1 [SW.NA!RAT. 1.1 PRODUCT DATA , .1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 01005. 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DISCONNECT SWITCHES .1 Fusible and non-fusible disconnect switch in CSA Enclosure Type 1 or , Type 3R, size as indicated. .2 Provision for padlocking in off switch position by two locks. , .3 Mechanically interlocked door to prevent opening when handle in "ON" position. , .4 Fuses: size as ,indicated, to Section 16478 - Fuses - Low Voltage. .5 Fuseholders: suitable without adaptors, for type and size of fuse , indicated. .6 Quick-make, quick-break action. , .7 ON-OFF switch position indication on switch enclosure cover. 2.2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION .1 Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 16010 - Electrical General Requirements. ' .2 Indicate name of load controlled on size 4 nameplate. 3 EXECUTION ' 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Install disconnect switches complete with fuses. ********** THE END 801 BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO Page 1 ' January 12, 1998 Section 16450 OLDER ADULT CENTRE GROUNDING - SECONDARY 1 gFNFR�T. ' 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT .1 System and circuit, equipment, grounding conductors, bare stranded copper, un-tinned, soft annealed, un-armoured, size as indicated. .2 Insulated grounding conductors: green, type TW75 or RW90 in conduit ' or above grade. .3 Insulated grounding conductors: green, type RWU90 below grade. .4 Non-corroding accessories necessary for grounding system, type, size, material as indicated, including but not necessarily limited to: .1 Grounding and bonding bushings. 42 Protective type clamps. .3 Bolted type conductor connectors. , .4 Thermit welded type conductor connectors. .5 Bonding jumpers, straps. .6 Pressure wire connectors. 3 ESQ , 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL , .1 Install complete permanent, continuous, system and circuit, equipment, grounding systems including, electrodes, conductors, ' connectors, accessories, as indicated, to conform to requirements of Engineer, and local authority having jurisdiction over installation. Where EMT is used, run ground wire in conduit. .2 Install connectors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. ' .3 Protect exposed grounding conductors from mechanical injury. .4 Use mechanical connectors for grounding connections to equipment , provided with lugs. .5 Soldered joints not permitted. , .6 Install bonding wire for flexible conduit, connected at one end to , grounding bushing, solderless lug, clamp or cup washer and screw. Neatly cleat bonding wire to exterior of flexible conduit. .7 Connect building structural steel and metal siding to ground by welding copper to steel. 801 BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO Page 1 ' t January 12, 1998 Section 16450 OLDER ADULT CENTRE GROUNDING - SECONDARY ' .8 Make grounding connections in radial configuration only, with connections terminating at single grounding point. Avoid loop connections. ' 3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING .1 Install grounding connections to typical equipment included in, but not necessarily limited to following list. Service equipment, transformers, switchgear, duct systems, frames of motors, starters, control panels, building steel work and outdoor lighting. ' 3.3 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS .1 Install grounding connections for telephone communication systems as ' follows: .1 Telephones: make telephone grounding system in accordance with telephone company's requirements. 3.4 INSTALLATION ' .1 Bond non-current carrying metal parts together with suitable gauge copper equipotential conductor. Run conductor from separate lug or service neutral bar to, but not necessarily limited to, following metallic indoor systems and equipment: ' .1 Hot water heating system. .2 Main water pipe. .3 Gas line. ' 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 Perform tests in accordance with Section 16010 - Electrical General Requirements. .2 Perform ground continuity and resistance tests using method appropriate to site conditions and to approval of Engineer and local authority having jurisdiction over installation. .3 Perform tests before energizing electrical system. THE END ********** 801 SOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO Page 2 January 12, 1998 Section 16471 I OLDER ADULT CENTRE PANELBOARDS BREAKER TYPE 1 1.1 SHOP DRAWINGS , .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01005. .2 Drawings to include electrical detail of panel, branch breaker type, ' quantity, ampacity and enclosure dimension. 1.2 PLANT ASSENBLY .1 Install circuit breakers in panelboards before shipment. 2 PRODUCTS , 2.1 PANELSOARDS .1 Panelboards: product of one manufacturer. , .2 120/208 V panelboards: bus and breakers rated for 10,000 A (symmetrical) interrupting capacity or as indicated. , .3 Sequence phase bussing with odd numbered breakers on left and even on right, with each breaker identified by permanent number , identification as to circuit number and phase. .4 Panelboards: mains, number of circuits, and number and size of ' branch circuit breakers as indicated. .5 Two keys for each panelboard and key panelboards alike. .6 Aluminum bus with neutral of same ampere rating as mains. ' .7 Mains: suitable for bolt-on breakers; plug in breakers not acceptable. ' .8 Trim and door finish: baked grey enamel. 2.2 BREAKERS .1 Breakers: to Section 16477 - Moulded Case Circuit Breakers. ' .2 Breakers with thermal and magnetic tripping in panelboards except as indicated otherwise. .3 Lock-on devices for fire alarm, security, emergency lighting, door , supervisory, and telephone circuits. 801 BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO Page 1 ' ' January 12, 1998 Section 16471 OLDER ADULT CENTRE PANELBOARDS BREAKER TYPE ' 2.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION ' .1 Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 16010 - Electrical General Requirements. .2 Nameplate for each panelboard size 4 engraved as indicated. ' .3 Nameplate for each circuit in distribution panelboards size 2 engraved as indicated. ' .4 Complete circuit directory with typewritten legend showing location and load of each circuit. ' 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Locate panelboards as indicated and mount securely, plumb, true and square, to adjoining surfaces. .2 Mount panelboards to height specified in Section 16010 - Electrical General Requirements or as indicated. .3 Connect loads to circuits. .4 Connect neutral conductors to common neutral bus with respective neutral identified. THE END ********** ' Page 801 BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO 5 January 12, 1998 Section 16477 OLDER ADULT CENTRE MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 1 1.1 PRODUCT DATA ' .1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 01005. 2 PRODUCTS , 2.1 BREAKERS GENERAL .1 Bolt-on moulded case circuit breaker: quick-make, quick-break type, , for manual and automatic operation with temperature compensation for WC ambient. .2 Common-trip breakers: with single handle for multi-pole applications. .3 Magnetic instantaneous trip elements in circuit breakers to operate , only whe value of current reaches setting. Trip settings on breakers with adjustable trips to range from 3-8 times current rating. .4 Circuit breakers with interchangeable trips as indicated. , 2.2 THERMAL MAGNETIC BREAKERS ' .1 Moulded case circuit breaker to operate automatically by means of thermal and magnetic tripping devices to provide inverse time current ' tripping and instantaneous tripping for short circuit protection. 3 EBECUTI 3.1 INSTALLATION ' .1 Install circuit breakers as indicated. ' ********** THE END 801 BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO Page 1 , January 12, 1998 Section 16478 , OLDER ADULT CENTRE FUSES - LOW VOLTAGE 1 4ENERAL , 1.1 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA , .1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01005. .2 Submit fuse performance data characteristics for non-HRC type fuses ' for each fuse type and size above 100 A. Performance data to include: average melting time-current characteristics, I2t (for fuse ' coordination), and peak let-through current. 1.2 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS .1 Three spare fuses of each type and size installed. 1.3 DELIVERY AND STORAGE .1 Ship fuses in original containers. .2 Do not ship fuses installed in switchboard. .3 Store fuses in original containers in moisture free location. 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.1 FUSES - GENERAL .1 Fuse type references L1, L2, J1, R1 etc. have been adopted for use in this specification. .2 Fuse: product of one manufacturer. ' .3 Fuse type: J1 shall be used where possible in place of R1, R2. .4 Fuse type: J2 shall be used where possible in place of R3. .5 Fuses shall be type J1 unless otherwise indicated. , 2.2 FUSE TYPES .1 HRC-L fuses (formerly Class L) . .1 Type L1, time delay, capable of carrying 500% of its rated current for 10 s minimum. .2 Type L2, fast acting. ' .2 HRCI-J fuses (formerly Class J) . .1 Type J1, time delay, capable of carrying 500% of its rated current , for 10 s minimum. 801 BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO Page 1 , January 12, 1998 Section 16478 OLDER ADULT CENTRE FUSES - LOW VOLTAGE ' .2 Type J2, fast acting. .3 HRCI-R fuses (formerly Class R) . For UL Class RK1 fuses, peak let- through current and 12t values not to exceed limits of UL 198E-1982, table 10.2. .1 Type Rl, (UL Class RK1), time delay, capable of carrying 500% of its rated current for 10 s minimum, to meet Ul Class RK1 maximum let- through limits. ' .2 Type R2, time delay, capable of carrying 500% of its rated current for 10 s minimum. .3 Type R3, (UL Class RK1) , fast acting Class R, to meet UL Class RK1 ' maximum let-through limits. 3 EXECUTION ' 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Install fuses in-mounting devices immediately before energizing ' circuit. .2 Ensure correct fuses fitted to physically matched mounting devices. .1 Install Class R rejection clips for HRCI-R fuses. .3 Ensure correct fuses fitted to assigned electrical circuit. .4 Where UL Class RK1 fuses are specified, install warning label "Use only UL Class RK1 fuses for replacement" on equipment. THE END ********** i 801 BOWNANVILLE, ONTARIO Page 2 January 12, 1998 Section 16496 OLDER ADULT CENTRE GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERUPTERS - CLASS "A" 1 GENB$BL ' 1.1 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA , .1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01001 - Submittals. 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Components comprising ground fault protective system to be of same manufacturer. 2.2 BREAKER TYPE GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER , .1 Ground fault circuit interrupter for number of poles and amperage as ' indicated c/w test and reset facilities. 2.3 GROUND FAULT PROTECTOR UNIT .1 Self-contained with 15 A, 120 V circuit interrupter and duplex receptacle complete with: .1 Solid state ground sensing device. .2 Facility for testing and reset. 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Do not ground neutral on load side of ground fault relay. , .2 Connect supply and load wiring to equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. ' 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 Perform tests in accordance with Section 16010 - Electrical - General , Requirements. .2 Demonstrate simulated ground fault tests. ' ********** THE END 801 BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO Page 1 ' January 12, 1998 Section 16519 ' OLDER ADULT CENTRE EXIT LIGHTS 1 GENE.AaT. , 1.1 PRODUCT DATA ' .1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 01005. 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.1 EXIT LIGHTS - GENERAL .1 Housing: extruded aluminum frame, satin aluminum finish. , .2 Face and back plates: extruded aluminum. .3 Lamps: non-protruding light emitting diodes (LEDs) . , .4 Designed for 25 years of continuous operation. .5 Letters: 150 mm high (6")x 40 mm (1-9/1611) wide, red on die-cast aluminum face plate, reading EXIT. .6 Performance: conform to requirements of CAN/CSA C860-96. ' 2.2 DESIGN , .1 Wall and ceiling mounting. .2 Single and double face with die-cast face plate to remain captive for relamping. .3 Arrow: as indicated. , 2.3 MANUFACTURE .1 Acceptable manufacturer: Lumacell LER400-C860 series or approved equal. 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Install exit lights as indicated, in accordance with NBC-1985. ' .2 Connect fixtures to exit light 120 Vac and 12 Vdc (where available) circuits. ' THE END � 5 BOWMANVILLE ONTARIO Pa e 1 801 January 12, 1998 Section 16741 ' OLDER ADULT CENTRE COMPUTER AND TELEPHONE RACEWAY SYSTEM 1 GENERAT. 1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .1 Empty computer and telephone raceways system consists of outlet boxes, cover plates, conduits, sleeves, and caps and fish wires. 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIAL , .1 Conduits: suitable, to Section 16111 - Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings. .2 Fish wire: polypropylene type. 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION ' .1 Install empty raceway system, fish wire, outlet boxes, pull boxes, cover plates, conduit, sleeves and caps, miscellaneous and positioning material to constitute complete system. .2 No section of conduit to exceed 30 m (1001 ). .3 No more than two 90 degree bends between pull points or boxes. .4 Inside radius of bend in conduit shall be at least six times the , internal diameter if less than 50 mm (2") and ten times if larger than 50 mm (211) . .5 Ream and bush all conduit ends. ' ****w*w*** THE END ********** 801 BOWMANVILLE, ONTARIO Page 1 ,